Top 10 Solutions

TOP 10 SOLUTIONS
Copyright 2008, Konica Minolta Business Solutions U.S.A., Inc.

Legal Notice
This document is designed as a diagnostic tool, primarily for Konica Minolt a's
support personnel, and authorized service represent atives. Koni ca Minol ta
recommends t hat all service be performed by an authori zed service
representative. Users are responsible for seeking advice of a Konica Mi nolta
authorized service representat ive regarding the information, opinion, advi ce
or cont ent of this document.
USER AGREES THAT USE OF THIS DOCUMENT IS AT USER'S SOLE RISK
AND THAT THIS DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED ON AN AS IS BASIS WITHOUT
WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, WARRANTIES OF TITLE OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OTHER
THAN THOSE WARRANTIES THAT ARE IMPLIED BY LAW AND INCAPABLE
OF EXCLUSION. IN NO EVENT WILL KONICA MINOLTA OR THOSE ACTING
ON ITS BEHALF BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT
LIMITATION, DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL
OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF THIS DOCUMENT.
This document contains information that was exported directly from Konica Minolta's SSD
Support knowledge base. Some solutions may contain hyperlink references which originally
contained links to graphic or text files. If you wish to view these files, you must access the
solutions via SSD CS Expert Support on Konica Minolta's website, www.kmbs.konicaminolta.us.
SSD SUPPORT SOLUTIONS
1015
Solution ID 88 Solution Usage TAUS0601120EN*
Description
F54.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. A fan irregularity signal, excessive current draw due to binding. Examine M4 for obstructions which may bind the fan. Check the M4 fan lock signal (main
CB, CN26-4) in the 47 mode, input code 42. The voltage should be between 0.1 to 0.2V DC. If 5V DC is present, either the fan is binding or the fan is
defective. Replace M4 (p/n 25HA80512).
Note: If the fan lock signal is normal, install the version 17.0 EPROM (p/n 101517-17.0) to prevent false F54 errors as outlined in 1015/1212 Technical
Bulletin #15 .
2. IC7 on the main CB has shorted due to a failed total counter. IC7 shares the 24V DC control signal line with the exposure lamp, separation solenoid
(SD1), registration solenoid (SD2), total counter, key counter, and cooling fan (M4). All loads except the total counter operate in diagnostics.
Replace the total counter (p/n 466088201) and the main CB (p/n 25HE-7312).
3. A poor connection between the cooling fan (M4) and the main CB. Reseat CN73 at M4 (cooling fan) and CN26 on the main CB.
Description
Toner specks or spots on copies. Drum surface may look cloudy or have a film on it.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Possible toner contamination. Toner from the following lots '850725Z4A', '850725Z4B', and '850725Z4C' has been identified to cause this problem in high
temperature and high humidity environments. Replace the toner and developer. If the drum cannot be cleaned using isopropyl alcohol, the drum and blade
will also have to be changed. The failed drum can be returned using standard warranty program procedures. Refer to 1015/1212 Technical Bulletin #22 for
information on toner filming.
2. T/S corona arcing can damage the drum, crow-feet shaped marks may occur on the OPC surface. Repair or replace the T/S corona (p/n 25HA-4511) and
replace the drum (PCUA 947124). Samples may be requested for this type of failure.
3. If a key counter is installed, a failed key receptacle may short the main CB causing HV(B) to stay ON continuously. This may result in drum surface
breakdown and corona unit failure. Replace the key counter receptacle (p/n U120-1040), the main CB (p/n 25HE-7313) and the T/S corona (p/n 25HA-4511)
as needed.
4. Excessive developer spillage inside machine. Effected serial number range is below 26EE10176. Refer to 1015/1212 Technical Bulletin #21 .
Description
How to install a key counter.
Solution
The key counter is mounted in a separate box attached to the rear cover of the machine. For detailed installation instruction, see 1015 Technical Bulletin #3 .
Description
P81 after replacing the main CB.
Solution
CAUSE: Control boards for the 1015 have been changed to make the installation of a key counter easier as outlined in 1015 Technical Bulletin #17 . The
jumper J P1 has been eliminated; relay wiring (p/n 26AA90270) must be on all machines that do not have a key counter installed. If the new style board is
installed without the relay wiring, a P81 will be displayed. The new style main CB (p/n 25HE-7313) was installed on machines beginning with s/n 25HE11181.
SOLUTION: Install the relay wiring (p/n 26AA90270) if the main CB is not outfitted for a key counter.
Details of key counter installation per 1015 Technical Bulletin #3.
Description
P27 at power up.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Older version firmware is installed on the main CB.
Install EPROM p/n 101517-16.0 for the machine to correctly display F26 when the following cases occur:
2. Toner was added prior to adding developer and performing the TDS adjustment. Developer must be added FIRST at new machine set-up so that toner
does not fall on the uncovered TDS sensor.
2
Copyright 2008, Konica Minolta Business Solutions U.S.A., Inc. J une 2008
1015
Run 47 mode, output code 51 until the code does not reoccur (may take 5 to 10 attempts) OR open the developer unit and clean the excess toner from the
area of the TDS sensor. Then tilt the developer unit to allow fresh developer into this area.
3. Poor connection at CN95. The toner density sensor (TDS) is abnormal (0.2 V DC or lower). Reconnect CN95 (located under the front of the developer
unit).
4. TDS failure. If version 16.0 is installed, P27 is displayed when the TDS is disconnected or fails. Check for proper connection prior to replacing the TDS.
See EPROM history hyperlink.
Description
F26 at power up or following the TDS adjustment (L-detect).
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Developer is overtoned or undertoned. Depleting the amount of toner in the developer (sky shots) or adding toner to the developer (47 mode, output code
01) resolves the problem.
2. Toner was added before performing the L-detect adjustment at new machine setup. See 1015/1212 Technical Bulletin #5A .
Developer must be added FIRST at new machine set-up so that toner does not fall on the uncovered TDS sensor.
3. A loose pin to CN95 on the developer unit. This connector is for the TDS sensor. Reseat all pins (4) to CN95 on the developer unit.
4. Incorrect TDS reading. Perform memory reset then run the TDS adjustment (47 mode, output code 51) until the code disappears (may take 5-6 attempts).
5. Component failure. Check the TDS sensor, M5 (toner supply motor).
6. Loose pins on the NOVRAM, IC28. Reform the NOVRAM pins and reinstall the IC on the main CB.
Description
F28.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. High voltage arcing.
a. Reset F28 using the 25 mode (power the copier ON while simultaneously pressing the 2 and 5 keys), P45 to 0.
b. Inspect the T/S corona, front and rear blocks. Note: If the HV is turned ON with the T/S corona removed, F28 will occur.
c. Extend the HV contacting springs (front) and the contacting springs at the rear of the T/S assembly (grounding).
d. Clean the contact points on the front T/S block - replace if needed.
e. The transfer guide plate p/n 25HA-4561 is bent and too close to the transfer wire. The left edge of the plate should be 16mm above the inside bottom
of the corona shell.
2. The corona currents are not set to specification. Set all currents to specification per 1015 Technical Bulletin #2.
3. Multiple devices on the same AC source.
4. Debris in the transfer corona shorts the corona wire to the transfer discharge plate (shell).
Thoroughly clean the T/S corona.
5. No output from the high voltage unit due to an internal short.
To verify HV unit failure, perform the following::
a. Remove the drum carriage and the T/S corona unit.
b. Run the copier in the 36 mode (power the copier ON while simultaneously pressing the 3 and 6 keys); enter code 01, then press START PRINT.
c. If the failure code reoccurs, inspect the high tension leads for insulation failure and replace if necessary. The high voltage unit (p/n 25HA84014) may
also need replacing.
d. If the problem does not occur, inspect the T/S corona unit, main charge unit and the drum carriage grounding. Repair or replace parts as necessary.
6. Arcing at the bias contact spring can cause an F28.
Description
Developer spew.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. If the developing unit is not completely emptied during a PM, the residual developer will compact and cause wear to the developer shaft and shaft holder.
To prevent damage install the improved shaft holder (G-seal, p/n 26AA-3060).
3
1015
Note: The replacement of the shaft holder and felt seal (p/n 26AA30060) is only effective on machines where the developer shaft has NOT been worn. If the
shaft is worn, the developing unit (p/n 26AA-3001) must be replaced.
2. Developer sleeve fatique. To verify, remove the developer unit and spin the developing unit magnetic roller by hand 10 to 20 times. If developer falls from
the sleeve, replace the developing unit (p/n 26AA-3001). Verify that developer bias and corona currents are set to specification.
Description
High pitched noise, no ADD TONER indication.
Solution
CAUSE: No add toner indication is due to short copy runs. ADD TONER will not be displayed until the toner motor is allowed to make 7-12 consecutive
rotations during a copy run.
SOLUTION: Run at least 50 to 75 consecutive copies to check the ADD toner indication. Add toner to the machine after confirming operation.
Note: For immediate display of ADD TONER, install (p/n 101517-15.2).
Caution: With version 15.2 installed, air pockets in the toner hopper may cause premature ADD TONER indications.
Description
Blurred copies after power up or after reduction/enlargement is selected.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The constant load spring of the fourth mirror assembly does not have sufficient pressure to return to its home position. Replace the load spring with the
new style load spring (p/n 508065211). The pressure of load has been increased from 145g to 215g.
Replacement of the constant load spring is outlined in 1015/1212 Technical Bulletin #20
2. Heavy grease was used on the on the 4th mirror shaft. Clean the 4th mirror shaft and lubricate with multi oil.
3. The adjusting arm (p/n 25HA-6441) in the optics is out of position. Reposition the optics cam lever to push on the fourth mirror assembly.
4. The black idler roller mounted under the 4th mirror is binding. To free up the idler, relieve pressure from the side mount assembly, then clean and lubricate
the assembly.
See Technical Education Bulletin #7A regarding lubricant applications.
4
1018/1518L
Description
How to set up SMB (PC) Scanning.
Solution
When setting up SMB (PC) Scanning on the 7145, three pieces of information must be obtained:
1. Host Name: This will be the network name of the workstation you wish to scan to. Right click My Computer, select Properties, User Profiles and note the
Workgroup Name of the computer. Use only the name of the computer, do not include the domain name. Name has to be 13 characters or less.
2. Folder: This is set up on the workstation and must be shared with all attributes selected.
3. User Name and Password: This is what the customer uses to log their PC onto the network.( if you do not Results=ED09C7)
Note: When setting up the Folder Name on the 7145, it must be designated with /. For example, if the shared folder on the workstation is Sample, it will be
input on the 7145 as /Sample.
Description
How to update the firmware on a 7415 (fax option installed) via the serial port.
Solution
To upgrade the fax kit firmware via the serial port, perform the following:
1. Obtain the fax firmware upgrade files.
a. Access KBT's Home Page (http://www.konicabt.com).
b. In the left-hand menu, click on SECURED.
c. Enter a User ID and Password and click [Login].
d. Click on TECHNICAL.
e. Click on [Download EPROMS].
f. Click on [EPROMS For Plain Paper Fax].
g. Click on [List Files].
h. Select the desired version of 7415 firmware and download to folder.
i. When the file is extracted, note where the file is created.
2. Connect a D sub 9-pin straight serial cable between the PC and the RS-232C port on the fax kit.
3. Set the 7415 to firmware upgrade mode by pressing the START and STOP keys at the same time while powering the 7415 ON. *WAIT PROGRAM* will
display.
4. Down load the data by using the DOS prompt.
a. Set your COM port to proper settings (for COM1 use C:\ mode com1:19,n,8,1).
b. Ensure you are in the directory that the firmware file was downloaded to.
During the download process see below:
Status for device COM1:
---------------------------------------------
Baud: 19200
Parity: None
Data Bits: 8
Stop Bits: 1
ect ect.
then you would enter:
copy command:
(c. Use the file copy command (C:\ copy /b XXXXa.bin..bin com1). copy/b 151VXXXa.bin com1
Description
Can the 7033 be used as a scanner?
Solution
A scanning option is available. The following is the minimum configuration for the scanning feature to function:
1. IP411 (PCUA 950401) installed.
2. HD104 (PCUA 950421) installed.
3. System software version 4.1.13.
Note: To identify the system software version, print a system configuration page. If any other version earlier than 4.1.13 is identified, scanning is not
available. Upgrading system software is not yet possible in the field. Contact the NSSG Hotline and request the procedure to upgrade the system software
on the HD104.
4. The 7033/7040 MUST be at minimum firmware level 42 (system) and level 25 (image). Firmware can be downloaded from the Konica [[FTP site | URL
ftp://kbtdigital:kx15@ftp.konicabt.com]].
Note: A finisher is not required for printing or scanning with the IP411.
5. The KN302 network interface card (PCUA 950400) must be installed.
6. The controller must have a minimum of 32MB of RAM (controller is shipped with 32MB installed).
7. Scanned documents can be retrieved via Scantrip which is available on the [[Konica SEC website| URL http://www.sec.konicabt.com/main.html]]. This
utility allows downloading of files from the hard drive to the workstation. An FTP client (i.e. [[SmartFTP*| URL http://www.smartftp.com/download/]] or [[FTP
Surfer*| URL http://www.whispertech.com/surfer/download.htm]].) or Microsoft* Internet Explorer minimum version 5x is required to allow viewing of the
scanned documents.
Note: Document handling procedures or recommendations are not the responsibility of Konica Business Technologies USA, Inc.
5
1018/1518L
Description
Memory specifications, 7255.
Solution
The standard memory of the main body E-RDH is 64MB. There is one additional slot for memory which can be expanded to a maximum of 576MB.
Additional memory is installed on the image CB located at the rear of the unit.
Notes:
1. Available Konica memory:
ITEM # ITEM DIMM
950631 MU-401 64MB
950632 MU-402 128MB
950588 MU-303 256MB
960334 MU-304 512MB
2. Other 256MB memory DIMM that can be used are as follows:
The recommended 256MB DIMM is as follows:
a. Century Microelectronics, Inc.* (PC133/256MB/NON ECC), DTV6E8-CL3 (Hitachi)* [[http://www.century-micro.com| URL http://www.century-micro.com]]
b. Melco Inc.* PC133/256MB/NON ECC, VS133-256M (Toshiba)* [[http://www.melcoinc.com/english/index.html| URL
http://www.melcoinc.com/english/index.html]]
SPECIFICATIONS
1. 256MB (64bitx32M composition)/[16Mword x 8bit) synchronous DRAM x 16 +serial EPROM]/Clock frequency : (CL=2) 80 MHz and more/168-pin DIMM
(a gold terminal).
2. Banks on each SDRAM Device (BA1, BA0) : 4 Banks
3. Row Addresses :RA0-RA11
4. Column Addresses :CA0-CA9
* Trademark ownership information
Description
F26 at power up or following TDS adjustment.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The L-detect adjustment was performed with worn or depleted (not enough) developer; or a failed PCL.
Replace the developer and perform the steps outlined below before performing the L-detect adjustment (47 mode, code 51).
Check TDS ang (analog) signal at the main board CN3-A5 to GND while running 47 mode, code 40.
0.5 to 1.5V DC =overtoned
1.5 - 2.0V DC =normal
0.5V DC or less =bad TDS or lack of developer
2.0 to 4.0V DC =undertoned
4.0 or more =bad developer - replace the developer
TDS sensor (p/n 083088110).
Verify PCL operation:
Enter the 47 mode output code 51 for 15 seconds. THEN TURN THE MACHINE OFF.
Check the drum, there should be no toner build-up on the surface. If toner is on the drum, check the PCL using the bypass tray solenoid connector, and 47
mode output code 24.
2. Install the new style LED type PCL lamp per 2020 Technical Bulletin #32.
Description
Light copies, blotchy, poor density.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The toner hopper is empty, however, the TLD sensor is coated with toner, therefore it will not vibrate to indicate ADD TONER.
Check the voltage reading from the TLD sensor at CN3-A2 on the main board:
TLD coated with toner = +6.7 V DC.
TLD not coated = +4.1 V DC.
2. To alleviate light copies, perform all procedures outlined in 1018/2020 Technical Bulletin #16C .
3. Install version 16.0 EPROM as outlined in 1018/2020 Technical Bulletin #16C.
4. Check the TDS analog voltage to determine the toner concentration of the developer.
Use 47 mode, code 40 while monitoring the ang signal at the main board at CN3-A5 to GND.
0.5V DC to 1.5V DC =overtoned
6
1018/1518L
1.5V DC - 2.0V DC =normal
0.5V DC or less =bad TDS or lack of developer
2.0V DC to 4.0V DC =undertoned
4.0V DC or more =bad developer - replace the developer
5. No add toner indication due to short copy runs.
6. The corona currents are not set to specification.
7. A worn drum, or improperly set drum currents.
Install a new drum (PCUA 946211), and set the currents to specification.
charge -600 10A DC
transfer -400 50A DC
separation 290 20A AC
Procedure outlined in 2020 Technical Bulletin #11 .
8. PCL lamp failure will result in residual charge build-up on the drum in multi-copy set resulting in high toner usage. The long term effect is reduced toner
concentration and developer failure (light copies).
Replace the PCL with the new style (LED) lamp p/n 029487061. See 1018/2020 Technical Bulletin #32 .
9. Too many high density images (originals with 50% or more black image area) or sky shots run concurrently.
10. Damp paper can cause poor density.
Install the dew prevention heater kit p/n SE95-2810 to reduce the occurrence of damp paper.
11. The toner motor is not meshing with the toner addition drive.
Adjust the toner motor position.
12. Dirty toner supply shaft assembly (p/n 5080-1560) and thrust spring (p/n 392015670). The spring is stuck in the depressed position and will not allow the
shaft to engage with toner hopper auger.
Clean shaft and spring.
Description
F35 at power up.
Solution
To reset: set 25 mode, P47 to 0.
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. TS1 (thermstat) open. Replace p/n 5520-8510.
2. Non OEM (original equipment manufacturer) upper roller installed. Thicker aluminum or iron core upper rollers will cause extended warm-up resulting in
F35.
Install a new Konica upper roller p/n 508053150.
3. L2 CONT signal at CN15-4 (main CB) does not go L at power up after resetting the failure code. Replace the main CB (p/n 5522-9010).
4. Lamp holder failure. Install new style lamp holders and terminal covers per 1018/2020 Technical Bulletin #41.
5. Program bug in the early version EPROM's (before level 13.3) Replace IC6 with p/n 101816-13.3 or the latest production level.
Description
Excessive toner consumption, toner spill under the drum carriage.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. To alleviate this problem, it is critical to implement all the steps outlined in 2020 Technical Bulletin #16C. .
2. New PCL, new drum, currents set to specification.
CEL failure. To verify the CEL, run a sky shot in 65% reduction on large paper. The pattern should reveal a reduced sky shot. If the entire copy is black, the
CEL is not operating.
Replace the CEL p/n 0830-7300 if necessary.
3. NOVRAM failure, memory scrambled. Replace NOVRAM (p/n
Description
Drum damage, developer spew, banding from lead-to-trail.
7
1018/1518L
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The nylon DSD rollers on the developing unit become damaged (shrink) due to developer leakage. The magnetic roller is then too close to the drum,
causing damage to the drum surface.
Replace the drum casing (p/n 5520-K030).
Note: Drum casings do not include the following parts: drum, toner supply unit, LED unit, charge corona unit, blade unit, front cover, knob label, PCL cover,
PCL protection sheet, PCL board, cleaning upper cover, PF stay and blade spring holder. Remove these parts before replacing the drum casing.
2. Install the new style LED type PCL lamp per 1018/2020 Technical Bulletin #32 .
Verify PCL operation:
a. Run the 47 mode, output code 51, for 15 seconds. THEN POWER THE MACHINE OFF.
b. Check the drum, there should be no toner build-up on the surface. If toner is on the drum, check the PCL using the bypass tray solenoid connector and
47 mode, output code 24.
3. The main agitator shaft is worn, allowing developer to leak from the sides of the unit.
Install the main agitator kit per 1018/2020 Technical Bulletin #27A (p/n SE95-2940).
4. Drum shaft knob loose.
Secure the drum knob.
Description
The toner cartridge can not be fully inserted.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. A 2020 toner supply cover has been installed on a model 1018.
If the drum carriage is exchanged between models, the toner supply cover should be changed or a modified toner supply cover (p/n 0831-3210) should be
installed. A 1018 cover is labeled 0832 and will not allow the toner cartridge to be fully inserted. The 2020 cover is labeled 0831 and does allow proper
installation of the 2020 toner cartridge.
2. The toner cartridge shape has been changed. The green plastic cover for waste toner extends about 1-inch farther than before. The modified toner
cartridge does fit in the copier, but toner build-up at the rear of the developing unit may inhibit full cartridge insertion.
Verify the locking ears on the toner cartridge are flush with the drum carriage. If not, vacuum the rear area of the toner hopper to remove built up toner.
3. The incorrect toner cartridge is inserted.
Check the rear of the toner cartridge to ensure that it is designated for the 1018. The plastic center should be the color blue.
Note: Refer to the 1018/2020 Technical Bulletin #44 .
8
1020/1520/2020
Description
Drum damage.
Solution
CAUSE: The nylon DSD rollers on the developing unit are damaged (smaller in diameter) due to developer leakage. This causes the magnetic roller to get
too close to the drum, resulting in damage to the drum surface.
SOLUTION: Replace the drum casing (p/n 5520-K030).
Description
F26 at power up or following the TDS adjustment.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. If the L-detect adjustment is performed with worn or depleted (not enough) developer F26 can occur.
Determine the cause of F26 by checking the TDS analog signal at the main CB CN3-A5 to GND while running the 47 mode, output code 40. The voltages
below indicate the condition of the developer:
Detone by running black copies.
0.5V DC or less =no signal from the TDS sensor
Check the wiring from TDS to the main CB.
Check the level of developer in the developer unit.
Replace the TDS sensor (p/n 083088110).

Retone using the 47 mode, code 01.
4.0V DC or more =extremely undertoned
Replace the developer. Verify that the PCL is operating.
Install the new style LED type PCL lamp (p/n 029487061) as outlined in 2020 Technical Bulletin #32 .
Note: When F26 occurs, the machine will allow a reattempt of the TDS adjustment only. All other functions will be inoperable unless the memory is
reinitiallized (47 mode, output code 92).
2. Erroneous data in memory. The copier experienced a power problem which caused the memory data to be scrambled. Perform memory reinitialization
using the 47 mode, output code 92.
Note: L-detect data; drum and PM counters; CVR, registration and lead edge deletion data will be set to initial values.
3. Memory IC failure. The memory chip (IC8) on the main CB will not hold settings after performing memory initialization (47 mode, output code 92).
Replace the memory chip.
Description
Excessive toner consumption, toner spilled under the drum carriage.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. To alleviate this toner consumption problems, it is critical to implement the procedures outlined in 2020 Technical Bulletin #16C .
2. PCL failure. Replace the PCL with the new style (LCD lamp). See 2020 Technical Bulletin #32 .
3. A worn drum, or improperly set drum currents. Install a new drum (PCUA 946211), and set the currents to specification.
charge -600 10A DC
The adjustment procedure is outlined in 2020 Technical Bulletin #11 .
4. CEL failure. To verify the operation of the CEL, run a sky shot in 65% reduction on large paper. The pattern should reveal a reduced sky shot. If the
entire copy is black, the CEL is not operating. Replace the CEL (p/n 0830-7300).
Description
9
1020/1520/2020
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The toner hopper is empty. However, the TLD sensor is coated with toner, therefore it will not vibrate to indicate ADD TONER.
Check the voltage reading from the TLD sensor at CN3-A2 on the main board:
TLD coated with toner 6.7V DC.
TLD not coated 4.1V DC.
2. A failed TLD (toner level detecting sensor). If no voltage is read after performing step 1, replace the TLD (p/n 113687090).
3. To alleviate light copies, perform all procedures outlined in 2020 Technical Bulletin #16C .
4. Older version firmware is installed on the main CB. Install version 16.0 EPROM as outlined in Technical Bulletin #16C.
5. Check the TDS analog voltage to determine the toner concentration of the developer. Use the 47 mode, code 40 while monitoring the analog signal at the
main board at CN3-A5 to GND. The voltages below indicate the condition of the developer:

6. The developer unit auxiliary agitator gear is damaged or binding. Replace the gear (p/n 029420210).
7. No add toner indication is occurring due to short copy runs.
8. A worn drum, or improperly set drum currents. Install a new drum (PCUA 946211), and set the currents to specification.
charge -600 10A DC
The adjustment procedure is outlined in 2020 Technical Bulletin #11 .
9. PCL lamp failure will result in residual charge build-up on the drum in multi-copy set resulting in high toner usage. The long term effect is reduced toner
concentration and developer failure (light copies).
Replace the PCL with the new style (LCD lamp). See 2020 Technical Bulletin #32 .
10. Multiple high density images (originals with 50% or more black image area) or sky shots run concurrently.
11. Damp paper can cause poor density. Install the dew prevention heater kit p/n SE95-2810 to reduce the occurrance of damp paper.
12. Incorrect toner was added. Purge the toning/developing system and replace the toner and developer with model 2020 supplies. Perform the L-detect
and any necessary copy quality adjustments.
13. The developer agitator gears not turning. Agitation system is binding. Replace the drum casing (p/n 5520-K030).
14. A defective wiring harness between the main CB and the operation board. Replace the operation board assembly which includes the wiring harness from
the operation board to the main CB (p/n 5522-7002).
Description
High pitched noise, no ADD TONER indication.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. ADD TONER is not indicated due to short copy runs. ADD TONER will not be displayed until the toner motor is allowed to make 7-12 consecutive
rotations during a copy run after the TLD has detected the absence of toner.
Run at least 50 to 75 consecutive copies to verify the ADD TONER indication.
Note: Operation panel lamps can be checked using the 47 mode, code 48:
1. Turn the machine off.
2. Hold down the 4 and 7 keys while turning the copier on to enter the diagnostic mode..
2. Release the 4 and 7 keys.
3. Press the 4 key and then the 8 key.
4. Press the Copy key. All panel lamps should come on.
10
1020/1520/2020
5. Turn the machine off then on to exit the diagnostic mode.
Add toner to the machine after confirming operation.
For immediate display of ADD TONER, install (p/n 202016-13.4).
Caution: With version 13.4 installed, air pockets in the toner hopper may cause premature ADD TONER indications.
2. The latest EPROM version was installed, but the copier memory was not reinitialized. Reinitialize memory (47 mode, code 92).
Description
F24 at power up or while copying.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Open PCL lamp or loose CN64 on the drum carriage assembly. Reseat CN64 and replace the PCL lamp with the new style LED lamp (p/n 029487061) as
outlined in 2020 Technical Bulletin #32 .
TO VERIFY THE PCL:
1. Remove the PCL from the drum carriage
2. Plug it into the bypass tray solenoid connector.
3. Activate the lamp using 4/7 mode, code 24.
If any segments do not light, replace the lamp with the new style assembly.
2. If the drum carriage becomes dislodged while copying the PCL circuit will open. Reinsert the drum carriage and install locking bracket (p/n 5520-1041).
Description
F23 power up, (M5) toner motor failure.
Solution
CAUSE: Toner packed in the hopper or reverse EMF generated by M5 when the motor stops damaging IC30 on the main CB.
SOLUTION: Test the circuit by running M5 in 47 mode, code 01. Separate the gear drive so the motor can free spin without load.
Replace the main CB and/or M5 as necessary.
To reduce the failure of IC30 due to M5 binding or reverse EMF, install new toner supply wiring as outlined in 1018/2020 Technical Bulletin #38.
M5 p/n 4900-1610
Main CB p/n 5522-9010
1018/2020 Technical Bulletin #38.
Description
F35 at power up.
Solution
To defeat the code, access the 25 mode, P47. Input 0 and press START PRINT.
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Program bug in the early version EPROM's (before level 13.4). Replace EPROM IC6 with p/n 202016-13.4 or the latest production level (16.0 is latest
5/10/96).
2. TS1 (thermstat) open. Replace p/n 5520-8510.
3. Non OEM (original equipment manufacturer) upper roller installed. Thicker aluminum or iron core upper rollers will cause extended warm-up resulting in
F35.
Install a new Konica upper roller p/n 508053150.
4. L2 CONT signal at CN15-4 (main CB) does not go L at power up after resetting the failure code. Replace the main CB (p/n 5522-9010).
5. Lamp holder failure. Install new style lamp holders and terminal covers per 1018/2020 Technical Bulletin #41.
6. The power is being shared with other equipment. A dedicated AC circuit is recommended.
Description
How to clear fuser abnormality codes (F34, F35, F36), 2020.
Solution
To reset fuser codes, perform the following steps:
1. Access the 25 mode (power the machine OFF. Hold down the 2 and 5 keys, and power the machine ON).
11
1020/1520/2020
2. Press P-4-7-P on the key pad. (1, 4, 5, or 6 will be displayed on the copy quantity indicator).
3. Press the 0 key to change the indication to a zero.
4. Press the start/print key to enter the new data.
5. Power the machine OFF then ON to exit the 25 mode.
Note: If the F code reoccurs after powering the machine ON or following warm-up, contact service immediately.
Description
Machine shuts down and resets while copying, J 00 or J 16 displayed.
Solution
CAUSE: Charge corona arcing. Dirty, coroded or loose connection from HV(A). Poor or no grounding for main charge corona assembly.
SOLUTION: Verify that the charge corona contact with the spring on the high voltage power supply. Also verify front clip on main charge assembly is
contacting drum carriage frame.
12
1112
Description
Light copies.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The L-detect has been performed improperly. Install new developer (do not cycle machine until all steps are complete); thoroughly clean the recycle tube,
disengage the toner hopper from the developer unit. Perform the L-detect adjustment.
2. The worm gear may be worn at the point of contact and is not driving the toner conveyance screw. If the density cannot be increased by adding toner
through the 47 mode output code 001. Check the toner supply motor, shaft angle (on hinge plate A) and the driving gears. Toner supply idler gear A (p/n
25SA77291) and gear B (p/n 25SA77311) as well as the hinge plate A (p/n 25SA-3310) should be modified as indicated in 7050 Technical Bulletin #27 .
3. If copies or prints become lighter during a long run:
Inspect the transfer separation corona assemblies and the high voltage power supply. The transfer corona may have been disassembled for cleaning. This
causes the relationship of the transfer guide material assembly (p/n 25SA-2660) to the rest of the corona to be incorrect. Due to the critical nature of the
height of the transfer guide material assembly, the guide is factory set. It is not to be adjusted or disassembled in the field. If guide is adjusted or removed,
replacement of the entire corona assembly is required (p/n 25SA-2600). Note: (p/n 25SA-2660) is listed in the parts catalog as a separate part but is no
longer available. See 7050 Technical Bulletin #9 . For more information see parts view of transfer guide material assembly.
Replace the corona assembly or the high voltage power supply.
4. The ADD TONER message is never displayed.
Level 26 and above will allow display of the low toner indication as soon as the machine reaches that condition.
25 mode address 71 and address 13 are related. Address 71 will determine the amount of copies, after low toner is sensed, before the display will indicate
ADD TONER. Address 13 will determine the copy cycle action once the ADD TONER message has been displayed.
Address 71 settings
0 =After 100 copies (Default)
1 =After 1,000 copies
Note: Address 71, settings 0-3 will allow the machine to continue to operate after ADD TONER is displayed, regardless of address 13. Only address 71,
settings, 4-7 will perform the stop operation specified by address 13.
Address 71 settings continued:
4 =After 100 copies
25 mode address 13 settings to specify copy cycle reaction at detection (ADD TONER). The machine will either try to finish the current sheet in progress or
try to complete the entire job before stopping the unit.
0 =Exit the sheet in progress (after 100 additional copies) and stop
1 =Exit the sheet in progress (after 1,000 additional copies) then stop
4 =Complete the entire job (up to 100 additional copies) then stop
5 =Complete the entire job (up to 1,000 additional copies) then stop (Default)
6 =Complete the entire job (up to 2,000 additional copies) then stop
5. The charge corona and bias are not set to the target values.
Adjust the charge corona to 170 and the bias to 169.
6. Poor bias to the developer unit.
Check for continuity from the bias pin on the developing unit to the developing sleeve. If extremely high, remove the developing bearing from the rear of the
developing unit and check movement and continuity. If the bearing appears worn or has limited continuity, replace the bearing assembly (p/n 466078030).
7. Check for level 22.0 EPROMs. One symptom is low density which is noticed 1,000 copies/prints after power up. Level 22.0 has been identified as causing
light copies. Replace with latest level.
EPROM history hyperlink .
8. The toner supply unit shutter is damaged, resulting in a buildup of toner which has broken the driving gears on the supply unit. Check the condition of the
shutter unit. Replace damaged parts, including drive gears.
Note: This type of damage occurs when technicians push the toner supply unit into its home position without the drum carriage installed. See 7050 Technical
Bulletin #8 .
9. The DCPS2 has failed and is outputting too much voltage to the projection lamp. The projection lamp voltage can be checked using 47 mode, output
mode 000 while measuring the output to the lamp between CN385-1 and CN385-3 on the DCPS2. The voltage should be 60DC.
Replace the DCPS2 (p/n 25SA84520).
10. There is an open in the wiring harness. Check the wire harness at CN22-B4. If it is a constant 7V DC and there is no change in voltage when the TLD
sensor is replaced, the toner unit wire harness (p/n 25SA90260) may need replacement.
13
1112
11. Faulty TLD, main CB. Machine never displayed add toner indication. Check the TLD for a change of signal by adding pressure to it out of the toner unit.
If the signal does not change replace the TLD (p/n 25SA88030), if signal state changes replace the main CB.
Note: New main CB from the part dept. are being shipped with the latest production level EPROMs however field machines may have different levels of
Image Processing board EPROMs. This can create error codes and other problems. In addition the Dallas chip on the new boards require the machine to be
reinitialized prior to use. The procedure to reinitialize the machine to factory settings will reset the total counter to 0. As such hotline assistance is required
for this procedure.
12. Incorrect toner was added to this unit. This produced the light copies.
Purge the toner and developer units and install fresh supplies.
If developer spew is also present:
13. Carefully examine the drum for damage. The OPC material may be damaged exposing the aluminum core. This causes developer to adhere to the drum
and spew.
Replace drum, cleaning blade, toner guide roller, and developer.
14. Check machine to determine if key counters are used. In some cases, the timing of key counter removal can adversely affect the Dmax correction
adjustment. If the key counter is removed during the period when the automatic Dmax adjustment is performed (every 1000 copies), the Dmax value may be
set lower and undertoning may result. The firmware requires upgrading. Install minimum level 21 EPROMs which will prevent undertoning due to key counter
interaction with Dmax. Installation of the latest level EPROMs is recommended.
EPROM history hyperlink . Note: If, over a period of time, the problem does reoccur, disconnect the key count device.
15. Dmax data has been inadvertently reprogrammed
Reinitialize the Dmax data with 47 mode, output code 18.
16. CN1 on the developing drive motor board (M3DB) is not fully connected. This causes the developing sleeve to rotate at an incorrect speed which affects
Dmax readings. Check and reseat CN1.
17. Poor connection between the memory IC (or Dallas chip) and the main CB.
Reseat memory IC on the main CB.
18. Loose pin on CN65-A3 of the main CB. This is the toner motor (M10) control signal.
Reseat pins on CN65 of the main CB.
19. Failed NOVRAM on the main CB. The NOVRAM is losing the stored DMAX data.
Initialize NOVRAM. If initialization fails to resolve the problem, replace NOVRAM (p/n DALLAS). The procedure to reinitialize the machine to factory settings
will reset the total counter to 0. As such hotline assistance is required for this procedure.
20. Partial light copies/prints only when fed through the bypass are a result of the improper output from HV2.
Replace HV2.
21. Soiled write unit.
Carefully remove the write unit and clean the polygon mirror. Follow the procedure in the Model 7050 Service Manual (2nd edition, 2/96) pages 2-47 to 2-50.
22. The mylar on the agitator plate, that wipes the TLD, is worn or missing. Replace the agitator plate (p/n 25SA-3270).
23. Dmax Error 3 count (veiwed in 47 mode output code 94) is high and increments each time a Dmax adjustment is attempted. TCSB is coated with toner or
has failed. Clean or replace TCSB (p/n 25SA-9100) as necessary. NOTE: If the adjustment mode display cannot be access using 47 mode output code 94,
access 47 mode output code 96 and press start print. This should enable the adjustment mode to be displayed using output code 94 and pressing start print.
Description
Code 26 at power up or following the TDS adjustment (L-detect).
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Performing the L-detect adjustment with worn or depleted (not enough) developer will cause code 26 to occur.
Replace the developer (PCUA 947106) and perform the L-detect adjustment (47 mode, output code 51). During the adjustment, measure the main CB at
CN11-5 while in the 47 mode, output code 40 (main motor running). The voltages below indicate the condition of the developer:
0.5 to 1.5V DC =overtoned (lessen toner concentration by running black copies)
0.5V DC or less =no signal from the TDS sensor:
a. Check the wiring from TDS to the main CB.
b. Check the level of developer in the developing unit.
c. Replace the TDS sensor (p/n 587088010).
2.0 to 4.0V DC =undertoned (increase toner concentration by running the toner motor in the 47 mode, output code 01).
a. Replace the developer.
b. Verify that the PCL is operating properly.
If all of the TDS voltages are correct, then the main CB is not processing the signals correctly. Replace the main CB (p/n 5850-9302).
2. A poor connection at the rear of the fuser unit (CN69) for the temperature sensors. Reseat CN69.
14
1112
3. The TDS has failed because the main CB is applying 24V DC to CN11-1 instead of the normal 10V DC.
Replace the main CB (p/n 5850-9302) and the TDS (p/n 587088010).
Note: The TLD (p/n 113687090) may also require replacement as it is powered by the same 10V DC source.
4. PCL failure or open wiring to PCL. PCL failure will cause excessive recycling of toner. The developing unit toner auger conveys the recycled toner only to
the center where the TDS is located.
Replace the PCL (p/n 113687060).
Description
Code 23 at power up or while copying.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The toner hopper is binding.
To inspect for binding, separate M3 from the driven gear then run the motor in 47 mode, code 01 to verify operation with no load. If the motor operates, the
main board and motor are OK. Troubleshoot the hopper for binding.
2. M3 toner motor failure.
If the motor is inoperable in diagnostics (separated from drive gear), replace the motor (p/n 3960-9050).
3. Main CB failure.
If a new motor is installed and it does not operate in diagnostics, replace the main CB (p/n 5850-9301).
CAUTION: If M3 or main CB failure is a possibility, install both parts when returning to the machine. Replace M3 first, then replace the main CB.
4. A failed optics unit wiring harness.
Replace the optics unit wiring harness (p/n 585090201).
Note: The wiring from M3 to the main CB is included in this harness.
Description
Background on the front half and light on the rear half of copies.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. PCL failure will cause excessive recycling of toner. The developing unit toner auger conveys recycled toner only to the center where the TDS is located.
As a result, the rear side of the developing unit will undertone. If this situation is not corrected, developer spew will occur.
To verify PCL operation, use a 9V DC battery to see if the all segments light. Replace the PCL if necessary (p/n 113687060).
2. Poor transfer current will also cause the amount of recycled toner to increase. Set the corona currents to specification using special meter lead (p/n
SE95-1810):
Charge: -505 5A DC
Transfer: -251 16A DC
Separation: 298 13A AC
Refer to 1112 Technical Bulletin #2 for the adjustment procedure.
3. Main CB failure. The control signal to turn on the PCL, CN5-2 stays at 24V DC. Replace main CB (p/n 5850-9302).
4. Incorrect toner was installed. Background will occur at the rear of the copy first as new toner (not recycled) is introduced in the rear of the developer unit.
Evacuate all toner and developer from the developer unit, cleaning unit (recycling system) and the toner hopper. Install the correct supplies (toner, 947-109)
(developer, 947-106).
Description
Drum drive noise.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The drum carriage spring clip plate (L) (p/n 587020320) is installed incorrectly. Attach the spring clip to the inside of the drum carriage front plate. The
spring should slide over guide pin and rest in the rear groove of pin.
2. Gear (E) is worn (p/n 392015051). Replace gear (E) and any other worn components.
3. The drum idler gear or drive shaft is worn. Install the drum idler gear shaft kit (p/n U081-2440) which was introduced in 1112 Technical Bulletin #3 .
4. The developer input spring has failed. Replace the developer input spring with the new style black spring (p/n 585015121).
Refer to 1112 Technical Bulletin #1 .
Note: The old style spring is silver in color.
15
1112
5. The second feed drive bushings are not properly lubricated. Remove the second feed drive gear, clean with alcohol and apply a small amount of multi-oil.
6. A build-up of toner under the developer mag roller will cause binding of the developer drive unit, producing a grinding noise.
Clean the developer unit thoroughly and install a fresh charge of developer (PCUA 947106).
Description
How to reset the PM message.
Solution
To reset the PM counter, perform the following steps:
1. Turn the copier OFF.
2. Hold down the 4 and 7 keys and turn the copier ON.
3. Enter 9 then 0 and press the start/print key.
4. Turn the machine OFF then ON to exit the 47 mode.
Description
Code 25 will not clear after adding toner.
Solution
CAUSE: Toner is not contacting the TLD sensor due to an air pocket in the toner.
SOLUTION: Knock on toner hopper to eliminate air pockets.
Description
Code 20 at power up or while copying.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Open wire or poor connection. No input at CN11-2 on the main CB (TLD signal not received). Verify 10V DC on CN11-1 (main CB).
Check continuity from the drum carriage CN63 to the main CB CN11 (3 wires).
Check for signal from the TLD to the main CB at CN11-2. It should measure 4V to 7V DC if operating correctly.
2. Failed TLD.
Replace TLD (p/n 113687090).
3. No 10V DC to the toner level detect sensor (TLD) because ICP3, on the main CB, is open.
Check CN11-1, on the main CB. If 10V DC is not indicated (operating voltage for the TLD) replace the main CB (p/n 5850-9302).
Note: Confirm that the TLD wiring is not shorted or pinched to frame ground.
Description
How to add toner, 1112.
Solution
To add toner to the 1112:
1. Hold the toner tube so that the plastic strip in on top and the green handle is in the front.
2. Hold and pull the plastic strip toward you as you insert the rear of the tube into the machine, pushing until it stops and then remove the plastic strip
completely.
3. Turn the green handle clockwise until it stops (the word LOCK should be horizontal and right side up).
Description
Developer spew from the rear of the developing unit.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Worn developer can cause developer spew. Developer (PCUA 947106) must be replaced every 15,000 copies.
2. Leakage from the developing unit can occur when all of the developer is not emptied when new developer is installed. The excess developer creates
excessive force causing wear to the developing shaft holder and the developing shaft. If these areas are damaged and leaking, replace the developing unit
(p/n 587A-3002).
Note: A developing unit repair kit is not available for the 1112.
16
1112
17
1120
Description
How to program APS default when the ADF is lifted (8.5x11 or 8.5x11R default).
Solution
To program the APS default, perform the following:
1. Disable smart glass, install EPROM (p/n 112019-12.1) EPROM history hyperlink .
2. Then set the following 25 mode addresses:
a. P06 to 2 for 8.5x11 default when the ADF is opened.
Setting 25 mode, P6 to 2, 3, 6, or 7 =8.5x11 default.
Setting 25 mode, P6 to 0, 1, 4, 5, 8, or 9 =8.5x11R default.
b. P15 to 1 to enable the first priority mode.
c. P16 to 2 to enable 8.5x11 as priority.
d. P56 to 5 for individual auto button selection (P58 dependant), ADF priority when originals are placed in the ADF and APS deselected when the ADF is
opened.
e. P58 to 2 for initial state: ADF priority, APS non-priority and AES priority.
See 1120 Technical Bulletin #4 (the "NOTE" in bulletin #4 is incorrect - please disregard).
Description
J 13.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The machine is programmed for PFU installation (P91 set to 3); however, no PFU is attached. In 25 mode, set P91 to 0 and confirm that no other
addresses contain erroneous data. A power problem may have occurred, spiking the memory.
2. The wiring harness installed from the main CB to the PFU is incompatible. Review the instructions included in the PFU to determine which style harness is
necessary. Refer to 1120 Technical Bulletin #1 for details.
Description
P25 while copying.
Solution
CAUSE: More than 300 copies were made after the toner LED began blinking.
SOLUTION: Add toner. Replace developer if copy quality does not recover.
Description
Excessive trail edge deletion.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. An older version main CB EPROM is installed. Install the latest production EPROM, (p/n 112019-13.0).
2. The 25 mode and 36 mode adjustments are incorrect.
a. Set the 25 mode, P70 to 3 (selection of original margin elimination) to allow the CEL to operate according to the paper size selected. (This
compensates for odd sized originals placed on the platen glass).
b. Set the 36 mode, code 80, P8 to 40 (trail edge deletion adjustment) fine tune as necessary. The adjustment range is 1 to 64.
3. The screws that mount the ADF lock plate unit to the mainbody are too long, obstructing the optics movement. Install the M3x4 screws (p/n 00Z193041)
included with the DF204 installation parts.
Description
P26 at power up. Occurs at new machine setup or following a PM.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The L-detect adjustment was not performed following; a PM, memory initialization or new set-up. Perform the L-detect adjustment (47 mode, output code
51).
Note: L-detect (47 mode, output code 51) must be performed before adding toner at new machine set-up or toner addition will occur during the adjustment
resulting in an F26 code.
2. A poor connection at CN6 on the main CB. This will cause a problem where the code cannot be cleared and the 47, 25, and 36 modes cannot be
accessed. Power the copier OFF, remove and reconnect CN6, and power the copier back ON. CN6 is located on the left side of the main CB near the top of
the board.
18
1120
Description
Latest EPROM level, 1120.
Solution
Description
P27 at power up.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Poor connection between the TDS sensor and the main CB.
Verify continuity.
2. TDS failure. No output (less than 0.2V DC) when the control signal is low. Replace the TDS sensor.
Description
ST104, F77.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. One or more of the sorter bins is out of position. Reposition the bins to allow the guide pins to ride in the slot of the front and rear cams. Verify that MS203
is being actuated.
2. The front and rear carrier supports (p/n 12QA48070) are installed incorrectly. Install the supports with the spring eyelet at the bottom.
3. The bushing that supports the shaft for the helical cam is installed backwards. This allows the shaft to drop and the beveled gears at the top to disengage.
Reinstall the support bushing correctly.
4. The bin motor is binding. This caused the sorter CB to fail. Reinstall the bin motor to prevent binding, and replace the sorter CB (p/n 12QA-9900).
Description
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. A bad lot of toner. Toner from the following lots '850725Z4A', '850725Z4B', and '850725Z4C' has been identified to cause this problem in high temperature
and high humidity environments. Replace the toner and developer. If the drum cannot be cleaned using isopropyl alcohol, the drum and blade will also have
to be changed. The failed drum can be returned using standard warranty program procedures. Refer to 1120 Technical Bulletin #10 for information on toner
filming.
as needed.
4. Excessive developer spillage inside machine. Effected serial number range is below 26EE10176. Refer to 1015/1212 Technical Bulletin #21 for
information on the new style shaft holders and felt.
Description
Solution
CAUSE: Toner was added before performing L-detect during new machine setup. See 1120 Technical Bulletin #7 .
SOLUTION:
1. Run 47 mode, code 40 (3 minutes) to allow the excess toner in the TDS area to mix the toner with the developer.
2. If code F26 reoccurs replace the developer (PCUA 947-226) and perform the L-detect adjustment again (47 mode, code 51).
Note: L-detect (47 mode, code 51) must be performed before adding toner at new machine set-up or toner addition will occur during the adjustment resulting
in an F26 code.
19
1120
20
1212
Description
How to install the key counter mounting kit.
Solution
A key counter kit (p/n SE95-3270) and EPROM (p/n 121217-12.0) are available. The installation procedure is outlined in 1015/1212 Technical Bulletin #19 .
Set 25 mode, P52 to 1 to enable the key counter. The 1212 key counter mounting kit contents:
PART NUMBER ITEM
26AA73500 Key counter mounting plate
26AAK0010 Positioning indication label
00Z921321 Large wire clamp (2 pcs)
00Z921941 Small wire clamp (2 pcs)
00Z123062 Flat head screw (2 pcs)
26AA90270 Key counter wiring
26AA73500 Key counter installation instructions
Description
P27 at power up. P26 was previously indicated following the TDS adjustment (L-detect).
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Toner was added before performing the L-detect adjustment at new machine setup. See 1015/1212 Technical Bulletin #5A .
Only developer should be added during a new machine set-up so that toner does not cover the TDS sensor.
To eliminate the code:
a. Access the 47 mode, output code 40, and allow the main motor to run for approximately one minute. Any excess toner surrounding the TDS should mix
with the developer.
b. Perform the L-detect adjustment again (47 mode, output code 51).
c. If the problem remains, repeat steps a and b.
d. If this does not correct the problem, replace the developer and perform the L-detect adjustment.
2. Disconnected or failed toner density sensor (TDS). Ensure that the TDS sensor is connected (CN95) at the drum carriage (behind the toner motor).
Repair and/or reconnect the TDS connection. Replace the TDS (p/n 25HA88031) if deemed necessary.
3. Improperly seated memory IC (NOVRAM). Remove and reinsert the chip (IC28 on the main CB). Initialize the memory using the 47 mode, output code
92. After installing new developer, perform the TDS adjustment (L-detect) using the 47 mode, output code 51.
4. PCL failure. If the PCL does not operate during the L-detect adjustment, toner will adhere to the drum and reduce the toner concentration during the
L-detect adjustment. Replace the PCL (p/n 25HA-9340).
Description
Trail edge deletion on copies.
Solution
CAUSE: Incorrect 4th mirror angle.
SOLUTION: Adjust the 4th mirror ramp position by loosening the 2 screws and moving the ramp towards the exit of the machine. Verify operation. If trail
edge deletion area is less, but still not acceptable, then adjust the 4th mirror adjusting screw (p/n 490061630) counterclockwise approximately 1/4 a turn;
confirm image quality. If necessary, continue turning adjustment screw 1/4 turn each time until trail edge deletion is eliminated. Adjust the lead edge timing
and lead edge deletion as necessary.
Description
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. A bad lot of toner. Toner from the following lots '850725Z4A', '850725Z4B', and '850725Z4C' has been identified to cause this problem in high temperature
and high humidity environments. Replace the toner and developer. If the drum cannot be cleaned using isopropyl alcohol, the drum and blade will also have
to be changed. The failed drum can be returned using standard warranty program procedures. Refer to 1015/1212 Technical Bulletin #22 for information on
toner filming.
as needed.
21
1212
4. Excessive developer spillage inside machine. Effected serial number range is below 26EE10176. Refer to 1015/1212 Technical Bulletin #21 for
information on the new style shaft holders and felt.
Description
How to program auto shut-off and power saver mode.
Solution
Auto shut-off will turn the machine OFF after a selected amount of non-use. Set 25 mode, P62 to:
0: 0 minutes (auto shut-off mode, OFF)
1: 2 minutes
2: 5 minutes
3: 10 minutes
Power saver mode is enabled by pressing the POWER SAVER button above the PRINT button.
The amount of time the copier remains in idle before the power saver mode is activated is determined by the data in 25 mode, P19:
Data of 0 =1 hour
Data of 1 =2 hours
Data of 2 =3 hours
Description
How to set paper sizes in cassettes.
Solution
The paper sizes are set up by configuring the buttons on the rear of the tray. To position the buttons, use the chart embossed on the paper tray.
Description
Solution
To add toner.
1. Open the front door of the copier.
2. Lift the green flap labelled PRESS HERE.
3. Insert the cartridge.
4. Slide the green lever to the left to empty the toner cartridge
Description
Blurred copies after power up or after reduction/enlargement is selected.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The constant load spring of the fourth mirror assembly does not have sufficient pressure to return to its home position. Replace the load spring with the
new style load spring (p/n 508065211). The pressure of load has been increased from 145g to 215g.
Replacement of the constant load spring is outlined in 1015/1212 Technical Bulletin #20 .
2. Heavy grease was used on the on the 4th mirror shaft. Clean the 4th mirror shaft and lubricate with multi oil.
3. The adjusting arm (p/n 25HA-6441) in the optics is out of position. Reposition the optics cam lever to push on the fourth mirror assembly.
4. The black idler roller mounted under the 4th mirror is binding. To free up the idler, relieve pressure from the side mount assembly, then clean and lubricate
the assembly.
Description
Code 28 while copying.
Solution
CAUSE: Arcing within the main charge corona unit.
The corona wire cleaner has dislodged and is contacting the charge grid wires.
SOLUTION: Properly reposition the charge cleaner away from the grid wires.
22
1212
Description
Solution
23
1216
Description
How to extend the time for Auto Low Power mode and Auto Shut-off mode.
Solution
Auto Shut-off can be disabled by accessing the 25 mode address 20 and setting it to 1. To program the Auto Shut-off or Low Power Mode time, see below:
To program Auto Low Power mode time, perform the following:
1. Access the 25 mode (power the machine OFF, hold down on the 2 and 5 keys, power the machine ON).
2. Press P-03-P (Auto Low Power mode setting time selection).
3. Press 1 (setting time +120 minutes).
4. Press the START/PRINT key.
5. Press P19P.
6. Input one of the following data choices:
Enter 1: 122 minutes
To program Auto Shut-off time, perform the following:
2. Press P-07-P
3. Press 1 (Auto Shut-off time selection +120 minutes).
5. Press P62P
8. Power the machine OFF/ON to exit the 25 mode.
Description
P25 at power up.
Solution
CAUSE: Memory address 92 in the 25 mode is set to 0 (300 copies after the add toner message, P25 is displayed and copying is prevented until toner is
added). This function can be disabled by setting 25 mode address 92 to 1. It is recommended that this function be enabled to prevent damage to the
developer caused by toner depletion.
SOLUTION: Add toner.
Description
How to program small size original default.
Solution
CAUSE: Minimum Original Size Detection was not set for 8.5x11.
SOLUTION: To set Minimum Original Size Detection, perform the following:
1. Access the 25 mode (power the machine OFF, then, while holding down on the 2 and 5 keys, power the machine ON).
2. Press P-4-5-P (memory address 45) and enter the required value (in this case,a value of 2). The following are the data selections for address 45:
0: 8.5x11R
1: 5.5x8.5
2: 8.5x11
3. Press the Print button.
Description
How to install a Konica key counter.
Solution
To install the key counter, perform the following:
1. Open the bypass tray door. On the lower, right-side of the main body there is a plate.
2. Remove the plate, and disconnect the connector.
24
1216
3. Connect the key counter to the main body connector.
4. Install the brackets from the key counter kit to the main body where the cover plate was removed.
Description
How to set APS default to 8.5x11.
Solution
To program the 8.5x11 paper tray as a default with any size original copied from the platen glass, perform the following:
1. Switch copier OFF.
2. Enter the 25 mode by holding down the 2 and 5 keys simultaneously and powering the copier ON. Release the 2 and 5 keys approximately 4 seconds
after powering ON.
3. Enter address 56 by pressing P-56-P sequentially.
a. Enter data of 4 (disables APS when the ADF is opened).
b. Press the Start/Print button to load the data.
3. Enter address 51 (designates an initial tray when APS is cancelled) by pressing P-51-P sequentially.
a. Enter data to select the 8.5x11 tray:
0=tray 1
1=tray 2
2=tray 3
3=tray 4
b. Press the Start/Print button to load the data.
Description
Corona current specifications, 1216.
Solution
VR CODE SPECIFICATION CORONA
1 02 -500A DC Charge
2 03 -450A DC Transfer
3 04 500A AC Separation
To adjust the corona currents, perform the following:
1. Remove the T/S corona unit and drum carriage.
2. Close the clamshell and cheat the front interlock switch.
3. To adjust the charge current, connect the special red meter lead to the second of four HV contact springs from the right.
4. Connect the black lead to frame ground.
5. Set meter to A DC.
6. Access the 47 mode (hold down 4 and 7 at power ON), output code 02.
7. Press START/PRINT, adjust VR1 to -500A DC.
8. Press STOP/CLEAR; connect the special red meter lead to the 3rd HV contact spring (transfer) from the right.
9. Enter output code 03 and adjust VR2 to -450A DC.
10. Press STOP/CLEAR; connect the special red meter lead to the 4th HV contact spring (separation) from the right.
11. Set meter to A AC.
12. Enter output code 04 and adjust VR3 to 500A AC.
Notes:
a. A special red meter lead with an in-line 10Mohm resistor (p/n LX15-0020) must be used in substitute of the standard red meter lead. A standard black
meter lead is still used for ground (GND).
b. VR1, VR2 and VR3 are to the left of the separation corona spring recessed in 3 small holes located the front frame.
VR1 is in the left hole, VR2 is in the right hole, and VR3 is the lower hole.
Description
Solution
CAUSE: Toner was added before performing L-detect during new machine setup. Refer to 2223 Technical Bulletin #1 .

SOLUTION: To prevent F26 error codes, perform the following:
1. Access the 47 mode (press the 4 and 7 keys simultaneously while powering the copier ON), output code 40 (approximately 3 minutes) to allow the excess
toner in the TDS area to mix with the developer.
2. If F26 reoccurs, replace the developer (PCUA 947226) and perform the L-detect adjustment again (47 mode, output code 51).
Note: L-detect must be performed before adding toner at new machine setup or toner addition will occur during the adjustment, resulting in a F26 code.
Description
P27 at power up.
Solution
25
1216
CAUSE: Incorrect toner concentration in the developing unit.
SOLUTION: Replace the developer and perform a L-detect adjustment. To adjust L-detect, perform the following:
1. Enter the 47 mode, output code 51.
2. Press the start/print button.
3. The number 51 flashes in the display for approximately 90 seconds.
4. When 51 stops flashing, the adjustment is complete.
5. Power the copier OFF/ON to exit the 47 mode.
Description
How to reset the drum counter.
Solution
To reset the drum counter, perform the following:
1. Access 47 mode (power ON while holding 4 and 7 keys), output code 91.
Note: To verify the drum count has been reset, hold the P key and press the 7 key. A two-digit number should flash (00) indicating the drum count X1000.
Description
Unable to select more than one copy at a time.
Solution
CAUSE: Copy quantity setting limit selection incorrect.
SOLUTION: To program copy quantity setting, perform the following:
2. Press P-13-P (Copy Quantity setting limit selection).
3. Press 0 (setting Max) unlimited.
Enter 0: MAX (unlimited up to 99)
Enter 1: 1 limit
Enter 2: 3 limit
Enter 3: 5 limit
Enter 4: 9 limit
Enter 5: 10 limit
Enter 6: 20 limit
Enter 7: 30 limit
Enter 8: 50 limit
Enter 9: 99 limit
26
1312
Description
Multi-feeding from Tray 1 resulting in paper feed jams (J 32).
Solution
CAUSE: Insufficient pressure applied to the paper feed stopping lever by the cam spring.
SOLUTION: There is a new style cam spring available for machines with serial numbers between 26ME19201 and 26ME19966. Replace cam spring (p/n
26MA45391).
Notes:
1. See 1312 Technical Bulletin #1 for complete installation instructions.
2. To view the PDF, Acrobat* Reader must be installed. Acrobat Reader can be downloaded for free from the Adobe* Web site at:
[[http://www.adobe.com/products/acrobat/readstep2.html| URL http://www.adobe.com/products/acrobat/readstep2.html]].
Description
How to clear a fuser abnormality code (F34, F35, F36).
Solution
To clear a fuser abnormality code, perform the following:
With the copier powered ON displaying the fuser failure code, simultaneously press and hold down the enlargement (up arrow) and reduction (down arrow)
keys for approximately 5 seconds until a destination code (US) is displayed.
2. Press 0 within 2 seconds after the destination code (US) is displayed. Note: Do not press 0 too fast.
3. Access the 25 mode (enter 2 then 5, from the keypad, and then press START PRINT).
a. [A- -] should now be displayed in the quantity window.
4. Enter address number 47, then press START PRINT.
5. Reset the fuser failure code data by pressing 0 twice, then press START PRINT.
6. Press the STOP/CLEAR button 3 times until the copier reverts to the normal mode.
Note: When the STOP/CLEAR button is pressed only once, the copier returns to the previous diagnostic state.
Description
P29 during copier operation.
Solution
CAUSE: Developing unit requires replacement. Copy count reaches 25,000 (steady P29) or toner is depleted from the developing unit (blinking P29 with
copier operation stopped).
SOLUTION: Replace the developing unit (PCUA 947157) and perform the initialization. To initialize the developing unit, perform the following:
1. With the copier powered ON, press the SELECT PAPER button for approximately 5 seconds. [C- -] is displayed in the quantity window.
2. Enter 5, then 1, with the keypad. Press the START PRINT button. The initialization process starts. [C51] is displayed in the quantity window.
Note: The process takes approximately 6 minutes.
3. On completion of the initialization, [C- -] appears again in the quantity window. Press the STOP/CLEAR button.
4. The copier reverts to normal operation.
Description
How to adjust exposure.
Solution
To adjust exposure, perform the following:
1. With the copier powered ON in the 1:1 copy mode, simultaneously press the enlargement and reduction keys for approximately 5 seconds.
2. When the destination code (US) is displayed, press 0 within 2 seconds. Note: Do not press 0 too fast.
3. Access the 36 mode (enter 3, then 6 from the keypad). [ACC] is displayed in the quantity display.
4. Enter the desired address (code) number, then press START PRINT.
CODE ADJ USTMENT
86 Center intensity (enlargement)
87 Center intensity (reduction)
88 Maximum intensity (life size)
89 Center intensity (life size)
90 Minimum intensity (life size)
5. Change the blinking setting data to the required data (adjustment range of 01 to 64 with a default of 32), then press START PRINT.
6. Press the START PRINT key again to make a test copy of the settings.
7. After copying, the status returns to step 5. Make any additional data adjustments, if required.
8. When adjustment is complete, press the STOP/CLEAR button until the copier reverts to the normal mode.
Note: When the STOP/CLEAR button is pressed only once, the copier returns to the previous diagnostic state.
27
1312
Description
Background on copies after doing a PM and replacing the drum.
Solution
CAUSE: Main erase lamp is worn or disconnected.
SOLUTION: Reseat drum and connectors, and/or replace the Main Erase Lamp (p/n 26MA10060).
Description
P26 after replacing developing unit.
Solution
CAUSE: Developing unit has not been initialized.
SOLUTION: To initialize the developing unit, perform the following:
Note: The process takes approximately 6 minutes.
Description
P24 during copier operation.
Solution
CAUSE: The number of copies on the drum unit has reached 24,500 (steady P24 and copier operation continues). Drum replacement interval is 25,000
sheets. When 500 sheets are copied after the steady P24, a change drum condition is indicated (blinking P24).
SOLUTION: Replace the drum unit (PCUA 947158) and perform initialization. To initialize the drum unit, perform the following:
Note: The process takes approximately 1 minute.
Description
How to enable/disable the power saving mode.
Solution
The power saver enable time is programmable from 2 minutes to 240 minutes (4 hours). If address 20 in the 25 mode is set to OFF, the power saving mode
is disabled. To program the power saving mode, perform the following:
1. With the copier powered ON in the 1:1 copy mode, simultaneously press the enlargement and reduction keys for approximately 5 seconds.
2. When the destination code (US) is displayed, press 0 within 2 seconds.
3. Access the 25 mode (enter 2, then 5 from the keypad). Press START PRINT. [A- -] is displayed in the quantity display.
5. Select and enter the desired time interval:
DATA TIME (minutes)
1 Address 62 setting takes precedence (default) [allows 30, 2, or 5 minute setting]
2 OFF (disabled)
3 60
4 120
5 240
Note: If a power save mode setting of 30 minutes or less is desired, data setting of 1 must be input at address 20, then skip step (6) and proceed from step
(7).
Press START PRINT to set the data.
8. Select and enter the desired time interval:
DATA TIME (minutes)
1 30 (default)
2 2
3 5
Press START PRINT to set the data.
28
1312
Description
Solution
Key counters are not compatible with this product and cannot be installed.
Description
d01' is displayed in the control panel window after replacing the main CB (p/n 26MA-9010).
Solution
CAUSE: The CB needs to be reset to factory defaults.
SOLUTION: To reset the CB to factory defaults perform the following:
1. Press and hold the "Enlarge" and "Reduce" keys for 5 seconds.
2. Press 0 within 2 seconds after the destination code is displayed.
3. Input 47 and press the Start Print key.
4. Input 92 and press the Start Print key (CLR will be displayed).
5. Press the Start Print key immediately.
6. The display will return to 01.
29
1512/112Z/1290RE
Description
Code 34.
Solution
2. Press 4-7-P on the keypad. (1, 4, 5, or 6 will be displayed on the copy quantity indicator).
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Old style temperature sensor installed. Install the new style (convex) temperature sensor (p/n 490088033) and perform the AES adjustment (47 mode,
code 98). See 1290RE Technical Bulletin #4C .
2. The lamp contact assemblies on the front and rear of the fusing unit are loose, resulting in poor lamp contact. Install the heater cover kit (p/n SE97-1990).
See 1290RE Technical Bulletin #10.
Kit contents:
PART NUMBER ITEM
392053233 Terminal cover (2)
5850-5410 Heater cover unit (front)
5850-5420 Heater cover unit (rear)
00Z153081 Screw (SEMS I, M3x8)
00Z163081 Screw (SEMS II, M3x8)
Note: Ensure that there are no power problems at the customer site.
Description
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Toner was not added by the user when the ADD TONER light came on. Add toner and perform 47 mode, output code 01 to tone up the developer.
2. The toner hopper is empty, however, the TLD sensor is coated with toner. In this case the TLD will not vibrate to indicate add toner. Check the voltage
reading from the TLD sensor at CN3-A2 on the main CB:
TLD coated with toner =+6.7 V DC.
TLD not coated = +4.1 V DC.
3. Check the TDS analog voltage to determine the toner concentration of the developer.
Use the 47 mode, code 40 while monitoring the ang signal at the main CB at CN3-A5 to GND. The voltages below indicate the condition of the developer:

4. No add toner indication due to short copy runs. ADD TONER will not be displayed unless the machine calls for toner at least seven times (consecutively)
during a run. If the TLD is audible, but the machine does not indicate ADD TONER, run about 10 copies in a row.
5. The corona currents are not set to specification. The drum currents and adjustment procedures are outlined in 1290RE Technical Bulletin #7 .
Charge: -510 10A DC
Transfer: -360 50A DC
Separation: 270 20A AC
6. The toner supply coupling is broken. No drive is imparted to the toner supply unit. Replace the toner supply coupling (p/n 392015640).
7. PCL lamp failure will result in residual charge buildup on the drum in multi-copy set resulting in high toner usage. The long term effect is reduced toner
concentration and developer failure (light copies). Replace the PCL (p/n 113687060).
30
1512/112Z/1290RE
8. Too many high density images (originals with 50% or more black image area) or sky shots run concurrently.
9. Damp paper can cause poor density. Install the dew prevention heater kit (p/n SE95-2560) to reduce the occurrence of damp paper.
10. The rear ladder chain has fallen off the ladder wheel within the toner supply unit. Causing the toner supply shaft not to turn. Replace the ladder chain.
11. The developer sleeve is not turning because the spring for the developer drive is worn or missing. Replace the developer arm spring (p/n 490015320).
Description
Code 24.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. One or more of the tungsten lamps within the PCL assembly are open. Replace the PCL assembly (p/n 113687060).
2. Drum carriage is not completely seated. Open the clamshell and reinsert the drum carriage.
3. Inspect the main CB, F1 (fuse). If open inspect the PCL wiring, repair as necessary. Replace the main CB (p/n 4900-9301).
Description
How to clear fuser abnormality codes (F34, F35, F36), 1290RE.
Solution
2. Press 4-7-P on the key pad. (1, 4, 5, or 6 will be displayed on the copy quantity indicator).
Description
Code 41. Only when AES is selected.
Solution
CAUSE: The optics photosensors are not being actuated properly.
SOLUTION: Install the beam cutter extension (p/n U081-2400) as outlined in 1290RE Technical Bulletin #5 .
SPECIAL NOTE: Solution provided by WILLIE GONZALEZ, COPIERS PLUS INC.
Description
J 31.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The upper guide pins that support the drum carriage may be bent up not allowing the rollers on the drum carriage to properly contact the 3rd feed rollers.
Reform the pins so they are straight.
2. The 3rd paper feed roller is dirty causing the paper to slip.
Clean the 3rd paper feed roller and the first feed rollers.
3. The front door interlock is not making proper contact with the switch.
Ensure the actuator mounted on the door is contacting the bar.
4. The actuator for the exit sensor PS7 is binding, or PS7 has failed.
Ensure the actuator moves freely. If necessary replace the photosensor (p/n 370085510).
5. The paper feed guide plate is warped.
Replace the paper feed guide plate (p/n 490040021).
6. The optic sensors are dirty.
Clean the optic sensors.
7. The upper fuser roller assembly is installed incorrectly. Paper is not conveyed properly through the fuser.
Ensure that the upper fuser assembly is installed on the inside of the lower assembly frame.
31
1512/112Z/1290RE
Description
Code 26 is displayed following the L-detect adjustment.
Solution
CAUSE: PCL failure. If an excessive amount of toner is found in the waste container of the new toner cartridge then the PCL is not operating correctly.
SOLUTION: The PCL should remain ON during L-detect to eliminate any drum charge condition. Replace the PCL lamp (p/n 113687060) and the developer
(PCUA 946182).
Clear the code 26 with a memory reset and perform the L-detect adjustment again.
To adjust L-detect, perform the following:
1. Access the 47 mode (power the copier ON while pressing the 4 and 7 keys), output code 51.
2. The copier should cycle for several minutes with [51] flashing in the quantity display.
3. When the copier stops cycling, a steady [51] is displayed signifying that the adjustment is successfully completed. If [26] is displayed, a problem occurred
during the adjustment.
Note: If the adjustment was run only one time, toner depletion should be minimal. Developer can be toned back up (47 mode, code 01).
Description
Code 45 shortly after power up.
Solution
CAUSE: A shorted bypass solenoid (SD2) or toner motor (M5) causes IC21 on the main CB to fail. The lens motor (M3) drive is affected, causing the failure
code.
SOLUTION: Replace SD2 (p/n 490082550) or M5 (p/n 4900-1610) and the main CB (p/n 4900-9303).
Description
Code 25.
Solution
CAUSE: The machine will indicate a flashing code 25 if 100 copies are run after the ADD TONER message is displayed.
SOLUTION: Add toner to the machine.
Description
Blank copies.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The corona(s) and/or HV unit(s) are arcing.
Rebuild or replace any arcing component.
2. The electrode ground plate for the transfer corona is not making good contact.
Reform or replace the electrode ground plate (p/n 490015370).
3. The drum carriage connector is not making good contact.
Clean and repair the drum carriage connection.
32
1515/1590/115S
Description
Solution
2. Press 4-7-P on the key pad. (1, 4, 5, or 6 will be displayed on the copy quantity indicator).
Description
F41 or F42 during copier operation.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Dust on the optics sensors, PS2, PS3, and PS4. Clean the optics sensors.
2. Older version EPROM installed. Install p/n 159013-13.4 (8.5x11R default) or p/n 159013-13.8 (8.5x11 default).
3. If the copier is not level (tilted toward the user) or the frame is deformed, the optics photosensors will not be actuated properly during operation. Verify that
the copier is level and the optics frame is not deformed. To verify proper optics sensor actuation, use the 47 mode code 30 (PS2, home) and code 31 (PS3,
restart) while moving the first mirror frame by hand.
4. 1st mirror to V-mirror distance is incorrect. To verfify, set the lateral magnification 0, is 1:1 OK? If not, adjust the 1st mirror to V-mirror position.
5. Poor AC power. If other devices are installed on the same AC line move the machine to another power source.
6. Failed optics motor (M2) and optics motor driver board (MDB). Replace M2 (p/n 490080080) and MDB (p/n 4900-9502) at the same time.
7. The drive gear (p/n 490015100) Is being stripped by M2 overdriving which is due to a failed motor driver board. All optics photosensors have been
checked for proper operation. Check the wiring and connectors from main CB, CN2 to MDB, CN85, and 86. If the wiring appears normal, replace the MDB
(p/n 4900-9500).
Description
How to change the paper size default selection.
Solution
Install EPROM (p/n 159013-13.8) for 8.5x11 default.
Install EPROM (p/n 159013-13.4) for 8.5x11R default.
Description
Drum damage.
Solution
CAUSE: The nylon DSD rollers on the developing unit have become damaged (shrink) due to developer leakage. The magnetic roller gets too close to the
drum, causing damage to the drum surface.
SOLUTION: Replace the drum casing (p/n 5520-K030).
Description
J 13 at power up, no PFU modules are installed.
Solution
CAUSE: CN11 from HV(A) was placed on CN203 of MCB. This can occur if the main CB or HV(A) was recently replaced or removed.
SOLUTION: Reseat CN11 on main CB. With no PFU modules installed, set the 25 mode, P86 to 0.
33
1515/1590/115S
Description
Toner spilling, overtoning.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The corona currents are not set to specification. Adjust corona currents as outlined in 1590 Technical Bulletin #9 .
- 600 10A (DC) =Charge
- 450 50A (DC) =Transfer
+265 20A (AC) =Separation
Note: To view the PDF, Acrobat* Reader must be installed. Acrobat Reader can be downloaded for free from the Adobe* Web site at:
[[http://www.adobe.com/products/acrobat/readstep2.html| URL http://www.adobe.com/products/acrobat/readstep2.html]]
2. PCL failure. Verify that the PCL is operating.
Install the new style LED type PCL lamp (p/n 029487061) as outlined in 1590 Technical Bulletin #17 .
3. Failed TDS (toner density sensor). If the TDS output voltage at CN3-A5 does not change regardless of whether toner is added or depleted (correct voltage
should be between 1.5V DC and 2.0V DC), then replace the TDS (p/n 029488110) and developer. Perform the L-detect adjustment (47 mode, code 51).
Description
F34, F35 or F36 at power up.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Old style TH1. Install new style sensor (p/n 508088034) per 1590 Technical Bulletin #14.
2. Lamp holder failure. Install new style lamp holders and terminal covers per 1590 Technical Bulletin #19.
Description
F26 at power up or following the L-detect adjustment.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. If the L-detect adjustment is performed with worn or depleted (not enough) developer. To determine the cause of F26, check the TDS analog signal at the
main CB CN3-A5 to GND while running the main motor (47 mode, output code 51):
0.5 to 1.5V DC =Overtoned (deplete some toner by running black copies).
1.5 to 2.0V DC =Normal
0.5V DC or less =No signal from the TDS sensor. Check the wiring from TDS to the main CB. Check the level of developer in the developer unit. Replace
the TDS sensor (p/n 029488110).
2.0 to 4.0V DC =Undertoned. Add toner using the 47 mode, output code 01.
4.0V DC or more =Extremely undertoned. Replace the developer. Verify that the PCL is operating. Install the new style LED type PCL lamp (p/n
029487061) as outlined in 1590 Technical Bulletin #17 .
2. The corona currents are not set to specification. Adjust corona currents as outlined in 1590 Technical Bulletin #9 .
- 600 10A (DC) =Charge
- 450 50A (DC) =Transfer
+265 20A (AC) =Separation
3. The L-detect adjustment was performed with a color developer unit installed. The L-detect adjustment (47 mode, output code 51) should only be
performed with the black developer unit installed. Insert the black unit and perform the L-detect adjustment.
Note: When F26 occurs, the machine only allows another attempt of the TDS adjustment. All other functions are inoperable until the memory is reinitialized
(47 mode, output code 92).
Description
How to configure cassettes for different sizes in the PFU unit(s).
34
1515/1590/115S
Solution
Buttons in position A, B and D allow for 8.5x11 recognition.
Buttons in position A and C allow for 8.5x11R recognition.
Button in position B allows 8.5x14 recognition.
Buttons in position A and D allow for 11x17 recognition.
Description
Erratic failure codes while copying (F85, J 13, J 12, F52).
Solution
CAUSE: The transfer and separation corona blocks are arcing or the corona shell is not grounded properly.
SOLUTION: Replace the corona blocks and wires. Clean the corona shell and ground contacts.
35
2028
Description
How to reset an F86 code.
Solution
F86 occurs when the waste toner collection box is full. To reset an F86 code, perform the following steps:
1. Install a new (or empty the) waste toner collection box .
2. Access the 47 mode (power the machine OFF, hold down the 4 and 7 keys, and power the machine ON).
3. Enter 94 using the keypad.
4. Press the start/print key.
Description
F41, F42, or F43.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. There is an open in the projection lamp (L1) circuit.
Use the 47 mode, output code 00 to verify if the lamp lights. Ohm the lamp circuit from CN393-3 to CN393-1, the value should be under 10 ohms. Check for
continuity of the lamp (p/n 25BA83010) and temperature fuse individually. If no faults are found, use the wiring diagram on page 3-19 in the service manual to
locate the open in the wiring.
2. F42 at the start of the copy cycle. Fuse F3 on the ACDB is open causing a loss of drive to the optics motor (M2). This fuse protects the 28V DC bus on
the board. Determine the cause of the open fuse. Possible causes include a shorted optics drive motor (M2), binding in the optics drive, or pinched wiring to
M2. After correcting the fault, replace the fuse (p/n E64311-11).
3. A worn or loose optics drive cable and tension spring will cause the optics to bounce out of the home position after a reverse scan.
Replace the cable (p/n 540061111) and tension spring (p/n 540061480) if more than 300,000 copies are on the copier.
Note: When replacing the optics cable, use the exposure unit positioning gauge (p/n 00M6-1-00). Ensure that the cable is routed correctly on the right rear
pulley. It should follow the rear groove on the pulley.
4. The first to second mirror frame position is incorrect. When the optics cable was replaced the optics positioning gauge (00M6-1-00) was not used.
When replacing the optics cable ensure that the exposure unit positioning gauge is used.
5. The set screw to the optics drive pulley (p/n 540061130) is loose, causing a loss of drive to the optics.
Tighten the set screw.
6. Reposition the brake sensor (PS4) to its leftmost position as viewed from behind the machine. This will allow more braking distance if the cable is worn.
7. The brake timing needs adjustment.
Set the brake timing to 1. Use the 36 mode, code 96.
8. The optics shaft and bushings are worn.
Replace the shaft (p/n 540061090) and (2) bushings (p/n 540076042) if the machine is over 600,000 copies.
9. The reflector and first mirror frame is contacting the frame or lens cover assembly during operation.
Use the 47 mode, output code 31 to run the optics and verify there is no contact.
10. The code occurs only when using the RADF and the ADU. The DC power supply is failing under load.
Check the 24V DC and 28V DC output from the DCPS while running the different copy modes (i.e., 1:1, 1:2, 2:1, 2:2). Replace the DC power supply (p/n
540084512) if the voltage drops occur under increased load conditions.
11. There is a poor connection from the main CB to the AC driver board. This prevents the optics from moving from the home position.
Remove and reseat CN69 on AC driver board and CN60 on the main CB.
12. The main relay (RL1) has failed. This may also cause an F55 code.
Replace RL1 (p/n 540088460).
13. An early style AC driver board is installed.
Install the latest AC driver board (p/n 5400-9085).
14. Premature failure of L1 (exposure lamp) due to excessive voltage. This is caused by an open F1 fuse on the ACDB.
Replace L1 (p/n 25BA83010) and the ACDB (p/n 5400-9085).
15. F43 when using the bypass (feeding 11x17). The optics slide shaft holder (p/n 540061430) is dislodged from the main reflector base assembly (p/n
5400-6129) and/or the optics slide shaft (p/n 540061090) is dirty. This causes the reflector base assembly to bind on the optics slide shaft, affecting optics
scan timing.
Reposition the optics slide shaft holder and/or clean the optics slide shaft. Lubricate the shaft with light oil (see Technical Education Bulletin #7A regarding
lubricant applications).
Note: When using the bypass the optics makes a complete scan with the exposure lamp ON.
36
2028
16. F43 as second copy is fed due to a failed or dirty T/S corona unit causing a power interruption (arcing).
Clean or replace the T/S corona (p/n 5400-2605).
Description
The LCD is blank, or the operation panel is locked up.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The lens and scanner do not initialize. The drive pulley (A) (p/n 540076531) is slipping on the lens motor (M7) shaft, or the belt (p/n 540077520) has
walked off the pulley and is lodged between the motor and the pulley. An interim repair for a slipping drive pulley (A) is to apply a small amount of instant
adhesive between the drive pulley and motor shaft. For a permanent repair, replace M7 with the new-style (p/n 25BA-7404). M7 must be used with the
new-style adjustable drive plate assembly (p/n 5400-6321). In addition, a new motor cover mylar (p/n 35AE61990) has been established to prevent M7 from
interfering with the cover of the door detect wiring. The mylar is placed onto the bottom of the motor. These newer parts can not be mixed with the original
parts. They must be used as a set.
Note: For more detail, refer to Parts Information Bulletin #81.
2. An operation panel without a modified LCD is installed. See 2028 Technical Bulletin #83A to identify and modify the op panel with a new style LCD.
3. Verify that the operation panel is properly secured to the copier. Reseat any loose connections to the operation panel and secure it tightly to the main
body.
4. A faulty harness from the operation panel CN212 to CN67 on the main CB. Repair as necessary, or replace the harness (p/n 540090010).
Description
How to program ECM, 2028.
Solution
To program the ECM, perform the following:
1. Power the machice OFF.
2. While holding down the 2 and 5 buttons, power the machine ON.
3. Enter the 8-digit master key code starting at address P72 through P79. Valid data is 0 through 9 at each address, press the start print button to enter the
new data.
4. Set address P05 in the 25 mode (ECM limit features) based on key operators request.
0: ECM disabled.
1: ECM enabled (no stop at limit).
3: ECM enabled (natural stop at limit).
5: ECM enabled (forced stop at limit).
5. In standby mode hold down P then press 9, enter the Master Key Code. Access the following setting modes to perform the ECM functions:
1: Password Set.
Create up to 20 5-digit individual passwords, from 01 to 20.
2: Limit Copy Count.
Limit copy count for each password to a maximum of 999,999 copies.
3: Read Copy Count.
Read the current copy count for each password.
4: Account Reset.
Reset the copy count and copy limit for all passwords or selected passwords.
Description
Light copies.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The end user did not add toner when the copier displayed ADD TONER. The end user expects the copies to darken immediately. Run the 47 mode,
output code 01 for 45 seconds, then make copies. Check at main CB CN8-B8 for 24V DC and CN8-B9 for a change of state while doing 47 mode output 01
and start/print button.
2. The developer unit bias clip is malformed and is not making proper contact with the bias pin. Reform the clip to ensure proper contact with the pin.
3. The toner motor (M6) and main CB have failed (M6 will not operate in the 47 mode, output code 01). If the machine was moved with a full toner hopper,
the toner will pack down in the hopper and bind the auger. This will cause M6 to bind, fail and short TR24 on the main CB. Replace the main CB (p/n
5762-9016) and M6 (p/n 197080011 - new style; s/n cut-in 576211850 or p/n 396080042 - old style) at the same time.
Note: The new style motor is larger (3135 style) and requires a larger mounting bracket (p/n 540032381) and shroud (p/n 540032191).
Do not fill the toner hopper if the machine is to be moved.
4. No ADD TONER indication is displayed because the 25 mode, P71 is set to 2. Set address 71 to 0 or 1 for ADD TONER to be indicated after 100 (0) or
1000 (1) copies after the TLD element begins vibrating.
5. The CVR is at the darkest setting (value of 01) and the copies are light. The drum counter does not match the number of copies on the drum or the drum
37
2028
has exceeded 150,000 copies. The drum counter is boosting the CVR. Verify that the drum is new, set the corona currents and reset the drum counter (47
mode, code 91).
6. No toner addition during copy process. (M6 will run in 47 mode, code 01). The drum counter was not set to the current drum copy count after performing
47/92. Reset drum counter (25 mode, P39 to 44) to the correct drum count.
7. The zener diode has failed. Inspect the image on the drum surface, if light monitor the voltage drop across the zener diode. If the voltage measured is
less than about 730V DC, replace the zener diode (p/n 540088341). Also, inspect the charge corona unit (p/n 5400-2500), replace if necessary. Then set the
charge current (47/02/P to display or change the current data; set value to -600 30V DC ).
8. Drum fatigue, old or worn drum. Replace the drum (PCUA 947542).
9. There is no developer bias voltage output at CN65-1 on the main CB. There should be -150V DC when running the 47 mode, output code
10. Check for a cold solder joint. If necessary, replace the main CB (p/n 5762-9082).
Description
Incorrect paper size, indicates special. Will not recognize the universal trays.
Solution
CAUSE: The data in the 25 mode, for paper size is incorrect.
SOLUTION: In the 25 mode, set the data for P67 for the correct combination of main body paper trays.
0: Both upper, and lower trays are conventional.
1: Upper tray is universal, and lower tray conventional.
2: Upper tray is conventional, and lower tray universal.
3: Both upper, and lower trays are universal.
Description
Half copies using the RADF; only with APS and AES deselected.
Solution
CAUSE: This is an EPROM bug. It only occurs with a 2028/ST205S sorter combination.
SOLUTION: New EPROMs are available. See 2028 Technical Bulletin #89A ,.
Order (p/n 202812-21.13), and (p/n 202813-21.13). The RADF EPROM must be (p/n DF30530-14.2). The sorter EPROM must be (p/n ST20563-18.0).
Description
Blank copies.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. If the old style toner motor M6 (p/n 396080040) is installed, troubleshoot it for proper operation and perform a resistance check, as follows: take resistance
readings at 3 different points, 120 ohms apart, of one rotation of the motor. These readings should be within 5 ohms of each other. If these readings are out
of specification, replace the motor (p/n 396080042). Install the polyswitch (p/n 5400K0270), if necessary. See Technical Bulletin #79A, dated 2/22/95.
2. Remove the transfer/separation corona unit and clean thoroughly (use soap and warm water on the plunging arrestor [separation bridge]). Slightly stretch
the electrode contact springs (p/n 540026040) to ensure proper contact.
3. With a multimeter, measure the resistance between each corona wire and its corresponding contact spring. The readings must not exceed 12 ohms. See
Technical Bulletin #17A, dated 4/26/93.
4. Verify that the transfer ground springs (p/n 540026071) located on the underside of the ground plate, are formed so that the proper contact is made with
the guide plate (p/n 540045331).
5. Remove the transfer guide plate (p/n 5400-4550) and verify that the spark arrester mylar sheet (p/n 540045150) is positioned correctly and shows no sign
of wear. The overlap should be a consistent 0.5 to 1.0mm for the entire length, which can be checked using a steel pocket ruler. If reusing the guide plate,
clean it with alcohol, then apply Brillianize*. Ensure that all the toner and debris are removed from the arrester mylar sheet and the underside of the plate.
6. No image on the drum. HVA contact spring fell off.
Set the corona currents to specification. See Technical Bulletin #86.
7. Replace the transfer/separation corona unit (p/n 5400-2605) if cleaning it did not resolve the problem.
8. Check CN5 on the main CB. Ensure that the wiring is not pinched.
9. Check the terminal block for signs of arcing. If arcing is evident, or an old style block is installed, replace it with the new style white block (p/n 540073231).
38
2028
10. Check the drum wiring connector (CN50 [p/n 5400K0190]) for cracks; replace it if necessary.
11. Check for corrosion on the electrode guide plate (p/n 540045331).
12. Check for an open fuse (F2) on the main CB. Packed or binding toner may cause this fuse to blow.
13. With a multimeter, check for zener diode failure on the drum carriage. Enter the 47 mode, address 02, and press the print button. A value of -600 to
-800V DC should be read across the diode.
14. Verify that all ozone filters (p/n 540073050) have been replaced during preventive maintenance.
15. Troubleshoot HV(B) (p/n 540084022) for arcing and proper grounding by checking for loose screws along the grounding path for the HV(B). Replace the
unit if necessary.
16. Verify the drum ground:
a. Clean the drum shaft and flanges.
b. Apply conductive grease sparingly (see Technical Bulletin #45).
c. Ensure the charging ground plate (p/n 540020310) is making good contact.
Description
DF305, J 62 .
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The entrance sensor (PS302) is not adjusted to the correct voltage or has failed.
To check/adjust PS302, perform the following:
a. Adjust VR1 to 0.3V DC using CN906-7 and TP3 (ground).
b. Adjust VR1 on the RADF CB two graduations past the point where LED 1 lights.
If unable to adjust or the problem persists, ensure that the reflector plate (p/n 048040100) is attached to the main bottom plate (p/n 048012030). If reflector is
not missing or mispositioned, replace PS302 (p/n 016085550).
2. The feed system is not adjusted to specifications. Perform the following adjustments illustrated in the DF305 service manual:
a. Adjust the clearance of the original pressure plate and feed belt to 9mm.
b. Adjust the original pressure plate spring tension to 220g with a 5mm plate deviation.
c. Adjust the pressure of the double feed prevention roller to 250g.
d. Stack 2 sheets of paper between the feed belt and the double feed prevention roller.
e. Press the green lever on the underside of the RADF to release the driven roller.
f. With a gram gauge slowly pull the bottom sheet from the bottom of the RADF.
g. Adjust the double feed prevention height until the force required to pull the paper is 250g. Note: The adjustment pages of the service manual should
have a revision level of at least 2/93.
3. The foam pad located in the center of the platen pressure plate (p/n 048040121) is worn. Replace the foam pad (p/n 048040520) and the platen pressure
seat (p/n 048040510).
4. The original feed solenoid (SD301) has failed. Note: SD301 may have caused fuse F2 to open on the RADF CB. Replace SD301 (p/n 048082530).
Replace the RADF CB (p/n 5670-9001) if F2 is open.
5. The mounting posts that support M301 may become broken or cracked due to vibrations that occur during shipment/transportation.
All DF305 units within serial number range (048181365 through 048186490) must be inspected at the next PM or service call. Refer to [[DF305 Technical
Bulletin #11|IMAGE v:\bitmaps\djc156.bmp SCROLL]] for details regarding inspection/repair for this symptom.
To repair the motor mounts, perform the following:
a. Install the collars (p/n U091-9630) to repair the cracked mounting posts. The instructions for the repair kit are included in the kit. The 5 minute epoxy
required to install the metal collars must be purchased locally.
b. Install the rubber holder part on top of the motor.
I. Clean the underside of the metal cover (cover/B) and the top of M301 with alcohol.
II. Remove the small adhesive strip from the bottom of the rubber holder.
III. Mount the rubber holder on the motor (adhesive strip from front to rear).
IV. Position the motor so that the drive belts are perpendicular to the drive gear.
V. Remove the large adhesive strip on the top of the rubber holder.
VI. Carefully reinstall the metal cover (you get one chance).
The metal cover and rubber holder will now support M301 and eliminate vibrations resulting in noise and misfeeding.
Description
ST206, J 72.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The paper drags on the front side of the paper deflect plate (p/n 074045070). This is due either to incorrect zoning of the main body paper drawer or
39
2028
incorrect positioning of the deflect plate. The problem usually effects 8.5x11 paper only. Verify that the paper drawer is zoned correctly. If so, reposition the
deflect plate by placing a stopper ring (p/n 396040680) between the bushing (p/n 074075540) and the C-clip on the rear frame side of the deflect plate. This
will shift the plate to the rear frame of the sorter.
2. The encoder sensor (PS206) and encoder disc are dirty. Clean PS206 and the encoder disc.
3. The home position sensor (PS203) has failed. The bins are in the home position but PS203 is not detecting that the bins are there. CN14-2 (PS203 input
signal) on the sorter CB should read 5V DC when flagged. If necessary replace PS203 (p/n 074084030).
4. The staple guide bar is overdriving. Adjust the staple guide bar movement. See the ST206 service manual page 17. Ensure the guide bar home sensor
(PS207) is not dirty. If so, clean PS207. Also verify the guide bar motor (M203) is not out of position. If necessary adjust the mounting position of M203.
5. CN6 on the sorter CB is loose, not allowing the signal to be input from the guide bar sensor (PS207). Reseat connector 6 on the sorter CB.
6. CN7 on the sorter CB is loose causing no input from the entrance sensor (PS204), and the conveyance sensor (PS205). Reseat CN7 on the sorter CB.
7. The conveyance motor (M201) is not operating. M201 runs in diagnostics but the two conveyance sensors do not sense a jam condition. CN7 on the
sorter CB is damaged or obstructed. Clean, repair and reseat the connector.
8. The stapler jaws are jammed closed by jammed staples. Repair the stapler.
40
2124/3032/3132/3290/320Z
Description
No power.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Drum unit is not fully inserted into the machine. Reinsert the drum carriage completely into the machine.
2. Loose CN300 on DCPS resulting in no AC to DCPS. Reseat CN300.
3. No DC output voltage from the DCPS at CN7. AC input at CN300 is OK. Replace the DCPS (p/n 340284032).
Description
P51 at power up or in idle.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The front door is not closed completely. Close the front door completely.
2. No 24V DC to the AC driver board. The white wires on RL2-2 are placed on the wrong contacts following replacement of RL1 and RL2. Reposition the
wiring to RL2.
3. The fuser temperature fuse (F2) has failed. Replace F2 (p/n 4500-5430).
Description
DF301, J 65.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Main CB failure. PS305 (original reverse detecting) changes from HI to LO at CN23-5 on the main CB, but it does not operate internally as verified in 47
mode, code 64. Replace the main CB (p/n 4502-9071) or (p/n 5302-9070 [3290M]).
2. The DF ground strap is disconnected causing static to build up. Reconnect the ground strap.
3. A faulty ADF DB was causing the improper operation of the DF301. After cleaning and verifying the operation of all photosensors and that all voltages are
present on the ADF DB, replace the ADF DB (p/n 108087050).
Description
P71 at power up. No sorter is installed.
Solution
CAUSE: The sorter was recently removed and the hardware dipswitches on the main CB were left ON.
SOLUTION: Turn off hardware dipswitches 2 and 3 on the main CB when no sorter is attached.
Description
F52.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Relay RL1 on the AC driver board will not energize. The 24V DC on the AC driver board is present. When RL1 is physically actuated, M8 and M10 will
run but M1 will only hum with no movement. Replace M1 (p/n 4502-9010) and the AC driver board (p/n 450287101) or (p/n 530287100 [3290M]) as set.
2. There is no 24 V DC at the AC driver board CN201-1. This is caused by a loose pin on CN16. Reseat the connection at CN16.
3. No change of state from the encoder sensor (PS2) at CN 5-2. Clean or replace PS2.
4. Main motor (M1) or main CB failure. Determine whether M1 will turn ON in diagnostics, 47, output code 50. If the motor turns ON, check the M1 control
signal at the MCB CN8-2. If no change of signal state replace the MCB (p/n 4502-9070).
If M1 does not rotate, remove the main motor from the drive system and again turn on M1 in diagnostics 47 mode output code 50.
If M1 does not rotate check the AC voltage at the ACDB. Measure across CN203 pins 6 and 8. In the 47 mode outpit code 50 the reading should be 0 prior
to pressing the print button. Upon pressing the print button the AC V should read around 100 AC V. If the AC V is measured, M1 has failed. Replace M1,
(p/n 4502-9010).
41
2124/3032/3132/3290/320Z
Description
How to program auto shut-off.
Solution
To program auto shut-off, perform the following steps:
1. Power the copier OFF.
2. Power ON the copier while holding down the 2 and 5 buttons.
3. Input 62 from the key pad.
4. Press the P key.
5. Input the desired data:
0 =no shut off
1 =2 minutes
2 =6 minutes
3 =10 minutes.
6. Press the start/print key to set the changed data.
7. Turn the copier OFF/ON.
Description
How to adjust the projection lamp intensity (CVR).
Solution
To adjust the exposure intensity, perform the following:
1. Open the rear cover.
2. Locate the CVR board at the top center of the rear cover, to the left of the main CB.
3. Locate the variable resistor labeled V.ADJ on the CVR board.
4. Turn the machine power on.
5. Make a copy of the potential test chart (p/n 00VD-2002).
6. Adjust the variable resistor until the 0.1 blocks of the chart are not visible but the 0.2 blocks are.
7. Close the rear cover.
Description
The cooling fans continue to run more than 30 minutes after the copier is powered OFF.
Solution
CAUSE: The cooling fans generate electrical noise which effects the timing circuit for fan shut-off.
SOLUTION: Install the surge killer kit (SE97-1440) as outlined in 3290 Technical Bulletin #4A .
Note: This does not apply to the 3290M.
Description
P91 at power up.
Solution
CAUSE: The paper delivery section (exit) or the ADU unit is not fully inserted.
SOLUTION: Verify that the paper delivery unit and ADU unit are fully installed.
Description
F41 or F42.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. PS5 (brake timing) sensor is not changing state. Verify PS5 operation using 47 mode, input code 32. If there is no change in state when PS5 is flagged,
replace it (p/n 370085510).
2. A faulty optics drive motor (M2) caused the optics motor control board (M2CB) to fail leading to the failure codes. Ensure that all optics photosensors are
clean and operating correctly. Ensure that 24V is present at CN77-1 and 5V at CN76-2 on M2CB. Replace M2 (p/n 340080081). If problem persists, replace
M2CB (p/n 3400-7370).
42
2125
Description
How to program auto shut-off and 1:2 mode default.
Solution
For 1:1 default, set 25 mode, P55 to 1 (minimum level 12.0 EPROM required on the main CB).
Auto shut-off can be disabled by a Konica trained technician if this mode represents a hardship for the customer due to their particular usage patterns.
To defeat auto shut-off for a model 2125, perform the following steps:
1. Install EPROM (p/n 212512-14.6) in the main CB at IC2.
Note: EPROM (p/n 212513-14.0) must be installed at IC3.
2. Set 25 mode, P62 to:
3 =120 minute auto shut-off
5 =NO auto shut-off
The limitations of this firmware are outlined in 2125/2130 Technical Bulletin #13 .
Small size originals will be detected as 8.5x11.
The auto reset function will not occur if the sorter is selected.
The APS adjustment, 47-99, has been eliminated.
Note: If the machine resets to the default settings after installing the correct firmware and programming the 25 mode as listed above, reseat the two EPROMs
and the memory IC.
Description
Blank copies and/or F28 occurring while copying.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The T/S unit is dirty and arcing. Remove the transfer/separation corona unit and clean it thoroughly (use soap and warm water on the plunging arrestor
[separation bridge]). Slightly stretch the electrode contact springs (p/n 540026040) to ensure that there is proper contact. If necessary, rebuild the corona
unit with new redesigned parts as outlined in 2125/2130 Technical Bulletin #15 .
2. High resistance between the corona wire and HV unit. Measure the resistance between each corona wire and contact spring. Readings should be below
12+. Replace the transfer/separation corona unit (p/n 5400-2605), if cleaning it did not resolve the problem.
3. The transfer ground springs (located on the underside of the ground plate [p/n 540026071]) are dirty or deformed.
Reform the spring so that the proper contact is made with the electrode guide plate (p/n 540045331). Also, that ensure no corrosion has built up on the
electrode guide plate. Sand the buildup away with emery paper to ensure good ground path contact.
4. The spark arrestor mylar sheet (p/n 540045150) is dislodged. Remove the transfer guide plate (p/n 5400-4550) and verify that the spark arrestor mylar
sheet is positioned correctly and shows no sign of wear. The overlap should be a consistent 0.5 to 1.0mm for the entire length, which can be checked using a
steel pocket ruler. Clean the guide plate with alcohol, then apply Brillianize*. Ensure that all the toner and debris are removed from the arrestor mylar sheet
and the underside of the plate.
5. If the corona currents are set incorrectly, set the corona currents to specification. Refer to [[2125/2130 Technical Bulletin #7| IMAGE
V:\bitmaps\djc019.bmp SCROLL].
6. Pinched wiring to CN5 on the main CB. Repair and reposition the wiring harness.
7. The high voltage terminal block is arcing. If any arcing is evident, or an old style block (black) is installed, replace it with the new style white block (p/n
540073231).
8. Cracked drum wiring connector (CN50) located on the rear frame of the copier. Replace the connector (p/n 5400K0190) if it is damaged.
9. Corrosion on the electrode guide plate (p/n 540045331). Clean or replace the guide plate.
10. If F2 on the main CB is open due to packed or binding toner. Verify that M6 (toner motor) is not shorted or binding. Perform a resistance check to the
motor (approximately 41 ohms). Replace F2 fuse.
11. Zener diode failure. Check the zener diode located on the drum carriage for failure by using the 47 mode, code 02.
Carefully measure across the zener diode. A value of -600 to -800V DC should be read.
12. Poor HV(A) or HV(B) unit ground. Install star washers at all grounding points.

13. Cold solder joint in HV(A). If no image is present on the drum, check R26 on HV(A) for cold solder joints.
14. HV(A) or HV(B) failure. Check the corona currents to verify Charge, transfer and separation corona current output. Replace HV(A) (p/n 540084012) if no
43
2125
charge is measured or HV(B) (p/n 35AE84020) if transfer or separation currents are not measureable.
Description
The lead edge half of copy is faded. The remainder of the copy has proper density.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Failed electrode input connector (white block) and possible HV(B) failure. Replace the electrode connector (p/n 540073231). Then replace HV(B) (p/n
35AE84020] if necessary.
2. The charge correction board ground plate is not making full contact with drum shaft. Reform the ground plate and insure proper ground to the charge
correction board.
Description
Solution
3. Enter 94 using the key pad.
Description
F43 or F55.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. CN29 is not fully connected on the CVR board. Reconnect CN29.
2. Poor connection the the paper feed restart sensor (PS4). Verify PS4 using the 47 mode, input code 38. Inspect the connections and wiring from PS4 to
the main CB. Replace PS4 (p/n 540085510) if necessary.
3. A loose pin on CN391. CN391 is a 6 pin connector using only 5 pins it located on the left side of the operation panel.
This connector is part of the AC loop connecting the main switch, interlock switches and main relay (RL1). Ensure all pins on CN391 are fully seated.
4. Relay 1 failure. Ensure that there is 24V DC between the red and blue wires on the relay to energize the coil. If the relay is energized, there should be
115V AC hot measured from each black wire on the relay to the AC neutral. Replace RL1 (p/n 540088460).
5. After optics reset at power up, L1 stays ON. This causes L1 to open and F2 on the ACDB to open. The F55 is then displayed. Remove the fuser unit and
ensure that it is moving freely and that the main drive is rotating freely. Replace L1 (p/n 25BA83010) and F2 with a properly rated 3.15A fuse.
6. CVR failure. Check the L1 FB signal at the main CB CN28-1. The signal should be HI in idle mode with power applied. If the signal is LO, the CVR is
dragging down the 5V DC from the main CB. Replace the CVR (p/n 540083510).
7. Open exposure lamp (F43 code ONLY).
Verify by removing L1 and checking it for continuity. Replace the exposure lamp (p/n 25BA83010).
Note: Install L1 with the end that has the manufacturer's label toward the front of the main body, and the sealing tip (nipple) pointing away from the reflector,
toward the paper exit side.
Description
Light copies.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. At installation, if the CVR is set to a low data value (00 or 01) and the baffles are closed significantly, the CVR can be adjusted to compensate.
As a temporary countermeasure, perform the following:
a. Clean locking material, on the CVR board, from VR1; access 36 mode, code 80, PRINT; set P5 (CVR data) to 64.
b. Reset the drum counter.
c. Place meter leads, on the CVR board, between CN393-3 (gray) and CN393-1 (black).
d. Access 47 mode, code 00, PRINT.
e. Turn VR1 until 57V AC is indicated on the meter. CCW to decrease; CW to increase.
44
2125
f. Power off and lock VR1.
Note: If the adjustment does not change the copy quality, replace the CVR board (p/n 540083510).
2. The PTL lamp is ON. The PTL should only be ON in extremely high humidity environments or copy quality problems will occur.
To turn the lamp OFF, set 25 mode, P11 to 0.
3. 16lb paper is the main paper source. 20lb paper is OK.
If 16lb paper is the main source, then set transfer and separation currents to the lower value, but stay within specification.
Transfer -90 30A DC (do not go below -60)
Separation 305 30A AC (do not go below -275)
Note: Setting these values lower will adversely effect the performance of 20lb and higher.
4. No toner addition during copy cycle or in diagnostics (47 mode, output code 01). The drum carriage is not completely inserted.
Reseat the drum carriage and inspect CN50 (rear of the machine) and CN12 (below the operation panel, above the toner hopper) for proper connection.
5. No toner addition during copy cycle. The toner motor (M6) operates normally in diagnostics.
Debris is covering PS1 or it failed. Inspect and clean PS1. If the problem persists, replace PS1 (p/n 540088040).
6. Incorrect toner was added to the copier.
Purge the developing/toning system and add the correct supplies.
7. The developing bias is out of adjustment.
Adjust the developing bias to -150V DC. To adjust the bias, perform the following:
a. Adjust the bias shift level to LO by pressing the P key and the 0 key at the same time.
b. Power the machine OFF.
c. Connect the positive lead of the multimeter to CN65-1 and ground (TP6) of the main CB.
d. Set the multimeter range to read 200V DC.
e. Use 47 mode, output code 10.
f. Adjust VR1 on the main CB to achieve -150V DC.
g. Press the Stop/Clear button.
h. Power OFF/ON to exit the 47 mode.
Description
F23 while copying.
Solution
CAUSE: The toner hopper is binding.
SOLUTION: Verify that the agitator plate assembly (p/n 5400-3322) is attached to the toner agitator shaft (p/n 540032171).
To verify that the motor and main CB are operational, remove the toner motor from the drive gears. Then, check the operation using the 47 mode, code 01, to
spin the motor.
Caution: If the toner in the hopper is stirred with a screwdriver, the agitator plate assembly can become dislodged. If this occurs, the hopper will function
normally for a while before binding reoccurs.
Description
ST102, J 32 or J 72. Accordion jam occurs at the sorter entrance.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Fuse F1 on the sorter CB and fuse F4 on the main CB (28V DC) are open. If either fuse is open check M201 for binding. If necessary replace M201 (p/n
197580011).
2. The sorter entrance guide plate is deformed, interfering with the paper. Reform the guide plate.
3. The paper pass detect photosensor (PS201) is dirty, misaligned or requires adjustment. Clean PS201 (located in the bottom of the sorter frame cavity)
and adjust while in idle mode:
a. Turn VR3 fully clockwise (LED 1 should be off or dim).
b. Then turn VR3 counterclockwise until LED 1 lights.
c. Adjust VR3 scale two gradations past the point where the LED lights.
If the adjustment cannot be performed (no change of state), replace PS201 (p/n 059085510) and LED201 (p/n 059085530).
4. Damaged sorter bins. If the bin mounting clips break, the (paper) bracket guides (p/n 059046110) will not covey paper into the individual bins. Replace
the damaged sorter bins (p/n 059046160)
Note: To remove the bins, lift them up in front before pulling them out; this releases the clips.
5. Erroneous data in memory. Perform memory reinitialization ( 47 mode, code 92).
Caution: Drum and PM counters; CVR, registration and lead edge deletion data will be set to initial values.
6. Model 2130 EPROMs are installed. Feed timing is affected, as well as sorter operation. Replace EPROMs with those for the model 2125. If problems
45
2125
remain, replace the main CB (p/n 35AE-9010).
7. The drive motor speed is not set correctly. To adjust M201 (ST102 only) speed, use 47 mode, code 70. Set the voltage between TP7 and TP1 to 1.55V
DC 0.5. To increase the motor speed turn VR2 clockwise.
8. If the paper speed appears to slow down as the copy enters the bins, the conveyance system may be binding which causes the drive motor (M201) to
labor, resulting in IC13 on the sorter CB to heat up and possibly fail. Confirm that the vertical conveyance belt and drive belt are not too tight and check for
binding in the sorter conveyance system:
With power OFF, rotate the conveyance motor by hand and check for binding or varying tension and repair. If necessary, replace the sorter CB (p/n
0590-9011; p/n 0590-9011 (ST102A)) and M201 (p/n 197580011) AS A SET. Ensure that no drive system binds exist prior to replacement.
Description
Corona current specifications.
Solution
MODEL 2125 drum currents:
Charge (-680 30A DC)
Transfer (-90 30A DC)
Separation (305 30A AC)
2125/2130 corona currents adjustment chart.
Description
ST205S, J 72.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Sorter drive system binding or PS202 set incorrectly. Adjust PS202 per ST205/205S Technical Bulletin #5A. Clean and lubricate the bushings in the
main drive system. See Technical Education Bulletin #7A regarding lubricant applications.
2. Sorter CB dipswitches are set incorrectly. Set the sorter CB dipswitches to: 1-1 ON; 2, 3, 4 OFF.
46
2130
Description
Solution
For 1:1 default, set 25 mode, P55 to 1 (minimum level 13.0 EPROM required on the main CB).
Per. 2125/2130 Technical bulletin 2.
Auto shut-off can be disabled by a Konica trained technician if this mode represents a hardship for the customer due to their particular usage patterns.
To defeat auto shut-off, perform the following steps:
1. Install EPROM (p/n 213012-15.5) in the main CB at IC2.
2. Set 25 mode, P62 to:
5 =NO auto shut-off
The limitations of this firmware are outlined in 2125/2130 Technical Bulletin #13 ,.
This EPROM must be used with 213013-15.0 at IC3 on the main CB.
Small size originals will be detected as 8.5x11.
The auto reset function will not occur if the sorter is selected.
The APS adjustment, 47-99, has been eliminated.
Description
Blank copies and/or F28 occurring while copying.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The T/S unit is dirty and arcing. Remove the transfer/separation corona unit and clean it thoroughly (use soap and warm water on the plunging arrestor
[separation bridge]). Slightly stretch the electrode contact springs (p/n 540026040) to ensure that there is proper contact. If necessary, rebuild the corona
unit with new redesigned parts as outlined in 2125/2130 Technical Bulletin #15 .
2. High resistance between the corona wire and HV unit. Measure the resistance between each corona wire and contact spring. Readings should be below
12+. Replace the transfer/separation corona unit (p/n 5400-2605), if cleaning it did not resolve the problem.
3. The transfer ground springs (located on the underside of the ground plate [p/n 540026071]) are dirty or deformed.
Reform the spring so that the proper contact is made with the electrode guide plate (p/n 540045331). Also, that ensure no corrosion has built up on the
electrode guide plate. Sand the buildup away with emery paper to ensure good ground path contact.
4. The spark arrestor mylar sheet (p/n 540045150) is dislodged. Remove the transfer guide plate (p/n 5400-4550) and verify that the spark arrestor mylar
sheet is positioned correctly and shows no sign of wear. The overlap should be a consistent 0.5 to 1.0mm for the entire length, which can be checked using a
steel pocket ruler. Clean the guide plate with alcohol, then apply Brillianize*. Ensure that all the toner and debris are removed from the arrestor mylar sheet
and the underside of the plate.
5. The corona currents are set incorrectly. Set the corona currents to specification. Refer to 2125/2130 Technical Bulletin #7 .
6. Pinched wiring to CN5 on the main CB. Repair and reposition the wiring harness.
7. The high voltage terminal block is arcing. If any arcing is evident, or an old style block (black) is installed, replace it with the new style white block (p/n
540073231).
8. Cracked drum wiring connector (CN50) located on the rear frame of the copier. Replace the connector (p/n 5400K0190) if it is damaged.
9. Corrosion on the electrode guide plate (p/n 540045331). Clean or replace the guide plate.
10. If F2 on the main CB is open due to packed or binding toner. Verify that M6 (toner motor) is not shorted or binding. Perform a resistance check to the
motor (approximately 41 ohms). Replace F2 fuse.
11. Zener diode failure. Check the zener diode located on the drum carriage for failure by using the 47 mode, code 02.
Carefully measure across the zener diode. A value of -600 to -800V DC should be read.
12. Poor HV(A) or HV(B) unit ground. Install star washers at all grounding points.

13. Cold solder joint in HV(A). If no image is present on the drum, check R26 on HV(A) for cold solder joints.
14. HV(A) or HV(B) failure. Check the corona currents to verify Charge, transfer and separation corona current output. Replace HV(A) (p/n 540084012) if no
charge is measured or HV(B) (p/n 35AE84020) if transfer or separation currents are not measureable.
47
2130
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
When adding toner, make sure toner cartridge has 2125, 2130, 3135, 4145, 4155 or 4255 (PCUA 947-228)
1. Remove the thin clear/pinkish plastic shield.
2. Insert cartridge as directed on label onto the toner hopper.
3. Pull the green slide toward you, away from the copier, this motion will unlock both the toner cartridge, and the toner box.
4. Tap on all sides of the cartridge (do not squeeze).
5. When a hollow sound is heard, slide green slide towards the copier, and remove the empty cartridge.
6. The empty cartridge can be discarded in the trash.
Note: If the customer has difficulty moving the green toner lever when adding toner, remove the toner cartridge and place a small amount of pressure on the
toner hopper inlet plate. While pressing the inlet plate, move the green lever away from its location. Advise customer to move the lever back and forth a few
times before installing the toner cartridge.
Description
ST205S, J 72.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The programming is incorrect. On the sorter CB, ensure that hardware dipswitch 1-1 is ON, and all other switches are OFF. In the 25 mode, ensure that
software dipswitches P03, and P59 are set to 5.
2. The exit sensor (PS202) is out of adjustment. Perform the sensor adjustment.
a. Power OFF the copier and remove the rear cover to expose the sorter CB.
b. Check PS202 for dust or dirt; clean as required.
c. Turn VR1 on the sorter CB fully clockwise.
d. Set hardware dipswitches 1, and 2 to the ON position. Close all covers, including the lower linked interlock (MS203).
e. Power ON the copier while pressing SW1 on the sorter CB. Press SW1 seven times; this will cause the indexer to begin to lower. When the indexer
has reached the 11th, 12th, or 13th bin, press SW1 again to stop the lowering of the indexer.
f. Turn VR1 on the sorter CB fully counterclockwise; LED A should be OFF. If not, block the LED 202 light path to PS202 with a piece of copy paper.
g. Turn VR1 clockwise very slowly until LED A lights; then, continue turning one mark beyond that point.
h. Reset hardware dipswitches 1 and 2, reinstall the rear cover, and check sorter operation to confirm that copies are properly fed to all 20 bins.
3. The sorter has a level 16 EPROM installed. Install the level 18 EPROM (p/n ST20563-18.0) on the sorter CB.
4. The conveyance shaft holders are dry, causing the shafts to bind. Clean and lube the conveyance shaft holders.
5. The indexer height is out of adjustment. Verify the indexer height , and retime the indexer pulleys (the timing belt may have jumped out of position).
6. The exit drive gear is worn and needs replacing. As a temporary countermeasure, remove the exit rollers attached to left side door. Replace the exit drive
gear (p/n 048677080).
Description
F23 while copying.
Solution
CAUSE: Toner hopper binding.
SOLUTION: Verify that the agitator plate assemby (p/n 5400-3322) is attached to the toner agitator shaft (p/n 540032171).
To verify that the motor and main CB are operational, remove the toner motor from the drive gears. Then check operation using 47 mode, code 01, to spin
the motor.
48
2130
Caution: If the toner in the hopper is stirred with a screwdriver, the agitator plate assembly can become dislodged. The hopper will function normally for a
while then the bind will come back.
Description
F54 at power up.
Solution
CAUSE: Main fan motor (M11) is binding (will not turn freely by hand).
SOLUTION: Replace M11 (p/n 25AA80540).
Description
Solution
Description
F55 at power up.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Main CB EPROM is not seated properly.
Reseat EPROM on the main CB.
2. Connection failure or corrosion build-up at CN51 to the main switch (SW1).
Clean and repair the connector as necessary.
3. Loss of 24V DC from the DC power supply.
Replace the DC supply (p/n 540084513).
4. CN28 on the main CB is loose. CN28 contains a zero cross reference signal that is interrupted.
Reseat CN28 and verify copier operation.
5. Poorly seated CN69 on the ACDB, resulting in no 24V DC power supply to RL1.
SOLUTION: To check CN69 on the ACDB, perform the following:
a. Power the copier OFF.
b. Remove CN69 from the ACDB.
c. Ensure that all the pins for CN69 on the ACDB are straight and properly aligned. Then inspect CN69 on the wiring harness. Ensure that all the wires
are properly attached to the connector.
d. Reseat CN69 on the ACDB.
Description
DF305, J 62.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. PS302 (entrance sensor) is not adjusted to the correct voltage. Adjust VR1 two graduations past the point where LED 1 lights. An alternate method is to
adjust VR1 to 0.3V DC using CN906-7 and TP-3 (ground).
2. SD301 is not energizing due to a poor electrical connection on the RADF CB; causing the paper feed lift plate not to move. Reseat CN903-1 and 903-2 on
the RADF CB.
3. The infeed guide plate is deformed. Reform the guide plate.
4. If the problem occurs as the last original is fed, the original feed set solenoid (SD301) has failed. Replace SD301 (p/n 048082530).
5. The mounting posts that support M301 may become broken or cracked due to vibrations that occur during shipment/transportation.
All DF305 units within serial number range (048181365 through 048186490) must be inspected at the next PM or service call. Refer to [[DF305 Technical
Bulletin #11|IMAGE v:\bitmaps\djc156.bmp SCROLL]] for details regarding inspection/repair for this symptom.
To repair the motor mounts, perform the following:
a. Install the collars (p/n U091-9630) to repair the cracked mounting posts. The instructions for the repair kit are included in the kit. The 5 minute epoxy
required to install the metal collars must be purchased locally.
b. Install the rubber holder part on top of the motor.
49
2130
I. Clean the underside of the metal cover (cover/B) and the top of M301 with alcohol.
II. Remove the small adhesive strip from the bottom of the rubber holder.
III. Mount the rubber holder on the motor (adhesive strip from front to rear).
IV. Position the motor so that the drive belts are perpendicular to the drive gear.
V. Remove the large adhesive strip on the top of the rubber holder.
VI. Carefully reinstall the metal cover (you get one chance).
The metal cover and rubber holder will now support M301 and eliminate vibrations resulting in noise and misfeeding.
50
2223
Description
How to program auto shut-off and low power modes.
Solution
To activate auto shut-off, set 25 mode, address 20:
0 =ON
1 =OFF
To program auto shut-off delay time, set 25 mode, address 62:
0 =30 min.
1 =60 min.
2 =90 min.
3 =120 min.
With EPROM 2223138-18.1 installed on the main CB, the delay time can be programmed to 150 minutes by setting 25 mode, P19 to 5 (auto low power
activates after 30 minutes of non-use) and P07 to 1 (adds 120 minutes to the original 30 minutes). [2223 Technical Bulletin #3] outlines the EPROM and
associated enhancements.
With EPROM 2223138-19.1 installed on the main CB, the delay time can be programmed to 240 minutes by setting 25 mode, P03 to 2 to add 210 minutes to
the original 30 minutes.
Restrictions: Version 19.1 EPROM must be used with 2223139-13.0 or higher.
Notes:
1. Low power mode cannot be completely disabled.
2. When auto low power is activated, the copier requires approximately 30 seconds to come to ready.
3. Setting 25 mode, P07 to 1 also adds 120 minutes to the auto shut-off time programmed in 25 mode P62. For example, if P62 is set to a 3, and P07 to a 1,
then the auto shut off time has been extended to 240 minutes.
4. 18.1 & 19.1 version EPROMs are the only versions that include the time extensions for the low power mode.
5. This solution identified as a common problem by Phillip d'Ayral, Konica BT Miami.
Description
How to program small original detection.
Solution
To program small original detection, perform the following:
1. Switch copier OFF.
2. Access the 25 mode (hold down the 2 and 5 keys simultaneously while powering the copier ON), P45 to 'x' (where 'x' is the desired default).
2. Enter the desired data:
0 =8.5x11R selected with small original
1 =5.5x8.5 selected with small original
2 =8.5x11 selected with small original
3. Press the Copy button to enter the data change.
Description
Solution
CAUSE: Toner was added before performing L-detect during new machine setup. See 2223 Technical Bulletin #1 .

SOLUTION: To prevent F26 error codes, perform the following:
1. Access the 47 mode (press the 4 and 7 keys simultaneously while powering the copier ON), output code 40 (approximately 3 minutes) to allow the excess
toner in the TDS area to mix with the developer.
2. If F26 reoccurs, replace the developer (PCUA 947226) and perform the L-detect adjustment again (47 mode, output code 51).
Note: L-detect must be performed before adding toner at new machine setup or toner addition will occur during the adjustment, resulting in a F26 code.
Description
Intermittent F28 and blank copies.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. High voltage arcing.
To eliminate the source of arcing:
a. Inspect the T/S corona, front and rear blocks.
b. Extend the HV contacting springs (front) and the contacting springs at the rear of the T/S assembly (grounding).
c. Clean the contact points on the front T/S block (p/n 25HA45031) and replace if necessary.
d. Ensure that the transfer guide plate (p/n 25HA-4561) is not bent and excessively close to the transfer wire. The left edge of the plate should be 16mm
above the inside bottom of the corona shell.
51
2223
2. The corona currents are not set to specification.
To adjust the corona currents, perform the following:
a. Remove the T/S corona unit and drum carriage.
b. Close the clamshell and cheat the front interlock switch.
c. To adjust the charge current, connect the special red meter lead to the second of four HV contact springs from the right.
d. Connect the black lead to frame ground.
e. Set meter to A DC.
f. Access the 47 mode (hold down 4 and 7 at power ON), output code 02.
g. Press START/PRINT, adjust VR1 to -500A DC.
h. Press STOP/CLEAR; connect the special red meter lead to the 3rd HV contact spring (transfer) from the right.
i. Enter output code 03 and adjust VR2 to -450A DC.
j. Press STOP/CLEAR; connect the special red meter lead to the 4th HV contact spring (separation) from the right.
k. Set meter to A AC.
l. Enter output code 04 and adjust VR3 to 500A AC.
Notes:
I. A special red meter lead with an in-line 10Mohm resistor (p/n LX15-0020) must be used in substitute of the standard red meter lead. A standard black
meter lead is still used for ground (GND).
II. VR1, VR2 and VR3 are to the left of the separation corona spring recessed in 3 small holes located the front frame.
VR1 is in the left hole, VR2 is in the right hole, and VR3 is the lower hole.
3. Multiple devices on the same AC source.
Instruct the end user concerning powerline problems and the need for a dedicated line.
4. Loose connection from the main CB to the high voltage unit.
Reseat CN10 on the main CB and verify that 24V DC is present at CN10-1, 8V DC is present at CN10-3. During the copy process, voltage at CN10-3 should
drop to 0V DC.
Description
Solution
Description
J 93 when duplexing. Paper jams at the entrance to the duplexer.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. One of the main body drive gears is not in contact with the ADU drive.
Open the ADU access cover and verify that the inner conveyance changeover roller shaft turns when using diagnostics (47 mode, code 40). If not, check the
drive train.
Note: On the main body rear cover there are 3 small drive gear covers which prevent drive between the main body and the drawer base. Remove drive gear
covers (A), (B), and (C). Refer to the DB307 installation instructions, pg. E-2, step 2 under Installation Procedure.
2. Incorrect 25 mode data setting. In an attempt to program ECM mode, the 25 mode, address P05 data is changed. The 2223 is not equipped with ECM
mode.
Set 25 mode, P05 to 5. If this address is set to a different value, ADU feed timing is affected, resulting in J 93 codes.
Description
Solution
The model 2223 does not have ECM capabilities. The 2223 non-volatile memory capacity is not sufficient enough to incorporate this function. The 25 mode
addresses 72 to 79 are not used on the 2223 for the ECM Master Key Code, but are used to program a Master Key Code for access to the Service Control
Operation mode (technician function only).
Description
2223T, after installing a coin vending system and changing the message language selection to French, using the 25 mode, address 14, with EPROM level
C1-11 35EX and C2-12 35EX installed in the machine [P81 BOURRAE DE PAPER] (remove paper jam) is displayed while the machine is in the idle state. If
52
2223
money is inserted at this time, the machine will initiate a copy cycle. Proper message should read INSERRE MONNAIE (insert coin) during the idle state.
Solution
CAUSE: Firmware bug.
SOLUTION: Install the 2223T special ROM for French language correction, which is available on the Konica web site (2223t-13.exe), access KBT's Home
Page (http://www.koniccabt.com).
Description
Sorter conveyance unit information.
Solution
Install the 1015 paper conveyance unit (PCUA 947119) when installing a sorter on a 2223 with a pedestal stand or a DB607 (LCT+PFU).
The DB107 (ADU) and DB307 (ADU+LCT+PFU) have a paper conveyance unit included. If the conveyance unit is lost prior to installation, it must be built
from individual parts as the assemblies are not available. The only solution in this situation is to refer to the DB107/307/607 parts catalog and order the
individual parts for each assembly. Contact part number information at 1-800-825-5664 ext 2649 for assistance.
The difference between the two paper conveyance units is that the 1015 conveyance unit is front gear drive and the 2223 conveyance unit is rear gear drive.
Description
2223T, P81 at power up.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Key counter is enabled in the 25 mode.
To disable the key counter in the 25 mode, perform the following:
A. Access the 25 mode (power the copier ON while simultaneously pressing the 2 and 5 keys), P5 to 2, then press START PRINT.
B. Power the copier OFF/ON to exit the 25 mode.
Note: The model 2223T is pre-configured to accept a coin box attachment through a connector located on the lower, rear cover of the copier. If a coin box is
not installed, a P81 code will occur.
2. The model 2223T is pre-configured to accept a coin box attachment through CN77-A, which is located on the rear of the machine.
The P81 code will be eliminated after inserting CN77-B (p/n 26AA90270) into CN77-A. The CN77-B connector is the standard key counter loop connector
found in all Konica copiers.
53
2230
Description
Intermittent jam position 7 with incorrect lead edge registration.
Solution
CAUSE: A dirty or worn paper feed connecting roller and/or shaft regulator.
SOLUTION: Clean or replace (with new-style) the paper feed connecting roller (p/n 40AA45252) and/or shaft regulator (p/n 40AA45411). The paper feed
connecting roller is the 6.75" long, gray roller visible when the top right-side door of the copier is opened. The new-style paper feed connecting roller and
shaft regulator are installed in production machines beginning with serial number 35FE03900. Refer to 2230/2330/3240/3340 Technical Bulletin #11 for
additional information. After cleaning/replacing the feed parts, perform the lead edge timing adjustment. To adjust the image lead edge timing, perform the
following:
1: Access the 36 mode (power the copier ON while pressing the 3 and 6 keys).
2. Use the arrow buttons to select [2: Timing Adjustment Mode].
3. Press the OK key.
4. Use the arrow buttons to select [4: Image Lead Edge Adjustment].
6. Use the Next button to select the mode to be adjusted (normal, double, or book copy).
7. Enter the setting value (-99 to +99) with the quantity setting keys. Use the Stop/Clear button to enter a negative value.
8. Press the OK button.
9. Press the Test button to switch to the basic copy screen for test copies.
10. Press the Stop/Clear button while pressing the P button to return to the Image Lead Edge Adjustment screen.
11. Repeat steps 6 through 9 until the adjustment is accomplished.
Description
ST103 cannot be mounted on a plain stand.
Solution
CAUSE: There are no cut outs in the side of the original plain stands (PCUA 947-439) to accomodate the ST103 (PCUA 947-145) brackets.

SOLUTION: The stands have been modified to accomodate this sorter. The modified stands can be identified by a red dot on the stand shipping box. All
stands in boxes labeled 2230/2330/3240/3340 copier stand have also been modified.
If a non-modified base was received, contact Order Processing at x2267 and explain the situation. This will be handled as a part mispick.
Note: Stands without a red dot on the box can be used for all applications except for the installation of an ST103.
Description
How to disable 1:2 mode, auto shut-off and auto low power mode defaults.
Solution
To set 1:1 mode as the default:
1. Access the key operator mode (hold the OK key and turn the copier ON).
2. Press 1: Initial settings.
3. Press 1: Copy settings and press the OK key.
4. Use the arrows to select 1:1 and press the OK key.
5. Turn the machine OFF then ON to exit the key operator mode.
Refer to page 9-39 in the user's manual.
To program auto shut-off mode:
2. Press the down arrow key once to access 8: Memory switch settings and press the OK key.
3. Press the up arrow key twice to access 3: auto shut off timer and press OK.
4. Choose from 30, 60, 90, 120, 240 minutes and press OK.
To eliminate the auto shut-off feature:
3. Press the down arrow key once to access 25: Auto shut off setting and press OK.
4. Choose ON or OFF and press OK.
The auto low power mode cannot be disabled, however it can be set to a 240 minute default. To program auto low power mode:
3. Press the down arrow key once to access 2: Auto low power timer and press OK.
4. Choose from 5, 10, 15, 30, 60, 90, 120, 240 minutes and press OK.
54
2230
Description
How to program platen default paper sizes.
Solution
To program the machine to default to a specific paper size (APS and AMS turned OFF) when the RADF is lifted, perform the following:
1. Access the key operator mode (power ON, while pressing the OK key)
2. Scroll (using the arrow keys) to [8: Memory switch setting] and press the OK key.
3. Scroll (using the arrow keys) to [11: Platen APS] and press the OK key.
4. Press either arrow key until OFF is displayed, then press the OK key.
5. Power the machine OFF to exit the help mode.
6. Access the 25 mode (power the copier ON while holding down the 2 and 5 keys).
7. Select [1: Software switch set mode?] and press the OK key.
8. Scroll to, and set the software dipswitches as the follows (press the OK key to enter the new data):
6-0 to 1 (platen APS switching to 8.5x11); 6-0 to 0 for 5.5x8.5R
8-1 to 1 (no AMS selection when APS released)
9. Set software dipswitches 8-4, 8-5 and 8-6 to select the tray with the paper size you desire. Use the matrix below to determine which values to input to
select a specific tray.
DIPSW TRAY
8-4 to 0 8-5 to 0 8-6 to 0: No preference
8-4 to 0 8-5 to 1 8-6 to 1: Bypass tray
8-4 to 1 8-5 to 0 8-6 to 0: Tray 1
8-4 to 0 8-5 to 1 8-6 to 0: Tray 2
8-4 to 1 8-5 to 1 8-6 to 0: Tray 3
8-4 to 0 8-5 to 0 8-6 to 1: Tray 4
8-4 to 1 8-5 to 0 8-6 to 1: Tray 5
Description
Intermittent F34-x, F35-x and F36-x during operation.
Solution
CAUSE: The PFU DB is damaged, causing erratic fuser error codes and TH1 to intermittently open. On the PFU DB there are tray size detect switches which
receive vibration from the paper feed tray during copier operation. CN44 of the PFU DB and the connector terminal of the main wiring contact each other due
to the vibration, resulting in contact failure and possible connector damage.
SOLUTION: Replace the PFU DB (p/n 40AA-9060).
Notes:
1. Refer to 2230/2330/3240/3340 Technical Bulletin #13 .
Description
Solution
To clear fuser codes, perform the following steps:
1. Access the 25 mode (power the machne OFF, hold down the 2 and 5 keys and power the machine ON).
2. Select 1: Software switch set mode? and press the OK key.
3. Set the software switches as follows (press the OK key to enter the new data):
3-5 to 0: resets F34 code
Note: If the F code reoccurs after powering the machine ON or following warm-up, contact service immediately
Description
F10-1 at power up.
Solution
CAUSE: CN11 on the main CB is not fully seated and/or a wire has backed out of the connector.
55
2230
SOLUTION: Verify that the wires are properly installed and the connector is fully seated.
Description
Solution
To program ECM mode:
1. Enter the 25 mode.
2. Select 7: Password setting and press OK.
3. Select 2: ECM master key code and press OK.
4. Enter an 8 digit master code and press OK.
5. Press F4 (previous screen) to complete setting. Turn the unit OFF.
6. Enter the Key Operator mode by pressing the OK button while turning the machine on.
7. Select 3. ECM setting and press OK.
8. Use the up and down arrows to go to desired function (i.e. Password setting, Count limit setting, and Count reset).
9. After the settings are complete, turn the unit OFF/ON to access normal operating mode.
Note: The key operator MUST set the COUNT/LIMIT setting to a value, otherwise the "please enter ECM password" message will be displayed immediately
after the password was entered.
To enable/disable ECM after the above procedure is completed perform the following:
1. Access the Key Operator Mode by pressing the OK button while powering up the copier.
3. Select 4. ECM ON/OFF setting and press OK.
4. Select either OFF or ON, press OK, then PREV (previous).
Description
Please load paper in tray 1 message displayed. The tray is filled with paper.
Solution
CAUSE: The contact detect actuator is damaged, inhibiting the paper detect actuator (p/n 40AA40073) movement.
SOLUTION: Remove the paper feed assembly and replace the contact detect actuator (p/n 40AA40082).
CAUTION:
After reinstalling a repaired or new PFU, perform the following:
2. Withdraw all trays of the main body and drawerbase.
3. Access the 47 multimode (power the main switch ON while pressing 4 and 7 simultaneously), output code 21, press P-01-P.
4. Press the START PRINT button.
5. Wait for a few seconds, and then press the STOP/CLEAR button.
6. Using the numeric keypad, press P-03-P.
9. Power the main switch OFF/ON to exit the 47 mode.
This adjustment ensures that the motor drive is properly aligned and meshed.
Note: To prevent any damage, carefully handle the paper detect actuator.
Description
Universal paper tray is indicating metric sizes.
Solution
CAUSE: The destination code dipswitches in the 25 mode are set incorrectly.
SOLUTION: Set the 25 mode dipswitches for USA destination:
2-7 =0
3-0 =0
3-1 =0
3-2 =1
Notes:
1. Metric sizes can be run through the machine, however A4 and A4R will appear as 8.5x11 and 8.5x11R in the LCD display.
To program trays for metric paper, select 25 mode, Tray size setting and press OK.
Select the required tray using the F1 (tray) button.
Select the required paper size using the F2 or F3 button.
A4 and A4R paper are the only available metric paper selections.
2. The destination code must be set for USA.
56
2230
57
2330
Description
Solution
Description
PLEASE CLOSE TOP LEFT SIDE COVER message at power up. Cover is closed.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The rear portion of the paper exit actuator (p/n 40AA46040) is dislodged. This six-sided actuator is on the end of a black plastic shaft located on the lower
guide (p/n 40BA48040) of the upper paper exit cover (p/n 40BA48010). When correctly positioned, it sits beneath the white paper exit driving gear (p/n
40AA77270).
To reposition the paper exit actuator perform the following:
a. Power OFF the copier.
b. Open the left side door after removing the catch tray or sliding the sorter away from the main body.
c. Carefully bend the black plastic shaft while inserting the dislodged end into a small hole on the upper paper exit cover. This hole can be seen when
viewed from the front of the copier.
d. When the actuator is in position, close the left side door, reinstall the catch tray or slide the sorter up to the main body of the copier.
e. Power ON the copier.
Note: After a fuser jam is cleared, the upper paper exit cover is able to close even if the fuser release plate (p/n 40AA53050) remains open. As the cover is
closed, the fuser release plate contacts the lower guide portion of the upper paper exit cover. Either the paper exit actuator dislodges or the actuator shaft
breaks. The design of the entrance guide plate (p/n 40BA48272) has been modified to prevent this. The serial number cut-in is 35GE03351. A
countermeasure part, plastic spacer kit (p/n 40BAK0010), is available for older style machines. Two (2) spacers are packaged in each kit.
The old style entrance guide has two cut out slots at the top. The spacers are positioned in each corner of the guide, in line with the slots. They attach to the
exit guide by removing the sticky-back paper.
Refer to 2230/2330/3240/3340 Technical Bulletin #10A for additional information.
2. Paper is jammed behind the left side cover.
Remove the jam.
Description
Solution
58
2330
Description
How to program paper tray sizes.
Solution
To program paper tray sizes, perform the following procedure:
1. Access the 25 mode (turn machine ON while holding down the 2 and 5 keys).
2. Select #2, PAPER SIZE SETTING MODE, press OK.
3. Select the tray to be programmed, (i.e. tray 2 is the first tray below the universal tray) and press OK.
4. Use arrows to select desired size, and press OK.
5. Repeat steps 3 & 4 for additional trays.
6. Turn the machine OFF/ON to exit the 25 mode.
Description
PLEASE LOAD A4 (or B4 or 8.5x11R) message when using APS through the ADF or platen glass.
Solution
2-7 =0
3-0 =0
3-1 =0
3-2 =1
To program trays for metric paper, select 25 mode, Tray size setting and press OK.
Select the required tray using the F1 (tray) button.
Select the required paper size using the F2 or F3 button.
A4 and A4R paper are the only available metric paper selections.
Note 1: Metric sizes can be run through the machine, however in AMS mode the image will reduce to 97% if metric paper is copied onto from an identicle
sized metric original.
Note 2: The destination code must be set for USA.
Description
Erratic LCD operation. Lines on the display.
Solution
CAUSE: Faulty connection on the LCD.
SOLUTION: Replace theLCD board (p/n 35FE-7102).
Note: This problem has been corrected in production machines beginning with s/n 35GE05001. Refer to 2230/2330/3240/3340 Technical Bulletin #6 for
additional information.
Description
How to clear a fuser failure code (F34, F35, F36).
Solution
To clear fuser failure codes, perform the following:
59
2330
2. While pressing both the 2 and 5 keys, power the copier ON. The memory setting mode menu will appear with 1. Software switch set mode displayed.
3. Press OK.
4. Press the up and down arrows to display the correct software dipswitch setting for the jam code: dipswitch 3-5 for F34, dipswitch 3-6 for F35, or dipswitch
3-7 for F36.
5. Press on/off to change the dip switch data from 1 to 0.
6. Turn the copier off then on to exit the 25 mode.
Description
Solution
To add toner, perform the following:
1. Vigorously shake the new toner cartridge, then remove the flexible outer cap (if present).
2. Open the copier front door, and pull toner unit out 90 degrees to the right.
3. Invert the toner cartridge over the unit with arrow pointing toward you, inserting it to the rear then to the front, until it is fully seated within the toner hopper.
4. Press down on rear of cartridge and slowly slide the toner release lever fully toward you to release toner, then move the lever back and forth a few times
alternating with Step 5.
5. Tap cartridge several times to free the toner, until cartridge is empty.
6. Remove and discard empty cartridge.
7. Push toner unit back to original position.
8. Close the copier front door.
The procedure above is outlined on a decal located inside the front door of the machine. The User's Reference Guide maintenance, and supplies section
explains how to add toner.
Note: Toner is very fine plastic powder, if toner gets on clothing, brush it off. DO NOT rub forcefully or use any liquid to remove toner from clothing, the toner
may permanently fuse to clothing.
Description
The universal tray does not lift the paper or the copier does not recognize the universal cassette..
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The contact detect actuator or the paper detect actuator is bent or cracked causing it to remain in the tray upper limit detecting photosensor (PD1), falsely
detecting that the paper has lifted.
Remove the paper feed unit (p/n 40AA-4000) to inspect the contact detect (p/n 40AA40082) and paper detect (p/n 40AA40073) actuators. Replace either, if
cracked or malformed.
2. The paper regulating (L) plate is broken where the upper, middle, and lower paper detect actuators make contact.
Replace the paper regulating (L) plate (p/n 40AA47105).
CAUTION:
After reinstalling a repaired or new PFU, perform the following:
2. Withdraw all trays of the main body and drawerbase.
3. Access the 47 multimode (power the main switch ON while pressing 4 and 7 simultaneously), output code 21, press P-01-P.
6. Using the numeric keypad, press P-03-P.
9. Power the main switch OFF/ON to exit the 47 mode.
This adjustment ensures that the motor drive is properly aligned and meshed.
Note: To prevent any damage, carefully handle the paper detect actuator.
Description
PLEASE UNLOAD DUPLEX TRAY message when a duplex mode (1:2 or 2:2) is selected.
Solution
CAUSE: Paper remains in the ADU.
SOLUTION: To clear the message, perform the following:
1. Pull out the drawer labeled ADU.
2. Pull up on the ADU top cover (bright green decal designates area to hold when lifting the cover).
3. Remove paper.
4. Lower the ADU cover and push in the ADU drawer.
60
2330
61
3035
Description
Solution
Description
F43 while copying.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The optics temperature fuse is open. Replace the fuse (p/n 540088412).
2. The L1 terminals are not making proper contact with the lamp. Reinstall the lamp, and ensure that there is good contact from the terminals. Verify that the
lamp pressure spring (p/n 540061690) is not broken or detached.
3. Loose hardware has dropped into the optics area, and is causing the optics to stop short of the restart/brake sensor (PS5). Remove any loose hardware
from the optics area.
4. The optics cable and spring are worn preventing the optics unit from reaching home. Replace the cable (p/n 540061111) and spring (p/n 540061480).
Note: If the cable and spring were replaced recently, ensure that the optics positioning jig is used (p/n 00M6-1-00).
5. The glass stopper plate assembly is malformed, and the exposure unit is contacting it. See 3035 [[Technical Bulletin #33| IMAGE
V:\BITMAPS\J RC071.BMP SCROLL]. Order the new style glass stopper plate assembly (p/n 5400-6363), and scale plate assembly (p/n 0481-1201).
6. The optics slide shaft holder has dislodged from the main reflector base assembly. This causes the lamp assembly to bind on the optics shaft. Reposition
the optics slide shaft holder.
7. F43 intermittently. Faulty/binding toner motor (M6). Ensure there is no binding in the toner hopper and toner hopper drive gears. Replace toner motor.
There is a new toner motor kit available (p/n 5400-K120). Order the new style toner motor cover also (p/n 540032191). See 3035 Technical Bulletin #88 .
8. The optics cable, optics shaft, and optics bushings are worn. Replace the optics cable (p/n 540061111), optics shaft (p/n 540061090), and the optics
bushings (p/n 540076042).
9. The machine has an old style AC driver board. Upgrade the AC driver board to the new style (p/n 5400-9085). The new style is identified by the letter T
on IC2. The new style boards were put into production starting with s/n 542224652.
10. The optics drive motor (M2) has failed.
Inspect the optics drive motor for sluggishness or binding. Replace M2 (p/n 540080020) as necessary.
Description
Solution
1. In the 25 mode, enter the 8-digit master key code starting at address P72 through P79. Valid data is 0 through 9 at each address, press the start print
button to enter the new data.
2. Set 25 mode, P05 (ECM limit features) based on key operators request.
0: ECM disabled.
3. In the standby mode, hold down P then press 9, then enter your Master Key Code. Then, access the following setting modes to perform ECM functions:
1: Password Set.
3: Read Copy Count.
62
3035
4: Account Reset.
Description
AD205, J 94 or J 95.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The changeover gate is not open. The spring for the gate solenoid (SD503) has fallen off. Replace the spring (p/n 048642240).
2. The changeover gate is binding and the copies feed back into the ADU stacker. Verify the operation of the gate solenoid (SD503) in the 47 mode, output
code 84. Ensure the changeover gate does not bind.
3. The ADU motor (M501) is running too slow. Replace M501 with the new style motor (p/n 460080031).
4. The paper feed motor (M3) is running too slow. Replace M3 (p/n 5400-4071).
5. The conveyance roller is worn. Replace the conveyance roller (p/n 048645010).
6. There is insufficient pressure against the ADU conveyance roller. Adjust the conveyance roller. See AD205 Techncial Bulletin #5 Note: Use this skew
adjustment to increase the spring pressure equally on both sides of the roller, to provide optimum paper drive.
7. Stray light is entering from the left side where the main body meets the drawer unit. This gap allows excessive light to shine on the photosensors. Use
some form of weather stripping to block the light, or relocate the machine away from the direct light source.
8. The changeover gate is binding against roller (A) (p/n 048645120). Reform the gate to ensure it does not touch roller (A) when it is in the closed position.
Description
ST206, J 72.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The paper drags on the front frame side of the paper deflect plate (p/n 074045070). This is caused by either incorrect zoning of the paper drawer, or
incorrect positioning of the deflect plate. The problem usually affects 8.5x11 paper only.
Verify the paper drawer is zoned correctly. If so, reposition the deflect plate by placing a stopper ring (p/n 396040680) between the bushing (p/n 074075540)
and the C-clip on the rear frame side of the deflect plate. This will shift the plate to the rear frame of the sorter.
2. The bin timing is incorrect.
See page 23 of the ST206 service manual third edition dated October 1993 for the bin timing (lead cam position) adjustment.
3. The guide bar home position sensor (PS207) has failed.
Ensure that the guide bar moves freely, and flags the sensor. If no change of state from the sensor, replace the sensor (p/n 074084030).
4. The conveyance motor encoder (PS206) has a poor connection.
Reseat CN29 on PS206.
5. The stapler does not cycle to the nonstaple position. There is intermittent contact of the stapler positioning switch (MS206).
Ensure that MS206 is actuating properly.
6. The lower limit sensor flag is loose.
Retighten the sensor flag.
7. The flag which actuates the cam position sensor (PS202) is not turning. The flag should turn with the cam.
Repair as necessary.
8. Error only when feeding from the DB201. There is a timing problem between the drawer base and the main body. See 3035 Technical Bulletin #16 .
Adjust VR1 on the PFU drive board as necessary.
9. There is a poor connection on the sorter CB for the bin home position sensor (PS203). Reseat all the pins on CN14 on the sorter CB.
10. The rollers on the non-sort conveyance shaft are worn. This causes paper to hesitate when feeding into the bin(s).
Replace the non-sort conveyance shaft (p/n 074045100). As a temporary countermeasure, cover the worn rollers with electrical tape cut to the proper width.
11. The guide bar and lower guide arm are missing from the sorter, therefore the guide bar home position sensor (PS207) is not actuated at power up.
Replace the missing components related to the guide arm. See page 10 of the ST206 parts catalog.
12. The bin shift interlock (MS204) switch is actuated, this switch detects if the bin unit binds. The switch is located directly above the front helical cam.
Perform the MS204 adjustment. Loosen the two adjusting screws, and adjust the switch so the distance between the switch (not the actuator) and the front
63
3035
cam holder is 2.5mm.
13. The stapler interlock switch (MS205) is faulty. The J 72 may not occur until after the first copy has been sorted.
Replace MS205 (p/n 074085020).
14. The sorter conveyance drive motor (M201) has failed, which can damage the sorter CB. Replace M201 (p/n 074088050), and the sorter CB (p/n
074089020) at the same time.
15. The sorter DCPS has failed. There is no 24V DC output.
Replace the sorter DCPS (p/n 074089030).
16. The sorter CB has failed.
Replace the sorter CB (p/n 074089020).
17. CN34 located on the base of the sorter, which is the power supply and logic control interface to the guide bar swing action motor (M203), is not firmly
seated.
To check CN34, perform the following:
b. Remove the splineguide cover (p/n 074042180), on the base of the sorter to gain access to CN34.
c. Disconnect the female and male ends of CN34. Ensure that all pins are firmly inserted into the connector and that the female connector ends are
properly shaped to provide firm contact with the male connector ends.
d. Reseat CN34 together. Power the copier ON and check the guide bar swing action motor for proper operation.
Description
F41 or F42.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. There are poor electrical connections on the AC driver board for the optics motor (M2).
Reseat CN63 and CN35 on the AC driver board. If necessary insert a meter lead into the pins to ensure good connections with the pins on the board.
2. F41 at the start of print cycle. The scanner does not move from the home position. The optics drive pulley (p/n 540061130) set screw, has backed away
from the drive shaft on M2.
Manually move the exposure unit until the set screw is visible in the drive pulley. Tighten the set screw, and test operation in the 47mode, output code 31.
3. The machine has an old style AC driver board.
Check the AC driver board for T (modified version). This eliminates reverse motor voltage feedback. Order the new style board (p/n 5400-9085).
4. The optics does not actuate the reversing timing sensor (PS4). The optics cable was installed without using the optics jig.
Use the optics jig (p/n 00M6-1-00) when replacing the cable.
5. The AC driver board and/or the optics motor (M2) has failed.
Replace the AC driver board, (p/n 5400-9085) and the optics drive motor (p/n 540080020).
6. Fuse F3 on the AC driver board is open.
Check the optics motor (M2) for binding and for any shorting to ground. Replace F3 (3.15A) (p/n E64311-11).
7. The optics drive shaft is warped.
Replace the optics drive shaft (p/n 540061090).
8. Failed optics drive motor (M2).
Replace M2 (p/n 540080020).
Note: The optics scanner will slam to one side when operated in the 47 mode (hold down the 4 and 7 keys at power up), output code 31.
Description
Intermittent blank copies.
Solution
Perform the steps necessary to correct the problem:
1. Order the improved toner motor kit (p/n 5400-K120). Note: A new toner hopper cover (p/n 540032191) must be installed if motor kit is installed. See 3035
Technical Bulletin #88 .
2. Remove the transfer/separation corona unit and clean it thoroughly (use soap and warm water on the plunging arrestor [separation bridge]). Slightly
stretch the electrode contact springs (p/n 540026040) to ensure proper contact.
3035 Technical Bulletin #17A .
64
3035
6. Set the corona currents to specification. See 3035 Technical Bulletin #86 .
7. Replace the transfer/separation corona unit (p/n 5400-2607) if cleaning it did not resolve the problem. Replace the worn components. Front block (p/n
5400-2613) rear block (p/n 5400-2620) front spark arrestor (p/n 540026053) transfer discharge plate (p/n 540026031) separating bridge (p/n 540026111)
discharge wires (p/n 540026080). Caution: Do not use these parts on machines that have been modified according to the developing unit modification
program introduced in Technical Operations Bulletin #A23 & D14 dated 12/19/95. Use only the parts listed in those bulletins. Mod kit T/S corona unit (p/n
M400-2605), Mod kit front block (p/n M400-2610).
9. Check the terminal block for signs of arcing. If any arcing is evident, or an old style block is installed, replace it with the new style white block (p/n
540073231).
10. Check the drum wiring connector CN50 (p/n 5400K0190) for cracks; replace it if necessary.
12. Check for an open fuse (F2) on the main CB. Packed toner may cause this fuse to open.
15. Troubleshoot the high voltage (B) unit (p/n 540084022) for arcing and proper grounding by checking for loose screws along the grounding path for the
HV(B). Replace the unit if necessary.
16. If no image is present on the drum, check R26 on HV(A) for cold solder joints. Repair or replace as necessary.
17. Verify the center optics sensor (PS6) operation. Use the 47 mode, input code 35.
Description
Light copies.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The main CB has failed.
Check the toner motor control signal at CN8-B9 (gray wire) on the main CB. Use the 47 mode output code 01; the voltage should read 28V DC at idle, and
drop to .6V DC when the start print is pressed.
If there is no change of state, replace the toner motor and main CB (p/n 5402-9019) at the same time. Order the improved toner motor kit (p/n 5400-K120).
Note: A new toner hopper cover (p/n 540032191) must be installed if the motor kit is installed.
See 3035 Technical Bulletin #88 .
2. The H-cut plate is dirty.
Clean the H-cut plate.
3. A high volume machine. Extensive testing has shown that when these models exceed 300,000 copies, there is a tendency for the surface of the magnet
roller in the developing unit to become smooth.
For dealers see Technical Operations Bulletin #D14 dated 12/19/95. For branches see Technical Operations Bulletin #A23 dated 12/19/95. See installation
procedure. Note: Please look inside the cardboard tube in kit. The tube is not just packing material, but contains parts inside.
4. The toner hopper gears are worn.
Replace the gears (p/n 540077410), (p/n 540077420), and (p/n 312077430). Ensure there is no binding in the toner hopper.
5. The copier is 4,000+feet above sea level; this may contribute to poor copy quality. Order EPROM (p/n 303512-21.9). Note: This EPROM must be used
with (p/n 303513-20.0). Set address 7 in the 25 mode to 0. Clean the corona wires, then check the currents. See 3035 Technical Bulletin #89A .
6. A loose ground and connector in the drum carriage is causing a bias problem which is allowing the developer to be pulled from the developing unit.
Verify that all grounds are in place. Add a star washer if necessary. Verify that the bias connector on the developing unit is making proper contact with the
bias pin.
7. CN5 on the main CB, which provides the power supply to the CEL, PTL, and toner density sensor (PS1), is not firmly seated.
To check CN5 on the main CB, perform the following:
b. Remove CN5 from the main CB.
c. Ensure that all the pins for CN5 on the main CB are straight and properly aligned. Then inspect CN5 on the wiring harness. Ensure that all the wires
are properly attached to the connector.
65
3035
d. Reseat CN5 on the main CB. Power the copier ON and check that the toner motor is energized during the copy cycle.
Description
No toner addition. M6 does not work in the 47 mode.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. CN8-B9 on main CB is not seated on both sides of connector. Ensure that CN8 is fully seated on main CB.
2. Check the control signal for the toner motor at CN8-B9 (gray wire) on main CB. Use the 47 mode output code 01, voltage should read 28V DC at idle, and
drop to .6V DC when start print is pressed.
If there is no change of state replace the toner motor and main CB (p/n 5402-9019) at the same time. Order the improved toner motor kit, (p/n 5400-K120).
Note: A new toner hopper cover (p/n 540032191) must be installed if the motor kit is installed. See 3035 Technical Bulletin #88 .
Description
Blank LCD.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Drive pulley (A) (p/n 540076531) is slipping on the lens motor (M7) shaft, or the timing belt (p/n 540077520) has fallen off and is lodged between the motor
and pulley. An interim repair for a slipping drive pulley (A) is to apply a small amount of instant adhesive between the drive pulley and motor shaft. For a
permanent repair, replace M7 with the new-style (p/n 25BA-7404). M7 must be used with the new-style adjustable drive plate assembly (p/n 5400-6321). In
addition, a new motor cover mylar (p/n 35AE61990) has been established to prevent M7 from interfering with the cover of the door detect wiring. The mylar is
placed onto the bottom of the motor. These newer parts can not be mixed with the original parts. They must be used as a set.
2. The 5V DC to the LCD needs adjustment. Adjust VR1 on the operation board.
66
3135
Description
Solution
1. Empty the waste toner collection box , or install a new collection box.
2. Power the machine OFF, hold down the 4 and 7 keys, and power the machine ON.
4. From the keypad press P-02-P.
5. Press the start print button.
6. Press the stop/clear button.
7. Power the machine OFF/ON to return to normal operation.
Note: If the box is emptied, ensure that the inside top portion is clean so that the toner collection level detector sensor will not give a false F86 indication.
Description
How to default to 8.5x11 for odd-size originals off the glass.
Solution
EPROMs are available to default odd-size originals off the glass to 8.5x11. Order (p/n 313512-20.0, 313513-22.1, 313514-22.1). See 3135 Technical
Bulletin #48 .
Description
ST211, F77-2.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Incorrect programming of hardware dipswitches on the sorter CB. Ensure that all the switches are OFF for normal operation.
2. The circuit breaker on the sorter CB is open. Reset the circuit breaker on the sorter CB.
3. CN33 for the conveyance photosensor (PS206) is disconnected. Reconnect the connector.
4. The bin shift motor (M202) binds and causes ICP4 on the sorter CB to open. Test the operation of M202 with SW2/SW3 on the sorter CB. If M202 does
not respond, check continuity across ICP4 (near CN15). If ICP4 is open, check bin movement to detect any binding, and repair as necessary. Replace the
sorter CB (p/n 12FQ21500).
5. The bin unit has traveled past the home position sensor (PS203) and actuated the lower limit switch (MS203). Ensure that the EPROM IC2 on the sorter
CB is level 10.0. If not order (p/n ST21162-10.0). Manually move the bin unit off the sensor, and test the sorter operation.
6. The fixed shaft is loose or the fixed roller is damaged, causing the bin unit to bind. This actuates the sort bin obstacle detection switch (MS204) over the
front helical cam. Tighten the mounting screw (p/n 12FQ20510) for the fixed shaft, and/or replace the fixed roller (p/n 12FQ20380). Adjust MS204 if
necessary.
7. The code occurs only when the bin unit has risen to bin 19 or 20. The bin unit upper limit microswitch (MS202) is out of position. It is getting actuated
before the bin unit reaches the 20th bin. Reposition MS202 so it is not actuated when the bin unit is at the 20th bin. Caution: Do not position the switch too
far away from the bin unit actuator. This switch prevents the sorter from overdriving; serious damage could occur.
8. The helical cams need lubrication. Lubricate the cams with Plas Guard*. Prior to lubrication, thoroughly clean the area to be lubricated. See Technical
Education Bulletin #7A regarding lubricant applications.
9. The semicircle black actuator for the cam home position sensor (PS202) is out of position. The actuator is located beneath the rear helical cam. Position
the actuator so that the semicircle side is against the frame, and parallel to it.
10. The sorter bins are not timed properly with the cam, or they are damaged and binding. Remove the bins and inspect for damage. Perform the bin/cam
timing adjustment.
11. The sorter CB has failed. Replace the sorter CB (p/n 12FQ21500).
12. The stapler motor (M204) is binding. Attempt to manually rotate the stapler drive gears to ensure free movement. If necessary replace the stapler unit
(p/n 12GQ21490).
13. CN15 on the sorter CB is not connected in the correct position resulting in loss of drive to M202 (bin shift motor).
Reconnect CN15 on the sorter CB.
Note: CN15 can be connected incorrectly by one pin in the up or down direction.
67
3135
Description
ST210, J 72.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The gate solenoid (SD201) is out of adjustment. Perform the gate solenoid adjustment.
a. Remove the sorter front cover.
b. Remove the sorter top cover.
c. Loosen the set screws for the solenoid.
d. While holding the plunger in, position the solenoid so the clearance between the gate and the top guide is 2 0.3 mm.
2. The bushing behind the sorter conveyance motor (M201) is dirty. Clean the bushing behind the sorter conveyance motor. This bushing holds the drive
shaft that runs front to rear.
3. M201 (conveyance motor) is binding, causing F2 on the sorter CB to open at power up.
Replace the sorter CB (p/n 12FL87010) and M201 (p/n 037180010).
4. The exit detecting sensor (PS202) cannot be adjusted. Ensure there is no alignment problem between the exit detecting LED (LED202), and PS202. If
the sensor still cannot be adjusted, replace the sorter CB (p/n 12FL87010).
5. PS202 is dirty or out of adjustment.
Clean PS202 (located in the bottom of the sorter below the two conveyance belts). To adjust PS202, perform the following:
a. Remove the rear cover of the sorter exposing the sorter control board.
b. Turn VR1 on the sorter control board fully counterclockwise.
c. Enter the sorter test mode:
I. Power the copier OFF.
II. To enter the exit sensor adjustment mode, record the state of dipswitches 1 and 2, ensuring that they are both set to ON.
III. With the sorter top cover open, power ON the copier while pressing PSW1 on the sorter CB.
IV. Close the top cover and release PSW1.
d. Press PSW1 twice. The indexer moves to the tenth bin.
e. Rotate VR1 clockwise until LED1 is not lit.
f. Rotate VR1 two divisions counterclockwise past the point where LED1 lights.
g. Power the copier OFF.
h. Return DIP switches 1 and 2 on the sorter CB to their original position.
i. Power the copier ON.
6. The flanges on the lower paper exit roller (p/n 048644361) of the inversion unit are causing the copies to crease. This slows down paper conveyance
timing. Remove the flanges from the paper exit roller.
7. The indexer is not horizontal with the bottom of the sorter. The indexer will then flag the upper limit sensor (PS205). Only the home position sensor
(PS204) should be flagged in idle. Perform the indexer height adjustment. Refer to the third edition ST210 service manual page 18.
8. There is marginal contact of the linked interlock (MS203). Adjust the position of MS203. Ensure it is properly actuated.
9. The exit transmit guides and shafts (upper and lower) are worn or dirty. Clean or replace the the upper and lower exit transmit guides (p/n 037115010),
and upper and lower exit transmit shafts (p/n 037115130).
10. The indexer home position sensor (PS204) or the indexer upper limit sensor (PS205) are faulty. Replace the sensors (p/n 037185010) as necessary.
Description
Solution
Description
AD207, J 15.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The copy paper contacts the paper retaining auxiliary plate (p/n 12EF42063) when entering the ADU stacker. This causes the paper to roll up in the stack
68
3135
tray. Reform the paper retaining auxiliary plate so the paper does not contact the plate as it enters the duplex stack tray.
2. The paper feed clutch spring (p/n 12EF40310) was installed incorrectly after cleaning. Reposition the clutch spring using the other hole of the stopper
collar (p/n 190040540).
3. The last sheet of paper entering the ADU ends up on top of the hold down plate. The foam pad attached to the holder plate (p/n 12EF42192) is coming off;
causing paper to catch on it. Tape the pad on, or replace the pad (p/n 12EF42233).
4. The paper guide plate (p/n 12EF42160) in the ADU is malformed slowing the paper down. This plate allows the paper into the ADU stacker. Reform the
paper guide plate for proper operation.
5. A failed PS501 (paper passage detecting). The last sheet into the ADU stacker is on top of the paper feed pressure plate. Note: The problem may only
occur when using the document feeder.
Replace PS501 (p/n 070085510) which is located on the top left side, facing up.
6. Signal wire from PS503 (paper feed) is pinched between the front ADU cover and the frame.
To check PS503 operation, perform the following:
a. Access the 47 multimode (power the machine ON while holding down on the 4 and 7 keys), input code 82, press P-02-P.
b. Actuate PS503 and look for a change of state on the control panel.
c. If no change of state occurs, check the wiring to PS503 and see if it pinched between the front ADU cover (p/n 048610191) and frame ground. If there is
no pinched wire, replace PS503 (p/n 070085510).
Description
How to disable platen glass APS.
Solution
APS off the glass can be defaulted to either 8.5x11 or 8.5x11R depending on the setting of P06 in the 25 mode. See Technical Bulletin #38A .
Description
Solution
Description
Can the AMS/APS be disabled?
Solution
Firmware version 20.2 contains the programmable AMS/APS feature. Note: AMS/APS cannot be selected/deselected individually, either both options are on
or off. APS off the glass will be defaulted to whatever size is selected (8.5x11, 8.5x11R). See 3135 Technical Bulletin #38A .
Description
DF306, J 62 or P68.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The first set of conveyance rollers are turning too slow. Clean the shaft holders with alcohol, then lubricate shaft holders for the first set of conveyance
rollers.
2. A non OEM double feed prevention roller is installed. Replace the double feed prevention roller (p/n 12ER40313).
3. The prefeed clutch (MC301) may bind causing undue stress to the original paper feed solenoid (SD301) mounting plate. This will break the two plastic
bosses that secure the assembly in place.
Ensure that MC301 is clean lubricated and operational to prevent repeat failure.
4. The original paper feed sensor (PS303) is ON. Verify the voltage at CN911-A5 on the RADF CB. With no paper present the voltage should read .9V DC,
if it reads 5V DC, verify the connections and power to the sensor. If the checks are normal replace PS303 (p/n 12ER85511).
5. ICP3 on the RADF CB is open. Verify the 24V DC loads on the RADF. Replace any faulty loads; then replace the RADF CB (p/n 12ES-9012).
69
3240
Description
F10-2 during the copy run when feeding from any paper tray.
Solution
CAUSE: Failed paper feed driving board.
SOLUTION: Reseat CN32, CN33, CN38, CN37, and CN301 on the paper feed driving board. If problem persists, inspect the paper feed driving board for
visible damage (i.e. cold solder joints or scorched components). Replace the paper feed driving board (p/n 40AA-9071) as necessary.
Description
DF309, jam position 13 and high pitched noise while copying.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. One of the belt regulating shaft holders (p/n 12QV45180) is out of position riding on top of the conveyance belt. Reposition the belt regulating shaft holder
to the side of the belt and ensure that the belt tracks properly using 47 mode, code 60, multimode 04 to run the conveyance motor.
2. If the belt tracks to one side during diagnostic mode (above), check the original conveyance plate. The conveyance belt driven roller bearing holders may
break due to a combination of excessive oil applied to the bearing and low temperatures.
Refer to DF309 Technical Bulletin #1 .
Note: New conveyance belt roller bearings have been installed on DF309 units above s/n 12QW16872. On DF309 units below s/n 12QW16873 perform the
following procedure during setup:
a. Remove the conveyance belt, and original conveyance plate (bottom).
b. Remove the two bearings from the exit side conveyance belt roller.
c. Thoroughly clean the bearings with alcohol.
d. Reinstall bearings, plate, and belt.
3. The one-way drive gears are slipping on the regist driving roller shaft. This causes the roller to intermittently loose drive. The paper may have slightly
folded or nicked areas at the lead edge when the jam occurs. Clean the one-way bearings and shaft with alcohol.
Note: Refer to page 8 and 9, Item #'s 1, 18 and 19 in the DF309 Parts Catalog for location.
Description
The machine does not come to ready. The letter D is indicated in the upper left corner of the LCD.
Solution
CAUSE: The copier has shut down because the ADD TONER condition was present for more than 1500 copies.
SOLUTION: Add toner (PCUA 947435) to the copier. If toner is not immediately available, the shut down cycle count can be extended by performing the
following:
1. Enter the 25 mode (power the copier ON while holding down the 2 and 5 keys).
2. Select [1: Software switch set mode?], and press the OK key.
3. Press the leftmost up arrow key three times, until 04 is displayed on the far left of the LCD.
4. Use the matrix below to determine which values to input at software dipswitches 4-2, 4-3, and 4-4 to control the shut down cycle count:
4-2 (Copy stop when ADD TONER is indicated): 0 - disabled (default); 1- enabled
4-3 to 00 4-4 to 00: 1500 copies
4-3 to 01 4-4 to 00 2000 copies
4-3 to 00 4-4 to 01 2500 copies
4-3 to 01 4-4 to 01 3000 copies
Note: The D in the display is corrected by installing the latest EPROM level . With this EPROM installed, the display indicates the message TONER
EMPTY/DO NOT COPY. Refer to 2230/2330/3240/3340 Technical Bulletin #7 for more detailed information.
Description
Unable to adjust paper feed registration in 36 mode.
Solution
CAUSE: A failed optics driving motor (M2).
SOLUTION: Replace the optics driving motor (p/n 40AA80020).
Description
Intermittent jam position 7 with incorrect lead edge registration.
Solution
CAUSE: A dirty or worn paper feed connecting roller and/or shaft regulator.
70
3240
SOLUTION: Clean or replace (with new-style) the paper feed connecting roller (p/n 40AA45252) and/or shaft regulator (p/n 40AA45411). The paper feed
connecting roller is the 6.75" long, gray roller visible when the top right-side door of the copier is opened. The new-style paper feed connecting roller and
shaft regulator are installed in production machines beginning with serial number 40AE00800. Refer to 2230/2330/3240/3340 Technical Bulletin #11 for
additional information. After cleaning/replacing the feed parts, perform the lead edge timing adjustment. To adjust the image lead edge timing, perform the
following:
Description
Unable to complete the Toner Control IF Voltage adjustment. The message may indicate COMPLETE after the adjustment has run for only a few seconds
(the developer should be agitated for approximately one minute).
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The cleaning blade is not set in the correct position. Insufficient cleaning of the drum surface results, and the drum is coated with toner during the Toner
Control IF Voltage adjustment. Install the cleaning blade so that it contacts the drum and ensure correct operation. To reposition the cleaning blade perform
the following procedure:
a. Remove the drum carriage.
b. Remove the two cleaning blade mounting screws.
c. Lubricate the drum surface with setting powder or toner.
d. Lower the cleaning blade against the drum surface.
e. Install the mounting screws in the top holes.
f. Physically drive the drum toward the developing unit.
g. Perform the Toner Control IF Voltage adjustment (see below) again.
Note: If the IF voltage adjustment still does not run to completion, replace the developer.
2. Toner has deposited on the toner control sensor (TCS). Check the TCS (p/n 40AA-9181) on the drum carriage for toner contamination. Check for loose
connectors or pins on the TCS (CN64), the drum carriage (CN60) and the main CB (CN43). Check for loose connectors on the toner control board and at the
drum carriage. On the ADU DB, the voltage at CN43-B7 should read 0.4V DC. The voltage at CN43-B8 should read 3.7V DC.
TONER CONTROL IF VOLTAGE ADJ USTMENT
Be sure to perform the following adjustment after adding developer to the developing unit:
1. While pressing the 3 and 6 keys simultaneously, power ON the copier.
3. Press the F3 (NEXT) key to display HV adj. (toner control IF voltage) on the screen.
5. Press the F2 (START) key. The copier will halt after the developing unit rotates for approximately one minute.
Caution: The above adjustment should precede all others.
Description
Intermittently, the lead edge of the copy is deleted and the rear trail edge is moved up toward the center of the page.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The actuator for the intermediate conveyance sensor (PS17) is worn, resulting in improper actuation of the intermediate conveyance sensor.
Inspect the actuator for the paper temporary stop sensor (p/n 40AA45150) and the actuator for the intermediate conveyance sensor (p/n 40AA45160) for
signs of wear. Replace as necessary.
2. The 2nd paper feed clutch (MC1) is dirty or binding.
Due to the sealed design of the 2nd paper feed clutch, disassembly and cleaning is difficult. If the copy registration is erratic, replace the 2nd paper feed
clutch (p/n 40AA82011).
Description
Solution
71
3240
SOLUTION: Replace the LCD (p/n 40AE-7102).
Note: Refer to 2230/2330/3240/3340 Technical Bulletin #6 for additional information.
Description
How to change paper size in cassettes.
Solution
To change paper size:
2. Press the up arrow once, then press OK.
3. Select the desired cassette and paper size using the up/down arrows.
4. Press OK to set the paper size.
Description
ST216, code 77-00 when sorting.
Solution
CAUSE: The sorter indexer is out of alignment.
SOLUTION: Perform the indexer position adjustment. To properly adjust the indexer position, perform the following:
1. Power copier OFF.
2. Remove the front and rear covers.
3. On the sorter CB, set dipswitches SW1-1, SW1-2 and SW1-3 to the ON position.
4. Ensure both sorter interlocks are closed (PS208 and MS201).
5. On the sorter CB, press and hold PSW1 while powering ON the main body (code 70-00 will occur; this is normal).
6. Release PSW1, then press and release it one time. The indexer will lower to the adjustment position (approximately at the 4th bin).
7. Open the conveyance section.
8. Insert the indexer positioning shaft adjustment tool (p/n 7050K0020) into the access hole on the rear side frame of the sorter. The hole is located to the
right of the conveyance door interlock switch (MS201). The shaft should be positioned under the indexer and into another hole in the front side frame.
Note: The indexer positioning tool is the same tool used for optics alignment on the 7050.
9. Rotate the indexer motor encoder plate to lower the indexer until it contacts the adjustment shaft.
10. Loosen the fixed screw located on the front side of the indexer.
11. Slide the front of the indexer up or down until it is positioned parallel with the adjustment shaft. Retighten the indexer fixing screw.
12. Loosen the screw that secures the PS203 4-slot encoder plate and adjust the 4-slot encoder plate until LED 1 is lit. Retighten the encoder plate.
Note: Either or both interlock sensor/switch (PS208/MS201) must be opened during this adjustment.
13. Remove the indexer positioning shaft and reset all 3 SW1 switches to the OFF position.
14. Power copier OFF/ON to return to the normal mode.
72
3340
Description
Solution
5. Power the machine OFF then ON to exit the key operator mode.
Description
PLEASE CLOSE TOP LEFT SIDE COVER message at power up. Cover is closed.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The rear portion of the paper exit actuator (p/n 40AA46040) is dislodged. This six-sided actuator is on the end of a black plastic shaft located on the lower
guide (p/n 40BA48040) of the upper paper exit cover (p/n 40BA48010). When correctly positioned, it sits beneath the white paper exit driving gear (p/n
40AA77270).
To reposition the paper exit actuator perform the following:
a. Power OFF the copier.
b. Open the left side door after removing the catch tray or sliding the sorter away from the main body.
c. Carefully bend the black plastic shaft while inserting the dislodged end into a small hole on the upper paper exit cover. This hole can be seen when
viewed from the front of the copier.
d. When the actuator is in position, close the left side door, reinstall the catch tray or slide the sorter up to the main body of the copier.
e. Power ON the copier.
Note: After a fuser jam is cleared, the upper paper exit cover is able to close even if the fuser release plate (p/n 40AA53050) remains open. As the cover is
closed, the fuser release plate contacts the lower guide portion of the upper paper exit cover. Either the paper exit actuator dislodges or the actuator shaft
breaks. The design of the entrance guide plate (p/n 40BA48272) has been modified to prevent this. The serial number cut-in is 40BE04641. A
countermeasure part, plastic spacer kit (p/n 40BAK0010), is available for older style machines. Two (2) spacers are packaged in each kit.
The old style entrance guide has two cut out slots at the top. The spacers are positioned in each corner of the guide, in line with the slots. They attach to the
exit guide by removing the sticky-back paper.
Refer to 2230/2330/3240/3340 Technical Bulletin #10A for additional information.
2. Paper is jammed behind the left side cover.
Remove the jam.
Description
Solution
SOLUTION: Replace the LCD board (p/n 40AE-7102).
73
3340
Note: This problem has been corrected in production machines beginning with s/n 40BE07016. Refer to 2230/2330/3240/3340 Technical Bulletin #6 for
additional information.
Description
PLEASE LOAD A4 (or B4 or 8.5x11R) when using ADF or platen glass APS.
Solution
DIPSW VALUE
2-7 0
3-0 0
3-1 0
3-2 1
Notes:
1. Metric sizes can be run through the machine, however A4 and A4R will appear as 8.5x11 and 8.5x11R in the LCD display. To program trays for metric
paper, select 25 mode, Tray size setting and press OK. Select the required tray using the F1 (tray) button. Select the required paper size using the F2 or F3
button. A4 and A4R paper are the only available metric paper selections.
2. The destination code must be set for USA.
Description
Unable to complete the Toner Control IF Voltage adjustment. The message may indicate COMPLETE after the adjustment has run for only a few seconds
(the developer should be agitated for approximately one minute).
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The cleaning blade is not set in the correct position. Insufficient cleaning of the drum surface results, and the drum is coated with toner during the Toner
Control IF Voltage adjustment. Install the cleaning blade so that it contacts the drum and ensure correct operation. To reposition the cleaning blade perform
the following procedure:
a. Remove the drum carriage.
b. Remove the two cleaning blade mounting screws.
c. Lubricate the drum surface with setting powder or toner.
d. Lower the cleaning blade against the drum surface.
e. Install the mounting screws in the top holes.
f. Physically drive the drum toward the developing unit.
g. Perform the Toner Control IF Voltage adjustment (see below) again.
Note: If the IF voltage adjustment still does not run to completion, replace the developer.
2. Toner has deposited on the toner control sensor (TCS). Check the TCS (p/n 40AA-9181) on the drum carriage for toner contamination. Check for loose
connectors or pins on the TCS (CN64), the drum carriage (CN60) and the main CB (CN43). Check for loose connectors on the toner CB and at the drum
carriage. On the ADU DB, the voltage at CN43-B7 should read 0.4V DC. The voltage at CN43-B8 should read 3.7V DC.
TONER CONTROL IF VOLTAGE ADJ USTMENT
Be sure to perform the following adjustment after adding developer to the developing unit:
1. Access the 36 mode (while pressing the 3 and 6 keys simultaneously, power ON the copier).
3. Press the F3 [NEXT] key to display [HV adj. (toner control IF voltage)] on the screen.
5. Press the F2 [START] key. The copier halts after the developing unit rotates for approximately one minute.
Caution: The above adjustment should precede all others.
Description
Solution
To clear fuser codes, perform the following:
1. Access the 25 mode (power the machine OFF, hold down the 2 and 5 keys and power the machine ON).
2. Select [1: Software switch set mode?] and press the OK key.
3. Set the software switches as follows (press the OK key to enter the new data):
74
3340
Description
Solution
Description
Varying lead edge registration.
Solution
CAUSE: A failed M2 motor.
SOLUTION: Replace M2 motor (p/n 40AA80020). Ensure that other common causes of varying lead edge (the second paper feed clutch, the optics sensors,
etc.) have been eliminated before replacing M2. Perform the lead edge timing adjustment after replacing the motor. To adjust the image lead edge timing,
perform the following:
Description
Solution
CAUSE: The sorter indexer is out of alignment.
SOLUTION: To properly adjust the indexer position, perform the following:
1. Power copier OFF.
2. Remove the front and rear covers.
3. On the sorter CB, set dipswitches SW1-1, SW1-2 and SW1-3 to the ON position.
4. Ensure both sorter interlocks are closed (PS208 and MS201).
5. On the sorter CB, press and hold PSW1 while powering ON the main body (code 70-00 will occur; this is normal).
6. Release PSW1, then press and release it one time. The indexer will lower to the adjustment position (approximately at the 4th bin).
7. Open the conveyance section.
8. Insert the indexer positioning shaft adjustment tool (p/n 7050K0020) into the access hole on the rear side frame of the sorter. The hole is located to the
9. Rotate the indexer motor encoder plate to lower the indexer until it contacts the adjustment shaft.
10. Loosen the fixed screw located on the front side of the indexer.
11. Slide the front of the indexer up or down until it is positioned parallel with the adjustment shaft. Retighten the indexer fixing screw.
12. Loosen the screw that secures the PS203 4-slot encoder plate and adjust the 4-slot encoder plate until LED 1 is lit. Retighten the encoder plate.
75
3340
13. Remove the indexer positioning shaft and reset all 3 SW1 switches to the OFF position.
14. Power copier OFF/ON to return to the normal mode.
Description
F10-1 at power up.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The operation LCD assembly has failed.
Reseat CN11 and CN13 on the operation LCD assembly (on the operation panel) and inspect the wiring harness to ensure that no wires are pinched. If
problem persists, replace the operation LCD assembly (p/n 40AE-7100).
2. A failed DCPS.
Replace the DCPS (p/n 40AA84511).
76
35C-4
Description
Release of Macintosh10.5 drivers.
Solution
Macintosh10.5 drivers are not yet available for the Emperon controllers. In the meantime the 10.4 drivers may be used for basic printing but functionality
issues may occur with advanced features.
SPECIAL NOTE : Solution contribution by J im Behrends, Production Print/SSD
Description
How to capture a file on the color MFPs when printing using the Emperon controller.
Solution
The following must be set up in order to capture the files:
1. Press the utility button and select Administrator Settings.
2. Select Security setting => Security Detail => Print Data Capture must be set to Allow =>
Administrator Settings => Network Setting => FTP setting, FTP Server must be set to ON.
3. In Tech Rep Mode, select System2 and select Data Capture. Select ON.
4. Send print jobs. When finished, enter Command prompt and run FTP client.
5. Issue OPEN ipaddress command and login as the following user
capture
sysadm
6. Type lcd \ command to set the local directory to root of C drive.
7. Use the ls command to list the files.
8. Type binary to change the transfer mode to binary.The response should be 200 .
9. Type set to I .
10. Use the get command to retrieve the files (i.e., get c741n.cpt). This will transfer the file tolocal c drive.
11. After complete enter the bye command.
12. Type exit to quit the command prompt.
To delete the jobs on the HDD,select administrator settings => Security Detail => Restrict.
The function will remove the files from the printer.
Description
FK-502, how to adjust the cable EQL for TX and RX.
Solution
To adjust the cable EQL for TX and RX, perform the following:
1. Press the Utility/Counter key.
2. Touch [Details] on the touchscreen.
3. Press Stop-0-0-Stop-0-1.
4. Touch [FAX] on the touchscreen.
5. Touch [Modem/NCU] on the touchscreen.
6. Touch [Cable EQL] on the touchscreen.
7. Under the heading of TX touch [-] or [+] to change the EQL TX value. The setting can be programmed to 0, 4, 8, or 12[dB].
8. Under the heading of RX touch [-] or [+] to change the EQL RX value. The setting can be programmed to 0, 4, 8, or 12[dB].
9. Touch [END] on the touchscreen.
10. Touch [Exit] on the touchscreen.
SPECIAL NOTE : Solution contribution by J im Behrends and Ted Young, Production Print/SSD
Description
How to enable SMB (File Sharing) from a MacintoshOSX 10.2, 10.3 and 10.4.8, or 10.5.
Solution
Please see the attached documentsexplaining how to enable SMB (File Sharing) from a
MacintoshOSX 10.2, 10.3 and 10.4.8, or 10.5. To view a PDF, Adobe Readermust be installed. Adobe Readercan be downloaded for free from the
Adobeweb site at: http://www.adobe.com/products/acrobat/readstep2.html .
SPECIAL NOTE : Solution contribution by Cesar J imenez and Ed Bellone, Production Print/SSD
Description
Support for Account track, Secure print, and User authentication from Unix/Linux environments.
Solution
Konica Minolta does not support Account track, Secure print, and User authentication from Unix/Linux environments at this time.
77
35C-4
The availability of these options for Unix/Linux environments is being considered for future development.
Please attachticket to this solution and provide the following information;
1. Product model number(s).
2. Now many products placed or being considered for placement.
3.What "flavor" and version of Unix/Linux operating system.
SPECIAL NOTE : Solution contribution by Tony Pizzoferrato, ESS/SSD
Description
Only the first worksheet of a workbook is duplexed when printing from MicrosoftExcel.
Solution
CAUSE:MicrosoftExcel prints each worksheet as a seperate print job; this is a limitation on Excel.

SOLUTION: To print the entire MicrosoftExcel workbook duplexed, follow this workaround:
1. In MicrosoftExcel select the first worksheet.
2.Select File.
3. SelectPrint.
4. Select Properties.
5. In the print driver select Duplex.
6. Select OK.
7. Select Cancel in the print dialog box.
Repeatsteps 1-7 for each worksheet in the workbook.
8. Select File.
9. Select Print.
10. Select Entire Workbook.
11. Select OK.
SPECIAL NOTE : Solution contribution by Gregg Gallant, Production Print/SSD
Description
Coreldocuments print light. Output from other applications is normal.
Solution
CAUSE: Setting in Corel. When the colors in a file or in the workspace color palette are not displaying as bright, vibrant colors this can be caused by the
Color Management being enabled in CorelDRAW. The default setting in CorelDRAWis Color Management enabled.

SOLUTION: To disable Color Management,perform the following:
1. Click on Tools, Color Management.
2. In the Style drop-down list, select "Color Management Off" and click OK.
Note : In this mode, colors may not print as they are displayed on screen.
SPECIAL NOTE : Solution contribution by Bill Hall, Workgroup/SSD
Description
FK-502, how to insert a pause in the PBX setting.
Solution
It is not possible to insert a pauseafter the outside line access code in the PBX setting.
SPECIAL NOTE : Solution contribution by Clinton Marquardt, ESS/SSD
Solution ID Solution Usage TAUS0702361EN*
Description
Where to findmanuals and other product documention.
78
404/4090/6040
Description
F22.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The charge corona cleaner is damaged. To reset the code set addresses 12 through 17 in the 25 mode to 0. This will clear the counter, repair the
damage to the cleaner as necessary.
2. The charge cleaning drive wire is broken. Replace the charge cleaner drive wire (p/n 4600-2540).
3. The driver board has failed. Replace the driver board (p/n 4600-7320).
Description
F18 at power up.
Solution
CAUSE: Fuse F1 on the driver board is open, or the driver board has failed; due to a shorted lift tray motor (M9), or a pinched wire.
SOLUTION: Replace the driver board (p/n 4600-7320), and M9, (p/n 460080050). Ensure the wires are not damaged. Tape the wires on M9 to protect them.
See 4090 Technical Bulletin #7 ,
Description
Erratic copy quality, normal to excessively light.
Solution
CAUSE: There is poor airflow through the machine, or the CVR board, and main CB may be faulty.
SOLUTION: Verify the ozone filter replacement (every 100,000 copies) and the dustproof filter (every 200,000 copies) to ensure good airflow. Inspect CN24
on the drum carriage, and the female side inside the machine. Ensure there is no damage to the pins and they are clean. The CEL temperature sensor
interfaces through this connector.
If all checks are normal, replace the CVR board (p/n 460083510) and the main CB (p/n 4600-8510) at the same time. One board may be damaging the other.
Description
F55.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The exposure lamp (L1) is open. Replace L1 (p/n 326083010).
2. The main AC relay (RL1) is pitted. Clean or replace RL1 (p/n 370088070).
3. The lamp cord wiring assembly for L1 is faulty. Check the lamp cord by testing for continuity from CN34-1 to CN34-2 (connector is located at the rear of
the copier by the ADF stopper solenoid) while moving the optics manually. If necessary replace the lamp cord (p/n 4600-8070).
4. The drive signal at CN62-4 on the driver board is not going LO. The main relay (RL1) does not energize resulting in the code. If the RL1 control signal at
CN60-13 on the drive board goes LO, but does not stay LO; replace the drive board (p/n 4600-7320).
Description
Solution
Description
79
404/4090/6040
J 31 the paper stalls before the fuser.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The paper loop data is set too low. Adjust the paper loop in the 36 mode using code 94.
2. In a humid environment the trail edge of wet paper will arc to the T/S corona shell. Install a 2803 plunge arrestor (p/n 312026070) on the T/S corona unit.
The paper will not touch the corona shell.
Description
Intermittent J 11.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. There is a pinched wire (blue wire) to the bypass tray sensor (PS17). This causes the sensor to activate intermittently causing the paper tray to drop down
for the bypass feed mode. Repair the damaged wiring to PS17 as necessary.
2. The motor driver board is not supplying the control voltage to the PFU motor (M3). Note: This may be difficult to monitor. Use the 47 mode output code
20. Check the control signal at CN61-4 (gray wire) for 28V DC at idle, and 0V DC when running. If necessary replace the motor driver board (p/n 4600-7320)
and M3 (p/n 460080030) as a set.
Description
All LEDs on the operation panel are on.
Solution
CAUSE: The main AC relay (RL1) contacts are stuck closed after initial contact.
SOLUTION: Clean or replace the relay (p/n 370088070).
Description
Can the charge corona cleaner be disabled?
Solution
There is no way to turn off the charge corona cleaner. To reset an F22 code until parts can be obtained; in the 25 mode set P10, and P11 to 9, and set
addresses P12-P17 to 0.
Description
F52 at power up or in standby mode.
Solution
CAUSE: Fuse F2 on the DC motor CB is open.
SOLUTION: The main motor (M1) drives the drum, developing unit, cleaning unit, second paper feed clutch, conveyance unit, and the fixing drive unit.
Ensure there are no binds to any of these components. If necessary replace the DC motor CB (p/n 4600-8550).
80
4045
Description
Solution
Description
ST206, J 72.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Incorrect programming. Ensure all hardware dipswitches on the sorter CB are OFF. In the 25 mode ensure that software dipswitches P3, and P59 are set
to 0.
2. The paper drags on the front frame side of the paper deflect plate (p/n 074045070). This is due to incorrect zoning of the paper drawer or incorrect
positioning of the deflect plate. The problem usually affects 8.5x11 paper only. Verify that the paper drawer is zoned correctly. If so, reposition the deflect
plate by placing a stopper ring (p/n 396040680) between the bushing (p/n 074075540) and the C-clip on the rear frame side of the deflect plate. This will shift
the plate to the rear frame of the sorter.
3. The paper sensor (PS201) is dirty, or needs adjustment. Clean the sensor, and adjust. On the sorter CB set hardware dipswitch 1 ON. Remove all paper
from the bins. Check LED1 on the sorter CB, LED1 should be OFF. Adjust VR3 so LED1 goes OFF. Insert paper, and check that LED1 blinks.
4. The encoder sensor (PS206) for the paper conveyance motor (M201) is loose and out of position. Reposition PS206.
5. The non-sort conveyance shaft rollers are worn. Replace the conveyance shaft rollers (p/n 074045100).
6. There is a poor connection to the bin home position sensor (PS203). Reseat the connector.
7. The bin timing is off. See page 23 of the ST206 service manual third edition dated October 1993 for the bin timing (lead cam position) adjustment.
8. The staple guide bar is jammed too far into the bins and cannot return to the home position. Turn the copier OFF and push the guide bar toward the rear
of the sorter until it stops.
9. The stapler unit is obstructing the movement of the bin unit preventing it from going to the home position. Reposition the stapler unit out of the path of the
bin unit.
10. The bin shift interlock (MS204) switch is actuated. MS204 is located directly above the front helical cam. Perform the MS204 adjustment. Loosen the
two adjusting screws, and adjust the switch so the distance between the switch (not the actuator) and the front cam holder is 2.5 mm.
11. A groove is worn in the non-sort conveyance shaft. Note: This shaft has the large white entrance rollers on it by the upper conveyance rollers. Replace
the shaft (p/n 074045100).
12. The upper and lower fixed shafts (p/n 074042300) are loose causing the bin unit to bind in the lead cams (p/n 074010170) and (p/n 074010180). Ensure
that the screws that secure the fixed shafts are tight. Replace the fixed rollers (p/n 074042310) or the lead cams if they are worn.
13. There is no DC output from the sorter power supply. Verify the sorter power supply output. If necessary replace the sorter power supply (p/n
074089030).
Description
ST205S, J 72.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The programming is incorrect. First, verify the sorter CB EPROM is (p/n ST20563-18.0), and ensure that all hardware dipswitches on the sorter CB are
OFF. In the 25 mode, verify software dipswitches P3, and P59 are set to 5.
2. The exit detect sensor (PS202) is dirty, or needs adjustment.
Perform the following steps.
a. Turn the power off and remove the rear cover to expose the sorter CB.
b. Check PS202 for dust or dirt; clean as required.
c. Turn VR1 on the sorter CB fully clockwise.
d. Set sorter CB hardware dipswitches 1, and 2 to the ON position. Close all covers, including MS203 (the lower linked interlock).
e. Turn the power ON while pressing SW1 on the sorter CB. Press SW1 seven times; this will cause the indexer to begin to lower. When the indexer has
81
4045
reached the 11th, 12th, or 13th bin, press SW1 again to stop the lowering of the indexer.
f. Turn VR1 on the sorter CB fully counterclockwise; this should turn LED A OFF. If it does not, turn it off by blocking the LED 202 light path to PS202 with
a piece of copy paper.
g. Turn VR1 clockwise very slowly until LED A lights up; then, continue turning to one mark beyond that point.
h. Reset the sorter hardware dipswitches 1, and 2. Reinstall the rear cover, and check the operation to confirm that copies are properly fed to all 20 bins.
3. The indexer height is off. Adjust the indexer height, and retime the indexer pulleys; the timing belt may have jumped out of position.
4. The paper conveyance of the sorter is binding, and slowing down. Clean all bushings, loosen all belts. The conveyance motor (M201) (p/n 037180010)
may need replacement.
5. The paper feed roller in the sorter is worn. Replace the sorter paper feed roller (p/n 037145480).
6. A broken reel film is obstructing the paper path. Replace the broken reel film (p/n 037145751 for the two outer reel films and p/n 037145431 for the two
inner reel films). The broken film may be removed to allow sorting operation until replacement can be made.
7. The indexer motor (M202) has failed. Replace M202 (p/n 037180020).
8. The sorter CB has failed. Replace the sorter CB (p/n 037187010).
9. Failed copier main CB. Replace main CB (p/n 5442-9017).
Description
Blank LCD.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Drive pulley (A) (p/n 540076531) is slipping on the lens motor (M7) shaft, or the timing belt (p/n 540077520) has fallen off and is lodged between the motor
and pulley. An interim repair for a slipping drive pulley (A) is to apply a small amount of instant adhesive between the drive pulley and motor shaft. For a
permanent repair, replace M7 with the new-style (p/n 25BA-7404). M7 must be used with the new-style adjustable drive plate assembly (p/n 5400-6321). In
addition, a new motor cover mylar (p/n 35AE61990) has been established to prevent M7 from interfering with the cover of the door detect wiring. The mylar is
placed onto the bottom of the motor. These newer parts can not be mixed with the original parts. They must be used as a set.
2. The 5V DC to the LCD needs adjustment. Adjust VR1 on the operation board.
Description
Solution
1. Power the machine OFF.
2. While holding down the 2 and 5 keys power the machine ON.
3. Enter the 8-digit master key code starting at address P72 through P79. Valid data is 0 through 9 at each address, press the start print button to enter the
new data.
4. Set address P05 (ECM limit features) based on the key operators request.
0: ECM disabled.
5. In standby mode hold down P then press 9, then enter your Master Key Code. Then access the following setting modes to perform ECM functions:
1: Password Set.
3: Read Copy Count.
4: Account Reset.
Description
82
4045
Light copies.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. CN8-B9 on the main CB is not seated on both sides of the connector. Ensure that CN8 is fully seated on the main CB.
2. The copier ran too long after the add toner message appeared. Instruct the end user how to add toner in diagnostics (47 mode, output code 01). It is
recommended to install toner as soon as the message appears.
3. Check the control signal at CN8-B9 (gray wire) on the main CB. Using the 47 mode, output code 01, the voltage should read 28V DC when at idle, and
drop to .6V DC when START/PRINT is pressed.
If no change of state, replace the toner motor and the main CB (p/n 5402-9019) at the same time. Install the improved toner motor kit (p/n 5400-K120). Note:
A new toner hopper cover (p/n 540032191) must be installed if the motor kit is installed. See 4045 Technical Bulletin #88. .
4. The toner control sensor (PS1) failed. Verify power to the sensor, and the connections. If necessary, replace PS1 (p/n 540088040).
5. The drum carriage connector (CN50) at the rear of the unit is damaged. Replace the main wiring harness (p/n 540090010).
6. CN5 (PS1 control signals) on the main CB is not connected, or poorly connected. Connect/reseat the connector. Repair the connection as necessary.
7. Incorrect supplies are being used. Purge the toning/developing system, and replace with the correct supplies.
8. A high volume machine. Extensive testing has shown that when these models exceed 300,000 copies, there is a tendency for the surface of the magnet
roller in the developing unit to become smooth. Order (p/n SE95-3060). For dealers see Technical Operations Bulletin #D14 dated 12/19/95. For branches
see Technical Operations Bulletin #A23 dated 12/19/95. See installation procedure. Note: Please look inside the cardboard tube in kit. The tube is not just
packing material, but contains parts inside.
9. The main charge corona assembly is not seated on the drum carriage. The CEL and PCL wiring at the rear of the drum carriage is caught on the rear of
the drum carriage cavity, causing the charge assembly to dislodge (pop up in the front).
Reroute/reposition the CEL and PCL wiring to provide proper clearance.
Description
ST103 is not recognized by the main body.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Incorrect EPROM level. Order EPROMs: (p/n 313512-20.0, 313513-20.0, 313514-20.0). See 3135 Technical Bulletin #38A .
2. CN114 for the sorter is disconnected at the main CB. Reconnect CN114.
3. The 24V DC, and 5V DC is missing at CN800-1, CN800-2 on the sorter. CN43 on the DCPS on the main body is unplugged. Reconnect CN43.
4. The ST103 was plugged in when power was on for the copier. The 5V DC ICP1 on the sorter DB is open. Replace the sorter DB (p/n 12KR-9012).
5. The ST103 is not sending the acknowledge signal to the main CB (CN801-3 reads 0V DC instead of 2.5V DC). Replace the sorter DB (p/n 12KR-9012).
Description
ST206, F70.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Incorrect programming. In the 25 mode ensure P3, and P59 are set to 0. Ensure that all hardware dipswitches on the sorter CB are OFF.
2. No power to the sorter CB. Check for 115V AC at the sorter power supply CN1001-1 to CN1001-3. Check for 24V DC output at the sorter power supply
CN1002-1 to 1002-2 each to GND, and then on STCB at CN1-3 to CN1-4 GND. If no output, ensure the bin unit is not binding. Replace the sorter power
supply (p/n 074089030).
3. A damaged power source harness. Replace the power source harness (p/n 074087050).
4. The sorter CB is not communicating with the main CB. Replace the sorter CB (p/n 074089020).
5. A faulty data harness between the main CB and the sorter CB. Replace the harness (p/n 074087060).
Description
J 17 when duplexing.
Solution
CAUSE: There is a timing problem between the ADU and the main body.
83
4045
SOLUTION: Order the increased diameter ADU timing pulley, (p/n U101-1240). It can be identified by the new gray color.
Description
Intermittent blank copies.
Solution
1. If the old style toner motor M6 (p/n 396080040) is installed, troubleshoot it for proper operation and perform a resistance check, as follows: take resistance
readings at 3 different points, 120 ohms apart, of one rotation of the motor. These readings should be within 5 ohms of each other. If these readings are out
of specification, install the improved toner motor kit (p/n 5400-K120). Note: A new toner hopper cover (p/n 540032191) must be installed if the motor kit is
installed. See 4045 Technical Bulletin #88. .
2. Remove the T/S corona unit and clean thoroughly (use soap and warm water on the plunging arrestor separation bridge). Slightly stretch the electrode
contact springs (p/n 540026040) to ensure proper contact.
4045 Technical Bulletin #17A .
6. Set the corona currents to specification. See 4045 Technical Bulletin #86 .
7. Replace the transfer/separation corona unit (p/n 5400-2605) if cleaning it did not resolve the problem.
9. Check the terminal block for signs of arcing. If arcing is evident, or an old style block is installed, replace it with the new style white block (p/n 540073231).
10. Check the drum wiring connector CN50 [p/n 5400K0190]) for cracks; replace it if necessary.
12. Check for an open fuse F2 on the main CB. Packed or binding toner may cause this fuse to open.
15. Troubleshoot the high voltage (B) unit (p/n 540084022) for arcing and proper grounding by checking for loose screws along the grounding path for the
HV(B). Replace the unit if necessary.
84
4065
Description
Code 54 when duplexing.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Improper feedback signals from the optics cooling fans (M10) and (M11). Verify that the fans work in the 47 mode using output code 52. If the fans work,
replace EPROMs IC5 (p/n 406515-23.0) and IC6 (p/n 406516-26.0) on the main CB. Ensure both fan filters get replaced every PM. Note: This firmware does
not contain auto tray switching. See 4065 Technical Bulletin #60 .
2. The exhaust fan (M6) is binding. Repair the bind in the fan assembly. If necessary replace M6 (p/n 454080132).
Description
The copier stays in wait. The fuser lamp cycles normally.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. One of the CA elements is touching the upper roller or the mounting bracket. Inspect both CAs for proper position: 1mm above and parallel to the upper
roller. Ensure that the CA wires have not slipped off the insulating pads.
2. An open lamp or temperature fuse. Check continuity between CN190-2 (black wire) to the TCB CN151-4 (red wire) for L3 and TF2. Then check continuity
from the TCB CN151-6 (white wire) to CN190-2 (black wire) for L2 and TF1. CN190 is located behind the TCB and is a 2 pin in-line connector. Replace the
open lamp(s), or temperature fuse(s) as necessary.
3. CN190 at the rear of the machine is disconnected. This is the AC feed for the fuser lamps. Reconnect CN190.
4. The temperature control board (TCB) has failed. Replace the TCB (p/n 538287170).
Description
ST207, code 77-3.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The bin drive motor is disengaged. The sorters are shipped with the bin drive motor disengaged from the drive gears to avoid damage during shipping.
Pull the bin unit out 60 10mm toward the front of the machine; and hold it in place while engaging and fixing the bin shift motor.
2. CN936 is disconnected causing an open in the interlock circuit. Reconnect CN936, this connector allows 28V DC to the coil of RL1.
3. One of the wires has been pulled off the sorter main relay (RL1). Reconnect any wires that have been pulled off.
4. An open interlock switch, SW1, SW2, SW3, or SW4 is not allowing 28V DC to the coil of the sorter main relay (RL1). Take a continuity check from the red
wire on RL1 to CN812-1 (red wire) on the sorter CB. The reading should be approximately .8 ohms, repair or replace any bad switches as necessary.
5. Resistor R64 next to fuse F1 on the sorter CB has failed, causing no RL1 drive control. Turn the machine OFF and check CN812-1 to frame ground. If
there is continuity to frame ground, inspect all interlock switches, and the wiring to them for any shorts to frame. Disengage the bin shift motor and slide the
bin unit back and forth while watching the meter. Repair as necessary and replace the sorter CB (p/n 5540-9011).
Description
Light copies.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Fuse F1 on the MCB3 board is open. If open, the toner motor (M4) will not operate. Ensure there are no binds in the toner hopper assembly. Replace the
fuse 800ma 125V (p/n 216.800). Note: M4 does not operate in diagnostics the code was a misprint in the service manual.
2. The charge corona wires are contaminated or have failed. Clean or replace the corona wires (p/n 454025160).
3. The PTL lamp is past the recommended replacement interval. Replace the PTL (p/n 454083070). The recommended replacement interval is every
200,000 copies.
4. The toner patch is faulty or has been altered. Replace the toner patch (p/n 454061560).
5. The high voltage power supply is faulty. Replace the high voltage power supply (p/n 454084012).
Description
85
4065
Solution
1. Power the machine OFF, hold down the P button and the start print, power the machine ON. Press P-6-start print, set software dip 1-7 to 1 for the ECM
option.
2. Program the master key code. Press P-9-start print. Use the keypad enter the 8 digit master key code, press the start print button to store. Ensure the
key operator knows this code. Note: To enter the master key code or view it, power the machine OFF, hold down the P button and the start print, power the
machine ON. Then press P-9-start print.
3. To access the ECM modes, hold down the P button and enter the 8 digit master key code, no change will occur on the op panel until the last digit is
entered.
4. Press 1 on the keypad for Create Password. The number of passwords available is 255. Each password must be 5 digits long. Use the magnification
arrows to scroll through the passwords.
5. Press 2 for Limit Copy Count: Set the copy count limit for each password (up to 999,999 copies.)
6. Press 3 for Read Copy Count: Read the current copy count for each password.
7. Press 4 for Count Reset: Clear all accounts or individual account. When each account is cleared, the copy count will automatically reset to zero.
8. To escape the ECM modes, while holding down the P button press the stop/clear button.
Description
J am positions 1, 2, 3 no first paper feed from any paper drawers.
Solution
CAUSE: The reduction gear assembly on the PFU has split, causing no drive to the PFU timing belt.
SOLUTION: Inspect the reduction gear assembly on the PFU. If necessary replace the assembly (p/n 0676-4650).
Description
Codes 41-1, 41-4, 41-5, and 52.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Code 41-1, 41-4, 41-5, and 52 when copying. The MCB1 board is faulty, pulling down the 35V DC causing a loss of 35V DC to the MCB2 board. If the
front doors are open the code will stop. In the 47 mode verify the 35V DC at the MCB1 board CN63-1 (yellow wire) to CN63-3 (blue wire GND). If the voltage
drops when the front doors are closed; replace the MCB1 board (p/n 5380-8590).
2. Code 41-1, 41-4, 41-5, and 52 when copying. The front door switches are damaged. If the switch assembly is cracked, or does not check good with an
ohm meter; replace the switch assembly (p/n 4542-8300).
3. Code 41-5 at power up. The optics overrun right sensor (PS13) is faulty. Replace the sensor (p/n 454085510).
Description
J am position 7.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. False jam position 7 at power up. The fusing jam sensor (PS506) and/or fusing jam LED (LED502) has failed. Replace PS506 (p/n 066085520) and if
necessary LED502 (p/n 0900-8380).
2. J am position 7 at idle. The door switches have failed. Replace the door switch assemblies for both the left and right doors (p/n 4542-8300).
3. J am position 7 at idle. The fixing jam LED (LED502) is out of position. The LED is located in the top cover of the exit inversion unit. The LED shines light
to the small mirror located near the lower fuser roller. This light is then reflected back to the fixing jam detect sensor (PS506), which is located to the left of
the mirror under the black exit belts. Align the exit inversion unit so the LED properly shines light onto the reflective mirror.
4. J am position 7, the toner patch is on the copies. The paper feed restart sensor (PS10) is faulty. Replace PS10 (p/n 454085510). Note: In the optics area,
counting from the left side, PS10 is the third sensor in, as viewed from the front of the machine.
5. J am position 7 only when duplexing. The inner exit detecting switch (MS502) has failed. Confirm the operation of MS502. Use the 47 mode input code
24. With the switch not actuated the display should be 0. With the switch actuated the display should be 1. If necessary replace the switch (p/n 1730-7560).
Note: MS502 has the white actuator.
86
4065
Description
ST207, jam position 13.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. A level 12 EPROM is installed on the sorter CB. Check the EPROM on the sorter CB, the recommended minimum level is 13.2 Order (p/n ST20763-13.2)
which eliminates user induced jams.
2. Incorrect positioning of the exit detect LED, the sensor always detects a jam.
a. Turn ON dipswitch 1 on the sorter CB.
b. Turn VR1 clockwise until LED1 turns ON, then turn VR1 counterclockwise and confirm the scale mark at which LED1 turns OFF. At this point, if VR1 is
at the third scale mark or more (in the counterclockwise direction), confirm the position of the sensor. If VR1 is at a position of less than 3 scale marks,
proceed with the following steps.
c. Loosen the screw on the light emitting side of the exit detect sensor.
d. Turn VR1 to the center of the scale and find the sensor position where LED1 turns OFF by moving the sensor up and down.
e. Form the mounting plate using long-nose pliers so that the sensor can detect properly.
f. Turn OFF dipswitch 1 on the sorter CB.
3. The horizontal conveyance drive pulley is broken causing no drive. Ensure that the horizontal conveyance section is free of binds. Replace pulley (B) (p/n
554077160).
Description
No power to the copier.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The leakage breaker has tripped. Reset the leakage breaker. The leakage breaker is located by the main relays and circuit breakers under the black
plastic cover to the right of the ADU unit.
2. There is a short on the 5V DC bus. Disconnect all of the connectors on PSB1 except CN1. Read the 5V DC pins off the board to ensure that 5V DC is
present. Put the connectors back on one at a time while monitoring the 5V DC. When the voltage drops when a connector is added, that load is the source of
the problem.
3. The main switch (SW1) has failed. Replace the main switch (p/n 030086011).
4. Poor electrical connection to the leakage breaker is resulting in a loss of 208V AC to PSB1 on CN1-1 and 1-3.
Reseat electrical connections to the leakage breaker.
Note: The leakage breaker is located by the main relays and circuit breakers under the black plastic cover to the right of the ADU unit.
87
4145
Description
DF306, F60 or F67.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The interlock microswitch (MS301) has failed. This switch may check good with a meter but is failing under load. Install the DF306 F60/67 kit (p/n
12ER-K080) if the RADF serial number is under 12ES31833 and the new style actuator and mounting plate are in place (see important note below). See
DF306 Technical Bulletin #11B .
Important note: There are three different configurations of MS301:
a. Original switch (internal dual contact), first revision actuator (attached to switch) and first revision mounting plate.
b. Original switch, second revision actuator (separate) and second revision mounting plate (with hole to support actuator).
See Technical Bulletin #20 .
c. Second revision switch (internal single contact), second revision actuator and second revision mounting plate.
See DF306 Technical Bulletin #11B. Caution: The first revision mounting plate will not support the second revision switch and actuator. The latest MS301 is
(p/n 12ER85020) the latest mounting plate is (p/n 12ER-1122), and the latest actuator is (p/n 12ER10190).
If MS301 was not updated per Technical Bulletin #20, then the new style MS301 actuator will not mount. In this case order mounting bracket (p/n 12ER-1122)
and actuator (p/n 12ER10190).
2. There is an early revision EPROM installed on the RADF CB. Install EPROM (p/n DF30632-16.0). See DF306 Technical Bulletin #8 .
3. The 5V DC ICP on the RADF CB is open. Inspect the 5V DC loads for any shorts. Replace the RADF CB (p/n 12ES-9012).
4. Fuse F1 on the main CB (near CN4) is open due to EPROMs improperly installed. The EPROM label was used as a reference to install the chip rather
than using the notch on the EPROM. Replace the main CB (p/n 25ME-9014).
5. A loss of 24V DC to the DF306 due to a shorted wire from a 24V DC load. Check for 24V DC at any load off the RADF CB. If 0V DC is read, disconnect
one load at a time until 24V DC is read. Repair the wiring to that load and then verify proper operation.
6. The main body to RADF connector (CN927) has failed. Open the connector body (which plugs into the main body) remove the tie wrap and cord holder.
Apply three wraps of tape around the cord to increase the diameter, then reinstall the cord holder and reassemble the connector. If code returns, replace the
RADF main wiring harness p/n 12ER90041.
Description
ST211, F77-2.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The bin shift motor (M202) binds and causes ICP4 on the sorter CB to open. Test M202 operation with SW2/SW3 on the sorter CB. If M202 does not
respond, check continuity across ICP4 (near CN15). If ICP4 is open, check the bin movement to detect any binding, and repair as necessary. Replace the
2. The bin unit has traveled past the home position sensor (PS203) and has actuated the lower limit switch (MS203). Manually raise the bin unit off the lower
limit switch, and test the sorter operation. Note: Ensure that IC2 on the sorter CB is level 10.0; if not order p/n (ST21162-10.0).
3. The upper limit switch (MS202) has failed. The switch can be checked at CN15-2 on the sorter CB. CN15-2 should change from 24V DC to 0V DC when
MS202 is actuated. If necessary replace MS202 (p/n 12FQ21540).
4. The fixed shaft is loose or the fixed roller is damaged, causing the bin unit to bind. Tighten the mounting screw (p/n 12FQ20510) for the fixed shaft, and/or
replace the fixed roller (p/n 12FQ20380).
5. One of the bins is out of position. Perform the bin timing/cam timing adjustment.
6. The stapler swing action motor (M205) is bound and pulling down the 24V DC. Replace the stapler unit (p/n 0740-5100). The motor is not available as a
separate part.
Description
Can odd-size originals default to 8.5x11?
Solution
EPROMs are available to default odd-size originals off the glass to 8.5x11. Order (p/n 414512-20.0, 414513-20.2, 414514-20.2). See 4145 Technical
Bulletin #38A .
Description
DF306, P69.
Solution
88
4145
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The original paper feed solenoid (SD301) needs adjustment. Clean the solenoid. Adjust the stroke of SD301 so that the end of the plunger is 4.5 0.2
mm from the noise damper pad when the solenoid is ON.
2. The original paper feed solenoid (SD301) has failed. Verify the connections to the solenoid. If necessary replace the solenoid (p/n 12ER82510).
3. The spring clutch for the paper lift up plate is slipping. Clean the spring clutch. If necessary replace the spring clutch (p/n 12ER40460), input gear (p/n
12ER77010), and the lift up cam (p/n 12ER40221).
4. The wires to the original exit clutch (MC304) is rubbing against the clutch. As the clutch spins, the wire insulation wears down and the 24V DC shorts to
frame ground (through the clutch); this damages the RADF CB. Replace MC304 (p/n 12ER82030). Reroute the clutch wires as necessary so they do not
touch the clutch. Replace the RADF CB (p/n 12ES-9012). See DF306 Technical Bulletin #11B .
5. The original paper feed sensor (PS303) has failed. Verify the sensor operation using the 47 mode, input code 67. With no paper present a HI should be
displayed. With paper present a LO should be displayed. If necessary replace PS303 (p/n 12ER85521).
6. The plunger of the original paper feed solenoid (SD301) is sticking to the label material (noise damper pad). Note: This usually will cause an intermittent
P69. As an interim solution remove the noise damper pad , and remove any glue from the bracket. If damaged, replace the damper pad (p/n 12ER40350)
and the support sheet (mylar) (p/n 12ER40650). This mylar sticks to the damper pad to prevent the plunger from adhering to it. After replacing the parts
verify the solenoid stroke adjustment.
7. The one way bearing in feed roller (A) is slipping on the paper feed assembly. Clean the bearing, and shaft with alcohol. If necessary replace the paper
feed roller (p/n 12ER40180).
Description
ST210, J 72.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The bushing behind the sorter motor (M201) is dirty.
Clean the bushing behind the sorter motor. This bushing holds the drive shaft that runs front-to-rear.
2. The paper exit sensor cannot be adjusted.
Ensure there is no alignment problem between LED202 and PS202. If the sensor still does not adjust, replace the sorter CB (p/n 12FL87010).
3. The flanges on the lower paper exit roller (p/n 048644361) of the inversion unit are causing the copies to crease. This slows down the paper, resulting in a
J 72.
Cut the flanges off the paper exit roller.
4. The indexer is not horizontal with the bottom of the sorter. The indexer flags the upper limit sensor (PS205). Only the home position sensor (PS204)
should be flagged in idle.
Perform the indexer height adjustment. Refer to the third edition ST210 service manual page 18.
5. The upper entrance frame guide (p/n 037145140) is malformed obstructing the movement of the indexer. This prevents the home position sensor (PS204)
from being flagged.
Reform the malformed guide plate and ensure there is proper clearance for the indexer.
6. J 72 only on the last copy. The copier has 3135 EPROMs installed.
Install 4145 EPROMs. See 4145 Technical Bulletin #38A, .
7. The white plastic portion of the flapper gate connecting to SD201 (gate solenoid) is broken. The gate is unable to open and direct paper into the indexer.
SD201 is located on the top front of the sorter.
Replace the flapper gate (p/n 037145550).
Note: Perform the Solenoid Mounting Position Adjustment after replacing the flapper gate. Refer to the ST210 Service Manual (3rd edition, 1/97), page 19.
Description
AD207, J 15 when copying from the ADU.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The ADU clutch spring (p/n 12EF40310) is slipping. This may have occurred when the clutch was removed for cleaning. Reposition the clutch spring
using the other hole of the stopper collar (p/n 190040540).
2. The entrance spring (p/n 048642240) has fallen off the paper guide plate (p/n 12EF42160) keeping the plate closed. This prevents the paper from entering
the stacker. Reinstall the spring and add tape to help keep it in place.
3. The first feed rollers and the double feed prevention roller in the ADU are worn. Replace the two worn first feed rollers (p/n 460040181) and the double
feed prevention roller (p/n 396077090).
4. The copy paper contacts the paper retaining auxiliary plate (p/n 12EF42063) when entering the stacker, causing it to roll up in the duplex stack tray.
89
4145
Reform the paper retaining auxiliary plate so that it does not contact the copy paper as it enters the duplex stack tray.
5. The upper right side door ribs have notches cut into them from paper contact. The paper will catch on the notches. Either sand the ribs on the door
smooth, or replace the upper right side door (p/n 540012085).
6. J 15 when duplexing 8.5x11. The rear guide is crushing the trail edge of the copy. Adjust the rear guide home position sensor (PS504) so the rear guide
lightly contacts the trail edge of the copy.
Description
ST211, J 72.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The paper drags on the front (frame side) of the deflect plate (p/n 12FQ21100). This is due to the way the deflect plate is zoned to the main body, or how
the 8.5x11 paper tray is zoned. The problem will occur using 8.5x11 paper only. Check the zoning of the 8.5x11 paper tray. If correct, place a stop ring (p/n
396040680) between the bushing (p/n 074075540) and the C-clip on the rear frame side of the deflect plate. This will shift the deflect plate to the rear frame
of the sorter.
2. The ADU side guides are out of adjustment, causing incorrect zoning on second side copies. Adjust the ADU side guide zoning.
3. The one way exit gear in the inversion unit is worn. The gear is slipping in both directions. Replace the exit gear (p/n 048677080).
Description
DF306, J 63.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The customer is using three hole punched paper. The center hole aligns with the original paper exit sensor (PS305) and throws off the timing. Rezone the
paper infeed system.
2. The original exit sensor (PS305) is dirty or faulty. Clean the sensor and verify the operation using the 47 mode input code 63. With no paper present a LO
should be displayed. With paper present a HI should be displayed. If necessary replace the sensor (p/n 12ER85521).
3. The conveyance roller shaft holders, and lift plate bushings are dirty, causing the original not to exit quick enough. Clean the conveyance roller shaft
holders, and lift plate bushings.
4. J 63 when copying 8.5x11 originals. The encoder sensor (PS307) is dirty or has failed. Clean PS307 and the encoder disc. If necessary replace PS307
(p/n 12ER-9021).
Description
The main body does not recognize the RADF.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The interlock microswitch (MS301) has failed. This switch may check good with an ohm meter, but is failing under load. If the serial number on the DF306
is under 12ES31813 order (p/n 12ER-K080) for the F60/67 countermeasure kit. See DF306 Technical Bulletin #11B . Note: Depending on which switch was
used to replace MS301 previously, the switch actuator (also called the switch cover) may be missing. If so, order (p/n 12ER10190).
Verify that the EPROM on the RADF CB is a level 16.0. If not, order (p/n DF30632-16.0). See DF306 Technical Bulletin #8 .
2. The 5V DC ICP on the RADF CB is open. Replace the RADF CB (p/n 12ER-9010).
3. The symptom occurred after installing the level 16.0 EPROM on the RADF CB. There is a restriction with the level 16.0 EPROM. If installed, the
3135/4145 main body firmware must be version 20 or above. See 4145 Technical Bulletin #38A .
Description
Solution
90
4155
Description
DF306, F60 or F67, clicking noise.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The interlock microswitch (MS301) is faulty. This switch may check good with a meter, but is failing under load. If the RADF serial number is under
12ES31833 and the new style actuator and mounting plate are in place (see important note below); install the DF306 F60/67 kit (p/n 12ER-K080). See
DF306 Technical Bulletin #11B .
Important note:
There are three different configurations of MS301:
a. Original switch (internal dual contact), first revision actuator (attached to switch) and first revision mounting plate.
b. Original switch, second revision actuator (separate) and second revision mounting plate (with hole to support actuator) see 4155 Technical Bulletin #20
.
c. Second revision switch (internal single contact), second revision actuator and second revision mounting plate. See DF306 Technical Bulletin #11B.
CAUTION: The first revision mounting plate will not support the second revision switch and actuator.
Latest MS301 (p/n 12ER85020).
Latest mounting plate (p/n 12ER-1122).
Latest actuator (p/n 12ER10190).
If MS301 was NOT updated per Technical Bulletin #20, then the new style MS301 actuator will not mount. In this case, order mounting bracket (p/n
12ER-1122) and actuator (p/n 12ER10190).
2. There is an early revision EPROM installed on the RADF CB. Install EPROM (p/n DF30632-16.0). For more detail, refer to DF306 Technical Bulletin #8 .
3. The main body to RADF connector (CN927) is failing. Open the connector body (which plugs into the main body) remove the tie wrap and cord holder.
Apply three wraps of tape around the cord to increase the diameter, then reinstall the cord holder and reassemble the connector. If code returns, replace the
RADF main wiring harness p/n 12ER90041.
4. The RADF CB failed. Replace the RADF CB (p/n 12ER-9014).
Description
ST211, F77-2.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The bin unit has traveled past the home sensor (PS203) and has actuated the lower limit switch (MS203). Manually lift the bin unit off of MS203. Ensure
that the EPROM IC2 on the sorter CB is a level 10.0, if not order (p/n ST21162-10.0).
2. The bin shift motor (M202) binds and causes ICP4 on the sorter CB to open. Test the M202 operation with SW2/SW3 on the sorter CB. If M202 does not
respond, check continuity across ICP4 (near CN15). If ICP4 is open, check the bin movement to detect any binding, and repair as necessary. Replace the
3. One of the bin rail screws has loosen, and is interfering with the home position of the bins. Tighten the screw.
4. The connector to the cam position photosensor (PS202) is loose. Reseat, or repair the connector as necessary.
5. The bin shift sensor (PS209), or the encoder disk attached to the bottom of the bin shift motor (M202) is dirty. Clean the sensor and the encoder disk.
6. There is a poor connection to the bin home position sensor (PS203). Reseat, or repair the connector, as necessary.
7. The fixed shaft is loose or the fixed roller is damaged, causing the bin unit to bind. Tighten the mounting screw (p/n 12FQ20510) for the fixed shaft, and
replace the fixed roller (p/n 12FQ20380).
8. The lead cams are improperly installed. When installing the lead cams, it should be noted that the front and rear cams are different and must be installed
in the correct locations.
Description
J 31 while copying.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Perform the following steps.
a. Ensure the protection mylar strip (p/n 083647050) is installed.
b. Ensure the updated HV connector (p/n 540073231) is installed.
c. Replace the T/S blocks if excessive arcing is present. Note: It is important to clean the corona shell to restore it to its original reflective condition or
replace it.
d. When rebuilding the corona unit, replace the separation arrestor guide bridge (p/n 466026042). In time this guide becomes conductive and causes a
loss of separation currents.
e. Remove the HV B power supply, confirm all grounding points on the power supply. This is done by adding star washers to all areas that supply a path
91
4155
to ground for HV B. This includes the bleeder resistor located underneath the transfer guide plate.
f. In the 47 mode set the corona currents to their specified values, ensure the DC separation bias data is set to 01 for the models 3135/4145/4155/4255.
g. Enter the 25 mode set address 01 to 3, and address 02 to 6 for proper on/off timing of the claws on the models 3135/4145/4155/4255.
2. The temporary stop sensor fixed plate for PS19 (p/n 25BA40210) is malformed, causing improper actuation of the sensor. Reform or replace the sensor
fixed plate.
3. The return spring for the actuator of the optics synchronization sensor (PS9) is hanging up on the photosensor. This may also cause erratic optics
scanning. Form the end of the return spring so that the spring does not contact PS9 during operation. If necessary glue the end of the spring to the actuator.
4. The mounting tab for the exit sensor (PS20) is bent down allowing the copy to ride over the actuator. Reform the sensor mounting bracket upward.
Ensure that the paper actuates the actuator, without catching on it.
5. The paper loop data is too low. The paper is getting to the temporary stop sensor (PS19), but not to the second paper feed rollers. Adjust the bypass loop
timing in the 36 mode, code 94 until a good loop is formed at the second feed rollers.
6. The fuser entrance guide is not touching the bearings on the front and rear of the fuser. Raise the plate so both sides touch the bearings.
7. The exit sensor (PS20) has failed. Verify the sensor operation in the 47 mode using input code 22. With paper present a HI should be displayed. With no
paper, a LO should be displayed. If necessary replace the sensor (p/n 540085510).
8. J 31, the paper is still in the second feed rollers. There is an intermittent loss of drive to either the middle or lower paper conveyance rollers in the upper
PFU. This is caused by a broken clutch gear assembly to these rollers. Rebuild the broken clutch gear assemblies as necessary. Clutch gear (p/n
540077060), clutch lock gear (p/n 540077020) (2 are needed), clutch base gear (p/n 540077010). See page 32 and 33 of the 4155/4255 parts catalog.
9. The conveyance unit plate (p/n 540045010) is misaligned and interfering with the paper path as paper separates from the drum. Loosen the screw that
secures the conveyance unit plate. This screw is located under the conveyance unit on the center plate. Apply downward pressure to the conveyance unit so
that it sits flat against the bottom frame of the main body. Retighten the screw.
10. The upper or lower fuser bearings are worn. If necessary replace the upper bearing (p/n 454075040), and the lower bearing (p/n 25BA76030).
11. The main motor (M1) is faulty. Ensure the copier drive system is free of binds. Replace the main motor (p/n 25BA-1592).
Description
Solution
1. Empty the waste toner collection box , or install a new collection box.
2. Power the machine OFF, hold down the 4 and 7 keys, and power the machine ON.
4. From the key pad press P-02-P.
5. Press the start print button.
6. Press the stop/clear button.
7. Power the machine OFF/ON to return to normal operation.
Note: If the box is emptied, ensure that the inside top portion is clean so that the toner collection level detector sensor will not give a false F86 indication.
Description
J amming, severe static on second side copies when duplexing.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Perform the following steps.
a. Ensure the data for the DC separation bias is set to 01. In the 47 mode, enter code 06, then press P set the data to 01.
b. Set the PTL ON. In the 25 mode set P13 to 1.
c. Install the new style neutralizing brush (p/n 048645461).
d. Ensure the copier ground paths have star washers behind the contact points.
e. Try a different brand of paper, if paper is suspect.
2. The transfer current is too high for the second side copy. Order EPROMs (p/n 415513-23.7), and (p/n 415514-23.7) this firmware lowers the transfer
current value when the second side is copied. Ensure IC22 is level (p/n 415512-23.0), and IC2 on the DF306 is (p/n DF30632-14.0).
3. The T/S corona is arcing. Replace the T/S corona (p/n 5400-2605).
4. The conveyance suction fan motor (M9) is not working. The fan wires may have been cut, or pulled out of the connector by catching on the side guide of
the universal cassette. No failure code will be generated, if the suction fan is not working. Ensure the fan is working. To prevent the wires from catching on
the universal cassette, perform the following steps.
a. Power the machine down, and unplug the copier.
b. Remove the left, and right external covers of main body.
92
4155
c. Remove the ADU inversion unit.
d. Remove the toner collecting box.
e. Remove the 2 screws that stop the universal cassette from being withdrawn from the copier, and remove the cassette.
f. Clean the bottom of the suction motor, and the area where the tape will go with alcohol, see the view of the bottom plate.
g. Ensure the wires are not hanging down. Use a piece of tape approximately 50 mm wide, and 150 mm long to prevent the wires from catching on the
side guide of the universal cassette. DO NOT use vinyl, or cellophane tape. Ensure that a good quality tape is used that will not come loose over time.
h. Install the universal cassette, and slide it in, and out. Check that the tape, and the suction fan wiring do not interfere with the universal cassette.
i. Reinstall the two limit screws for the universal cassette.
j. Reinstall the ADU inversion unit, toner collecting box, and external panels that were previously removed.
Description
Blur areas or jitter from front-to-rear.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The pad that slides on the front optics rail does not slide smoothly. Order the optics jitter countermeasure roller assembly (p/n 25BA-K060). The pad that
rides on the optics front rail is removed and replaced with a roller like the model 3135. Perform the following steps to install the roller:
a. Turn the power OFF, and unplug the machine from the wall outlet.
b. Remove the platen glass.
c. Open the front door and remove the screws for the operation panel, and the lower cover. Remove the operation panel and the lower cover.
d. Raise the front of the exposure unit and remove the pad that slides on the front optics rail.
e. Align the exposure unit with an opening in the front frame.
f. Remove the the black M3 screw from the front end of the exposure unit through the opening in the front frame.
g. Install the new roller assembly by hooking the provided clip on the roller assembly to the exposure unit frame, and secure it to the side of the exposure
unit with the screw removed in the previous step.
h. Move the exposure unit to check for binding.
i. Reinstall the operation panel, lower cover, and the platen glass.
j. Run copies and check to see that the jitter has been eliminated.
2. The center of the developing input gear is worn. Replace the gear (p/n 25BA77132).
3. The developing regulating plate (H-cut plate) is worn. The H-cut plate is not available as a separate part. Replace the developing unit (p/n 25BA-3005).

4. The developing unit agitator shafts are worn.
Replace the developing unit (p/n 25BA-3005).
5. The drum drive gear is missing teeth. Replace the drum drive gear (p/n 25BA77202).
Description
Incorrect APS from the platen glass.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Incorrect firmware on the main CB. Install (p/n 415512-23.0) for IC22, (p/n 415513-23.4) for IC23, (p/n 415514-23.4) for IC24. Ensure the EPROM on the
RADF is (p/n DF30632-14.0). See 4155 Technical Bulletin #43 .
2. The APS sensor located at the front of the machine, or the platen glass is dirty. Clean both sides of the platen glass and ensure that the APS sensor is
clean. If necessary replace the APS sensor (p/n 25BA85521).
3. If level 23.2 or level 23.7 firmware is installed, the APS selects 8.5x11 when 8.5x11R is placed on the glass. Upgrade/downgrade the firmware to the 23.4
version. This allows programmable paper size default and ATS/APS/AMS. See 4155 Technical Bulletin #43 (level 23.4). See, also, 4155 Technical Bulletin
#50 (level 23.7) .
Note: Level 23.4 EPROMs do not enhance the drum counter operation for the new style long life drums (PCUA 947542). You must reset the drum counter at
drum replacement and the first PM after drum replacement.
4. CN142 is not connected. This is a common connector for the APS timing 1 sensor (PS16), and the book copy sensor (PS17). Reconnect CN142.
5. The unit was converted to a 4155 from a 4255, and is missing the platen sensor and wiring. Install platen sensor (p/n 552085510) and wiring (p/n
25BA90190). Also install the sensor actuator (p/n 25BA61761) and spring (p/n 25BA61830). Use another 4155 for reference.
6. The incorrect wiring harness was installed for the APS sensor (PS16) and the book sensor (PS17). The wire colors to PS16 should be red, orange, yellow.
The wire colors to PS17 should be red, brown, yellow. Install the correct harness (p/n 25BA90190). Note: This harness is the same as a 3135 and 4145.
7. CN22 on the main CB is not connected. CN22 is the input from the 2 APS sensors (PS12, PS14). Reconnect CN22 on the main CB.
Description
No power.
93
4155
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Fuse F1 or F5 (5V DC solid state fuses) on the main CB may be open.
Check the continuity of the fuses. If the fuses are good, check the output from DCPS board (A). If there is no DC output, but there is AC input, the DCPS
board (A) has failed. If the fuse or fuses are open, replace the main CB (p/n 25BA-9012) or the fuse (p/n 963012300). If necessary replace the DCPS board
(A) (p/n 25BA84512). Note: Konica Business Technologies is not responsible for misapplication of any parts or fuses. Boards damaged by improper field
fuse replacement will not be accepted for the Board Repair Program.
2. CN131 wiring on the AES board may be shorted to ground.
Repair as necessary, and inspect F1 on the main CB, it may be open.
3. Fuse F1 (5V DC solid state fuse) on the main CB is open. The screws mounting the APS sensor have loosened, and the board has contacted the frame.
Repair the APS sensor, and replace the main CB or the fuse (p/n 963012300). Install a insulating sheet under the sensor see 3135/4145/4155/4255
Technical Bulletin #37 . Note: Konica Business Technologies is not responsible for misapplication of any parts or fuses. Boards damaged by improper field
fuse replacement will not be accepted for the Board Repair Program.
4. No power is being supplied to the DCPS board (A) due to a faulty main switch (SW1). Check for AC voltage at CN397-1. If necessary replace SW1 (p/n
25BA-8300).
5. A shorted AC wire or component in the fixing unit (L2 or L3 circuit) causes the leakage breaker to OPEN.
Remove the fixing unit and restore power. If the leakage breaker does not OPEN, then inspect the fixing unit wiring for a short circuit. Repair or replace the
AC wiring harness (p/n 25BA90081) as necessary.
Description
LT251, skew or varying registration from Tray 3.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The paper feed loop data set too low. Adjust the loop data to a higher value (maximum data value is +99) for more paper loop at the registration rollers.
Loop data settings above 30 are not uncommon.
2. The paper feed rubber is worn. Replace the double feed prevention roller (p/n 5400406562) and paper feed rubber (p/n 540040562), (p/n 25BA40320).
See page 14 and 16 of the LT251 parts catalog for location of the feed rubber.
3. The black colored rollers (p/n 540040110) located in the upper right side door are the old style. Install the new style rollers (p/n 12EJ 40120). The rolllers
are 2mm larger in diameter, and white in color. Note: Unequal tension of the 4 idler roller tension springs can also cause skew. Confirm that each spring is
the same length, stretch the smaller spring to equal the longer spring; reassemble and verify the operation.
4. The lower right side door is loose. Ensure that the lower right side door closes securely. If the drawer base unit is below s/n 12FH03771 install the paper
feed door modification (p/n 12EJ K0010) on early style side doors. See 4155 [[Technical Bulletin #18,| IMAGE V:\BITMAPS\J RC130.bmp SCROLL].
5. The paper tray is not level. Check the scribe marks to ensure that the tray is level. Perform the tray tilt adjustment. See page 19 of the LT251 service
manual.
6. The rear frame is malformed. Check the rear right corner of the drawer. If the rear panel is warped, a reinforcing bracket is available. Install the
reinforcing bracket. See LT251 Technical Bulletin #4 .
7. The side guides are too far from the edge of the paper. Raise the paper tray and adjust the side guides so that they lightly touch the paper.
8. The double feed prevention torque limiter spring is binding. Clean and lubricate the spring with Plas Guard*. See page 14 of the LT251 parts catalog for
location of the spring. Prior to lubrication, thoroughly clean the area to be lubricated.
9. The double feed prevention shaft is malformed. Replace the double feed prevention plate assembly (p/n 12EJ -4240).
10. The paper feed spring clutches are binding. Clean and lubricate the clutches with Plas-Guard.
11. The upgraded rear side guide is not installed. Install the upgraded rear side guide (p/n 25SA-K011). See LT251 Technical Bulletin #6 .
12. The paper feed open/close plate is warped. Replace the guide plate (p/n 12EJ 40092).
13. See 4155 Technical Bulletin #36A . This bulletin is a checklist intended to help resolve paper skew.
Description
How to program ATS (auto tray switching).
Solution
94
4155
To program ATS, access the 25 mode (press the 2 and 5 keys while simultaneously powering the copier ON), P06 to the desired data:
1. ATS not selected: set address 06 to 0, 2, 4, or 6.
2. ATS selected: set address 06 to 1, 3, 5, or 7.
Notes:
a. If level 23.2 or level 23.7 firmware is installed, the APS selects 8.5x11 when 8.5x11R is placed on the glass. Upgrade/downgrade the firmware to the
23.4 version. This allows programmable paper size default and ATS/APS/AMS. See 3135/4145/4155/4255 Technical Bulletin #43 . See, also, 4155
Technical Bulletin #50 (level 23.7).
Level 23.4 EPROMs do not enhance the drum counter operation for the long life drums (PCUA 947542). The drum counter must be reset at drum
replacement and the first PM after drum replacement.
b. ATS will ONLY operate in full auto mode while using the RADF.
c. Power the copier OFF/ON to exit the 25 mode.
95
4255
Description
J 62 when copying.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The one-way clutch is slipping, causing a loss of drive to the conveyance roller. For location, see the DF402 parts catalog pages 20-21, items #24 and
#27. Clean the one-way clutch (p/n 12EV23310) and the conveyance roller with alcohol. Lightly score the end of the conveyance roller with emery cloth or a
nylon scrub pad to create better grip. Replace both parts if necessary.
2. The original paper exit sensor (PS712) is cracked. Replace the sensor (p/n 12EV21930).
3. The original scale plate is not depressed by the RDH, causing the originals not to exit. Ensure that the scale plate is depressed below the top of the glass
when the RDH is in the closed position.
4. The feed rollers and conveyance rollers are worn. Replace the separate belts (p/n 12EV23250) 6 are needed, and the conveyance roller (p/n 12EV23170);
or replace the complete assembly (p/n 12EV23150).
5. The coating on the platen glass has worn off causing a build up of static, affecting the paper conveyance. Check the continuity of the platen glass to the
static discharge tabs (80K ohms). If the measured reading is greater than this, ensure that the tabs are making contact with the glass. If there is no change in
the reading, replace the platen glass (p/n 25GA61720).
6. Clean with alcohol, wipe dry and adjust PTR701, PTR702, PTR703, and PTR704 as followed:
a. Set dip RDHCB hardware dipswitch #4 to the ON position with all others OFF. Turn ON the main switch.
b. PTR701 (original detect) RDHCB, CN16-1 to GND, adjust VR4 to 1.5V DC with no paper.
c. PTR702 (skew detect) RDHCB, CN16-2 to GND, adjust VR3 to 1.5V DC with no paper.
d. PTR703 (temp stop) RDHCB, CN16-3 to GND, adjust VR2 to 1.5V DC with no paper.
e. PTR704 (orig side) RDHCB, CN16-4 to GND, adjust VR5 to 1.5V DC with no paper.
f. Turn OFF power, set all hardware dip switches to the OFF position. Turn power ON and verify operation.
Description
Can the 4255 be converted to a 4155?
Solution
The DF306 document feeder is not available as a separate item, therefore the 4255 cannot be converted to a 4155.
Description
FS102, F77-3 during copier operation.
Solution
CAUSE: The circuit protector ICP6 is open on the finisher CB. This ICP protects the 2nd paper exit motor (M803) drive circuitry.
SOLUTION: Verify that M803 is not binding. Note: To access this motor the shift tray and trim plate must be removed. Replace the finisher CB (p/n
12FU22720).
Description
DF402, P69 or P68-3 when the RDH tries to feed.
Solution
CAUSE: The separation belts and conveyance roller are worn.
SOLUTION: Replace the separation belts (p/n 12EV23250) and the conveyance roller (p/n 12EV23170).
Description
Incorrect APS when using the RDH.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The temporary stop sensor (PTR703) is dirty or needs adjustment. See page 43 of the DF402 service manual to clean and adjust PTR703. See DF402
Technical Bulletin #1A .
2. The separate conveyance assembly on the RDH is mounted too far to the rear, causing gear (Z-29) to rub against the rear frame. Reposition the separate
conveyance assembly (p/n 12EV23150) to achieve at least a 1mm gap between the frame and gear (Z-29) (p/n 12EV23320).
96
4255
Description
Blur areas or jitter from front-to-rear on the copies.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The first mirror is loose within the frame. Reform the first mirror retaining clip to hold the mirror secure.
2. The pad that slides on the front optics rail does not slide smoothly. Order the optics jitter countermeasure roller assembly (p/n 25BA-K060). The pad that
rides on the optics front rail is removed and replaced with a roller like the model 3135.
Perform the following steps to install the roller.
a. Turn the power off, and unplug the machine from the wall outlet.
b. Remove the platen glass.
c. Open the front door and remove the screws for the operation panel, and the lower cover. Remove the operation panel and the lower cover.
d. Raise the front of the exposure unit and remove the pad that slides on the front optics rail.
e. Align the exposure unit with an opening in the front frame.
f. Remove the the black M3 screw from the front end of the exposure unit through the opening in the front frame.
g. Install the new roller assembly by hooking the provided clip on the roller assembly to the exposure unit frame, and secure it to the side of the exposure
unit with the screw removed in the previous step.
h. Move the exposure unit to check for binding.
i. Reinstall the operation panel, lower cover, and the platen glass.
j. Run copies and check to see that the jitter has been eliminated.
3. The optics slide shaft holder within the optics first mirror frame assembly is loose causing the mirror to bounce on the return scan. Install the optics
reinforcement plate (p/n 25BA62020). If the reinforcement plate does not eliminate the symptoms, replace the reflector base (p/n 25BA-6212) and the mylar
(p/n 490061570). Install the reinforcement plate on the new reflector base to prevent the optics slide shaft from loosening.
Description
The up/down motor (M804) of the finisher will not drive up.
Solution
CAUSE: The tray upper limit detect switch (MS802) is failing under load causing a loss of drive to M804. Note: This switch may test good with an ohm meter,
but can fail under load.

SOLUTION: Replace MS802 (p/n 12FU21140).
Description
LT251, J 13 and J 17 when feeding from the LCT.
Solution
CAUSE: The LCT feed motor (M401) has failed, damaging the LCT driver board.
SOLUTION: Replace M401 (p/n 544080021) and the LCT driver board (p/n 12EJ -9011).
Description
Original skew.
Solution
CAUSE: The platen glass is installed incorrectly.
SOLUTION: Install the platen glass so the positioning marker (white dot on side of glass) is located at either the right rear or left front corner of the machine.
Note: Check the continuity between the platen glass and the grounding tabs with an ohmmeter. Bend the tabs downward to ensure contact.
Description
How to default to 8.5x11R.
Solution
To default to 8.5x11R, install EPROMs (p/n 415513-23.4, and 415514-23.4). See 4255 Technical Bulletin #43 .
97
4345
Description
ST217, conveyance motor runs continually, or does not operate. The sorter cannot be selected.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Conveyance motor continually runs due to a loss of 5V DC from the ST217 DCPS (transformer board). F102 (0.4A fuse) is open. This fuse has been
upgraded to eliminate the open condition that can occur in certain situations. Check for 5V DC at CN102-3 of the sorter transformer board. If not present,
remove the connector and check directly off of the pin. Check all 5V DC loads off of the sorter CB for shorting to ground.
If F102 is open, replace it with a 0.8A (250V) slow-blow, or replace the sorter transformer board (p/n 12TA84510) using the warrantee procedures outlined in
ST217 Technical Bulletin #1 which is a mandatory modification.
Note: Ensure that the front and rear elevation auxiliary pins (p/n 12TA48060) or the bin guide plate (front p/n 12TA48020 and rear p/n 12TA48030) are not
bent or binding; replace or lubricate (thoroughly clean the area to be lubricated) as required.
If no results, replace the sorter CB (p/n 12TA87010).
2. No sorter conveyance because fuse F3 on the sorter CB is open. F3 fuses the M201 (conveyance) driver circuit. Replace the sorter CB (p/n
12TA87010).
3. No sorter conveyance because of a failed or binding M201 (conveyance). The sorter CB may also be damaged and require replacement. Loosen the
motor drive belt tension. If the problem still occurs, replace the motor (p/n 12TA80020) and sorter CB (p/n 12TA87010) at the same time.
Description
Black copies intermittently.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Front door interlock (MS2, p/n 392085020) is faulty, or opens intermittently and shuts down DCPS/2.
Install the new style switch mounting plate (p/n 45AA12311), or replace MS2 as necessary. The mounting holes in the new plate are 0.2mm smaller in
diameter, to eliminate play between the switch and the mounting assembly.
Note: MS2 is the switch on the left and is activated by the long actuator on the front door.
2. Internal (exposure) lamp cord has failed.
Replace the lamp cord (p/n 25BA90162).
Description
F43 shortly after power up or during an optics scan.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Damaged L1 (projection lamp) lamp cord. Refer to 4345/4355 Technical Bulletin #11 . Check for continuity between CN380-1 and CN380-6 on DCPS2.
The lamp cord may become damaged if the wire clamp is not at a 90 angle in relation to the wire. The distance between the clamp and CN384 should be
less than 5mm.
Replace the lamp cord with (p/n 25BA90163).
Note: Affected s/n range: 45FE02396 through 45FE03851.
2. DCPS2 has failed. The L1 CONT signal is received at CN29-2 on the power supply. The lamp cord, lamp, and F1 are good. The fuser lamps come on at
power up, and disconnecting the RADF and sorter from the power supply does not change the symptom. No L1 DRIVE to the lamp. Replace DCPS2 (p/n
45AA84520).
3. CN29 is (mistakenly) plugged into the main CB at CN135. CN29 should be connected to the DCPS2.
Description
F35-1 or F35-2 shortly after power up..
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Lower roller thermostat (TS2) height is incorrect in machines below s/n 45BE02232. Adjust the gap between the lower roller and TS2 using the thermostat
positioning jig (p/n 00M8-2-00). If the jig is not available, use 18 sheets of 20lb. paper as outlined in 4355 Technical Bulletin #2.
2. The fusing temperature sensors are not adjusted properly.
Ensure that the entire surface of the sensor touches the upper roller. The thermostats must be adjusted with the positioning jig (p/n 00M6-3-00 for upper roller
and p/n 00M8-2-00 for lower roller).
3. Loose contact at CN380-2.
Reseat CN380.
98
4345
4. Front door interlock (MS2) is faulty, or opens intermittently and shuts down DCPS/2.
Install the new style switch mounting plate (p/n 45AA12311), or replace MS2 (p/n 392085020) as necessary. The mounting holes in the new plate are 0.2mm
smaller in diameter, to eliminate play between the switch and the mounting assembly.
5. An open exists in the fuser unit (wiring, lamps or thermostats) as indicated by taking a resistance reading from CN392-11 to CN392-22 (blue connector at
rear of fusing unit). If an open exists, check the resistance of individual components (L3, TS1 and TS2). TS2 (lower temperature thermostat, p/n 25BA88470).
6. A loose connection at TH1 CN69-2.
Reseat CN69.
7. CN81, which supplies power and the control signal to RL1, is open or not properly connected.
Inspect CN81 (2-pin black inline connector near DCPS2 with a red and a blue wire leading to RL1. Relay 1 is located behind where the power cord enters the
machine) and reconnect as necessary.
Note: Reset the failure code in the 25 mode. Set software dipswitch 3-6 to 0.
Description
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Sorter hardware dipswitches are set incorrectly. Confirm that the sorter CB dipswitches are all OFF.
2. The paper passage photosensors are dirty. Clean PS202 and LED202. Inspect each to ensure proper installation of the cover.
3. The paper entrance detect sensor (PS201) actuator is binding. Inspect the actuator movement, repair as necessary. Confirm PS signal change by
monitoring sorter CB, CN11-2 to GND while in the 47 mode (no code, just check). When the actuator is in the normal position, the signal should be LO, when
paper is present, the signal goes to HI. Reseat the wiring to PS201. If no results, replace PS201 (p/n 12TK85530) and/or the actuator (p/n 12TK45470).
4. The indexer is not aligned properly.
To properly adjust the indexer position, perform the following:
a. Power copier OFF.
b. Remove the front and rear covers.
c. On the sorter CB, set dipswitches SW1-1, SW1-2 and SW1-3 to the ON position.
d. Ensure both sorter interlocks are closed (PS208 and MS201).
e. On the sorter CB, press and hold PSW1 while powering ON the main body (code 70-00 will occur; this is normal).
f. Release PSW1, then press and release it one time. The indexer will lower to the adjustment position (approximately at the 4th bin).
g. Open the conveyance section.
h. Insert the indexer positioning shaft adjustment tool (p/n 7050K0020) into the access hole on the rear side frame of the sorter. The hole is located to the
i. Rotate the indexer motor encoder plate to lower the indexer until it contacts the adjustment shaft.
j. Loosen the fixed screw located on the front side of the indexer.
k. Slide the front of the indexer up or down until it is positioned parallel with the adjustment shaft. Retighten the indexer fixing screw.
l. Loosen the screw that secures the PS203 4-slot encoder plate and adjust the 4-slot encoder plate until LED 1 is lit. Retighten the encoder plate.
m. Remove the indexer positioning shaft and reset all 3 SW1 switches to the OFF position.
n. Power copier OFF/ON to return to the normal mode.
5. If PS201 is operational and not binding, and the indexer unit is set to specification and the problem still occurs, replace the sorter CB (p/n 12TK-9010).
6. Flapper assembly (p/n 12TK-4510) is not in the home position which is up an open, the flapper spring (p/n 12TK45410) is not attached to the front leg
frame.
7. Paper stops at the sorter entrance rollers due to a malformed inner paper guide plate.
Reform the inner paper guide (p/n 12TK45150) so that the upper edge of the plate is 2mm below the surface of the inner rollers (p/n 12TK45070). Verify
operation.
Note: The paper guide may become malformed as a result of improper shipping techniques (lifting of the sorter by the top cover).
Description
Solution
To program ECM mode, first, create the 4-digit key operator password:
1. Access the 25 mode (hold down the 2 and 5 keys while powering the machine ON).
2. Press 6: Password setting
3. Press 1: Key operator password setting
4. Enter a 4-digit password (write this number down for future reference).
5. Press SET.
6. Press PREVIOUS SCREEN.
99
4345
Next, create the 8-digit master key code password:
1. Press 2: ECM master key code setting.
2. Enter an 8-digit password (write this number down for future reference).
3. Press SET.
5. Press PREVIOUS SCREEN again.
6. Press 1: Software switch setting
7. Set dipswitch 10-1 to 1 (ON), to enable the up down arrows for programming users.
To program the initial user in the ECM mode:
1. Access the key operator mode (hold down the help key while the machine ON).
2. Enter the key operator password and press OK.
3. Press 3: ECM.
4. Enter the 8-digit master key code and press OK (twice if necessary).
5. Press 1: ECM password setting.
6. Press Set Password.
7. Create a 5 digit user password for user 000 and press OK.
9. Press 2: ECM Count Limit setting.
10. Enter the maximum number of copies allowed for this user and press OK.
Next, program what the display will read when the users reach their limit.
1. Press 5: Copy Limit Reached effect.
2. Select one of the three modes and press OK:
Immediately: machine stops when the limit is reached (this setting may disturb some users).
After J ob: machine stops after the end of the current copy job (recommended)
Warning: a warning is displayed when the limit is reached (recommended).
Next, turn the ECM mode ON.
1. From the ECM menu press 4: ECM On/Off setting.
2. Press ON, then press OK.
Description
LT251, misfeed, skew, incorrect or varying registration from Tray 3.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The paper feed loop data is incorrect.
To adjust the paper feed loop timing, perform the following:
b. Enter the 36 mode (power the copier ON, while holding the 3 and 6 keys).
c. Touch [2 TIMING ADJ USTMENT] on the LCD.
d. Touch [4 PAPER FEED LOOP ADJ USTMENT] on the LCD.
e. Press [NEXT ADJ USTMENT] on the LCD twice, until PAPER LOOP ADJ . (DB/ADU) is displayed at the top of the LCD.
f. The number displayed at the top right of the LCD is the current loop timing setting for the (DB/ADU). The adjustment range is (-20 to +99). Using the
numeric keypad displayed on the LCD enter a lower number then the current loop timing setting.
g. Touch the [SET] key, followed by the [COPY SCREEN] key.
h. Make a copy and check for proper copy quality.
i. Press the STOP/CLEAR key, while holding the P key to return to the paper feed loop adjusting screen.
j. Repeat step 6 through 9 until the registration is correct.
k. Power the copier OFF/ON to exit the 36 mode.
2. Older style white idle rollers (p/n 540040110) are installed. These rollers are located in the right side door.
Install the new style roller (p/n 12EJ 40120 - 2mm larger diameter).
Note: Unequal tension of the (4) shaft holder springs also cause skew. Confirm that each spring set is the same length. Replace springs (p/n 12EJ 40470 -
lower set and p/n 12EJ 40530 - upper set) if necessary, reassemble, and verify operation.
3. The right side door is loose.
Ensure that the right side door closes securely. Install the block modification (p/n 12EJ K0010) on early style side doors as per 3135 Technical Bulletin #18.
4. The paper tray is not level.
Check the scribe marks to ensure that the tray is level. Perform the tray tilt adjustment as outlined on page 19 of the LT251 service manual.
5. The rear frame is deformed.
Check the rear right corner of the drawer. If the rear panel is warped, a reinforcing bracket is available. Install the reinforcing bracket. See LT251 Technical
Bulletin #4 .
6. The side guides are too far from the edge of the paper.
Raise the paper tray and adjust the side guides so that they lightly touch the paper.
100
4345
7. The double feed prevention torque limiter spring is binding.
Clean and lubricate the spring with Plas Guard*. See page 14 of the LT251 parts catalog for location of the spring. See Technical Education Bulletin #7A
regarding lubricant applications.
8. The double feed prevention shaft is deformed.
Replace the double feed prevention plate assembly (p/n 12EJ -4240).
9. The feed rubber is worn.
Replace the double feed prevention roller (p/n 5400406562) and paper feed rubber (p/n 540040562, p/n 25BA40320). See page 14 and 16 of the LT251 parts
catalog for location of the feed rubber.
10. The paper feed spring clutches are binding.
Clean and lubricate the clutches with Plas Guard*.
11. The upgraded rear side guide is not installed.
Install the upgraded rear side guide (p/n 25SA-K011). See LT251 Technical Bulletin #6 for details.
12. The paper feed open/close plate is warped.
Replace the guide plate (p/n 12EJ 40092).
4345/4355 Technical Bulletin #7 outlines the tray 3 skew checklist.
Description
PLEASE UNLOAD DUPLEX TRAY message when a duplex mode (1:2 or 2:2) is selected.
Solution
CAUSE: A sheet or sheets of paper remaining in the ADU.
SOLUTION: To empty the ADU, perform the following:
1. Pull out the ADU.
2. Lift the conveyance plate by the green handle.
3. Remove paper.
4. Insert the ADU unit.
Description
Drum cleaning blade flipping. Drum damage.
Solution
CAUSE: The edges of the cleaning blade that contact the non-coated surfaces (outer surface) of the drum may cause the cleaning blade to flip backwards
resulting in drum damage.
SOLUTION: Install the new style cleaning blade (p/n 45AA-2250) outlined in 4345/4355 Technical Bulletin #12 . The new blade has rounded edges to
prevent flipping of the cleaning blade during operation. The new style cleaning blade is included in PM kits (PCUA 947545) beginning with lot number 82
(82******). These blades are installed in production units beginning with s/n 45FE07272. Replace the drum (PCUA 947542) if it is damaged.
If Konica supplies are being used and the cleaning blade is being properly installed, but the cleaning blade flipping still occurs, a temporary countermeasure is
recommended. Use a light application of silicon oil from a fixing pad (p/n 25SA-5350 or p/n 55FA-5350) to decrease the drag/friction on the front drum flange.
To apply the silicon oil, perform the following:
1. Remove the drum from the drum carriage.
2. Apply setting powder on the entire drum surface.
3. Fit drum, cleaning blade and cleaner cover on drum carriage.
4. Fit drum fixing material/Front and Rear on drum carriage.
5. Rotate drum fixing material/Front and Rear to make the drum rotate clockwise once.
6. Remove drum and apply silicon oil to the position shown in the drum hyperlink. Wipe the silicon oil softly with the cleaning pad in the direction indicated
by the arrow .
Note: A very small amount of silicon oil is effective. To prevent oil from covering the OPC surface of the drum, only apply a small amount of oil. If silicon oil
is applied on the OPC surface, image deterioration may occur. Accordingly, make sure to wipe off any excess oil thoroughly and apply setting powder again
as needed.
7. Fit drum on the drum carriage.
8. Apply toner on both edges of the cleaning blade (front side approximately 35mm and rear side approximately 20mm).
9. Fit cleaning blade and other parts with the reverse order of removing them.
Notes:
a. Although it is not confirmed that drum blade flipping is heat related, Konica recommends against storing PM kits in temperatures outside of the specified
range of 57 to 219 degrees F. Since this range may be exceeded in a car trunk, special care may be required. Also guard against a buildup of heat in the
machine due to clogged fuser exhaust filters, machine too close to the wall, or by being near a window that shines enough light on the back of the machine to
increase the internal temperature.
b. Apply setting powder to the ENTIRE drum surface including the outer edges of the drum. CAUTION: When turning the drum by hand, the setting
powder may be removed by fingers contacting the outer area of the drum surface. Reapply setting powder to these areas.
c. If Konica supplies were used, and the blade was properly lubricated with setting powder or toner, please send all flipped cleaning blades with serial
101
4345
number of machine, total count, and copy count since the blade was installed, to:
Konica Business Technologies
Dept. D709 Technical Support
500 Day Hill Road
Windsor CT 06095
d. If you are using Konica supplies and still experiencing this problem, please submit an new problem through NSSG Web Support so we can properly
track this issue in the field.
Description
F28-2 at process start or blank copies while copying.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The T/S corona is arcing. Replace T/S wires and blocks. Inspect the screws that secure the transfer ground springs. Ensure that the ground springs are
properly contacting the electrode ground plate. Clean corona shell with alcohol and use a nylon scrub pad.
2. Transfer or separation currents are set too high. Set the currects to specification.
3. Faulty electrode input connector for HV2. Replace the electrode input connector (p/n 540073231).
Use 36 running mode 2 without paper to isolate the problem.
4. HV(B) failure. Replace HV(B) (p/n 45AA84020).
5. The fibers from the ADU static brush are being sliced off as paper enters the ADU. The fibers are then deposited on the transfer/separation corona unit
causing an arcing condition.
Install the new style neutralizing brush (p/n 12EF42034) and paper regulating sheet (p/n 12EF42380).
The angle of installation with the new brush is at 60, not at the previous 90. The angle change will reduce the damage to the brush by the edge of the
paper.
102
4355
Description
ST217, cannot select sort/staple mode. Sort, group, and manual staple operate individually.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Incorrect or mismatched firmware is installed in the main body. Install the latest firmware to allow the use of ST216 or ST217 on the 4355 (main CB, IC24,
level 24.1). For a complete list of the latest firmware, see 4345/4355 Technical Bulletin #10A .
2. A poor RADF to main body connection, allows the RADF to operate but would not allow sort/staple to be selected. Power OFF the machine and
disconnect/reconnect the RADF, then power ON.
Note 1:
To display the current EPROM levels on the LCD:
1. Enter 25 mode.
2. Select #9 (indication of ROM version).
Note 2:
The (4) operation panel EPROMs are located under the staple tray on the left side of the op panel. To access, open the front door and remove one screw.
Description
ST217, conveyance motor runs continually or does not operate. The sorter cannot be selected.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Conveyance motor continually runs due to a loss of 5V DC from the ST217 DCPS (transformer board). F102 (0.4A fuse) is open. This fuse has been
upgraded to eliminate the open condition that can occur in certain situations. Check for 5V DC at CN102-3 of the sorter transformer board. If not present,
remove the connector and check directly off of the pin. Check all 5V DC loads off of the sorter CB for shorting to ground.
If F102 is open, replace it with a 0.8A (250V) slow-blow, or replace the sorter transformer board (p/n 12TA84510) using the warrantee procedures outlined in
ST217 Technical Bulletin #1 which is a mandatory modification.
Note: Ensure that the front and rear elevation auxiliary pins (p/n 12TA48060) or the bin guide plate (front p/n 12TA48020 and rear p/n 12TA48030) are not
bent or binding; replace or lubricate (thoroughly clean the area to be lubricated) as required.
If no results, replace the sorter CB (p/n 12TA87010).
2. No sorter conveyance because fuse F3 on the sorter CB is open. F3 fuses the M201 (conveyance) driver circuit. Replace the sorter CB (p/n
12TA87010).
3. No sorter conveyance because of a failed or binding M201 (conveyance). The sorter CB may also be damaged and require replacement. Loosen the
motor drive belt tension. If the problem still occurs, replace the motor (p/n 12TA80020) and sorter CB (p/n 12TA87010) at the same time.
Description
Solution
To program ECM mode, first, create the 4-digit key operator password:
1. Access the 25 mode (hold down the 2 and 5 keys while powering the machine ON).
2. Press 6: Password setting
3. Press 1: Key operator password setting
4. Enter a 4-digit password (write this number down for future referrence).
5. Press SET.
Next, create the 8-digit master key code password:
1. Press 2: ECM master key code setting.
2. Enter an 8-digit password (write this number down for future referrence).
3. Press SET.
5. Press PREVIOUS SCREEN again.
6. Press 1: Software switch setting
7. Set dipswitch 10-1 to 1 (ON), to enable the up down arrows for programming users.
To program the initial user in the ECM mode:
1. Access the key operator mode (hold down the help key while the machine ON).
2. Enter the key operator password and press OK.
3. Press 3: ECM.
103
4355
4. Enter the 8-digit master key code and press OK (twice if necessary).
5. Press 1: ECM password setting.
6. Press Set Password.
7. Create a 5 digit user password for user 000 and press OK.
9. Press 2: ECM Count Limit setting.
10. Enter the maximum number of copies allowed for this user and press OK.
Next, program what the display will read when the users reach their limit.
1. Press 5: Copy Limit Reached effect.
2. Select one of the three modes and press OK:
Immediately: machine stops when the limit is reached (this setting may disturb some users).
After J ob: machine stops after the end of the current copy job (recommended)
Warning: a warning is displayed when the limit is reached (recommended).
Next, turn the ECM mode ON.
1. From the ECM menu press 4: ECM On/Off setting.
2. Press ON, then press OK.
Description
Black copies intermittently.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Front door interlock (MS2, p/n 392085020) is faulty, or opens intermittently and shuts down DCPS/2.
Install the new style switch mounting plate (p/n 45AA12311), or replace MS2 as necessary. The mounting holes in the new plate are 0.2mm smaller in
diameter, to eliminate play between the switch and the mounting assembly.
Note: MS2 is the switch on the left and is activated by the long actuator on the front door.
2. Internal (exposure) lamp cord has failed.
Replace the lamp cord (p/n 25BA90162).
Description
F35-1 or F35-2.
Solution
Low temperature abnormality detected. Reset the failure code in the 25 mode. Set switch #3-6 to 0.
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Lower roller thermostat (TS2) height is incorrect in machines below s/n 45BE02232.
Adjust the gap between the lower roller and TS2 using the thermostat positioning jig (p/n 00M8-2-00).
If the jig is not available, use 18 sheets of 20lb. paper as outlined in 4355 Technical Bulletin #2.
2. The fusing temperature sensors are not adjusted properly.
Ensure that the entire surface of the sensor touches the upper roller. The thermostats must be adjusted with the positioning jig (p/n 00M6-3-00 for upper roller
and p/n 00M8-2-00 for lower roller).
3. Loose contact on CN380-2.
Reseat CN380.
4. Front door interlock (MS2) opens intermittently and shuts down DCPS/2.
Install the new style switch mounting plate (p/n 45AA12311). The mounting holes in the new plate are 0.2mm smaller in diameter, to eliminate play between
the switch and the mounting assembly.
5. An open exists in the fuser unit (wiring, lamps or thermostats) as indicated by taking a resistance reading from CN392-11 to CN392-22 (blue connector at
rear of fusing unit). If an open exists, check the resistance of individual components (L3, TS1 (p/n 540088420) and TS2). TS2 (lower temperature thermostat,
p/n 25BA88470).
Description
Code 5500h at power up.
Solution
CAUSE: Incorrect or mismatched firmware is installed.
SOLUTION: Install the latest firmware as outlined in 4345/4355 Technical Bulletin #10A .
Notes:
1. To display the current EPROM levels on the LCD:
a. Enter 25 mode.
104
4355
b. Select #9 (indication of ROM version).
2. The (4) operation panel EPROMs are located under the staple tray on the left side of the op panel. To access, open the front door and remove one screw.
3. EPROM history hyperlink
Description
How to program mixed original mode as the initial setting.
Solution
To set the mixed original mode for initial setting, perform the following:
1. Select mixed originals on the LCD screen.
2. Press the job memory key.
3. Store the job under #10.
4. Access the key operator mode (turn the machine ON while pressing the HELP key
5. Press 9: MEMORY SWITCH
6. Press 21: J ob Memory Auto Recall Function and set it to ON.
J ob memory #10 will now be recalled automatically when power is turned ON or when Auto-reset is initiated.
Description
PLEASE REMOVE PAPER FROM ADU is displayed. Where is the paper?
Solution
Pull out the ADU. Lift up on the green handle and completely raise the conveyance cover. Remove the copy paper.
Description
Solution
The latest EPROMs are outlined in 4345/4355 Technical Bulletin #10A .
Note 1:
To display the current EPROM levels on the LCD:
1. Enter 25 mode.
2. Select #9 (indication of ROM version).
Note 2:
The (4) operation panel EPROMs are located under the staple tray on the left side of the op panel. To access, open the front door and remove one screw.
Description
How to program ATS (auto tray switching), 4355.
Solution
To program the ATS, perform the following steps:
1. Access the key operator mode (press and hold the help key while turning the machine ON).
2. Press 9: Memory switches.
3. Use the arrow key to scroll to 10: Automatic tray switching.
4. Press the Change Setting Contents key to select the desired action (ON or OFF).
5. Press the PREVIOUS SCREEN key to enter the data.
6. Select which paper tray(s) are selected for ATS/APS using software switches #13 - #16 (all are ON at default).
7. Turn the macine OFF then ON to exit the key operator mode.
Refer to the user manual (page 9-4, 9-34).
Note1: Endless ATS is not available on this machine. The ability to reload an empty tray and have the machine select that tray after the current tray is empty
while the machine is copying.
Note2: ATS will ONLY operate in full auto mode while using the RADF.
105
5076/7490/760ZA
Description
Solution
1. Power the machine OFF, hold down the P button and the start print, and power the machine ON. Press P-6-start print, set software dipswitch 1-7 to 1 for
the ECM option. To change the second digit use the AUTO button.
2. Program the master key code. Press P-9-start print. Use the key pad to enter the 8 digit master key code, press the start print button to store. Ensure the
key operator knows this code. Note: To view the master key code power the machine OFF, hold down the P button and the start print, and power the machine
ON. Press P-9-start print.
3. To access the ECM modes, with the machine at idle, holding down the P button, enter the 8 digit master key code, no change will occur on the op panel
until the last digit is entered.
4. There are 4 options in the ECM mode. Press 1 on the key pad for Create Password. The number of passwords available is 144. Each password must be
5 digits long. Use the magnification arrows to scroll through the passwords.
Description
Code 41-1 at power up.
Solution
CAUSE: The MCB1 board and or the main motor (M1) is faulty, pulling down the 35V DC to the MCB2 board. If the front doors are open at power up, the
code will not occur until a copy is attempted.
SOLUTION: Ensure the drum carriage, and entire drive system is free of any binding. If necessary replace MCB1 (p/n 5380-8590) and M1 (p/n 454080010)
as a set.
Description
Code 54.
Solution
CAUSE: The exhaust fan (M6) is faulty.
SOLUTION: Replace M6 (p/n 454080130).
Description
Code 37 at power up.
Solution
SOLUTION: Perform the following steps.
1. Ensure the fuse on PSB2 (6.3A 250V) it is not open.
2. Power the machine OFF, and remove all connectors from PSB2, except for CN83 (AC in) and CN88 (24V DC and control).
3. Power the machine ON in the 47 mode, and verify the 28V DC output from CN86-1 to ground, to determine if the power supply is faulty. Power the
machine OFF and connect the other connectors one at a time while monitoring the 28V DC in the 47 mode.
If voltage drops trace the bad load by the connector number:
CN86 feeds 28V DC to MCB2.
CN87 feeds 28V DC to MCB3, MCB5, and M6.
CN89 feeds 28V DC to PFU driver board, ADU driver board, RADF CB, and the sorter CB.
To further isolate which control or driver board is bad, reconnect CN89 on the power supply. Then remove the following connectors. CN401 on the PFU
driver board. CN501 on the ADU driver board. CN301 on the RADF CB. CN801 on the sorter CB. Replace the shorted board after confirming the loads that
go to that board are not faulty.
Description
J itter 90mm from the trail edge.
Solution
CAUSE: The second paper feed rollers are turning off too soon, or the copy paper is skewed.
SOLUTION: Install EPROM (p/n 749015-16.0) on main CB. See 7090S Technical Bulletin #44 .
106
5076/7490/760ZA
Description
Code 41-5.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The left optics overrun sensor (PS8) has failed. Replace PS8 (p/n 454085510).
2. The optics drive motor (M2) is faulty. Verify there is no binding in the optics drive system. Ensure that all photosensors are clean, and there are no
cracked optics pulleys. If necessary replace M2 (p/n 454080020).
3. The MCB2 board has failed. Replace the board (p/n 5380-8540).
Description
Blurry copies.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Blurry copies in reduction or enlargement 1:1 is normal. The mirror solenoid (SD2) is binding or has failed. This will not allow the roller bearing on the
V-frame to stay in contact with the magnification cam. Clean the solenoid and ensure that the locking plates are clean and not binding. If necessary replace
SD2 (p/n 454082030).
2. Intermittent blur on the copies. The optics slide pulley or optics slide roller is cracked. If necessary replace the optics slide pulley (p/n 454062430), or the
optics slide roller (p/n 454062460).
3. Intermittent blur on the copies. The second paper feed motor (M9) is faulty. Run the motor using the 47 mode output code 28. If the motor body is hot
after running, ensure there is no binding on the unit. If necessary replace M9 (p/n 454080060).
4. A narrow blurred line on 11x17 copies approximately 2.5 inches from the lead edge. The retaining clip on the paper conveyance clutch (MC602) on the
RADF is not fully seated. Reseat the retaining clip.
Description
J am position 11.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. J am position 11. The original will not fully exit the RADF, and or half copies. The one-way clutch inside the paper reverse drive pulley on the RADF is dirty
or binding. When the prefeed operation takes place the first original that was fed to the scale plate is pulled away due to the reverse drive causing the rollers
to reverse. Clean the one-way bearing with alcohol or replace the reverse drive (p/n 016076530).
2. RADF height is out of adjustment. The rear side is too high above the glass. Adjust the height to specification. The procedure is detailed on page 10 of
the DF303/303A/304 service manual.
Description
What is the difference between the 7490 and 7490M?
Solution
The serial number prefix 538 indicates the model is a 7490. The serial number prefix 555 indicates a 7490M. The 7490M can accept the staple sorter
(ST207) and has increased duplex productivity.
Description
The copier stays in wait. The fuser lamp cycles normally.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. One of the fuser lamps is open. Verify the L2/L3 circuit paths. Replace the open component. Temperature fuse (p/n 4542-8381). L2 short lamp (p/n
454083020). L3 long lamp (p/n 454083030).
2. The triac for L2 is shorted causing L2 to stay ON, which opens the temperature fuse. Replace the triac (p/n 496088420) and the temperature fuse
assembly (p/n 4542-8381).
3. The temperature CB (TCB) has failed. Replace the TCB (p/n 538287170).
107
5076/7490/760ZA
108
5080/5082
Description
Code 54 when duplexing.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Improper feedback signals from the optics cooling fans (M10, M11). Ensure the fans work in the 47 mode with output code 52. If the fans work, replace
EPROM IC5 (p/n 508015-14.2) on the main CB. Note: Ensure both fan filters get replaced every PM.
2. One of the optics cooling fans (M10, M11) are faulty. Ensure the fans work in the 47 mode using output code 52. Replace the faulty fan motor (p/n
454080110). Ensure both fan filters get replaced every PM.
Description
ST207, code 77-3.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Open interlock switch, SW1, SW2, SW3, or SW4. This opens the 28V DC to the coil of relay 1. Perform a continuity check from the red wire on RL1 to
CN812-1 (red wire) on the sorter CB. The reading should be approximately 0.8 ohms, repair or replace any bad switches as necessary.
2. Resistor R64 next to fuse F1 on the sorter CB has failed. This causes no RL1 drive. Turn the machine OFF and check CN812-1 to frame ground. If there
is continuity to frame ground, inspect all interlock switches and the wiring to them for any shorts to frame (disengage the bin shift motor and slide the bin unit
back and forth while watching the meter). Repair any faults as necessary, then replace the sorter CB (p/n 5540-9011).
3. The code occurred after the ST208 was removed. A jumper must be installed to the 2 pin connector (CN936). The connector is located near the bottom of
the sorter DC power supply.
4. The sorter power supply board is not outputting 28V DC. Replace the DC power supply board (p/n 554184510).
5. There is no AC input to the sorter power supply. CN847 on the sorter power supply is loose. Ensure that CN847 is fully seated.
Description
J am position 4.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The loop (MC2) and second feed (MC1) clutches are dirty. Clean and adjust the gap (two sheets 20lb paper) of MC1, and MC2.
2. The tension of the paper feed timing belt on the PFU may be too tight. Adjust the tension of the paper feed timing belt. For best results, start the
adjustment at the midpoint of the belt tension unit.
3. The paper feed unit drive system is binding due to excessive toner buildup in the drive assemblies. Clean any toner from the drive belt and all the gears
and shafts. Replace any damaged or worn parts. Note: J am position 4 may only occur with 8.5x11 paper and may not occur in copy face down or at 99%
reduction.
4. The paper feed motor (M9) is faulty, causing fuse F2 (3.15A, 125V) on the MCB3 board to open. Replace M9 (p/n 454080060) and the MCB3 board (p/n
5740-9012).
5. The main CB has failed. Replace the main CB (p/n 5742-8625).
Description
Fusing unit lamps, L2 or L3, do not light and no error codes are displayed. Poor fusing results.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. A thermocouple (CA) is contacting the upper roller or the CA mounting bracket. Inspect both CA1 and CA2 for proper positioning (1mm above, and
parallel to, the upper roller). Ensure that the CA wires have not slipped off the insulating pads.
2. An open lamp or temperature fuse. Check continuity between CN190-2 (black wire) to the TCB CN151-4 (red wire) for L3 and TF4. Then check continuity
from the TCB CN151-6 (white wire) to CN190-2 (black wire) for L2 and TF2. CN190 is located behind the TCB and is a 2 pin in-line connector. Replace the
open lamp(s), or temperature fuse(s) as necessary.
3. There is a poor connection at the fuser drawer connector. Inspect each pin in the male and female connectors. Reform the pins as necessary to ensure a
good connection.
4. The temperature CB (TCB) is faulty. Replace the TCB (p/n 538287170).
109
5080/5082
Description
Code 26 at idle or while copying.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The IF voltage for PS1 is set too low or too high. Ensure that PS1 is clean and aligned correctly. Set the IF voltage to 2.5V DC, measuring between TP3
(IF voltage) and TP6 (GND); on the process CB. Perform this adjustment in the 58 mode with output code 8 selected. Adjust VR1 as necessary.
2. A Katun drum is installed. Replace the drum with a Konica drum (PCUA 947805), and verify the PS1 adjustment.
3. The cleaning blade release lever attached to the blade release motor (M5) is not contacting the release lever on the cleaning unit. This results in poor
cleaning. Repair the release lever(s), and ensure proper contact. Use the 47 mode output code 41 to operate M5.
4. Incorrect supplies were used. Purge the toning/developing, and recycling systems, and add the correct supplies. Instruct the operator(s) how to identify
the correct supplies.
5. Code 26 occurs approximately 50,000 copies into a PM cycle. Due to an environment that affects the charge current on the drum (print shop effect), the
copy quality degrades over a period of time. Install the optional charge corona fan unit (p/n 454080160). Note: The fan should be positioned so the airflow
goes into the drum cavity.
6. The process CB has failed. Replace the process CB (p/n 5740-8533).
Description
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The positioning of the exit detect LED (LED201) is off. The sensor always detects a jam. Perform the following steps.
a. Turn ON hardware dipswitch 1 on the sorter CB.
b. Turn VR1 clockwise until LED1 goes ON, then turn VR1 counterclockwise, and confirm the scale mark at which LED1 turns OFF. At this point, if VR1 is
e. Form the mounting plate using long-nose pliers so that the sensor will detect properly.
f. Turn OFF hardware dipswitch 1 on the sorter CB.
2. A level 12 EPROM is installed on the sorter CB. Ensure that IC3 on the sorter CB is at least a level 13.1 (p/n ST20763-13.1). This eliminates user
induced jams.
3. The large vertical conveyance door is closed too tight slowing down the paper feed. Adjust the large vertical door for proper operation.
4. The paper is hitting the paper hold lever assembly (p/n 5540-5290) as it enters the bin. Perform the paper miscentering adjustment. This adjustment is on
page ST-31 of the ST207/208/297 service manual (2nd edition April 93).
Description
J am position 7.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The fusing jam LED (LED502) in the exit reversing unit has failed. Replace LED502 (p/n 0900-8380).
2. There is a cold solder joint on the fusing jam sensor (PS506). Repair or replace PS506 (p/n 066085520).
Description
Code 52.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. One or both of the door switches (MS11 and MS12) has failed or is not actuated. Ensure that the switches are actuated. Check CN62-1 (24V DC) to
CN62-4 (GND) on the MCB1 board. If 24V DC is not present, inspect MS11 and or MS12. Ensure that 24V DC is originating from CN10-8 on PSB1. If
necessary replace any faulty switches (p/n 454285030).
2. CN64 on the MCB1 board is not fully seated. Reseat CN64 on the MCB1 board.
3. The main motor (M1) is faulty. Replace M1 (p/n 454080010).
110
5080/5082
4. The main CB has failed. Replace the main CB (p/n 5742-8625).
Description
Solution
1. Power the machine OFF. Hold down the P button and the start print, and power the machine ON. Press P-6-start print set software dipswitch 1-7 to 1 to
enable the ECM option.
2. Program the master key code. Press P-9-start print. Use the keypad to enter the 8 digit master key code, press the start print button to store. Ensure the
key operator knows this code. Note: To enter the master key code or view it power machine OFF, hold down the P button and the start print, power the
machine ON. Then press P-9-start print.
3. To access the ECM modes, with the machine at idle, hold down the P button and enter the 8 digit master key code, no change will occur on the op panel
until the last digit is entered.
4. Press 1 on the keypad for Create Password. The number of passwords available is 144. Each password must be 5 digits long. Use the magnification
arrows to scroll through the passwords.
Description
ST201, missorting.
Solution
CAUSE: Incompatible firmware is installed on the sorter CB, or incorrect programming in the P6 mode.
SOLUTION: Ensure that IC3 on the sorter CB is a revision 01.0 (p/n 609063-01.0). This EPROM is recommended for faster machines with an ST201
installed. In the P6 mode set software dip 4-0 to 1. Note: Depending on the firmware on the main body, when this dipswitch is set to 1 it can disable the P3
adjustments.
111
5370
Description
Code 36-06 or PLEASE WAIT COPIER WARMING UP message (the machine does not come to the ready state).
Solution
Note: To reset the failure code use the 25 mode, and set dipswitch 3-5 to 0.
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The fuser lamps are installed incorrectly or a lamp is open.
If the lamps were replaced recently, make sure the makers mark (Toshiba (L2), Ushio (L3)) is toward the front of the fuser.
An open lamp within the upper roller CANNOT be detected by eye. Continuity must be checked to determine if a lamp is open. To check the lamps:
a. Slide out the fuser unit.
b. Set meter to 20 ohm scale.
c. Measure individual lamps from the ceramic mounting blocks, front and rear.
d. Replace the open lamp.
2. M3 (fusing motor) has failed in the reverse direction (pressure). PS13 (pressure ON/OFF) is not being flagged, therefore the copier will not go to the ready
state. Replace M3 (p/n 25AA80032).
To prevent this problem from reoccurring, install the new style AUX levers (p/n 25AA-5281 [front], 25AA-5291 [rear]) as outlined in 5370/6190 Technical
Bulletin #38 for new part ordering and installation information. The bearing (cam shaft holder) of the new levers protrudes further downward to catch the
pressure cam at an earlier point in its cycle. This minimizes drag during pressure up of the fuser rollers. Also, inspect the condition of the AUX lever
mounting posts (p/n 25AA53370). Replace these posts if necessary.
3. TH4 failure or TH4 wiring was reversed during replacement of the temperature sensors for the fuser unit. Replace TH4 (TH1 and TH4 are on the same
harness (p/n 25AA88051)) and ensure that the wiring for CN131-3 and CN131-11 is correct.
4. Worn fuser lamps. Lamp replacement cycle is 1.2M copies.
Replace all 3 fuser lamps at 1.2M copies.
CAUTION: Do not mix old (6190) and new (5370/6190) style lamps.
Install only the following for 5370.
L2 (240V, 1800W) p/n 25AE83080
L3 (240V, 1000W) p/n 25AE83090
L4 lower roller lamp p/n 25AA83041.
L2 (thick lamp) for s/n cut off 25AE00598 order p/n 25AE83030.
L2 (thick lamp) for s/n cut in 25AE01001 order p/n 25AE83080.
L3 (thin lamp) for s/n cut off 25AE00598 order p/n 25AE83020.
L3 (thin lamp) for s/n cut in 25AE01001 order p/n 25AE83080.
Refer to page 8-9 in the service manual for details regarding replacement items at 1.2M.
5. If L3 or L4 (lower roller lamp) opens, the machine may remain in warm-up mode indefinitely.
Codes 35-04 (L3 open) and 35-05 (L4 open), were deactivated from the machine shut down menu due to problems with false codes in cold environments.
Occurrence of these codes can be viewed in 25 mode, data collection 5, 131 (L3) and 132 (L4).
Engineering has requested a firmware update to reactivate 35-04 and 35-05 for open lamp conditions. The request will also include increasing the warm-up
time window so that false codes are not generated.
6. The upper roller is not made by Konica and the thickness or material used is incorrect. Install the correct upper roller (p/n 25AA53431).
7. Failed upper roller temperature sensors. (TH2, TH3, CA1, CA2). Replace the sensors which are available as an assembly (p/n 25AA88043).
Note: Use the gap gauges when installing these sensors.
Adjust the height of the fusing temperature sensors. This can be accomplished through the use of approved sensor adjustment jigs (p/n SPRF-0040,
SPRF-0050, SPRF-0060, SPRF-0070, SPRF-0080) or by using the following specifications:
TH2 and TH3 - 1 0.3mm
TH1 and TH4 - 2 0.3mm
CA1 and CA2 - 1 0.15mm
TS2 and TS3 - 1 0.15mm
TS4 - 3 0.15mm.
Description
DF307, code 60-01 (RADF communication failure).
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Open ICP1 (2.0A DC), 5V DC protection on the DFDB (upper board). Check for 5V DC at TP7 and at CN550-3. The ICP is electrically in between these
points. If the voltage is present at CN550-3, but absent at the test point, the ICP is open. Replace the RADF drive board (p/n 12AA-9023).
Notes:
a. When cleaning RADF sensors, ensure that power is OFF.
b. To open the paper drawers when 60-01 is displayed, set 25 mode, dipswitch 3-0 to 1 to deselect the RADF. The paper drawers can now be opened.
2. ICP1 on the DFCB (lower board) may be open if the original width detection board (OWDB) is loose and shorted to the underside of the platen pressure
112
5370
plate. Reattach the OWDB to the platen pressure plate (p/n 12AA-4201). The OWDB is located on the underside, front of the platen pressure plate. Replace
the DFCB (p/n 12AA-9019).
Description
The LCD touchscreen is locked up, inoperable, erratic, or damaged.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Open ICP1 on the operation board.
Replace the 5V DC ICP.
2. Loss of 5V DC from DCPS1, CN7, pin 6.
Replace DCPS1 (p/n 25AA84510).
3. Touch beeper is not ON, this causes key operators to push too hard on the display damaging the membrane (dead spots).
Replace the LCD unit (p/n 25AA87520) and activate the beeper function.
Note: To activate the beeper function on 5370, perform the following:
a. Power the machine ON while holding the HELP key.
b. Select Key click sound.
c. Select ON (and LONG or SHORT response)
d. Power machine OFF/ON.
4. Backup battery failure (memory board, located on the main CB). Check the battery output with the machine OFF. The output should be at least 3V DC.
Replace the memory board if necessary (p/n 25AA-9100).
5. Blank LCD due to operation panel failure. Erratic operation continues after replacing the LCD component. Replace the operation panel complete (p/n
25AE-7006).
6. Dead spots on the touch membrane. Faulty operation board 1 is not processing the signal received from the touch screen leading to non selection in a
particular LCD area. Replace OB1 (p/n 25AA-9322).
7. Improperly grounded LCD unit can lead to screen lock up (KONICA is displayed). Install a ground wire from the op panel ground to the right side of the
LCD. Replace the LCD unit (p/n 25AA87520) if erratic operation continues.
8. LCD fades out at power up or goes blank during operation after the EPROM's were replaced. Verify that the latest production firmware is installed as a
set as outlined in 5370/6190 Technical Bulletin #29A .
Main CB - 537018-31.0
Main CB - 537019-31.0
Operation board - 537022-30.0
ADF CB - DF30733-23.0
Sorter CB - ST21265-17.0
Note: The operation board EPROMs are accessed by lifting up the toner hopper lid, remove the screw sercuring the metal plate. The four operation panel
EPROMs should be visible.
537022-30.0
537026-30.0
537027-31.0
537028-31.0
9. Failed RADF main harness. Replace the RADF-to-main body harness (p/n 12AA90053).
Description
Code 26-01.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The toner control sensor reference voltage is not adjusted properly:
a. Open the front door and remove the cover (secured by one screw) on the operation panel.
b. Connect the probes of the meter to TP2 (toner PS) and TP3 (GND) of CB1.
c. Turn ON the main switch.
d. Adjust VR2 on CB1 to 2.5V DC 0.05V
See page 6-24 in the 5370/6190 service manual.
2. A loss of ground at the charge corona shell. Ensure that the grounding tab located on the rear of the drum carriage contacts the charge corona shell.
113
5370
3. Incorrect toner was added in the machine. Purge all supplies from the toner hopper, developer, cleaning unit and recycling system. Install new 6190 toner
and developer.
Note: 2028 and 3135 toner cartridges will fit in the 6190 hopper.
4. The 4th mirror is dislodged from its mounting. Reposition the 4th mirror correctly.
5. VR2 (If Adj) has failed on the main CB. This VR is used to adjust the necessary voltage required for PS1. Replace main CB (25AA-9010). VR2 is not a
replaceable component.
6. On high volume machines a build-up of toner on the H-cut blade located in the developer unit may result in poor image development. The problem is more
prevelent toward the front of the machine, where PS1 is located. Because of this, the patch is under-developed, which will cause the machine to eventually
overtone.
To remedy the situation the doctor blade must be removed from the developer unit and the build-up carefully removed. When replacing the blade, carefully
set the gap on each end to 0.3-0.35mm with non-ferris feeler gauges (brass).
Description
Site requirements, 5370.
Solution
Site Requirements 20 and 30 Ampere Machines . See also Konica Minolta Site Requirements Forms ( FO-9 and FO-10 ) which provide the site
requirements to which customers must conform before having any Konica Minolta 20 or 30 ampere models installed.
Note: To view the above PDFs, Acrobat* Reader must be installed. Acrobat Reader can be downloaded for free from the Adobe* Web site at:
Description
Code 11-07 or 11-08 when using Tray 1, Tray 2, or the bypass tray.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The bypass tray is not locked, allowing MS3 to open during copy process. MS3 is located on the main body and becomes actuated when the MT101 tray
is fully inserted.
Repair lock and ensure MS3 is fully actuated.
2. Failed MS3 (bypass interlock switch). Replace MS3 (p/n 197085010).
Description
Solution
The latest 5370 firmware must be installed as a set as outlined in 5370/6190 Technical Bulletin #29A .
Main CB - 537018-31.0
Main CB - 537019-31.0
ADF CB - DF30733-23.0
Note: The operation board EPROMs are accessed by lifting up the toner hopper lid, remove the screw sercuring the metal plate. The four operation panel
537022-30.0
537026-30.0
537027-31.0
537028-31.0
5370 EPROM history hyperlink .
Description
Code 54-08 or 54-02 following warm-up or while copying.
Solution
CAUSE: The EM (return) signal from one or more of the optic fan motors (M33, M34, M35, M36 or M37) is unstable (binding) due to a build-up of dirt on the
fan motor which slows the rotation of the fan.
114
5370
SOLUTION: Clean blades of the cooling fans and ensure proper operation.
1. Remove the ST212/ST213 if installed.
2. Remove the right side cover.
3. Pull out the fuser unit.
4. Remove the two mounting screws for the fan assembly mounting bracket.
5. Disconnect the wiring harness for the fan assembly.
6. Remove and clean the assembly.
To test cooling fan operation:
1. Set 25 mode, 1-2 and 1-3 set to 0 to allow the machine to operate with the sorter(s) detached .
2. With the fan section removed, power the machine ON while observing all the fans.
3. The fan that does not spin before 54-08 is displayed is the failed fan. Inspect for damaged wiring or loose connections.
4. Replace any non operating fan(s) (p/n 25AA80540).
WARNING: Do not try to start a non-moving fan by pushing the fan blade with your finger. The fan may start and injury may result.
Description
Solution
New 5370 units (above s/n 25QE01630) are Energy Star compliant. These machines will shut off after 30 minutes of non-use and will default to 1:2 mode at
power up and initialization. Auto shut-off (power saver) and 1:2 default can be disabled by a Konica trained technician if these modes create a hardship for
the customer due to their particular usage patterns.
To defeat auto shut-off on 5370 (above s/n 25QE01630) set 25 mode dipswitch 14-6 to 1.
To change the default to 1:1:
1. Enter the key operator mode by pressing the Help button while turning the machine ON.
2. Select Initial Setting [1].
3. Select Copy Mode [1].
4. Select the desired initial mode (i.e. 1:1).
5. Verify correct selection by pressing the Check button.
6. Turn machine OFF then turn back ON.
If level 31.0 EPROMs are not installed, auto shut-off can be set to a 2 hour interval:
Set 25 mode dipswitch 9-3 and 9-4 to 1.
Note: The latest production firmware must be installed as a set as outlined in 5370/6190 Technical Bulletin #29A .
Main CB - 537018-31.0
Main CB - 537019-31.0
ADF CB - DF30733-23.0
Description
Blur areas and/or jitter from front-to-rear.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. If the problem is 2 inches from lead edge and about 2mm wide, then the optics cable tension adjustment plate (p/n 25AA-6770) is loose or damaged. This
tension plate is located in the back left corner near the optics drive motor (M2). Tighten or replace the tension plate. Refer to page 6-17 of the 6190/5370
service manual (2nd edition) for tension plate adjustment specifications.
2. The optics cable has worn a groove in the cable tension pulley. Replace the optics tension pulley (p/n 454061461).
Note: The old style pulley is plastic; the current style is metal.
3. The optics cable is over-lapped within the drive capstan. Reseat or restring the optics cable.
4. If belt holder (C) (p/n 25AA62230) is out of position, reposition the holder on the belt (refer to parts catalog, page 20 item 14).
5. Optics components are binding due to lack of lubrication. Lubricate the lens slide rail with multi oil. Lubricate the lens drive gears with plas guard. Prior to
lubrication, thoroughly clean the area to be lubricated. See Technical Education Bulletin #7A regarding lubricant applications.
6. The corner of the fourth mirror is chipped. Replace the fourth mirror (p/n 25AA61050).
7. Drive pulley (magnifying Z=100), p/n 25AA77130, is broken. Inspect the drive from the pulley to the driving coupling (p/n 25AA62261). If broken, replace
the drive pulley. Refer to second edition parts catalog, dated J UNE 1995, pages 14 and 15.
115
5370
Description
List of equipment that is no longer being supported.
Solution
Please see attached Product & Technical Support Bulletins 1792 and 2443 andMarketing Bulletin#07-GB-016.
Note : To view a PDF, Adobe Readermust be installed. Adobe Readercan be downloaded for free from the Adobeweb site at:
http://www.adobe.com/products/acrobat/readstep2.html
Description
When searching solutions by models,referenced links for the documentsare notaccessible.
Solution
CAUSE: This is a search of the printed database. The links are locatedwithin the solution in the database.

SOLUTION: Copy the solution ID number into the Knowledgebase look-up Keyword field and select Search to access the solution complete with active links
to attached documents.
Note : If there is an actual 'dead' link within the solution, please send an E-mail to cses@kmbs.konicaminolta.us with the solution ID number and please
identify the link.
Description
Can NCR PAPERbe used as copy paper?
Solution
Konica Minoltarecommends an NCR PAPERnamed Xero/FormII fromAppleton Papers in Wisconsin. Xero/FormII is a vegetable-based product
that works extremely well.
Note : For the bizhub PRO C500 and 920, refer to Bulletin #5349 . For the bizhub PRO 1050 series see Marketing Bulletin #05-GB-014 .
To view a PDF, Adobe Readermust be installed. Adobe Readercan be downloaded for free from the Adobeweb site at:
http://www.adobe.com/products/acrobat/readstep2.html .
Description
Code 49-08 when pressing the print button.
Solution
CAUSE: M27 (optics cooling fan) did not come ON.
SOLUTION: To check M27, perform the following:
1. Access the 47 mode (power the machine ON while holding down on the 4 and 7 keys), output code 37.
2. Press the print button and see if M27 comes ON.
3. If M27 does not come ON, replace the fan motor (p/n 25AA80520).
Description
How to access the Konica Minolta FTP site.
Solution
The Konica Minolta FTP site is no longer accessible. The latest version of firmware, system software or print drivers is available via the Konica Minolta
Download Selector.
Access the Selector from MyKonicaMinolta.com, select the Service tab then click on SSD (DNA, Drivers, MSDS) in the left frame. Continue to your Home
Page by clicking on Continue on to the SSD Home Page and select 'Download MSDS, Drivers, Firmware and more'.
The download search tool offers several methods of searching for files. The top section of the page provides quick access to recently released files and the
most popular downloads. These lists can be filtered by file type, such as driver, firmware, system code, etc.
Below the top section, there is the first of three search options; a text entry box that can be used to quickly find all downloads for a given product. For
instance, enter C500 and the search results page will find all downloads for the bizhub PRO C500.
Below the text entry box, there is an alternative search by Product group and Product. Optionally, the search results can be further narrowed by selecting a
file type or operating system.
A third searching option is provided on the Advanced search page, which provides search results for more complicated search scenarios. With the old FTP
site, many files were misplaced or nearly impossible to find with the hierarchical structure that a files system imposes. The major goal behind this Download
Selector is to provide an easier method of finding files fast, and ensuring, through details such as release notes, that the file being downloaded is the correct
one.
SPECIAL NOTE : Solution contribution by Ken Walker, Workgroup/SSD
116
6190
Description
Code 36-06 or PLEASE WAIT COPIER WARMING UP message (the machine does not come to the ready state).
Solution
Note: To reset the failure code use the 25 mode, and set dipswitch 3-5 to 0.
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The fuser lamps are installed incorrectly, a lamp is open or M3 (fuser drive motor) is not cycling. To check M3 operation, use 47 mode, code 46, P-01-P
start/print. Replace the M3 motor (p/n 25AA80032) if inoperable in diagnostics.
If the lamps were replaced recently, make sure the makers mark (Toshiba (L2), Ushio (L3)) is toward the front of the fuser.
An open lamp within the upper roller CANNOT be detected by eye. Continuity must be checked to determine if a lamp is open. To check the lamps:
a. Slide out the fuser unit.
b. Set meter to 20 ohm scale.
c. Measure individual lamps from the ceramic mounting blocks, front and rear.
d. Replace the open lamp.
2. M3 (fusing motor) has failed in the reverse direction (pressure). PS13 (pressure ON/OFF) is not being flagged, therefore the copier will not go to the ready
state. Replace M3 (p/n 25AA80032).
To prevent this problem from reoccurring, install the new style AUX levers (p/n 25AA-5281 [front], 25AA-5291 [rear]) as outlined in 5370/6190 Technical
Bulletin #38 for new part ordering and installation information. The bearing (cam shaft holder) of the new levers protrudes further downward to catch the
pressure cam at an earlier point in its cycle. This minimizes drag during pressure up of the fuser rollers. Also, inspect the condition of the AUX lever
mounting posts (p/n 25AA53370). Replace these posts if necessary.
3. While replacing the temperature sensors for the fuser unit, the wiring for TH4 was reversed. Reposition the wiring on CN131-3 and CN131-11.
4. The fuser lamps are worn. Lamp replacement cycle is 1.2M copies. Replace all 3 fuser lamps at 1.2M copies.
CAUTION: Do not mix old and new style lamps.
Additionally, verify that your machine has the correct style lamps installed based on the s/n. See the p/n's and s/n cut-ins listed below.
Old style L2 is 240V, 1410W (p/n 25AE83030) for machines below s/n 25AE01001.
New style L2 is 240V, 1800W (p/n 25AE83090) for machines above s/n 25AE01001.
Old style L3 is 240V, 830W (p/n 25AE83020) for machines below 25AE01001.
New style L3 is 240V, 1000W (p/n 25AE83080) for machines above 25AE01001.
L4, lower roller lamp (p/n 25AA83041).
Refer to page 8-9 in the service manual for details regarding replacement items at 1.2M.
5. If L3 or L4 (lower roller lamp) opens, the machine may remain in warm-up mode indefinitely.
Codes 35-04 (L3 open) and 35-05 (L4 open), were deactivated from the machine shut down menu due to problems with false codes in cold environments in
J apan.
Occurrence of these codes can be viewed in 25 mode, data collection 5, 131 (L3) and 132 (L4).
Engineering will request a firmware update to reactivate 35-04 and 35-05 for open lamp conditions. The request will also include increasing the warm-up time
window so that false codes are not generated.
6. The upper roller is not made by Konica and the thickness or material used is incorrect. Install the correct upper roller (p/n 25AA53431).
7. One or more of the fuser unit thermostats are open. With an ohmmeter, check across the terminals of each thermostat. If any are found open, they must
be replaced. The 2 upper roller thermostats are (p/n 25AA88410) and the lower roller thermostat is (p/n 25AE88430).
8. The fixed connection plate assembly is not installed on the ADU carriage. This allows the fuser unit to be extracted without first extracting the ADU
assembly, which results in the PLEASE WAIT COPIER WARMING UP message being constantly displayed.
Install the fixed connection plate assembly (p/n 25AA-0910) on the ADU carriage assembly. This will force the ADU carriage assembly to be extracted prior to
extracting the fuser unit, which will prevent the constant display of the PLEASE WAIT COPIER WARMING UP message.
Description
DF307, jam position 10 or 11.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Laser printed originals that exceed 10mm curl may have feed problems when run through the RADF.
Production units (from J uly 96) will feature modified upper infeed guide plates and original guides that will tolerate higher curl and Z-fold type originals.
Refer to DF307 Technical Bulletin #1 for new part ordering and installation information.
2. The RADF sensors are dirty. All sensors should be cleaned and adjusted at each PM cycle.
Note: PS605 (passage detect) is hidden from view. It is located underneath the lower conveyance guide plate (item #2 on page 22, DF307 parts manual) .
Clean PS605 as outlined in [[DF307 Technical Bulletin #2|IMAGE v:\bitmaps\djc098.bmp SCROLL]] using the new special tool. To adjust PS605 sensitivity,
rotate VR5 on the DF CB until LED 5 lights, then continue to rotate clockwise three graduations.
3. The RADF unlatches while in use. The hold down magnets have been modified to eliminate the DF from popping up during operation. If the DF307 does
not close firmly, install the new style hold down magnets (p/n 12AA-1141). See DF307/DF307M Technical Bulletin #3A .

4. Original exit jams may be caused by a damaged original stopper plate actuator. The new style actuator is designed to increase the amount of pressure
applied to the original stopper plate. See DF307 Technical Bulletin #4 for information regarding this new part.
117
6190
5. A damaged original registrating sheet is impeding the movement of the stopper assembly. Replace the original registrating sheet (p/n 25AA61552). It is
mounted on the left hand side of the optics (A) bracket (p/n 25AA61743).
The original registrating sheet is installed in production units beginning with s/n 25AE00438.
6. The paper exit belts (A) and (B) are loose (p/n 12AA77510, 12AA77520). Tighten the paper exit belt to specification. Refer to DF307 service manual page
45 adjustment #14.
7. The brake clutches are dirty or out of adjustment. Clean and adjust the exit and conveyance brake clutches (MB602 and MB601) particularly on high
volume machines (1M+). Set the clutch gap to .1mm.
8. PS601 is out of alignment due to loose screws, partially obstructing the sensor light path. Reseat PS601.
9. The platen glass is not grounded. To verify that the glass is grounded properly:
a. Slide a sheet of paper under the glass tabs, if paper fits the tabs must be reformed.
b. Verify continuity with an ohmmeter, the reading should be less than 100K ohms. Reform the glass holders so they 'dig in' to the surface coating of the
glass.
10. The reinforcing plate located under the white conveyance belt is damaged. The plate can be damaged if the customer forces the DF307 closed with a
book or three dimensional object on the glass.
The DFPR assembly mounts to the reinforcing plate. If deformed, it will cause incorrect pressure from DFPR to feed rollers, resulting in multiple feeding.
Replace reinforcing plate (p/n 12AA10053).
11. The originals are soaked with fuser oil. Do not use copies as originals following a PM or new machine set-up. The copies have excessive fuser oil on the
print side and will misfeed when run through the RADF.
If you have done this, run 500 to 1000 clean originals through the RADF to absorb fuser oil on the feed rollers.
12. A faulty wiring harness from the DF307 to the main body is not allowing proper communication to occur. Reseat the connectors on the RADF CB and
check for pinched wiring. Check the main body connector for loose or damaged pins. If problem persists, replace the RADF wiring harness (p/n 12AA90052).
Description
DF307, code 60-01 (RADF communication failure).
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Open ICP1 (2.0A DC), 5V DC protection on the DFDB (upper board). Check for 5V DC at TP7 and at CN550-3. The ICP is electrically in between these
points. If voltage is present at CN550-3, but absent at the test point, the ICP is open. Replace the RADF drive board (p/n 12AA-9023).
Notes:
a. When cleaning RADF sensors, be sure that power is OFF.
b. To open the paper drawers when 60-01 is displayed, set 25 mode, dipswitch 3-0 to 1 to deselect the RADF.
2. ICP1 on the DFCB (lower board) opens if the original width detection board (OWDB) loosens and shorts to the underside of the platen pressure plate.
Reattach the OWDB to the platen pressure plate (p/n 12AA-4201). The board is located on the underside, front of the platen pressure plate. Replace the
DFCB (p/n 12AA-9019).
Description
Site requirements, 6190.
Solution
Notes:
1. Current 6190s (above s/n 25AE01000) are designed to operate on 208-240V AC, 30A service. Machines below s/n 25AE01001 were designed for 230V
AC, 20A service. These machines require an external transformer when used with 208V AC service.
2. 6190 Technical Bulletin #10A outlines the power changes and s/n cut-ins for main body and sorters.
3. To view the above PDFs, Acrobat* Reader must be installed. Acrobat Reader can be downloaded for free from the Adobe* Web site at:
Description
Code 26-01.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The toner control sensor reference voltage (PS1) is not adjusted properly.
To adjust PS1, perform the following:
a. Open the front door and remove the cover (secured by one screw) on the operation panel.
b. Connect the probes of the meter to TP2 (toner PS) and TP3 (GND) of CB1.
118
6190
c. Power ON the copier.
d. Adjust VR2 on CB1 to 2.5V DC 0.05V DC
See page 6-24 in the 5370/6190 Service Manual (2/96).
Note: It is very important to NOT cheat the front door interlock switch. The display should indicate FRONT DOOR IS OPEN PLEASE CLOSE when
performing this adjustment.
2. A loss of ground at the charge corona shell. Ensure that the grounding tab located on the rear of the drum carriage contacts the charge corona shell.
and developer.
Note: 2028 and 3135 toner cartridges fit in the 6190 hopper.
4. The 4th mirror is dislodged from its mounting. Reposition the 4th mirror correctly.
5. The developing unit shaft holder front (bias bearing) has failed. Replace the shaft holder front, (p/n 25AA75011).
6. VR2 (If Adj) has failed on the main CB. This VR is used to adjust the necessary voltage required for PS1. Replace main CB (25AA-9010). VR2 is not a
replaceable component.
7. On high volume machines a build-up of toner on the H-cut blade located in the developer unit may result in poor image development. The problem is more
prevalent toward the front of the machine, where PS1 is located. Because of this, the patch is under-developed, which will cause the machine to eventually
overtone.
To remedy the situation the doctor blade must be removed from the developer unit and the build-up carefully removed. When replacing the blade, carefully
set the gap on each end to 0.3-0.35mm with non-ferrous feeler gauges (brass).
8. A failed drum temperature sensor (TH5).
Replace the drum temperature sensor (p/n 25AA88061).
Description
Light copies, undertoned, poor density, poor solid fill.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The drum counter was not reset and/or the drum was not stabilized following the installation of a new drum.
a. To reset the drum counter, set the 25 mode, dipswitch 4-2 to 1. After a copy is made, the counter will reset to 0.
Note: The drum counter cannot be set to a specific number, it can only be reset to 0.
b. After installing a new drum, it is recommended to run at least 140 copies (of test chart TP-8) prior to performing copy quality adjustments. This
procedure, referred to as drum stabilization, is outlined in 5370/6190 Technical Bulletin #15 .
Note: TP-8 is attached to the bulletin, to order, contact Forms Distribution x2676.
2. The PTL and drum are worn. PTL life is 300,000 copies and drum is 600,000 copies.
3. If the customer is using high toner coverage originals, the following items must be replaced or adjusted:
Charge corona wires, if worn, replace.
Developer, if worn, replace.
Set the currents to specification.
Scrub the PCC corona shell and metal mounting plate to remove corosion.
Set the standard bias value from 143 to 173 to decrease the density of the patch.
Adjust the patch creation rest data (25 mode). Set the rest cycle from 2 to 1.
Note: Extended copy runs with originals exceeding 50% solid toner coverage may result in light copies.
4. The light distribution plates behind the lens are loose, dislodged, or out of position. This causes copies to be very dark for the first 2 to 3 inches. The rest
of the copy will be washed out and increased contrast does not operate. Also, the CVR is probably set to the maximum position. This problem usually
occurrs during enlargement or reduction copying.
Adjust the light distribution plates to the proper position. (p/n's 25AA61871, 25AA61860, and 25AA61880) and verify that the CVR is set correctly.
5. A failed HV power supply (A) not providing proper bias voltage. Replace HV power supply (A) (p/n 25AA84012).
6. The T/S corona unit failed.
Replace the T/S corona unit (p/n 25AA-2603). This unit can checked in 36 mode, however arcing may not be evident.
Description
ST212, codes 77-07, 77-08 or 77-17, 77-18. Erratic stapler operation.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The stapler unit shipping bracket was not removed at set up. Ensure that all shipping brackets are removed at set up.
2. The indexer unit drive gear is damaged or missing. Inspect the drive gears at the rear side of the indexer unit. Repair or replace as necessary.
119
6190
3. The up/down cable tension and stapler height are improperly adjusted. Perform the cable tension and stapler height adjustments as outlined in the
ST212/213 service manual pages 50 and 51.
4. PS211 (stapler up/down position detection photosensor) has a coating of lubrication on it. Clean PS211.
5. PS212 (stapler upper limit sensor) wiring is loose or damaged. Repair wire.
6. PS212 failure. Powering the copier OFF/ON will cause the stapler to jog down to the 3rd or 4th bin location, and then return to the top. At this point, the
error code is indicated. Replace PS212 (p/n 540085510) and perform the stapler height adjustment outlined on page 50 of the ST212/213 service manual.
7. PS213 failure (stapler lower limit detection photosensor).
Verify PS213 using 47 mode, input code 77, multi code 03. A LO should appear in display when sensor is not flagged.
Replace PS213 (p/n 540085510).
8. The wire driving pulley (p/n 12AR76510) is damaged.
Check the bottom of the pulley to see if the cut-outs (keyholes) are broken which causes excessive play between the pulley and the wire driving gear (p/n
12AR77020).
Replace the wire driving pulley (p/n 12AR76511) with the new style pulley which has been upgraded with strengthening ribs.
Note: This problem may also cause damage to guide plate (A) p/n 12AR-5040 which pulls the bins to the stapler.
9. M206 (stapler up/down motor) failure. Replace M206 (p/n 460080031).
Description
Background, overtoning, dark copies or poor fill.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Parts replacement has not occurred at the scheduled maintenance intervals. Replacement of the exposure lamp, PTL, all corona wires and filters (every
150K) must be done at the 300K PM .
and developer.
Note: 2028 and 3135 toner cartridges will fit in the 6190 hopper.
3. Incorrect installation of the PTL. The foil coating should be facing down, away from drum.
4. Incorrect PTL installed. For a short period in J anuary 1997, 7490 PTLs were mistakenly shipped in 5370 and 6190 boxes. The correct PTL (5370/6190
style) will have FL12A60BDU/48T16BX printed on the lamp and 25AA83050 stamped on the box. The incorrect (7490 style) PTL will have
FL12SSA-BDU-42/60 printed on the lamp and 25AA83050 stamped on the box. The 7490 lamp will not operate in the 6190 or 5370.
5. Incorrect angle of the sixth mirror. Ensure that the sixth mirror is contacting the adjusting screw and is not binding.
6. Dirty exposure lamp contacts or lamp terminals.
Clean the exposure lamp contacts and the lamp terminals. If they are pitted, replace the lamp (p/n 25AA83011) and the terminals (p/n 25AA-6780).
7. The two (2) main charge corona wires are installed incorrectly.
The corona wires are installed in the end blocks with the wires resting above the positioning tabs. This incorrect installation causes the corona wires to be
excessively close to the drum when the charge unit is installed. The corona wires will then overcharge the drum during the copy process.
Reinstall the corona wires in the end blocks so that the they rest on the outside ends of the first positioning tabs and on the lower tier of the second positioning
tab.
Description
The LCD touchscreen is locked up, inoperable, erratic, or damaged.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Open ICP1 on the operation board. Replace the 5V DC ICP.
2. Poor DCPS1 connections (in particular, 5V DC). Diagnostics and memory cannot be accessed. When the RADF is disconnected, and the copier powered
up, code 60-01 is displayed (this is normal). At this point, the 47 and 25 modes can be accessed. Reseat the DCPS1 connections, the EPROMs on OB1,
and verify proper connections between the operation unit and CB1.
If reseating the connectors does not resolve the problem (5V DC cannot be measured from DCPS1, CN7, pin 6). Replace DCPS1 (p/n 25AA84510).
3. Touch beeper is not ON, this causes key operators to push too hard on the display damaging the membrane (dead spots).
Replace the LCD unit (p/n 25AA87520) and activate the beeper function.
Note: To activate the beeper function:
1. Turn the machine ON while holding the HELP key.
120
6190
2. Select Key click sound.
3. Select ON (and LONG or SHORT response)
4. Turn machine OFF then ON.
4. Backup battery failure (memory board, located on the main CB). Check the battery output with the machine OFF. The output should be at least 3V DC.
Replace the memory board if necessary (p/n 25AA-9100).
5. Blank LCD due to operation panel failure. Erratic operation continues after replacing the LCD component. Replace the operation panel complete (p/n
25AE-7006).
6. Dead spots on the touch membrane. Faulty operation board 1 is not processing the signal received from the touch screen leading to non selection in a
particular LCD area. Replace OB1 (p/n 25AA-9322).
7. Improperly grounded LCD unit can lead to screen lock up (KONICA is displayed). Install a ground wire from the op panel ground to the right side of the
LCD. Replace the LCD unit (p/n 25AA87520) if erratic operation continues.
8. LCD fades out at power up or goes blank during operation after the EPROM's were replaced. Verify that the latest production firmware is installed as a
set as outlined in 5370/6190 Technical Bulletin #29A .
Main CB - 619018-41.0
Main CB - 619019-41.0
Main CB - 619010-17.0
ADF CB - DF30733-23.0
Note: The operation board EPROMs are accessed by lifting up the toner hopper lid, remove the screw sercuring the metal plate. The four OP Board
619022-40.0
619026-40.0
619027-40.0
619028-41.0
9. Loose connectors on the LCD cause a loss of transferred data. Reseat the connectors on the operation panel.
Description
Code 99-01 in idle or when duplexing. ADU rear or side guides are not positioned correctly.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Paper dust, toner and fuser oil residue build up in the stacker unit will cause binding of the ADU rear and side guide plates. Clean the stacker unit
thoroughly, then check the side guide operation using the 47 mode, code 89.
2. Front guide, torque limiter failure. Replace the torque limiter (p/n 25AA52540).
3. The rear guide is moving in too close to the paper due to toner contamination of the torque adjust gear (see explanation in 5370/6190 manual page 2-149).
Replace the torque limiter (p/n 25AA52540) and install the Collar C modification (p/n U141-1040) which is a nylon washer designed to eliminate toner from
contaminating the assembly. This modification is outlined in 5370/5370M/6190 Technical Bulletin #34 .
4. M22 failure (rear/side guide motor). The guide plates do not operate. Replace M22 (p/n 25AA-0261).
5. Faulty operation of DB3. Ensure that all ADU clutches and the torque limiter are in good operational order. If the problem continues to occur, replace DB3
(p/n 25AA-9083) may be functioning improperly. Replace if necessary.
Note: This code is not listed in the jam list in the 5370/6190 service manual. Refer to page 7-18 (25 mode section) in the service manual for additional error
codes.
121
6190M
Description
Site requirements, 6190M.
Solution
Description
PLEASE SELECT CFF/SDF MODE ACCORDING TO ORIGINAL PLACEMENT message at power up, or when an original is placed in the RADF.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Paper dust is covering the CFF original detection sensor (PS60). Clean the photosensor and verify operation using 47 multimode, input code 62, press
P-08-P (the RADF must be closed when testing this photosensor). The state of PS60 is displayed at the top of the LCD. If no paper is present at the sensor,
LO is displayed, and if paper is present at the sensor, HI is displayed.
2. The CFF original detect photosensor (PS60) sensitivity is not adjusted correctly. On the RADF CB, adjust VR4 until LED4 lights, plus three scale divisions.
Check that the LED goes OFF/ON when paper is present/not present.

3. The CFF original detect photosensor (PS60) connector (CN593) is disconnected. Inspect the connector, which is located under the CFF lift plate.
4. The CFF original detect photosensor (PS60) reflector, located on the RADF guide plate (E) (p/n 12AA-4640), is incorrectly positioned or missing.
Reposition or replace the reflector (p/n 12AA46420).
5. The CFF original detect photosensor (PS60) has failed. Replace PS60 (p/n 25QA85511). If necessary, replace the RADF power source wiring harness
(p/n 12WA90050).
Note: CFF mode cannot be disabled.
Description
No power.
Solution
CAUSE: Fuse 2 on the relay board (behind the noise filter) is open, or CN67 on the relay board is not seated correctly.
SOLUTION: Replace the relay board (p/n 50BA-9261) and/or ensure that all connectors are secure.
CAUTION: Isolate power from the copier before working in this area.
Description
ST212 compatibility.
Solution
The ST212, cannot be used on the model 5370M and model 6190M.
If the ST212, is installed on a model 5370M or model 6190M, code 77-78 will displayed on the LCD at power up, due to wiring differences to the bin alignment
arm motor (M205).
Description
J am positions 7 and 8 during copy mode.
Solution
CAUSE: The conveyance roller (C), or regulating belts, in the ADU paper reverse exit unit are worn.
SOLUTION: Replace the conveyance roller (p/n 25AA48190) or all six regulating belts (p/n 50BA48221).
Description
How to identify a 6190M, ST212M, ST213M and DF307M.
Solution
122
6190M
The serial number prefix for a 6190M is 50BE. The serial number prefix for an ST212M is 12WN. The serial number prefix for a ST213M is 12WT. The serial
number prefix for the DF307M is 12WE.
Description
DF307M, jam position 10 or 11.
Solution
CAUSE: The double feed torque limiter spring can become deformed when an operator pulls a misfed original out without releasing the spring tension
handle.
SOLUTION: Reposition the spring within the torque limiter at the next PM or service call per DF307/DF307M Technical Bulletin #6 .
Description
PLEASE SELECT CFF/SDF MODE message at power up.
Solution
CAUSE: Paper dust covers the CFF original detection sensor (PS60). This sensor is located to the right of the platen glass, approximately 3 inches from the
rear.
SOLUTION: Clean the photosensor and verify operation using 47 multimode, input code 62, press P-08-P (the RADF must be closed when testing this
photosensor). The state of PS60 is displayed at the top of the LCD. If no paper is present at the sensor, LO (LOW) is displayed, and if paper is present at the
sensor, HI (HIGH) is displayed. If necessary, replace PS60 (p/n 25QA85511) and/or the RADF power source wiring harness (p/n 12WA90050).
Description
How to program CFF paper sizes.
Solution
6190M CFF set-up programming (no EPROM update required):
1. Access the key operator mode. (power ON, Help).
2. Use the up/down arrows to select switch number 16 Magnification when CFF mode. APS select.
3. Set to "at R/E" (reduction/enlargement).
4. Press previous screen and turn the machine OFF/ON.
5. Set Erasure outside area of original to Area Outside Original Erased.
6. Set CFF original hole erasure to ON or OFF based on customers preference.
To select from standard CFF sizes, access the 25 mode and set software switches:
12-3 to 0 for CFF standard original mode.
The following standard CFF original sizes are available:
12-4 to 0 for 14 7/8x11 (CFF1)
9.5x11 (CFF2)
12x8.5 (CFF3)
12-4 to 1 for 14 7/8x12 (CFF1)
9.5x11 (CFF2)
9.5x12 (CFF3)
Set 12-5 and 12-6 to 0 the copy operation in the sort mode stops when full.
To select non-standard CFF sizes, use the following procedure as an example (14 7/8x8.5).
1. Access the 25 mode and set software switches:
2. Set 12-3 to 1 for CFF non-standard original mode (ON).
3. Set 12-4 to 0 (12x8.5 can be adjusted to accomodate our new size: 147/8x8.5).
4. Press Previous screen.
5. From the 25 mode menu screen, touch the down arrow.
6. Select #14 CFF size setting screen.
7. Press the next setting button four times to display CFF3 original vertical setting (inch) is displayed.
8. Input 149 (14.9 for 14 7/8 inches), then press SET.
9. Press next setting to display the CFF3 holes number setting.
10. Set to 17 hole (from range of 15-19). This selection will set the size to 8.5 inch.
11. Press Previous screen until the 25 mode menu screen is displayed. Power the machine OFF.
Note: In the above example, AMS will reduce the copy to 79% to fit to 8.5x11. This may cut-off some of the original. If this is unacceptable, set the reduction
to 77% to compensate, then store the information using the job memory mode:
1. In idle mode, press the Applications Button, touch CFF, touch CFF3 and touch OK. (flip the ADF exit tray).
2. Press Lens Mode Button, select preset #3 for 77% (APS will magnification.
3. Set other pertinent customer job data. When all job selections are made, press J OB MEMORY to display the J ob Store/Recall Selection Screen.
4. Press J OB STORE. If the listed settings are correct, touch OK to display the J ob Number Selection Screen.
5. Press one of the keys number 1-25. Your selection will be highlighted. Press OK.
6. Enter a job name of up to 6 characters using the J ob Name Registration Screen. Press the OK button to complete the setting and return to the basic menu.
123
6190M
7. Select the job you just programmed using the job memory recall, load your CFF original and verify operation.
Description
Code 56-01 at power up.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. There is a loss of communication between the main CB (CB1) and operation board (OB) because CN47 on CB1 is disconnected.
Reconnect CN47 to CB1.
Note: CN47 is located on the upper right corner of CB1.
2. The ACDB failed.
Replace the ACDB (p/n 25AA-9154).
124
7020
Description
Background, streaks, toner misting, and/or excessive toner build up in the recycler unit.
Solution
CAUSE: Failed toner recycling auger assembly attached to the rear of the drum carriage and/or insufficient sealing of the developing unit causing toner
misting onto the charging corona unit.
SOLUTION: Install the following:
1. Toner Packing Countermeasure Kit (p/n 26NA-K040FOC).
Note: Technical Bulletin 9A indicates that only 4 mylars are to be removed from collect cover/C. This is incorrect, remove ALL mylars from collect cover/C.
2. Charging Corona Soilage Countermeasure Kit 1 (p/n 26NA-K010FOC) and Kit 2 (p/n 26NA-K020FOC).
3. Due to timing changes in M1 (Main motor) it is critical that level 32 System firmware and level 31 Image firmware or higher be installed when performing
this modification.
Notes:
1. Please refer to 7020/7025/7030/7035 Technical bulletin #9 (MODIFICATION KITS) for the complete installation procedures and for the proper parts
ordering procedures. To view this PDF hyperlink, Acrobat* Reader must be installed. Acrobat Reader can be downloaded for free from the Adobe* Web site
at: [[http://www.adobe.com/products/acrobat/readstep2.html| URL http://www.adobe.com/products/acrobat/readstep2.html]]
2. Be sure to reset drum and developer/PM counters when either is replaced.
a. Drum counters can be reset in both 36 mode (8. COUNTER CLEAR) and 25 mode fixed parts counter (4. PARTS COUNTER).
b. When developer is replaced both PM counter [25 mode (2. PM COUNT/CYCLE)] and developer fixed parts counter [25 mode (4. PARTS COUNTER)]
should be reset.
3. To help alleviate unnecessary copy quality problems, instruct customer to pull both the small green corona cleaner and the write unit slit glass cleaner
several times whenever toner is replaced.
CAUTION: The L-detection adjustment must never be performed on used developer. L-detection adjustment must only be performed after developer is
replaced and before any copies are made. Developer will overtone if L-detect is performed more than once on the same developer or if copies are made prior
to performing L-detect on new developer.
4. If black lines or streaking continue after installing Technical bulletin #9 (MODIFICATION KITS), clean or replace the Charge wire (p/n 26NA25060) and
Charging control plate (p/n 26NA25160) as necessary.
Description
NVRAM Troubleshooting Procedure used to identify NVRAM problems.
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
NVRAM trouble codes (C-D3xx codes) can occur at any time. Mostly these codes happen when updating firmware. A NVRAM Data Restore procedure was
announced a few months ago to address these codes:
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *
What this procedure does is take a good image of the NVRAM off the MFP board (created when you performed the NVRAM Data Backup) and restore it to
the NVRAM. There are approximately 30 registers that can be corrupt, so the above procedure may have to be done as much as 30 times.
WARNING : If a corrupt NVRAM is suspected, DO NOT perform the NVRAM Data Backup. This will take the corrupt NVRAM image and back it up to the
MFP board. If this is done, and the NVRAM is replaced, the corrupt data that was just backed up will be transferred to the new NVRAM. If this is the case then
the NVRAM and MFP board will have to be replaced as a set.

Known unrecoverable NVRAM symptoms:
1. Stuck on hour glass screen
2. Incorrect meters
3. When performing the NVRAM restore procedure the codes repeat themselves
Note : One thing that has been noticed is these machines seem to be highly susceptible to voltage sags and spikes. It is HIGHLY recommended to install a
quality power line conditioner on these machines.
Known fixes for various codes:
C-D36E and C-E002 Install Phase 3.01 firmware (H5 or H6 depending on model).

If a corrupt NVRAM is suspected, please try performing a Data Clear. This can be found in the Tech Rep mode.
IMPORTANT : All programmed addresses will be cleared. Please backup the address data using PageScope Web Connect to backup the data before
performing the Data Clear.
If NVRAM replacement is necessary please be aware that the meters may not be transferred and they might be reset to zero. This is unrecoverable and the
correct meters cannot be input.

8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102
Codes C-3C00 through C-3C40 indicate a corrupt BRU
Codes C-3C50 through C-3C90 indicates a problem with the PWB-C board or the scanner to main body cable.

8050/CF5001/bizhub PRO C500
The NVRAM for the C500 cannot be replaced in the field. The only way to correct a corrupt NVRAM is to send the OACB, NVRAM, and PRCB into Konica
Minolta to be reset.
Known defective NVRAM symptoms:
1. Meters or default adjustment values are extremely high.
2. Adjustments do not hold after powering the machine OFF/ON.
125
7020
Note : On the Black and White machines verify that the NVRAM is bad by swapping a good NVRAM from another machine in the same product family. This
will save significant time and expense in getting back the machine in working condition.

bizhub 200/250/350
Common symptoms when NVRAM replacement may be necessary:
1. Machine not going to ready state.
2. Not printing to a host name with DHCP.
3. Not scanning to E-mail.
4. On startup, abort code 0x0000999a.
5. Abort code 0x00f00b00.
6. Not printing.
7. Machine rebooting every few minutes.
8. Screen freezing in KM logo.
9. Keep losing machine settings when power OFF.

bizhub 420/500
Note: First try to flash the machine to the latest firmware before swapping the NVRAM because the firmware fixes many of the following symptoms:
1. Screen freeze in KM logo.
2. Fax unit locking up the copier or not recognized.
3. C-E084 error code.
4. Cannot PING the copier.
5. C-D203 error code.
6. Display resetting to J apanese.
7. Losing network settings after firmware upgrade.
9. Scan to email or FTP.
10. Loss of adjustment data.
11. Total counter is reset.
12. Display TCR adjustment.
13. C-284x error code.

bizhub 600/750
2. Cannot recognize DF.
3. Error code SC2203.

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.
2. Loss of E-mail addresses.
3. Loss of settings.
4. Error code E56-01.

Ordering Procedures :
Call the SSD Hotline at 800-825-5664, to open a Problem Ticket. Go to www.mykonicaminolta.com and select Service tab => Warranty, Repair &
Special Programs => RA Form. Fill out the RA Form.
IMPORTANT NOTE : All requests for NVRAMs must be approved by the SSD Hotline and a problem ticket generated. If a request is received without an
established problem ticket number the request will be denied.

Updates/Status :
Call Logistics at 201-934-5339.
Notes :
a. Refer toattached Bulletin Number 5783 for more detail as well as theattached RA form.
b. To view a PDF, Adobe Readermust be installed. Adobe Readercan be downloaded for free from the Adobeweb site at:
SPECIAL NOTE : Solution contribution by Clinton Marquardt, ESS/SSD and Cesar J imenezand Ed Bellone, Production Print/SSD
Description
DF314, intermittent line(s) on copies from lead-to-trail.
Solution
CAUSE: Paper dust, white out, etc. is being deposited and adhering to the RADF original slit glass (p/n 26NA61131). This will cause a black line to occur, in
a lead-to-trail direction, when copying from the RADF.
SOLUTION: To help minimize this problem, perform the following:
1. Replace the original slit glass (p/n 26NA61131) with the new style 7145 original slit glass (p/n 40LA-6280). The 7145 original slit glass (p/n 40LA-6280)
has a fluorine coating on the surface of the glass to help prevent debris from adhering to the glass. When installing the original slit glass (p/n 40LA-6280),
ensure that the black dot mark is on the right rear side.
2. Thoroughly clean the original slit glass (p/n 26NA61131), located to the left of the original scale plate, with a clean soft cloth dampened slightly with water,
or an anti-static cleaner.
126
7020
3. Apply a couple of drops of Rain-X* and rub into the slit glass, this may reduce the occurrence of foreign debris sticking to the slit glass.
4. Check the RADF height adjustment and adjust as necessary. The procedure can be found on either page E-2 of the DF314 installation instructions or in
the 7020/7025/7030/7035 service manual (3/2001) page 4-88.
a. The DF314 reading roller (p/n 13GL45520) may apply too much pressure to the slit glass if the DF314 height is adjusted too high. This added pressure
might contribute to debris adhering to the slit glass.
b. After performing the height adjustment, it may be beneficial to re-adjust the height positioning screw approximately 1/2 to 3/4 of turn counterclockwise.
The position of the white pointer should slide down to the left of center slightly; this will relieve additional pressure away from the slit glass by the reading
roller.
CAUTION: Adjusting the RADF height too high may cause RADF jamming at the slit glass area or blurred copies.
5. Adjusting the READ POINT ADJ USTMENT, in the 36 mode, may also help to minimize this problem.
a. The READ POINT ADJ USTMENT moves the first mirror to a different home position and consequently a different position under the slit or scan glass.
By moving the read point of the first mirror and adjusting RESTART TIMING, you can effectively move the read point of the scan glass so it is not directly
under the DF314 reading roller. This is the area that appears to be the most susceptible to slit glass contamination.
b. The READ POINT ADJ USTMENT procedure can be found in the 7020/7025/7030/7035 service manual (3/2001) page 4-48.
c. It may be necessary to readjust paper RESTART TIMING for both the main body and the RADF to have the image properly aligned after changing the
READ POINT ADJ USTMENT.
d. Information pertaining to RESTART TIMING PROCEDURES can be found in the 7020/7025/7030/7035 service manual (3/2001) starting on page 4-42.
CAUTION: Excessive adjustment to the READ POINT position will cause copy density to be lighter when copying from the RADF.
Notes: Never use paint solvents, such as benzene or thinners, to clean any portion of the copier.
Description
No power. Display is blank with only the green data light ON.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. System firmware is corrupt; possibly due to a sudden loss or surge of AC power supplied to the copier.
Flash both the system and image firmware. If the 7020 will not allow access to 25 mode, perform the following:
a. Power the copier OFF (SW2 [operation panel] first, then SW1 [left rear]).
b. Prepare the laptop PC or the ICW TOOL for flashing and connect it normally to the 7020.
c. Power the copier ON (SW1 [left rear]) first, then SW2 [operation panel]).
d. Send the system firmware from the laptop PC or the ISW TOOL to the 7020. The green data light will begin blinking.
e. The LCD display will reappear, in the normal ISW flash mode screen, when the system firmware has completed its flash.
f. Flash the image firmware.
Notes:
I. For procedures on how to flash the firmware, refer to 7020 service manual (3/2000) pages 9-1 through 9-36. Currently system firmware is at level 24
and Image firmware is at level 22.
II. It is highly recommended that all 7020's be plugged into a power tamer device (p/n 11515C) for added protection.
2. Failed overall CB. A sudden loss or surge of AC power supplied to the copier may have caused the overall CB to fail.
Replace the overall CB (p/n 26NA-9300).
Notes:
a. It may be necessary to flash the copier firmware because of the possibility that the replacement overall CB may not have the correct firmware level to
match the level of the peripherals firmware. It is also possible that the replacement overall CB may not have any firmware loaded at all.
b. If the replacement overall CB does not have firmware loaded, the 7020 will power up with only the green data light ON. In this case, flash machine in
the same manner as described above.
Description
Auto layout application centers the image from front-to-rear, but not from lead-to-trail.
Solution
SOLUTION: Flash the 7020 with the latest firmware. System control firmware level 25 and Image processing firmware level 23 will resolve this problem.
Note: The 7020 firmware is currently available on the Konica FTP site . Refer to the FTP_ user site.txt file on the FTP site for detailed information
concerning site contents. [[Internal Link for Faxing/Printing FTP site information| RUN V:\text\Wordpad.exe v:\text\CBC009.txt]]. [[Internal Link for
Faxing/Printing FTP_ user site.txt file information| RUN V:\text\Wordpad.exe v:\text\CBC010.txt]].
Description
Scratch lines around the circumference of the drum during setup.
Solution
CAUSE: The transfer guide plate assembly (p/n 26NA-2610) is out of alignment and is contacting the drum. The transfer guide plate assembly is attached to
the transfer side of the T/S corona unit.
SOLUTION: Replace the T/S corona unit (p/n 26NA-2600) and drum (Item #950253).
Notes:
127
7020
1. A procedure/specification is not available to properly adjust the transfer guide plate assembly.
2. Use the standard Konica parts warranty replacement procedure to receive full credit for failed parts.
3. The occurrence of this problem is very low. Approximately 0.1% of machines may be affected, beginning with serial number 26NE00001 through
26NE09434.
Description
FK101, TCR report shows the results, but faxed image is reduced or sometimes will be blank.
Solution
CAUSE: If faxing from the RADF, no image will show on the TCR report because the machine does not use the memory to send. The image being reduced
is the operation of the machine.
SOLUTION: This is normal operation when using quick transmission faxing through the RADF. If image on the TCR is required then set the machine for
memory transmission. To set the machine to memory transmission, perform the following:
1. Press ? (HELP) button.
2. Press Key-Ope button on the touchscreen.
3. Enter key operator passcode, if required.
4. Press FAX button on the touchscreen .
5. Press Tx/Rx mode set on the touchscreen.
6. Press Edit to select Memory Tx.
7. Press Back button twice.
8. Press Return.
Description
DF314, after performing paper size detection adjustment, the original size is still not detected correctly.
Solution
CAUSE: Incorrect resistance of VR301 (size detect VR).
SOLUTION: To verify the output of VR301 (size detect VR), perform the following:
1. Access 47 mode (turn the copier ON, while pressing the 4 and 7 keys) input code 60, press star (*) 09(*),
2. Place 8.5x11 original in the document tray.
3. LCD display should show a value of 217.
4. If unable to show a value of 217, go to the next step. If 217 is displayed in the LCD screen, go to to step 11.
5. Remove the 5 screws located on the bottom of the document tray.
6. Remove the white gear on VR301 (size detect VR).
8. Rotate the black knob on VR301, until a value of 217 is displayed on the LCD screen.
9. Power machine OFF/ON.
10. Perform the original size detection adjustment.
11. Place an original in the document tray. If the size is still incorrect, perform the paper size detection adjustment as follows:
12. Access the 47 mode (turn the copier ON, while pressing the 4 and 7 keys) output code 69.
13. Place 5.5x8.5R original in the document tray.
14. Press Start button.
15. Press the Stop/Clear button.
16. Press Star (*) button.
17. Press 1 to display , and press (*) again.
20. Press Stop/Clear button.
21. Power machine OFF/ON.
Description
DF314, how to perform original size detection adjustment.
Solution
To perform the original size detection adjustment, perform the following:
1. Access the 47 mode (power the copier ON with SW2 - operation panel switch, while pressing the 4 and 7 keys).
2. Enter 6, 9 (display should read ).
3. Place 5.5x8.5R original in the document tray.
5. Press the Stop/Clear button.
6. Press Star (*) key.
7. Press 1* to display .
10. Press Stop/Clear button.
11. Power machine OFF/ON with SW2.
128
7020
Note: The 7020/7025/7030/7035 service manual (3/2001) page 4-79 is incorrect regarding this adjustment.
Step 3 minimum width position is 5.5x8.5R and Step 7 maximum width position is 8.5x11.
Description
FK101, how to program a specific finisher exit tray for fax receptions and another finisher exit tray for copy jobs.
Solution
To program the 7020 to have fax receptions exit into one finisher tray and copy jobs into a different finisher tray, perform the following:
1. From the copier mode, press the HELP (?) button, located to the right of the touchscreen.
2. From the touchscreen, select Key-Ope mode.
3. Enter a Key Operator passcode if applicable.
4. Select [1. System/Copier].
5. Select [2. Copier Initial].
6. Select [5. Output].
7. Select (highlight) the desired exit tray to be used for fax receptions press OK.
8. Press RETURN to return back to the System/Copier setting menu.
9. Press the down arrow to scroll to the next System/Copier setting menu screen.
10. Select [12. Memory SW].
11. Press the arrows, in the lower left corner, and scroll to page 3/3 of the memory switches.
12. Press the down arrow on the right side and highlight J ob Memory Recall.
13. Press EDIT to change the J ob Memory Recall setting to ON.
14. Press RETURN three times to return back to normal copy mode.
15. Press the OUTPUT button located to the right of the touchscreen.
16. Select (highlight) the desired exit tray to be used as the default for copy jobs and press OK.
17. Press the APPLICATION button located to the right of the touchscreen.
18. From the APPLICATION screen, select J OB MEMORY located in the top right corner.
19. Press ENTRY located at the bottom of the job memory screen.
20. A CHECK MODE screen should now appear, verify that these setting are acceptable as copier default and press OK. If settings are not acceptable, return
back to normal copy mode and change settings as desired and then continue programming starting at step 15.
21. From the job memory screen, press the down arrow and scroll to job memory #15.
22. Select (highlight) #15 and press OK.
23. Enter a name of your choice and press OK.
24. Press OK to return back to normal copy mode.
Note: To summarize, programming the 7020 in this manner forces the copier to automatically recall job memory #15 when it initializes and auto-resets. All fax
receptions will ignore job memory recall and only react to what's programmed into Key Operator mode/ copier initial settings.
129
7022
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
130
7022

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
F51-6 code at power up. 24V DC is present at CN22-5 on the PRDB.
Solution
CAUSE: Failed write unit.
SOLUTION: Replace write unit (p/n 26WA-6500).
Description
What Konica Minolta printer drivers will come bundled with MicrosoftWindows Vista and what is the release schedule for Vista-compatible drivers?
Solution
Please refer to the Windows Vista Hardware Compatibility List for Printers & Scanners.
For EFI legacy products that will not receive a Vista-specific driver, refer to the following statement:
"The previous drivers ( System 5/5e-8/8e ) will not work on 64-bit Vista. However, these drivers will work on the 32-bit version of Windows Vistawith
minor issues."
Known issue : Borders and frames around icons and panes within the driver UI may not show up correctly.
Notes :
1. If a previous driver was MicrosoftWindows XP WHQL certified, Microsoftalso honors the digital signature (CAT file) on Windows Vista.
2.The latest print drivers are available via the Konica Minolta Download Selector. Access the Selector from the KMBS public site (
http://www.kmbs.konicaminolta.us ) Support & Drivers tab or from SSD Web Support (CS Expert Support) by clicking on 'Download MSDS, Drivers,
Firmware and more'.
3.The Windows Vista Compatibility Legend can be viewed at: http://kmbs.konicaminolta.us/content/support/vistasupport.html
4. Refer to the attached document for a list of Konica Minolta printer drivers that come bundled with MicrosoftWindows Vista. To viewthe PDF, Adobe
Readermust be installed. Adobe Readercan be downloaded for free from the Adobeweb site at:
SPECIAL NOTE : Solution contribution by Bill Ehmke, ESS/SSD and J im Behrends, Production Print/SSD
Description
F46-8 at power up.
Solution
CAUSE: Laser index error caused by a failed index sensor board.
Description
F35-xx codes.
Solution
131
7022
CAUSE: Failed temperature sensor assembly or the two countermeasures for intermittent fixing unit failure codes (F34, F35, F36) needs to be completed.
SOLUTION: To resolve intermittent fixing unit failure codes, perform the following:
1. Replace the temperature sensor MT plate with the new style temperature sensor MT plate (p/n 26NA53151).
2. Replace the temperature sensor assembly (p/n 26NA88011).
3. Upgrade image control firmware to version 11 (or higher).
Notes:
a. See 7020/7022/7025/7030/7035/7130/7135 Technical Bulletin #13 for details.
b. The latest firmware is available at [[http://www.konicabt.com/konicode/PubBrowser/eproms| URL
http://www.konicabt.com/konicode/PubBrowser/eproms]].
c. To view the PDF, Acrobat* Reader must be installed. Acrobat Reader can be downloaded for free from the Adobe* Web site at:
Description
Code SC46-08 displayed during unit initialization.
Solution
CAUSE: Polygon motor does not spin up at power up. On the control board, there is 24VDC at CN22-5 and the M5 drive signal drops from 5VDC to 0V on
CN22-3 at power up. The write unit has failed.
SOLUTION: Replace the write unit (p/n 26WA-6500).
Description
F26-1 at power up.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The TDS (Toner Density Sensor), in the developing unit, has detected a depletion of toner.
Note : This may have been caused by the customer making an excessive amount of copies while the machine was out of toner. It may also be caused by a
bound toner addition system.
Clean all toner from the toner recycle and toner supply assemblies. Confirm that the gear mesh between the toner supply auger drive gear and toner supply
motor (M4) is flush. If toner supply conveyance is normal and the toner cavity is empty, install a new toner cartridge (Item #950236) and then perform the
following diagnostic mode to replenish the developing unit with toner:
a. Access the 47 mode (power the copier ON while pressing the 4 and 7 keys).
b. Enter output code 54.
c. Press the START button.
Note : Toner will now be added to the developing unit and stop automatically when target level is reached, although it will not run any longer than 3 minutes.
d. Power copier OFF/ON to return to normal copy mode.
Note : Perform the following 25 mode software switch settings to minimize the amount of copies that can be made, prior to copy inhibit, when the ADD
TONER message is displayed:
- Access the 25 mode (hold down the 2 and 5 keys at power ON).
- Select [1] (SOFTWARE SW).
- Using the up and down arrows, scroll to the following software switches and set them as follows:
a. 4-0 set to0
b. 4-1 set to0
c. 4-2 set to0
d. 4-3 set to0
- Power OFF/ON to return to normal copy mode.
Notes :
A. These setting will allow the ADD TONER message to be displayed immediately and only allow 100 copies to be thereafter.
B. Copier inhibit will automatically be released when a new toner cartridge is installed.
SPECIAL NOTE : Solution contribution by J im Wood, KMBS, Tampa.
2. The toner conveyance gear is worn. The toner conveyance gear is driven by the toner supply motor located on the toner supply unit.
Replace the toner conveyance gear (p/n 26NA32680).
SPECIAL NOTE : Solution contribution by Don St. Onge, Workgroup/SSD
Description
Thick line from front-to-rear, 1/4 inch thick and 4 inches long, appearing on first copy out.
Solution
CAUSE: The PCL (Pre Charge Lamp) is coming ON while the machine is at idle, causing a slight charge on the drum.
SOLUTION: Install level 13-CIDO image control firmware which will stabilize the drum potential by making a conditioning rotation before copying the first
page.
Note: This does not apply to the bypass tray.
132
7022
Description
HD107, F87-03 error message.
Solution
CAUSE: Disk rotation control of the hard drive has failed.
SOLUTION: Replace the hard drive (Item #950258) and apply print controller firmware version 5.8.2 or later. The newer software allows the hard drive to
stop spinning during periods when it is not being accessed. Firmware downloaded previous to September 23, 2003 will not have the proper patch for stopping
the hard drive rotation during periods of inactivity.
As an alternative to the HD107, Konica Minolta is offering a 1GB or 2GB compact flash card and PCMCIA adapter for the IP422 or IP423. The 2GB compact
flash card is recommended for most cases, as the 1GB compact flash card may not have enough space if the customer creates large jobs.
1GB compact flash card and PCMCIA adapter (p/n HDCF107-1GB)
2GB compact flash and card PCMCIA adapter (p/n HDCF107-2GB)
Note: The IP (print controller) system code must be upgarded to a minimum version of 5.9.0 to support the use of CF card in place of the HD-107.
Description
Solution
133
7025
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
134
7025

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
F26-1 at power up.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
a. 4-0 set to0
b. 4-1 set to0
c. 4-2 set to0
135
7025
d. 4-3 set to0
Notes :
Description
F10-1 shortly after power up.
Solution
CAUSE: Loss of 5V DC output from the PRDB, due to an open ICP1 on the PRDB.
SOLUTION: To check the state of ICP1, perform the following:
1. Power the copier ON.
2. Using a voltmeter (20V DC range), confirm the 5V DC input to the PRDB at CN21-4 on the PRDB.
3. Check for 5V DC on TP5 of the PRDB, which is located on the right rear corner of the PRDB, slightly to the left of LED1. If 5V DC is NOT present at TP5,
then check for 5V DC on both sides of ICP1, which is located below and slightly to the left of TP5.
4. Replace the PRDB as necessary(p/n 26NA-9022 for the 7020/7025and p/n 26TA-9020 for the 7035).
Note : If ICP1 is OPEN, troubleshoot all 5V DC outputs from the PRDB for a short circuit prior to installing a new PRDB.
As a precaution, when installing the new PRDB initially install CN21 only, power the copier ON and confirm 5V DC at TP5.
For all remaining connectors on the PRDB, the copier should be powered OFF; using SW1 and a single connector should then be attached to the PRDB.
Next, power the copier ON, and confirm the presence of 5V DC at TP5. If the 5V DC at TP5 is lost after connecting a particular connector, then a 5V DC load
associated with that connector is the source of the problem.
Description
Thick line from front-to-rear 1/4 inch thick and 4 inches long, appearing on first copy out.
Solution
page.
Note: This solution does not apply to the bypass tray.
Description
NVRAM/BRU replacement form.
Solution
The online NVRAM/BRU Replacement RA/Claim formis referencedin attached Bulletin Number 5783.
Notes :
1. AN SSD TICKET NUMBER MUST BE ASSIGNED IN ORDER TO PLACEA NVRAM/BRU ORDER ONLINE. All requests for NVRAMs must be approved
by the SSD Hotline and a problem ticket generated. If a request is received without an established problem ticket number, the request will be denied.
2. To view a PDF, Adobe Readermust be installed. Adobe Readercan be downloaded for free from the Adobeweb site at:
SPECIAL NOTE : Solution contribution by Ed Bellone, Production Print/SSD
Description
AUTO TONER SUPPLY message and then a code F26-1.
Solution
CAUSE: The TLD (toner level detect) is continuously switching ON/OFF when checked in the 47, due to a failed TLD sensor.
SOLUTION: To check the output of the TLD perform the following;
1. Access the 47mode (power the copier OFF/ON, while simultaneously holding the 4 and the 7 keys).
2. Enter code 057, then press (*) 001(*). The touchscreen should read <057-001>.
3. The touchscreen should say ON, if toner is present and OFF if toner is not present.
4. If the touchscreen switches from an ON/OFF state, replace the TLD sensor (p/n 40AA88030).
Note : Crossed connectors on toner supply drive motor (M4) andtoner bottle rotation drive (M10) on the 7035 only. The connectors are identical. Running
the AUTO TONER SUPPLY in the 36 mode would give very lean readings of toner in the developer. The motors both work and will not give a code; no toner
will get to the developing unit. A clicking sound will be heard. Since the connectors for the two motors on the toner hopper are identical, it is very easy
toconnect thembackwards.
136
7025
Description
ISW DATA ERROR 41 when attempting to flash the firmware.
Solution
CAUSE: A printer is attached to LPT1 preventing the ISW utility from sending the file to LPT1.
SOLUTION: Remove the printer (or other device) that is attached to LPT1.
Description
Touchscreen keys are not working, or do not select the correct function.
Solution
CAUSE: The touchscreen is out of adjustment.
SOLUTION: To adjust the touchscreen sensitivity, perform the following:
1. Press the [HELP] key.
2. Touch [Key-Ope mode] on the touchscreen.
3. Touch [1. System/copier] on the touchscreen.
4. Touch [10. Touch panel adj] on the touchscreen to display the control panel adjustment screen.
Note: If the touch screen is so far out of adjustment that there is no response when touching #10, the control panel adjustment can be accessed (at this point)
by touching any numeric key on the 10-key pad. Two +(plus signs) should be visible on the screen.
5. Touch the +at the upper right lightly with a touch pen (something with a round tip which is made of resin is recommended as a touchpen). Check the
coordinates displayed in the top line at the top of the screen.
6. Ensure the X coordinate and the Y coordinate displayed in the message area fall within the standard values. The acceptable values are on the second
line. If the values are not within the acceptable parameters, repeat Step 5 until the values are acceptable.
7. Touch the +at the lower left lightly with a touch pen. Repeat the process used for the upper right coordinate until acceptable values are achieved.
8. As verification of a correct adjustment, touch the [CHECK] keys at the upper left and lower right corners. You should hear a beep tone for each one. If a
beep tone is not heard, repeat the adjustment.
9. Press the [START] key after finishing the adjustment.
10. Touch [RETURN] on the touchscreen two times to return to the normal mode and check operation of the touch screen.
Description
Solution
roller.
137
7025
138
7030
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
139
7030

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Thick line from front-to-rear 1/4 inch thick and 4 inches long, appearing on first copy out.
Solution
page.
Note: This does not apply to the bypass tray.
Description
Solution
roller.
140
7030
Description
DB410, J 16 and noise when feeding.
Solution
CAUSE: Disengagement of the paper conveyance roller drive gear (p/n 13HA77060) and idler gear (p/n 13HA77050) during paper feed operation.
SOLUTION: There is a modification available (see DB410 Technical Bulletin #1 ) for the DB410 drive unit that provides support for the idler shaft to prevent
the idler shaft from flexing during feed operation.
Notes
1. These parts were installed on the DB410 during production beginning with serial number 13NF15878.
Description
FS107, F77-5 while copying and/or during finisher initialization intermittently.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. A bind in either the paper pressure and/or the shutter plate drive systems, both are driven by M707 (Paper pressure motor). Lubricate all the drive gears to
the paper pressure and shutter plate drive systems with Plas Guard*.
2. The metal bracket that supports M707 may be positioned on an angle causing a bind to the drive gears. Loosen the 2 screws that connect this bracket to
the conveyance casing, ensure the bracket is straight and then retighten the screws.
3. Remove and clean the Rocking gear A (p/n 13GQ77090), this is a one-way gear that, if slipping, would cause a loss of drive to the pressure cam (p/n
13GQ45410).
4. Inspect and address any possible binds to the conveyance rocking plate (p/n 13GQ45050).
5. Check and adjust, if necessary, the position of the spring mount plate (p/n 13GQ45440). This plate should normally be positioned with single scribe line
side of the plate in line with thicker of the 2 plastic mounting posts.
6. If problem persists replace M707 (p/n 13GQ80051).
Note:
1. Please ensure that the latest level firmware is installed into the 7030 and FS107. As of 9/10/01, the 7030 system is level 32, Image is level 31 and FS107
is at level 21.
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
No power, display is blank with only the green data light ON.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
141
7030
d. Send the system firmware from the laptop PC or the ISW TOOL to the 7030. The green data light will begin blinking.
Notes:
I. For procedures on how to flash the firmware, refer to 7020 service manual (3/2000) pages 9-1 through 9-36. Currently system firmware is at level 24
and Image firmware is at level 22.
II. It is highly recommended that all 7030's be plugged into a power tamer device (p/n 11515C) for added protection.
2. Failed overall CB. A sudden loss or surge of AC power supplied to the copier may have caused the overall CB to fail.
Replace the overall CB (p/n 26PA-9300).
Notes:
a. It may be necessary to flash the copier firmware because of the possibility that the replacement overall CB may not have the correct firmware level to
match the level of the peripherals firmware. It is also possible that the replacement overall CB may not have any firmware loaded at all.
b. If the replacement overall CB does not have firmware loaded, the 7030 will power up with only the green data light ON. In this case, flash machine in
the same manner as described above.
Description
Solution
Description
Intermittently, the image is not printed except a 30mm width in the center of the page.
Solution
CAUSE: This problem has been identified with image firmware level 31 (and earlier).
SOLUTION: Upgrade image firmware to latest level (level 32 or higher).
Change dipswitch 6-3 to a 1.
Note: The latest firmware is available at [[http://www.konicabt.com/konicode/PubBrowser/eproms| URL
Description
F35-3 during warm-up.
Solution
142
7030
CAUSE: Fuser heat roller temperature sensors (TH1 and TH2) are not contacting the upper roller. TH1 and TH2 must contact the heat roller, an air gap
between the sensors and the heat roller will adversely effect how quickly the sensors can detect heat.
SOLUTION: Reform TH1 and TH2 to ensure that they make contact with the fuser heat roller.
Note: Access to TH1 and TH2 is possible by removing the heat roller cleaning web assembly.
143
7033
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
144
7033

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Intermittent FRONT DOOR OPEN message, or copies are very light, have lines, unreadable characters, gray background or a portion of the image is missing.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The door switch (MS1) actuator on some machines is too short to actuate the door switch.
A modified actuator (p/n 55GA12240) is available to correct this problem. It has been installed during production beginning with serial number 55QE04588.
Refer to 7033/7040 Technical Bulletin #8 for additional information.
Note: To prevent future problems, replace MS1 (p/n 40AA85010) when replacing the actuator.
2. The front door switch (MS1) has failed.
Check the operation of the front door switch by performing the following:
a. Power the copier ON.
b. Monitor the voltage at CN82-5 (gray wire) to ground, and CN82-6 (white wire) to ground.
Note: CN82 is a 6-pin connector located on the rear upper right corner of the copier approximately 1.5 inches below the main power switch (SW1).
c. A steady 24V DC should be observed at both CN82-5 and CN82-6. Any fluctuation in the observed voltage would be indicative of internal arcing within
the front door switch.
d. Replace the front door switch (p/n 40AA85010) as necessary.
Note: As a temporary measure, the switch contacts can be carefully cleaned.
Description
How to upgrade the 7033 system and image FlashROMs using a computer and the Windows* 9x ISW Trns utility.
Solution
The 7033 main body does not have EPROMs installed on the main CB or image processing board. The machine is equipped with FlashROMs which are
updated via a computer or using the ISW tool.
MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS:
Windows 95 (version B recommended), Internet Explorer* 3.x or higher, or Windows 98 (Internet Explorer 4.0 included), Pentium* 100Mhz, parallel printer
cable, standard parallel port settings (other than ECP and EPP modes).
Note: Verify the parallel port setting and make changes utilizing the CMOS Setup Utility
(refer to your motherboard manual for instructions). Parallel port verification (but not changes) is made by right-clicking on My Computer click on Properties
click on Device Manager tab click on the [+] symbol to open Ports double-click on Printer Port (LPT1) to view the type of port [Manufacturer:].
FlashROM FILES:
The latest FlashROM files can be acquired via the Konica website (www.konicabt.com) under [Eproms For Low Volume Copiers] located in the NSSG Web
Support area.
Website file designations:
ISWTRNSV332e.EXE (PC ISW utility file)
Contents of 7033 FlashROM files (7033-m46zr.exe version 46.0 PC files and 7033-i26r.exe version 26 Image):
55pai26.001 (image processing ROM)
55qec46.001 (system CB ROM)
145
7033
Refer to the 7033-40-46.pdf file for level 46 enhancements on the Konica NSSG website.
PERIPHERALS:
FS105, EPROM version 18.0 (p/n FS105A04-18.0); and DF311, EPROM version 16.0 (p/n DF311303-16.0) are available on the website in the EPROMS
section (Eproms for Accessories). The file name for the FS105 is FS105-18.EXE, and the file name for the DF311 is DF311-16.EXE. The FS105 EPROM
enhancement is: correction of stapling mis-alignment A4R size paper. The DF311 enhancement is: availability for odd-sized originals.
DOWNLOADING AND INSTALLING THE UTILITY:
Use the following procedure to download and install the ISW Utility and flash ROM files on the hard drive of the computer:
1. Obtain the ISW Trns utility file from the Konica web site. To download the ISW Trns utility program, perform the following:
b. In the left-hand menu, click on SUPPORT.
c. Under [4 Technical], click on SECURED for NSSG Web Support.
d. A disclaimer is offered. Read it and click on [I Accept] to access the NSSG Web login page.
e. Enter a User ID and Password and click [Login].
f. Click on the [Download EPROMS] link in the left margin.
g. Click on [EPROMs for Accessories].
h. Click on the [List Files] button.
i. Select ISWTRNSV332e.exe link and follow download instructions.
2. While at Konica's web site, download the 7033 firmware. To download the firmware programs, perform the following:
a. Click on the back arrow to return to the previous page.
b. Click on [Eproms for Low Volume Copiers].
c. Click on the [List Files] button.
d. Click on the latest firmware files link(s) to download, and follow prompted instructions.
3. Install the ISW application program onto a PC or laptop .
4. Set up the ISW Trns utility by following the setup directions.
5. Set up the folders for the BIN files.
6. When the ISW Trns utility main window pops up, the BIN file data can be selected, verified, and sent to the machine for flashing the firmware.
Notes:
a. There are two types of data sources - ORIGINAL (batch data) and DIVIDED (divided data). The 7033 utilizes the DIVIDED selection for the Control
BIN files and the ORIGINAL selection for the Image files.
b. The Country selection must be KBT for the USA.
COPYING TRANSFER DATA (UPDATE DATA)
Run the ISW Trns program to copy transfer data (update data) to the PC.
CONNECTING
Connect a parallel interface cable to the copier.
CAUTION: If a parallel data transfer is to be executed with the ISW Trns program, the ECP mode setting of the PC parallel port should be cleared. ISW Trns
does not support parallel data transfers. If a parallel data transfer is launched with the PC set in ECP mode, the transfer could be aborted by an error
occurring in between. It would be necessary, therefore, to
disable ECP mode before run ISW Trns on a PC with the ECP setting.
UPDATING
Update the ROM data on each control board using ISW Trns.
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
146
7033
Description
The Weekly Timer is not working correctly.
Solution
CAUSE: Firmware bug with system firmware level 42. The Weekly Timer calendar, for the Month of August, is incorrect. The calendar is programmed with
August starting on a Monday instead of Tuesday. This incorrectly shifted calendar affects the on/off setting for the days of the week.
SOLUTION: Flash system firmware to level 42F. This file is for the correction of the weekly timer problem. The file names are 7033-42FP.EXE for PC files
and 7033-42FR.EXE for EPROMs for the ISW tool. The files are located on the Konica Web site in the EPROM for low volume copier section.
Description
Solution
CAUSE: The write unit index sensor is out of adjustment or has failed.
SOLUTION: There is no field adjustment or part number for this sensor. Replace the write unit.
If the 7033 serial number is above 55QE06364, order the current style write unit (p/n 55HA-6500) which is only compatible with the current style polygon drive
board (p/n 55HA-9250).
Notes:
1. If ONLY a write unit cover needs replacing, order the current style (p/n 55GA65021) for machines above serial number 55QE06364.
2. If the 7033 serial number is below 55QE06365, order the original style write unit (p/n 55GA-6504) which is only compatible with the original style polygon
drive board (p/n 55GA-9250). If ONLY a write unit cover needs replacing, order the original style (p/n 55GA65020).
Description
How to program platen APS for small size originals.
Solution
FlashROM version 37 is the minimum level to allow small sized original (business card size) detection to default to 5.5x8.5 or 8.5x11 size paper based on
software dipswitch 7-3 and 7-4 setting (see below). All ROMs must meet minimum levels listed below.
FLASH ROM FILES:
The latest flash ROM files can be acquired via the Konica website (www.konicabt.com) under [EPROMs For Low Volume Copiers] located in the NSSG Web
Support area.
ISWBAT2A.EXE (PC ISW utility file)
Contents of 7040-37P.EXE (version 37.0 PC files):
55GAI25.001 (image processing ROM)
55HEC37.001 (system CB ROM)
Refer to the 7033-7040.PDF file for level 37 enhancements on the Konica FTP site . Consult the FTP site index for additional information.

PERIPHERALS:
To program platen APS, perform the following:
1. Access the 25 mode (power the machine ON while holding down the 2 and 5 keys).
2. Press [1: Software SW].
3. Scroll to, and set software dipswitch 21-3 to a 1.
4. Scroll to, and set software dipswitch 7-3 and 7-4 as the follows:
a. Set DIPSW No. 7-3 and 7-4 to a 0 for 5.5x8.5R default.
b. Set DIPSW No. 7-3 to a 1 and 7-4 to a 0 for 8.5x11default.
Note: Platen APS will detect 5.5x8.5 and 5.5x8.5R originals. The default to 8.5x11 only applies to small originals the approximate size of a business card. To
have platen APS select 8.5x11 with either 5.5x8.5 or 5.5x8.5R, position original approximately 30 mm away from the scale plate.
Description
FS105, STAPLER FAILURE message at power up.
Solution
CAUSE: MS804 has failed. MS804 supplies 24V DC from CN703-3 to CN703-1 on the finisher CB.
147
7033
SOLUTION: Replace MS804 (p/n 12QR86010).
Description
How to program platen default to a specific paper size (APS and AMS defeated). Selection when the ADF is lifted.
Solution
To program the machine to default to a specific paper size and cause APS and AMS to turn OFF when the RADF is lifted:
1. Access the key operator mode (press and hold the help key while turning the machine ON).
2. Press the down arrow key on the touch screen
3. Select 13: Memory SW.
4. Scroll to Platen APS using the arrow keys located on the right side of the display.
5. Select EDIT to turn the feature OFF.
6. Press the down arrow on the bottom of the screen.
7. Scroll to Platen AMS using the arrow keys located on the right side of the display.
9. Turn the machine OFF.
10. Access the 25 mode (turn the machine while holding down the 2 and 5 keys).
11. Press 1: Software SW.
12. Scroll to, and set the software dipswitches as the follows:
7-2 to 0 (platen APS switching to 8.5x11)
7-3 to 1 (platen - small size originals)
10-4 to 1 (1:1 magnification selection when APS released)
13. Next, set software dipswitches 8-4, 8-5 and 8-6 to select the tray with the paper size you desire. Use the matrix below to determine which values to input
to select a specific tray:
8-4 to 0 8-5 to 1 8-6 to 0: Tray 1
8-4 to 1 8-5 to 1 8-6 to 0: Tray 2
8-4 to 0 8-5 to 0 8-6 to 1: Tray 3
8-4 to 1 8-5 to 0 8-6 to 1: Tray 4
Description
No power. Display is blank with only the green data light ON.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
d. Send the system firmware from the laptop PC or the ICW TOOL to the 7040. The green data light will begin blinking.
Notes:
1. For procedures on how to flash the firmware, refer to 7040/7033 [Technical Bulletin #7]. Currently main CB system firmware is at level 37 and Image
firmware is at level 25.
2. It is highly recommended that all 7040's and 7033's be plugged into a power tamer device (p/n 11515C) for added protection.
2. Failed main CB. A sudden loss or surge of AC power supplied to the copier may have caused the main CB failure.
Replace the main CB (p/n 55GA-9300).
Notes:
a. It may be necessary to flash the copier firmware because of the possibility that the replacement main CB may not have the correct system firmware level
to match the level of the image firmware on the Image Processing board. For procedures on how to flash the firmware, refer to 7040/7033 [Technical Bulletin
#7]. Currently main CB system firmware is at level 37 and Image firmware is at level 25.
b. It is highly recommended that all 7040's and 7033's be plugged into a power tamer device (p/n 11515C) for added protection.
148
7035
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
149
7035

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
DF314, important firmware version information.
Solution
ADF serial number, DF Control Board, firmware version and model compatibility matrix .
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
F26-1 at power up.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
150
7035
a. 4-0 set to0
b. 4-1 set to0
c. 4-2 set to0
d. 4-3 set to0
Notes :
Description
F10-1 shortly after power up.
Solution
CAUSE: Loss of 5V DC output from the PRDB, due to an open ICP1 on the PRDB.
SOLUTION: To check the state of ICP1, perform the following:
1. Power the copier ON.
2. Using a voltmeter (20V DC range), confirm the 5V DC input to the PRDB at CN21-4 on the PRDB.
3. Check for 5V DC on TP5 of the PRDB, which is located on the right rear corner of the PRDB, slightly to the left of LED1. If 5V DC is NOT present at TP5,
then check for 5V DC on both sides of ICP1, which is located below and slightly to the left of TP5.
4. Replace the PRDB as necessary(p/n 26NA-9022 for the 7020/7025and p/n 26TA-9020 for the 7035).
Note : If ICP1 is OPEN, troubleshoot all 5V DC outputs from the PRDB for a short circuit prior to installing a new PRDB.
As a precaution, when installing the new PRDB initially install CN21 only, power the copier ON and confirm 5V DC at TP5.
For all remaining connectors on the PRDB, the copier should be powered OFF; using SW1 and a single connector should then be attached to the PRDB.
Next, power the copier ON, and confirm the presence of 5V DC at TP5. If the 5V DC at TP5 is lost after connecting a particular connector, then a 5V DC load
associated with that connector is the source of the problem.
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Intermittent jamming, popping noises, and premature wear of the paper feed gears.
Solution
CAUSE: Loose or bent shaft on the (upper tray) driving auxiliary panel/r assembly (item A on page 16 of the 7035 parts book) or (lower tray) driving auxiliary
panel L/C assembly (item A page 18 of the 7035 parts book).
SOLUTION: Replace the (upper tray) driving auxiliary panel/r assembly (p/n 26NA-1030) and any worn paper feed gears or (lower tray) driving auxiliary panel
L/C assembly (p/n 26NA-1040) and any worn paper feed gears.
Description
151
7035
Solution
receptions will ignore job memory recall and only react to what's programmed into Key Operator mode/copier initial settings.
Description
Background, streaks, toner misting, and/or excessive toner build up in the recycler unit.
Solution
CAUSE: Failed toner recycling auger assembly attached to the rear of the drum carriage and/or insufficient sealing of the developing unit causing toner
misting onto the charging corona unit.
SOLUTION: Install the following:
1. Toner Packing Countermeasure Kit (p/n 26NA-K040FOC).
NOTE: Technical Bulletin 9A indicates that only 4 mylars are to be removed from collect cover/C. This is incorrect, remove ALL mylars from collect cover/C.
2. Charging Corona Soilage Countermeasure Kit 1 (p/n 26NA-K010FOC) and Kit 2 (p/n 26NA-K020FOC).
3. Due to timing changes in M1 (Main motor) it is critical that level 32 System firmware and level 17 Image firmware or higher be installed when performing
this modification
Notes:
1. Please refer to 7020/7025/7030/7035 Technical bulletin #9 (MODIFICATION KITS) for the complete installation procedures and for the proper parts
ordering procedures. To view this PDF hyperlink, Acrobat* Reader must be installed. Acrobat Reader can be downloaded for free from the Adobe* Web site
at: [[http://www.adobe.com/products/acrobat/readstep2.html| URL http://www.adobe.com/products/acrobat/readstep2.html]]
2. Be sure to reset drum and developer/PM counters when either is replaced.
a. Drum counters can be reset in both 36 mode (8. COUNTER CLEAR) and 25 mode fixed parts counter (4. PARTS COUNTER).
b. When developer is replaced both PM counter [25 mode (2. PM COUNT/CYCLE)] and developer fixed parts counter [25 mode (4. PARTS COUNTER)]
should be reset.
3. To help alleviate unnecessary copy quality problems, instruct customer to pull both the small green corona cleaner and the write unit slit glass cleaner
several times whenever toner is replaced.
CAUTION: The L-detection adjustment must never be performed on used developer. L-detection adjustment must only be performed after developer is
replaced and before any copies are made. Developer will overtone if L-detect is performed more than once on the same developer or if copies are made prior
to performing L-detect on new developer.
4. If black lines or streaking continue after installing Technical bulletin #9 (MODIFICATION KITS), clean or replace the Charge wire (p/n 26NA25060) and
Charging control plate (p/n 26NA25160) as necessary.
Description
Solution
152
7035
153
7040
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
154
7040

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The write unit index sensor is out of adjustment or has failed.
There is no field adjustment or part number for this sensor. Replace the write unit. If the 7040 serial number is above 55HE08835, order the current style
write unit (p/n 55HA-6500) which is only compatible with the current style polygon drive board (p/n 55HA-9250).
Notes:
a If ONLY a write unit cover needs replacing, order the current style (p/n 55GA65021) for machines above serial number 55HE08835.
b. If the 7040 serial number is below 55HE08836, order the original style write unit (p/n 55GA-6504) which is only compatible with the original style polygon
drive board (p/n 55GA-9250). If ONLY a write unit cover needs replacing, order the original style (p/n 55GA65020).
2. Loose connectors on the write unit.
Reseat all connectors on the write unit.
Description
Light copies. Toner fill is insufficient.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. When copying using the ADF in AES mode, lighter density may occur due to the process used to recognize the differences between light and dark on the
original.
To improve toner fill, install minimum of level 22.0 (system) and 20.0 (image processing) FlashROMs. These ROMs improve density by altering the light/dark
recognition process when using the ADF in the AES mode.
To flash the 7040 ROMs, use the Microsoft* Windows flash procedure.
The latest FlashROMs can be downloaded from the Konica FTP site .
Notes:
a. DF311 EPROM must be a version 16.0 or higher prior to flashing the latest level into the main body. This EPROM can be downloaded from the Konica
FTP site .
b. This EPROM can not be flashed into the DF311 like the main body. It must be removed from the DF311 and rewritten or replaced with the latest
version.
c. The density shift setting can also be changed using the P mode to achieve the desired copy quality:
I. With the machine in the idle mode, hold down P and press the 5 key.
II. Press the start/print key.
III. The density shift setting will be displayed. Change this value to achieve an acceptable density fill. A setting of 0 is darkest.
IV. Press stop/clear to return to the basic screen.
2. CN49 on HV2, which provides the 24V DC power supply for HV2 and also communicates T/S corona control and shift signals, is not properly seated.
To check CN49 on HV2, perform the following:
b. Remove CN49 from HV2.
155
7040
c. Ensure that all the pins for CN49 on HV2 are straight and properly aligned. Then inspect CN49 on the wiring harness. Ensure that all the wires are
properly attached to the connector.
d. Reseat CN49 on HV2. Remove any tie wraps, which may restrict the length of the wire harness and cause CN49 on HV2 to become dislodged.
3. Toner motor (M11) failed.
To check M11, perform the following:
a. Open the front door and remove the toner motor cover (p/n 55GA32030).
b. Access the 47 mode (power the machine OFF, then, while holding down on the 4 and 7 keys, power the machine ON), output code 55.
c. Verify that the toner motor comes ON. If M11 does not come ON, replace the motor (p/n 55GA-3280).
d. Power the machine OFF/ON to exit the 47 mode.
Description
DF311, when an odd-size original is fed through the RADF, a portion of the image is deleted.
Solution
CAUSE: The RADF APS is unable to correctly detect odd-size scanned originals. The document feeder processes odd-size originals to the closest standard
size. A FlashROM upgrade is required.
SOLUTION: Upgrade FlashROMs to minimum level 37 (system), level 25 (image), DF311 level 16 and FS105 level 18. The latest firmware provides the
RADF ability to detect odd-sized originals.
Note: This function is enabled/disabled (ON/OFF) by a Key Operator Mode memory switch setting for RADF odd-sized original (last memory switch screen,
last item).
Note: Connect to the FTP site to download the firmware.
Description
How to upgrade the 7040 system and image FlashROMs using a computer and the Windows* 9x ISW Trns utility.
Solution
The 7040 main body does not have EPROMs installed on the main CB or image processing board. The machine is equipped with FlashROMs which are
updated via a computer/laptop or using the ISW tool.
MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS:
Windows 95 (version B recommended), Internet Explorer* 3.x or higher, or Windows 98 (Internet Explorer 4.0 included), Pentium* 100Mhz, parallel printer
cable, standard parallel port settings (other than ECP and EPP modes).
Note: Verify the parallel port setting and make any changes utilizing the CMOS Setup Utility (refer to your motherboard manual for instructions). Parallel port
verification (but not changes) is made by right-clicking on My Computer click on Properties click on Device Manager tab click on the [+] symbol to open
Ports double-click on Printer Port (LPT1) to view the type of port [Manufacturer:].
FlashROM FILES:
The latest FlashROM files can be acquired via the Konica website (www.konicabt.com) under [Eproms For Low Volume Copiers] located in the NSSG Web
Support area.
ISWTRNSV332e.EXE (PC ISW utility file)
Contents of 7040 FlashROM files (7040-m46zr.exe version 46.0 PC files and 7040-i26r.exe version 26 Image):
55gai26.001 (image processing ROM)
55hec46.001 (system CB ROM)
Refer to the 7033-40-46.pdf file for level 46 enhancements on the Konica NSSG website.

PERIPHERALS:
DOWNLOADING AND INSTALLING THE UTILITY:
Use the following procedure to download and install the ISW Trns Utility and FlashROM files on the hard drive of the computer:
1. Obtain the ISW Trns utility file from the Konica web site. To download the ISW Trns utility program, perform the following:
b. In the left-hand menu, click on SUPPORT.
c. Under [4 Technical], click on SECURED for NSSG Web Support.
d. A disclaimer is offered. Read it and click on [I Accept] to access the NSSG Web login page.
e. Enter a User ID and Password and click [Login].
f. Click on the [Download EPROMs] link in the left margin.
g. Click on [EPROMs for Accessories].
156
7040
h. Click on the [List Files] button.
i. Select ISWTRNSV332e.exe link and follow download instructions.
2. While at Konica's web site, download the 7040 firmware. To download the firmware programs, perform the following:
a. Click on the back arrow to return to the previous page.
b. Click on [Eproms for Low Volume Copiers].
c. Click on the [List Files] button.
d. Click on the latest firmware files link(s) to download, and follow prompted instructions.
Notes:
a. There are two types of data sources - ORIGINAL (batch data) and DIVIDED (divided data). The 7040 utilizes the DIVIDED selection for the Control
BIN files and the ORIGINAL selection for the Image files.
CONNECTING
Connect a parallel interface cable to the copier.
occurring in between. It would be necessary, therefore, to
disable ECP mode before run ISW Trns on a PC with the ECP setting.
UPDATING
Description
How to program platen APS for small size originals.
Solution
FlashROM version 37 is the minimum level to allow small sized original (business card size) detection to default to 5.5x8.5 or 8.5x11 size paper based on
software dipswitch 7-3 and 7-4 setting (see below). All ROMs must meet minimum levels listed below.
FlashROM FILES:
The latest FlashROM files can be downloaded from the FTP site .
PERIPHERALS:
FS105, EPROM version 18.0 . and DF311, EPROM version 16.0 are also available on the FTP site. The FS105 EPROM enhancement is: correction of
stapling mis-alignment A4R size paper. The DF311 enhancement is: availability for odd-sized originals.
To program platen APS, perform the following:
2. Press [1: Software SW].
3. Scroll to, and set software dipswitch 21-3 to a 1.
4. Scroll to, and set software dipswitch 7-3 and 7-4 as the follows:
a. Set DIPSW No. 7-3 and 7-4 to a 0 for 5.5x8.5R default.
b. Set DIPSW No. 7-3 to a 1 and 7-4 to a 0 for 8.5x11default.
Note: Platen APS will detect 5.5x8.5 and 5.5x8.5R originals. The default to 8.5x11 only applies to small originals the approximate size of a business card. To
have platen APS select 8.5x11 with either 5.5x8.5 or 5.5x8.5R, position original approximately 30 mm away from the scale plate.
Description
Intermittent FRONT DOOR OPEN message, or copies are very light, have lines, unreadable characters, gray background or a portion of the image is missing.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The door switch (MS1) actuator on some machines is too short to actuate the door switch.
A new actuator (p/n 55GA12240) is available to correct this problem. It has been installed during production beginning with serial number 55HE05302. Refer
to 7033/7040 Technical Bulletin #8 for additional information.
Note: To prevent future problems, replace MS1 (p/n 40AA85010) when replacing the actuator.
2. The front door switch (MS1) has failed.
Check the operation of the front door switch by performing the following:
157
7040
a. Power the copier ON.
b. Monitor the voltage at CN82-5 (gray wire) to ground, and CN82-6 (white wire) to ground.
Note: CN82 is a 6-pin connector located on the rear upper right corner of the copier approximately 1.5 inches below the main power switch (SW1).
c. A steady 24V DC should be observed at both CN82-5 and CN82-6. Any fluctuation in the observed voltage would be indicative of internal arcing within
the front door switch.
d. Replace the front door switch (p/n 40AA85010) as necessary.
Note: As a temporary measure, the switch contacts can be carefully cleaned.
Description
How to program platen default to a specific paper size (APS and AMS defeated). Selection when the ADF is lifted.
Solution
To program the machine to default to a specific paper size and cause APS and AMS to turn OFF when the RADF is lifted:
1. Access the key operator mode (press and hold the help key while powering the machine ON).
2. Press the down arrow key on the touchscreen
3. Select 13: Memory SW.
4. Scroll to Platen APS using the arrow keys located on the right side of the display.
6. Press the down arrow on the bottom of the screen.
7. Scroll to Platen AMS using the arrow keys located on the right side of the display.
8. Select EDIT to disable the feature (OFF).
11. Press 1: Software SW.
12. Scroll to, and set the software dipswitches as the follows:
7-1 to 1 (selection of auto restart when paper is replenished)
7-2 to 0 (platen APS switching to 8.5x11)
10-4 to 1 (1:1 magnification selection when APS released)
13. Next, set software dipswitches 8-4, 8-5 and 8-6 to select the tray with the paper size you desire. Use the matrix below to determine which values to input
to select a specific tray:
8-4 to 0 8-5 to 1 8-6 to 0: Tray 1
8-4 to 1 8-5 to 1 8-6 to 0: Tray 2
8-4 to 0 8-5 to 0 8-6 to 1: Tray 3
8-4 to 1 8-5 to 0 8-6 to 1: Tray 4
Description
Solution
The machine is equipped from the factory with 16MB of SIMM memory on the main CB (located beneath the platen glass under the lens cover) which is
upgradeable to 80MB. MU-103 memory modules (32MB, SIMM) can be ordered using PCUA 950781. Proper performance is guaranteed ONLY with Konica
Specified SIMM memory modules. Memory configuration and specifications are very complicated. As a result, purchase of memory from a vendor may
result in the wrong SIMM, even though the product is high quality.
The following specifications are guidelines:
1. Konica 32MB SIMM modules (PCUA 950781) are available at 60 or 70ns, with non-parity. These modules have tin plated contacts. Some 60ns SIMMs
are provided. The 60ns memory can be used in combination with 70ns, providing a 70ns SIMM is installed in bank 0 (first slot).
2. The original 16MB SIMM in the E-RDH is GOLD plated. The E-RDH does not require parity memory.
3. EDO (Extended Data Output) must not be used.
4. After installation of any memory, the memory check procedure should be performed:
a. Access the 47 mode, output code 198, and press START/PRINT (memory check starts; it takes approximately 5 minutes to complete). Do not press
START/PRINT again.
b. The output value according to the amount of expanded memory is displayed following [OUT:] on the LCD.
Expanded Memory : Output Value
0 MB 9994
16MB 9995
32MB 9996
48MB 9997
64MB OK
This check is used only to verify SIMM condition - not the E-RDH board, except to determine its SIMM access function. A maximum of 4 SIMMs can be
mounted.
c. If any SIMM fails, [Memory Error] displays, and each SIMM must be checked to determine which is failed.
Volatile Memory Guarantee Statement:
The Konica 7040 uses an E-RDH (Electronic Recirculating Document Handler). This E-RDH stores each job in memory prior to printing. The standard E-RDH
configuration is 16MB of memory. The memory module used to achieve this is the 72-pin SIMM (Single Inline Memory Module) type. This memory is volatile
(i.e., all memory addresses on a module of this type are reset whenever power is removed).
158
7040
Optional configurations for the E-RDH allow for memory to be increased above the standard 16MB configuration. This is done by adding other modules of the
same type only, thus an optional memory configuration would also be volatile.
The process of powering the Konica 7040 off via the main power switch on the lower left corner of the exit side of the machine removes power from the
E-RDH, thus any information previously stored will be impossible to retrieve when the main power switch is turned ON.
Description
FS105, staples are not advancing, resulting in no stapled copies.
Solution
CAUSE: The drive gear on the end of the staple conveyance roller (internal parts for the stapler are not available) is broken. After being in stock for long
time, the sheet of staples attach or 'stick' to the staple feed roller. This places excessive load torque on the drive during initial rotation, causing the ratchet
gear to break.
SOLUTION: If the machine is under warranty, replace the stapler unit (p/n 120H50400) as a warranty item. If the warranty is expired a new stapler unit must
be purchased. As a preventative measure at setup, or after long storage time, remove the staple cartridges for approximately 10 seconds, then reinstall.
This allows the staple sheet to separate from the staple feed roller. It is recommended that the stapler cartridges be removed and stored in the finisher if it is
to be stored for an extended period of time.
For internal use only: stapler unit failures
Note: If you have equipment experiencing these symptoms, please submit a new problem through NSSG Web Support including serial number and meter
reading. These submissions will allow proper tracking of field impact.
159
7045
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
160
7045

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Intermittently, a one inch gray background band in the front-to-rear direction is present on the lead edge of a copy produced after the machine has sat idle for
30 or more minutes.
Solution
CAUSE: Use of non - Konica Minolta drum.
SOLUTION: Replace the drum with an authentic Konica Minolta drum.
Description
Intermittent E56-01 at power up.
Solution
CAUSE: Loss of communication from the image control board (ICB) to the main CB.

SOLUTION: Separate the ICB from the main CB and inspect the connection point (CN10) for any obstruction or damage. Reseat the ICB and verify
operation. If problem persists, replace the ICB (p/n 55YA-9020).
Description
Intermittent J 16 when copying from the platen glass or document feeder.
Solution
CAUSE: Incorrect Software SW setting.
Note: While copying from the glass, when touching the print button and L1 is performing APS the paper will prematurely feed causing a J 16.
SOLUTION: To change software SW setting perform the following;
1. Access the 25 mode (power machine OFF/ON while pressing the 2 and 5 keys).
2. Memory setting mode will be displayed.
3. Press [1. Software SW].
4. Software SW will be displayed.
5. Scroll to dipswitch 2-2.
6. Press the OFF button on the touchscreen to change the setting to a 0.
7. Press [RETURN] to exit the Software SW mode.
8. Power OFF/ON.
Description
FS109, FINISHER TRAY FAILURE message during initialization.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
161
7045
1. PS806 (tray lower limit detect sensor) is not being actuated.
Visually inspect PS806 to see if it is being actuated. If PS806 is not being actuated, inspect for any binding in the paper exit tray. To check the operation of
PS806, perform the following:
a. Access the 47 multimode (power the copier ON, while simultaneously holding the 4 and 7 keys), input code 70, press P-06-P. The touchscreen should
indicate ON if PS806 is being actuated.
b. If PS806 is actuated, and the touchscreen indicates OFF, check for 5V DC at CN703-A3 on the FNCB (finisher control board)(p/n 13LP-9010).
c. If 5V DC is not present at CN703-A3, power the machine OFF and remove CN703.
d. Power the machine ON, and check CN703-A3 for 5V DC.
e. If 5V DC is present, check for any pinched wires going to PS806 and replace as necessary (p/n 12QV85510).
Note: If the finisher is disconnected and a management list is printed, F77-2 will be incremented on the jam list.
2. MS804 is not providing 24V DC to CN709-1 when it is ON. MS804 is wiring normally open. When the stapler safety (PV) plate is engaged the contacts of
MS804 should be closed.
Confirm 24V DC at CN709-1 when MS804 is actuated. If voltage is not present, replace MS804 (p/n 12QR86010).
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Unable to program platen APS to select 8.5x11 with small size originals.
Solution
CAUSE: Early version firmware did not allow 25 mode, dipswitch 21-5 to operate.
SOLUTION: Flash the 7045 to the latest firmware level .
Notes:
1. To view the above links, Acrobat* Reader must be installed. Acrobat Reader can be downloaded for free from the Adobe* Web site at:
2. The FlashROM files are also available on the Konica FTP site. Refer to the FTP site index and click on the appropriate link(s) to access the information.
Description
Intermittent F87-03 and/or Printer Board Failure messages only when an IP431 is installed.
Solution
CAUSE: During initial install, if the machine and IP unit are not allowed to boot up completely, the code from the CF card(s) will not be written completely to
the hard drive. This may occur if the machine is powered OFF prematurely to access the 25, 36 or 47 adjustment mode. The code written to the hard drive
will be partial and the IP will be unable to boot the next time power is applied.
SOLUTION: If unable to reformat the hard drive from the operation panel, remove the HD103 and recover by installing it in a PC. Use a Microsoft* Windows
98 boot disk and the fdisk utility to clean and reformat the drive on a PC. The following instructions explain how to use an IDE adapter to attach the HD107 to
a standard PC to reformat the drive:
1. A 2.5" laptop IDE hard drive adapter. This adapter can be found at most computer stores that sell a wide variety of cables and adapters. One online
source for this adapter is [[www.cablesonline.com| URL http://www.cablesonline.com]].
2. An IP controller or standard PC. The IDE adapter will need to be plugged into a standard IDE cable that is connected to the master channel of the PC or
IP controller. Power is supplied by the IP/PC's power supply through a standard power connector.
3. Use a Microsoft Windows 98 boot disk which can be created on a Windows 98 workstation.
4. Connect the hard drive to the 40-pin connector on one side of the adapter and connect the IP/PC's IDE cable to the 44-pin connector on the other side of
the adapter. Ensure that Pin 1 on the IDE connector and hard drive is connected to Pin 1 on the adapter .
5. Insert the 98 Boot disk into the floppy drive of the IP/PC, reconnect the IP/PC power cord, and power ON the IP/PC.
162
7045
6. Once the IP/PC boots from the floppy, press return at the date and time prompts to get to the A: prompt.
7. Use FDISK to create a primary DOS partition and set it as active.
WARNING: Do not use large disk support.
8. Format the newly-created partition with the /s switch to transfer system files.
=================================C A U T I O N=================================
If the hard drive is not connected to the IDE master channel, and is not configured to be the MASTER
drive, the setup program will format whatever drive is connected and setup as the MASTER drive.
=============================================================================
9. Remove the hard drive from the PC and reinstall it the IP unit. Allow the IP and main body to completely boot or this process will have to be repeated.
Description
Auto layout application centers the image from front-to-rear, but not from lead-to-trail. Part of the image is missing.
Solution
SOLUTION: Flash the 7045 to the latest firmware level .
Notes:
1. Minimum 7045 firmware level requirements to correct auto layout .
2. To view the above links, Acrobat* Reader must be installed. Acrobat Reader can be downloaded for free from the Adobe* Web site at:
3. The FlashROM files are also available on the Konica FTP site. Refer to the FTP site index and click on the appropriate link(s) to access the information.
Description
Excessive noise from the write unit polygon motor.
Solution
CAUSE: Polygon motor is operating for 2 minutes after exit of last copy.
SOLUTION: The polygon motor can be shut off after 15 seconds from paper exit. This action should be taken if customer is complaining about noise. To
shut off the polygon motor after 15 seconds from paper exit, perform the following:
2. Access the 25 mode, (power the copier ON, while pressing the 2 and 5 keys).
3. Touch [1. Software SW] on the touchscreen.
4. Scroll to dipswitch 6-4 and set to (0).
5. Scroll to dipswitch 6-5 and set to (0). The machine will now enter polygon motor pre-rotation selection 15 seconds after the copy has exited the machine.
6. Scroll to dipswitch 6-6 and set to (0).
7. Scroll to dipswitch 6-7 and set to (1). The polygon motor will now stop when the machine enters the pre-rotation mode.
163
7050
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
164
7050

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
Latest EPROM level, 7050. and [[Internal Link for Faxing/Printing current 7050 EPROM information.| RUN V:\text\Wordpad.exe v:\text\newrom\7050.txt]]
Description
E46-08.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. MS2 and MS3 front door interlock switches are not functioning electrically. Interlocks may ohm out good.
Perform the following checks:
a. Check the resistance on CN8-B6 and CN8-B8 on the main CB. With the connector disconnected from the CB and the front door closed, there should be
no resistance.
b. With the machine powered on, front door closed and CN8 connected to the main CB, approximately 8V DC should be present on CN8-B8 to frame
ground and CN8-B6 to frame ground should also have 8V DC.
c. With power on and front door open, CN8-B8 should have about 3V DC and CN8-B6 should have 8V DC.
With the front door closed, if 8V DC is present on 8-B6 and not present on 8-B8 or if resistance is high or unlimited, check wiring, replace the set of 2 front
door switches (p/n 197085010).

2. MS2 and MS3 are not actuating in proper sequence.
When the front door is closed MS2 and MS3 must be actuated prior to the door switch (AC switch) or a E46-08 will occur. Examine switch actuation and
move switches, within mounting holes, to actuate as early as possible.
3. There is a loss of 8V DC to the main CB. If 8V DC is not present on either connector, check the DCPS1 voltages. If the DCPS1 voltages are bad replace
DCPS1, (p/n 25SA84510). If DCPS1 voltages are good, replace the main CB, (p/n 25SE-9010).
4. Failed or poorly connected E-RDH.
Reseat the connectors on the E-RDH and if the problem persists, replace the board (p/n 25SA-9610).
5. A constant E46-08 is a symptom of a failed write unit. The 3rd mirror may be out of position. The write unit should be examined to ensure that the 3rd
mirror and cylindrical lens 2 are properly positioned . This is especially true if this code appears on set-up after machine transport. The mirror and lens can
be reinstalled to their proper position. If necessary replace the write unit (p/n 25SA-6500). Note: There are 2 styles of write units. One contains much less
hardware than the original write unit. Less hardware in the unit does not equate to a failed unit.
6. If the error code is intermittent and double imaging is present, the index detecting board has failed. Replace the index detecting board, (p/n 25SA-9540).
7. Communication between the write unit and the image processing board is corrupted.
Replace image processing board (25S0-9500).
8. A connector to the video interface card is loose which is creating a loss in communication.
Reseat the connectors on the V/I card and verify proper operation.
165
7050
9. The main CB has failed.
Replace the main CB (p/n 25SE-9010).
10. If the error code is continuously displayed, check the EPROM set for a mismatch between the Image processing board and main CB. Also check the
EPROMs on the image processing board for bent pin or missing pin.
Replace EPROMs to latest level and configuration.
11. An incompatible SIMMs memory module is installed.
Proper performance is guaranteed ONLY with Konica specified SIMM memory modules. Konica 16 MB SIMM modules (PCUA 950760) and 32 MB SIMM
modules (PCUA 950761) are available at 60 or 70ns, with parity. These modules have tin plated contacts. The original 16MB SIMM in the E-RDH is GOLD
plated.
Note: Some 60ns SIMMs are provided. 60ns memory can be used in combination with 70ns as long as a 70ns SIMM is installed in bank 0 (in the first slot).
The E-RDH does not require parity memory.
12. Signal is being lost or corrupted.
Check presence of 5V DC. Check all connector pins on the IPDB (Inclination Paper Detection Board) CN64, CN145, CN68 and CN144. Examine the pins on
the connectors closely to determine if one pin has backed away from its proper seating position (In one case a pin on CN68 had backed out). Replace or
repair as necessary.
Description
The zoning is incorrect or cannot be adjusted.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The first side zoning or centering adjustment needs to be done. Follow the procedure on page 7-33 through 7-35 of the 7050 service manual (4/97 3rd
edition).
2. If the zoning for the second side is off. Check for a dirty sensor or LED on the Inclination Paper Detection Board (IPDB). Clean both areas.
3. There is a poor connection at the IPDB. Reseat the connectors on the IPDB (Inclination Paper Detection Board).
4. The Inclination Paper Detection Board (IPDB) is faulty. Replace the IPDB, (p/n 25SA-9200), or the paper detect LED (p/n 25SA-4150).
Description
How to set APS default to 8.5x11with Non Image Area Erase ON.
Solution
Special EPROMs have been developed for setting the APS default to 8.5x11 if the original detected is smaller than 8.5x11R. They are presently available on
the Konica website. To access the EPROM file, perform the following:
1. Access Konica's Homepage (www.konicabt.com).
2. Click on Support (top of page).
3. Scroll down the page and click on NSSG Web Support.
4. Log on to NSSG Web Support and click on the EPROMS icon.
5. Select Eproms for High Volume Copiers and click on [List].
6. Scroll down to the 7050-28D.EXE file, click on it, and save it to disk.
Note: Refer to 7050/FORCE 50 Technical Bulletin #28 for additional information.
[[Internal Link for Faxing/Printing current 7050 EPROM information.| RUN V:\text\Wordpad.exe v:\text\newrom\7050.txt]]
Description
J 30 during copying or printing.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Incorrect EPROM level. The problem appears as inconsistent loop and can be prevalent in one sided and duplex modes. Install minimum level 26
EPROMs. Latest EPROM level, 7050. and [[Internal Link for Faxing/Printing current 7050 EPROM information.| RUN V:\text\Wordpad.exe
v:\text\newrom\7050.txt]] EPROM history, 7050 .
2. The transfer guide plate is too low in reference to 2nd paper feed guide plate. Adjust the 2nd paper feed guide plate to 1mm above the transfer guide by
installing two washers (p/n 00Z610401). For more detail, see 7050 Technical Bulletin #3B .
3. The 2 mylars on the lower paper feed resist plate, in the 2nd paper unit, are missing or damaged:
a. Some machines may not have any mylars installed.
b. Some machines have the original style rear mylar (p/n 25SA41240) and front mylar (p/n 25SA41230).
c. Machines with s/n 25SE03894 and above have an updated front mylar (p/n 25SA41231), rear mylar (p/n 25SA41241) and conveyance mylar (previously
not used) (p/n 25SA41250) . This modification eliminates (p/n 25SA41150 and 25SA41160).
166
7050
d. Machines with s/n 25SE09221 and above have an updated conveyance mylar (p/n 25SA41251). This minor change to the mylar improves A4 and A3
feed capabilities (now standard on all machines).
All mylars are to be replaced as a set. The newest style configuration is recommended. For more detail, see 7050 Technical Bulletin #3B .Note: The 7050
Parts Catalog (11/95), pages 46 and 47 is incorrect. Part numbers for items 4 and 5 only apply to the upper plate mylars.
4. Paper feed clutches slipping or not operating properly.
Clean or replace if necessary, 2nd paper feed (MC3) (p/n 25SA82010), upper paper feed (MC5) (p/n 25SA82030), lower paper feed (MC6) (p/n 25SA82030),
bypass (MC7) (p/n 25SA82020) and PFU conveyance (MC8) (p/n 25SA822030). Slipping can occur on new machines and cleaning clutches on setup may
be beneficial. Check the allen screws on the clutches to ensure they are tightened properly.
5. A pinched (shorted) wire to the second paper feed clutch (MC3).
Repair the wire as an interim solution. Replacing MC3 (p/n 25SA82010) is the permanent solution.
6. Separation claw does not activate prior to the lead edge of the paper.
First eliminate paper feed related problems and verify AC and DC separation currents are properly adjusted. Separation claw timing is adjustable in 25 mode
(identical to other models such as the 4155). This information in not published in the 7050 service manual. Address 01 is for claw ON timing: setting range
0-9 (3) with a 10mm increment for each change of value. Address 02 is for claw OFF timing (6) with the same ranges and specifications.
7. Copy accordion jams between 2nd feed and the drum are the result of a faulty rocking clutch is causing the drum separator claws to stay down and catch
the paper as it conveys under the drum.
Replace rocking clutch (p/n 25SA20520) and rocking lever (p/n 25SA20540).
These are located at the rear of the drum carriage and attached to the end of the drum claw shaft.
8. Check the flag on the pre-feed sensor, upper (PS20) for binding or weak/not attached return spring (p/n 25SA40560). The same checks should be
performed to the pre-feed sensor, lower (PS21).
Disassemble flag mechanism and repair or replace as necessary. The plate that PS20 mounts to can get bent down causing the bottom of the flag to rub on
the T/S HV supply. Note: This problem results in a symptom J 31 with the paper not reaching the second paper feed roller.
9. Upper claws do not contact upper fuser roller.
With the fuser pulled out, check the green handle latching mechanism (used to lift the upper exit guide). When closed the upper claws must contact the fuser
roller. If latch binds and prohibits claws from contacting roller, replace the following parts with new style: Separate release plate (p/n 25SA53182) and paper
exit guide plate (p/n 25SA-5442) Note: these must be replaced as a set, cannot mix old and new styles.
Countermeasure fixing jam removal lever
10. The paper loop timing is improperly adjusted on the first side, causing excessive curl of the paper. This creates feed problems on the second side.
Adjust the paper loop on the first side by using 36 mode address 94, range -20 to 50, while selecting the appropriate tray. One step is equal to approximately
0.1% change (a value of 35 has worked well in field tests). To view the loop: remove the toner supply cover (p/n 25SA32060). Note: If toner supply unit is
pulled out to view loop, toner may compact in the
toner supply unit.
11. The PFU guide mylars are rough or nicked.
Inspect and replace the guide mylars PFU resist Rear (p/n 25SA41150) and PFU resist Front (p/n 25SA41160).
12. If the jam occurs in the 35 adjustment mode such as the Printer Gradation Adjustment ask the technician if he is using 11x17 paper.
If 11x17 is not selected and the originals are printed on 8.5x11, a jam will occur. This information is not in the IP-201 service manual. Insure technician
selects 11x17 paper.
13. Failed high voltage power supply (B). Insufficient transfer. Replace the HVPS (p/n 25SA84020).
14. A failed M1(main motor) or the motor speed is slow. The image may also be reduced in the lead-to-trail direction. To check M1 operation, perform the
following:
a. Access the 47 mode (power ON the machine while pressing the 4 and 7 keys), input code 040. Press the P button to display the current data (normally
set to 16.
b. Enter a higher value (maximum is 31), and press the P button, again, to store the change.
This data change increases M1 speed during copier operation which, in turn, alters paper feed timing.
If the problem persists, replace M1 (p/n 25SA-1520).
Notes:
A. Ensure that the M1 drive system is free of any binding. M1 drives the fusing unit, conveyance belt, toner conveyance screw and the 2nd paper feed
clutch (MC3).
B. Return the data in the 47 mode, input code 040 to 16.
15. Excessive wear on registration sensor in the second PFU. Possibly caused by too much loop.
Replace the Resist Actuator (p/n 540041112) and adjust the loop timing.
Note: May be evident only in the 600dpi mode.
16. If the paper stopping slightly before the second feed rollers, the one-way bearing in the regulating gear (p/n 25SA77260) of the paper feed unit is over
lubricated.
Clean the one-way bearing.
17. If the paper is stopping partially out of the fuser, check for a missing or broken paper exit actuator (p/n 25BA53250).
18. The stop and start timing of the paper is incorrect. Copies may jam on the conveyance and exhibit creases or folds (the crease/fold may be more visible
on 8.5x11 and 8.5x11R paper)
Clean the second feed clutch (MC3) and conveyance clutch (MC8). Clean, then check the paper feed restart photosensor (PS4). Verify change of state at
167
7050
the main CB CN9-A5. When cleaning is complete, signals and power check good, yet the problem remains, replace the conveyance clutch (p/n 25SA82030)
and/or the 2nd paper feed clutch (p/n 25SA82010).
Note: Also, check loop timing (36 mode, code 94, START/PRINT, P).
19. Worn 2nd paper feed rollers, bushings and clutch.
Replace worn parts: Upper 2nd feed roller (p/n 25SA41060), Lower 2nd feed roller (p/n 25SA41050), Upper bushings 2 (p/n 540076020), Lower bushings 2
(p/n 540076030), 2nd feed clutch (p/n 25SA82010).
20. When feeding from universal tray or non-standard sizes. All other trays feed fine. The paper size detection board failed.
Replace the paper size detection board (p/n 25BA-9100).
21. When feeding metric size paper (A4).
Check the direction the paper is loaded. For example, A4 should not be loaded in the 'R' direction. If unit is set up as COPIER ONLY, install A4/B5 Special
EPROM set.
22. If, after a PM, copy quality is poor, the transfer corona was reassembled incorrectly. The relationship of the transfer guide material assembly (p/n
25SA-2660) to the rest of the corona is incorrect. Due to the critical nature of the transfer guide material assembly height (the guide is set at the factory), if
guide is adjusted or removed, replacement of the entire corona assembly (p/n 25SA-2600) is required. It must not be adjusted or disassembled in the field.
Note: In the parts catalog, the transfer guide material assembly is listed as a separate part, but is no longer available. This information is contained in 7050
Technical Bulletin #9 . For more information see parts view of transfer guide material assembly.
23. Charge corona grid plate is not correctly installed.
Ensure that the grid plate is correctly installed.
24. The T/S corona unit is not operating properly in the duplex mode.
Replace the T/S corona unit (p/n: 25SA-2604).
25. Reduction of copy size may also accompany the error code. Corrupted data in memory or a failed NOVRAM is the cause.
Reinitialize memory. The procedure to reinitialize the machine to factory settings resets the total counter to 0. As such, hotline assistance is required for this
procedure
If the problem reoccurs, replace the NOVRAM (p/n DALLAS). The NOVRAM is located on the main CB (IC21).
26. When feeding from universal tray or non-standard sizes. J ams occur from the universal tray only. All other trays feed fine. The paper size detection
board has failed.
Replace the paper size detection board (p/n 25BA-9100).
27. When running non-inch size such as A4 size paper.
Check the direction the paper is loaded. For example A4 should not be loaded in the A4R direction.
Install A4/B5 Special EPROM set.
Description
J 13-02 while copying.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Conveyance clutch wiring (for the 1500 sheet tray) is being pinched or cut. Check wiring on the conveyance unit for damage. Replace wiring (clutch
assembly) or repair wiring.
2. The paper tray is not coming up to the feed tires due to the LCT cable (front or rear) coming off the pulley. Restring the cable. Verify the tension and
operation of the cable and pulley system.
3. The paper detect actuator for Tray 3 is catching on the lift up lever (p/n 25SA58130) causing the paper tray not to raise while copying. File the contact
area on the paper detect actuator. Ensure the actuator does not catch on the lift up lever.
4. The LCT pre-write sensor (PS210) is dirty. Clean PS210.
5. The LCT paper feed clutch (CL1) is dirty. Clean CL1.
6. The LCT paper feed solenoid (SD141) is dirty. Clean SD141.
7. The one-way bearing on the reverse roller (or torque limiter) (p/n 25AA40220) is worn and slipping. Replace the bearing and inspect the shaft for wear. If
necessary replace the shaft, (p/n 25SA58190).
8. The paper tray is not coming up to the feed tires due to broken tray rails. Replace the tray rails.
9. Paper feed stay/middle has been slightly redesigned in the FORCE 50 as well as newer 7050 serial number 25SE08007. Replacement of this paper feed
stay/middle (p/n 25SA-0611) may assist paper travel.
10. The paper feed open/close plate is deformed.
Repair or replace the paper feed open/close plate (p/n 25SA58060).
168
7050
If J 13-02 (1000 LCT) or J 14-02 (1500 LCT) only when duplexing and/or sorting and stapling, check:
11. Failed LCT motor assembly (M140). This motor is the drive for both LCT trays.
Replace the LCT motor assembly (p/n 25SA-1830).
12. Failed DCDB.
Replace the DCDB (p/n 25SA-9040).
Description
The copies/prints are dark or have background.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The scorotron grid is seated incorrectly, damaged or mounted upside down. Repair or replace the grid, (p/n 25SA25080).
2. The charge corona wire is not positioned correctly within the block. Check the position of the corona wires within the block and reseat as required.
3. The toner guide roller or cleaning blade is worn. Replace the worn component: toner guide roller assembly (p/n 25SA-2080), cleaning blade (p/n
25SA-2060).
4. Developer breakdown due to over or undertoning. Remove the drum carriage, clean the existing developer from the developer unit and replace with fresh
developer. Clean the toner recycling path to remove any toner from the system. Replace the drum carriage and developer unit. Record all existing 25 mode
settings and 47 mode charge and transfer settings. Perform machine initialization. The procedure to reinitialize the machine to factory settings will reset the
total counter to 0. As such hotline assistance is required for this procedure.
Note: To web users, the preceding hyperlink is not available for viewing from the web.
Perform an L detect (47 mode, output code 95). Now make another copy and check for the absence of background. Replace the toner unit and add toner.
Restore all 25 mode special settings.
5. Incorrect toner was added. Monitor the TDS voltage. It should be approximately 1.2V DC. If it increases to 2.0V DC and keeps increasing slowly; the
incorrect toner was probably installed. Purge the toner hopper and developer, and recycling tube. Install the correct supplies.
6. If the internal test patterns are normal, then the CCD unit is defective.
Replace the CCD unit (p/n 25SA-6400).
7. The drum is past the recommended replacement interval. Replace the drum. The recommended replacement interval is every 120,000 copies.
8. A defective high voltage power supply A. Replace high voltage power supply A (p/n 25SA84010).
9. Incorrect charge corona current data in memory. The value range is very low (1 - 10). The target value is 170.
Ensure that the charge corona is seated properly. Perform the charge corona current adjustment. If unable to attain the correct value, inspect the condition of
the charge corona grid (plate) and wires. If deemed necessary, replace the charging control plate (p/n 25SA25080), charge corona wire (p/n 25SA25090), or
the complete corona assembly (p/n 25SA-2500).
10. The toner auger (unavailable part) is lightly scraping the toner density sensor causing it to fail. The damaged TDS, unable to properly regulate the toner
density, initiates an overtoned condition.
Replace the TDS (p/n 25SA88030) and the developing detect seal (p/n 25SA30160) which is also damaged by contact with the auger. The toner auger shaft
holders (p/n 318076190) also need replacing.
11. Defective toner level detecting sensor.
Replace the toner level detecting sensor (p/n 540088030).
Description
Solution
To program functions of ECM, perform the following:
1. In the 25 mode (power the copier ON while simultaneously pressing the 2 and 5 keys) enable the ECM option. Set address P05 to:
0 - ECM not selected
1 - ECM selected with no stop at limit
3 - ECM selected with stop at limit (will allow user to complete current job)
5 - ECM selected with immediate stop at limit
2. Set the master key code. In the 25 mode, access addresses P72 through P79 (using the magnification arrow keys) and enter the customer-created 8-digit
number starting with the lowest digit at address 72. Exit the 25 mode by powering the copier OFF/ON.
3. Access the password set mode. Press [P] and [9] on the keypad, then enter the key operator password to access the ECM mode:
a. Press [1], then [Start Print], to select password set mode.
No. 001 is displayed
b. Use the keypad to enter a 5 digit password {not all zeros}.
c. Start must be pressed after each entry.
d. Press the magnification up arrow to access the next password.
Note: If required, continue to set up to 256 passwords.
169
7050
e. Press (Stop/Clear) to exit the set password mode.
4. To access the limit copy count mode:
Press [P] and [9] on the keypad; then, enter the key operator password to access the ECM mode:
a. Press [2], then [Start Print], to select limit copy count mode.
No. 001 is displayed
b. Use the magnification arrows to reach the desired account number from 001-256.
c. Use the keypad to enter a 6 digit copy count limit up to 999,999. To assign unlimited copying, enter 6 zeros.
d. Press (Start Print) to store the limit for that password account.
Note: To set copy limits for additional passwords, repeat steps 2-4
5. To read the copy count/limit mode:
Press [P] and [9] on keypad; then, enter the key operator password to access the ECM mode:
a. Press [3]; then, [Start Print], to display the current copy count/limit for password No. 001.
b. Read and record the information, if needed.
c. To continue reading the current copy count/limit for additional passwords, use the magnification arrows to display subsequent passwords.
6. To access the account reset mode:
Press [P] and [9] on keypad; then, enter the key operator password to access the ECM mode:
a. Press [4]; then, [Start Print], to select account reset mode.
b. Press [Start Print] to display the message for clear all accounts [Yes/No?]
Note: Select NO:
If you only want to clear individual accounts, press (Stop/Clear) to display No. 001. Use the magnification arrows to move to the correct account and press
[Start Print] to clear that account. Move to a new account and repeat if necessary.
Select YES:
CAUTION: Be sure you want to clear the copy counts for all passwords. When the message for clear all accounts [Yes/No?] is displayed, press [Start Print].
7. To exit the ECM mode, press [P] and [Stop/Clear] simultaneously.
See pages 7-15 and 7-22 of the Service Manual and page 6-2 of the User Reference Guide.
Description
Solution
The following specifications are guidelines:
1. Konica 16MB SIMM modules (PCUA 950760) and 32MB SIMM modules (PCUA 950761) are available at 60ns or 70ns, with parity. These modules have
tin plated contacts. The original 16MB SIMM in the E-RDH is GOLD plated. EDO (Extended Data Output) can NOT be used.
2. Memory should be fast-page and parity.
Notes:
a. Proper performance is guaranteed ONLY with Konica specified SIMM memory modules. Memory configuration and specifications are very complicated.
As a result, purchase of memory from a vendor may result in the wrong SIMM, although the product is of a high quality.
b. Some 60ns SIMMs are provided. 60ns memory can be used in combination with 70ns as long as a 70ns SIMM is installed in bank 0 (in the first slot).
The E-RDH does not require parity memory. In addition the E-RDH memory does not require installation in pairs.
c. After installation of any memory, the memory check procedure should be performed. The self-diagnostic capability to verify SIMM functionality is
provided using 47 mode, output code 198:
I. Operating panel displays:
Ia. MEMORY CHECK OK indicates a good SIMM.
Ib. MEMORY ERROR indicates a SIMM failure.
II. Procedure:
IIa. Mount the SIMM to be tested on the E-RDH Board.
IIb. Enter the 47 mode (power the copier ON while holding the 4 and 7 keys), output code 198.
IIc. Read the operation panel display. If the display indicates MEMORY CHECK OK, the SIMM is good.
IId. Install a new SIMM on the board and repeat test. If the display indicates MEMORY ERROR, proceed to next step.
IIe. Mount a different SIMM, enter the 47 mode, output code 198. If the display indicates MEMORY CHECK OK, this indicates that the previous
SIMM is not good. If the display indicates MEMORY ERROR, proceed to next step.
IIf. Replace the E-RDH board (p/n 25SA-9610) with a new one, and install the known good SIMM. Enter the 47 mode, output code 198. If the display
states MEMORY CHECK OK, this indicates that the SIMM access function of the original E-RDH failed. Use the new E-RDH board to perform the SIMM
checking procedure.
Notes:
A. This check is used only to verify SIMM condition - not the E-RDH board except to determine its SIMM access function.
B. A maximum of 4 SIMMs can be mounted
a. The MEMORY CHECK OK message only displays if all 4 SIMMs are good.
b. If any one fails, MEMORY ERROR displays, and each SIMM must be checked to determine which is bad.
3. IP201 memory is different (see IP201).
VOLATILE MEMORY GUARANTEE STATEMENT
The Konica 7050 uses an E-RDH (Electronic Recirculating Document Handler). This E-RDH stores each job in memory prior to printing. The standard
E-RDH configuration is 16MB of memory. The memory module used to achieve this is the 72-pin SIMM (Single Inline Memory Module) type. This memory
is volatile (i.e., all memory addresses on a module of this type are reset whenever power is removed).
Optional configurations for the E-RDH allow for memory to be increased above the standard 16MB configuration. This is done by adding other modules of the
same type only, thus an optional memory configuration would also be volatile.
The process of powering the Konica 7050 off via the main switch on its operation panel removes power from the E-RDH, thus any information previously
stored will be impossible to retrieve when the power switch is turned on.
(Revision 1/28/97)
170
7050
171
7055
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
172
7055

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Intermittent J 17-4, J 17-5, J 17-6, jamming from all trays (especially Tray 3) and/or lock-up. The paper feed timing is inconsistent.
Solution
CAUSES: Timing error.
SOLUTION: If this issue is occurring, upgrade to level 23.0 EPROMs.
Notes:
1. See the Latest EPROM level and [[Internal Link for Faxing/Printing current 7055 EPROM information.| RUN V:\text\Wordpad.exe v:\text\newrom\7055.txt]]
for more information.
d. When upgrading to level 23.0 EPROMs, the Operation Panel EPROMs also must be upgraded regardless of written or displayed levels. Level 23.0
EPROMs are available from Konica's website as 7055-23a.exe and through the Parts Distribution Center as the following part numbers:
Main CB
C1 (p/n 7055122-23.0)
C2 (p/n 7055123-23.0)
Image processing board
I1 (p/n 7055B29-13.0)
I2 (p/n 7055B30-13.0)
Operation Panel
O1 (p/n 7055216-21.0)
O2 (p/n 7055217-20.0)
173
7055
O3 (p/n 7055212-20.0)
O4 (p/n 7055218-21.0)
Note: The Operation Panel EPROMs are new and MUST be installed when installing level 23.0 EPROMs. They replace the O1/O4-12.0, O2/O3-11.0
EPROMs to allow compatibility with future machines.
DF312 (p/n DF312303-14.0)
FS106 (p/n FS106BA02-20.0)
FS108B Copier and printer (p/n FS108BAO2-40.0)
Description
J 17-4 or J 17-5 only when feeding 8.5x11R paper from Tray 4 with level 23.0 EPROMs installed.
Solution
CAUSE: The factory default setting of the J 17-5 timing correction for Tray 3 is enabled. However, when Tray 4 is configured for 8.5x11R paper, the
increased length triggers the jam code because the timing enhancement was changed to accommodate 8.5x11 paper. Therefore, the J 17-5 timing correction
must be disabled when Tray 4 is configured for 8.5x11R paper.
SOLUTION: To disable the J 17-5 timing correction, perform the following:
2. Access the 25 mode (power the copier ON, while pressing the 2 and 5 keys).
3. Touch [1. Software switch setting] on the touchscreen.
4. Scroll to dipswitch 17-0; touch the [OFF] key to select (0), which will disable the J 17-5 timing correction.
Description
DF312, intermittent double feeding.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Multi-feeding of originals has been determined to be caused by the pad material .
The part number for the pad (p/n 129H-4580) remains unchanged because the design is the same; only the material has been changed. The Parts
Department inventory has been purged of all Type 2A pads and only Type 1 or Type 3 pads will be shipped.
2. Worn separator (DFP) pad.
A new style separator pad (p/n 129H-4580) and fanning spring (p/n129H45220) are available to prevent double feeding. These parts must be installed as a
set. The serial number cut-ins when the new parts were added to the machines during production are as follows:
7055 - 55WE04211
7065 - 55TE07923
Note:
1. The fanning spring tension has been decreased. The original fanning spring was 25.5mm in length. The new fanning spring is 22mm in length and may be
either gold or silver colored.
2. The pad material has changed. The current pad is gray; the new pad is white.
3. Under no circumstances should the new pad be cleaned with alcohol. Cleaning it with alcohol will increase the friction and no-feed jamming can result. If
alcohol is used accidentally, it may take 150 original feeds to correct the problem.
4. If the current fanning spring is used with the new pad, noise will be generated during original feed.
5. The torque limiter (p/n 129H-4740) must either be left in place or replaced if it was previously removed.
6. Both pickup springs (p/n 120A45470) must be installed if they were previously disengaged.
See DF312 Technical Bulletin #2 .
Description
E47-05 shortly after power up.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. A loose connector on the image PCB, the main CB or the laser correction motor M40. Remove and reseat all connectors associated with the image PCB,
main CB and the laser correction motor M40.
2. An error has occurred with the write unit. Reseat connections on all boards. Replace the write unit (p/n 55TA-6500) as needed.
174
7055
Description
PLEASE WAIT WARMING UP displayed and will not clear.
Solution
CAUSE: Dmax adjustment will not complete due to lack of toner in hopper.
SOLUTION: Add toner to the toner hopper and set the toner replenish stop function. To set the toner supply stop mode:
1. Enter the memory rewrite mode by turning the copier on while pressing the 2 and 5 keys. Release the 2 and 5 keys when the (25 Mode Menu Screen)
appears.
2. Select [1] (Software switch setting).
3. From the (Software SW Setting Screen) use the arrows to select and change the following dip switches:
a. 7-0 to 1 to enable the toner supply stop function.
b. 7-1 to 1 to have the copier stop after the need for toner is detected and the number of copies set by 7-2 and 7-3 are completed.
I. 7-2 and 7-3 to 0 for 100 copies.
II. 7-2 to 1 and 7-3 to 0 for 1000 copies.
III. 7-2 to 0 and 7-3 to 1 for 2000 copies.
IV. 7-2 and 7-3 to 1 for 3000 copies.
Note: The recommended setting is for 100 copies.
c. 7-1 to a 0 to have the copier stop immediately after the need for toner is detected and one copy is completed.
Description
Solution
Latest EPROM level and [[Internal Link for Faxing/Printing current 7055 EPROM information.| RUN V:\text\Wordpad.exe v:\text\newrom\7055.txt]]
7055 level 24.7 firmware enhancement list in Adobe* Acrobat* format. .
FS108/FS108B level 41.0 firmware enhancement list in Adobe* Acrobat* format. .
7055 level 23 firmware enhancement list in Adobe* Acrobat* format. .
FS106 level 20 firmware enhancement list in Adobe Acrobat format. .
Note: To view the PDF, Acrobat Reader must be installed. Acrobat Reader can be downloaded for free from the Adobe Web site at:
Description
Intermittent 17-11or J 30-01 when feeding from Tray 3 and Tray 4.
Solution
CAUSE: The 17-11 code is not identified in the service manual, however, it has been identified as a timing error.
SOLUTION: Upgrade to latest level EPROM (23 or higher).
Description
Developer leakage from the rear auger seals of the developing unit.
Solution
CAUSE: The auger shaft bushings have worn unevenly, resulting in developer leakage.
SOLUTION: The developing unit has been modified to correct this issue. Order a replacement developing unit (p/n 55WA-3001).
175
7060
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
176
7060

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
DF310, intermittent jam position 14 when using the RADF. This jam will register as J 62 in the data logs.
Solution
Important note concerning changes to the DF310.
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The platen glass is dirty. Clean the platen glass with an approved glass cleaner.
2. The RADF is out of position. Check the RADF position using the RADF positioning blocks (p/n 12ER12073). See the DF310 service manual page 5 and 6
(dated 9/97).
3. The RADF height is not within specification. Use the height spacers (p/n 12ER12110). See the DF310 service manual page 6 and 7 (dated 9/97).
4. The paper supply rubber (B) on the feed assembly is worn. Replace the supply rubber (p/n 12VR40100). The recommended replacement interval of the
supply rubber is every 150,000 feeds.
5. The paper supply rubber (B) is installed backwards on the feed roller assembly. Remove the feed roller assembly and verify that the white dot on the
supply rubber (B) (p/n 12VR40100) faces the same side as the coupling (p/n 12VR40460).
6. The original feed sensor (PS305) does not recognize the original. Clean PS305, and reseat the connector to the sensor. Verify the operation of PS305.
Measure the voltage at CN102-5 (yellow wire) on the RADF CB to TP5 (power GND). With no paper present the reading should be 0.1V DC. With paper
present the reading should be 4.9V DC. If necessary replace PS305 (p/n 12ER85521).
7. The physical distance between the original transmission sensor (PS302) and the original feed sensor (PS305) is too far apart. Physically shift the position
of both sensors as closely together as possible, without creating a constant jam indication.
8. The original push pressure plate has excessive tension (upward force). Adjust the pressure plate by loosening the mounting screw and altering the spring
tension with the adjustment screw (one or both are paint locked screws). With the plate raised, use a gram gauge to push the plate down. The pressure plate
should break away from the feed tire at 115 to 135 grams. Note: For accurate adjustment it is recommended that a 300g gram gauge (p/n 00TL-3040) be
used.
9. Machines within the serial number range 55FE00001 to 55FE02088 are equipped with paper supply rubber (B) (p/n 12VR40100) and torque limiters (p/n
12VR40620 on the DF310, which can potentially cause original misfeeds. Order the paper feed kit (p/n DF310-001) which contains a new torque limiter and
paper supply rubber (B). Note: For best machine performance it is strongly recommended that all main body EPROMs be upgraded to the latest release
when the kit is installed. See DF310 Technical Bulletin #1,
EPROM history, DF310 .
EPROM history, 7060. .
[[Internal Link for Faxing/Printing EPROM information.| RUN V:\text\Wordpad.exe v:\text\newrom\7060.txt]]
Description
EPROM history, 7060.
Solution
177
7060
EPROM history, 7060. .
Latest EPROM level hyperlink and [[Internal Link for Faxing/Printing EPROM information.| RUN V:\text\Wordpad.exe v:\text\newrom\7060.txt]]
See 7060 EPROM Release Notification version 21.1 .
See 7060/FORCE 60 Technical Bulletin #21 for features of Level 18.0 EPROMs.
See 7060/FORCE 60 Technical Bulletin #18 for features of Level 16.0 EPROMs.
Description
How to program the default paper tray.
Solution
Note: In order to program the default paper tray, a minimum EPROM level of 13 is required.
The firmware listed above provides selection of default paper tray at power up under the following conditions:
1. APS and ATS are both enabled.
2. If using Intersheet mode, chapter (copy insertion setting) and OHP are selected.
3. When the priority tray for APS is not selected or the tray is empty.
4. When ATS is selected during printer operation.
Set 25 mode dipswitches:
15-2 15-1 15-0
0 0 0 Standard search order - start at Tray 2 (Default)
0 0 1 Start at Tray 1 (1=2=3=4=5)
0 1 0 Start at Tray 2 (2=3=4=5=1)
0 1 1 Start at Tray 3 (3=4=5=1=2)
1 0 0 Start at Tray 4 (4=5=1=2=3)
1 0 1 Start at Tray 5 (5=1=2=3=4)
1 1 0 Standard search order - start at Tray 2
ALTERNATIVE METHOD
If older firmware is installed, the following procedure can be used:
1. To select Tray 5 as the default tray when APS is turned OFF, set 25 mode dipswitches 8-4 to 1, 8-5 to 0 and 8-6 to 1.
2. In the Key Operator Mode (power machine ON while pressing help), select memory switches.
a. Select #7 and turn OFF Platen APS.
b. Select #11 and turn OFF ATS/APS for Tray 3.
c. Select #14 and turn OFF Platen AMS.
The above programming allows the 7060 to default to the LT351 when copying from the platen glass or when using the RADF in ATS/APS mode. Image
rotation and mixed sized originals will function as well.
Note: (Alternative solution) ATS for 8.5x11 Tray 3 will not operate and 8.5x11 will be the default size when copying from the platen glass.
Latest EPROM level hyperlink and [[Internal Link for Faxing/Printing EPROM information.| RUN V:\text\Wordpad.exe v:\text\newrom\7060.txt]]
Description
Light copies.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. DMAX and GAMMA initial settings were not performed at setup. Perform the DMAX and GAMMA initial setting (47 mode code 18). This adjustment
must be performed after the L detect adjustment and before the laser gradation adjustment. This information is located on page 6-57 of the 7060 Service
Manual.
2. Density shift is displayed properly (data =3), however the main CB does not recognize the value.
Reset density shift values:
a. In idle mode press [P], then [5], then [START PRINT].
b. Enter [0] and press [START PRINT].
c. Enter [3] and press [START PRINT].
d. In idle mode press [P], then [6], then [START PRINT].
e. Enter [0] and press [START PRINT].
f. Enter [3] and press [START PRINT].
g. In idle mode press [P], then [7], then [START PRINT].
h. Enter [0] and press [START PRINT].
i. Enter [3] and press [START PRINT].
178
7060
j. In idle mode press [P], then [8], then [START PRINT]
k. Enter [0] and press [START PRINT]. Note: P, 8 remains at 0.
3. Toner buildup at the entrance of the developer unit has caused a bind in the toner supply unit damaging the toner drive gears. Replace damaged toner
hopper drive gears. The worm gear may be worn at the point of contact and is not driving the toner conveyance screw. Toner supply idler gears A and B
have been redesigned and are available as (p/n 25SA77291) for gear A and (p/n 25SA77311) for gear B. The new gears are black (old style are white).
Note: Replacing developer and performing L-detect is highly recommended after repairs have been completed. After installing new developer, do not cycle
machine until the following steps are complete:
a. Thoroughly clean the recycle tube.
b. Disengage the toner hopper from the developer unit.
c. Perform the L-detect adjustment. This information is found in 7060/FORCE 60/7150 Technical Bulletin #2B .
4. No ADD TONER indication. Open the toner hopper and inspect the level of toner. If the amount of toner is below the Toner Level Detect (TLD) sensor,
and no ADD TONER indication is displayed perform the following;
a. Remove the TLD sensor.
b. Clean the sensor of all toner residue.
c. Reinstall the TLD.
d. Run 105 blank copies.
e. Verify the ADD TONER indication is on. If it is, add toner. If the ADD TONER indication does not go on, replace the TLD sensor (p/n 540088030).
5. The mylar on the agitator plate, that wipes the TLD, is worn or missing. To prevent the toner agitating seal from deforming and to ensure proper cleaning
of the TLD sensor, a pressure spring has been added to toner agitating plate B of the agitating plate assembly closest to the toner detection sensor. Replace
the agitator plate/2 assembly (p/n 25SA-3320) and the agitator plate assembly (p/n 25SA-3271) as needed. Machines starting with serial number 55FE05655
have been factory upgraded with this modification. See 7060/7065/7150/FORCE 60 Technical Bulletin #30 for more information.
6. The main CB has failed. Replace the main CB (p/n 55FA-9010).
Description
Unable to adjust lead edge registration.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The wrong mode was selected when performing the lead edge adjustment. There are two modes, copier and printer. Ensure the correct mode is selected
before performing the adjustment. To perform the lead edge adjustment perform the following:
a. Enter the 36 mode.
b. From the adjustment mode screen, select 2 for timing adjustment.
c. From the timing adjustment mode screen, select 2 for restart timing adjustment.
d. The copier mode will adjust the lead edge position for all copies made in the VERY HIGH MODE. Copier collective will adjust all trays to the same
value. Pressing the next adjustment button will allow individual adjustment of each tray. Note: After using the copier collective mode and the machine is
powered OFF/ON the data will read 0. The setting has been stored and can be viewed in the individual settings.
e. Set an 11x17 original on the platen glass.
f. Press the copy screen button on the touchscreen. Note: The VERY HIGH light on the operation panel will go on to indicate this mode is being adjusted.
g. Select 11x17 for the paper size.
h. Press the start print button, and visually check the lead edge timing.
i. If the lead edge timing is not within standard, press the C button while holding down the P button; to return to the restart timing adjustment screen.
j. Enter a value from the numeric keypad on the touchscreen, then press the set key. Input range -99 to 99. Note: One step is equal to 0.1 mm. Press the
copy screen button and make a copy.
k. Repeat the above steps until the standard is achieved.
Standard:
Main body without rotation 3mm
Full system without rotation 4mm
Main body with rotation 4mm
Full system with rotation 6mm
l. Power the machine OFF/ON to return to normal operation.
Note the following, common problem, unable to adjust:
To perform the lead edge adjustment for all copies NOT utilizing the VERY HIGH mode (E-RDH memory), perform the following:
d. Press the next adjustment button to scroll to (printer: collective). Note: This adjustment will adjust all trays to the same value. Pressing the next
adjustment button will allow individual adjustment of each tray, or SIDE TWO. Note: After using the printer collective mode and the machine is powered
OFF/ON the data will read 0. The setting has been stored and can be viewed in the individual settings.
e. Press the copy screen button on the touch screen.
f. Press the start print button, the machine will exit a self-generated 11x17 test chart. Visually check the lead edge timing.
g. If the lead edge timing is not within standard, press the C button while holding down the P button; to return to the restart timing adjustment screen.
h. Enter a value from the numeric keypad on the touchscreen, then press the set key. Input range -99 to 99. Note: One step is equal to 0.1 mm. Press
the copy screen button and make a copy.
i. Repeat the above steps until the standard is achieved.
Standard:
179
7060
j. Power the machine OFF/ON to return to normal operation.
2. The adjustment value was changed by only one digit. Enter a value at least 10 higher, or 10 smaller, than the existing value. This will input a value that
will change the registration by approximately 1mm. This allows the change to be observed. Note: 1 step change = 0.1mm. Once the registration is close,
smaller values can be used to fine tune the image.
Description
Touchscreen keys are not working or do not select the correct function.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The control panel adjustment is incorrect. This adjustment will shift the position of the touch sensor of the LCD unit. Perform the following steps:
a. Hold the Help key and turn power ON.
b. Touch selection #10 (control panel adjustment) on the touch screen to display the control panel adjustment screen. Note: If the touch screen is so far
out of adjustment that there is no response when touching #10, the control panel adjustment can be accessed (at this point) by touching any numeric key on
the 10-key pad.
Two +(plus signs) should be visible on the screen.
c. Touch the +at the upper right lightly with a touch pen (something with a round tip which is made of resin is recommended as a touchpen). Check the
coordinates displayed in the top line at the top of the screen.
d. Ensure the X coordinate and the Y coordinate displayed in the message area fall within the standard values. The acceptable values are on the second
line.
e. If the values are not within the acceptable parameters, repeat Step 3 until the values are acceptable.
f. Touch the +at the lower left lightly with a touch pen (something with a round tip which is made of resin is recommended as a touch pen). Repeat the
process used for the upper right coordinate until acceptable values are achieved.
g. As verification of a correct adjustment, touch the CHECK keys at the upper left and lower right corners. You should hear a beep tone for each one. If a
beep tone is not heard, repeat the adjustment.
h. Turn the machine OFF to store the adjustment. Turn the machine ON normally and check operation of the touch screen.
2. Touch screen display does not respond or erratically flashes after installing version 15 EPROMs. Apparently ROM O4 (p/n 7060218-13.0) was mislabeled
and is actually ROM O2 (p/n 7060217-13.0). It is possible that a few of these parts ordered before 10/6/98 have been released to the field. Recommend
ordering a new EPROM O2, and re-labeling or returning the old EPROM.
Description
CONNECTOR IN THE DEVELOPER UNIT IS DISENGAGED message.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Toner is added to the machine prior to performing the L-detect adjustment. Excessive toner mixes with the developer, preventing a true reading (density
level exceeds the density detection range). Or this area is not cleaned prior to doing the L-detect adjustment. Clean the sensor area carefully and repeat
L-detect adjustment. This information is found in 7060/FORCE 60/7150 Technical Bulletin #2B .
As an interim solution, perform the following:
a. Add toner prior to performing the L-detect adjustment, but leave the toner hopper swung away from the machine.
b. Using the door switch jig (p/n 00M6-2-00), adjust the L-detection.
c. Set the toner supply unit once the L-detect adjustment is completed. The time it takes to perform the L-detect allows toner in the hopper to settle,
preventing an excessive amount of toner from dumping into the developer.
2. A bad TCS (toner concentration sensor) or associated connector/wire is pinched or damaged. Check continuity of the wire from the TCS to drum carriage
connector to isolate problem. Replace the TCS (p/n 25SA88030) if necessary.
3. A binding toner drive system causes the toner drive gear to break, sending false feedback to main CB. Do not add toner before shipping the machine, as
the toner will compact. Inspect the toner drive system by removing motor cover (p/n 25SA32051). Replace the toner supply gear (p/n 540077410) or other
drive gears as necessary.
Description
No power.
Solution
CAUSE: The DCPS has failed.
SOLUTION: With the main switch (SW1) ON, check for 115V AC at CN397-1 and CN397-2 on the DCPS. If present, check for 24V DC at CN2-1 and CN2-2
and 5V DC at CN8-9 and CN8-10 on the DCPS. If not present, power the machine OFF and remove all connectors from the DCPS except CN382, CN395,
CN396, CN397, CN398, and CN8. Then power the machine ON. Check for 24V and 5V directly off of the DCPS at the pins previously checked. If voltages
are still not present, replace the DCPS (p/n 55FA84511).
Note: Check ICP4 and ICP5 to see if they are open. If they are, the DCPS may have been damaged by a bind in the Tray 3 and Tray 4 up/down motor, or
related parts. Do not replace the DCPS if ICP4 and ICP5 are open, without first checking for binding, as this may cause the DCPS to fail again.
180
7060
Description
F51-6, polygon mirror motor (M5) noisy at power up.
Solution
CAUSE: The adhesive holding the magnet yokes in the polygon mirror may loosen causing the yokes to contact the motor shaft.
SOLUTION: Replace the write unit (p/n 55FA-6501). See 7060 Technical Bulletin #10. Serial numbers of affected machines are provided.
CAUTION: Do not remove the polygon motor cover. The 7060 polygon motor rotates on an air bearing. Removal of this cover may allow foreign matter to
enter, eventually causing the bearing to fail, resulting in noise or failure code. The polygon cover , (p/n 25SA-6690) can be removed if desired. The motor
cover, should not be removed for any reason. The 7050 motor has no air bearing and therefore does not have the same access restriction.
181
7065
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
182
7065

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
F36-2 during initial warm-up.
Solution
CAUSE: Some early production main CBs are susceptible to experiencing this failure code during warm-up after being in low power mode.
SOLUTION: The 7065 main CB has been modified to correct this problem. Modified main CBs have a part number of 55TA-9015 or above. The main CB
can be replaced under an FTR program until J anuary 31, 2002. Please reference 7065 Technical Bulletin #37 for complete program details.
Description
DF312, intermittent double feeding.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Multi-feeding of originals has been determined to be caused by the pad material .
The part number for the pad (p/n 129H-4580) remains unchanged because the design is the same; only the material has been changed. The Parts
Department inventory has been purged of all Type 2A pads and only Type 1 or Type 3 pads will be shipped.
2. Worn separator (DFP) pad.
A new style separator pad (p/n 129H-4580) and fanning spring (p/n129H45220) are available to prevent double feeding. These parts must be installed as a
set. The serial number cut-ins when the new parts were added to the machines during production are as follows:
7055 - 55WE04211
7065 - 55TE07923
Note:
1. The fanning spring tension has been decreased. The original fanning spring was 25.5mm in length. The new fanning spring is 22mm in length and may be
either gold or silver colored.
2. The pad material has changed. The current pad is gray; the new pad is white.
3. Under no circumstances should the new pad be cleaned with alcohol. Cleaning it with alcohol will increase the friction and no-feed jamming can result. If
alcohol is used accidentally, it may take 150 original feeds to correct the problem.
4. If the current fanning spring is used with the new pad, noise will be generated during original feed.
5. The torque limiter (p/n 129H-4740) must either be left in place or replaced if it was previously removed.
6. Both pickup springs (p/n 120A45470) must be installed if they were previously disengaged.
See DF312 Technical Bulletin #2 .
183
7065
Description
Intermittent J 17-4, J 17-5, J 17-6, jamming from all trays (especially Tray 3) and/or lock-up. The paper feed timing is inconsistent.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Timing error. If this issue is occurring, upgrade to minimum level 23.0 EPROMs.
Notes:
a. See the Latest EPROM level and [[Internal Link for Faxing/Printing current 7065 EPROM information| RUN V:\text\Wordpad.exe
v:\text\newrom\7065.txt]] for more information.
b. When upgrading to level 23.0 EPROMs, the Operation Panel EPROMs also must be upgraded regardless of written or displayed levels. Dipswitch 17-0
should be set to 1. Level 23.0 EPROMs are available from Konica's website as 7065-23a.exe and through the Parts Distribution Center as the following part
numbers:
Main CB
C1 (p/n 7065122-23.0)
C2 (p/n 7065123-23.0)
I1 (p/n 7065B29-13.0)
I2 (p/n 7065B30-13.0)
Operation Panel
O1 (p/n 7065216-21.0)
O2 (p/n 7065217-20.0)
O3 (p/n 7065212-20.0)
O4 (p/n 7065218-21.0)
Note: The Operation Panel EPROMs are new and MUST be installed when installing level 23.0 EPROMs. They replace the O1/O4-12.0, O2/O3-11.0
EPROMs to allow compatibility with future machines.
DF312 (p/n DF312303-14.0)
FS106 remains at level 20.0
FS108B Copier and printer (p/n FS108BA02-40.0)
2. A bind in the LCT and PFU components driven by the LCT paper feed motor (M140). Inspect mylar guide (p/n 55FA-4150) for damage. Replace as
necessary. Refer to the drive system diagrams in the service manual to determine which drive components to check. Do not lubricate bushings. Clean them
with alcohol. Ensure that drive belts are adjusted to the proper tension.
3. The movement of the lower paper exit guide (located in the reverse paper exit unit) is sluggish, due to a weak solenoid holder spring, or binding between
the shaft of the lower paper exit guide and the bushings, resulting in improper sensor actuation. To ensure proper movement of the lower paper exit guide,
b. Remove the reverse paper exit unit.
c. Inspect the solenoid holder spring for any signs of damage or weakness. Increase the tension, or replace the spring (p/n 55TA43240) as necessary.
d. Remove the e-clips (p/n 00Z670406) from each end of the lower paper exit guide shaft.
e. Remove and clean the paper feed delivery shaft bushings. Replace the paper feed delivery shaft bushings (p/n 466076020) as necessary.
f. Thoroughly, clean the ends of the lower paper exit guide shaft. Replace the lower paper exit guide shaft (p/n 55TA43090) as necessary.
4. Rick Kubal, Konica BT Minneapolis, has identified that the black idler rollers (p/n 55TA40160) are binding against the roller cutouts in paper feed guide
plate (A) (p/n 55FA40632). Reform the cutouts in the guide plate to ensure the idler rollers spin freely.
Description
Light copies, poor fill at setup.
Solution
CAUSE: Performing various setup adjustments out of sequence.
SOLUTION: Use the following procedures to ensure proper setup of a new machine.
COPIER ONLY SETUP
Order in which setup procedures are done is critical:
1. Charge Grid Voltage.
2. L-Detection.
3. Dmax.
4. LD1 and LD2 Offset (strive for the darkest density of the spec).
5. Sub Pitch Offset.
6. Perform Gamma Correction after all others are done.
184
7065
Although, the density may appear weak at setup when compared to a model 7050 or 7150, it actually is within the technical specifications for this model. The
Engineering Department has analyzed numerous sample copies from the field on a densitometer. In all cases, the density met the technical specifications for
the model 7065. Differences will be noted in the density level when comparing 7050 print samples to a 7065. However, this difference is by design and is not
indicative of a problem with the 7065.
IF CONNECTING THE COPIER AS A PRINTER AT A LATER DATE, USE THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURE:
Refer to Image Processor Manual Models IP302/IP302 PLUS/IP303 (6/99). The manual recommends on page 2-4, step #3, under Preparation, to perform the
47 mode, output code 18 adjustment (Gamma and Dmax together) prior to performing LD1 and LD2 Offset for 600dpi. If performed, an incorrect laser output
power reference results when Gamma is adjusted. Instead, the following order is recommended:
1. Use 47 mode, output code 120 to adjust the printer mode to be automatically set in the NOVRAM.
2. Dmax only for 600dpi. (47 mode, output code 113).
3. Perform all LD1 and LD2 offset adjustments for 600dpi, which includes "Thick Paper Gradation" (strive for the darkest density of the spec).
4. Perform Gamma Correction for 600dpi (47 mode, output code 114).
Note: A dirty Dmax sensor (located on the TCSB (Toner Control Sensor Board)) can also cause light copies. Verify that the sensor is clean before performing
the above adjustments.
Description
Solution
Latest EPROM level and [[Internal Link for Faxing/Printing current 7065 EPROM information.| RUN V:\text\Wordpad.exe v:\text\newrom\7065.txt]]
FS106 level 20.1 firmware enhancement list in Adobe Acrobat format. .
See DF312 Technical Bulletin #1 for information on DF312 EPROMs.
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
After pressing RE (for reduction and enlargement), the display shows European size paper instead of PRESET1 through PRESET6.
Solution
The latest version EPROM's identified on Konica's website resolve this issue. Please review the files listed in the EPROM section of our TechWeb for specific
file versions.
Description
Initial setting selections are reset when auto reset key is pressed.
185
7065
Solution
Upgrade to the latest version EPROM's available on our TechWeb.
Description
How to program 8.5x11 default paper selection for small originals.
Solution
Upgrade to the latest version EPROM's available on our TechWeb.
186
7075
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
187
7075

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Why toner/developer is spewing and falling onto the T/S corona resulting in light areas and marks/blotches on copies.
Solution
These symptoms can normally be corrected by following the recommendations as listed in the 7075/7085 Correction Checklist for Background and Spewing
and the Toner Spill Troubleshooting document.
IMPORTANT : The magnet angle area should be checked. If the part is cracked and developer is spilling out from the developing unit refer
toattachedBulletin Number 4832 for corrective measures.To viewthe PDF, Adobe Readermust be installed. Adobe Readercan be downloaded for free
from the Adobeweb site at: http://www.adobe.com/products/acrobat/readstep2.html
Description
How to flash the 7075 firmware with the ISW Trns utility.
Solution
Note: To view some of the hyperlinks, Acrobat* Reader must be installed. Acrobat Reader can be downloaded for free from the Adobe* Web site at:
PRECAUTIONS:
1. It is not recommended to perform the flash procedure with a laptop in battery mode. It is possible that weak batteries can corrupt the process. If flashing
causes erratic operation or unexpected displays, repeat the procedure two or three times.
2. If unable to access the 25 mode due to firmware failure, or circuit board replacement, access the non-graphical ISW mode by holding the HELP and
CHECK keys while powering on. If the LCD is blank and the timer LED is flashing the HELP and CHECK mode will not function. At this point, connect the
laptop and send the Image files while the machine is ON and the timer LED is flashing. Then follow the text instructions on the display.
To flash the firmware, perform the following:
SETTING UP THE ISW UTILITY
1. Obtain the ISW Utility from the Konica FTP site.
CAUTION: Read the ISW PDF prior to attempting a flash of the machine.
Notes:
a. There are two types of data sources - ORIGINAL (batch data) and DIVIDED (divided data). The 7075 utilizes the DIVIDED selection for the Op panel
BIN files and the ORIGINAL selection for the Image Processing, Main Control, and DF313 BIN files.
CONNECTING
Connect a parallel interface cable to the ISW interface connector located in the front of the 7075 behind the toner hopper.
188
7075
occurring in between. It would be necessary, therefore, to disable ECP mode .
UPDATING
Description
PLEASE LOAD 5.5x8.5 message when small size originals are placed on the platen.
Solution
The inability of the machine to default to 8.5x11 when small originals are placed on the platen is a limitation of the product. Paper size and magnification
ratios must be manually selected.
SOLUTION: To make it easier for a customer that copies large quantities of small originals from the platen, it is recommended to select the desired paper tray
and magnification ratio and then store the selections under a job in job memory. Whenever small originals are to be copied, the customer selects this job
from job memory which will eliminate making paper size and ratio selections for every copy.
Any requests for specification changes should be directed to our marketing department using the following URL:
http://www.konicabt.com/konicode/KoniNav/MKT
Description
Shadows (halo) around portions of the print and/or gray background. F29 failure code(s) may be indicated.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Dust proof glass is dirty. Pull the drum carriage out until access to the dust proof glass is available. Remove the dust proof glass and clean it.
2. T/S wire cleaning assembly is not fully disengaging from the wire when at home position.
Install a redesigned separator cleaning assembly (p/n 55VA-2771). The assembly has been modified for a more positive disengagement of the cleaning
assembly.
3. Failed toner control sensor board (TCSB) or dirty sensor causing Dmax failure codes (check the data collection for F29 failure codes).
Clean or replace the toner control sensor board (p/n 55VA-9510), and perform the Dmax adjustment.
4. Copy quality adjustments have not been performed after developer replacement. Perform High Voltage and Drum Peculiarity adjustments in 36 mode.
5. Developer bias bearing resistance is high. Verify the resistance from the inner race to the outer race of the bearing does not exceed approximately 10
ohms while the sleeve is rotating. If necessary, replace the devleoper unit (p/n 55VA-3000).
6. The AC separation current was set incorrectly.
To increase the AC Separation current, perform the following:
a. Access the 36 mode (power the copier ON while simultaneously pressing the 3 and 6 keys).
b. Select [1] Process Adjustment.
c. Select [1] High Voltage Adjustment.
d. High voltage adjustment consists of the following:
[1] High Voltage Auto Adjustment
[2] High Voltage Adjustment (Charge)
[3] High Voltage Adjustment (Transfer)
[4] High Voltage Adjustment (Separation AC)
[5] High Voltage Adjustment (Separation DC)
[6] High Voltage Adjustment (Charging grid voltage)
[7] High Voltage Adjustment (Bias of development)
[8] Transfer Guide Confirm
e. Select [4] High Voltage Adjustment (Separation AC).
f. Decrease the current value of 117 to 65 using the numeric keypad.
g. When the adjustment completes, the screen returns to the High Voltage Adjustment Screen.
h. Press PREVIOUS SCREEN.
i. Power OFF/ON to exit the 36 mode.
Note: This is not a standard adjustment and should be performed after all other options have been met.
Description
SC56-04 after installing scanning firmware and IP601 system software.
Solution
CAUSE: Software switch 23-4 is not set to 1.
SOLUTION: To set software switch 23-4 to 1, perform the following:
189
7075
1. Hold the 'P' button down until the message, Enter 4-digit Password To Change, is displayed.
Note: The button must be pressed for about 5 seconds before the message is indicated.
2. Enter the password 9272 and press the Start Print button.
Note: This is a fixed password and cannot be changed.
3. The selections below will be offered; select the 25 mode.
[1] Basic Screen
[2] 36 mode
[3] 25 mode
[4] Key Operator mode
[5] 47 mode
[6] Exit
4. Press item 1 Software SW setting.
5. Use the UP/DOWN ARROW keys to scroll to software dipswitch 23, bit 4 (23-4).
6. Press ON.
7. Press Mode Change and then EXIT to return to normal operation.
Description
How to copy onto divider tabs.
Solution
Before attempting to copy onto divider tabs, the machine must be flash upgraded to minimum level 30.0 firmware. The latest firmware version is available on
the Konica [[FTP site| URL ftp://kbtdigital:kx15@ftp.konicabt.com]]. To copy onto divider tabs, perform the following:
1. Create tab originals, one line of text center on tab.
Note: Tabs cannot be plastic.
2. Place originals (tabs) on platen face down with the tab end facing to the left or place in the document feeder with the tabs facing to the right and printing
up.
3. Place tab paper in any tray with the tabs located in the trailing edge position.
4. Access the key operator menu by pressing the HELP button and selecting KEY OPERATOR MODE from the touchscreen.
5. Select #6 [Paper type/special size set] from the key operator screen.
6. Highlight the tray that the tabbed paper is loaded in. Use the UP/DOWN arrows to highlight tab paper then Touch OK.
7. Touch PREVIOUS SCREEN to return to the normal display.
8. From the touchscreen touch SPECIAL ORIGINAL.
9. Highlight tab paper and highlight the paper size.
10. Touch OK twice.
Note: The tab orientation of the originals and the tab copy paper must be the same.
Description
Paper specifications, 7075.
Solution
PLATEN GLASS
Specifications
FS108/FS108B/PI108
Specifications
PAPER WEIGHT COMPATIBILITY
Specifications
Description
Intermittent F18-1x, F18-2x, F18-3x or SC18-1x, SC18-2x, SC18-3x at the start of paper feed.
Solution
CAUSE: The paper tray back stops (p/n 55VA-4650) are slipping intermittently. This allows the paper stack to slide backward. When lift up occurs, the paper
does not contact the upper limit detect actuator. This results in intermittent 18-x codes.
SOLUTION: A modification kit is available to prevent the movement of the tray backstops. The kit contains modified backstops and upper limit actuators for
all three main body paper trays. Machines beginning with serial number 55VE02558 will have the modified parts factory installed. For more information, refer
to 7075/FORCE 75 Technical Bulletin #11 .
Description
190
7075
Improper paper size is indicated from all trays.
Solution
CAUSE: Tray size adjustment was not performed.
SOLUTION: Note: Before starting this procedure, cut a piece of heavy paper or card stock to a width of exactly 250mm for later use.
To adjust the tray size, perform the following:
1. Access the 36 mode screen by powering the machine ON while pressing the 3 and 6 keys.
2. From the 36 mode screen, select [2 Image adjustment].
3. From the Image adjustment screen, select [1 Tray adjustment].
4. Select the tray to be adjusted by touching NEXT ADJ USTMENT or PREVIOUS ADJ USTMENT.
5. Place the 250mm wide sheet of paper in the tray to be adjusted, move the side guides so they touch the paper, then insert the tray.
6. Touch [Start] on the touchscreen. [Complete] will be indicated.
7. Select another tray to be adjusted, if required, and repeat steps 5 and 6.
8. When adjustments are complete, remove the 250mm sheet of paper, touch PREVIOUS SCREEN, and power the machine OFF/ON.
To adjust the bypass tray paper size, perform the following:
4. Select BYPASS TRAY 1 by touching NEXT ADJ USTMENT or PREVIOUS ADJ USTMENT.
5. Place an 8.5x11R paper in the bypass tray, and move the side guides to contact the paper.
7. Select BYPASS TRAY 2 by touching NEXT ADJ USTMENT or PREVIOUS ADJ USTMENT.
8. Place an 8.5x11 paper in the bypass tray, and move the side guides to contact the paper.
10. Power copier OFF/ON to return to normal copy mode.
191
7085
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
192
7085

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
Description
E56-02 followed by a no power condition.
Solution
CAUSE: A failed image processing board.
SOLUTION: To diagnose, perform the following:
1. With the machine powered ON in 47 mode, measure the AC input to DC power supply 2. At the bottom of DC power supply 2, insert the meter leads into
the black and white connectors labeled FT3 and FT4. When the machine is powered ON, 208/230V AC should be measured. The voltage must be measured
with one meter lead in the black wire and the other lead in the white wire. Do not measure each individually to frame ground. If the correct voltage is
measured, DC power supply 2 is defective and must be replaced (p/n 56GB84520).
2. If 0V AC is measured in step 1, check the voltage at CN900-1 and CN900-5 on the power supply management board. Each pin should have 5V DC.
3. Next, check CN903 pins 1-4 on the power supply management board. If no voltage is present, on any of the pins, the power supply management board is
defective and must be replaced (p/n 55VA-9130). If 5V DC is measured on all the pins, the image processing board is defective and must be replaced (p/n
56GA-9010).
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
193
7085
Description
PU108, intermittent J 72-xx or J 73-xx during copy process or at power up.
Solution
CAUSE: Photosensor sensitivity out of adjustment.

SOLUTION: To adjust photosensor sensitivity, perform the following:
2. Open the front door of the PU108 and clean the size detect board assembly (p/n 13NK-9610).
3. Remove the access panel on the rear cover of the PU108 to view the finisher CB.
5. Rotate VR1 clockwise until the corresponding LED goes OFF, and then rotate counterclockwise until the LED goes ON, then 1 graduation past that point.
6. Repeat step 4 for VR2, VR3, VR4, and VR5.
7. Power the copier OFF/ON to return to normal copy mode.
Description
Blurred image on the trail edge of copies. Toner may also be spewing onto the drum carriage section.
Solution
CAUSE: A modification is required for machines below serial number 56GE10101. After this serial number cut in, the machines have the new style electrode
rail assembly.
SOLUTION: To improve image quality, perform the following:
1. Shift the position of the TSL 3mm toward transfer corona side.
2. Remove the lamp filter (p/n 56GE49180) in the electrode rail assembly (p/n 56GA-0700) on the ADU carriage.
Notes:
a. Due to this change, the exposure area of the light from the TSL is focused, preventing the toner from spewing onto the drum, and increased the ability of
paper separation from the drum is maintained.
b. Refer to the TSL installation procedure for more detailed information.
Description
How to program the machine to default to 8.5x11 when a small original is placed on the glass.
Solution
The inability of the machine to default to 8.5x11 when small originals are placed on the platen is a limitation of the product. Paper size and magnification
ratios must be manually selected.
SOLUTION: To make it easier for a customer that copies large quantities of small originals from the platen, it is recommended to select the desired paper tray
and magnification ratio and then store the selections under a job in job memory. Whenever small originals are to be copied, the customer selects this job
from job memory which will eliminate making paper size and ratio selections for every copy.
Any requests for specification changes should be directed to our marketing department using the following URL:
http://www.konicabt.com/konicode/KoniNav/MKT
Description
SC46-40 at power up.
Solution
CAUSE: Failed hard drive (HD105).
SOLUTION: Replace the HD105 (Item #950556).
Description
Gray bands or blur lines from front-to-rear on the trail edge of 11x17 prints/copies.
Solution
194
7085
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Worn fixing unit lower roller bearings or flat spots on the lower roller is allowing the lower roller to bounce which causes bands during image transfer.
Replace the lower fixing roller and bearings (p/n 55VA-5281).
2. Burrs on fixing drive gear/E (p/n 55VA-1670) causing inconsistent fixing unit rotation.
Replace fixing drive gear/E.
3. Worn developing unit.
Replace developer, and developing unit (p/n 55VA-3000).
4. The cleaner shaft holders (bearings) for the toner guide brush are seized resulting in improper brush rotation and a loss of ground to the brush.
Replace the shaft holders front and rear (p/n 55VA75020) and ensure there is a clean path to ground.
5. Binding bushings in the resist (registration) unit or flat spots on the resist unit rollers causing transfer blur due to improper paper speed.
Remove and clean all resist unit bushings and replace worn parts as needed.
6. Worn components or a build up of foreign material in the main drive or drum drive units. Clean or replace affected parts.
7. The 36 mode timing adjustments incorrect.
Refer to 7075/FORCE 75/7085 Technical Bulletin #15 for the troubleshooting procedures to determine the cause of the blur lines.
Notes :
a.If after all of the above recommendations have been done, and the problem remains unresolved, please contact the hotline for further assistance. Sample
prints and Management lists may be requested.
Description
Is tandem copying available?
Solution
Tandem copying for the model 7085 is available. The 7085 Tandem setup is only compatible between two 7085 machines. Please refer to the model 7085
installation instructions for detailed information and illustrations needed to perform this adjustment.
Notes:
1. To view the above link, Acrobat* Reader must be installed. Acrobat Reader can be downloaded for free from the Adobe* Web site at:
2. Use the procedure specifically for the model 7085 as it is different from the model 7075.
195
7115
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
196
7115

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
FK117, intermittently unable to print received faxes (the fax unit appears locked up).
Solution
CAUSE: Firmware upgrade required:
SOLUTION: Upgrade firmware to level 6.37. See M20040029A1 for firmware correction.
Notes:
2. The latest firmware is available at [[http://www.konicabt.com/konicode/PubBrowser/eproms| URL http://www.konicabt.com/konicode/PubBrowser/eproms]].
3. To temporarily resolve the lock up, initialize SRAM (received faxes in memory will be lost). To initialize SRAM perform the following:
a. Press Initial Set. Machine Setting will be displayed.
b. Press Stop, 0, 0, Stop, 0, 1. Service Mode will be displayed.
c. Press the up arrow once. Clear Data will be displayed.
d. Press Yes. Clear Data DRAM will be displayed.
e. Press the down arrow once. Clear Data SRAM will displayed.
f. Press Yes twice.
g. Press Auto Reset to return to normal mode.
Note: There are two methods upgrade the firmware version, via fax to fax or PC to serial port.
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
197
7115
Description
FK117, unit will not initialize after installing the fax kit.
Solution
CAUSE: Failed FK117.
SOLUTION: Reseat the fax control board and the operation panel connection. If problem persists, reinitialize by performing the following:
1. With power ON, enter the Service Mode by pressing Initial Set, Stop, 0, 0, Stop, 0, 1.
2. Press the up arrow (Delete) until 11. CLEAR DATA is displayed.
3. Press Yes.
4. Press the down arrow (Space) until SRAM CLEAR is displayed. If DRAM is selected, only memory file data will be cleared.
5. Press Yes.
6. Press No until unit is in standby.
7. If 7115 is still inoperable with the FK117 installed, replace the fax control board (p/n 27BE-9010).
Description
Unable to clear service call indication (a wrench is displayed without an error code).
Solution
CAUSE: Erroneous data is stored in one of the electronic counters.
SOLUTION: To clear the electronic counters, perform the following:
1. Press the Counter button.
2. Press STOP, 0, 0, STOP, 0, 1.
3. Enter 11 using the 10-key pad.
4. Press START, "ECL" will be displayed.
5. Press START again, the display will blank out then "ECL" will reappear.
6. Power the machine OFF/ON.
CAUTION: This procedure will clear the machines total counter which is Not recoverable.
Description
FK117, How to upgrade firmware using telephone line (Fax machine to fax machine).
Solution
To upgrade firmware using a telephone line, perform the following:
1. Receiving machine setup (machine that needs the upgrade).
a. Press the Initial Set key.
b. Press the Down arrow key three times.
Display "ADMN. MANAGEMENT? OK=YES / OR 1-3
c. Press the Yes key.
Display "ADMN. NO=------
d. Enter the Administrator number then press YES key.
Note: Default Administrator number is "000000".
e. Press the Down arrow key two times, then press YES.
Display " 3 REMOTE MONITOR? OK=YES
f. Select "Full" using right/left arrow key(s) and press the Yes key.
(Refer to number below, 3. Operation of the receiver after reception of firmware update data.. )
for more Receiver instructions)
2. Sending machine setup (machine with the latest firmware).
a. Set the firmware transmitter fax machine into the service mode.
INITIAL SET, Stop, 0, 0, Stop, 0, 1.
b. Select "5. FAX SET" or "5. FUNCTION" by pressing the (Up) or (Down) key. Then press (YES).
c. Select "UPLOAD FIRMWARE" by pressing the (Up) or (Down) key. Then Press (Yes). (9-1-___-___-____)
d. Type the telephone number, to which the firmware receiver fax machine is connected. (The relevant one touch dial number may be used if
the telephone number has been previously programmed in it.)
Note: Up to 16 telephone numbers can be specified simultaneously for the firmware receiver fax machine.
e. Press the (Start) key to start the transfer of data.
f. The message Panel of the transmitter fax machine displays the same screen as that appearing during ordinary faxing.
g. When the data transfer is completed, the ordinary standby screen reappears on the Message Panel.
(rec.
mach) 3. Operation of the receiver during/after reception of firmware data.
a. The firmware receiver after reception of the firmware data. The following message appears on the Message Panel, indicating that transfer of data is
started:
Display " FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD"
Note: The download should take approximately 15 minutes.
b. When all the boxes are displayed, the Data transfer is completed and the machine will display:
"PROGRAM FLASH ROM"
"PLEASE WAIT!"
198
7115
c. After a short time the machine will display:
"PROGRAM COMPLETE"
"POWER SUPPLY OFF/ON"
d. Turn the machine OFF/ON to complete the firmware update.
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
C0070 after running several copies. Code will clear but returns.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Broken drive on the toner bottle drive assembly. Check the interface between the drive shaft (p/n 27AE10320) and the coupling (p/n 27AE12580).
Replace the damaged component as necessary.
2. The Toner Bottle Home Position Sensor (PC7) is contaminated with toner. When the toner bottle is turned to add toner, the sensor does not go to a HIGH
indication leading to the error code. Clean PC7 of contamination and verify operation.
3. Toner motor (M6) failure. Check the drive signal at PJ 19-6 on PWB(A). When the toner motor runs, the voltage should change from 0VDC to 24VDC.
Disconnect M6 from the toner addition drive system to eliminate any binding. Replace M6 as necessary (p/n 27AE80020).
4. Master Board PWB(A) failure. The drive signal at PJ 19-6 on PWB(A) should change from 0VDC to 24VDC when the toner motor is run. If the signal stays
at 0V, replace PWB(A) (p/n 27AE87010).
Description
FK117, How to program auto shut-off with an FK117 installed.
Solution
To program auto shut-off with an FK117 installed, perform the following:
1. Press 'Initial Set'.
2. Scroll to 'Admin. Management' (use Lens arrows to scroll).
3. Press 'Yes'.
4. Enter zero (0) six times.
5. Press 'Yes' twice.
6. Use Density set arrow to select 'Enable'.
7. Press 'Yes'.
8. Scroll to 'Machine Setting' (use Lens arrows to scroll).
9. Press 'Yes'.
10. Scroll to 'Auto Shut Off' (use Lens arrows to scroll).
11. Press 'Yes'.
12. Use Density Set arrows to select 'OFF'.
13. Press 'Yes'.
14. Press 'Auto Reset' to return to standard Text display.
Note: To allow Machine Settings to properly work, you must access the Administrator Management Menu first when an FK117 is installed.
Description
How to initialize the memory on the 7115.
Solution
To initialize the memory on the 7115 (excluding electronic counters), perform the following:
1. Press the Counter button.
2. Press STOP, 0, 0, STOP, 0, 1.
3. Enter 10 using the 10-key pad.
4. Press the START key. CLr will display.
5. Press the START key which will blank out the display. CLr will reappear.
6. Turn the 7115 OFF/ON.
199
7115
200
7118
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
201
7118

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
FK117, How to upgrade firmware using telephone line (Fax machine to fax machine).
Solution
To upgrade firmware using a telephone line, perform the following:
1. Receiving machine setup (machine that needs the upgrade).
a. Press the Initial Set key.
b. Press the Down arrow key three times.
Display "ADMN. MANAGEMENT? OK=YES / OR 1-3
c. Press the Yes key.
Display "ADMN. NO=------
d. Enter the Administrator number then press YES key.
Note: Default Administrator number is "000000".
e. Press the Down arrow key two times, then press YES.
Display " 3 REMOTE MONITOR? OK=YES
f. Select "Full" using right/left arrow key(s) and press the Yes key.
2. Sending machine setup (machine with the latest firmware).
a. Set the firmware transmitter fax machine into the service mode.
INITIAL SET, Stop, 0, 0, Stop, 0, 1.
b. Select "5. FAX SET" or "5. FUNCTION" by pressing the (Up) or (Down) key. Then press (YES).
c. Select "UPLOAD FIRMWARE" by pressing the (Up) or (Down) key. Then Press (Yes).
d. Type the telephone number, to which the firmware receiver fax machine is connected. (The relevant one touch dial number may be used if the
telephone number has been previously programmed in it.)
Note: Up to 16 telephone numbers can be specified simultaneously for the firmware receiver fax machine.
202
7118
e. Press the (Start) key to start the transfer of data.
f. The message Panel of the transmitter fax machine displays the same screen as that appearing during ordinary faxing.
g. When the data transfer is completed, the ordinary standby screen reappears on the Message Panel.
3. Operation of the receiver after reception of firmware data.
a. The firmware receiver after reception of the firmware data. The following message appears on the Message Panel, indicating that transfer of data is
started:
Display " FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD"
Note: The download should take approximately 15 minutes.
b. When all the boxes are displayed, the Data transfer is completed and the machine will display:
"PROGRAM FLASH ROM"
"PLEASE WAIT!"
c. After a short time the machine will display:
"PROGRAM COMPLETE"
"POWER SUPPLY OFF/ON"
d. Turn the machine OFF/ON to complete the firmware update.
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
How to program auto shut-off with an FK117 installed.
Solution
To program auto shut-off with an FK117 installed, perform the following:
1. Press 'Initial Set'.
2. Scroll to 'Admin. Management' (use Lens arrows to scroll).
3. Press 'Yes'.
4. Enter zero (0) six times.
5. Press 'Yes' twice.
6. Use Density set arrow to select 'Enable'.
7. Press 'Yes'. Note: you must press Auto Reset, to go all the way out.
8. Press Initial to 'Machine Setting' (use Lens arrows to scroll).
9. Press 'Yes'.
10. Scroll to 'Auto Shut Off' (use Lens arrows to scroll).
11. Press 'Yes'.
12. Use Density Set arrows to select 'OFF'.
13. Press 'Yes'.
14. Press 'Auto Reset' to return to standard Text display.
Note: To allow Machine Settings to properly work, you must access the Administrator Management Menu first when an FK117 is installed.
Description
FK117, receives PC faxes to memory but will not print out the pages.
Solution
CAUSE: Incompatible Coding Scheme between PC modem and fax kit.
SOLUTION: Change the coding scheme from J BIG (J oint Bi-level Image expert Group) to MH (Modified Hoffman). To change the coding scheme, perform
the following:
1. Press initial set, machine setting will be displayed.
2. Press Stop-00-Stop-01, Service Mode will be displayed.
3. Press the YES key.
4. Using the lens down arrow scroll to CODING SCHEME.
6. Using the density set left arrow scroll to MH.
7. Press the YES key to store the setting change.
8. Press the Auto Reset key to return to the main screen.
203
7118
Description
How to scan documents to a PC.
Solution
At this time, scanning to the network is not available. To scan to a PC, the fax kit (FK117) has to be installed and an RS-232C cable used.
Description
IF102 (Internet Fax Kit/Network Scan Kit) Installation information.
Solution
When the IF102 is installed on the 7115F/7118F, please follow the installation instructions included with the IF102 Kit (Item#950274). The IF102 Kit also
contains a CD ROM with three files. The file for the US market it 'v626tp1.bin'. Do not use any of the other files. The file can also be downloaded from the
Konica web site in the EPROM area or FTP site as file '7115F-7118F626KUS.exe'.
See 7115F/7118F Technical Bulletin #2 for details.
Description
How to disable the Auto Shut Off Mode on the 7118.
Solution
To disable the Power Save Mode, perform the following:
1. Press the Auto Reset key for 3 seconds.
2. Press 5 from the 10-key pad.
3. Press the START key.
4. Enter the six digit Administrator Code from the 10-key pad (default is 000000).
5. Press START. Ad- will display.
6. Enter 2 from the 10-key pad.
7. Press START to show current value (default is 1).
8. Press CLEAR/#key to reset the current value.
10. Press Start to accept setting.
11. Press Auto Reset. U-- will display.
12. Press 1 and then START. C-- will display.
14. Press START. Current setting will display.
15. Press CLEAR/#to reset the current value.
16. Enter 0 from the 10-key pad to disable Auto Shut Off.
17. Press START to confirm setting.
18. Press Panel Reset until initial screen is displayed.
Description
FK117, unit will not boot up at installation.
Solution
SOLUTION: Reseat the fax control board and the operation panel connection. If problem persists, reinitialize by performing the following:
1. With power ON, enter the Service Mode by pressing Initial Set, Stop, 0, 0, Stop, 0, 1.
3. Press Yes.
5. Press Yes.
7. If 7118 is still inoperable with the FK117 installed, replace the fax control board (p/n 27BE-9010).
204
7130
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
205
7130

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
F51-6 code at power up. 24V DC is present at CN22-5 on the PRDB.
Solution
Description
F26-1 at power up.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
206
7130
a. 4-0 set to0
b. 4-1 set to0
c. 4-2 set to0
d. 4-3 set to0
Notes :
Description
F46-8 at power up.
Solution
CAUSE: Laser index error caused by a failed index sensor board.
Description
Paper feed jamming (J 11, J 12, J 13, J 14, or J 16).
Solution
CAUSE: The paper is feeding out too slowly, timing out and causing jam codes.
SOLUTION: Install kit SE95-3900. The first paper feed shaft is a larger diameter, adding more weight to the first paper feed roller, thus providing a more
positive first paper feed.
Notes:
1. See 7020/7022/7025/7030/7035/7130/7135 Technical Bulletin #16 for details.
Description
Intermittent F87-03 and/or Printer Board Failure messages.
Solution
CAUSE: During PCL* or PCL+PostScript* system code flash, the hard drive became corrupt due to incorrect formatting of the CF card.
IMPORTANT NOTE: Do NOT use the Microsoft* Windows FORMAT command prior to updating code on the CF card.
SOLUTION: Reformat the CF card to VX Works* style formatting:
1. Connect the IP422 with the computer via serial port (RS-232C crossover cable) and startup hyper terminal on PC so that service port (*1) becomes ready
to use. (*1) Please see IP422 Service Handbook for the details of service port)
2. Turn ON main power switch of 7022/7130.
3. While "xxxxxx Ext Memory Passed" is being displayed on Hyper terminal of PC, press [k] - [a] keys.
4. When "Enter new date(mm-yy-dd):" is displayed, enter the date and press [Enter] key.
5. When "Enter new time(hh:mm:ss):" is displayed, enter the time and press [Enter] key.
6. Type "vxformat" and then press [Enter] key.
Note: This format command puts the directories on the hard drive but all files are removed from the CF card.
7. After formatting the CF and hard drive, turn OFF main switch of 7022/7130. Remove the IP422 from main body and then the CF from IP422.
8. Put the CF into a compact flash reader so that PC can recognize it.
9. Copy all folders and files in the ps343e5617 folder to the CF by using Explorer.
10. Install the CF to the IP422.
11. Install IP422 to the 7022/7130 and turn ON the main switch. The 7022/7130 will boot without issue.
Notes:
a. If the files on the PCMCIA hard drive are viewed after following this procedure by using the PCMCIA slot on your Windows based laptop, the above
procedure will need to be followed again as it corrupts the drive every time with a 87-3 code. The IP will also keep rebooting over and over.
207
7130
b. The readme file that is provided with the PCL-PS CF installation file indicates the PS to be version 5.6.17 but it is really 5.6.5.
Description
How to configure Scan to E-mail.
Solution
In order to utilize Scan to E-mail, the printer must be connected to a network and have a dedicated E-mail server attached. Scan to E-mail can be configured
by using the operation panel or simply browsing to the NIC.
To configure Scan to E-mail using the operation panel, perform the following:
1. Press the SCAN/PRINT key for the Printer Mode.
2. Press Setting on the touchscreen.
3. Press 5 for Network Setup. Press OK
4. Press the NEXT and then 9 for E-mail Setup. Press OK.
5. Select (SMTP Server Name) and press OK. Input the IP address or DNS name of the E-mail server and press OK.
6. Select (SMTP Port Number) and press OK. Enter 25 for the port number and press OK.
7. No action is required for (SMTP Access Timeout seconds setting).
8. No action required for (Max Message Size 100 kilobytes).
9. Enter the desired information in the SUBJ ECT, SENDER, and MESSAGE BODY fields and press OK.
10. Press CANCEL to back out of the configuration mode. At this point a message will be indicated, (NIC Parameters is changed), Press yes, and then enter
sysadm for the password and press OK to accept the change.
11. Press the Mode key to return to copy mode.
To configure Scan to E-mail by browsing to the NIC, perform the following:
1. Access the Web utilities using the MAP utility or browse to the address of the IP422 NIC.
2. Select Scanner Setup and the (locate Default SMTP Message Parameters) section.
3. Input the IP address or DNS name of the E-mail server where (SMTP Server IP Address or DNS Name is indicated).
4. Enter 25 where (SMTP Server Port Number) is indicated.
6. No action required for (Maximum Message Size * 100 kilobytes).
7. In the SCAN TO E-MAIL section, enter an internal E-mail account or E-mail address of the person to be notified when the E-mail is rejected or denied or
the name of the machine (Example7130/IP422@konicabt.com) where FROM is indicated.
8. Enter the desired information in the SUBJ ECT, SENDER, and MESSAGE BODY fields.
9. Enter sysadm for the password and select ACCEPT SETTINGS.
Description
DB410, J 16 and noise when feeding.
Solution
CAUSE: Disengagement of the paper conveyance roller drive gear (p/n 13HA77060) and idler gear (p/n 13HA77050) during paper feed operation.
SOLUTION: There is a modification available (see DB410 Technical Bulletin #1 ) for the DB410 drive unit that provides support for the idler shaft to prevent
the idler shaft from flexing during feed operation.
Notes
1. These parts were installed on the DB410 during production beginning with serial number 13NF15878.
Description
Solution
Notes :
208
7135
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
209
7135

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
F26-1 at power up.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
a. 4-0 set to0
b. 4-1 set to0
c. 4-2 set to0
210
7135
d. 4-3 set to0
Notes :
Description
F35-xx codes.
Solution
CAUSE: Failed temperature sensor assembly.
SOLUTION: Replace the temperature sensor assembly with the new style temperature sensor assembly (p/n 40LA-5340).
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
SOLUTION: Replace the hard drive (Item #950258) and apply print controller firmware version 5.8.2 or later. The newer software allows the hard drive to
211
7135
stop spinning during periods when it is not being accessed. Firmware downloaded previous to September 23, 2003 will not have the proper patch for stopping
the hard drive rotation during periods of inactivity.
As an alternative to the HD107, Konica Minolta is offering a 1GB or 2GB compact flash card and PCMCIA adapter for the IP422, IP423, and IP432. The 2GB
compact flash card is recommended for most cases, as the 1GB compact flash card may not have enough space if the customer creates large jobs.
Note: The IP (print controller) system code must be upgarded to a minimum version of 5.9.0 to support the use of CF card in place of the HD-107.
Description
Solution
Description
Specifications for Memory Upgrade Kit.
Solution
The memory used in the 7135 and IP423 is a 144 pin SODIMM module, 100MHz, 10ns or faster, with gold contacts.
The 7135 is equipped with 32MB of memory embedded on the main CB. The main CB has one additional slot that can accept the following memory module,
for a maximum of 288MB:
256MB, MU413 (Item #950257)
Note: Memory is installed on the main CB.
The IP423 is shipped with 64MB of base memory and can be upgraded to a maximum of 128MB of RAM. Available memory module (SODIMM):
64MB, MU-404 (Item #950218)
128MB, MU-405 (Item #950219)
212
7145
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
213
7145

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
F35-xx codes at power up.
Solution
CAUSE: Failed fuser lamps (L2), and (L3).
SOLUTION: Replace L2 (p/n 40LE83020) and L3 (p/n 40LE83030).
Description
Intermittent E56-01.
Solution
The main CB has been modified to prevent this code .
Description
There is now a type 1 and type 2 System Control board available for the model 7145. There is System Control firmware for each type board, be sure to use
the correct version of firmware for the correct type System Control board.
Solution
To identify if the System Control board as type 1 or type 2, view the ROM version in the 25 mode. System Control Board Type (type1 or type2) will be
displayed on operation panel.
System Control board (p/n 40LA-930x) is a type 1 board and needs to be flashed with System Control firmware 32 or lower.
System Control board (p/n 40L0-930x) is a type 2 board and needs to be flashed with System Control firmware 41 or higher.
Note: ISW tool Ver. 3.48 is available for the new style board.
Description
No paper feed from Tray 1 and Tray 2.
Solution
CAUSE: Failed main DB (main body driver board).
SOLUTION: Verify M9 operation in the 47 mode code 21 multi mode *1*. If M9 does not turn ON, replace the DB (p/n 40LA-9029).
214
7145
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
FS112, how to have fax receptions exit into one finisher tray and copy jobs into a different finisher tray.
Solution
SOLUTION: To have fax receptions exit into one finisher tray and copy jobs into a different finisher tray, perform the following:
17. Press the J OB MEMORY button located to the right on the control panel.
Description
How to reset the machine, initialize memory to factory defaults.
Solution
To reset memory to factory defaults, perform the following:
1. Enter the 25 mode (power the machine ON, while pressing the 2 and 5 keys).
2. Select Software SW.
3. Using the up/down arrows, scroll to address 3-4 (All Memory Reset).
4. Select OFF.
6. Enter the 47 mode (turn the machine ON, while pressing the 4 and 7 keys).
7. Enter 9, 2, press the START key, press the STOP/CLEAR key.
8. Enter 0, 9, 6, press the START key, press the STOP/CLEAR key.
9. Enter 0, 9, 3, and press the START key.
Note: When the memory board is initialized, all data is deleted.
215
7145
Description
Key counter installation, 7145.
Solution
To obtain a key counter mounting kit order (p/n SE95-4010).
Notes:
1. This kit does not contain the key counter (p/n U181-1010) or key counter receptacle (p/n U021-0020). However the adapter wiring harness (p/n
1206K0010) is included in the key counter mounting kit along with key counter kit installation procedures.
2. Picture of key counter mounted to the 7145.
3. There is an extra wiring harness that is included with the key counter that is not used in the installation procedure.
Description
Intermittent clicking noise after making copies, printing, or receiving faxes.
Solution
CAUSE: Firmware bug. SD9 was operating to long in idle mode.
SOLUTION: Upgrade firmware to System 11 B10, and Image 11.
Note: The operation of SD9 has been modified to reduce the clicking noise.
216
7150
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
217
7150

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
EPROM history, 7150.
Solution
EPROM history, 7150 .
Latest level 7150 EPROM hyperlink and [[Internal Link for Faxing/Printing EPROM information.| RUN V:\text\Wordpad.exe v:\text\newrom\7150.txt]]
See 7150 Technical Bulletin #8A for more details on the new features of Level 14.0 EPROMs.
Description
No power.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The DCPS has failed. To check the DCPS, perform the following:
a. With the main switch (SW1) ON, check for 115V AC at CN397-1 and CN397-2 on the DCPS.
b. If present, check for 24V DC at CN2-1 and CN2-2 and 5V DC at CN8-9 and CN8-10 on the DCPS.
c. If not present, power the machine OFF and remove all connectors from the DCPS except CN395, CN396, CN397, CN398 and CN8 power the machine
ON.
d. Check for 24V DC on the bare pins at CN2-1 and CN2-2 and 5V DC at CN8-9 and CN8-10 on the DCPS.
e. If voltages are still not present, power machine OFF disconnect CN5 and check for 5V DC on the bare pins at CN8-10 and CN8-9 on the DCPS.
f. If 5V DC is still not present, replace the DCPS (p/n 55FA84511).
2. Either IC 22 or IC 23, which are located on the main CB is not firmly seated. This results in the DCPS not receiving the RL1 control signal at CN8-4, which
originates at CN60-B7 on the main CB. As a result, the DCPS is not energized. Visually inspect both IC22 and IC23, ensure that all the EPROM legs are
properly inserted into the main CB, then reseat both IC22 and IC23.
3. The connector that plugs into CN4, on the main CB, is missing. CN4-1 and CN4-2 are 5V DC inputs that come from the DCPS board CN8-10 and CN8-9.
The Copier will not power up without this 5V DC input to the main CB.
Note: Although this problem is extremely rare, it has been confirmed with one machine in the field at setup. If you have a machine that has this problem,
please submit a new problem through Expert Web* including serial number and meter reading. These submissions will allow proper tracking of field impact.
218
7150
Description
FS103B, not recognized. Paper jams at the entrance of the finisher, but no jam code is indicated.
Solution
CAUSE: The copier needs an EPROM level upgrade to provide recognition of the FS103B finisher.
SOLUTION: Upgrade the EPROMs to latest level 7150 copier/printing/tandem printing EPROMs or the latest level 7150 tandem copier EPROMs .
Internal Link for Faxing/Printing [[7150 copier/printing/tandem printing EPROM information.| RUN V:\text\Wordpad.exe v:\text\newrom\7150.txt]] or the [[7150
tandem copier EPROM information.| RUN V:\text\Wordpad.exe v:\text\newrom\7150t.txt]]
Further information is available in the Info Source publication to dealers, released 12/11/98, issue no. 82-98.
Description
NO TABLE DATA. UNDEFINED SCREEN CODE 1003H message when Universal tray is selected.
Solution
CAUSE: Incorrect EPROMs installed on the operation panel board.
SOLUTION: Install the minimum of level 12 EPROMs (available from Konica's website as 7150-12A.EXE and through the Parts Distribution Center).
Main C B
IC22 (p/n 7150122-12.0)
IC23 (p/n 7150123-12.0)
Operation panel
ROM1, IC16 (p/n 7150216-14.0)
ROM2, IC17 (p/n 7150217-13.0)
ROM3, IC12 (p/n 7150212-13.0)
ROM4, IC18 (p/n 7150218-13.0)
IC29 (p/n 7150B9-11.0)
IC30 (p/n 7150B0-11.0)
The above list is the minimum configuration.
Level 12 enhancements:
Corrects problem (unique to level 11) when interrupt job completes, the remainder of the original or interrupted job is lost or cleared.
Description
Intermittent PLEASE WAIT COPIER WARMING UP message.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Incompatible EPROM's are installed. Install level 13 EPROMs which are available from Konica's website as 7150-13A.EXE and through the Parts
Distribution Center as the following part numbers:
Main CB
IC22 (p/n 7150122-13.0)
IC23 (p/n 7150123-13.0)
Operation panel
ROM1, IC16 (p/n 7150216-14.0)
ROM2, IC17 (p/n 7150217-13.0)
ROM3, IC12 (p/n 7150212-13.0)
ROM4, IC18 (p/n 7150218-14.0)
IC29 (p/n 7150B9-13.0)
IC30 (p/n 7150B0-13.0)
2. The fuser lever interlock (MS4) is not properly actuated. The actuator for MS4 may be malformed. Physically inspect the operation of MS4 and reform the
actuator if necessary.
219
7150
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
How to adjust the lead edge registration.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The wrong mode was selected when performing the lead edge adjustment. There are two modes, copier and printer. Ensure the correct mode is selected
before performing the adjustment. To perform the lead edge adjustment perform the following:
d. The copier mode will adjust the lead edge position for all copies made in the VERY HIGH MODE. Copier collective will adjust all trays to the same
value. Pressing the next adjustment button will allow individual adjustment of each tray. Note: After using the copier collective mode and the machine is
powered OFF/ON the data will read 0. The setting has been stored and can be viewed in the individual settings.
e. Set an 11x17 original on the platen glass.
f. Press the copy screen button on the touch screen. Note: The VERY HIGH light on the operation panel will go on to indicate this mode is being adjusted.
g. Select 11x17 for the paper size.
h. Press the start print button, and visually check the lead edge timing.
i. If the lead edge timing is not within standard, press the C button while holding down the P button; to return to the restart timing adjustment screen.
j. Enter a value from the numeric keypad on the touch screen, then press the set key. Input range -99 to 99. Note: One step is equal to 0.1 mm. Press
k. Repeat the above steps until the standard is achieved.
Standard:
l. Power the machine OFF/ON to return to normal operation.
To perform the lead edge adjustment for all copies NOT utilizing the VERY HIGH mode (E-RDH memory), perform the following:
d. Press the next adjustment button to scroll to (printer: collective). Note: This adjustment will adjust all trays to the same value. Pressing the next
adjustment button will allow individual adjustment of each tray, or SIDE TWO. Note: After using the printer collective mode and the machine is powered
OFF/ON the data will read 0. The setting has been stored and can be viewed in the individual settings.
e. Press the copy screen button on the touch screen.
f. Press the start print button, the machine will exit a self-generated 11x17 test chart. Visually check the lead edge timing.
g. If the lead edge timing is not within standard, press the C button while holding down the P button; to return to the restart timing adjustment screen.
h. Enter a value from the numeric keypad on the touch screen, then press the set key. Input range -99 to 99. Note: One step is equal to 0.1 mm. Press
i. Repeat the above steps until the standard is achieved.
Standard:
j. Power the machine OFF/ON to return to normal operation.
2. The adjustment value was changed by only one digit. Enter a value at least 10 higher, or 10 smaller, than the existing value. This will input a value that
will change the registration by approximately 1mm. This allows the change to be observed. Note: 1 step change = 0.1mm. Once the registration is close,
220
7150
smaller values can be used to fine tune the image.
Description
E46, F57-01 or other error codes after installing the video interface kit.
Solution
CAUSE: The EPROMs (labeled 55FAC1-13 & 55FAC2-13) that come with the video interface kit (PCUA 950-791) were installed into the 7150.
SOLUTION: Do not use the EPROMs that come with the kit. Level 13 EPROMs are available from Konica's website as 7150-13A.EXE and through the Parts
Distribution Center as the following part numbers:
Main CB
IC22 (p/n 7150122-13.0)
IC23 (p/n 7150123-13.0)
Operation panel
ROM1, IC16 (p/n 7150216-14.0)
ROM2, IC17 (p/n 7150217-13.0)
ROM3, IC12 (p/n 7150212-13.0)
ROM4, IC18 (p/n 7150218-14.0)
IC29 (p/n 7150B9-13.0)
IC30 (p/n 7150B0-13.0)
Description
DF310, intermittent jam position 14 when using the RADF. This jam will register as J 62 in the data logs.
Solution
Important note concerning changes to the DF310.
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The platen glass is dirty. Clean the platen glass with an approved glass cleaner.
2. The RADF is out of position. Check the RADF position using the RADF positioning blocks (p/n 12ER12073). See the DF310 service manual page 5 and 6
(dated 9/97).
3. The RADF height is not within specification. Use the height spacers (p/n 12ER12110). See the DF310 service manual page 6 and 7 (dated 9/97).
4. The paper supply rubber (B) on the feed assembly is worn. Replace the supply rubber (p/n 12VR40100). The recommended replacement interval of the
supply rubber is every 150,000 feeds.
5. The paper supply rubber (B) is installed backwards on the feed roller assembly. Remove the feed roller assembly and verify that the white dot on the
supply rubber (B) (p/n 12VR40100) faces the same side as the coupling (p/n 12VR40460).
6. The original feed sensor (PS305) does not recognize the original. Clean PS305, and reseat the connector to the sensor. Verify the operation of PS305.
Measure the voltage at CN102-5 (yellow wire) on the RADF CB to TP5 (power GND). With no paper present the reading should be 0.1V DC. With paper
present the reading should be 4.9V DC. If necessary replace PS305 (p/n 12ER85521).
7. The physical distance between the original transmission sensor (PS302) and the original feed sensor (PS305) is too far apart. Physically shift the position
of both sensors as closely together as possible, without creating a constant jam indication.
8. The original push pressure plate has excessive tension (upward force). Adjust the pressure plate by loosening the mounting screw and altering the spring
tension with the adjustment screw (one or both are paint locked screws). With the plate raised, use a gram gauge to push the plate down. The pressure plate
should break away from the feed tire at 115 to 135 grams. Note: For accurate adjustment it is recommended that a 300g gram gauge (p/n 00TL-3040) be
used.
9. Machines within the serial number range 55NE00001 to 55NE00835 are equipped with paper supply rubber (B) (p/n 12VR40100) and torque limiters (p/n
12VR40620) on the DF310, which can potentially cause original misfeeds. Order the paper feed kit (p/n DF310-001) which contains a new torque limiter and
paper supply rubber (B). Note: For best machine performance it is strongly recommended that all main body EPROMs be upgraded to the latest release
when the kit is installed. See DF310 Technical Bulletin #1, .
EPROM history, DF310 .
EPROM history, 7150 .
[[Internal Link for Faxing/Printing EPROM information.| RUN V:\text\Wordpad.exe v:\text\newrom\7150.txt]]
221
7150
222
7155
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
223
7155

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
How to program the machine to default to 8.5x11 when a small size original is placed on the platen glass.
Solution
To program the machine to default to 8.5x11 when a small size original is placed on the platen glass, perform the following:
1. Flash the machine to firmware versions Image control 52, and Printer control 36 or higher.
2. Hold the [P] key down until the message [Enter 4-digit password to change Mode] is displayed at the top of the touchscreen.
Note: The key must be held down for about 5 seconds before the message is displayed.
3. Enter the password 9272 and press the START key.
4. Touch [4. Key operator mode] on the touchscreen.
5. Touch the down-arrow which is located at the lower left corner of the touchscreen one (1) time.
6. Touch [13. Memory switch setting] on the touchscreen.
7. Touch the down-arrow on the lower left corner of the touchscreen two (2) times.
8. Using the down-arrow located on the right side of the touchscreen, scroll to [17. Platen org. size detect (SMALL)].
9. Repeatedly touch [Change Setting Contents] until 8.5x11 is displayed as the setting.
10. Touch [RETURN] on the lower right corner of the touchscreen.
11. Touch [MODE CHANGE] on the lower right corner of the touchscreen.
12. Touch [EXIT] on the lower right corner of the touchscreen to return to the normal mode.
Description
Toner leakage (or scattering) and/or developer leakage, causing soiled copies, developer carryover on copies, white spots in solid image areas, T/S corona
contamination and other copy quality defects.
Solution
CAUSE: The above symptoms can be caused by the following conditions:
1. Write unit failure - the toner density control system attempts to compensate for decreased image density by increasing the amount of toner added,
eventually resulting in toner leakage.
2. Large amounts of paper dust or recycled toner mixes with the developer causing the toner charge value to decrease which effects its adherence to the
developer and causes toner to leak.
3. A gap between the toner supply opening and developing unit through which toner can leak and scatter onto copies.
As a result of the above, developer/toner spillage occurs contaminating the charging grid which results in abnormal potential control. The covered (blocked)
charge corona grid causes the drum potential to increase and developer to adhere to the photoconductive drum surface. This developer is then deposited
onto the transfer guide plate, T/S corona, and copies.
SOLUTION: Please refer to 7155/7165 Technical Bulletin #8 for detailed information. Use the 7155/7165 Toner Misting Counter Measures Checklist to
help resolve the problem.
To prevent the toner from spilling the REGIST CLEANER ASSY has been changed. See KOM060445.pdf for details.
NOTE: Disregard instruction 5b in Tech Bulletin #8 regarding setting change of dipsw. 23-2. (Can cause SC29-03 after developer change in high humidity
areas.) The bulletin is being revised to remove this step and add more information.
CAUTION: If there is no problem with the write unit and the dipswitch settings are correct, replace the developing unit cover .
Note: To view a PDF hyperlink, Acrobat* Reader must be installed. Acrobat Reader can be downloaded for free from the Adobe* Web site at:
224
7155
Description
DF316, intermittent J 62 codes, multi-feeding and or erratic operation.
Solution
CAUSE: The unit has not been modified with the new style DFP roller modification (p/n 13QA-K010FOC) as outlined in DF316 Technical Bulletin #1 .
Note: To view the above link, Acrobat* Reader must be installed. Acrobat Reader can be downloaded for free from the Adobe* Web site at:
SOLUTION: Install the new style DFP roller modification for units with serial numbers below the cut in.
Note: The serial number cut-ins are as follows:
7155 56EE00462 and above do not requrie the modification
7165 56AE01665 and above do not require the modification
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
CAUSE: Failure of the ADU drive board due to a short. ICP1 on the ADU boardmay beOPEN.
Note : Service code may have occurred after a jam in the ADU.
SOLUTION: Replace the ADU DB.
PART NUMBER MODEL
55VA-9071 7075/FORCE 75
56EA-90407155
56AA-90407165
Description
Improper paper size displayed from all trays.
Solution
CAUSE: Tray size adjustment was not performed.
SOLUTION: Note: Before starting this procedure, cut a piece of heavy paper or card stock to a width of exactly 210mm for later use.
To adjust the tray size, perform the following:
4. Select the tray to be adjusted by touching NEXT or Back.
5. Place the 210mm wide sheet of paper in the tray to be adjusted, move the side guides so they touch the paper, then insert the tray.
225
7155
7. Select another tray to be adjusted, if required, and repeat steps 5 and 6.
8. When adjustments are complete, remove the 210mm sheet of paper, touch PREVIOUS SCREEN, and power the machine OFF/ON.
To adjust the bypass tray paper size, perform the following:
4. Select BYPASS TRAY 1 by touching NEXT or BACK.
5. Place an 8.5x11R paper in the bypass tray, and move the side guides to contact the paper.
7. Select BYPASS TRAY 2 by touching NEXT or BACK.
8. Place an 8.5x11 paper in the bypass tray, and move the side guides to contact the paper.
10. Power copier OFF/ON to return to normal copy mode.
226
7165
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
227
7165

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
As a result of the above, developer/toner spillage occurs contaminating the charging grid which results in abnormal potential control. The covered (blocked)
charge corona grid causes the drum potential to increase and developer to adhere to the photoconductive drum surface. This developer is then deposited
onto the transfer guide plate, T/S corona, and copies.
SOLUTION: Please refer to 7155/7165 Technical Bulletin #8 for detailed information. Use the 7155/7165 Toner Misting Counter Measures Checklist to
help resolve the problem.
NOTE: Disregard instruction 5b in Tech Bulletin #8 regarding setting change of dipsw. 23-2. (Can cause SC29-03 after developer change in high humidity
areas.) The bulletin is being revised to remove this step and add more information.
CAUTION: If there is no problem with the write unit and the dipswitch settings are correct, replace the developing unit cover .
Note: To view a PDF hyperlink, Acrobat* Reader must be installed. Acrobat Reader can be downloaded for free from the Adobe* Web site at:
Description
DF316, intermittent J 62 codes, multi-feeding and or erratic feeding operation.
Solution
CAUSE: The unit has not been modified with the new style DFP roller modification (p/n 13QA-K010FOC) as outlined in DF316 Technical Bulletin #1 .
SOLUTION: Install the new style DFP roller modification for units with serial numbers below the cut in.
Note: The serial number cut-ins are as follows:
7155 56EE00462 and above do not require the modification
7165 56AE01665 and above do not require the modification
228
7165
Description
How to program the machine to default to 8.5x11 when a small size original is placed on the platen glass.
Solution
To program the machine to default to 8.5x11 when a small size original is placed on the platen glass, perform the following:
1. Flash the machine to firmware versions Image control 52, and Printer control 36 or higher.
2. Hold the [P] key down until the message [Enter 4-digit password to change Mode] is displayed at the top of the touchscreen.
Note: The key must be held down for about 5 seconds before the message is displayed.
3. Enter the password 9272 and press the START key.
4. Touch [4. Key operator mode] on the touchscreen.
5. Touch the down-arrow which is located at the lower left corner of the touchscreen one (1) time.
6. Touch [13. Memory switch setting] on the touchscreen.
7. Touch the down-arrow on the lower left corner of the touchscreen two (2) times.
8. Using the down-arrow located on the right side of the touchscreen, scroll to [17. Platen org. size detect (SMALL)].
9. Repeatedly touch [Change Setting Contents] until 8.5x11 is displayed as the setting.
10. Touch [RETURN] on the lower right corner of the touchscreen.
11. Touch [MODE CHANGE] on the lower right corner of the touchscreen.
12. Touch [EXIT] on the lower right corner of the touchscreen to return to the normal mode.
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
PART NUMBER MODEL
55VA-9071 7075/FORCE 75
56EA-90407155
56AA-90407165
Description
Overtoning, background, light copies and a possible intermittent SC46-08 code.
Solution
CAUSE: LD1 or LD2 has failed and the image generated by the laser is not being output on the test pages. This results in only half of the test pattern being
printed in test mode. Generate a test page in the 36 mode, Test Pattern Output mode. Enter a data of 5 which will print out a pattern for LD1 and LD2.
SOLUTION: Replace the write unit (p/n 56AE-6500).
229
7216
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
230
7216

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
C03FF indicated after initializing the copier (with fax kit) memory.
Solution
CAUSE: Incorrect setting in Model Setting (Adjustment Mode 11).
SOLUTION: To set the Model Setting, perform the following:
1. Enter the Service Mode by pressing Utility, Stop, 0, 0, Stop, 0, 1.
2. Press the down arrow until 2) Adjust is displayed. Press Yes.
3. Press the up arrow until Model Setting is displayed. Press Yes.
231
7216
4. Press the down arrow until the correct PPM is displayed. Press Yes.
5. Press Auto Reset to get back to idle mode.
Description
Solution
Description
When printing from MicrosoftPublisher andperforming a mail merge, thecopiesare all stapled together.
Solution
CAUSE: This is a known anomaly with Microsoftapplications.

SOLUTION: Please read the attached Microsoftarticleregarding a resolution for the problem with MicrosoftPublisher 2000 and 2003. To viewthe PDF,
Adobe Readermust be installed. Adobe Readercan be downloaded for free from the Adobeweb site at:
SPECIAL NOTE : Solution contribution by Mark D'Attilio, Production Print/SSD
Description
Solution
Description
FX-118, How to perform the ATDC sensor Adjustment.
Solution
To access the ATDC Sensor Adjust mode, perform the following:
1. Access the Tech Rep Mode (press initial set, STOP, 0, 0, STOP, 0, and 1).
2. Use the Lens up/down arrows to scroll to #5 Fax Set (FUNCTION).
3. Press YES
4. Use the Lens up/down arrows to scroll to ATDC Sensor Adjust.
5. Press YES to start the adjustment. (You will hear the motor run.)
6. Press Stop after running for 45 seconds.
Description
How to print to a printer on a MicrosoftWindows XP PC from a Macintoshrunning OS version 10.4.x.
Solution
Please perfrom the step-by-step procedure mentioned in the attached document.
Description
Solution

232
7216
2.Select File.
3. SelectPrint.
6. Select OK.
8. Select File.
9. Select Print.
11. Select OK.
233
7218
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
234
7218

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
PLUG-IN COUNTER message at power up.
Solution
CAUSE: Plug-in counter copy is improperly programmed in the security functions.
SOLUTION: To properly program the plug-in counter copy, perform the following:
1. Press the Utility key.
2. Press Stop, 0, 0, Stop, 0, 1.
3. Press Stop, 9.
235
7218
4. Scroll to [PLUG-IN COUNTER COPY] and select ENABLE as the programming setting.
Description
Unable to print after installing the IP418.
Solution
CAUSE: Firmware incompatibility between the 7218 and the IP418 does not allow proper communication.
SOLUTION: The 7218 and IP418 firmware and system software needs to be upgraded to the following levels:
7218 copier version 7.01
7218 fax version 7.01
IP418 system software ver. 1.77
KN419 version 2.05
Notes:
1. These files are available for download from the [[Konica Minolta FTP site| URL ftp://kbtdigital:kx15@ftp.konicabt.com]].
2. If the update utility does not allow communication with the 7218, the KN419, IP418 and the fax kit must be removed from the system and the jumper on
CJ 1 (PWBC/C) must be moved to pins 1/2 before the update will proceed.
Description
IF118, Internet Fax/Network Scan Kit and Network Interface Card for the 7218.
Solution
The IF118 Internet Fax/Network Scan Kit along with the KN419 Network Interface Card enable the 7218 to support T.37 Internet Faxing and network scanning
in the form of scan-to-E-mail and scan-to-FTP. The IF118 supports TIF and PDF file formats for network scanning and the TIF-F file format for Internet
Faxing. The 7218 requires the installation of the Fax kit in order for Internet Faxing and network scanning to function properly. If the fax kit (FK118) is not
installed, Internet Faxing and network scanning will not be possible.
ITEM NUMBER ITEM FUNCTIONALITY
960202 Internet Fax/Network Scan Kit (IF118) T.37 Internet Faxing (TIF-F) Scan-to-e-mail (TIFF, PDF) Scan-to-FTP (TIFF, PDF)
960198 Network Interface Card (KN419) Provides network connection for scan option
960201 Fax Kit (FK118) Required to enable Internet Fax/Network Scan functions
Description
C03FF.
Solution
CAUSE: Adjustment mode 11 is not set to correct value.
SOLUTION: To set Adjustment mode 11 to proper value, perform the following:
1. Enter Tech Rep mode (Counter, Stop, 0, 0, Stop, 0, 1).
2. Press Stop and then Start. AJ - will display.
3. Enter 11 from the keypad.
4. Press Start. Current value will display.
5. Press Clear.
6. Enter a value of 1 from the keypad.
7. Press Start to save the setting.
8. Press Auto Reset to exit Adjustment Mode.
Note : The code may be indicated:
a. After installing new memory chip (U29).
b. After performing a Memory Clear.
c. After installing thefax kit.
Description
FK118, how to change the default Transmission Mode to ADF Tx instead of Memory Tx.
Solution
To change the default Transmission Mode, perform the following:
1. Press the Utility button 7 times. TX Operation will display.
2.. Press Yes.
3. Press the down arrow until Default Tx displays.
4. Press Yes.
5. Press the right arrow so that the star (*) is next to ADF Tx.
6. Press Yes to save the setting. Press Panel Reset to return to normal mode.
236
7218
Description
C03FF indicated after initializing the copier (with fax kit) memory.
Solution
CAUSE: Incorrect setting in Model Setting (Adjustment Mode 11).
SOLUTION: To set the Model Setting, perform the following:
1. Enter the Service Mode by pressing Utility, Stop, 0, 0, Stop, 0, 1.
2. Press the down arrow until 2) Adjust is displayed. Press Yes.
3. Press the up arrow until Model Setting is displayed. Press Yes.
4. Press the down arrow until the correct PPM is displayed. Press Yes.
5. Press Auto Reset to get back to idle mode.
Description
How to access the service mode.
Solution
To access the Service Mode, perform the following:
1. Press Utility.
2. Press Stop, 0, 0, Stop, 0, and 1.
237
7220
Description
FK118, unable to receive faxes, but able to send.
Solution
CAUSE: Ring Frequency detection is set to low and Ring on time to ignore ring off time at 1st cycle is disabled.
SOLUTION: Change soft switch 6 (Ring on time to ignore ring off time at 1st cycle(ms)) default is 06=00000000
some of the switchs may have been changed, make all zeros, next soft switch, 09 switch (Ring Frequency detection)
09=00000000 change to 09=10000000 to 20-75Hz, bit 8.
Description
FK118, how to change the default Transmission Mode to ADF Tx instead of Memory Tx.
Solution
To change the default Transmission Mode, perform the following:
1. Press the Utility button 7 times. TX Operation will display.
2.. Press Yes.
3. Press the down arrow until Default Tx displays.
4. Press Yes.
5. Press the right arrow so that the star (*) is next to ADF Tx.
6. Press Yes to save the setting. Press Panel Reset to return to normal mode.
Description
Thermostat replacement precautions for all models using Faston Terminals.
Solution
CAUSE: Damage to the Faston terminal when replacing the thermostat to the Faston terminal can result in the generation of heat and cause the plastic
insulating material around the terminal to melt.
SOLUTION: See Bulletin Number 5005 for details.
Description
When scanning mixed originals to box, the retrieved documents are rotated when viewed.
Solution
CAUSE: An incorrect original direction default is chosen.
SOLUTION: To change the original direction default, perform the following:
1. Access the Key Operator mode.
2. Select Scanner.
3. Select Initial setting.
4. Scroll down to Orig. direction default.
5. Select EDIT until the desired default is displayed.
6. Select RETURN three times to return to copier mode.
Description
FK102, 'Please load A4R' message when receiving.
Solution
CAUSE: Destination switchover in the dipswitches is set incorrectly for metric or J apan.
SOLUTION: Access the 25 mode and select 1. Software dipswitches. 5-0 to 1 and 5-1 to 0 for (inch).
Description
No finisher indicated; rotate and sort are grayed out.
Solution
CAUSE: DSW for finisher isolation has been enabled to 1 (ON).
238
7220
SOLUTION: Access the 25 mode and 1. Software dipswitch, bit 20, switch 4 to 0 for OFF.
Note: Rotate and Sort will be grayed out if the finisher is set for isolation. The FS should be removed completely to use the sort and rotate mode.
Description
Information for parts number - Control Panel.
Solution
See KOM050583 for details.
Note: To view the above PDF, Acrobat* Reader must be installed. Acrobat Reader can be downloaded for free from the Adobe* Web site at:
Description
Part number for parts of hopper unit.
Solution
Description
NIC F/W ver.2.07 for NC6 and KN419.
Solution
See DLBT0501588EN00 for details.
Description
AFR19 and DF321 distortion problem.
Solution
Refer to bulletin 5033 details.
239
7222
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
240
7222

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
DB-411, J 13 and/or J 16 codes when feeding.May possibly be accompanied by a grinding noise.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Failed drive motor.
Replace the drive motor (p/n 26WA80011).

2. Paper unable to feed out due to tray lift not turning OFF. The DB paper feed sensor (PS104) is not activating. The usual cause for this issue is that M100
(DB Paper Feed Motor) is not turning.
Please check if the DB Paper Feed Motor is turning by entering the 47-service mode and selecting code 21, multi code 2. If the motor turns, there is probably
an issue with PS104. If the motor does not turn, the DB Driving Board has failed. Please check that the DB Paper Feed Motor is connected properly with the
DB Driving Board Assembly. If it is connected properly replace the DB Driving Board Assembly (p/n 13SY-9010).

3. Bent DB-411 frame.
Inspect the DB-411 for possible damage.Remove the back cover of the DB411. Look up in the left hand corner where the machine contacts the DB411 .
Please see Bulletin 5247 and the J 13_J 16 Error Codes document for details.

4. M100 not turning back ON when attempting to feed a new set of copies when running multiples. This occurs only when duplexing (1-2, 2-2) andone-sided
copies feed fine.
Replace M100, feed motor (p/n 26WA80010).
Note : Remove back cover of the LCT base. This will allow viewing of M100.
241
7222
SPECIAL NOTE : Solution provided by Peter Meaney, EASTERN COPY PRODUCTS, INC.

5. Insufficient paper feed clutch spring tension.
Replace the paper feed connecting roller/3 (p/n 13HA40022) or thepaper gear/2assembly (p/n 26NA-1680) as needed.
Note : The spring is connected to the paper feed connecting roller, and cannot be order as a separate part.

6. Paper gear/2 assembly seized.
Lubricated or replacethe Paper gear/2 assembly (p/n 26NA-1681).
SPECIAL NOTE : Solution provided by Pascal Plouffe, LE GROUPE A & A
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
Description
How to set up SMB (PC) Scanning.
Solution
3. User Name and Password: This is what the customer uses to log their PC onto the network.
Description
Solution
242
7222
15. Press the OUTPUT button located on the touchscreen.
17. Select J OB MEMORY.
Description

Code F51-2 at start-up.
Solution

CAUSE: Code F51-2 may be caused by a failed M11 fixing motor. To determine whether or not the motor has failed, use this procedure:

1. Enter the 47 mode (I/O check mode)
2. Input "40".
3. Input multicode "0".

If the M11 motor turns, it is good; if it does not turn, the motor has failed.

SOLUTION:
Replace the M11 motor (p/n 56AA80072) if it has failed.
Description
ADJ USTMENT ERROR 0005 while performing L-detect adjustment.
Solution
CAUSE: The TDS sensor failed.
SOLUTION: Check the TDS sensor at CN25-A2 for 12V DC at the printer driver board. If there is less than 12V DC, disconnect the connector and check the
voltage. If it is 12V DC, replace the TDS sensor (p/n 26NA88040).
243
7228
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
244
7228

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:



copies feed fine.
245
7228


Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
Description

Solution


2. Input "40".


SOLUTION:
246
7228
Description
Solution
Description
The touchscreen flashes ON for a moment at power up, then the machine goes dead with only the green main power indicator lamp illuminated.
Solution
CAUSE: The system control board has failed.
SOLUTION: Replace the system CB (p/n 27LA-9300).
Description
F70-01 error code.
Solution
See Bulletin Number 5002 for details.
247
7235
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
248
7235

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:



copies feed fine.
249
7235


Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
Description
Erratic HD103A recognition errors.
Solution
CAUSE: Failure of the system board crystal oscillator to consistently generate a properly formed output waveform.
SOLUTION: Inspect and replace the HDD ribbon cable (p/n U229-0010 ) if the connector does not fully seat in the board socket. If the cable appears to have
a good connection, replace the system CB (p/n 27NA--9304).
Note: Serial Number cut-in 27NE01501.
Description
HDD Error message displayed at power up. Unable to format the HD103A.
Solution
CAUSE: Failed HD103A.
250
7235
SOLUTION: Replace the HD103A (Item #960418).
Description

Solution


2. Input "40".


SOLUTION:
Description
Solution
251
7255
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
252
7255

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
DF322, image is shifted approximately 1.5 inches in the lead-to-trail direction, and performing the RADF restart timing has no effect.
Solution
CAUSE: The three Light Shield Sheets attached to the Platen Guide Part/Left (p/n 13QA41031) are worn or damaged.
SOLUTION: Replace the three Light Shield Sheets (p/n 13QA45291).
253
7255
Description
Intermittent SC49-01.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Failed printer control board assembly.
Ensure that the system code on the IP511A is at minimum version 6.2.0. Remove the IP511A from the main body and inspect the connection to the main
body for any damage or pins out of place. Reseat the IP511A onto the main body and verify operation. If the service code continues to occur, replace the
printer control board assembly (p/n 13RN-7320).
2. The IP511A hard drive start up code is corrupt.
Ghost the hard drive with the available image via the Konica Minolta Download Selector. Access the Selector from SSD Web Support (CS Expert Support) by
clicking on 'Download MSDS, Drivers, Firmware and more'. In most cases ghosting the IP511A hard drive will resolve the SC49-01 issue.
Note : The IP511a-26.3.0-ghost.exe image can be used with a licensed version of Symantec Ghost(version 6.5 or greater)on a formatted PC or laptop
hard drive. This file was created by request for Konica Minolta service organizations who use the Symantec Ghostapplication.
CAUTION : The drive from which this image was createdis 41GB. Use ONLY on a drive of the same size when "ghosting" this image to another drive. This
code is NOT compatible with Ghost version 9.0.
Ifunable to purchasea licensed copy of Symantec Ghost, please use the standard method of updating IP-511A code.
To purchase Symantec Ghost(now Norton Ghost) visit the Norton from Symantec Store
http://shop.symantecstore.com/store/symnahho/DisplayHomePage/en_US/ThemeID.106300
3. The IP511A hard drive has failed.
Replace the failed hard drive (p/n 14KX-9040).
Note : The IP511A will not boot up and cannot be seen in HyperTerminal.
4. Failed IP511A memory module.
To check the memory module, perform the following:
a. Power the printer OFF (using the main power switch located on the rear left side of the main body).
b. Remove any additional memory modules, which have been installed on the IP unit.
c. Power the copier ON. If, the IP boots up successfully one or more of the memory modules has failed. Replace the memory modules [MU-404/64MB] (Item
#950218) or [MU405/128MB] (Item #950219) as necessary.
5. The power being supplied to the printer is suspect.
Install a power monitor to determine if the AC outlet is causing the problem.
Description
Solution
Description
Copier/Printer Product Specifications and System Configurator, 7255.
Solution
7255 Copier/Printer Product Specifications and System Configurator .
Description
How to isolate Tray 4.
Solution
To isolate Tray 4, perform the following:
1. Access the 25 mode.
2. Touch [Software SW setting] on the touchscreen.
4. Touch [ON (1)] on the touchscreen.
254
7255
Description
FS111M, can the PK120 (Item #960923) be installed in the FS111M (Item #960329) when configured with a 7255?
Solution
No, the FS111M finisher will not accept a PK120 punch unit. The PK120 punch unit can be installed in either an FS110M or FS210M finisher. The FS110M
and FS210M finisher can be installed on the 7155, 7165, Force 65, 7255, or 7272.
255
7272
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
256
7272

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
257
7272
Description
Solution
Description
FS111M, can the PK120 (Item #960923) be installed in the FS111M (Item #960329) when configured with a 7272?
Solution
No, the FS111M finisher will not accept a PK120 punch unit. The PK120 punch unit can be installed in either an FS110M or FS210M finisher. The FS110M
and FS210M finisher can be installed on the 7155, 7165, Force 65, 7255, or 7272.
Description
How to set the default network scanning resolution (DPI).
Solution
To set the default network scanning resolution, perform the following:
1. Access the 25 mode (hold down the 2 and 5 keys at power up) or turn the main switch ON and then wait for the Ready to Copy message. Hold the P
button down until the message 'Enter 4-digit Password To Change' is displayed.
Note: The button must be held down for about 5 seconds.
2. Enter the password 9272 and press the Start Print button.
3. Select [1 Software DIP SW].
4. Set the following software dipswitches to the value indicated:
DIPSWITCHES
RESOLUTION 19-6 19-7
400 0 0
600 1 0
200 0 1
300 1 1
5. Press RETURN, MODE CHANGE and then BASIC SCREEN to return to normal operation.
Description
FS110M, how to identify if the correct finisher is installed.
Solution
The model 7272 can accept the following finishers: FS110M, FS111M, and the FS210M. The original FS110, FS111, and FS210 are not compatible with this
258
7272
model. As all the finishers appear the same, identification can be made using either the PCUA number or the serial number prefix.
FS110M PCUA 960327 S/N prefix 14J S
FS111M PCUA 960329 S/N prefix 13YY
FS210M PCUA 960328 S/N prefix 14J T
Description
How to isolate Tray 4.
Solution
To isolate Tray 4, perform the following:
1. Access the 25 mode.
2. Touch [Software SW setting] on the touchscreen.
4. Touch [ON (1)] on the touchscreen.
259
7310
Description
Black copies/SYSTEM ERROR 03.
Black copies and SYSTEM ERROR 03 occur intermittently in copy or print mode.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Static charge build up. Per 7310 Technical Bulletin #3A .
a. Plating must be removed from a specific area of the print head.
b. A ground kit (p/n 25VE-1500), which has two grounding plates and a grounding spring, must be installed
c. Install a ferrite core (p/n 7310SYS03) onto the print head wiring harness (CN417 on the Main CB).
The ground kit has been installed on production machines beginning with serial number 25VL02441. The ferrite core has been installed in production
machines with serial numbers beginning with the prefix 25VL.
Before modifying and machines, be sure to complete the checks and procedures listed in bulletin 3A.
2. Abnormal detection of low or high temperature of FUSER.
Follow the steps related to the fuser as outlined in Technical Bulletin #3A .
Description
What printer driver should be used with the 7310?
Solution
The HP LaserJ et III* or HP LaserJ et IIID drivers can be used with the 7310. If your software does not have these specific printer drivers (printer types), you
may have to choose other settings, such as 'Laser Printer'. In the case of older software, contact your software vendor for updated printer drivers.
Description
SYSTEM ERROR 09. Abnormal detection of toner in the developing unit. Toner detection sensor detects more than 1.925V DC or less than 1.875V DC.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Poor contact between the toner addition motor gear and the side gear of the developing unit. Wrap black electrical tape around the locating pins in the top
cover to increase the gear mesh.
2. Poor connection of the toner motor connectors. Reseat the connectors on the toner motor.
3. While initializing a developing unit, the print head does not come on and neutralize the charge on the drum. This will cause the drum unit to pull developer
from the developing unit, eventually causing this error. Check the print head and it's connector. Replace the print head (p/n 25VE87040) as needed.
Note: If developer has been pulled from the developing unit, replacement of the developing unit is required.
See page 7-1 in the 7310 Service Manual for more information on the toner circuit.
4. Bad toner sensor or developing unit. Replace the developing unit (PCUA 950736).
5. Bad printer head (power supply) board. Replace the printer head board (p/n 25VE84510) as needed.
6. Failed High Voltage Unit. Replace High Voltage Unit (p/n 25VE87030).
Description
How to initialize the 7310.
Note: This procedure should ONLY be performed by a technician.
Solution
To initialize the 7310, perform the following steps.
1. Turn machine off and disconnect the power cord.
2. Remove the back cover (four screws).
3. Set dip switch #1, bit 1 to the up position (On). The switch is located in the top right corner of the main CB.
4. Connect the power cord and turn the power back on.
5. Press [MENU] twice and [ENTER].
6. Display should show SETUP OT-KEY
7. Press [MENU] repeatedly until the display shows SET MEMORY SW.
8. Press [ENTER].
9. Press [4], [6], [ENTER], [0] and [START].
10. Press [ENTER], [1] and [START].
260
7310
15. Press the yellow [STOP] key.
16. Turn the power off and disconnect the power cord.
17. Return dip switch #1, bit 1, to the down position (Off).
Note: Leave bit 2 in the up position.
18. Replace the back cover, connect the power cord and turn the power back on.
Image of the Dip Switches .
Picture of the operation panel .
Description
Dark background on copies from the glass only. Printouts are O.K.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Dirty optical section. Thoroughly clean the optics.
2. Lamp terminals for the exposure lamp are corroded. Clean the lamp terminals.
3. The light quantity of the exposure lamp (AVR) is too low. Adjust the light quantity of the exposure lamp using the following steps.
a. Turn the 7310 off.
b. Remove the back panel (four screws).
c. Turn on dip switch 1 on the Main CB.
d. Turn the 7310 on and press [ENTER].
e. The display should show TEST MODE.
f. Press one-touch key [11].
g. The display should show AVR ADJ USTMENT 1-3.
h. Press one of the following selections.
Press [1] to adjust the center setting of the density slide knob.
Press [2] to adjust the minimum position setting of the density slide knob.
Press [3] to adjust the maximum position setting of the density slide knob.
i. Enter a value from 00-64 and then press [START].
Note: The default ranges for each position is as follows.
Position #1 (center), 52-58.
Position #2 (minimum), 48-51.
Position #3 (maximum), 60-66.
The higher the number, the lighter the copy.
j. To program another density setting, go to step 8. To end programming, turn the 7310 off, set dip switch 1, on the Main CB, to the off position. Install the
back panel and turn the 7310 back on.
See page 4-4 in the 7310 Service Manual.
4. The exposure lamp is bad. Replace the exposure lamp (p/n 25VE83020).
5. The drum is worn. Replace the drum.
Description
How to enable/disable the TCR (Transmit Confirmation Report).
Solution
To enable/disable the TCR, perform the following steps.
1. Press [MENU] twice, [ENTER] and [MENU] five times.
2. Press [ENTER], [0], [9] and [ENTER].
3. Press [1] to enable TCR or [2] to disable TCR*.
4. Press the green [START] key and then the yellow [STOP] key.
* TCR will still print if a communication error occurs or if [STOP] is pressed.
Description
INITIALIZE DEVE shows in the display.
Solution
CAUSE: The developer unit needs to be initialized.
SOLUTION: initialize the developer unit by pressing [MENU] three times, [ENTER], [1] and [START/COPY].
See page 2-17 in the User's Reference Guide for details.
261
7310
Description
SYSTEM ERROR 05
Solution
CAUSE: Abnormal analog scanner operation when copying. Timing of mirror home position.
SOLUTION: The 3 red shipping knobs may remain installed, holding the optics unit in place. If optics will not scan at all, the optics motor driver board (p/n
25VE87080) may be bad. Also, check the home position sensor.
Description
Dark lines or bands on all prints, lead-to-trail.
Solution
CAUSE: Check for toner on the drum, (usually appearing as a band around the drum). This indicates the cleaning blade is not working properly.
SOLUTION: Replace the drum unit.
Description
SYSTEM ERROR 03
Solution
CAUSE: Fuser abnormality.
SOLUTION: Check the fuser lamp, thermostat, thermistor, main relay, etc.
262
7410
Description
General information on the printer options.
Solution
There are 4 different printer options for the 7410. Cables are not included with the interface and must be purchased separately.
1. PCL5e* (bi-directional parallel), PCUA 950717.
Standard memory is 2MB.
Optional memory is 4MB (PCUA 950723) or 16 MB (PCUA 950760).
2. PCL5e PostScript* Level 2 (bi-directional parallel), PCUA 950718.
Standard memory is 2MB.
Optional memory is 4MB (PCUA 950723) or 16 MB (PCUA 950760).
3. GDI printing (bi-directional parallel), PCUA 950716.
Standard memory is .5MB.
Optional memory is 4MB (PCUA 950723).
4. CLASS 1 interface kit (standard modem cable, serial), PCUA 950719.
Description
Solution
To initialize the 7410, perform the following steps.
1. Initialize the test mode by setting Dip SW 102-1 on.
Note: Dip SW 102 is located on the main CB.
2. Press [MENU], [2], [8] and [ENTER] twice.
3. Press [4], [6] and [ENTER].
4. Select one of the following.
0: clear all data.
1: File/Command Data Clear.
2: OT-key/AD-key/P-key/B-key Data Clear.
3: Report Data Clear.
4: Memory SW Table Data Clear.
5: Counter Data Clear (except DRUM/DEVELOPER/TOTAL COUNTER/TONER CONTROL].
6: Activity Report TX/RX Count Clear.
7. Press [ENTER], [1] and [ENTER] to return to the standby mode.
Description
What print driver should be used on a Microsoft* Windows NT 4.0 workstation?
Solution
To select a print driver for the 7410, the type of printer interface must be determined first. To determine the installed printer interface, perform the following:
1. Press [MENU], [7], [4] and [ENTER] twice to print the printer configuration. The printout will indicate the type of interface if PCL* or PostScript*. If the
command is not accepted, a GDI interface is installed.
2. If a GDI interface is installed, as in a 7410+, no driver is available for Windows NT.
3. If PCL or PostScript is indicated, then select the HP LaserJ et* 4 PLUS for PCL* or HP LaserJ et 4/4M PLUS PS printer driver for PostScript.
Note: These drivers are available through Windows NT. Konica Windows NT drivers are not required for the 7410
Description
How to set the transmission report (TCR).
Solution
To set the transmission report, adjust Memory Switch 09 using the following steps.
3. Select one of the following options:
[0] to disable printing of transmission report.
[1] to enable printing of transmission report.
[2] to enable printing of transmission report only if a communication error occurs.
263
7410
4. Press [ENTER].
5. Press [1] to end programming.
Description
What is needed to use the 7410 as a scanner?
Solution
To use the 7410 as a scanner, a CLASS 1 interface kit (PCUA#950-719) is required. Either a CLASS 1 interface software such as WinFaxPro* or HydraFax*
or the Konica TWAIN Software Driver (PCUA#950-725) must be used.
Note: If the serial number of the 7410 is below 25TK03014, the printer will require a level D EPROM (p/n 7410-11-D) to use the TWAIN driver.
Description
Cannot transmit or receive from certain fax machines. The 7410 will answer and send its handshakes but the other fax does not respond. May occur with
Canon* or Sharp* fax machines.
Solution
CAUSE: Level A, B, D and F work OK with these models, but level C EPROMs are programmed to send the handshake once, and may result in disconnects
when attempting to communicate to the 7410.
SOLUTION: Confirm EPROM level by performing a MENU 55. Replace with level F EPROM (p/n 7410F211-F). The level of the EPROM is designated in
the upper right hand corner of the first page of the MENU 55 print out. EPROMs are also available for download from Konica's website, www.konicabt.com.
To perform the 55 print out, perform the following:
1. Remove back access panel
2. Locate the dip switches on the control board and turn dip switch 1 ON.
3. Using the operation panel, press MENU and 5 twice.
4. Press ENTER twice.
5. After print out is complete, turn main switch OFF and dip switch 1 OFF. Reinstall panel and turn machine ON.
Description
How to determine which printer interface card is installed on a 7410.
Solution
The installed options are printed at the bottom of the menu 55 preset list from service mode.
1. Put the 7410 in service mode by removing the metal cover on the back of the machine. It is held in place by a single screw.
2. Set the service switch 1 in the up or on position.
3. Press [MENU] [5] [5] [ENTER] [ENTER].
4. The installed options will be printed at the bottom of the first page of the printout from step 3 above.
The appropriate driver can then be installed.
Description
Can the 7410 be networked?
Solution
In order to network the 7410 you must have the PCL5e* or PCL5e/PostScript*. A third party print server device may be required if you cannot connect the
7410 to the server.
An Ethernet Print Server option (PCUA 950-724) is available for the 7410 that allows a customer with 2-5 users to print to the 7410. This option must be used
in conjunction with either the PCL5e* Printer I/F Kit (PCUA 950-717) or the PCL5e/PostScript* I/F Kit (PCUA 950-718). Both of these interfaces support the
network printing capability of the 7410 and the Ethernet Print Server Option.
Description
How to clear the red communication error lamp.
Solution
To clear the communication error lamp, perform the following steps.
264
7410
1. Press [MODE] repeatedly until you are in Fax Mode.
2. Press the [STOP] key.
Description
Can the 7410 print in a Macintosh* environment?
Solution
Yes, the 7410 will print in a Macintosh environment given the following conditions.
SINGLE CONNECTION
1. A PCL5e* Printer I/F Kit (PCUA 950-717) must be installed in the 7410.
2. HP LaserJ et 4* emulation must be used.
3. A GDT PowerPrint* adapter must be connected to the 7410 and GDT PowerPrint software must be loaded on the Macintosh when connecting to the
Konica 7410. PowerPrint is a combined software and hardware printer driver package which enables Macintosh computers to print to output devices which
would otherwise be incompatible. It consists of a serial to parallel cable, a background printing program and drivers that let the Macintosh users print to many
printers. GDT PowerPrint is available at many local computer stores.
The GDT PowerPrint allows one 7410 to operate in a single Macintosh environment. GDT does offer two network products. One is a LocalTalk version with a
LocalTalk-to-parallel converter and the other is designed for Netware environments.
265
7415
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
266
7415

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
FK116, blank LCD display, no power or machine not coming to a ready state after installing the FK116. If the fax kit is removed, 7415 will operate properly.
Solution
SOLUTION: Reseat the connectors on PWB(I) for the fax control board and the operation panel. If problem persists, reinitialize by performing the following:
1. With power ON, enter the Utility Mode by pressing Utility, Stop, 0, 0, Stop, 0, 1.
3. Press Yes.
5. Press Yes.
7. If 7415 is still inoperable with the FK116, replace the fax control board. To obtain the fax control board, the fax kit (PCUA 950703) must be ordered since
the fax control board does not have a part number.
Note: When the unit is initialized, the counters on the machine are reset to zero. Entry of the previous count is not available. Previous to initialization, keep a
record of the count in the service log for future reference.
Description
Solution
To initialize the 7415 without the fax option installed, perform the following:
See Service Manual page D32 for procedure.
1. Enter the Tech Rep Mode by pressing Clear/Stop, Exposure Control Lighter ( ).
2. Press the 1 key (up arrow) until c is displayed.
3. Press Start.
4. Press the 1 key (up arrow) until c6 is displayed.
5. Press Start.
6. Using the 10 key (down arrow) and 1 key (up arrow), select data of 8 (User's/Tech Rep Choice).
7. Press Start to confirm.
8. Turn 7415 OFF/ON to complete clearing of data.
To initialize the 7415 with the fax option, perform the following:
3. Press Yes.
5. Press Yes.
267
7415
Description
FK116, operation panel keys will not work after installing the fax kit.
Solution
SOLUTION: Reseat the wiring harness from J P3 on the fax CB to J P12 on the PWB-I and J P2 on the fax CB to J P19 on the PWB-A. If the problem remains,
then replace the fax control board. To obtain the fax control board, the fax kit (PCUA 950703) must be ordered since the fax control board does not have a
part number.
Description
H2 is displayed.
Solution
CAUSE: Machine is set for Metric paper size.
SOLUTION: To program the machine for English paper size, perform the following:
1. Enter the Tech Rep Mode by pressing Clear/Stop, Exposure Control Lighter ( ).
2. Press the 1 key (up arrow) until c is displayed.
3. Press Start.
4. Press the 1 key (up arrow) until c1 is displayed.
5. Press Start.
6. Press the 1 key (up arrow) until 1 is displayed.
7. Press Start.
8. Press Clear/stop two (2) times, to return to the copy mode.
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Light copies on one side of the image when printing from the platen glass or ADF.
Solution
CAUSE: Dirty or failed print head.
SOLUTION: It is possible to carefully access the lens and mirrors of the print head to clean. Use a dry soft lens cloth for the cleaning. If problem persists
after cleaning, replace the print head (p/n 11YA-9050).
Description
FK116, display on the operation panel is continuously scrolling.
Solution
268
7415
SOLUTION: Reseat the connectors on PWB(I) for the fax control board and the operation panel. If problem persists, reinitialize by performing the following:
3. Press Yes.
5. Press Yes.
7. If the 7415 is still inoperable with the FK116, replace the fax control board. To obtain the fax control board, the fax kit (PCUA 950703) must be ordered
since the fax control board does not have a part number.
Description
When copying legal sized paper, H2 is displayed and the image is missing the last three inches.
Solution
CAUSE: The paper cassette is not configured for legal sized paper.
SOLUTION: To change the paper size designation for the cassette to legal, performing the following:
1. Enter the User Mode by pressing the Copy Density Lighter key (
Description
How to disable Power Save Mode.
Solution
To disable the Power Save Mode without the fax option installed, perform the following:
1. Enter the User Mode by pressing the Exposure Control Lighter ( ) so that the * is next to Enable.
6. Press Yes to confirm. Machine Setting will display.
7. Press Yes.
8. Press the down arrow. 2) Power Save Mode will display. Press Yes.
9. Press the right arrow so that * is next to Off. Press Yes to confirm.
10. Press Panel Reset to exit Utility function.
269
7490M
Description
ST207, jam positions 12 or 13 when sorting.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. J am positions 12 or 13 when sorting. The vertical conveyance belts are slipping which allows the paper to hesitate and or buckle at the turn around guide.
Clean or replace the vertical conveyance belts (p/n 554048320) and the belt driving roller (p/n 554048090). Ensure the belts and roller are completely dry
after cleaning.
2. J am position 13. Incorrect positioning of the exit detect LED, the sensor always detects a jam.
Perform the following:
a. Turn ON hardware dipswitch 1 on the sorter CB.
b. Turn VR1 clockwise until LED1 turns ON, then turn VR1 counterclockwise and confirm the scale mark at which LED1 turns OFF. At this point, if VR1 is
e. Form the mounting plate using long-nose pliers so that the sensor can detect properly.
f. Turn OFF hardware dipswitch 1 on the sorter CB.
3. J am position 13. A level 12.0 EPROM is installed on the sorter CB. Ensure IC3 on the sorter CB is at least a level 13.1 (p/n ST20763-13.1). This EPROM
eliminates user induced jams.
Description
ST207, code 77-3.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. One of the interlock switches (SW1, SW2, SW3, or SW4) is open, preventing 28V DC to the sorter main relay (RL1). Perform a continuity check from the
red wire on RL1 to CN812-1 (red wire) on the sorter CB. The reading should be approximately .8 ohms, repair or replace any bad switches as necessary.
2. Resistor R64 next to fuse F1 on the sorter CB has failed, resulting in no RL1 drive. Turn the machine OFF and check CN812-1 to frame ground. If there is
continuity to frame ground, inspect all interlock switches and the wiring to them for any shorts to frame (disengage the bin shift motor and slide the bin unit
back and forth while watching the meter). Repair as necessary and replace the sorter CB (p/n 5540-9011).
3. CN936 is disconnected, causing an open in the interlock circuit. This connector allows 28V DC to the coil of the sorter main relay (RL1). Reconnect
CN936.
Description
ST207, code 77-1.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The stapler unit mounting height is not within specification. Adjust the mounting height of the up/down base assembly. See ST207 Technical Bulletin
#12A .
2. The bin rotation motor (M204) is binding or has failed. Adjust the mounting height of the up/down base assembly. See Technical Bulletin #12A. Replace
M204 (p/n 460080031) if the motor has failed.
Description
Latest EPROM level, 7490M.
Solution
Description
ST201, missorting.
Solution
CAUSE: The wrong EPROM is installed on the sorter CB, or incorrect programming in the P6 mode.
SOLUTION: Ensure that IC3 on the sorter CB is revision 01.0 (p/n 609063-01.0), which is recommended for faster machines with the ST201 installed. In the
P6 mode set software dipswitch 4-0 to 1.
270
7490M
Description
J am position 11 using the RADF.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. J am position 11. The original will not fully exit the RADF, and or half copies. The one-way clutch inside the paper reverse drive pulley on the RADF is dirty
or binding. When the prefeed operation takes place the first original that was fed to the scale plate is pulled away due to the reverse drive causing the rollers
to reverse. Clean the one-way bearing with alcohol or replace the reverse drive (p/n 016076530).
2. RADF height is out of adjustment. The rear side is too high above the glass. Adjust the height to specification. The procedure is detailed on page 10 of
the DF303/303A/304 service manual.
Description
Solution
CAUSE: Fuse F2 on the sorter CB is open, possibly due to a shorted or binding up/down motor (M202), bin shift motor (M203), or bin arm rotating motor
(M204).
SOLUTION: Check the motors and wiring for any shorts or binding. Repair any faults as necessary, then replace the sorter CB (p/n 5540-9011).
Description
The copier stays in wait.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. One of the fuser lamps is not coming on. Verify L2/L3 circuit paths one lamp or temperature fuse may be open. Replace any open components.
Temperature fuse (p/n 4542-8381), L2 short lamp (p/n 454083020), or L3 long lamp (p/n 454083030).
2. The CA element is touching the upper roller or the mounting bracket. Inspect both CAs for proper position: 1mm above and parallel to the upper roller.
Ensure that the CA wires have not slipped off the insulating pads.
3. CN190 is disconnected causing no AC source voltage to the fuser connector CN103-1, CN103-11, and CN103-13. Reconnect CN190 located at the back
of the machine near the fuser drawer connector.
4. The lens cover is incorrectly installed obstructing the optics movement, preventing the optics to perform the home search. Reinstall the lens cover
correctly. Ensure the optics moves freely in both directions.
Description
How to enable automatic tray switching (ATS).
Solution
To enable ATS install the following firmware at IC6 on the main CB (p/n 7490M16-14.1), or (p/n 7490M16-15.2) if the machine is equipped with the staple
sorter (ST207).
Description
What is the PCUA number for ST207 staples?
Solution
Staples (PCUA 946762)
271
7728
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
272
7728

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
F48 is displayed while copying or at power up.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. If the write unit was recently cleaned, the mylar strip (shim) on the rear underside of the index mirror may have fallen off. The result is that the laser will not
strike the index sensor after reflecting from the index mirror.
Reinstall the shim in its correct position on the rear underside of the index mirror.
2. Poor electrical connection. Reseat write unit connectors.
Description
Solution
Notes :
273
7728
Description
F28-01 at power up.
Solution
CAUSE: The drum carriage is pulled out with the power ON.
SOLUTION: To clear the failure code, set 25 mode, P44 to 0.
Description
F44-01 or F44-02 or E44-03 at power up.
Solution
CAUSE: CB1 was removed causing the corruption of programming on the two NVRAMS or the EPROM, resulting in the failure of the Copy Tracing Feature.
SOLUTION: Order the EPROM kit (p/n U090-7070). ICs are then sent by KC specific to that individual 7728. Expect ETA of 2-3 weeks. Record the toner
level information contained in memory prior to replacing these parts. The cost of the kit is $250.00 which will be credited upon the return of the failed parts.
Description
How to convert the a 7728 printer to a copier. Deinstall the printer function.
Solution
On the main CB:
Remove ROM C5 (IC50) and leave the socket empty
Remove ROM C1 (IC17) and install EPROM 25NE C01-00.
On the printer CB:
Remove ROM C2 (IC15) and install EPROM 25NE C2-11.
On the video IF CB:
Remove ROM C20 (IC61) and install it on the original video IF board.
Description
How to make copies with the IP101 controller connected.
Solution
To make copies with the IP101 controller connected (printer).
1. Turn the machine OFF.
2. Press the 2 and 9 keys simultaneously, and turn the machine ON. This will enable the 7728 as a copier.
Description
Poor color quality.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The CCD or white reference strip is dirty. Clean the the white reference strip and the CCD unit as outlined in 7728/9028 Technical Bulletin #15 .
2. Drum and charge corona degradation due to ozone. Copy quality of flesh tones (poor imaging in the 20% to 80% halftone area of the test chart) will
noticibly degrade within 20-30K images on the drum and 40-50K images on the charge corona. See sample of washed out flesh tones as compared with the
original.
To restore the machine capability to AS NEW. Replace the drum and charge corona, clean and adjust the CCD and clean the write unit.
Note: The 9028/7728 is designed for business color applications NOT photographic or high-end graphic art applications
Description
Recommended transparency, 7728.
Solution
The only recommended type is Konica PCUA 947923.
This transparency is porous on one side which allows toner to be absorbed more completely.
Note: Konica recommends feeding transparencies through the bypass tray to reduce the occurrence of misfeeding. Transparencies produced on a 9028 or
7728 should be run through the FR001 (external fuser) to enhance color prior to viewing on an overhead projector (see users guide, pages 24 and 25).
274
7728
275
7812DXN
Description
Error code 140, 141 or 142 at power-up.
Solution
CAUSE: Poor connection between the ID unit and the mainbody pin connectors.
SOLUTION: On the main body, check the three brass colored pins that are near the white drive gear toward the rear for the ID unit. They should be spring
loaded, verify proper movement. If they don't move freely, pop off the cap and repair the movement.
Description
No power when machine is turned ON.
Solution
CAUSE: A loose or unplugged connector on the LED control PWB in the top cover.
SOLUTION: Reseat all connectors on the LED control PWB.
Description
Microsoft* Windows XP driver support.
Solution
Native Windows XP print drivers are not currently available. The Windows 2000 print drivers use the same driver files that are used in Windows XP and
should function correctly in that operating system.
Description
Specifications for envelopes.
Solution
Envelopes designed for laser printing are recommended. They should have a smooth, even surface and be free of metal clasps, snaps, windows, or
self-adhesive flaps. Supported envelope sizes are: Com-9, Com-10, Monarch, DL, C5, and C4. Envelopes must be fed from the Multi-Purpose Tray and
output to the face up exit tray.
Description
FATAL ERROR 131, 132, 133, or 134 on the display at power up.
Solution
CAUSE: One of the LED print heads is disconnected.
SOLUTION:
1. Reconnect the ribbon cable to the print head.
2. Try swapping an LED head with another, the error should change to find defective head.
FATAL ERROR 131 =yellow
FATAL ERROR 132 =magenta
FATAL ERROR 133 =cyan
FATAL ERROR 134 =black
Description
Test Synopsis verifying loading and functionality of the Konica 7812/7821 PostScript* driver and PCL* driver version 1.2.6 final candidate printer driver.
Solution
Test Synopsis results .
Description
276
7812DXN
Improper fusing or flaking toner on prints.
Solution
CAUSE: Improper media settings in the driver.
SOLUTION: In the print driver, under the Media type or Paper Type setting, select the proper paper weight.
Description
Paper jams entering the fuser unit.
Solution
CAUSE: One or both of the transfer belt latches is broken causing improper alignment with the fuser unit.
SOLUTION: Replace the left side latch (p/n 40843001) and/or the right side latch (p/n 41479601) as needed. These parts are not listed in the 7812 Service
Manual.
Description
Consumable counter does not reset when a consumable is replaced.
Solution
CAUSE: Machine has defaulted to Factory Mode
SOLUTION: The machine must be put back into "Shipping Mode".
To place the printer back in "Shipping Mode" do the following:
1. Hold the '1' and '5' keys down while turning the printer power on. (Hold until "MAINTENANCE MENU" is displayed)
2. Press '0' five times until "ENGINE DIAG MODE XX.XX" is displayed.
3. Press the '2' and '4' keys simultaneously , "ENGINE DIAG LEVEL 3" should now be displayed.
4. Press the '5' key once, "LOCAL PARAMETER SET" should now appear on the display.
5. Press the '6' key three times until "FACTORY WORKING MODE" is displayed.
6. Once "FACTORY WORKING MODE" is displayed, press '3' once so "Shipping Mode" (Fuse Cut Enabled) is displayed in the bottom line.
7. Next press and hold '3' and '7' together, until "Shipping Mode" stops flashing.
8. Power the printer OFF, and then back ON,
Description
'Enter Network Password' dialog box is displayed when attempting to browse to the printer.
Solution
CAUSE: The User ID and Password was incorrectly entered.
SOLUTION: The User ID and Password is case sensitive and as follows:
User ID: admin
Password: NetLAN
Note: The Password is incorrectly given as 'extendnet' in some user documentation.
277
7812N
Description
How to reset the counter for the imaging units.
Solution
When a new imaging unit is installed, a fuse on the unit opens to reset the counter. The counter cannot be reset manually.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
Manual.
Description
Unable to connect to the 7812/7821 using the USB connection and Microsoft* Windows 98 or WIndows ME. The drivers on the User CD are not recognized
as being correct for the printer.
Solution
CAUSE: There is a problem with the USB firmware on the printer. The USB device name is not correct and won't allow loading of drivers for Windows 98 or
WIndows ME.
SOLUTION: There is a firmware patch available under the print driver section of the Konica FTP site that corrects this problem. The update is copied through
the parallel port of the printer. The parallel port must be enabled to apply this patch. There are 4 patches available. Each patch is model specific.
Note: The firmware patch is available on the Konica FTP site . Refer to the FTP site index on the FTP site for detailed information concerning site contents.
Description
The toner cartridge does not fit into imaging unit. The toner cartridge does not sit flat and the blue locking handle will not latch.
Solution
CAUSE: The toner cartridge is for an Okidata* machine.
SOLUTION: Okidata and Konica toner cartridges are keyed differently and are not interchangeable.
Description
FATAL ERROR 142 at power up.
Solution
CAUSE: The one-way bearings on the transfer belt are slipping.
SOLUTION: Clean the one-way bearings located on the rear of the transfer belt or replace the transfer belt (Item #950-192) as necessary.
Description
Enter Network Password dialog box is displayed when attempting to browse to the printer.
Solution
The user id and password is case sensitive and as follows:
278
7812N
User ID: admin
Password: NetLAN
Note: The password is incorrectly given as 'extendnet' in some user documentation.
Description
SERVICE CALL 034 error after installing extra DIMM memory.
Solution
CAUSE: The expansion memory was installed in the incorrect slot.
SOLUTION: The DIMMs must be fitted in ascending order in slots 1, 3, 2, and 4. The original DIMM is in slot 1.
Description
How to set envelopes as the default for the Multi-Purpose Tray.
Solution
To set envelopes as the default in the Multi-Purpose Tray, perform the following:
1. Press MENU until MEDIA MENU is displayed.
2. Press ITEM+until MP TRAY PAPERSIZE is displayed.
3. Press VALUE (+or -) until the proper envelope size is displayed.
4. Press SELECT to accept the setting.
5. Press ITEM+until MP TRAY MEDIAWEIGHT is displayed.
6. Press VALUE (+or -) until MEDIUM HEAVY is displayed.
8. Press ONLINE to save the settings and exit the menu.
Description
Toner is flaking or bubbling on the prints.
Solution
CAUSE: Improper media settings causing the fuser temperature to be too low.
SOLUTION: To adjust the fuser temperature to match the paper weight, perform the following:
2. Press ITEM+until the correct tray's MEDIAWEIGHT is displayed.
3. Press VALUE (+or -) until the correct weight is selected. If the correct weight is selected, select the next heavier weight.
5. Press ONLINE to save the settings and exit the menu. Print from the application by using the printer default paper weight or selecting a heavier media
setting. If the machine is already at the heaviest weight setting, use a lighter paper.
SPECIAL NOTE: Solution provided by J im Boyic, KBT Portland.
279
7820DXN
Description
Toner not fusing when printing on envelopes.
Solution
CAUSE: Engine firmware needs to be updated.
SOLUTION: Install the latest Engine Control firmware (v1.06 or higher).
Note : The latest version firmware or system software is available via the Konica Minolta Download Selector. Access the Selector from SSD Web Support
(CS Expert Support) by clicking on 'Download MSDS, Drivers, Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
SOLUTION: On the main body, check the three brass colored pins (the pins are spring loaded) that are near the white drive gear toward the rear for the ID
unit. Verify proper movement. If the pins do not move freely, remove the cap and repair the movement.
Description
System Configurator, 7820.
Solution
7820 System Configurator .
Description
What is the toner yield for all colors per cartridge?
Solution
Based on 5% coverage, the toner cartridge for Black, Cyan Magenta and yellow will yield 10,000 pages.
Description
Paper feed jam, where the paper constantly jams under the image drums, just before the fuser.
Solution
CAUSE: Broken right blue transfer belt latch.
SOLUTION: See attached document for the replacement procedure. .
Description
New Scanner Options for the 7820/7830 Series Color Printers.
Solution
New Scanner Options are now available for the 7820/7830 Series Color Printers See Info Source Bulletin #75-03 for details.
Description
Light grey background on all prints.
Solution
CAUSE: Drum cleaning has been disabled in the system adjustment menu.
280
7820DXN
SOLUTION: Turn drum cleaning ON from the system adjustment menu using the operation panel. .
Description
Fatal Error 020 message.
Solution
CAUSE: An error has occurred in the controller board (CU) or the program ROM.
SOLUTION: Replace the ROM DIMM (p/n 42277502). If the ROM DIMM does not correct the issue, then replace the (CU) controller board (p/n 41884009).
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Specifications, 7820DXN.
Solution
7820/7830 Specifications .
281
7820N
Description
Toner not fusing when printing on envelopes.
Solution
CAUSE: Engine firmware needs to be updated.
SOLUTION: Install the latest Engine Control firmware (v1.06 or higher).
Description
NO PAPER SENSE ERROR message displays when the paper is feeding.
Solution
CAUSE: The media thickness sensor assembly is out of adjustment.
SOLUTION: Adjust the media thickness sensor using the procedure in the Service Manual .
Notes:
1. Do not attempt to turn the lever adjuster past its mechanical stop.
Description
How to add toner, 7820N.
Solution
See the 7820DXN/7820N Reference Guide, pages 349 to 354
Description
Consumable counter does not reset when a consumable is replaced. Display reads FACTORY MODE
Solution
SOLUTION: The machine must be put back into "Shipping Mode". To place the printer back in "Shipping Mode", perform the following:
1. Power OFF the printer and remove the main controller board.
2. Hold the 1 and 4 keys down while turning the printer power ON until "ENGINE DIAG MODE XX.XX" is displayed.
3. Press the 2 and 4 keys simultaneously , "ENGINE DIAG LEVEL 3" should now be displayed.
4. Press the 5 key once, "LOCAL PARAMETER SET" should now appear on the display.
5. Press the 6 key three times until "FACTORY WORKING MODE" is displayed.
6. Once "FACTORY WORKING MODE" is displayed, press 3 once so "Shipping Mode" (Fuse Cut Enabled) is displayed in the bottom line.
7. Next press and hold 3 and 7 together, until "Shipping Mode" stops flashing.
Description
Solution
User ID: admin
Password: NetLAN
Description
282
7820N
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Color Paper Media Kit.
Solution
Konica Business Technologies, Inc. is pleased to announce a new Color Media Kit sales tool designed for our full color product line. See InfoSource Bulletin
Number 8-03 for details .
Description
How to properly use the Multi-Purpose Tray.
Solution
The Multi-Purpose tray can be selected by choosing either the Multi-Purpose Tray or the Manual Feed Tray option from the Driver. How the paper is handled
is different for each selection.
MANUAL FEED
Manual Feed will not print until the ONLINE button is pressed on the machine operation panel and must be pressed for each page that is printed. This allows
for changing the media source in the tray and the printing of media that could cause misfeeds if more than one sheet is in the tray.
MULTI-PURPOSE
The Multi-Purpose Tray selection will automatically print if the machine settings for media matches the print driver settings for media. If there is a media
mismatch, the machine's display will indicate it and hold the print job to allow you to change the media in the tray. Once again the ONLINE button on the
machine operation panel must be pushed in order to print after the media has been verified that it is correct and the entire job will then print out.
Description
Prints are not duplexing with the duplex unit installed and selected.
Solution
CAUSE: Media setting is set too high in the MEDIA MENU or print driver. (Ultra Heavy/Labels/Transparency).
SOLUTION: To change the media settings to a lower weight, perform the following:
3. Press VALUE (+or-) until AUTO weight is selected.
6. Verify that the paper weight is 32 lbs. or less.
7. Verify that the paper weight in the driver is set to PRINTER SETTINGS or a lighter setting.
Description
Solution
283
7820N
284
7821DXN
Description
Background on prints when using any color.
Solution
CAUSE: Excessive toner agitation is packing toner into drum unit causing toner leakage/misting.
SOLUTION: Update the firmware to version 1.54.28 or greaterand remove packed in toner from drum units.
Note : Machines below date code J anuary 2002 (the first 3 digits of the OKI serial number represents the date code - i.e., 109A1000429 would have a date
code of September 2001) will need a Cable with Resistor (p/n 42037601) installed between the paper lift up motor and the engine control board before
firmware can be upgraded.

To update the firmware, perform the following:
Note : It is imperative to follow this procedure or permanent damage may occur to printer:
1. Download file firmwarePRN file from the the Konica Minolta Download Selector.
Access the Selector from SSD Web Support (CS Expert Support) by clicking on 'Download MSDS, Drivers, Firmware and more'.
2. Remove the Network Interface card, if one is installed, before beginning the flash process.
3. Check the printer LCD to be sure that no error messages/warning messages are appearing. If there are any message(s) indicating consumable levels are
low (CHANGE DRUM SOON, xxxx TONER LOW, PAPER LOW TRAY 1, etc.), clear the message(s) by replacing the required consumable(s).
4. Wait until the printer has completed initialization (i.e., WARMING UP, etc.) before starting the firmware download procedure. Make sure the printer is
displaying an 'ON LINE' ready condition without any error messages.
5. Type 'COPY /b xxxxxxxxx.prn LPT1' from a DOS prompt over an IEEE 1284 bi-directional cable, not from a MicrosoftWindows DOS Prompt window.
IMPORTANT : Under no circumstances should the printer be power-cycled during the flash procedure, even if it appears that it is not working. Once this
process is started, it must run to completion (the end result may still be FAILED).Stopping in the middle results in a dead (unrecoverable) color printer.
6. The printer willindicate 'PASSED' when completed. At this point, cycle the power OFF/ON and let the machine come to a ready state.
To remove the packed in toner from the drum units, perform the following:
1. Remove a Drum/Toner unit from the printer.
2. Turn the Drum/Toner unit upside down so the drum is on top and the toner unit is on the bottom.
3. Gently tap the complete unit on a hard surface 10 times. This will dislodge any packed in toner in the drum unit.
4. Return the Drum/Toner unit to the printer.
5. Repeat steps 1- 4 for the remaining Drum/Toner units.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
User ID: admin
Password: NetLAN
Note: The Password is incorrectly given as 'extendnet' in some user documentation.
Description
Toner is flaking or bubbling on the prints.
Solution
CAUSE: Improper media settings causing the fuser temperature to be too low.
SOLUTION: To adjust the fuser temperature to match the paper weight, perform the following:
3. Press VALUE (+or -) until the correct weight is selected. If the correct weight is selected, select the next heavier weight.
5. Press ONLINE to save the settings and exit the menu. Print from the application by using the printer default paper weight or selecting a heavier media
setting. If the machine is already at the heaviest weight setting, use a lighter paper.
SPECIAL NOTE: Solution provided by J im Boyic, KBT Portland.
285
7821DXN
Description
Solution
Manual.
Description
Solution
Description
How ro reset the counter for the imaging units.
Solution
Description
TONER SENSOR ERROR message at power up.
Solution
CAUSE: One of the contacts under the imaging unit is dirty or stuck down.
SOLUTION: Remove the imaging unit and check the three round contacts on the right side. Ensure that they are clean and that they spring back up when
pushed down.
Description
The image has a yellow band in the lead-to-trail direction. The band does not occur on internally generated images.
Solution
CAUSE: The LED Assembly has failed.
SOLUTION: Replace the LED Assembly (p/n 41370101).
Description
SERVICE CALL 034 error after installing extra DIMM memory.
Solution
CAUSE: The expansion memory was installed in the incorrect slot.
SOLUTION: The DIMMs must be fitted in ascending order in slots 1, 3, 2, and 4. The original DIMM should be in slot 1.
286
7821N
Description
Background on prints when using any color.
Solution
CAUSE: Excessive toner agitation is packing toner into drum unit causing toner leakage/misting.
SOLUTION: Update the firmware to version 1.54.28 or greaterand remove packed in toner from drum units.
Note : Machines below date code J anuary 2002 (the first 3 digits of the OKI serial number represents the date code - i.e., 109A1000429 would have a date
code of September 2001) will need a Cable with Resistor (p/n 42037601) installed between the paper lift up motor and the engine control board before
firmware can be upgraded.

Note : It is imperative to follow this procedure or permanent damage may occur to printer:
1. Download file firmwarePRN file from the the Konica Minolta Download Selector.
2. Remove the Network Interface card, if one is installed, before beginning the flash process.
3. Check the printer LCD to be sure that no error messages/warning messages are appearing. If there are any message(s) indicating consumable levels are
low (CHANGE DRUM SOON, xxxx TONER LOW, PAPER LOW TRAY 1, etc.), clear the message(s) by replacing the required consumable(s).
4. Wait until the printer has completed initialization (i.e., WARMING UP, etc.) before starting the firmware download procedure. Make sure the printer is
displaying an 'ON LINE' ready condition without any error messages.
5. Type 'COPY /b xxxxxxxxx.prn LPT1' from a DOS prompt over an IEEE 1284 bi-directional cable, not from a MicrosoftWindows DOS Prompt window.
IMPORTANT : Under no circumstances should the printer be power-cycled during the flash procedure, even if it appears that it is not working. Once this
process is started, it must run to completion (the end result may still be FAILED).Stopping in the middle results in a dead (unrecoverable) color printer.
6. The printer willindicate 'PASSED' when completed. At this point, cycle the power OFF/ON and let the machine come to a ready state.
To remove the packed in toner from the drum units, perform the following:
1. Remove a Drum/Toner unit from the printer.
2. Turn the Drum/Toner unit upside down so the drum is on top and the toner unit is on the bottom.
3. Gently tap the complete unit on a hard surface 10 times. This will dislodge any packed in toner in the drum unit.
4. Return the Drum/Toner unit to the printer.
5. Repeat steps 1- 4 for the remaining Drum/Toner units.
Description
Enter Network Password dialog box is displayed when attempting to browse to the printer.
Solution
The user id and password is case sensitive and as follows:
User ID: admin
Password: NetLAN
Note: The password is incorrectly given as "extendnet" in some user documentation.
Description
Solution
Manual.
Description
Error code 140, 141, 142 at power up.
Solution
CAUSE: On of the three spring loaded contacts located below each one of the color imaging units is stuck in.
SOLUTION: Remove the color imaging units and look for the cluster of three small,round spring loaded contacts and ensure that none of them are stuck
down. It may be necessary to reform the springs below the contacts to resolve the problem.
Description
FATAL ERROR 142 at power up.
Solution
CAUSE: The one-way bearings on the transfer belt are slipping.
287
7821N
SOLUTION: Clean the one-way bearings located on the rear of the transfer belt or replace the transfer belt (Item #950-192) as necessary.
Description
Consumable counter does not reset when a consumable is replaced.
Solution
SOLUTION: The machine must be set back into "Shipping Mode". To place the printer back in "Shipping Mode", perform the following:
1. Turn the machine ON, while pressing the 1 and 5 keys (hold down the 1 and 5 keys until "MAINTENANCE MENU" is displayed).
2. Press 0 five times until "ENGINE DIAG MODE XX.XX" is displayed.
3. Press the 2 and 4 keys simultaneously. "ENGINE DIAG LEVEL 3" should now be displayed.
4. Press the 5 key once. "LOCAL PARAMETER SET" should now be displayed.
8. Power the printer OFF, and then back ON.
Description
Solution
Description
Horizontal line(s) on image.
Solution
CAUSE: Soiled LED Print Head(s)
SOLUTION: Clean the LED Print Head(s) as needed.
Description
How to reset the counter for the imaging units.
Solution
Description
TONER SENSOR ERROR message at power up.
Solution
CAUSE: One of the contacts under the imaging unit is dirty or stuck down.
SOLUTION: Remove the imaging unit and check the three round contacts on the right side. Ensure that they are clean and that they spring back up when
pushed down.
288
7823
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
289
7823

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Poor color reproduction or image quality.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Color calibration abnormality. Perform Gradation Adjustment as outlined in 7823 Service Manual. It is crucial to reset PRT Highlight and PRT Max Density
values to zero before each adjustment is performed. After setting the values to zero, power OFF/ON the 7823 to allow the data to be completely written
Compare to attached samples of Gradation Chart and Image Processing Data Sheets to determine if calibration is properly completed.
Notes:
1. Use high quality paper of a Brightness Scale of 96 or better when performing the Gradation Adjustment. For optimal performance, the end user should
also use this type of paper.
2. While the 7823 Service Manual recommends performing the Gradation Adjustment three times to ensure stability, the Gradation Adjustment may need to
be done 8 to 10 times to properly stabilize.
See pages D-137 , S-17 and S-32 in the 7823 Service Manual for information on performing the Gradation Adjustment and resetting the PRT
Highlights/PRT Max Density to zero.
2. The AIDC sensor mylar cover has become damaged or scratched. Replace the AIDC sensor (p/n 25TU-9100).
3. View the Drum Memory Document hyperlink for steps to troubleshoot drum problems.
4. Failure to properly clean and replace parts at the required intervals. To ensure the optimal operation of the 7823, perform the 7823 Service Call Checklist
below:
Each visit or 5K, clean the following:
1. Oil regulating blade (p/n 1144-5803-05)
2. Oil collecting blade (p/n 1154-5852-01)
Each visit between 5K to 15K, clean the following:
1. Fuser entrance guide
2. Fuser roller thermistor - upper and lower
3. Fuser roller thermostat - upper and lower
4. Toner anti-spill seal (p/n 25TU55340)
5. Auxiliary erase lamp (p/n 25TU37240)
6. AIDC sensor (p/n 25TU-9100)
7. Mirror (1st, 2nd and 3rd)
8. Lens filter
9. Original glass
10. Paper separation corona assembly (p/n 11UM-2600)
11. Paper separation finger (p/n 11UM53980, 11UM53770, and 11UM53800)
12. Static charge roller (p/n 25TU45390)
13. Static charge roller rubber (p/n 25TU45010)
14. Static charge roller scraper (p/n 25TU45380)
15. Static charge roller cover (p/n 25TU45340)
16. Static charge roller assembly (p/n 11UM45370)
290
7823
17. Transport sprocket (p/n 25TU77780)
Note: Failure to clean the fuser roller thermistor and thermostat (items 2 and 3) may cause a buildup that could cause intermittent fuser High/Low
temperature codes and generate unnecessary service calls.
Replace at 10K:
1. Grid mesh (p/n 25TU25140)
Replace at 15K:
1. Cleaning roller (p/n 25TU53200)
2. Oil filter (p/n 25TU53610)
3. PC drum charge corona wire assembly (p/n 11UM25090)
4. Cleaning blade (p/n 25TU55400)
4. Clean the corona wire with cotton swab and alcohol, wipe wire with clean cloth to remove any residual.
5. Clean the grid with a Scotchbrite* pad.
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
How to access Service (TechRep) modes.
Solution
Hyperlink to instructions on how to access Service Mode .
Notes:
1. To view the PDF hyperlink, Acrobat* Reader must be installed. Acrobat Reader can be downloaded for free from the Adobe* Web site at:
2. See pages D-114 to D-150 in the 7823 Service Manual.
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
291
7823
C3C70 is displayed during setup.
Solution
CAUSE: This code is a communication abnormality with the counterfit detection circuit on PWB-C.
SOLUTION: Turn the machine off and unplug it. Reseat all connectors on PWB-C and the Gold box on PWB-C. Plug the machine in and turn it on.
Description
Fiery* X2e, how to install system software on a Fiery X2e controller.
Solution
The system software for the Fiery X2e comes on a CD. To install the software, a laptop (or PC) and Parallel cable are required. The parallel cable comes with
the controller. To install the system software, perform the following:
1. Set the parallel port on the laptop to ECP mode.
2. Copy the 90MB .uxe file from the CD to a temporary directory on the Laptop's Hard Drive.
3. Boot the laptop to a command prompt.
4. When the laptop is booting, press F8 to enter the safe mode menu.
5. Press Shift F5 to get to a command prompt.
6. Ensure the parallel cable is plugged into the X2e and the X2e is set to receive the system software.
7. Change directories on the Laptop to the directory the .uxe file was copied into.
8. Type copy /b filename.uxe lpt1 and wait for the installation to complete.
9. The installation time varies depending on the parallel port speed of the laptop.
Note: The Fiery X2e System Software CD is available as part number 45001600.
Description
There is a tray that cannot be selected from the paper selection screen. A tool symbol is displayed on lower left of the touch panel. When touching the [[tool
mark| IMAGE V:\bitmaps\cjc182.bmp SCROLL]], [[a message will be displayed in the LCD| IMAGE V:\bitmaps\cjc183.bmp SCROLL]] indicating that one of
the paper trays is not available.
Solution
CAUSE: Lift up failure of a paper tray.
SOLUTION: Repair the paper tray as needed. After repair is completed, please clear the tool mark symbol by performing the following:
1. Power ON the machine.
2. Touch the tool mark to display the message.
3. Open/close the front cover.
4. When the tray has been repaired, the tray name should disappear from the displayed message. Ensure that the tray name disappeared, and then touch
OK.
5. Confirm that the tool mark disappeared.
Description
Deletion spots on copies which correspond to white contamination spots on the OPC drum.
Solution
CAUSE: Multiple copies using only one color.
SOLUTION: Clean the drum with a 99% solution of isopropyl alcohol. Replace the drum under warranty if it can not be cleaned.
Description
C3C00 or any code beginning with C3C.
Solution
CAUSE: C3C** codes are related to the banknote recognition unit, BRU. The BRU is the counterfeit prevention system (gold box) on PWB-C. The codes
related to this system are confidential and therefore not published in the technical manual. DO NOT insert or remove the BRU with the power ON and DO
NOT power ON the machine with the BRU removed. UNPLUG the AC supply to the machine prior to removing or inserting the BRU.
SOLUTION: Call the Konica Systems Solutions Group when a BRU failure code occurs.
292
7830DXN
Description
Will the 7830 PostScript* printer driver for Macintosh* OS10.1 function in a Macintosh OS10.3 environment?
Solution
CAUSE: Macintosh OS10.3 specific drivers are not available for this product.
SOLUTION: A spot test was completed on the 7830dxn OS10.1 PS Driver. The driver was installed on Macintosh OS 10.3.
The driver installed easily and seemed to perform tested functions. Printing was successful from various applications including Internet Explorer, MAC Word,
Adobe Acrobat, and Text Edit.
During installation, the driver was automatically configured with the options.
Notes:
1. While our test results were successful, please be advised that full functionality and compatibility with all applications can not be fully guaranteed as the
driver is specifically for OS10.1, not OS10.3. Please know that the full functionality of this driver in the OS10.3 environment is not supported as there will be
no drivers made available specifically for OS10.3 for this product.
2. The latest version system software, print drivers, firmware and utilities are available on the Konica FTP site .
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
Notes:
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
293
7830DXN
Description
Solution
Description
Printer displays "Replace Transfer Belt" message. Once the belt is replaced, the message will go away for approx 200 pages and then comes back. Transfer
belt life on the Menu Map shows that the belt still has over 90% life remaining.
Solution
CAUSE: The spring that is on the waste toner sensor is missing.
SOLUTION: Replace the Waste Toner Sensor Actuator (P/N 42199601) and Waste Toner Sensor Spring (P/N 42251501) as needed.
Description
Fatal Error 020 message.
Solution
CAUSE: An error has occurred in the controller board (CU) or the program ROM.
SOLUTION: Replace the ROM DIMM (p/n 42277504). If the ROM DIMM does not correct the issue, then replace the (CU) controller board (p/n 41884019).
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
294
7830N
Description
Solution
Notes:
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
User ID: admin
Password: NetLAN
Description
Printer displays "Replace Transfer Belt" message. Once the belt is replaced, the message will go away for approx 200 pages and then comes back. Transfer
belt life on the Menu Map shows that the belt still has over 90% life remaining.
Solution
CAUSE: The spring that is on the waste toner sensor is missing.
SOLUTION: Replace the Waste Toner Sensor Actuator (P/N 42199601) and Waste Toner Sensor Spring (P/N 42251501) as needed.
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
How to properly use the Multi-Purpose Tray.
Solution
The Multi-Purpose tray can be selected by choosing either the Multi-Purpose Tray or the Manual Feed Tray option from the Driver. How the paper is handled
is different for each selection.
MANUAL FEED
295
7830N
Manual Feed will not print until the ONLINE button is pressed on the machine operation panel and must be pressed for each page that is printed. This allows
for changing the media source in the tray and the printing of media that could cause misfeeds if more than one sheet is in the tray.
MULTI-PURPOSE
The Multi-Purpose Tray selection will automatically print if the machine settings for media matches the print driver settings for media. If there is a media
mismatch, the machine's display will indicate it and hold the print job to allow you to change the media in the tray. Once again the ONLINE button on the
machine operation panel must be pushed in order to print after the media has been verified that it is correct and the entire job will then print out.
Description
FATAL ERROR 142 after installing a cyan toner cartridge.
Solution
CAUSE: The cyan toner cartridge was incorrectly keyed.
SOLUTION: Remove the keys from the bottom of the toner cartridge and correctly install them using the empty cartridge as a reference.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
296
7832
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
297
7832

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
ST723/ST724 and main body compatibility.
Solution
The ST723/ST724 must have level 6 firmware installed to be compatible with the model 7832. Without level 6 firmware, the bins will advance too slowly
causing jamming. New sorters with the level 6 firmware installed are designated by 2 blue circle seals (diameter 15mm) applied next to the serial number label
on the box. The file name for level 6 firmware is ST723-10.EXE. This firmware is available on the www.konicabt.com website.
Notes:
1. To verify EPROM level , if the sorter box is not availlible, remove the cover to expose the STCB (PWB-A) and check the EPROM label. The bottom line of
the EPROM label should read 70G006 which denotes level 6 firmware.
298
7832
2. The EPROM for the ST723 is the same as the ST724.
Description
During setup, code C0650 is indicated at power up or the ATDC adjustment will not complete.
Solution
CAUSE: The holding plate was not removed from the rear side of the transfer drum.

SOLUTION: Remove the holding plate from the transfer drum. Refer to the illustration with step the begins with "Remove the cushioned holding plate
attached to the frame underneath the Transfer Drum" of the Setup Instructions. The illustration shows the cushioned plate attached to the frame under the
transfer drum and the holding plate located on the rear side as it would appear after removal.
Description
Code C3C**; any code beginning with C3C.
Solution
CAUSE: C3C** codes are related to the banknote recognition unit, BRU. The BRU is the counterfeit prevention system (gold box) on PWB-C. The codes
SOLUTION: Contact the Konica Systems Solutions Group when a BRU failure code occurs.
Description
7832 General Information.
Solution
See Info Source No. 73-01 for General Information on the 7832 .
Description
How to program software total counter.
Solution
Software total count cannot be programmed to a specific number.
Description
There is a tray that cannot be selected from the paper selection screen. A tool symbol is displayed on lower left of the touch panel. When touching the [[tool
mark| IMAGE V:\bitmaps\cjc182.bmp SCROLL]], [[a message will be displayed in the LCD| IMAGE V:\bitmaps\cjc183.bmp SCROLL]] indicating that one of
the paper trays is not available.
Solution
CAUSE: Lift up failure of a paper tray.
SOLUTION: Repair the paper tray as needed. After repair is completed, please clear the tool mark symbol by performing the following:
1. Power ON the machine.
2. Touch the tool mark to display the message.
3. Open/close the front cover.
4. When the tray has been repaired, the tray name should disappear from the displayed message. Ensure that the tray name disappeared, and then touch
OK.
5. Confirm that the tool mark disappeared.
Description
C3F90 at set up.
Solution
CAUSE: The locking bracket was not removed from the rear side of the transfer drum.
SOLUTION: Remove the locking bracket from the rear side of the top of the transfer drum unit. The bracket should have a tag tied to it.
299
7832
300
7915
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
301
7915

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
How to upgrade the main body firmware.
Solution
A software utility for Windows* 2000/XP laptop computers (p/n U192-0300) is available to replace the system made available in 7915/7920 Technical Bulletin
3. The new software utility enables a laptop computer to program the same 8MB flash card (p/n U192-0200) or 16MB flash card (p/n U192-0250) using the
PCMCIA slot on the laptop computer instead of the SwapBox. Installation instructions are included with the utility. Refer to Tool Technical Bulletin 71A.
If you already have the old style SwapBox running on a Windows 95 PC, it can still be used for upgrading the main body software. Refer to 7915/7920
Technical Bulletin 3 for details.
Description
PLEASE INSERT THE FUSING UNIT AND FUSING WEB UNIT AND OIL COATING UNIT AND CLOSE ALL DOORS message during copying or at power
up.
Solution
CAUSE: The problem is caused by a conduction failure of the contacts on the fusing unit, fusing web unit, or oil coating unit.

302
7915
SOLUTION: Clean the contacts or replace the unit. The material used for the contact points has been changed beginning with the following lot numbers:
Fusing unit: Lot 1E16A
Fusing web unit: Lot 1E09A
Oil coating unit: Lot 1E11A
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Double-Sided can not be selected after installing the ADU and required memory expansion upgrade.
Solution
CAUSE: Incorrect or failed memory was installed.
SOLUTION: Install Konica memory (PCUA 950466). Two 128MB memory modules will come in the box and both are needed. To check that the memory is
recognized by the machine, perform the following:
1. With the machine on in the normal standby mode, press the Utility key.
2. Press [Meter Count].
3. Press the following keys in sequence: STOP, 0, 0, STOP, 0, and 1.
4. Press [State Confirm].
5. Press [Option Memory]. If the memory is recognized, [Set] will be displayed. If the memory has failed or it is not recognized, [Unset] will be displayed.
6. Press [Menu], [Menu], and then [Fin.Time] to return to the normal operation screen.
Description
Fuser web countermeasure.
Solution
CAUSE: To enhance releasing and paper feed abilities, the fixing cleaning method has been changed from the web type to the oil application roller type.
Because of this change, the main body firmware must be updated at the same time.
SOLUTION: To perform the cleaning with the oil application roller, use the newly established oil supply unit (p/n 111T53011). The newly established oil
supply unit does not function with the current mainbody firmware. The firmware must be updated to Version 45-01 (7915-4501p.exe) before the new style oil
application roller is installed. Oil Supply Unit (OSU) must be selected in System Input of the Tech. Rep. Mode.
Notes:
1. See 7915/7920 Technical Bulletin #6 for details of the new oil supply method.
3. A utility for Windows* 2000 and Windows XP (p/n U192-0300) is available to replace the system made available in 7915/7920 Technical Bulletin #3. The
new utility enables a PC to program the same 8MB flash card (p/n U192-0200) or a 16MB flash card (p/n U192-0250) using the PCMCIA slot on the PC
instead of the Swap box. The old system, which is no longer available, can still be used for upgrading the main body software. Refer to 7915/7920 Technical
Bulletin #3 for details.
Description
Offsetting of the image occurring in the fuser and jamming in the fuser.
Solution
CAUSE: Insufficient oil application from the fuser web to the fuser belt.
SOLUTION: Allow the fuser belt to cool and then clean it with 7823/7832 fuser oil. DO NOT USE ALCOHOL. To prevent the offsetting from reoccurring, it is
recommended that the fuser web be replaced if it has already reached half of its expected life of 17,000 copies.
Note: To inhance releasing and paper feed abilities, the fixing cleaning method has been changed from the web type to the oil application roller type.
The newly established oil supply unit (p/n 111T53011) does not function with the current mainbody firmware. The firmware must be updated to Version 45-01
(7915-4501p.exe) before the new style oil application roller is installed. Oil Supply Unit (OSU) must be selected in System Input of the Tech. Rep. Mode.
Notes:
303
7915
2. 7915/7920 Software Release Notification, version 45.
3. A system and flash card are available for upgrading the main body software. Refer to Tool Bulletin 71A for details.
Description
C3C00 or and code beginning with C3C.
Solution
CAUSE: C3C** codes are related to the BRU (Banknote Recognition Unit). The BRU is the counterfeit prevention system (gold box) on PWB-C. The codes
SOLUTION: Call the Konica Systems Solutions Group when a BRU failure code occurs.
Description
How to clear a fuser error code (C0500, C0501, C0510, C0511, C0520, C0521).
Solution
To clear the fuser error code, perform the following after correcting the cause:
1. With power ON, open the front door and locate the small, rectangular hole below the imaging unit removal tool.
Note : On the7915/7920,after opening the front door,it is in the lower right corner.
2. Insert a suitable object into the hole to actuate the reset switch .
http://www.adobe.com/products/acrobat/readstep2.html tion
3. The code should clear and a message to close the front door should appear.
304
7920
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
305
7920

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
How to upgrade the main body firmware.
Solution
A software utility for Windows* 2000/XP laptop computers (p/n U192-0300) is available to replace the system made available in 7915/7920 Technical Bulletin
3. The new software utility enables a laptop computer to program the same 8MB flash card (p/n U192-0200) or a 16MB flash card (p/n U192-0250) using the
PCMCIA slot on the laptop computer instead of the SwapBox. Installation instructions are included with the utility. Refer to Tool Technical Bulletin 71A .
If you already have the old style SwapBox running on a Windows 95 PC, it can still be used for upgrading the main body software. Refer to 7915/7920
Technical Bulletin 3 for details.
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
PLEASE INSERT THE FUSING UNIT AND FUSING WEB UNIT AND OIL COATING UNIT AND CLOSE ALL DOORS message during copying or at power
up.
Solution
CAUSE: The problem is caused by a conduction failure of the contacts on the fusing unit, fusing web unit, or oil coating unit.

306
7920
SOLUTION: Clean the contacts or replace the unit. The material used for the contact points has been changed beginning with the following lot numbers:
Fusing unit: Lot 1E16A
Fusing web unit: Lot 1E09A
Oil coating unit: Lot 1E11A
Description
Offsetting of the image occurring in the fuser and jamming in the fuser..
Solution
CAUSE: Insufficient oil application from the fuser web to the fuser belt.
SOLUTION: Allow the fuser belt to cool and then clean it with 7823/7832 fuser oil. DO NOT USE ALCOHOL. To prevent the offsetting from reoccurring, it is
recommended that the fuser web be replaced if it has already reached half of its expected life of 17,000 copies.
Note: To inhance releasing and paper feed abilities, the fixing cleaning method has been changed from the web type to the oil application roller type.
The newly established oil supply unit (p/n 111T53011) does not function with the current mainbody firmware. The firmware must be updated to Version 45-01
(7915-4501p.exe) before the new style oil application roller is installed. Oil Supply Unit (OSU) must be selected in System Input of the Tech. Rep. Mode.
Notes:
2. 7915/7920 Software Release Notification, version 45.
3. A system and flash card are available for upgrading the main body software. Refer to Tool Bulletin 71A for details.
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Paper specifications, 7920.
Solution
The main body paper specifications are as follows:
Maximum paper capacity: 3,250 sheets with the LCT (PF-431) option.
Universal drawer capacity: 250 sheets
PF-231: 500 sheets.
PF-431: 2500 sheets.
Paper Trays: 17 to 43 lb. bond/ 90 lb. index.
Single sheet bypass: Up to 110 lb. index.
Paper designed for ink jet printers must not be used.
Description
Certain life counters cannot be reset.
Solution
CAUSE: Unit replacement is required to reset the counters.
SOLUTION: Certain replaceable units have circuits within the units that when the unit is replaced and the machine is powered ON, the life counter is reset.
These units are as follows:
Fusing unit
Fusing web unit
Oil coating unit
All imaging units, cyan, magenta, yellow, and black
Transfer belt unit.
307
7920
Description
PLEASE CHANGE FUSER WEB SOON message did not clear after replacing the fuser web with the new style oil supply unit (OSU).
Solution
CAUSE: To enhance releasing and paper feed abilities, the fixing cleaning method has been changed from the web type to the oil application roller type
(OSU). Because of this change, the main body firmware must be updated. If the firmware is not updated after installing the OSU, the PLEASE CHANGE
FUSER WEB SOON message will not clear and the machine will stop after 1000 copies requiring another OSU change.
SOLUTION: The firmware must be updated to Version 45-00 (7920-4500p.exe) before the new style oil application roller (p/n 111T53011) is installed. Oil
Supply Unit (OSU) must be selected in System Input of the Tech. Rep. Mode. With the new firmware, the old style web can still be used if it is selected in
System Input of the Tech. Rep. Mode.
Notes:
2. A utility for Windows* 2000 and Windows XP (p/n U192-0300) is available to replace the system made available in 7915/7920 Technical Bulletin #3. The
new utility enables a PC to program the same 8MB flash card (p/n U192-0200) using the PCMCIA slot on the PC instead of the Swap box. The old system,
which is no longer available, can still be used for upgrading the main body software. Refer to 7915/7920 Technical Bulletin #3 for details.
Description
How to install Equitrac* key counter.
Solution
See Equitrac Installation Procedure hyperlink.
308
8010
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
309
8010

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Solution
310
8010
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

Description
Are Konica Minolta MFPs compatible with Category 6 cable standard?
Solution
Konica Minolta MFPs are fully compatible with Category 6 cable standard.
Category 6 cable is a cable standard for Gigabit Ethernet and other network protocols that is backward compatible with the Category 5/5e and Category 3
cable standards.
Cat-6 features more stringent specifications for crosstalk and system noise. The cable standard is suitable for 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX and 1000BASE-T
(Gigabit Ethernet) connections and it provides performance of up to 250MHz.
311
8010
Description
Why does pagination change when printing any document using the Konica Minolta print driver?
Solution
Pagination differences between different manufacturers print drivers:
This situation is not uncommon in the printing world. Commonly, documents will be formatted differently when printed to printers made by different
manufacturers. There are many reasons for this. Due to physical differences between printers, as well as copyright laws, different manufacturers will use
different programs for their drivers. It is the driver that does the majority of the formatting for the image to be placed on the page. Different drivers will use
different algorithms when imaging spacing and font metrics. Often times, this results in a slightly different look or format for a document when printed to two
different printers.
There is also potential differences within the image areas of the main bodies of the two printers. The print controller takes the image area into account when
laying out the image on the paper. Different image areas can determine different layouts. These factors can result in lines of text being moved on the paper. If
lines are moved enough, or lie close enough to the threshold of the image area, text and page breaks that are rendered in a certain position on one printer
may be rendered in a different position on another.
This scenario will occur across the board for printer manufacturers. A Lexmark is different from an Epson which is different than an HP, etc. Obviously, the
output from certain printers will match up closer to some printers than others. The effect of this behavior can be reduced somewhat by printing with a common
standard PDL such as PostScript. Alternatively, the customer can print with a common driver to both printers. In other words, one can print to the HP using the
Konica Minoltadriver or vice versa. In this way, at least the driver-generated output would be the same going to both machines. While the output still may not
be exactly the same, the effect of printing to two different printers can be lessened. There may even be different output within the same printer manufacturer
(i.e., Konica IP302 print controller is good, but the IP304 print controller is not; Lexmark Optra K1220 is good, but the Optra T614 is not).
The analogy that is often used when explaining this to customers involves motor vehicles. A Ford and Dodge are essentially the same in terms of the fact that
they are cars that serve as a means of transportation, just as two printers are output devices. However, while the end result of driving two different cars is
essentially the same, there may be certain differences with regard to cornering and acceleration that give each car a distinct feel. This is essentially what is
happening between the two printers.
It is understandable that the customer does not want to convert thousands of existing documents, but due to the vast number of different printers currently
available on the market today, it is not possible to exactly emulate all printer manufacturers' algorithms. The only other option is to pick one printer model,
format these documents that need a consistent look for that printer, and use only that particular printer to print these documents. If there are any further
questions, please feel free to contact the National Systems Solutions Group at 1-800-825-5664.
312
8020
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
313
8020

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
C3C50 (C-3C50)at power up.
Solution
CAUSE: Loose connectors or failed PWB-C board.
SOLUTION: Reseat all connectors and replace PWB-C board (p\n 65FA-9360 for 8020/8031 or p\n 4581010302 for CF2002/CF3102) if necessary.
SPECIAL NOTE : Solution contribution by Gregg Gallant, Production Print/SSD and Don St. Onge, Workgroup/SSD
Description
How to upgrade the machine firmware with the flash card.
Solution
A utility for Windows* 2000 and Windows XP (p/n U192-0300) is available to replace the system made available in 7915/7920 Technical Bulletin #3. The new
utility uses the PCMCIA slot of a Windows 2000/XP laptop to program the flash card, instead of the old style Swap box. The 8020/8031 requires the 16MB
flash card (p/n U192-0250), the 8MB flash card for the 7915/7920 will not work. Refer to Tool Bulletin 71A.See Tool Bulletin #71a for details.
314
8020
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Solution
Description
How to change the default settings.
Solution
To change the default settings, perform the following:
1. Make the desired settings in the regular copy displays.
3. On the LCD select INPUT, then RESET MODE, and then SET-UP MODE.
4. Select INPUT and then ENTER twice followed by EXIT on the LCD to return to copier display.
Description
Red colors appear orange.
Solution
CAUSE: Color balance requires adjustment.
SOLUTION: To adjust the color balance, perform the following:
Note: These Procedures are for an 8020/8031 in good working condition. Please perform any necessary cleaning or maintenance before applying these
procedures.
Main Body Adjustments:
1. Run "ATDC toner supply".
2. Run "Image Stabilization Mode\Reset and Stabilize".
3. Run "Gradation Adjustment" until the "Max Density/Conv." and "Highlight/Conv." values are as close to "0" as possible.
Note: +/- teens is good, +/- 10 is better. Adjustment usually has to be run more than 3 times. Ignore the "Adj." values.
4. Set the "Image Adjust\Magenta, Max. Density" to +6, and the "Image Adjust\Magenta, Highlight" to -1.
6. Test color accuracy with copies of your "Color Test Chart" and "Main Body Test Prints".
Fiery X3e PLUS Adjustments:
1. Open "ColorWise Pro Tools\Profile Manager".
2. Load the output profile (8031-8020 31C-M Graffic) and set as the "default".
a. Click Browse, and select the folder location of the new profile, click OK.
b. Highlight the new profile, and click the green arrow next to the "Output" window, click Done.
c. Double Click the new profile in the "Profile Manager\Output" window.
d. Put a check mark in the "Default" box, in the "Output Profile Settings" window.
e. Select an unused name in the "Appear in Driver as ..." section.
f. Put a check mark in the "Appear in Driver as ..." box.
g. Click OK
3. Open "ColorWise Pro Tools\Color Setup".
4. Change to the "Default settings" (click the "Factory default" button).
5. Change the default settings to: "RGB Separation" ="Simulation", "CMYK Simulation Profile" ="Dic", and "CMYK Simulation Style" ="Quick".
6. Run Calibration using the "Best" method available (i.e.: Densitometer, Color Cal, or Auto Cal).
7. Test known samples of Pantones, CMYK, and RGB files for color accuracy.
Note: Customer's file type, and individual preference, may require refining these settings.
315
8020
Description
Hecon* key counter availability.
Solution
The following is needed: Key counter mounting kit (p/n SE95-4020) or (PCUA#950298).
Adapter wiring harnes (p/n 1206K0010)
Hecon* receptacle (p/n U021-0020) or (PCUA# 950817).
For ordering convernience the parts can be ordered as supply items with a machine order. Refer to Technical Operations Bulletin A4 D5 dated 6/25/03.
Directions are included with the kit, but they do not show where to connect the wiring. To locate the connector, perform the following:
1. Remove the rear cover (p/n 111T12050), upper rear cover (p/n 65FA10110), and rear left side cover (p/n 111T12080).
Note: Early model machines will have two blue unused connectors under the upper rear cover.
2. Connect the long harness from the kit to the four-pin blue connector.
Note: Later model machines will not have the two blue connectors.
3. Use the four-pin white connector located behind the rear left side cover.
4. After the key counter is installed, it must be turned ON in the Tech. Rep. Mode.
5. Press the Utility key, [Meter Count], STOP, 0, 0, STOP, 0, 1 to enter the Tech. Rep. Mode.
6. Press STOP, 9 to display the Security Mode screen.
7 Press [Admin. Choice] and then select [Set] under the Key Counter option.
8 Once [Set] is selected under Key Counter option, selections for Color Mode 1-5 will be added to the screen. These selections will determine the number of
counts per copy. Refer to page S-44 in the Technical Manual.
Description
C-12CC at power up.
Solution
CAUSE: The Hard Disk Drive (HDD)was installed but not formatted, or is corrupt.
SOLUTION: To format the hard drive, perform the following:
1. Enter the Tech. Rep. Mode by pressing Utility Key, Meter Count, Stop, 0, 0, Stop, 0, and 1.
2. Select [Machine Adjust].
3. Select [Memory/HardDisk Adjust].
4. Select [Hard Disc Format].
5. Select [Physical Format].
6. Press the Start key. The Start key will turn orange. Formatting will take approximately 9 - 15minutes (dependant on drive size) and the progress is
displayed.
7. When '100 OK' is displayed, select OK.
8. Select [Fin. Time] and power OFF the machine.
9. Power ON the machine and repeat steps 1 through 4.
10. Select [Logical Format].
11. Press the Start key and wait for the display [100 OK].
12. Select OK.
13. Select [Fin. Time].
316
8028
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
317
8028

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Color overlap and misregistration from lead-to-trail of copied images.
Solution
CAUSE: Torque variations in the drive unit and conveyance unit result in drum speed variation.
SOLUTION: Lubricate the drum drive and area with Biral T&D*, 100ml spray can p/n U091-9610. Refer to 8028 Technical Bulletin #15 for lubrication points.
* Prior to lubrication, thoroughly clean the area to be lubricated.
318
8028
Description
Light copies.
Solution
CAUSE: The CVR is out of adjustment.
SOLUTION: Use VR1 on the CVR board to adjust the output to the exposure lamp to a value of 60V DC.
Note: Exposure lamp replacement is at 120,000 images.
Description
How to adjust the projection lamp intensity (CVR).
Solution
Use VR1 on the CVR board to adjust the output to the exposure lamp to a value of 60V DC.
Note: Exposure lamp replacement is at 120,000 images.
Description
F47 at power up.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Wire harness for the write unit is pinched against the copier frame. Repair and reseat the wiring harness.
2. Indexer abnormality due to a dirty or misaligned write unit. Clean the write unit and correctly position the index mirror.
Description
Background when using any color.
Solution
CAUSE: The drum has failed or is beyond its age expectancy. Drums over a year old are considered out of date due to its photosensitive properties.
SOLUTION: Replace the drum PCUA 946-433.
Description
Loud squeal from the write unit.
Solution
CAUSE: Polygon mirror bearing failure.
SOLUTION: Replace write unit (p/n 5002-6500).
Description
Blank copies.
Solution
SOLUTION: Replace the write unit (p/n 5002-6504).
319
8031
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
320
8031

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
How to upgrade the machine firmware.
Solution
A utility for Windows* 2000 and Windows XP (p/n U192-0300) is available to replace the system made available in 7915/7920 Technical Bulletin #3. The new
utility uses the PCMCIA slot of a Windows 2000/XP laptop to program the flash card, instead of the old style Swap box. The 8020/8031 requires the 16MB
flash card (p/n U192-0250), the 8MB flash card for the 7915/7920 will not work. Refer to Tool Bulletin 71A.See Tool Bulletin #71a for details.
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Red colors appear orange.
Solution
CAUSE: Color balance requires adjustment.
SOLUTION: To adjust the color balance, perform the following:
Note: These Procedures are for an 8020/8031 in good working condition. Please perform any necessary cleaning or maintenance before applying these
procedures.
Main Body Adjustments:
1. Run "ATDC toner supply".
321
8031
2. Run "Image Stabilization Mode\Reset and Stabilize".
3. Run "Gradation Adjustment" until the "Max Density/Conv." and "Highlight/Conv." values are as close to "0" as possible.
Note: +/- teens is good, +/- 10 is better. Adjustment usually has to be run more than 3 times. Ignore the "Adj." values.
4. Set the "Image Adjust\Magenta, Max. Density" to +6, and the "Image Adjust\Magenta, Highlight" to -1.
6. Test color accuracy with copies of your "Color Test Chart" and "Main Body Test Prints".
Fiery X3e PLUS Adjustments:
1. Open "ColorWise Pro Tools\Profile Manager".
2. Load the output profile (8031-8020 31C-M Graphic) and set as the "default".
a. Click Browse, and select the folder location of the new profile, click OK.
b. Highlight the new profile, and click the green arrow next to the "Output" window, click Done.
c. Double Click the new profile in the "Profile Manager\Output" window.
d. Put a check mark in the "Default" box, in the "Output Profile Settings" window.
e. Select an unused name in the "Appear in Driver as ..." section.
f. Put a check mark in the "Appear in Driver as ..." box.
g. Click OK
3. Open "ColorWise Pro Tools\Color Setup".
4. Change to the "Default settings" (click the "Factory default" button).
5. Change the default settings to: "RGB Separation" ="Simulation", "CMYK Simulation Profile" ="Dic", and "CMYK Simulation Style" ="Quick".
6. Run Calibration using the "Best" method available (i.e.: Densitometer, Color Cal, or Auto Cal).
7. Test known samples of Pantones, CMYK, and RGB files for color accuracy.
Note: Customer's file type, and individual preference, may require refining these settings.
Description
Solution
Description
C1204 error message at power up.
Solution
CAUSE: The 256MB memory upgrade (MU433) has not been installed.
SOLUTION: The engine requires 512MB of memory (256MB base memory and the (MU433) 256MB memory upgrade) to function properly. This is listed in
the 8020/8031 System Configurator .
Description
Background on prints and copies.
Note: Please determine the type of backgrounding present and follow the procedures as outlined in the solution.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Yellow dot pattern.
If the backgrounding consists of a yellow dot pattern please contact the NSSG. There is special firmware available for this problem.
2. Background on heavy stock paper.
To correct background on heavy stock paper, perform the following:
a. Change the background voltage on all colors to a value of +5.
b. Execute Stabalizer.
c. Execute Gradation Adjustment.
d. Adjust the Fuser Speed as detailed in the Service Manual.
Note: There is special firmware available if the above procedure does not work. This firmware will allow the background voltage to be adjusted +/- 5 in 20v
steps (the previous firmware allowed +/- 5 in 10v steps. Be careful about using the settings towards the extreme ends of the adjusting range of this [[special
firmware| URL ftp://engguest:letme1n@ftp.konicabt.com//Special Firmware/80318020Background(Gray)]]. Developer spew (Carrier Attachment) may occur.
Description
Hecon* key counter availability.
322
8031
Solution
The following is needed: Key counter mounting kit (p/n SE95-4020) or (PCUA#950298).
Adapter wiring harness (p/n 1206K0010)
Hecon* receptacle (p/n U021-0020) or (PCUA# 950817).
For ordering convernience the parts can be ordered as supply items with a machine order. Refer to Technical Operations Bulletin A4 D5 dated 6/25/03.
Directions are included with the kit, but they do not show where to connect the wiring. To locate the connector, perform the following:
1. Remove the rear cover (p/n 111T12050), upper rear cover (p/n 65FA10110), and rear left side cover (p/n 111T12080).
Note: Early model machines will have two blue unused connectors under the upper rear cover.
2. Connect the long harness from the kit to the four-pin blue connector.
Note: Later model machines will not have the two blue connectors.
3. Use the four-pin white connector located behind the rear left side cover.
4. After the key counter is installed, it must be turned ON in the Tech. Rep. Mode.
5. Press the Utility key, [Meter Count], STOP, 0, 0, STOP, 0, 1 to enter the Tech. Rep. Mode.
6. Press STOP, 9 to display the Security Mode screen.
7 Press [Admin. Choice] and then select [Set] under the Key Counter option.
8 Once [Set] is selected under Key Counter option, selections for Color Mode 1-5 will be added to the screen. These selections will determine the number of
counts per copy. Refer to page S-44 in the Technical Manual.
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
How to change the default settings.
Solution
To change the default settings, perform the following:
1. Make the desired settings in the regular copy displays.
3. On the LCD select INPUT, then RESET MODE, and then SET-UP MODE.
4. Select INPUT and then ENTER twice followed by EXIT on the LCD to return to copier display.
323
8050
Description
Streaks on copies and prints in the lead-to-trail direction when using glossy paper or selecting gloss mode.
Solution
CAUSE: The 8050 uses polymerized wax-bearing toner. By design, the wax in the toner is melted to the paper during the
fusing process, and then hardens evenly following this process as the paper temperature uniformly decreases. However, the uniformity of this temperature
decrease is adversely affected as the output paper from the fusing unit contacts the guide plates and rollers on the conveyance section of the main body and
finisher units, causing the melted wax to harden unevenly, resulting in optical unevenness and streaks.
Notes:
1. When the 1/2 or 1/3 speed mode is selected, the paper and toner temperature increases. This, in conjunction with a slower paper conveyance speed,
causes an uneven temperature decrease to occur.
2. When the facedown mode is selected, the image side of the paper contacts the guide plates and rollers of the conveyance section several times after it
exits the fusing unit.
3. When the 2-sided mode is selected, the paper and toner temperature increases and the fused image side (underside) of the paper contacts the guide
plates and rollers of the conveyance section.
4. When the finisher unit mode is selected, both the main body and finisher conveyance units are employed, resulting in more paper/conveyance components
contact.
SOLUTION: The 8050 paper exit unit has been modified to improve airflow to increase the cooling efficiency of the machine and to reduce the conveyance
roller-to-paper contact area to minimize the adverse effect that the rollers have on the paper. This has been accomplished, among other things, by reshaping
the paper exit guide plate and by changing the material and shape (spur design) of the conveyance rollers. In addition, the fusing temperature for heavy
stock, coated, and gloss paper has been reduced from 200C to 180C.
The paper exit guide plate on finisher units FS115 and FS215 has also been modified to replace the standard conveyance rollers with the spur-design type
roller.
Notes:
1. Refer to the 8050 Technical Bulletin #5 for additional information.
3. IMPORTANT: The following is a list of tips which may aid in improving the print quality by reducing the amount of Wax Streaking that occurs on the final
print.
a. Maintain a 1/1 print speed on all print jobs (achieved by setting paper drawers for paper weights below 106 g/m2. This will lower fuser temperature and
increase print speed).
b. Print all jobs face up (This reduces the number of guide plates that the paper contacts after fusing).
c. As mentioned, less streaking will occur if fewer guide plates are contacted by the paper after fusing.
d. Avoid glossy mode if possible (Print speed will not be reduced and fuser temperature will not increase if glossy mode is avoided).
e. Reduction of fixing temperature for thick paper, coated paper and for glossy mode (200 C to 180 C).
f. Duplexed jobs have a longer paper path and are more susceptible to Wax Streaking.
Description
White spots on copies and prints.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Deterioration of toner caused by continuous copy/print of low coverage original (5% or less).
2. When the number of copies/prints is 5,000 or less.
3. Paper transferring performance is lowered when low transfer ability paper (high absorbent paper, etc.) is used.
SOLUTION: Install v40 firmware and perform the following:
1. Set software dipswitch 29-2 to 1 (increases 1st transfer current by 10mA).
2. Set software dipswitch 28-3 to 1 (enables automatic toner refresh).
3. The interval of the above automatic toner refresh mode performance can be changed by using software dipswitch 29-0 and 29-1. Please refer to the
following table:
DIPSW SETTINGS DESCRIPTION
29-0 29-1
0 1 every 250 counts
1 0 every 600 counts
0 0 every 1000 counts (default)
Note: When changing the first transfer current with the dipswitch, ensure that the First Transfer Manual Adjustment is default value: 35 mA +/- 2 mA. (36
mode - 1. Process Adjustment, - 1. High Voltage Adjustment, - 1. First Transfer Manual Adjustment). If there is a color with different value set, return the
value to 35 mA before executing this mode.
If this is not successful then replace the developer. When replacing the developer make sure to remove the cover and vacuum beneath the developer sleeve.
This will remove any broken down developer from the unit. Use caution when replacing the developer unit lid. Do not malform the mylar.
Description
324
8050
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
SC89-xx after replacing the status (main CB) board, operation board, printer CB or NVRAM.
Solution
CAUSE: The machine serial number needs to be programmed using the Board Change Mode.
SOLUTION: To program the machine serial number, perform the following:
1. Flash the status CB (main CB), printer CB or operation board to the latest firmware level prior to performing the Board Change Mode.
2. Access the 25 mode (power machine OFF/ON while pressing the 2 and 5 keys).
3. Select Board Change Mode.
4. Select the board that was changed (operation, overall CB, NVRAM, printer CB).
5. Press OK.
6. Enter the machine serial number using the alphanumeric key pad on the touchscreen.
7. .Press OK.
ERROR CODE EXPLANATION
- SC89-01
This code is caused by incompatibility between the replaced PRDB assigned S/N and mainbody S/N. For example, when trying to install the PRDB which
was removed from 65AE00001 to 65AE00005 main body.
- SC89-03
This code is caused by performing Board Change Mode with a used PRDB. For example, when trying to install the PRDB which was removed from
65AE00001 to 65AE00005 main body and perform Board Change Mode.
IMPORTANT: As a troubleshooting 'tool', a new or used Printer CB, Overall CB, or Operation Board can be temporarily installed in the 8050 for testing
purposes without using Board Change Mode, see solution ID#190878.
Notes:
1. The number of boards that can be replaced at one time is restricted to two.
2. To view the above PDF, Acrobat* Reader must be installed. Acrobat Reader can be downloaded for free from the Adobe* Web site at:
Description
SC29-xx troubleshooting flow chart.
Solution
SC29-xx troubleshooting flow chart .
Notes:
2. To view a PDF requiring an Asian (Chinese, J apanese, Korean)font pack, download one for free from the Adobe Web site at:
[[http://www.adobe.com/products/acrobat/acrrasianfontpack.html| URL http://www.adobe.com/products/acrobat/acrrasianfontpack.html]]
3. Set PDF viewing percentage value to at least 200% for clarity.
Description
How to temporarily install a new or used Printer CB, Overall CB, or Operation Board in the 8050 for testing purposes without using Board Change Mode
325
8050
(binary serialization).
Solution
Refer to Bulletin 4982 for more details.
Description
Evenly spaced yellow, magenta, cyan, or black lines from lead-to-trail after set up.
Solution
CAUSE: The time, date, and telephone numbers have not been programmed.
SOLUTION: To program the time, date, and phone numbers, perform the following:
1. Press the Help key.
2. Select [Key operator mode].
3. Select [1. System initial setting].
4. Select [1. Date & Time setting].
5. Enter the date and time pressing [Set] after each entry to scroll to the next number entry position.
6. After all numbers have been entered, select [Set], [Previous Screen], [Previous Screen] to return to the normal operations screen.
7. Enter the 25 mode (power ON the sub power switch while pressing the 2 and 5 keys).
8. Select [12. Setting date input].
9. Input the proper date. Note: The date must be entered again even if the current displayed date is correct. The machine will cycle through the date, month,
and year each time the numbers are entered.
10. Select [OK] after each number entry.
11. Select [7. Telephone number setting menu].
12. Select [Service center Telephone number (16 digit)].
13. Input up to 16 numbers. Note: A number must be entered.
14. Select [Service center FAX number (16 digit)].
15. Input up to 16 digits.
Note: A number must be entered.
16. Select [OK].
17. Power the sub switch OFF/ON to exit the 25 mode.
Description
Media Guide (paper specifications and recommendations) for the 8050/C500/CF5001.
Solution
8050 paper specifications .
Notes :
1.To view a PDF, Adobe Readermust be installed. Adobe Readercan be downloaded for free from the Adobeweb site at:
2.Duplexing of double-sided coated stock paper is not recommended on the 8050.
Description
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The CCD wiring may have failed.
Replace the CCD wiring (p/n 65AA90330).
2. Failed CCD unit.
Check ICP1 and ICP2 on the CCD unit to see if open; replace the CCD unit (p/n 65AA-6000).
Description
J 31-02 with the paper stopping at the entrance of the fuser.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. A one-way gear that pressures the fuser rollers has failed causing the fuser rollers to release pressure as the paper is feeding.
Replace the fixing drive gear/H (p/n 65AA77290) after confirming that the fuser rollers will not stay pressured.
2. One-way gear/C that drives the fusing rollers, fails and stops transmitting drive to the upper fuser roller under load. The rollers rotate normally until the
paper gets there, then they stop.
326
8050
Replace the fixing drive gear/C (p/n 65AA77180).
SPECIAL NOTE: Solution provided by Pat Boykin, KBT Windsor (KMPS).
Notes:
a. Fixing Unit Explanation extracted from the Service Manual.
b. Fixing Unit Disassembly/Assembly extracted from the Service Manual.
327
9028
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
328
9028

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
F28-1 at power up.
Solution
CAUSE: The drum carriage was removed with the power on.
SOLUTION: To clear the failure code, set 25 mode, P44 to 0.
329
9028
Description
F48 displayed while copying or at power up.
Solution
CAUSE: If the write unit was recently cleaned, the mylar strip (shim) on the rear underside of the index mirror may have fallen off. The result is that the angle
of the mirror changed and the laser will not strike the index sensor.
SOLUTION: Reinstall the shim in its correct position.
Description
F52 at process start.
Solution
CAUSE: Failed drum drive motor (M1). To verify the resistance of M1 use CN110, pins 1 and 2. The wires are yellow and violet; and located under the
cleaning unit. The motor should read approximately 7.0 ohms.
SOLUTION: Replace M1 (p/n 504080010) if necessary.
Description
F28-3 displayed while copying.
Solution
HV(C) (separation) abnormality. Perform a clearing operation. Set 25 mode, P44 to 0. Then turn machine OFF/ON.
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The paper neutralizing corona wire is broken. Inspect the corona wire (p/n 500026080) for proper installation. Replace the wire if it is broken.
2. Arcing or poor grounding to paper and/or drum discharge corona units. Thoughly clean both corona units and ensure proper grounding. If problem
reoccurs, replace corona units.
Paper discharge corona unit (p/n 5040-2650).
Drum discharge corona unit (p/n 5040-2700).
Description
Background with monocolor black only. Full color mode OK.
Solution
CAUSE: Worn developer, dirty machine.
SOLUTION: Replaced the developer and clean the CCD and write unit.
Description
F25 is displayed while copying.
Solution
CAUSE: One of the four toner motors is binding or has failed.
SOLUTION: To determine which toner motor is causing the problem, remove the cover on the front of the drum carriage. While attempting to make a copy,
observe each motor. All 4 motors should spin before the start of paper feed.
Remove the toner hopper from the bound motor and rotate the toner conveyance gear by hand to free it up. Once re-installed, stir the toner in the hopper to
eliminate the possibility of it being compacted.
If the problem motor does not spin inspect the mounting screws on the holding bracket. If the screws are too long they may contact the commutator (thing
that spins around) inside the motor housing. The black, cyan, and yellow toner motors, which are mounted upside down, are more prone to exhibit this
symptom.
Install a washer (p/n 00Z610305) between each mounting screw and the motor bracket. This will prevent the screw from contacting the motor commutator.
Run the motors in the 47 mode, code 01 to verify proper operation.
Description
Poor solid fill.
Solution
CAUSE: The conveyance unit (p/n 5040-4500) is not being adequately lifted by the conveyance lift up blocks (p/n 500045200) due to fatigue of the lift up
330
9028
springs (p/n 500045211).
SOLUTION: Reform the lift up springs so that they provide sufficient pressure to hold the conveyance unit firmly against the underside of the drum carriage.
This can be checked by ensuring the the front of the drum carriage frame is firmly into the slot of the front block of the transfer corona assembly (p/n
5040-2600).
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
331
AHT Onerip
Description
Are OneRIP* 1 and OnCore* supported products?
Solution
Any support for the AHT products, OneRIP 1 and OnCore, is handled by AHT directly. These are ex-Minolta/AHT solutions and, by contract, AHT provides
hotline support.
From within the U.S.
Tel: 877-330-0868
Fax: 310-214-8697
E-mail: support@aht.com

From outside the U.S.
Tel: 1-310-214-8600
Fax: 1-310-214-8697
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Description
How to physically connect the OneRIP* controller to the main body printer.
Solution
The main body printer (7920/7915) must be equipped with the print controller interface kit (PCUA 950470). The custom cable is included with the OneRIP
controller.
Description
OneRIP* User's Guide.
332
AHT Onerip
Solution
OneRIP User's Guide 100 records (requires Adobe* Acrobat)
Note: To view the above links, Acrobat* Reader must be installed. Acrobat Reader can be downloaded for free from the Adobe Web site at:
Description
When printing from Microsoft* PowerPoint* on a Windows* 2000 workstation, gray background is in the image area that is not displayed on the monitor.
Solution
CAUSE: An early version Windows 2000 OneRIP* printer driver is installed.
SOLUTION: Install the latest version driver by performing the following:
1. Access the Konica Digital FTP site and download the latest version of the driver required. The latest driver version as of August 28th, 20002 is V1.0.12.
The file name is located in the Color folder found in the OneRIP folder.
2. Delete any pre-existing OneRIP printer drivers from the OneRIP server and the workstation(s).
3. Install the latest printer driver on the server and set to share.
4. Re-install the printer driver on the workstation via the share.
Description
PDF files from Reader 6 has colors that are incorrect. One Rip on a 7915
Solution
Set reader to print as an image and it worked ok.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution

2.Select File.
3. SelectPrint.
6. Select OK.
8. Select File.
9. Select Print.
333
AHT Onerip
11. Select OK.
334
AHT Onerip Di250/350
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution

2.Select File.
3. SelectPrint.
6. Select OK.
335
8. Select File.
9. Select Print.
11. Select OK.
Description
How to determine what version of Sun J ava is installed on a MicrosoftWindows workstation.
Solution
To determine what version of Sun J ava is installed, perform the following:
1. From a command prompt type:java -version
2. Press Enter.
3. The version of Sun J ava will be indicated. If the command is not recognized then Sun J ava is not installed.
Description
How to perform Print Screens (screen shots) from a MicrosoftWindows OS and MacintoshOS.
Solution
Please see the attacheddocument for detailed information.
Description
How to check J ava version on a MacintoshOS 10.X.
Solution
To check J ava version on a MacintoshOS 10.X:
Open a Finder window=> select the base HD=> select Applications=> select Utilities=> select J ava.All installed versions of J ava will be listed.
SPECIAL NOTE : Solution contribution by Chuck Tripp, Production Print/SSD
336
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution

2.Select File.
3. SelectPrint.
6. Select OK.
337
8. Select File.
9. Select Print.
11. Select OK.
Description
Solution
2. Press Enter.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
338
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution

2.Select File.
3. SelectPrint.
6. Select OK.
339
8. Select File.
9. Select Print.
11. Select OK.
Description
Solution
2. Press Enter.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
340
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution

2.Select File.
3. SelectPrint.
6. Select OK.
341
8. Select File.
9. Select Print.
11. Select OK.
Description
AHTOneRIP contact information.
Solution
The OneRIP controller is manufactured by Advanced Hi-Tech Corporation.AHTcan be reached from within the U.S. via:
Telephone: 877-330-0868
Fax: 310-214-8697
More informationcan be found onthe following website:
http://www.aht.com/index.html
Description
Solution
2. Press Enter.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
342
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution

2.Select File.
3. SelectPrint.
6. Select OK.
343
8. Select File.
9. Select Print.
11. Select OK.
Description
Solution
2. Press Enter.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
344
AHT Onerip Di750
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution

2.Select File.
3. SelectPrint.
6. Select OK.
345
AHT Onerip Di750
8. Select File.
9. Select Print.
11. Select OK.
Description
Solution
2. Press Enter.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
346
AHT Onerip Di850
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution

2.Select File.
3. SelectPrint.
6. Select OK.
347
AHT Onerip Di850
8. Select File.
9. Select Print.
11. Select OK.
Description
Solution
2. Press Enter.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
348
Alchemy
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
How can I get support for Alchemy* products?
Solution
[[Alchemy contact information| URL http://newcustomerhub.imrgold.com/contact.asp]]
[[Support for Alchemy customers| URL http://www.imrgold.com/en/support/]].
Note: The product serial number is required for technical assistance.
Description
When importing a PDF, message that Plugin is missing and the application shuts down.
Solution
CAUSE: Updated version of Adobe* Acrobat* is required.
SOLUTION: Install Acrobat version 5.1 or greater.
Description
How to import multi-volume CD or DVD Alchemy* database into a server local folder.
Solution
To import multi-volume database to local folder, perform the following:
1. Copy the ALD (database file) to folder on the workstation or server.
2. Copy the database folder (has the same name as the ALD file). The database will have all the indexing files (TOB, TID, RID, etc.) and the data000 folder
will contain DAT and PRO files).
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
349
Alchemy
Description
Information/specifications on Alchemy* 7 Professional document storage software.
Solution
Alchemy is a document management software application that enables companies to efficiently manage, archive and distribute all of their desktop application
documents an scanned images into one repository that is easily searchable by users in stand-alone environments or on a network. The Alchemy software
helps companies capture, index, store, retrieve and share information from unstructured documents-quickly and cost effectively.
Note: Printing from the Alchemy viewer is NOT RECOMMENDED.
Alchemy software includes file viewers for the formats listed below. These viewers are not intended as a full-featured replacement for the original applications;
they are provided by IMR for quick viewing and searching of the files stored in Alchemy databases. IMR cannot guarantee that the performance of any viewer
will meet a specific user application requirement. In some cases, the viewer may not perform the same as the native application. All printing must be done
from the native application (i.e. Word, Excel, Adobe Acrobat) which can be launched from within the Alchemy viewer.
Note: For additional detail refer to the Alchemy spec sheet .
Description
Sales Engineering Support (SES) Third Party Solutions matrix.
Solution
SES Third Party Solutions matrix .
Note: To view the above link, Microsoft* Word must be installed.
Description
Microsoft* Word documents viewed in Alchemy* are not identical to the view in the native application.
Solution
CAUSE: The Alchemy preview mode is not a duplicate of the page layout view in Word. The Alchemy viewer displays as close to the original as possible.
However, documents using non-standard fonts, and complicated formats do not always view the same in Alchemy as they do in their native application.
SOLUTION: To see the correct view, use the 'rocket ship' icon in Alchemy to launch the application native to that document.
Description
When printing a TIFF* from Alchemy*, the Konica Printer is printing a thumbnail image in the upper right corner of the page instead of the entire page.
Solution
CAUSE: Incorrect program settings.
SOLUTION: To select the proper settings, perform the following:
1. Select the File Menu, select Print, choose the name of the Konica Printer in the drop down box in the Print dialog box. 2. Click the OPTION button in the
lower left corner of the Print dialog box.
3. In the Print Option dialog box select "Fit in Page" selection in the "Scale Print to:" section.
Description
Konica Dispatcher for Alchemy* software information.
Solution
Dispatcher for Alchemy is a task automation software solution developed by Konica's Systems Engineering Center (SEC).
350
Barr
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Barr* Enterprise Print Server (BEPS*) Information.
Solution
Barr Enterprise Print Server information.
Barr Enterprise Print Server spec sheet
Note: To view the above links, Acrobat* Reader must be installed. Acrobat Reader can be downloaded for free from the Adobe* Web site at:
Description
Barr* Enterprise Print Server (BEPS*) evaluation results for the IP421/431/304/601.
Solution
The Barr Enterprise Print Server produces PCL* from line data print jobs (Carriage and Line Feed controls). Testing was accomplished by setting up Line
Printer Daemons (LPD) on the workstation. The test print job was created by the Generic/Text only Microsoft* Windows driver that was directed to the Barr
Enterprise Print Server. The print job, after being transformed into PCL, was sent to the KN card installed in the IP. The procedure worked correctly - the
print job printed as expected. This product performed satisfactorily and is recommended to the field.
Description
Solution
351
bizhub 160
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
352
bizhub 160

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
HTTP 400 - Bad Request error. Unable to view the printer web browser (PageScope Web Connection).
Solution
CAUSE: The reason for the error:
1. A bad request.The browser sent a request that the server could not understand.
2. An attempt to communicatewith plain HTTP to an SSL-enabled server port. Instead, use the HTTPS scheme to access the URL.
3.The request could not be understood by the server due to malformed syntax. The client SHOULD NOT repeat the request without modifications.
Note : The first digit of the status code specifies one of five classes of response.

353
bizhub 160

1xx Informational

2xx Success

3xx Redirection

4xx Client Error

5xx Server Error

SOLUTION: The error can be eliminated by:
1. Checking for any enabled Pop-up blockers and reconfiguring them.
2. Checking for Internet security software that may be blocking Web access and disabling the service. Example: NortonInternet Security.
3. Installing Microsoft.NET Framework 1.1 Service Pack 1. Microsofthas confirmed that this is a problem inMicrosoftproducts that are listed in the
"Applies to" section. This problem was first corrected in.NET Framework 1.1 Service Pack 1.
Note : Refer to MicrosoftArticle ID: 826437 - FIX: "HTTP 400 - Bad request" error message in the .NET Framework 1.1 .
Description
Solution
Description
When scanning from the document feeder, copies are all black. The machine copies properly when an original is placed on the platen glass.
Solution
CAUSE: Scanner lock is enabled.
SOLUTION: Check and disabled the scanner lock, located underneath the left hand side of the control panel. Remove the lock if necessary.
Description
Is the 32MB Expanded Memory (EM-101) the same for all the listed products?
Solution
The 32MB Expanded Memory (p/n 1383801) is the same for all listed products.
Description
No network settings are shown when the scan button is pressed.
Solution
CAUSE: No TCP/IP address assigned.

SOLUTION: Input a TCP/IP address for the SMTP and POP3 information. The TCP/IP address does not have to be a valid TCP/IP address.
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
354
bizhub 160
Solution
355
bizhub 160f
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
356
bizhub 160f

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Machine keeps cycling through its boot up process.
Solution
CAUSE: The PWB-P board has failed.

SOLUTION: Replace the PWB-P board (p/n 4980101801 -bizhub 160f and p/n 4980101901 -bizhub 161f).
Description
Solution

1xx Informational

2xx Success

3xx Redirection

4xx Client Error

5xx Server Error

357
bizhub 160f
Description
Solution
Description
When scanning from the document feeder, copies are all black. The machine copies properly when an original is placed on the platen glass.
Solution
CAUSE: Scanner lock is enabled.
SOLUTION: Check and disabled the scanner lock, located underneath the left hand side of the control panel. Remove the lock if necessary.
Description
Solution
Description
TC error code is displayed after installing a Di1610 toner cartridge.
Note: Di1610 toner cartridges are compatible with the bizhub 160.
Solution
CAUSE: The firmware is corrupt.
SOLUTION: Install the latest firmware version.
Note: The latest firmware is available on the Konica Minolta FTP site .
Description
Is the 32MB Expanded Memory (EM-101) the same for all the listed products?
Solution
The 32MB Expanded Memory (p/n 1383801) is the same for all listed products.
358
bizhub 161f
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
359
bizhub 161f

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Machine keeps cycling through its boot up process.
Solution
CAUSE: The PWB-P board has failed.

SOLUTION: Replace the PWB-P board (p/n 4980101801 -bizhub 160f and p/n 4980101901 -bizhub 161f).
360
bizhub 161f
Description
Solution

1xx Informational

2xx Success

3xx Redirection

4xx Client Error

5xx Server Error

Description
Power cycles OFF/ON intermittently with "Please Wait" message.
Solution
This issue is escalated to J apan.

J apan is looking for PWB-P/PCL boards for evaluation.

bizhub 161f

p/n 4980122801

PWB-P (FAX/PCL)

Di1610 /Di1610f

p/n 4980101702

PWB-P

If experiencing this problem, please call SSD Hotline and open a ticket. Try to replace the PWB-P first and then PWB-PCL. Please return the failed board(s)
to ESS:
Konica Minolta Business Solutions, Inc.
550 Marshall Phelps Road
Windsor, CT 06095
Attn: Mahen Shukla/SSD/ESS
SPECIAL NOTE : Solution contribution by Mahen Shukla, ESS/SSD
361
bizhub 161f
Description
Is PC/Network faxing available?
Solution
PC/Network faxing is available using the optional (Item #4968341) Unimessage Pro software.
Description
System Configurator, 161f.
Solution
161f System Configurator .
Description
Solution
362
bizhub 162
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
363
bizhub 162

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Solution

364
bizhub 162

1xx Informational

2xx Success

3xx Redirection

4xx Client Error

5xx Server Error

Description
Citrixcompatibility.
Solution
Please refer to the attached Citrixcompatibility list for additional information.Some products not listed below arelisted in the document.It covers other MFPs
and Controllers like the bizhub C350/C353/C253/C203, the bizhub PRO 1050/920, the bizhub 600/750/360/420/500/162/180/210, IC-303 and IC-409.
To viewthe PDF, Adobe Readermust be installed. Adobe Readercan be downloaded for free from the Adobeweb site at:

IC-202
Tested in both the CitrixMetaframe XP (FR3) and the CitrixMetaframe Presentation Server 3.0 environments with the MicrosoftOffice, Microsoft
Excel and AdobeAcrobat6.0 applications loaded. When utilizing the PostScript Visual driver version 1.0.1, the AdobePostScript driver version 1.0.0 or
the PCL driver version 1.01 the print controller can be used without restrictions.

IC-203
Tested in both the CitrixMetaframe XP (FR3) and the CitrixPresentation Server 3.0 environments with the MicrosoftWord 2003/Excel 2003 and
AdobeAcrobat6.0 applications loaded. When utilizing the PostScript Visual driver version 2.0.28, the AdobePostScript driver version 2.0.28 or the PCL
driver version 2.0.0, the print controller can be used without restrictions.

IC-205
Excel and AdobeAcrobat6.0 applications loaded. When utilizing the GDI driver version 1.00 or the PCL driver version 1.00 the print controller can be used
with the following restrictions:
1. Cancelled print jobs may stay in queue when using the GDI driver.
2. The printer icon may disappear when cancelling a print job when using the GDI driver.
3. Print jobs may hang when printing from two or more workstations simultaneously using the GDI driver.

IC-302
Tested withCitrixMetaframe FR3 on MicrosoftWindows 2000 and 2003 Server, using PostScript version 1.1.
Applications tested were MicrosoftWord 2003, Excel 2003 and AdobeAcrobat6. The only restrictions found were that Owner Information functions were
not available.

IC-401
Tested in both the CitrixMetaframe XP (FR3) and the CitrixMetaframe Presentation Server 3.0 environments with the MicrosoftWord 2003, Excel
2003 and AdobeAcrobat6 applications loaded. Testing has been performed with the PostScript driver version 1.0.
The following restrictions:
1. The mixed media function may not be used.
2. Enabling the "Delete pending print jobs at logout" on the Metaframe server does not result in the print jobs being deleted.
3. Print job access codes should not be used.

IC-402
Applications tested were MicrosoftWord 2003, Excel 2003 and AdobeAcrobat6. The following are restrictions that were found:
1. Custom Size setting is not available.
2.Owner Information, Lock J ob and Copier store print functions are not available.
3. The client default settings are not saved.

IC-405
Applications tested were MicrosoftWord 2003, Excel 2003 and AdobeAcrobat6. The only restrictions found were thatMedia Mixed function is not
available by network printer.

IC-611
365
bizhub 162
Excel and AdobeAcrobat6.0 applications loaded. When utilizing the PostScript Visual driver version 1.0.0.7, the PostScript Adobedriver version 1.0.0.7
or the PCL driver version 1.0.1 the print controller can be used with the following restrictions:
1. The watermark function will not function when using the PCL driver.
2. The PostScript Visual driver is not available with MicrosoftWindows 2003 Server.
3. Booklet mode may not function when called within AdobeAcrobat.

IP-901
Tested withCitrixMetaframe FR3 on MicrosoftWindows 2000 and 2003 Server, using PostScript version 1.1 and 2.1.
not available.

bizhub C350 Standard Controller
2003 and AdobeAcrobat6 applications loaded. Testing has been performed with the PCL driver version 1.0 with the following restriction:
The watermark feature will not be available on a locally installed printer.

bizhub 200/250/350 Standard Controller
Excel and AdobeAcrobat6.0 applications loaded. When utilizing the PostScript Visual driver version 1.0.1 or the PCL driver version 1.0.2 the print
controller can be used with the following restrictions:
1. The custom paper size setting is not available.
2. The default selections made on client workstations will not be reflected on the printer properties screens.

bizhub C650/C550/C451/C450/C352/C351/C300/C252/C250
Tested withCitrixMetaframe.
Applications tested were MicrosoftWord 2003, Excel 2003 and AdobeAcrobat6.No restrictions were found in testing.
Description
Solution
Description
No network settings are shown when the scan button is pressed.
Solution
CAUSE: No TCP/IP address assigned.

SOLUTION: Input a TCP/IP address for the SMTP and POP3 information. The TCP/IP address does not have to be a valid TCP/IP address.
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
366
bizhub 162
367
bizhub 180
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
368
bizhub 180

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Solution

369
bizhub 180

1xx Informational

2xx Success

3xx Redirection

4xx Client Error

5xx Server Error

Description
Parts required to connect a Heconkey counter or Base 10 system to the main body.
Solution
Please see attached Bulletin Number 5563 for details.
Description
Solution

IC-202

IC-203

IC-205

IC-302
not available.

IC-401

IC-402
370
bizhub 180

IC-405

IC-611

IP-901
not available.



Description
Solution
Description
Not Installed message when printing the configuration page. NIC firmware version is displayed in the Service Mode.
Solution
CAUSE: The wiring harness that connects the IC205 to the NC205 is installed incorrectly.
SOLUTION: Install the wiring harness connector with the longer distance from the ferrite core on the NC205 and the shorter to the IC205.
Description
'*Caution* Set original to ADF' message when trying to copy from the platen glass with Mixed original mode set as initial default setting.
Solution
CAUSE: This is a specification.
SOLUTION: The function may confuse users. Requested to change the function. The change may be included in next maintenance release. Please instruct
users to press the 'Mix original mode' key to cancel it if they do not feed originals through the ADF.
371
bizhub 181
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Configuration information.
Solution
See attachment (bizhub_181_config_v12.pdf) for information.
Description
Specifications and Install Guide.
Solution
See attachments (bizhub_181_spec_and_Install_guide_v7.pdf and bzhub_181_spec_sheet_FINAL.pdf) for information.
Description
Solution
Description
How to set up FTP Publishing Services on a MicrosoftVista workstation.
Solution
Please follow the step-by-step procedures as shown in the attacheddocument.

Description
Solution
372
bizhub 181
Description
Can you change the SMTP port from 25?
Solution
The SMTP port can be changed between 1-65535:
1. Enter PageScope Web Connection, and login using password "sysadm".
2. Click on Network, and then select SMTP & POP3 Configuration.
3. Enter the desired port, and press apply, and exit the mode.
SPECIAL NOTE : Solution contribution by Malcolm Hibbert, Workgroup/SSD
Description
Solution

2.Select File.
3. SelectPrint.
6. Select OK.
8. Select File.
9. Select Print.
11. Select OK.
Description
The machine will not print andwill not allow a memory clear when the NIC is connected.
Solution
CAUSE: Firmware conflict. If the main body has version 5 firmware and the NIC has "old" firmware version 1, there will beno communication.

SOLUTION: Please flash the main body back to version 2 firmware. Update the NIC to version 5 firmware and then flash the main body back to version 5
firmware.
SPECIAL NOTE : Solution contribution by David Silverstein, Workgroup/SSD
Description
Abnormal noise that sounds like high pitch grinding.
373
bizhub 200
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
374
bizhub 200

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
How to set up Scan to SMB in MicrosoftWindows Vista.
Solution
MicrosoftWindows Vista has a Public Folder Sharing function to make the setup easier than the previous OSs.
Follow the procedures below.
At the Workstation/PC:
1. Right-click on the Network icon on the desktop.
3. In the Network and Sharing Center, and then under the Sharing and Discovery title, click on Public Folder Sharing.
375
bizhub 200
4. Click on 'Turn on sharing so anyone with network access can open, change, and create files'.
5. Click Apply (Click Continue to the 'Windows needs your permission to Continue' message).
6. Create the folder and set to share. Click on the 'This Computer' icon in the Network and Sharing Center to display the available hard drives or local disk(s).
7.Double-click on the desired disk and create a new folder.
8.Right-click on the new folder and select 'ShareIn the File Sharing' dialog box. Make sure the desired user(s) are displayed and/or added as needed. Set
the permission level to Co-owner to allow writing rights.
9.Click on Share and then (Click 'Continue' to the 'Windows needs your permission to Continue' message).

At the engine (direct input):
1. Press the Scan button on operation panel.
2. Touch Direct Input tab.
3. Touch Scan to SMB.
4. In the host name field enter theTCP/IP address of the target PC.
5. In the Destination Folder enter the shared folder name.
6. in the User ID field enter the valid workgroup or domain User Name.
7. In the Password field enter the user Password.
8. Press Start.
Note : For more information on MicrosoftVista File and Printer Sharing technologies, go to
http://www.microsoft.com/technet/network/evaluate/vista_fp.mspx
Description
How to scan to SMB.
Solution
When setting up scanning to SMB, user rights must be set appropriately for the environment that the workstation is in (i.e., Local Workgroup or Domain).
Below is an example of both:
1. User1@usa.konicaMinolta.us is an example of which user ID to add when sharing out a folder. This is when the machine is on a domain.
2. A machine is on the local workgroup. Use the machine name PW-Workstation_Name and then the username User1, ie \PW-Workstation_Name\User1.
Then set the appropriate rights.
Description
Unable to send a fax using the network fax utility version 4.5.24 with additional fax memory installed (EM-305 Expanded Memory Unit 128MB).
Solution
CAUSE: SU-501 (32MB SODIMM) was removed for the EM-305. The SU-501allows the firmware to unlock the modules required for Network Fax and
Internet Fax.

SOLUTION: To verify that theengine does not have the SU-501, perform the following:
1. Press the Extra Scan button on the engine. The following should read IP Address and touchscreen will display six push pins.
2. This method can be used away from the engine:
a. Click on Start button from MicrosoftWindows 2000, XP Pro or Vista (Premium or Business).
b. Click on Run for Windows 2000 and XP Pro. Skip this step for Vista.
c. Type cmd and press Enter.
d. Type telnet and press Enter.
e. Enter set localecho for Windows XP Pro and Vista and set local_echo for Windows 2000 workstation.
f. Enter open engines TCP/IP address 25' and press ENTER.
g. The top line should read 220.
If the message is connection failure, then verify the SU-501 is installed. Refer to the attached SU501_location.pdf document for the location of the SU-501.
Notes :
1. MicrosoftWindows Vista does not enable Telnet Client on default installation. To enable Telnet Client, perform the following:
a. Click on Start.
b. Click on Control Panel.
c. Click on Program and Features.
d. Check Telnet Client.
e. Install Telnet Client.
Description
DF605, unable to clear the Original Left On Glass message.
Solution
CAUSE: The metrics original size is enabled.
SOLUTION: To disable the metrics original size and calibrate inch size, perform the following:
1. Access the Tech Rep Mode and go to System Input.
376
bizhub 200
2. Select the Original Size Detect Option, then select NO.
3. Go to Function and do a F7-1; the display will look like it is doing nothing, but it is doing a metric size sensor calibration. 4. After 20 - 30 seconds (do not
press END) just power OFF the main switch. This should log the new calibration for Inch paper.
Description
How to print the copy track data.
Solution
To print the copy track data, perform the following:
1. Enter PageScope Light (Enter IP address of printer in the Internet Explorer) Login with Administrator Password (8 0's default password).
2. Select System, Administrator management.
3. Select Account Counter 1, 2 or 3.
4. Select File, Print.
Note: To print the copy track data, the unit must be connected as a network printer.
Description
When attempting to PC-fax, the job will print instead of being faxed.
Solution
CAUSE: Gateway TX is set to Restrict instead of Allow.
SOLUTION: To allow Gateway TX, perform the following:
1. While in Copy mode, press the Utility button.
2. Press Admin Management on the LCD. Default password is 00000000.
3. Press Admin2.
4. Select Network Setting.
5. Select Scanner Setting.
6. Select Gateway TX and edit it to Allow.
Description
Solution

1xx Informational

2xx Success

3xx Redirection

4xx Client Error

5xx Server Error

377
bizhub 250
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
378
bizhub 250

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
J amming from Tray 1. The feed and separator rollers have been replaced.
Solution
CAUSE: The one-way bearing (p/n 4030-3034-01)is slipping on the shaft.

SOLUTION: Remove and clean the one-way bearing.
379
bizhub 250
Description
Solution

8. Press Start.
Description
Solution
Internet Fax.

Notes :
a. Click on Start.
Description
'ERROR .' is indicated after replacing the NVRAM.
Solution
CAUSE: MSC data may be missing from the NVRAM

SOLUTION: To correct, perform the following:
1. Turn OFF main power switch
380
bizhub 250
2. Insert a CF card with the latest firmware into the sloton the nMFP board.
3. Turn ON the main power switch.
4. Firmware upgrading should now start.
5. Do not turn power OFF until FINISH is displayed on the screen.
6. Once FINISH is displayed, turn the main power OFF.
7. Remove the card and turn power ON.
8. The machine should now boot normally.

Description
Solution

1xx Informational

2xx Success

3xx Redirection

4xx Client Error

5xx Server Error

Description
C3451/C3452 or C3851/C3852.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Failed fuser thermostat. C3851 and C3852(Low Fuser Temperature failure) are detected during copy or C3451 and C3452 (Warm Up failure) are detected
without completing warm-up after tuningON the power.
See attached Bulletin Number 5321 for details.
To reset the codes, perform the following:
a. Enter the initial mode.
b. Remove the Compact Flash Cover [1].
c. Press the Warm Restart Switch [2].
d. When a dot appears at the center on the left-hand side of the screen, enter "3" from the 10-key pad.
e. Enter the 8-digit service code and touch [END]. Default value:00000000.
f. Select "Trouble Reset" to complete the procedure.
IMPORTANT :Abort (Abort code: 0x00f00b00) will occur frequently if trying to reset after detecting the error codes without first replacing the thermostat (p/n
4040M60100)or Fusing Unit (p/n 4040 R710 00).
Note :To view a PDF, Adobe Readermust be installed. Adobe Readercan be downloaded for free from the Adobeweb site at:
SPECIAL NOTE : Solution contribution by KMBT (J apan).

2.Improper adjustmentadjustmentandpositioningofRight Side Door Interlock Switch 2 (S3).

SOLUTION: Properly adjust Right Side Door InterlockSwitch 2.To adjust:
a. Remove the cover.
b. Be sure to shut theright side door.
c.Loosen thescrewsindicated by the'yellow arrow' below.
d.Tighten thescrews after adjusting 0.5mmto 1.0mm as represented by 'A' inthe diagram.

e.Reinstall thecover.
381
bizhub 250
Description
Low image density, black lines, black banding.
Solution
CAUSE: Developer is incorrectly put into the developing unit. If developer contaminates the Ds Collar, binding may occur.

SOLUTION: When the IU is set up and the developer is replaced, prevent developer from falling onto the Ds Collar.
Protect the Ds Collar with a piece of paper when removing/adding the developer (see the attached file).
If experiencing low image density, black lines, black banding, scraped surface of the PC drum, flattened edge of the Ds Collar, please exchange the PC drum
unit (Item #4068612), Developing unit (p/n 4040 0752 00) and Transfer roller unit (p/n 4040 0760 00) at the same time.
IMPORTANT : When Transfer roller unithas reachedits lifetime (150K), be sure to exchange it.
Although a technician is trained on the Di2010/Di2510/Di3510 series, utmost attention must be paid to the procedure for the bizhub 200/250/350 because of
the difference in the developing system.
Notes :
1.To view the attached Instruction document, MicrosoftExcelor ExcelViewer must be installed. ExcelViewer 2003 (9.9MB) can be obtained free from
Microsoftat the following URL;
http://www.microsoft.com/downloads/details.aspx?FamilyID=c8378bf4-996c-4569-b547-75edbd03aaf0&displaylang=EN .
2.Refer to attached J PG files to view cause/effect of this issue.
3.J apan will bundle the protection sheet with machine for setup, and also the PC drum unit for PMstarting withthe end of December 2007 production.Please
follow the attached installation instructions to prevent the starter going into Ds collar.
382
bizhub 350
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
383
bizhub 350

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
How to scan to SMB.
Solution
When setting up scanning to SMB, user rights must be set appropriately for the environment that the workstation is in (i.e., Local Workgroup or Domain).
Below is an example of both:
1. User1@usa.konicaMinolta.us is an example of which user ID to add when sharing out a folder. This is when the machine is on a domain.
2. A machine is on the local workgroup. Use the machine name PW-Workstation_Name and then the username User1, ie \PW-Workstation_Name\User1.
Then set the appropriate rights.
384
bizhub 350
Description
J amming from Tray 1. The feed and separator rollers have been replaced.
Solution
CAUSE: The one-way bearing (p/n 4030-3034-01)is slipping on the shaft.

SOLUTION: Remove and clean the one-way bearing.
Description
Solution

8. Press Start.
Description
C2557 code at process start and paper jams in fuser unit.
Solution
CAUSE: Failed PWB-A (Mechanical CB).
SOLUTION: Replace the PWB-A board (p/n 4040 0101 03).
Description
Solution
Internet Fax.

385
bizhub 350
Notes :
a. Click on Start.
Description
'ERROR .' is indicated after replacing the NVRAM.
Solution
CAUSE: MSC data may be missing from the NVRAM

SOLUTION: To correct, perform the following:
1. Turn OFF main power switch
2. Insert a CF card with the latest firmware into the sloton the nMFP board.
3. Turn ON the main power switch.
4. Firmware upgrading should now start.
5. Do not turn power OFF until FINISH is displayed on the screen.
6. Once FINISH is displayed, turn the main power OFF.
7. Remove the card and turn power ON.
8. The machine should now boot normally.

Description
Solution

1xx Informational

2xx Success

3xx Redirection

4xx Client Error

5xx Server Error

386
bizhub 360
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
387
bizhub 360

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
C2403 (C-2403).
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. When an empty toner bottle is rotated while removing it from the machine, the alignment tab goes out of home position. Then, when a new bottle is
inserted, it does not rotate correctly.
A modification is available. Please refer to attached Bulletin Number 5775 and follow the procedures outlined. To view the PDF, Adobe Readermust be
installed. Adobe Readercan be downloaded for free from the Adobeweb site at: http://www.adobe.com/products/acrobat/readstep2.html .
Note : To reset C-2403 after replacing the toner bottle, perform the following:
a. Power OFF the main switch (SW2, inside front door).
b. Slide the toner bottle cradle and remove spent toner bottle.
c. Prepare new toner bottle per instructions and place toner bottle in the cradle (line up the two notches at the rear so the cartridge is laying level in the
cradle).
d. Turn bottle completely around and line up the arrow at the 12 o'clock position clockwise or counterclockwise and push cradle in and lock toner door.
e. The power should be re-enabled to ON while holding the Utility key; the Konica Minolta blue screen within 6 minutes, then the white screen with Trouble
Reset. Touch and OK will appear. f. Power OFF/ON and should go to Ready. This procedure may have to be redone several times.

2. Toner bottle is not turning.
Ensure that the toner bottle does not have any manufacturing defects. Also ensure that the pressure spring inside the pressure assembly (p/n 26TA-3332) is
applying sufficient pressure when locked into place.

3. Excessive pressure from the Toner Bottle Door.
Remove the pressure springs (Toner Supply Unit (TSU), item #7 - see attached) located in toner door.

4. The toner bottle position sensor (PS28) may have shifted when the drive section on the back of the machine was removed or installed. As a result, PS28
cannot detect rotation of the toner bottle.
Install a new mounting plate (p/n 50GA33161E) and stopper seal (p/n 447042481) for PS28. These parts prevent PS28 from becoming dislodged. Complete
details are in attached Bulletin Number 6078.

5. Contact between parts around the bottle guide section.
Please install the Toner supply auxiliary cover countermeasure as explained in the attached Parts Modification Notice.

6. If toner bottle is not installed correctly and the customer forces it then it may cause tearing of the drive tabs on the toner bottle. This will cause the bottle
not find the home position generating this error.
Please ensure that the toner bottle is inserted correctly. Refer to Bulletin 5471 for details on a modification to the toner guide assembly.

7. Even though the correct procedure was used per Bulletin Number 5471 , there still may be burrson theflange tips at neck of the toner bottle.Also,PS4
and PS28 may not be sensing properly.
Verify the correct operation of PS4 and PS28. Check for burrson theflange tips at neck of the toner bottle. Use Scotch-Brite to remove the burrs on the
toner bottle.
Note : The service documentation does not include a procedure for checking PS4 (Toner Bottle Sensor) and the PS28 (Toner Bottle Position Sensor). To
check:
a. Enter the State Confirm mode=>'Service Mode screen'; press [State Confirmation].
b.'State Confirmation screen'; press [Sensor check].
c. 'Sensor Check screen'; press [Check Code] and, when entering the sensor check code in 3-digit format through the copy count setting button, a state
388
bizhub 360
(ON/OFF) or value is displayed in the Result area.
d. For the multi-mode, press [Multi Code] and enter a three-digit multi-code through the copy count setting key. When conducting the sensor check of other
signal sources, repeat stepscand d.
IMPORTANT : Code 57, multi-mode 2, which is not listed in the bizhub 420/500 Service Manual, is used to monitor the output signals ofPS4 (Toner Bottle
Sensor), and multi-mode 3 for monitoring the output signal ofPS28 (Toner Bottle Position Sensor). These sensors are located at the rear of the hopper
assembly at the 11 oclock position forPS28 and at the 12 oclock position forPS4. The state of these sensors will switch from 0 to 1 if the bottle is moved.

8. Excessive toner misting due to openings in Toner supply holding main body (p/n 26NA32311E).
Clean the partthoroughly with alcohol.Applya coveringlike electrical tape to cover the openings as shown in the attached file.
CAUTION :Do not cover the opening from which the toner is added to the developer.
SPECIAL NOTE : Solution contribution by Southern Region DSM, Val Kenney and technician, Paul Speicher of Charlotte Copy Data.
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
C-2803 (C2803)with poor copy quality/jamming.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1.The developer drive belt has fallen off, so the agitator drive gear does not turn.
Reinstall and adjust the tension of the drive belt for the agitator drive gear. If necessary, replace the Developing Drive Pulley-Lower 45t (p/n 50GA 1565 0).

2.TCR output abnormality.
Replace TCR sensor (p/n 26NA 8804 1).
Note : Escalation System Support (ESS) would like to investigate the cause of the sensor failure. Please send thesuspect sensorandthe assigned
SSDticket number to ESS at:
Konica Minolta Business Solutions
Windsor, CT 06095
Attention: Mahen Shukla

3. TheHV supply unit has failed.
Replace the HV supply unit (p/n 50GA84010).
Note : Developer is also being pulled from the developing unit to the drum.

4. Pulling developer onto the drum andcopies or constant jamming at the registration rollers andconstant failing of the PRCB after it is replaced due toshorted
Toner Addition Solenoid (SD5).A longer screw wasinserted for solenoid which shorts the windings in the solenoid. Longer screw inserted when the C-2803
modification is installed or the assembly is removed.
Replace the PRCB (p/n 50GA-9020E), the toner solenoid (p/n 26NA82513) and install shorter screws.
Note : Please review the attachment for solenoid location. To view the document(s), MicrosoftWordor WordViewer must be installed. WordViewer
2003 (11.7MB) can be obtained free from Microsoftat the following URL;
http://www.microsoft.com/downloads/details.aspx?DisplayLang=en&FamilyID=95e24c87-8732-48d5-8689-ab826e7b8fdf .
Description
Solution
389
bizhub 360

8. Press Start.
Description
C-6701 at power up.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1.Failed Overall Control Board (OACB).
Replace the Overall CB (p/n 50GA-930 1H).

2.A communication issue between the CCD and OACB. Usually issue appears shortly after having the OACB (Overall Control Board)removed or replaced.
Please check the flat cable between the CCD and OACB. Make sure it is undamaged and connected properly. Replace the CCD cable (p/n 50GA 9050 0)if
reseating it has no effect on the service code.
Description
VoIP TX/RXsolutions.
Solution
More and more customers changing their PBX systems from analog or ISDN to VoIP-based PBX systems.
Note : A digital-to-analog converter can be usedand will work, but Konica MInolta will not provide any support if there arephone/fax issues.

Due to the general incompatibility of fax and VoIP,certain settings may not work. The problem is not caused by the Fax Unit, butis caused by:

the general design of VoIP using TCP/IP Packets
VoIP PBX systems
the general specification of VoIP and it's
* Codecs
* Coding an decoding timings
* Fax fixed timings
* LAN Packet losses
* Quality of Services
* ITU/RFC Specification implementation
* Bugs
* Interpretation of technical terms within the specifications of the ITU-T and RFC documents.
VoIP is still not supported offically by Konica Minolta, but may work in some instances.
Performing these suggested settings may solve the problem.Follow the operation made step-by-step:

From Service Mode

==> FAX Settings
==> Communication
==> Protocolset "ON" the "V.29 EP Tone" Protocol
and set "OFF" all other faster protocolls.
From Service Mode

==> FAX Settings
==> Communication
==> Others we have set "OFF" the "ECM Function"
From Service Mode

==> FAX Settings
==> Function Parameter
==> Address "0e0012 =01111000
390
bizhub 360
(Hex 78 =120 sec)
(T1 Timer for Calling)
From Service Mode

==> FAX Settings
==> Address "0e0013 =01111000
(Hex 78 =120 sec).
(T1 Timer for Called)
From Service Mode

==> System 2
==> Software Switch
==> SoftSwitch 21 Bit5=1
00100000
(HEX 20 =over 4.5 sec)
(T4 Waiting time between start Identification)
Notes:
a. Before performing the above mentioned settings it is recommended to upgrade the firmware to the latest version and to check if the FK-502 will have the
latest available version. The latest version firmware or system software is available via the Konica Minolta Download Selector. Access the Selector from SSD
Web Support (CS Expert Support) by clicking on 'Download MSDS, Drivers, Firmware and more'.
b.Expect more communication problems than on anISDN or analog line (approximately 15% more).

Workaround :
If the aforementioned settingsdo not showan acceptable result,offer as alternative:

Unimessage Pro Fax Server Solution where Scan to E-mail with auto prefix-suffix setting is used (depending on the machine Series - prefix-suffix will be
added automatically or can be selected manually).

RightFax Server with "Setup Utility for RightFax" using OpenAPI.
SPECIAL NOTE : Solution contribution by KM Europe (BEU) and Cesar J imenez, Production Print/SSD.
391
bizhub 361
Description
Solution


VoIP PBX systems
* Codecs
* Fax fixed timings
* LAN Packet losses
* Bugs

From Service Mode

==> FAX Settings
==> Communication
From Service Mode

==> FAX Settings
==> Communication
From Service Mode

==> FAX Settings
==> Address "0e0012 =01111000
(Hex 78 =120 sec)
From Service Mode

==> FAX Settings
==> Address "0e0013 =01111000
(Hex 78 =120 sec).
From Service Mode

==> System 2
==> Software Switch
00100000
Notes:

Workaround :


392
bizhub 361
Description
During copy or print jobs, output may be faded, washed out, have blank streaks or is blank. C-2702 (C2702) error may alsobe indicated.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Improper contact of transfer power supply plate.
Inspect the transfer power supply plate (p/n 50GA50510) to ensure that proper contact is being made. The plate islocated at the lower left corner of the right
side conveyance door. Contact is made at two locations- one with the copper plate at lower left of main body near the white supply wire and the other with
transfer contact spring.

2. A transfer arcing/short abnormality. If the phenomena are generated 5 consecutive times for three cycles the code is generated. Usually the transfer
separation corona assembly shorting generates this code, however, the issue can include the blocks and the actual HV unit itself.
Replace the transfer separation assembly (p/n 50GA-2600). If this fails to resolve the issue, the corona end blocks should be replaced (p/n 50GA 50530).
And if the issue still continues, the HV unit should be replaced (p/n 50GA 84010).

3. Internal arcing within the main body high voltage connecting plate assembly. C-2703 (C2703) code may also be indicated.
Inspect the main body high voltage connecting plate assembly for signs of arcing. Clean, insulate, or replace the cover plate (p/n 50GA-7380), high voltage
connecting plate S assembly (p/n 50GA-7510), electrode connecting springs A (p/n 26NA73251), contact pedestal 1 (p/n 50GA73420), and high voltage
connecting plate B assembly (p/n 26NAR71200) as necessary.

4. Poor grounding of the T/S corona.
Ensure thatthe ground plate is making good contact.Replace the T/Sassemblyif the problem persists (p/n 50GA-2600).

5. The grounding tabs located on the lower left side of the side fuser door could be bent. When closing the side fuser door, check to see if the grounding tabs
meet on the adjacent grounding plate. If the tabs are bent they may be pushed up over the plate instead of down onto the plate.
If the grounding tabs do not meet the grounding plate, bend the tabs down slightly. This puts them in the proper position to meet the grounding plate.
Description
FS-510, C1104(C-1104) at power up.
Solution
CAUSE: Failed finisher control board.

SOLUTION: Replace the finsher control board (p/n 4349 0120 04).
Description
How to create a device printer on an AS/400system
Solution
To Create a Device Description on AS/400to print to KMBS printers perfrom the following:
1. From the Main Menu under Selection or Command, type: CRTDEVPRT <enter>.
2. Change the following to set up the printer (those settings not changed, keep at default):
a. Device Description - (name the printer i.e. KMPrinter)
b. Device Class - *LAN
c. Device Type - 3812
d. Device Model - 1
e. LAN Attach - *IP
f. Port number 9100
g. Font Identifier - 011
h. Form Feed - * Autocut
i. Manufacturer - *HP5si
j. Paper Source (both) - *letter
k. Address - (TCP/IP address of the NIC)
l. User Define Option - *IBMSHRCNN
m. System Driver (hit F4) - *IBMSNMPDRV
Note :Vary ON the device to allow attachment.
Description
Solution

393
bizhub 361
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
Description
Option setting for the HDD enabled in the service mode, yet in State Confirmation, Memory HDD Check, and Management list, the option for HDD is
unavailable.
Solution
CAUSE: Incorrect configuration.

SOLUTION:Enter the Service mode, select System 2, DIPSW Settings and set DIPSW 19, bit 3 fromON to OFF. Reformat the HDDin the State Confirmation
Memory and HDD adjust mode.
Description
When using Vendor mode, copy jobs print out but print jobs do not.
Solution
CAUSE: Incorrect setings.

SOLUTION: Afterenabling Vendor mode,set the security settings for the function of Vendor mode. To Access the settings, use the following instructions.
"Administrator Settings" => "Security Settings" => "Function Management Settings" => "Usage Settings".
The functions of Scan, Print and Fax, as well as the settings of ON, OFF and Disabledwill be presented. Set the corresponding function (fax, print) to OFF so
that Vendor mode will ignore that function. In other words, set Print to OFF so that print jobs will be output by the MFP.
SPECIAL NOTE : Solution contribution by Paul Santangelo, ESS/SSD
Description
Solution

2.Select File.
3. SelectPrint.
6. Select OK.
8. Select File.
9. Select Print.
394
bizhub 361
11. Select OK.
Description
Where to find paper recommendations for specific models.
Solution
Please refer to the attachedMedia Guide for the products listed. It can also be found on the MyKonicaMinolta.com web site by following the procedure below:
1. Log into the MyKonicaMinolta.com web site.
2. Click on "Products."
3. Click on "Supported Models Library."
4. Select "Office Systems" in the pull down menu for Category and select the appropriate product.
5. Click on the link for "Support Materials" and scroll to the link for the Media Guide Office Workgroup Products.
Note : To viewthe PDF, Adobe Readermust be installed. Adobe Readercan be downloaded for free from the Adobeweb site at:
Description
Solution
See attachment (40PX_Config_v5.pdf) for information.
Note: To view a PDF, Adobe Reader must be installed. Adobe Reader can be downloaded for free from the Adobe web site at:
Description
Solution
Most documentation (manuals, etc.) can be downloaded from the MyKonicaMinolta.com Supported Models Library or from the KMBS public site (
http://www.kmbs.konicaminolta.us ) Support & Drivers tab.
Description
MSDS information.
Solution
See attached ZIP filefor MSDS information.
Notes :
1.To open the ZIP file, WinZipmay need to be installed. WinZipcan be downloaded from the WinZipwebsite: http://www.winzip.com/ddchomea.htm .
The file can either be saved to disk or opened. It is recommended to download the ZIP and open from the local computer to view.
2. To view theZIPped PDF(s), Adobe Readermust be installed. Adobe Readercan be downloaded for free from the Adobeweb site at:
Description
Specifications.
395
bizhub 420
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
396
bizhub 420

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
How to clear a 'Replace Fixing Unit' message.
Solution
To clear a 'Replace Fixing Unit' message, perform the following:
1. Enter Service Mode.
2. Select [System 1].
3. Select [Initialization].
4. Select [Counter Data].
5. Select [Fixing Counter].
6. Press the Start button.
7. Exit the Service Mode.
Notes :
a.The Fixing Counter was added in version 31 firmware.
b. The latest version firmware and system software is available via the Konica Minolta Download Selector. Access the Selector from SSD Web Support (CS
Expert Support) by clicking on 'Download MSDS, Drivers, Firmware and more'.
Description
C2403 (C-2403).
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
397
bizhub 420
cradle).






toner bottle.
check:

Description
Intermittent No Reply from PING; no printing and cannot browse; requires reboot to recover.
Solution
CAUSE:A vulnerability was corrected in early firmware where excessive SMB traffic can causethe NICto drop off.

SOLUTION:New firmware is released and posted for the following models to correct this issue.
IC-611 (bizhub PRO 1050)
OWN: DLBT0700188EN00 Ver.30-COC0
OEM: DLBT0700192EN00 Ver.30-COC0

DLBT0700193EN00 Ver.20-COC0

IC-202 (bizhub 600/bizhub 750)
DLBT0700429EN00 Ver. 30-CH

398
bizhub 420
bizhub 360
DLBT0700787EN00

bizhub 420
DLBT0700784EN00

bizhub 500
DLBT0700786EN00

bizhub C450
DLBT0700461EN00 (Phase3.03/Ver.I8)

bizhub C351

bizhub C250

bizhub C252

bizhub C352

bizhub C300
Notes :
1. If the issue is not resolved by the new firmware, please obtain details to further the investigations. Currently, here are the first items to confirm and provide.
a. Provide answers to the following questions:
What type of network environment is the customer using?
What is the network speed of the network?
What is the NIC speed on our engine?
When the device goes down can it be pinged? Browsed to?
What protocols are on the network?
Is the machine in a power save or sleep mode at the time of failure?
Does the machine have a static address or is it dynamic?
How often does the incident occur?
Are there any routers, switches or hubs involved on the network segment(s) that aretrying to utilize the machine?
What types of special applications are utilized by people who print to the device?
b. If 600/750/920, you can perform a hyperterminal session and set transfer to text to create text file that shows the controller's activity.
c. Perform an Ethereal network packet capture. Instructions are attached.
2. The latest version firmware and system software is available via the Konica Minolta Download Selector. Access the Selector from SSD Web Support (CS
3. Refer to the attached PDF for reference. To view a PDF, Adobe Readermust be installed. Adobe Readercan be downloaded for free from the Adobe
web site at:
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:

399
bizhub 420
Windsor, CT 06095


400
bizhub 421
Description
Solution


VoIP PBX systems
* Codecs
* Fax fixed timings
* LAN Packet losses
* Bugs

From Service Mode

==> FAX Settings
==> Communication
From Service Mode

==> FAX Settings
==> Communication
From Service Mode

==> FAX Settings
==> Address "0e0012 =01111000
(Hex 78 =120 sec)
From Service Mode

==> FAX Settings
==> Address "0e0013 =01111000
(Hex 78 =120 sec).
From Service Mode

==> System 2
==> Software Switch
00100000
Notes:

Workaround :


401
bizhub 421
Description
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:




Description
FS-510, C1104(C-1104) at power up.
Solution

Description
Solution
d. Device Model - 1
e. LAN Attach - *IP
f. Port number 9100
Description
Solution

402
bizhub 421
Description
Solution
Description
Vellum paper specifications.
Solution
Vellum paper is outside of the special paper specifications of the machine therefore specific paper specification can not be provided. The paper may run
though the machine, however Konica Minolta does not support a particular brand of vellum paper.
Note : Vellum paper has tendencies to hold a static charge causing the paper to have transfer problems with possible premature wearing of the drum. This
paper, in some cases is coated, and could possibly lead to premature wearing of the fuser rollers or leave marks on the copies.
Description
Solution
Description
When duplexing from MicrosoftPublisher 2007 there is a manual duplexing wizard that is opening. This is forcing manual duplexing.
Solution
CAUSE: Duplexing is being selected in the wrong location.

SOLUTION: Select duplexing under the Properties and select Single-sided in the initial print dialog window.
Description
unavailable.
Solution

403
bizhub 500
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
404
bizhub 500

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
How to clear a 'Replace Fixing Unit' message.
Solution
To clear a 'Replace Fixing Unit' message, perform the following:
1. Enter Service Mode.
2. Select [System 1].
3. Select [Initialization].
4. Select [Counter Data].
5. Select [Fixing Counter].
6. Press the Start button.
7. Exit the Service Mode.
Notes :
a.The Fixing Counter was added in version 31 firmware.
b. The latest version firmware and system software is available via the Konica Minolta Download Selector. Access the Selector from SSD Web Support (CS
Description
C2403 (C-2403).
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
405
bizhub 500
cradle).






toner bottle.
check:

Description
Solution




406
bizhub 500
bizhub 360
DLBT0700787EN00

bizhub 420
DLBT0700784EN00

bizhub 500
DLBT0700786EN00

bizhub C450

bizhub C351

bizhub C250

bizhub C252

bizhub C352

bizhub C300
Notes :
web site at:
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:

407
bizhub 500
Windsor, CT 06095


408
bizhub 501
Description
Solution


VoIP PBX systems
* Codecs
* Fax fixed timings
* LAN Packet losses
* Bugs

From Service Mode

==> FAX Settings
==> Communication
From Service Mode

==> FAX Settings
==> Communication
From Service Mode

==> FAX Settings
==> Address "0e0012 =01111000
(Hex 78 =120 sec)
From Service Mode

==> FAX Settings
==> Address "0e0013 =01111000
(Hex 78 =120 sec).
From Service Mode

==> System 2
==> Software Switch
00100000
Notes:

Workaround :


409
bizhub 501
Description
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:




Description
FS-510, C1104(C-1104) at power up.
Solution

Description
Solution
d. Device Model - 1
e. LAN Attach - *IP
f. Port number 9100
Description
Solution

410
bizhub 501
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
Description
When duplexing from MicrosoftPublisher 2007 there is a manual duplexing wizard that is opening. This is forcing manual duplexing.
Solution
CAUSE: Duplexing is being selected in the wrong location.

SOLUTION: Select duplexing under the Properties and select Single-sided in the initial print dialog window.
Description
unavailable.
Solution

Description
When using Vendor mode, copy jobs print out but print jobs do not.
Solution
CAUSE: Incorrect setings.

SOLUTION: Afterenabling Vendor mode,set the security settings for the function of Vendor mode. To Access the settings, use the following instructions.
"Administrator Settings" => "Security Settings" => "Function Management Settings" => "Usage Settings".
The functions of Scan, Print and Fax, as well as the settings of ON, OFF and Disabledwill be presented. Set the corresponding function (fax, print) to OFF so
that Vendor mode will ignore that function. In other words, set Print to OFF so that print jobs will be output by the MFP.
411
bizhub 600
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
412
bizhub 600

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
How to update the flash firmware (ISW).
Solution
To update theMFP firmware, perform the following:
1. Download and extract the program file. The extracted files will have muliple folder levels.
2. Copy the folder [BW75_60] and its sub-directories to USB memory (commonly referred to as USB memory stick or thumb drive).
3. Enter the service mode and follow the procedure beginning on page 169 of the Field Service Manual .
Notes :
a. DO NOT change folder name.
b. To viewthe PDF, Adobe Readermust be installed. Adobe Readercan be downloaded for free from the Adobeweb site at:
3. Update firmware to "Mass production version 10.0" first. The following 4 modules are required to update.

MFP
Image
Finisher
All Printer
Note : There are 2 files for "All Printer".
55aa... is for the bizhub 750
55ba... is for the bizhub 600
4.Update firmware to "New version".
The following 2 modules are required to update.

413
bizhub 600
MFP
Image
Versions will be changed as follows:
MFP 10-00 => 11-04
Image 10-00 => 11-03
This version includes the following:

Improvement of IPP printing speed
Countermeasure for Lockup issue
Description
Solution




bizhub 360
DLBT0700787EN00

bizhub 420
DLBT0700784EN00

bizhub 500
DLBT0700786EN00

bizhub C450

bizhub C351

bizhub C250

bizhub C252

bizhub C352

bizhub C300
Notes :
414
bizhub 600
web site at:
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
How to set small size original detection to default to 8.5x11 paper.
Solution
To set small sized original detection for 8.5x11, perform the following:
1. Press Utility and then Details.
2. Press Stop, 0, 0, Stop, 0, 1.
3. Press System 1.
4. Press Original Size Detection.
5. Press Original Glass Small Size Detect.
6. Select 8.5x11 for paper size.
7. Press OK to save setting.
8. Press Exit to return to normal copy mode.
Description
C-C111 error after replacing the printer control board (PRCB).
Solution
CAUSE: The new PRCB is set for the bizhub 750.
SOLUTION: Perform the following:
1. After replacing the PRCB, go to the service mode and set soft switch 32, bit 1 to "0" (off).
2. Then re-flash the firmware on the bizhub 600.
3. After re-starting the machine, set soft switch 32, bit 1 to "1" (on).
Description
How to enable key counter or card device.
Solution
To enable an external key counter, perform the following:
1. Enter the service mode.
2. Press [STOP], [9] on the operation panel to enter the security mode.
3. On the billing setting screen press [Management Function Choice].
4. Choose [Key Counter] to enable the plug-in key counter.
5. Press [Message] and select [Type1], [Type2], or [Type3] to determine which prompt appears on the operation panel.
6. Press [END].
7. Press [Exit].
Notes:
1. There is a new adapter that allows external key counters to be connected to the new-style connector on the bizhub 750. The new key counter adapter (p/n
1206K0010) is available and can be ordered from Parts.
2. Konica Minolta is changing the key counter receptacle to the style that is presently on the bizhub 750. All applicable vendors have been notified of this
change.
Description
Solution
415
bizhub 600

8. Press Start.
Description
FK502, firmware version required for the fax kit to function.
Solution
Minimum version 15 firmware is required for the FK502.
416
bizhub 750
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
417
bizhub 750

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
How to update the flash firmware (ISW).
Solution
To update theMFP firmware, perform the following:
1. Download and extract the program file. The extracted files will have muliple folder levels.
2. Copy the folder [BW75_60] and its sub-directories to USB memory (commonly referred to as USB memory stick or thumb drive).
3. Enter the service mode and follow the procedure beginning on page 169 of the Field Service Manual .
Notes :
a. DO NOT change folder name.
b. To viewthe PDF, Adobe Readermust be installed. Adobe Readercan be downloaded for free from the Adobeweb site at:
3. Update firmware to "Mass production version 10.0" first. The following 4 modules are required to update.

MFP
Image
Finisher
All Printer
Note : There are 2 files for "All Printer".
55aa... is for the bizhub 750
55ba... is for the bizhub 600
4.Update firmware to "New version".
The following 2 modules are required to update.

418
bizhub 750
MFP
Image
Versions will be changed as follows:
MFP 10-00 => 11-04
Image 10-00 => 11-03
This version includes the following:

Improvement of IPP printing speed
Countermeasure for Lockup issue
Description
Solution




bizhub 360
DLBT0700787EN00

bizhub 420
DLBT0700784EN00

bizhub 500
DLBT0700786EN00

bizhub C450

bizhub C351

bizhub C250

bizhub C252

bizhub C352

bizhub C300
Notes :
419
bizhub 750
web site at:
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Solution

8. Press Start.
Description
How to set up MicrosoftWindows 2000/XP for SMB scanning.
Solution
At the PC :
1. Create a folder on the root drive.
2. Right click the newly created folder and select properties.
3. Ensure that the Read Only and Hidden attributes are not checked.
4. Click the Sharing Tab.
5. Click the Share this folder radio button and enter a Share name.
6. Click the Permissions tab.
7. Add the desired User or Group and assign the appropriate permissions.
Notes :
a. With MicrosoftWindows XP Home edition, the Network Setup Wizard will need to be run to enable file and print sharing. Access the Network Setup
Wizard from: Start/All Programs/Accessories/Communications/Network Set Up Wizard.
b. With MicrosoftWindows XP SP2, ensure that file and print sharing are a selected exception in the Windows Firewall settings. The Windows Firewall
applet can be accessed from: Start/Control Panel/Windows Firewall/Exceptions.
At the bizhub :
1. Connect to the bizhub using PageScope Web connection.
420
bizhub 750
2. Enter the Admin mode.
3. Select the Network Tab.
4. Ensure that TCP/IP is enabled.
5. Select and enable SMB.
6. Log out of the Admin mode.
7. Select Scan.
8. Select New Registration.
9. Select SMB and click next.
10. Enter the name of the SMB registration being created, and select a reference in the index.
11. Enter the PC NetBIOS name (uppercase) or TCP/IP address in the Host Address field.
12. Enter the folder name in the File Path field. If the folder is located on the root drive, enter only the folder name. If the folder is not located on the root drive,
enter the path to the folder.
13. Enter the User ID and Password in their respective fields. If the PC is a member of a domain, enter the User name and Password of a valid domain user
account. If the PC is in a workgroup, enter the User name and Password of the local user account. The User ID and password are case-sensitive.
Note : The SMB protocol uses TCP/IP, NetBIOS and ARP broadcasts to communicate with the host PC.
Description
Solution


VoIP PBX systems
* Codecs
* Fax fixed timings
* LAN Packet losses
* Bugs

From Service Mode

==> FAX Settings
==> Communication
From Service Mode

==> FAX Settings
==> Communication
From Service Mode

==> FAX Settings
==> Address "0e0012 =01111000
(Hex 78 =120 sec)
From Service Mode

==> FAX Settings
==> Address "0e0013 =01111000
(Hex 78 =120 sec).
From Service Mode

==> System 2
==> Software Switch
00100000
421
bizhub 750
Notes:

Workaround :


Description
C-2203 during the copy or printing process. May be intermittent.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1.Failed Printer Driver Board (PRCB).
Replace the Printer Driver Board (p/n 57AA-9020).

2.The developing unit is binding or the attached mylar on the developing unit cover has become dislodged.
Inspect the developing unit for binding or dislodged mylar on the developing unit cover and repair as needed.

3. The drum drive motor M2 is failing.
Replace the drum drive motor M2 (p/n 57AA80080).

4. Cleaning blade has "flipped".
Replace the Cleaning blade (p/n 57AA20080). Please note that:
a. If there is a deformation in the supporting section of the Blade Support Plate Caulking, replace both the Blade Support Plate Caulking and the Hinge (p/n
56AA21160) at the same time. Please refer to the attached file for the confirmation method.
b. If the interference between the Blade Support Plate Caulking and the Toner Scattering Prevention Molt plane of Toner Guide Roller is excessive, replace
the Toner Guide Roller (p/n 57AAR71100). Please refer to the attached file for the confirmation method.
c.Once blade flipping occurs, the possibility of reoccurrence will rise because ofDrum surface damage. Replacethe Drum.
d.If a user isfrequently continuousprinting, set the DIPSW as follows.
-DIPSW 7-0 =0, 7-1 =1 (Toner Guide Roller current value correction)
-DIPSW 12-0 =1 (Interval for printing black band patterns; every 6 prints)
Note : Only as a guideline, the users withnumerous continuous prints means, as an average,one print job is more than 500 pages or more than the half of
the past 100 jobs combined.
Foruserswhointermittently print, theaforementioned actions cannot be recommended because there would be insufficient cleaning by the blade.
SPECIAL NOTE : Solution contribution by Craig Blyther, ESS/SSD and KMBT (J apan).
Description
C-0201, C-0203, C-0206 and C-0207 only when there is less than 300 sheets in the tray.
Solution
CAUSE: The Paper Feed Rocking Plate that holds the feed tires is bent upwards in the center of the plate.

SOLUTION: Replace the Paper Feed Rocking Plate (p/n 56AA 4007 0).
422
bizhub C10
Description
How to contact support for magicolor or PagePro printers.
Solution
To contact support for magicolor or PagePro printers,refer tothe following:
Before Requesting Support
Before E-mailing or calling a Support Engineer, gather the following information:
The printer model and serial number
Location phone and fax numbers, E-mail address, and shipping address
A description of the problem
The type of computer being used
The type and version of operating system being used (ex: MicrosoftWindowsXP)
The interface and protocol being used (ex: TCP/IP for network)
The software application and version being used
The emulation (ex: PostScript, PCL, or GDI) of the file being printed
Configuration, startup, or status page (depending on the type of printer)

Answer Base
http://www.qms.com/support/casebase/index.html

United States and Canada
7:00 am - 7:00 pm Central Time, Mon - Fri
Phone: 1 877-778-2687
E-mail: http://www.qms.com/support/supportmail/index.html
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
Description
Fuse/ICP list.
Solution
The attached documentation has the Fuse/ICP list for bizhub C10X/magicolor 25xxXX models.
Note : To view the attached document, MicrosoftExcelor ExcelViewer must be installed. ExcelViewer 2003 (9.9MB) can be obtained free from
SPECIAL NOTE : Solution contribution by Craig Blyther, ESS/SSD
Description

Solution
See attacheddocumentation for information.
423
bizhub C10
Description
Solution
Note : To viewthe PDF, Adobe Reader must be installed. Adobe Reader can be downloaded for free from the Adobe web site at:
Description
MSDS information.

Solution
See attachmentfor MSDS information.
Note : To open the file(s) using WinZip, WinZipmust be installed. WinZipcan be downloaded from the WinZipwebsite:
http://www.winzip.com/ddchomea.htm . The file can either be saved to disk or opened. It is recommended to download the ZIP and open from the local
computer to view.
424
bizhub C10X
Description
Solution

Answer Base

Phone: 1 877-778-2687
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
Description
Fuse/ICP list.
Solution
Description

Solution
425
bizhub C10X
Description
Solution
Description
MSDS information.

Solution
computer to view.
426
bizhub C200
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Gray box prints after installation.
Solution
CAUSE: Installation procedures were not completed properly.

SOLUTION: Complete the installation procedures thoroughly in the following order:
1. Adjusting Touch Panel - Press the Accessibility key, Touch Panel Adj.
2. Setting Gradation Adjustment - Go into Service Mode, Image Processing Adjustment, Gradation Adjustment.
3. Touch High Compression Mode and press Start [perform 3 times].
4. Touch Gradation Mode and press Start [perform 3 times].
5. Touch Resolution Mode and press Start [perform 3 times].
6. Date/Time Setting - go into Service Mode, Press Stop, 1, 1, 4, 4, Clear.
7. Go into Utility/Counter, Administrator Setting, System Setting, Date/ Time Setting.
8. Install Date - go into Service Mode, System 1, Install Date.
9. Serial Number Input - go into Service Mode, System 1, Serial Number [If Serial Number is already there, Clear and re-enter it].
10. Unit Change - go into Service Mode, System 2, Unit Change.
11. List Output - Please Load 8.5x11 Landscape paper on Tray 1, go into Service Mode, List Output, and Touch Machine Management List and press Start.
12. Press Adjustments List and press Start.
13. Press Service Parameter List and press Start.
14. Press Fax Setting List and press Start.
SPECIAL NOTE : Solution contribution by Cesar J imenez, Production Print/SSD
Description
FK-502, unable to transmit faxes.
Solution
CAUSE: The Fax is set for Pulse dialing.
SOLUTION: Change the Pulse dialing to PB dialing. To change the setting perform the following;
1. Access the Administrator mode.
2. Select [8. Fax Setting].
3. Select [Telephone Line Settings].
4. Select [PB].
5. Power the copier OFF/ON.
Description
Instead of 128MB CF cards to update thefirmware, can1GB or 512MB CF cards be used to program the MFP?
Solution
Only the 128MB CF card (p/n 7660-4036-01) is compatible.
427
bizhub C200
Description
Solution
Description
Printing from MicrosoftWord, when attempting to print a 5.5x8.5 booklet (onto 8.5x11R paper) the output is always on 11x17.
Solution
CAUSE: Scale to Paper Size is not set properly in MicrosoftWord.
SOLUTION: From the MicrosoftWord print dialog box, set Scale to Paper Size to 5.5x8.5.
Description
Solution
Description
How to capture a file on the color MFPs when printing using the Emperon controller.
Solution
The following must be set up in order to capture the files:
1. Press the utility button and select Administrator Settings.
2. Select Security setting => Security Detail => Print Data Capture must be set to Allow =>
Administrator Settings => Network Setting => FTP setting, FTP Server must be set to ON.
3. In Tech Rep Mode, select System2 and select Data Capture. Select ON.
4. Send print jobs. When finished, enter Command prompt and run FTP client.
5. Issue OPEN ipaddress command and login as the following user
capture
sysadm
6. Type lcd \ command to set the local directory to root of C drive.
7. Use the ls command to list the files.
8. Type binary to change the transfer mode to binary.The response should be 200 .
9. Type set to I .
10. Use the get command to retrieve the files (i.e., get c741n.cpt). This will transfer the file tolocal c drive.
11. After complete enter the bye command.
12. Type exit to quit the command prompt.
To delete the jobs on the HDD,select administrator settings => Security Detail => Restrict.
The function will remove the files from the printer.
Description
FK-502, how to adjust the cable EQL for TX and RX.
428
bizhub C203
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
DF-611, intermittent jamming with code J -6602 or possibly codeJ -6603.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Worn or damaged beveled gear with cam that lifts the paper tray.
Replace the beveled gear with cam (p/n 4641 3417 02).

2. The spring pressure for the separation roller is to weak.
Increase the spring pressure for the DF-611 separation roller.

3. The DF lift plate lowers in the middle of a job due to a failed DF control board.
Replace the DF control board (p/n A01H RA01 02).

4. Fluctuations of sensor read signal.
Slightly raise the lift plate. For more details see the attached file. To viewthe PDF, Adobe Readermust be installed. Adobe Readercan be downloaded for
free from the Adobeweb site at: http://www.adobe.com/products/acrobat/readstep2.html .
SPECIAL NOTE : Solution contribution by Bill Hall and David Silverstein, Workgroup/SSD, Mahen Shukla, ESS/SSD, andMark D'Attilio, Production
Print/SSD
Description
C2152 (C-2152) at power up.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1.Detecting Plate not positioned properly.
Shape of the detecting plate has been modified. Install the modified Detecting Plate (p/n A02E503301-FOC). Please refer to the attached procedure for
instructions on how to install the modified bracket. To viewthe PDF, Adobe Readermust be installed. Adobe Readercan be downloaded for free from the
Notes :
a. The following are the serial number cut-ins which have the the modified Detecting Plate:
bizhub C353 - A02E010005899 and onward
bizhub C353P - A02E013000060 and onward
b. To obtain a free-of-charge Detecting Plate (p/n A02E503301-FOC), please follow this procedure:
FOC PART(S) ORDERING PROCEDURE (U.S. market only) :
Free-of-Charge (FOC) part(s) can be ordered via the online KMBS Technical (FOC) & Special Programs order form which is accessible in
MyKonicaMinolta.com => Service => Warranty Application => General Warranty Claims => KMBS Technical (FOC) & Special Programs.
IMPORTANT : Upon receipt and verification of the online claim information, KMBS Logistics Operations will process a Free-of-Charge parts order. All parts
will be shipped via UPS Ground Service, and an automated E-mail will be sent to the requesting KMBS customer confirming the shipment, KMBS claim
number, parts order status. The FOC program will end either in 6 months or when the FOC lower covers are depleted, as mentioned above, KMBS will ship all
parts at no-charge; no invoice will be generated. Questions related to an FOC parts claims may be directed to KMBS Logistics Operations by calling
201-934-5339.

2.Somepacking material was not removed froma new Transfer belt before installation.
Ensure that allpacking material has been removed before the Transfer belt is installed.
SPECIAL NOTE :Solution contribution by Rich Raynor, ESS/SSD
429
bizhub C203
Description
How to use the Fax Forward TX setting.
Solution
To use the Fax Forward TX setting, perform the following:
1. Press the UTILITY button.
2. Select the ADMINISTRATOR button and enter the password (12345678).
3. Select #8 Fax Setting.
4. Select #5 Function Setting.
5. Select #5 Forward TX Setting.
6. Select Forward & Print (prints out a copy), Forward & Print if TX fails (forwards to E-mail and prints if the transmission to E-mail fails).
7. Select the one of the following, EMAIL, FTP, SMB, and GROUP, followed by selecting it from the Address Book. Select OK and then close all the way out
until back to the basic screen on the operation panel.
Description
How to change the Administrator password?
Solution
To change the Administrator password, perform the following:
1. Enter the Service mode.
2. Press STOP-0-CLEAR to enter the Enhanced security mode.
3. Select Administrator Password.
4. Enter NEW Administrator password.
5. Click on END.
Description
How to set up MicrosoftWindows2003 Server for Scan to SMB.
Solution
How to set up MicrosoftWindows2003 Server for Scan to SMB .
Note : To view the document(s), MicrosoftWordor WordViewer must be installed. WordViewer 2003 (11.7MB) can be obtained free from Microsoft
at the following URL; http://www.microsoft.com/downloads/details.aspx?DisplayLang=en&FamilyID=95e24c87-8732-48d5-8689-ab826e7b8fdf .
Description
The Start button is amber when attempting to scan to E-mail. When a sheet is placed in the document feeder it will not feed; will not allow scanning.
Solution
CAUSE: The Administrator E-mail Address field has not been filled out.

SOLUTION: From the control Panel of the machine follow the procedure below:
1. Press utility.
2. Press administrator and enter password.
3. Select administrator machine setting.
4. Administrator Registration.
5. Enter administrative name and E-mail address.
6. Input Machine address.
7. Device Name and E-mail address
8. Select OK andPower the machine OFF/ON.
Description
Network menu button is missing from Admin Mode.
Solution
CAUSE: Corrupt NVRAM.

SOLUTION: To receive a replacement NVRAM, pleaseutilize the online ordering form.
Note : IMPORTANT: All requests for NVRAMs must be approved by the SSD Hotline and a problem ticket generated. If a request is received without
an established problem ticket number the request will be denied.
The NVRAM can be ordered via the Online Technical & Special Program order form located within MyKonicaMinolta.com:
1. Login to MKM.com.
2. Select the Service tab.
430
bizhub C203
3. Select Warranty, Repair, & Special Programs (menu at left side of screen).
4. Click on Warranty Services & Technical/FOC Programs (in center of screen).
5. Select NVRAM/BRU Replacement Program.
Description
C-4551 (C4551), C-4552 (C4552), C-4553 (C4553)or C-4554 (C4554) error codes during setup.
Solution

SOLUTION: Replace the write unit (p/n A02ER70200 for the bizhub C203/C253 and p/n A02ER70100 for the bizhub C353).
IMPORTANT : All 4 write units must be replaced as a set. The following serial number cut-ins have the modified write units installed.
Machine Serial Number
bizhub C353 A02E010001515 and onward
bizhub C353P A02E013000006 and onward
SPECIAL NOTE : Solution contribution by Rich Raynor, ESS/SSD
Description
Solution
At the PC :
Notes :
At the bizhub :
7. Select Scan.
431
bizhub C20P
Description
Solution

Answer Base

Phone: 1 877-778-2687
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
Description
IsMagneCotepaper or magnetic backed paper supported?

Solution
MagneCotepaperor magnetic backed paper is not supported.
SPECIAL NOTE : Solution contribution by Marge McLea, ProductionCustomer Support/SSD
Description
When using the PostScript printer driver to print any image file from MicrosoftWindows Photo Gallery on MicrosoftWindows Vista,colors are inverted.
Solution
CAUSE: MicrosoftWindows Photo Gallery anomaly when using the PostScript driverwith MicrosoftWindows Vista.
Note : This symptom does not occur when using the PCL driver or XPS driver.Please refer to the attached sampleshowing inverted colors. To viewthe PDF,

SOLUTION: As a workaround, please change the driver setting of PostScript Passthrough from Enable to Disable (Printer Properties => Advanced Tab
432
bizhub C20P
=> PostScript Pass through => "Disable").
Description
Specification and Installation Guide.
Solution
Please refer to theattached documentation for system specification and installation. To viewthe PDF, Adobe Readermust be installed. Adobe Readercan
be downloaded for free from the Adobeweb site at: http://www.adobe.com/products/acrobat/readstep2.html .
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
Description
Specification and Installation Guide.
Solution
Please refer to theattached documentation for system specification and installation. To viewthe PDF, Adobe Readermust be installed. Adobe Readercan
be downloaded for free from the Adobeweb site at: http://www.adobe.com/products/acrobat/readstep2.html .
Description
Configuration sheet.
Solution
Please refer to theattached documentation for system configuration. To viewthe PDF, Adobe Readermust be installed. Adobe Readercan be downloaded
for free from the Adobeweb site at: http://www.adobe.com/products/acrobat/readstep2.html .
433
bizhub C250
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
434
bizhub C250

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
White void, uneven image or toner leakage at the front of the machine.
Solution
CAUSE: There is agap between the shutter of the toner hopper and the Image Unit. If thisis the case,toner iscarried back to the rear of the machine by the
toner suction motor and contaminates the grid meshcausing the drum to be charged abnormally.

SOLUTION:The following parts are modified andavailable free of charge (FOC)for all lotnumbersbelow 3M60170410A. The modification is already
implemented on lot numbers xxxxx70319 and above. The'lot number'isidentifiedby the last 5 numerals within thecomplete number. For example, 3M601
70410 A is lot number '70410'.
Part NumberPart Name
4036534702-FOC Shutter
4036534903-FOC Seal

Free-of-Charge (FOC) part(s) can be ordered via the online KMBS Technical (FOC) & Special Programs order form which is accessible
inMyKonicaMinolta.com=> Service => Warranty Application => General Warranty Claims => KMBS Technical (FOC) & Special Programs.
Due to the manufacturing changes to the Image Units, the field shouldexperience onlya small percentage of units that are affected by this issue.
IMPORTANT : Pleaseorder theseparts only when experiencing the issue and the lot number is below xxxxx70319.
Uponreceipt and verification ofthe online claim information, KMBS Logistics Operations will process a Free-of-Charge parts order. All parts will be shipped via
UPS Ground Service, and an automated E-mail will be sent to the requesting KMBS customer confirming the shipment, KMBS claim number, parts order
status and the UPS Tracking Number for the delivery.
The FOC program will end on 10/31/07 and,as mentioned above, KMBS will ship all parts at no-charge; no invoice will be generated.
435
bizhub C250
Questions related toan FOC parts claims may be directed to KMBS Logistics Operationsby calling201-934-5339.
Note : Please reference attached Bulletin Number 5934.To viewthe PDF, Adobe Readermust be installed. Adobe Readercan be downloaded for free
from the Adobeweb site at:
Description
CE002 at power up.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The hard drive is not selected as Installed.
To select the hard drive, enter the Tech. Mode. and do the following:
a. Select [System 2].
b. Select [HDD].
c. Select [Installed].
2. The HDD Version Up procedure has not been completed. Phase 2 firmware was just installed.
To perform the HDD Version Up procedure, perform the following:
a. Enter the Tech. Mode.
b. Touch [State Confirmation] on the touchscreen.
c. Touch [Memory HDD Adj.] on the touchscreen.
d. Touch [HDD Version Up] on the touchscreen.
e. Press the START key. The HDD Version Up result will be displayed on the right side of the touchscreen.
f. Power the copier OFF using the main switch after the result is displayed on the touchscreen as OK. After, leaving the machine powered OFF for 30
seconds the machine can be powered ON and the failure code should be cleared.
3. Unspecified data or parameter is detected.
To resolve, perform the following:
a. Perform the step-by-step procedures mentioned in the Technical Information document.
b. Make sure the Hard Disk Drive is installed under System 2.
c. Go to Service Mode, System 1, Initialization, Data Clear.
d. Re-flash copier with Phase 2.01 firmware, making sure that the firmware is installed.
e. Replace PWB-MFP (p/n 4038 0121 06 for the bizhub C250/C252 and p/n 4037 0131 04 for the bizhub C351/C450).
Description
How to troubleshoot C-D370 (CD370).
Solution
To troubleshoot:
1.Reset the code by pressing stop-0-7-1-3-9. This will display a "*" on the LCD. Press this button.
2.Perform a Data Clear and then perform the Setup Procedures from the beginning.
3.Replace the NVRAM. Please call the SSD Hotline for NVRAM replacement.
Description
C3851 or C3852.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Improper softswitch setting.
On phase 2.0 or higher firmware, change the following softswitch setting: Service Mode => System2 => Software Switch Setting Switch No.: 50, Bit
Assignment: 00000001 Hex Assignment: 01
Note : The hex value will be changed automatically when the bit assignment is changed.

2. Poor Fusing Unit connection.
Check the Fusing Unit connection(s).

3. Failed components.
a. Replace Fusing Unit (p/n 4038-0754-00)
b. Replace Mechanical Control Board PWB-M (p/n 4038-0101-05)
c. Replace DC Power Supply PU1 (p/n 4038-6201-02)
Description
436
bizhub C250
Solution




bizhub 360
DLBT0700787EN00

bizhub 420
DLBT0700784EN00

bizhub 500
DLBT0700786EN00

bizhub C450

bizhub C351

bizhub C250

bizhub C252

bizhub C352

bizhub C300
Notes :
web site at:
Description
PLEASE WAIT message on the display.
Solution
CAUSE: A possible failed or corrupt NVRAM.
SOLUTION: Verify the NVRAMby swapping it to a known good PWB-MFP. If the results are the same please fill out the online NVRAM/BRU ordering form to
obtain a new NVRAM.
IMPORTANT: All requests for NVRAMs must be approved by the SSD Hotline and a problem ticket generated. If a request is received without an
437
bizhub C250
Notes:
1. Refer to the attached Bulletin Number 5783 for more detail and the BRU form.
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Solution
5. Click on END.
438
bizhub C250P
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
439
bizhub C250P

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution

4036534903-FOC Seal

440
bizhub C250P
Description
Solution




bizhub 360
DLBT0700787EN00

bizhub 420
DLBT0700784EN00

bizhub 500
DLBT0700786EN00

bizhub C450

bizhub C351

bizhub C250

bizhub C252

bizhub C352

bizhub C300
Notes :
web site at:
441
bizhub C250P
Description
Solution
obtain a new NVRAM.
Notes:
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
C255x. Code can be cleared butreoccurs.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. (bizhub C250/C250P/C300/C352/C352P) - Toner is not replenished properly from the Toner Cartridge to the Imaging Unit. TCR sensor detected abnormal
low toner density (C2551 - Cyan, C2553 - Magenta, C2555 - Yellow, C2557 - Black).
Part of the mylar film from the toner bottle blocks the toner replenishment entrance or Toner Cartridge is not set properly.
Remove any obstruction; reseat toner cartridge.
Note :See attached TNI (Technical Notice & Information)for additional information.
To view the document, MicrosoftWordor WordViewer must be installed. WordViewer 2003 (11.7MB) can be obtained free from Microsoftat the
following URL; http://www.microsoft.com/downloads/details.aspx?DisplayLang=en&FamilyID=95e24c87-8732-48d5-8689-ab826e7b8fdf .

2. (bizhub C351/C450) - The image unitsrequire modification.
Please perform the procedure outlined in attached Bulletin Number 5934 which addresses a modification to the image units.

3. bizhub C250/C250P/C252/C252P/C300/C350 - Please refer to the attached documentation addressing the C255x codes.
Description
Solution

442
bizhub C250P
Description
'Warming Up' message remains on the control panel or C-DC00 at power up.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1.Poor connection or there are bent pins on the copier-to-scanner interface cable.
Inpect the cable and straighten the pins on the male side and then check that the female connector holes are round inshape and not oval. If the holes are
oval-shaped, insert a small pin to reform the hole tomostly round. Reseat the scanner cable connectionto mainbody.

2.After replacing the PWB-M (FPB), the Parameter chip, an8-pin removable chip on PWB-M, was not removed from the old board and installed on the new
board.
Carefully remove the IC chip from the original board and install it on the new board.

3.The MFPB has failed (bizhub C300 and bizhub C352/C352P).
Replace the failed MFPB (p/n 9J 06H003 01 - bizhub C300 and p/n 9J 06 0101 02 - bizhub C352/C352P).

4. ThePWB-Mboardhas failed (bizhub C252/C252P).
Replace the failed PWB-Mboard (p/n 4038 H001 01).

5. Possiblefailed or missing Parameter chip (IC40).
The Service Manual states, on page 67, to relocate IC40 Parameter chip (8-pin chip) when replacing the PWB-MC board.
Please order a Parameter chip by:

calling the Hotline at 800-825-5664, to open a Ticket Number
going to www.mykonicaminolta.com ;select Service tab=> Warranty, Repair & Special Programs => RA Form. Fill outthe RA Form.
Description
Deleted Due To Error, No Account Set For Group Auth message when printing with Account Track and the MacintoshIntel10.4 latest version driver on a
Macintosh10.5 'Leopard'.
Solution
CAUSE: Driver incompatibility.

SOLUTION: Tentative releaseof MacintoshOS 10.5 'Leopard' drivers is 4/2008.
SPECIAL NOTE : Solution contribution by Freddie Burnham, Production Print/SSD
443
bizhub C252
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
444
bizhub C252

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
FS-514, codes C7503 (C-7503), J 7502 (J -7502), J 7503 (J -7503) intermittently and all of the pages from one set do not exit with that set,but are then included
with the next set.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. One-way gear on the shaft with the FN6 knob.
Clean or replace the one way gear(s) (p/n 4349 1611 01 - 19T, small and inside) and (p/n 4349 1633 01 - 32T, large and outside).

2. Shear pin on the shaft holder is broken stopping the exit paddle roller from turning. Replace the shaft holder (p/n 9J 08160201) if holder is cracked or
paddle is worn.
Note : Please see attached pages from Parts Manual for location of the shaft holder.

3. The FS-514 is not properly supported by the castors causing misalignment.
Ensure that the castors and adjusting plates are set so that they touch the floor as illustrated in the installation instructions.

4. Modification to lower exit rollers is necessary.
Wrap electrical tape around the lower exit rollers to improve the diameter as described in the MicrosoftWindows Media video attachment.

5. Insufficient roller pressure.
Replace the 4 pressure springs that push down the exit rollers with a set from the FN-117. The FN-117 springs have less force. Springs are on page 4 of the
FN-117 Parts Manual (p/n 4349173202). Please refer to the Parts Manual for component identification and the attached Parts Modification Notice for
additional detail. To view the PDF, Adobe Readermust be installed. Adobe Readercan be downloaded for free from the Adobeweb site at:

6. Exit roller timing.
Install the attached firmware which will improve the timing of the exit rollers. This firmware is alsoposted onthe Download Selector. Access the Selector from
SSD Web Support (CS Expert Support) by clicking on 'Download MSDS, Drivers, Firmware and more'.
Notes :
a.Useeither the Firmware Imaging Tool or Cygwin utility. FS-514 firmware files are:

bizhub C352/C300- 9J 06-F050-G01-07-000(00).EXE

bizhub C252- 4038-F050-G01-07-000(00).EXE
Checksum for the bizhub C352/C300 and the C252 is F989 .
b. To open the attached ZIP files, WinZipmay need to be installed. WinZipcan be downloaded from the WinZipwebsite:
computer to view or run.
SPECIAL NOTE : Solution contribution by Craig Blyther, ESS/SSD, Cesar J imenez and Ian Lynch, Production Print/SSD
Description
445
bizhub C252
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution

4036534903-FOC Seal

Description
CE002 at power up.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
b. Select [HDD].
446
bizhub C252
Description
Solution
To troubleshoot:
Description
C3851 or C3852.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:


Description
Solution




bizhub 360
DLBT0700787EN00

bizhub 420
DLBT0700784EN00

bizhub 500
DLBT0700786EN00

bizhub C450

bizhub C351

447
bizhub C252
bizhub C250

bizhub C252

bizhub C352

bizhub C300
Notes :
web site at:
Description
Solution
obtain a new NVRAM.
Notes:
Description
Solution
Notes :
448
bizhub C252P
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
449
bizhub C252P

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution

4036534903-FOC Seal

450
bizhub C252P
Description
C3851 or C3852.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:


Description
Solution




bizhub 360
DLBT0700787EN00

bizhub 420
DLBT0700784EN00

bizhub 500
DLBT0700786EN00

bizhub C450

bizhub C351

bizhub C250

bizhub C252

bizhub C352

bizhub C300
Notes :
451
bizhub C252P
web site at:
Description
Solution
obtain a new NVRAM.
Notes:
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:


452
bizhub C252P
Description
Solution

Description
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:

board.




453
bizhub C253
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:



Print/SSD
Description
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
Notes :
201-934-5339.

454
bizhub C253
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
5. Click on END.
Description
Solution
Description
With IC-409 version 1.01 system code, theMFP will not come out of Power Save Mode when a print job is sent to the IC-409.This occurs mainly in the
morning when the machine stays in Power Save Mode overnight. Main body and controller may need to be power-cycled in order for printing to take place.
Solution
This issue has been escalated to Konica Minolta Business Technologies in J apan:

KMBS/SSD is working withpartners in support and R&D in J apan to obtain a resolution for this issue as quickly as possible.
CAUSE: Firmware bugwith the IC-409 version 1.01 in which itlooses communication with the main body when theMFP goes into Power Save Mode.

SOLUTION:There is no permanent solution available at this time.Power-cycle the main body and controller to allow printing if theMFP has gone into Power
Save Mode.
As an interim solution for the bizhub C650/C550/C451 only, back down the IC-409 systemsoftware to version 1.0 and apply allavailable patches.
Notes :
1.Please ensure that patch 1-U52ZX and 1-UF108 are installed as this patches address thisspecific issue with the IC-409 v1.0 systemcode.
2. These patches do not apply to the IC-409 with version 1.01 code and should not be installed.
3. Unfortunately, this interim solution is not available with the bizhub C253/C353 and these models do not support the IC-409 with 1.0 system code.
4.If viewing this solution via the web, please establish a ticket via either the web or by callingthe contact center at 1-800-825-5664. Once a ticket has been
established an E-mail will be sent when this solution is updated.
For phone advisors, please attach to this solution for an automatic E-mail that will be sent to the technician when this solution is updated. End the call with
call code "Escalated to J apan".
SPECIAL NOTE : Solution contribution byTony Pizzoferrato, ESS/SSD
Description
Solution
455
bizhub C253

1. Press utility.
Description
Solution

Description
Solution

456
bizhub C300
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
457
bizhub C300

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
with the next set.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:

paddle is worn.




Notes :

bizhub C352/C300- 9J 06-F050-G01-07-000(00).EXE

bizhub C252- 4038-F050-G01-07-000(00).EXE
Description
458
bizhub C300
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution

4036534903-FOC Seal

Description
Solution
To troubleshoot:
Description
Solution


459
bizhub C300


bizhub 360
DLBT0700787EN00

bizhub 420
DLBT0700784EN00

bizhub 500
DLBT0700786EN00

bizhub C450

bizhub C351

bizhub C250

bizhub C252

bizhub C352

bizhub C300
Notes :
web site at:
Description
Solution
obtain a new NVRAM.
Notes:
Description
460
bizhub C300
Solution
Notes :
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
5. Click on END.
461
bizhub C30P
Description
Solution




bizhub 360
DLBT0700787EN00

bizhub 420
DLBT0700784EN00

bizhub 500
DLBT0700786EN00

bizhub C450

bizhub C351

bizhub C250

bizhub C252

bizhub C352

bizhub C300
Notes :
web site at:
Description
Solution
462
bizhub C30P

Answer Base

Phone: 1 877-778-2687
Description
Changes made for Low Power or Sleep modes are not being applied.
Solution
CAUSE: The copier power was not cycled OFF/ON after making changes to theLow Power or Sleep mode settings.

SOLUTION: Cycle the copier power OFF/ON.
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Description
How to setup duplexed images to be centered on each other.
Solution
This is not an available option on this model. This option (Side 2drum clock adjust) is available on Production Print models such as the 8050/bizhub PRO
C500.
Description
MicrosoftWindows Vista driver-sharing.
Solution
Attached is is a workaround for the current MicrosoftWindows Vista driver-sharing issue.This may change as Vista evolves and Service Packs are
463
bizhub C30P
released.
The process is as follows:
Upload the "in-box" Konica Minolta Vista PostScript Driver from a Vista client PC to a MicrosoftWindows 2003 Server. Once the file is uploaded to the
Server, users can find the driver on the Share and install it by the normal method. Device configurations from the Server share are preserved on the client.

Description
Solution
464
bizhub C350
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
465
bizhub C350

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
C3E02 at power up.
Solution
CAUSE: A failed or damagedNVRAM(IC418 on the PWB-MFP).
Note : IMPORTANT: All requests for NVRAMs must be approved by the SSD Hotline and a problem ticket generated. If a request is received without an
Description
Copy is overlaid with a dark gray patch.
Solution
CAUSE: Incorrect setup procedure or firmware upgrade to version 28. DO NOT USE THE SET UP INSTRUCTIONS THAT COME WITH THE MACHINE!
The instructions packed with the machine are incorrect. Follow the new set up instructions in the link below. The instructions packed with the machine
INCORRECTLY instruct to power the machine OFF/ON after the serial number input. DO NOT turn the machine OFF until the last step, List Output, is
complete and the Image Processing data has been printed. The date and time must be entered in both the Admin. and Factory Set modes.
SOLUTION: From FW ver. 28 implemented in production since mid J une 2004, new condition is required at the new installation of the machine in order to
strengthen the security level of the machine, to secure product quality and to keep the service level. If the installation is not correctly done, the output of copy
is overlaid with a dark gray patch to protect from using the machine with improper condition. It is necessary to follow exactly the procedures as mentioned in
Installation guide and keep each step listed below in the right order so as to make the machine run normally and to cancel the protection. All steps are
important for product quality and later support and none of them should be missed. DO NOT power the machine OFF/ON until all of the adjustments are
complete.
Notes:
1. See the C350 Installation Instructions for more details.
2. This is concerned only when the machine is newly installed, or the updating of FW and/or replacing PWB.
3. If the machine is turned OFF during the installation before completing all steps, it is required to start the procedure from the beginning.
4. If any steps are skipped, it is necessary to return the step skipped then to carry out all the following steps correctly.
5. The Serial number cut-in of the applicable machines are as follows:
Legacy Minolta - 31102601
Legacy Konica - 65J E02601
466
bizhub C350
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Controller is not being recognized by the engine.
Solution
CAUSE: The Controller type is not set properly.
SOLUTION: In the TECH REP mode, select System Input, and then Peripheral setting. For an external Fiery* IC401 controller Set the Controller number to 2,
Mode 1. For the STANDARD built in controller the Peripheral setting would be Controller 3.
Controller Type. Machine Peripheral Setting.
External Fiery controller IC401 Controller 2, Mode 1
C350 PCL Internal Controller Controller 3
CAUSE: The incorrect memory is installed.
SOLUTION: Verify that the 128MB memory upgrade is order number 7640000190.
Description
Multiple E-mails are being sent when scanning a multiple page document. SCAN settings under the Administration mode (Page Scope Web Connections) are
configured with scanned file separation set to No, binary division set to No and maximum E-mail size set to no limitation. Tried sending with PDF and TIFF.
Solution
CAUSE: The hard drive option HD501 is not installed.
SOLUTION: The hard drive option HD501 must be installed. This information is covered on page 8-43 of the C350 Controller User Guide.
Description
How to upgrade the firmware.
Solution
To upgrade the firmware, see pages 2-32 to 2-36 in the bizhub C350 Service Manual .
Notes :
1. The Cygwin utility is availablevia the Konica Minolta Download Selector. Access the Selector from SSD Web Support (CS Expert Support) by clicking on
'Download MSDS, Drivers, Firmware and more'.
467
bizhub C350
Description
C3C00 after replacing the PWB-MC.
Solution
CAUSE: The new PWB-MC does not have an EEPROM in IC45 when shipped.
SOLUTION: Remove the EEPROM from IC45 from the old board and install it into the new PWB-MC.
Description
Solution
The Key Counter Kit (4179x002) must be installed. The C350 does not support key counters without this kit.
Note: Refer to the service manual for installation instructions.
Description
Missing images or data on copies and prints. Intermittent missing colors.
Solution
CAUSE: Improper ground.

SOLUTION: Follow the PWB-LED harness to PJ -02 on PWB-MFP and verifythe copper sheath in the harness is grounded to theMFP frame. Also check other
contact points that may require better grounding.
Please refer to the attached documentaion for additional detail. To viewa PDF, Adobe Readermust be installed. Adobe Readercan be downloaded for
SPECIAL NOTE : Solution contribution by Gary Scimeca, Production Print/SSD and Rich Tovsen, DSM - Western Region
468
bizhub C351
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
469
bizhub C351

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution

4036534903-FOC Seal

470
bizhub C351
Description
CE002 at power up.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
b. Select [HDD].
Description
Solution
To troubleshoot:
Description
Solution




bizhub 360
DLBT0700787EN00

bizhub 420
DLBT0700784EN00
471
bizhub C351

bizhub 500
DLBT0700786EN00

bizhub C450

bizhub C351

bizhub C250

bizhub C252

bizhub C352

bizhub C300
Notes :
web site at:
Description
Solution
obtain a new NVRAM.
Notes:
Description
Solution
Notes :
472
bizhub C351
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
5. Click on END.
473
bizhub C352
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
474
bizhub C352

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
with the next set.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:

paddle is worn.




Notes :

bizhub C352/C300- 9J 06-F050-G01-07-000(00).EXE

bizhub C252- 4038-F050-G01-07-000(00).EXE
Description
475
bizhub C352
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution

4036534903-FOC Seal

Description
Solution
To troubleshoot:
Description
C3851 or C3852.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:

476
bizhub C352

Description
Solution




bizhub 360
DLBT0700787EN00

bizhub 420
DLBT0700784EN00

bizhub 500
DLBT0700786EN00

bizhub C450

bizhub C351

bizhub C250

bizhub C252

bizhub C352

bizhub C300
Notes :
web site at:
477
bizhub C352
Description
Solution
obtain a new NVRAM.
Notes:
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Solution
478
bizhub C352P
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
479
bizhub C352P

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution

4036534903-FOC Seal

480
bizhub C352P
Description
C3851 or C3852.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:


Description
Solution




bizhub 360
DLBT0700787EN00

bizhub 420
DLBT0700784EN00

bizhub 500
DLBT0700786EN00

bizhub C450

bizhub C351

bizhub C250

bizhub C252

bizhub C352

bizhub C300
Notes :
481
bizhub C352P
web site at:
Description
Solution
obtain a new NVRAM.
Notes:
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:


482
bizhub C352P
Description
Solution

Description
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:

board.




483
bizhub C353
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:



Print/SSD
Description
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
Notes :
201-934-5339.

484
bizhub C353
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
5. Click on END.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution


Save Mode.
Notes :
Description
Solution
485
bizhub C353

1. Press utility.
Description
Solution

Description
Solution

486
bizhub C353P
Description
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
Notes :
201-934-5339.

Description
Solution
obtain a new NVRAM.
Notes:
Description
Printer lock up; unable toPING the copier/printer even when using a crossover cable; andunable to make changes on the copy screen.
Solution
CAUSE:Corrupted firmware orfailed Control Board.

SOLUTION:Re-seat the connectors on PWB-MFP.Flash and/or re-flash the copier/printer with current firmware.If the problem persists, replace the MFP
Board.
PART NUMBER MODEL ITEM
4038-0121-06 bizhub C250 PWB-MFP (MFP Control Board)
4038-2414-01 bizhub C252 PWB-MFP (MFP Control Board)
9J 06-0121-06 bizhub C300/C352 PWB-PRCB (Printer Control Board)
4037013104 bizhub C351/C450 PWB-MFPC (MFP Control Board)
Description
Instead of 128MB CF cards to update thefirmware, can1GB or 512MB CF cards be used to program the MFP?
Solution
Only the 128MB CF card (p/n 7660-4036-01) is compatible.
487
bizhub C353P
Description
Solution
Description
Printing from MicrosoftWord, when attempting to print a 5.5x8.5 booklet (onto 8.5x11R paper) the output is always on 11x17.
Solution
CAUSE: Scale to Paper Size is not set properly in MicrosoftWord.
SOLUTION: From the MicrosoftWord print dialog box, set Scale to Paper Size to 5.5x8.5.
Description
Howto Copy Biometric User Authentication Settings ornon Biometric Authentication settingsfrom one MFP to one or multiple similar MFPs.

Solution
This procedure can be used to Copy Biometric User Authentication data from one C451/C550/C650 MFP to one or multiple similar devices.
(This procedure could also befollowed to Copy non-Biometric Authentication information from one MFP, to one or multiple similar devices.

(Please see attached document for detailed instructions with screenshots)

The following isthe procedure to copy User Authentication settings from one (1) MFP to different MFPs using PageScope Data Administrator (PSDA).
Settings copied include: User name, Password, email address and user Biometric profile. Multiple similar devices could also be Copied to at the same time.
1. From the PSDA main window tool bar select "Processing/Copy"
2. From the "Copy Collectively" window click the "Authentication" radio button and select Next.
3. Select the desired "Source" machine and click "Select". This is the MFP storing the desired user information to be copied. Click "Next" to continue.
Select the desired destination MFP or multiple MFPs and click "Select". Click Next to continue.
4. PSDA will then initiate communication to selected MFPs to determine status and availability to prepare the copy process. You will see the import status
within the "Status" window.
5. Once the process is complete select "Start" to begin the "Copy" process.
6. Upon completion of writing the data to the selected MFP you will see "Normal End" displayed in the Processing Result field.
7. Select Finish to complete the Copy process.
8. T he selected MFPs now contain all User name, Password, email address and user Biometric profile.
Description
Solution
d. Device Model - 1
e. LAN Attach - *IP
f. Port number 9100
Description
FS-609, "Right front door is open" messageafter the finisher begins to cycle at power up and is unable to be cleared.
488
bizhub C353P
Solution
CAUSE: The finisher up/down motor (M6) causesthe loss of24V DC on the DCPS at CN7, pin 5 to be lost.

SOLUTION: Inspect the FS-609 up/down drive for binding and replace the up/down motor (p/n 4583 5064 01) and the DCPS (p/n A02E M400 01) as a set.
SPECIAL NOTE : Solution contribution by Tom Kelly, Workgroup/SSD
Description
Solution
489
bizhub C450
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
490
bizhub C450

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution

4036534903-FOC Seal

491
bizhub C450
Description
CE002 at power up.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
b. Select [HDD].
Description
Recommended paper (Media Guide) for the C450.
Solution
C450 Media Guide
Note: To view this PDF hyperlink, Acrobat* Reader must be installed. Acrobat Reader can be downloaded for free from the Adobe* Web site at:
Description
Solution
To troubleshoot:
Description
C-D3xx codes.
Solution
CAUSE: The machine performs a CRC check on the NVRAM against the NVRAM image stored on the MFP board. The C-D3xx codes will be displayed if
the checksums do not match.
SOLUTION: C-D3xx codes can be cleared by pressing Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9. This will display a " * " button. Press this button. This procedure may have to be
repeated several times.
492
bizhub C450
Description
Scan to E-mails are sent as multiple files or multiple e-mails.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Binary division is set to a size that is small enough that all E-mails are divided.
Disable binary division, perform the following:
a. Press the UTILITY/COUNTER button and then select Administrator setting on the LCD.
b. Enter the administrator password (default is 12345678).
c. Select network setting followed by E-mail setting.
d. Select E-mail TX (SMTP) and make the desired changes to Binary division.
e. Exit after making the changes.
2. Max Mail Size is set to a size that is small enough that all E-mails are divided.
Disable Max Mail Size, perform the following:
a. Press the UTILITY/COUNTER button and then select Administrator setting on the LCD.
b. Enter the administrator password (default is 12345678).
c. Select network setting followed by E-mail setting.
d. Select E-mail TX (SMTP) and make the desired changes to Max Mail Size.
e. Exit after making the changes.
3. File Type is set to Single page.
Set the File Type setting to Multi page. To change the File Type setting perform the following:
a. Press the Scan button on the operation panel.
b. Select Scan setting.
c. Select File Type.
d. Select Multi Page to have the entire sent as a single file
e. Select Single Page to create a file for each page scanned. For double sided scans, a file is created for every two pages scanned.
Note: J PEGs will always send as separate emails. Only PDFs and TIFFs can be sent as multiple pages.
4. The HDD is not set or has become corrupt and needs to be formatted.
Set and format the HDD in Tech Rep mode
.
Description
Solution




bizhub 360
DLBT0700787EN00

bizhub 420
DLBT0700784EN00

bizhub 500
DLBT0700786EN00

bizhub C450

bizhub C351

bizhub C250

493
bizhub C450
bizhub C252

bizhub C352

bizhub C300
Notes :
web site at:
Description
Solution
obtain a new NVRAM.
Notes:
494
bizhub C450P
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
495
bizhub C450P

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution

4036534903-FOC Seal

496
bizhub C450P
Description
Solution




bizhub 360
DLBT0700787EN00

bizhub 420
DLBT0700784EN00

bizhub 500
DLBT0700786EN00

bizhub C450

bizhub C351

bizhub C250

bizhub C252

bizhub C352

bizhub C300
Notes :
web site at:
497
bizhub C450P
Description
Solution
obtain a new NVRAM.
Notes:
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Solution

Description
Imagemay beshifted from 1mm to greater than 10mmor the shift may be in random areas on the pages.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. YMCK images are shifted about 1mm in YMCK order. This happens in all areas of pages evenly.
Switch OFF/ON the main power to correct immediately.For long term, install firmware versionK0 or later.
After Updating firmware perform a Gradation Adjustment and reset color registration values to zero .
Notes :
a. In very few cases, the MFP may fail to reflect color shift adjust value when powering up.
b. The latest version firmware or system software is available via the Konica Minolta Download Selector. Access the Selector from SSD Web Support (CS

2. YMCK images are shifted more than 10mm and image is enlarged in the feeding direction. P-5, P-28 errors are indicated (see attached sample).
Reseat all LPH unit cables and/or replace all 4 PWB-LPH units (bizhub C450/C450P - p/n 4037 0765 00 for LPH-BLACK and 3 of p/n 4037 0766 00 for
LPH-YMC; bizhub C351 - p/n 4036 0563 01 for LPH-BLACK and 3 of p/n 4036 0564 01 for LPH-YMC).

3. Uneven color shift. The value of how much color is shifted is not same between pages. It is not even in all areas on pages. Fusing roller rotation speed
becomes higher when loop sensor (PC4) detects high amount of the loop. Due to the failed sensor, the fusing roller keeps pulling the paper and this causes
uneven rotation of the transfer belt unit.
Replace the loop sensor (p\n 4037 0903 01), actuator (p\n 4036 3661 02) and actuator torsion spring (p/n 4036 3664 01).
SPECIAL NOTE : Solution contribution by Cesar J imenez/Freddie Burnham/Gary Scimeca/Gregg Gallant/Ian Lynch, Production Print/SSD
498
bizhub C450P
Description
Solution

1xx Informational

2xx Success

3xx Redirection

4xx Client Error

5xx Server Error

Description
Printing to banner sized paper.
Solution
Paper up to 1200mm (47-1/4 inch) long can be loaded into the bypass tray and printed on using this machine with the appropriate setting specified from the
control panel.
Notes :
1. The latest PostScript Visual driver is required. The latest print drivers are available via the Konica Minolta Download Selector. Access the Selector from the
KMBS public site ( http://www.kmbs.konicaminolta.us ) Support & Drivers tab or from SSD Web Support (CS Expert Support) by clicking on 'Download
MSDS, Drivers, Firmware and more'.
2. The supported operating systems are:
MicrosoftWindows 2000 Professional, MicrosoftWindows XP Home and Professional, MicrosoftWindows Server 2003
3. For detailed information please view the attached documentation. To view a PDF, Adobe Readermust be installed. Adobe Readercan be downloaded
for free from the Adobeweb site at: http://www.adobe.com/products/acrobat/readstep2.html
SPECIAL NOTE : Solution contribution by Ian Lynch, Production Print/SSD
499
bizhub C451
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
500
bizhub C451

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution

4036534903-FOC Seal

501
bizhub C451
Description
TheMFP will not come out of Power Save Mode when a print job is sent to the IC-409. This occurs mainly in the morning when the machine stays in Power
Save Mode overnight. Main body and controller may need to be power-cycled in order for printing to take place.
Solution
CAUSE: System code version 1.0 firmware bug causing the IC-409 to lose communication with the main body.

SOLUTION: The IC-409 must have patches 1-U52ZX and 1-UF108 installed to allow communication to be maintained during the Low Power Mode. These
patches only apply to IC-409 system code version 1.0 and should not be installed on the the IC-409 running system code version 1.01 and above.
Note : The latest version firmware and system software are available via the Konica Minolta Download Selector. Access the Selector from SSD Web
Support (CS Expert Support) by clicking on 'Download MSDS, Drivers, Firmware and more'.
SPECIAL NOTE : Solution contribution by Ron Reed and Tony Pizzoferrato, ESS/SSD
Description
Squeaking noise from the fusing unit.
Solution
CAUSE: Fusing unit failure.

SOLUTION: Replace the fusing unit (p/n A00J R72122). Serial number cut-in is as follows:
bizhub C550 A00J 010008998 and below
bizhub C451 A00K010009747 and below
bizhub C650 A00H010001659 and below
Description
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:



Print/SSD
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
502
bizhub C451
Please power on the controller message. The Fieryis ON and displays "00".

Solution
CAUSE: There are three possible scenarios:
1. The Fieryhas not been configured.
2. Fieryis still booting.
3. Improper booting sequence.

SOLUTION:Please perform the procedures mentioned in the attached documents.
Description
Solution
5. Click on END.
Description
Solution


Save Mode.
Notes :
503
bizhub C550
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
504
bizhub C550

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution

Description
Solution

505
bizhub C550
Description
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:



Print/SSD
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description

Solution

Description
Solution
5. Click on END.
Description
506
bizhub C550
Solution


Save Mode.
Notes :
Description
Ticking noise from the fixing unit while the machine is in an idle state.
Solution
CAUSE: Movement of the cam gear on the shaft located on the rear of the fixing unit causes a clicking sound.

SOLUTION: Please install the countermeasure kit which is outlined in the attached Bulletin Number 5947.
507
bizhub C650
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
508
bizhub C650

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution

Description
Solution

509
bizhub C650
Description
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:



Print/SSD
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Solution
5. Click on END.
Description
Solution


Save Mode.
Notes :
510
bizhub C650
Description
Solution

1. Press utility.
Description
Solution

511
bizhub PRO 1050
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
512
bizhub PRO 1050

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
How to adjust for light density, poor fill.
Solution
Perform the procedure to improve solid density on single or duplex copies .
Description
SD-501, staples jamming or misfiring.
Solution
CAUSE:Malfunctioning staple cartridge.

SOLUTION: A modified staple cartridge is available.
Any cartridge with a datecode before 12/2007 could exhibit this problem.For those experiencing this problem please follow standard warranty procedures to
return themalfunctioning cartridge.
Note : All the staple cartridges in stock are above the 12/2007 date code and should not present a problem.
513
bizhub PRO 1050
Description
Toner spilling/dumping or poor fill.
Solution
Depending on customer usage, there are different conditions that will cause toner spilling. Use the following to diagnose and correct:
CONDITION 1
CAUSE: The customer runs long jobs of high density copies/prints and then runs lower density copies/prints. Toner spills/dumps from the lower ducts onto the
front or back of the transfer/separation unit.
SOLUTION: Print the black ratio list and look at the average black ratio %. If the average black ratio is below 5%, increase the black band width from .25 to
.50mm by setting software dipswitch 6-3 to 1 and 6-4 to 0.
CONDITION 2
CAUSE: The customer runs long jobs of higher density copies/prints. Toner spills/dumps from the developing unit or cleaning unit and copies/prints have
background and high density.
SOLUTION: Print the black ratio list and look at the average black ratio %. If it is above 6.5% clean the upper ducts, install the developer pad modification (p/n
56UA30830) once the part becomes available. Reduce toner density setting by 5% by setting software dipswitch 23-2 to 1.
Notes:
1. See Bulletin 5024 details.
2. See Solid Density Improvement as well as the Toner Dusting/Dumping document for the complete installation instructions and modification updates.
3. See 1050 Toner Spill Countermeasures document.
Description
Solution




bizhub 360
DLBT0700787EN00

bizhub 420
DLBT0700784EN00

bizhub 500
DLBT0700786EN00

bizhub C450

bizhub C351

bizhub C250

bizhub C252

bizhub C352

bizhub C300
Notes :
514
bizhub PRO 1050
web site at:
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
SC77-65 error code.
Solution
CAUSE: Paper holding spring/left (p/n 15AN55240) and paper holding spring/right (p/n 15AN55380) are incorrectly installed on some machines. In the
worst case, the springs may break and an SC77-65 occurs.

SOLUTION: Replace the springs if they are incorrectly installed. The work of replacing the springs takes approximately 10 minutes.
Notes:
1. For the location of the springs, see the SD-501 Parts guide manual, page 9, references 8 and 10.
2. The machines on which the springs may be incorrectly installed are s/n 15AN00001 to 15AN00187.
3. Please check the springs at the installation.
4. For the MIF, please check them at the next visit.
Description
FS503, intermittent J 72-20 as copies are being exited from the stacker unit.
Solution
CAUSE: The inner portion of the drive gear for the stack assist plate has worn. The excessive play of the hub causes the stack assist plate to intermittently
obstruct paper as its being fed into the stacker unit.
SOLUTION: The shaft, gear and set screw have been modified in this area. Replace the swing gear (p/n 15AA910000). Replace the swing shaft (p/n
15AA42851e) and install the new style screw (00z163081)
515
bizhub PRO 1050 IC unit
Description
How to update firmware on the bizhub PRO 920 (IC-203), bizhub PRO 1050 (IC-611) and bizhub PRO C6500 (IC-303) using the Internet ISW method.
Solution
To update firmware using the Internet ISW method (FTP) pleasereview the attached documentation. To view a PDF, Adobe Readermust be installed.
Adobe Readercan be downloaded for free from the Adobeweb site at: http://www.adobe.com/products/acrobat/readstep2.html .
Description
In MicrosoftPublisher 2002/2003, publications/records are not individually collated and stapled when duplexing and using the mail merge feature of
Publisher.
Solution
CAUSE: Registry edit required.
WARNING: Incorrectly editing the registry may severely damage the system. Before making changes to the registry, back up any valued data on the
computer. Konica Minolta is not responsible for any system errors that may result from using a registry editor incorrectly.
SOLUTION: MicrosoftPublisher can be enabled to individually collate, staple and duplex publications/records when using the mail merge feature of
Publisher through a registry edit. This can be done either manually or by a script.
To manually edit the registry, open the Registry Editor by clicking Start, click Run, type regedit, and then click OK. Go to:
1. HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Microsoft\Office\ \Publisher\Printing.
2. Right-click on the Printing folder, select New=>String Value.
2. Create new "string value" called: NumberOfRecordsPerBatch.
3. Double-click and set the Value Data to 1. Instead of grouping records together into groups of 10 (Publisher default) to send to the printer, the records are
now sent in groups of 1 (i.e., each document is sent separately).
Note: A value for this size setting can be set between 0 and 99999.
To update the registry 'automatically' from a script:
1. Download the script from http://ed.mvps.org/20031Rec.reg .
2. Save the REG file to the Desktop.
3. Double-click on the icon, and then click on Yes to the question, 'Are you sure you want to add the information in C:DOCUME~1\administrator account
\Desktop\20031Rec.reg to the registry?'
4. The new value will be added to the registry.
Notes:
a. Refer to Windows registry tips and guidelines PDFfor additional information (see attached).
b. To view the PDF, Adobe Readermust be installed. Adobe Readercan be downloaded for free from the Adobeweb site at:
Description
Solution
Description
Mail Merge does not split after installing Macro to split it.
Solution
CAUSE: Incorrect section data was input into the macro.

SOLUTION: Check the bottom status bar of the word window of the original document. The number after Sec. should be input into the macro. Make sure that
the Macro security is set to low in order to run.
Description
In MicrosoftPublisher2002/2003, publications/records are not individually collated and stapled when duplexingwhile using the Mail Merge feature of
Publisher.
Solution
516
bizhub PRO 1050 IC unit
WARNING : Incorrectly editing the registry may severely damage the system. Before making changes to the registry, back up any valued data on the
SOLUTION: MicrosoftPublishercan be enabled to individually collate, staple and duplex publications/records when using the Mail Merge feature of
Publisherthrough a registry edit. This can be done either manually or by a script.
To 'manually' edit the registry, open the Registry Editor by clicking Start, click Run, type regedit, and then click OK. Go to:
2. Right-click on the Printing folder, select New => String Value.
3. Double-click and set the Value Data to 1. Instead of grouping records together into groups of 10 (Publisherdefault) to send to the printer, the records are
Note : A value for this size setting can be set between 0 and 99999.
Notes :
a. Refer to Windowsregistry tips and guidelines for additional information(see attached).
Description
Increasing the number of 'lines' for Per Page Setting.
Solution
The number of available 'lines' for Per Page Setting is expanded from 26 to 100 with IC-611 firmware version 20-CMQ0 and Konica Minolta 1050 PostScript
(V) driver version 2.0.1.0 together.
The maximum number allowed may change depending on the level of complexity of the page settings. The jobwill be canceled even though the number of
'lines' are less than 100 if it reaches the maximum.
If software DipSwitch 42-0 (Print Error Message) is set to 1, an error page is printed when the amount of 'lines' exceeds 26. The control panel and the web
page both will indicate Print completed.
Please refer to the attached explanation.
SPECIAL NOTE : Solution contribution by Yoshihisa Uchiyama, KMBT J apan.
517
bizhub PRO 1050e
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
518
bizhub PRO 1050e

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
CONDITION 1
CONDITION 2
519
bizhub PRO 1050e
Notes:
Description
Solution




bizhub 360
DLBT0700787EN00

bizhub 420
DLBT0700784EN00

bizhub 500
DLBT0700786EN00

bizhub C450

bizhub C351

bizhub C250

bizhub C252

bizhub C352

bizhub C300
Notes :
520
bizhub PRO 1050e
web site at:
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
CAUSE: Open ICP4 on the ADU DB.

SOLUTION: Locate ICP4 next to CN500. Check to see if there is 5V DC from both legs of the ICP4. If 5V DC is missing from either leg of the ICP replace the
ADU DB/1 (p/n 56UA-9072G).
SPECIAL NOTE : Solution contribution by Brent Christensen, Ultrex Business Products
Description
Solution

1xx Informational

2xx Success

3xx Redirection

4xx Client Error

5xx Server Error

521
bizhub PRO 1050e
522
bizhub PRO 1050P
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
523
bizhub PRO 1050P

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
No ADD TONER indication. May be accompanied by a high pitched noise.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Older Level EPROMs do not display toner addition under certain conditions.
Level 26 and above allow display on the low toner indication as soon as the machine reaches that condition. Minimum level 26 is required and installation of
the latest level EPROM is recommended. EPROM history hyperlink .
The 25 mode, address 71 and address 13 are related. Address 71 determines the amount of copies, after low toner is sensed, before the display will indicate
ADD TONER. Address 13 determine the copy cycle action once the ADD TONER message has been displayed.
Address 71 settings:
4 =After 100 copies (Default)
Note: Address 71, settings 4-7 allow the machine to continue to operate after ADD TONER is displayed, regardless of address 13.
The 25 mode, address 13 settings specify copy cycle reaction at detection (ADD TONER). The machine either finishes the current set in progress or
completes the entire job before stopping the unit.
Adress 13 settings:
0 =Complete the set in progress (after 100 additional copies) and stop
1 =Complete the set in progress (after 1,000 additional copies) then stop
4 =Complete the entire job (up to 100 additional copies) then stop
5 =Complete the entire job (up to 1,000 additional copies) then stop (Default)
An additional aspect of level 26.0 and above is decreased toner consumption. In order to realize this benefit, both laser power 1 and laser power 2 must be
adjusted to 88 (47 mode address 36 and address 37: press P to adjust).
For tray priority, check and adjust 25 mode, address 16 to 2, address 68 to 3, and address 08 to 1.
2. The TLD sensor failed or toner is adhering to the TLD. Replace the the TLD (p/n 25SA88030).
Note: The 12V DC to the TLD, CN22-B3 on the main CB, is only present under the following conditions:
a. When the 7050 is switched ON.
b. When the front door is opened and closed.
c. During a copy operation.
3. The main CB was replaced and now there is no add toner indication. The new control boards are shipped with the latest production level EPROMs,
however field machines may have different levels of Image Processing board EPROMs. This can create error codes and other problems. In addition, the
Dallas chip on the new boards requires the machine to be reinitialized prior to use. The procedure to reinitialize the machine to factory settings resets the
total counter to 0. As such, hotline assistance is required for this procedure.
Note: To web users, the preceding hyperlink is not available for viewing from the web.
4. Note: Machine setup as a printer. Some of the codes and messages are programmed as copier messages and are designed to be displayed in that mode.
As a result of the printer configuration, the messages are not displayed until the machine is powered OFF/ON while holding F3 (copier mode boot).
Level 26 and above EPROMs allow the add toner display. Installation of the latest EPROMs are recommended.
524
bizhub PRO 1050P
5. Mylar on the toner hopper agitator plate is removed or damaged.
Replace agitator plate (p/n 25SA-3270).
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
CONDITION 1
CONDITION 2
Notes:
Description
Solution

525
bizhub PRO 1050P



bizhub 360
DLBT0700787EN00

bizhub 420
DLBT0700784EN00

bizhub 500
DLBT0700786EN00

bizhub C450

bizhub C351

bizhub C250

bizhub C252

bizhub C352

bizhub C300
Notes :
web site at:
Description
Solution
Notes :
526
bizhub PRO 1050P
Description
FS-503, how to prevent uneven stacking of non-stapled copies in the main tray.
Solution
To prevent uneven stacking of non-stapled copies in the main tray, perform the following:
1. Verify level of finisher/floor using bubble/bullseye level in base of finisher.
2. Verify curl of paper and reduce temperature if excessive curl is seen.
3. Check exit gate solenoid and side guides in stacker adjustments.
4. Check for static buildup and replace defective parts
5. Adjust paper width with the following method:
a. Open the front door of the FS-503. Set folded paper and such in door switch and then turn ON the door switch.
b. Set reasonable quantity of original and start copying 1 set with staple mode.
c. See inside of the stacker. Turn OFF the door switch of FS-503 immediately after stapling process (forcibly create jam).
d. Pull out the stacker and set paper in the stacker. Then measure the gap between paper and alignment plate.
e. According to the measured value in step d, input setting value on [Paper Width Adjustment screen].
Description
Solution
Description
527
bizhub PRO 920
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
528
bizhub PRO 920

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution




bizhub 360
DLBT0700787EN00

bizhub 420
DLBT0700784EN00

bizhub 500
529
bizhub PRO 920
DLBT0700786EN00

bizhub C450

bizhub C351

bizhub C250

bizhub C252

bizhub C352

bizhub C300
Notes :
web site at:
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Solution
530
bizhub PRO 920

8. Press Start.
Description
Solution
Description
Where is the key counter located?
Solution
The key counter is located on the rear of the machine above the 2 ozone filters. To access the key counter remove the main rear panel, remove the metal
bracket and withdraw the 4 pin key counter.
Description
What is the user ID and password to access the Machine Manager (Administraotr) section of the main body NIC?
Solution
The user ID is: admin (lower case)
The password is: 00000000
Note: If this password is changed and or forgotten, the main body allows for a new password entry in Tech Rep mode/Admin Setting/Admin Password
Setting. Enter the new password and press OK.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

1xx Informational

531
bizhub PRO 920
2xx Success

3xx Redirection

4xx Client Error

5xx Server Error

532
bizhub PRO C500
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
F23-09 with lines on copies.
Solution
CAUSE: Toner is backing up or solidifying in the cleaning unit box for the transfer belt causing the transfer belt drive motor (M18) to bind. Insufficient airflow
during idle causing internal machine temperature to rise.
SOLUTION: Special firmware (65lac112CMV0) keeps M11 (Transfer Belt Cooling Fan) ON for a period after the copy process has completed. This helps
keep the internal temperature at normal levels. This firmware can be download from the [[Konica Minolta FTP site| URL
See c500exitplate.pdf for additional information.
Description
What is the standard configuration for a FedEx* Kinko's* C500/IP901?
Solution
Used by the Direct side for support of FedEx Kinko:
All FedEx Kinko's use a standard configuration for their C500 and IP901. When initially setting up the engine and controller, technicians must follow the New
KMBS Setup Procedures Document and to install and configure the new EFI profiles for version 2 IP901s, KMBS EFI Profile Installation Document . These
documents shoud be used for existing and new installs. A new document has also been created, specifically for calibration . Use this document as a
reference for setup and calibration of an IP-901 that already has the profile patch loaded.
If a store manager is not happy with the output after installing and configuring the controller, NSSG is providing limit samples to all of the branches to be used
to verify if the settings are producing correct output at each location (these samples should be received within the next week as of 1/18/06). Once the
samples have been received by the branch, download the Reference File Procedures and the Reference File (53MB) . The file is print ready and can be
downloaded directly to the IP901 for printing. If the prints from the reference file are similar to the limit samples, the printer is operating within specification.
Any issues that the store manager has should then be addressed to FedEx Kinko's Asset Management department in Dallas or to their District Manager.
Note: To view the PDF(s), Acrobat* Reader must be installed. Acrobat Reader can be downloaded for free from the Adobe* Web site at:
Description
Solution
Notes :
533
bizhub PRO C500
Description
Toner is backing up or solidifying in the cleaning unit box for the transfer belt causing the transfer belt drive motor (M18) to bind. F23-09 may also be
indicated with lines on copies.
Solution
CAUSE: Insufficient airflow during idle causing internal machine temperature to rise.
SOLUTION: Special firmware (C12-CMV0) is available to keep M11 (Transfer Belt Cooling Fan) on for a period after the copy process has completed. This
helps keep the internal temperature at normal levels. This firmware can be download from the NSSG website or the [[Konica Minolta FTP site| URL
ftp://kbtdigital:kx15@ftp.konicabt.com]]. Ensure that the fan cover was removed from the left side of the machine when the finisher was installed and that all
filters are clean.
Description
How to temporarily install a new or used Printer CB, Overall CB, or Operation Board in the 8050 for testing purposes without using Board Change Mode
(binary serialization).
Solution
Refer to Bulletin Number 4982 for more details.To view thePDF, Adobe Readermust be installed. Adobe Readercan be downloaded for free from the
Note : This mode is for diagnostic test purposes only. This will allow both black and white/color copies and prints, but the color copies/prints will have
security lines on them.
Description
SC45-20 at power up or while making copies.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Color registration failure.
Perform the color correction calibration of the sensors PS8 and PS9 (p/n 4969-1729-01). To calibrate the sensors, perform the following:
a. Disable Color Registration Correction Control in the 25 mode, software dipswitch 25, bits 3 to 1 (ON) and bit 4 to 0 (OFF).
b. Run [Auto Color Registration Adjustment] in the 36 mode.
c. Enable Color Registration Control (software dipswitch 25, bits 3 to 0 (OFF) and bit 4 to 0 (OFF)).
d. Perform Auto Color Registration adjustment.

2. The shutter that covers the registration sensors PS8 or PS9 is not opening.
Clean the mechanism and ensure that the shutter functions correctly.

3. Color registration sensors have failed.
Replace the color registration unit (p\n 65AAR75800).

4. Failed PRCB.
Replace the PRCB (8050/CF5001 - p/n 65AA-9033 and bizhub PRO C500 -p/n 65AA-9035).

5. Stripped developer gearsor binding developing unit.
Note : When printing black and white prints, the black is missing on the page. Gradually the frequency of the voids increases and the SC45-20 is indicated
when the machine is powered ON.
Pull the transfer belt unit when the SC45-20 is indicated andobserve the CMYK pattern. If the K pattern is missing, then check the K developing unit (p/n1
65AA-972 2). Look for stripped developing gears (p/n 65AA 7721 0 orp/n 65AA 7722 0) and replace if necessary. If K developing unit is binding, replace the
assembly.

6. Imaging Unit not fully seated intoMFP causing a poor electrical connection and resulting in developer being depleted.
Lubricate alignment pins on front right side of imaging unit. Replace developer.

7. The toner level detection sensor located inside the corresponding color toner hopper will register a false full state. The sensor itself becomes caked with
toner.
Note : Developer will run completely out of toner even though all relevant systems are operating normally.
Open the toner hopper and clean the toner level detection sensor. This will allow the toner bottle to begin supplying the hopper with fresh toner.It maybe
necessaryto manually tone up the developer. This is accomplished by using the 47 mode.
a. First access the toner density sensor at switch 58 bit 0=yellow, bit 1=magenta, bit 2=cyan, bit 3=black.
b.Check the level, it should be between 150-180. Ifthe value is greater than 180,add toner to the developer.
c.To add toner to the developer, use switch 01 bit 1=yellow, bit 4=magenta, bit 7=cyan, bit 10=black.
d.Continue to add toner untilreaching the desired value.
e.When finished, cycle the machine power, then run some test copies to verify the correction ofthe problem.

8. Defective TRansfer Belt Assembly.
Replace the Transfer Belt Assembly (p/n 65AA-261 0)
534
bizhub PRO C500
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Evenly spaced yellow, magenta, cyan, or black lines from lead-to-trail after set up.
Solution
CAUSE: The time, date, and telephone numbers have not been programmed.
SOLUTION: To program the time, date, and phone numbers, perform the following:
1. Press the Help key.
2. Select [Key operator mode].
3. Select [1. System initial setting].
4. Select [1. Date & Time setting].
5. Enter the date and time pressing [Set] after each entry to scroll to the next number entry position.
6. After all numbers have been entered, select [Set], [Previous Screen], [Previous Screen] to return to the normal operations screen.
7. Enter the 25 mode (power ON the sub power switch while pressing the 2 and 5 keys).
8. Select [12. Setting date input].
9. Input the proper date. Note: The date must be entered again even if the current displayed date is correct. The machine will cycle through the date, month,
and year each time the numbers are entered.
10. Select [OK] after each number entry.
11. Select [7. Telephone number setting menu].
12. Select [Service center Telephone number (16 digit)].
13. Input up to 16 numbers. Note: A number must be entered.
14. Select [Service center FAX number (16 digit)].
15. Input up to 16 digits.
Note: A number must be entered.
16. Select [OK].
17. Power the sub switch OFF/ON to exit the 25 mode.
Description
Lines on copies and prints in the lead-to-trail direction.
Solution
Escalated to Konica Minolta J apan:
Solutions Support and Development has completed testing for the above referenced problem. Engineering has escalated this issue to the Engineering Center
in J apan for review and possible correction.
Notes:
1. If viewing this solution via the web, please click on "Notify me when this solution changes" for an automatic E-mail that will be sent when this solution is
updated. For phone advisors, please attach to this solution for an automatic E-mail that will be sent to the technician when this solution is updated. End the
call with call code ESC_BT.
2. Please determine if the lines are caused by the upper fixing roller or transfer belt by stopping the paper prior to entering the fixing unit. This will help to
narrow down where the lines are being created on the paper. If lines are being caused by the transfer belt unit please send samples to the following address:
Konica MInolta Busininess Solutions Inc.
550 Marshall Phelps Rd
Windsor, CT. 06095
Attn Richard Raynor, D709
535
bizhub PRO C5500
Description
Different types of uneven density may occur:

When printing a full sheet halftone the center of the image is noticeably darker than the front and rear edges. This can also be reproduced by running
halftone test prints set to 40 in the TechRep Mode.

Uneven image density from front-to-rear on halftone patterns.

Uneven density front-to-rear. This is a gradual density shift from thefront of the page to the rear of the page.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
Note : Resolutions apply to bizhub PRO 6500/5500 series unless otherwise noted.

Center of printed page is darker than the edges.
1. Incorrect firmware level/DipSW setting.
Please install minimum firmware version 27 and set DipSW 2-5 to 1.

2.The charge wire in the corona housing might not be seated properly.
Remove the end caps on the charge corona and verify the charge wire is sitting at the bottom of the V-shaped groove.
SPECIAL NOTE : Solution contribution by Gary Scimeca, Production Print/SSD

3.A failed write unit.
Please provide the following samples:
Test pattern #53 set to 130 line 1 for Y,M,C,K. (prints for each color)
Test Pattern #53 line 1 set to the following - Y=130 and M=130 (red)
Test Pattern #53 line 1 set to the following - Y=130 and C=130 (green)
Test Pattern #53 line 1 set to the following - C=130 and M=130 (blue)
Test pattern #53 set to 40 line 1 for Y,M,C, (process black 1 print)
Test pattern #53 set to 40 line 1 for Y,M,C,K (process black 1 print)
Notes :
a. Please send the samples into KMBS to the attention of the Hotline advisor. Once the samples are received, the Hotline advisor will update the ticket with
which write units need to be replaced.
b. FOC PART(s) ORDERING PROCEDURE
A Free-of-Charge (FOC) bizhub PRO C6500 Write Unit can be ordered via the Online Technical (FOC) & Special Program order form in
MyKonicaMinolta.com.
To placethe FOC claim, please go to Service => Warranty Repair & Special Programs => Warranty Services & Technical/FOC Programs
=> KMBS Technical (FOC) & Special Programs. Access and complete the SSD Program claim form that is located in the Claim Type drop-down by
selecting SSD Solution Claim (bottom of the list).
Afterselecting "SSD Solution Claim",select the appropriate Solution ID from the SSD Solutions pop-up box in the Product RA/Claim Information at the
bottom of the form.A description of the associated FOC part that will be shipped is then displayed.
Under this SSD program, KMBS will ship all parts at no-charge and no return to KMBS is necessary.
Uponreceipt and verification ofthe online claim information, KMBS Service Operations will process a Free-of-Charge parts order.
All parts will be shipped via UPS 2-day Air Service, and an automated E-mail will be sent to the submitting KMBS Customer confirming the shipment and the
KMBS claim number, parts order status and the UPS tracking number for the delivery.
Questions related tothe FOC parts claims may be directed to KMBS Logistics Operations at (201) 934-5339.
Once the FOC stock is depleted, this FOC program will end and the write units will be available through normal ordering channels.

Gradual density shift from thefront of the page to the rear of the page on copies/prints and on halftone patterns.
1. Charge corona is not level with the drum.
The level of the charge corona assembly can be adjusted on the drum unit. If this does not produce the desired results please order mylar shims (p/n
A03UP46200). See the attached document for details.To view the attached document, MicrosoftExcelor ExcelViewer must be installed. ExcelViewer
Note : For the bizhub PRO C6500,a high tolerance write unit is available for customers requiring a higher level of quality in front-to-rear density.These write
units are only available with ESS approval.
Hotline advisors,please have the technician place a web order for the needed write unit then escalate the problem ticket to ESS for release. Please be sure
the web order number is included in the ticket before escalating.
Color Write Unit: A03UR7A600
Black Write Unit: A03UR7A500
536
bizhub PRO C5500
Description
Toner is adhering to the drum surface.It can be cleaned off, but returns a short time later.
Solution
CAUSE: This is under investigation byKMBT (Konica Minolta J apan).

SOLUTION: As a temporary countermeasure please follow the procedure in the attached document which lists the step-by-step procedures.
Note : If viewing this solution via the web, please establish a ticket via either the web or by callingthe contact center at 1-800-825-5664. Once a ticket has
been established an E-mail will be sent when this solution is updated.
For phone advisors, please attach to this solution so that an automatic E-mail will be sent to the technician when this solution is updated. End the call with
SPECIAL NOTE : Solution contribution by Clinton Marquardt, ESS/SSD and Freddie Burnham, Production Print/SSD
Description
Indentations are being seen on 12x18 paper at the 11-inch mark after running mainly 8.5x11 paper.
Solution
CAUSE: Lines on fuser belt due to design limitation of the fuser. The current design of the fusing system will possibly create this problem under certain
circumstances.

SOLUTION: Have the end user interleave small and large paper jobs. This may be unrealistic, but it is the only option at this time. This limitation is being
analyzed to prevent problems on future models.
Description
FS-607, incorrect alignment or jamming when stapling.
Solution
CAUSE:Excessive static build-up in the Staple/Folding section.

SOLUTION: Remove Teflon guides .
Description
How to take a firmware (engine log) capture.
Solution
To take a firmware capture, please perform the following:
1.When the error code (Cxx-xx) is displayed on the operation panel insert a USB drive into the mainbody Service Port.
2.Press the following: [Utility] => [Utility] => [Powersave] => [Powersave].
3.By pressing the above buttons, the Interrupt button on operation panel will turnON/OFF.
4. If the light pulse disappears, it shows that the taking of log data is finished.
Description
Solution
5. Click on END.
Description
Troubleshooting Guide.
Solution
537
bizhub PRO C5500
The contents of the attachedTroubleshooting Guide:
1. Low density
2. White spots
3. Carrier attachment to the image
4. Poor transfer
5. Background
6. Repeater Mark
7. Toner spilling
8. White lines
9. Uneven gloss
10. Paper waving
11. Inconsistent color
12. Darker at the trailing edge of image
13. Problem with non-recommended paper
14. Side1/2 image registration
15. Thin paper jams wrapping around the fusing belt
16. Blurred image
17. Poor color reproducibility
18. White streaks (drum memory)
19. Waste toner packing
20. PFU paper no feed under low temperature environment (J 16-02)
21. Gloss unevenness on side2 of coated paper
22. SC28-01 to 04 when machine is powered up
23. Paper skew with small size (5.5x8.5S, B5S)
24. SC28-31 to 34 (Charging potential correction (Vm) error)
25. White (meandering) line (dust attach on PET sheet)
Note : To viewthe attachedPDF, Adobe Readermust be installed. Adobe Readercan be downloaded for free from the Adobeweb site at:
538
bizhub PRO C6500
Description
When printing, one of these image problems may occur: negative image, color is misaligned, image shifts front-to-rear then returns to normal, a pattern is
printed in the background or there are missing images.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Loose or damaged Interface cable between the Fieryand the Image Processing Board. Make sure the cable is firmly seated andsecured at the Fiery
and the IPB. If the problem is intermittent, please replace the cable.

2. Failed Image Processing Board or Copier Interface Card (CIC) in the Fiery.
Please call the Hotline. If the problem is identified as a failed IPB or CIC, the Hotline advisor will provide direction to order a modified IPB via the online
ordering system (see Note below).
IMPORTANT : The original board MUST be returned to KMBS ARS. Send to:
KMBS ARS
KMBS National Parts Depot
31 Elkay Dr.
Chester, NY 10918
Notes :
a. The modified IPB serial number cut-in for the bizhub PRO C6500 is:
A03U010001509 - U.S.
A03UP10000697 - IKON (U.S.)
A03UW10000041 - Generic (U.S.)
A03V010000031 - For the bizhub PRO C6500P (U.S.)
The modified IPBs can be identified by one of the following:
A red dot on the white bar code label.
R144 has been removed.
Revision level 5 or greater (A03UH02015 or higher).
b. Please follow the below procedures to acquire a modified IPB:
ASSD Ticket Number must be acquired in order to file a claim for the FOC replacement IPB.
FOC PART(s) ORDERING PROCEDURE
A Free-of-Charge (FOC) modified bizhub PRO C6500 Image Processing Board can be ordered via the Online Technical (FOC) & Special Program order
form in MyKonicaMinolta.com.
Under this SSD program, KMBS will ship all parts at no-charge.
SPECIAL NOTE : Solution contribution by Freddie Burnham and J im Behrends, Production Print/SSD
Description



Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:



539
bizhub PRO C6500
Notes :

Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Toner is adhering to the drum surface.It can be cleaned off, but returns a short time later.
Solution
540
bizhub PRO C6500
CAUSE: This is under investigation byKMBT (Konica Minolta J apan).

SOLUTION: As a temporary countermeasure please follow the procedure in the attached document which lists the step-by-step procedures.
Note : If viewing this solution via the web, please establish a ticket via either the web or by callingthe contact center at 1-800-825-5664. Once a ticket has
For phone advisors, please attach to this solution so that an automatic E-mail will be sent to the technician when this solution is updated. End the call with
SPECIAL NOTE : Solution contribution by Clinton Marquardt, ESS/SSD and Freddie Burnham, Production Print/SSD
Description
Negative image.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1.Patch update required (only for the Creo/IC-304 with SP2 installed).
Install the INDriver_4-12-07_Patch. The patch is available by contacting the SSD Hotline. Once a ticket is established and theattached surveyis completed,
the Hotline Advisor will upload the patch into the problem ticket. See attacheddocumentation for additional detail.
To view the survey document, MicrosoftWordor WordViewer must be installed. WordViewer 2003 (11.7MB) can be obtained free from Microsoftat
the following URL; http://www.microsoft.com/downloads/details.aspx?DisplayLang=en&FamilyID=95e24c87-8732-48d5-8689-ab826e7b8fdf .
Notes :
a.Ensure that the bizhub PRO C6500 has the modified Image Processing Board installed. The modified IPB serial number cut-in for the bizhub PRO C6500
is:
A03U010001509 - U.S.
A03UP10000697 - IKON (U.S.)
R144 has been removed (see attached photo).
Revision level 5 or greater (A03U H020 15 or higher).
Please follow the below procedures to acquire a modified IPB:
b.The latest version firmware or system software is available via the Konica Minolta Download Selector. Access the Selector from SSD Web Support (CS

2. Corrupted or damaged Fusion board.
Replace the bizhub PRO C6500 Image Processing Board (p/n A03U H020 15) and flash the bizhub PRO C6500 with the most current firmware available.If
the problem persists replace the IC-304 Creo Fusion Board (p/n 503-00351A).
SPECIAL NOTE : Solution contribution by Clinton Marquardt, ESS/SSD and Cesar J imenez/Ed Bellone/Freddie Burnham/Greg Lantowski, Production
Print/SSD
Description
SD-501, staples jamming or misfiring.
Solution
CAUSE:Malfunctioning staple cartridge.

SOLUTION: A modified staple cartridge is available.
Any cartridge with a datecode before 12/2007 could exhibit this problem.For those experiencing this problem please follow standard warranty procedures to
return themalfunctioning cartridge.
Note : All the staple cartridges in stock are above the 12/2007 date code and should not present a problem.
541
bizhub PRO C6500
Description
Solution
circumstances.

Description
A dark jitter is seen in the main scan direction (front-to-rear).This is usually noticable when using heavy stock paper. It is most prevalent when printing gray
halftones.
Solution
CAUSE: Heavier paper contacts the upper second transfer roller and causes the transfer unit to vibrate.This vibration causes the image to jitter when being
transfered from the drum to the transfer belt.

SOLUTION:Install firmware v27-GC8 or later and set DipSW 11-5 to "1". After the DipSW is set please perform the following to activate the feature.
1. Enter User Setting.
2. Select Common Setting.
3. Select Next.
4. Change the Thick Paper BK Mode to ON.
This firmware will cam all the 1st transfer rollers against the drums when using black only mode. Even though the color 1st transfer rollers are cammed
against the drums they are not used for image development.They are only used to stiffen the transfer assembly to reduce the amount of vibration. NO COLOR
CLICKS WILL BE INCURRED.
542
bizhub PRO C6500P
Description
When printing, one of these image problems may occur: negative image, color is misaligned, image shifts front-to-rear then returns to normal, a pattern is
printed in the background or there are missing images.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Loose or damaged Interface cable between the Fieryand the Image Processing Board. Make sure the cable is firmly seated andsecured at the Fiery
and the IPB. If the problem is intermittent, please replace the cable.

2. Failed Image Processing Board or Copier Interface Card (CIC) in the Fiery.
Please call the Hotline. If the problem is identified as a failed IPB or CIC, the Hotline advisor will provide direction to order a modified IPB via the online
ordering system (see Note below).
IMPORTANT : The original board MUST be returned to KMBS ARS. Send to:
KMBS ARS
KMBS National Parts Depot
31 Elkay Dr.
Chester, NY 10918
Notes :
a. The modified IPB serial number cut-in for the bizhub PRO C6500 is:
A03U010001509 - U.S.
A03UP10000697 - IKON (U.S.)
R144 has been removed.
Revision level 5 or greater (A03UH02015 or higher).
b. Please follow the below procedures to acquire a modified IPB:
SPECIAL NOTE : Solution contribution by Freddie Burnham and J im Behrends, Production Print/SSD
Description



Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:



543
bizhub PRO C6500P
Notes :

Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Negative image.
Solution
544
bizhub PRO C6500P
PROBABLE CAUSES:
Notes :
is:
A03U010001509 - U.S.
A03UP10000697 - IKON (U.S.)

Print/SSD
Description
Solution
circumstances.

Description
FS-607, incorrect alignment or jamming when stapling.
Solution
CAUSE:Excessive static build-up in the Staple/Folding section.

SOLUTION: Remove Teflon guides .
Description
Solution
545
bizhub PRO C6500P
5. Click on END.
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
546
CF1501
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
547
CF1501

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
PROBLEM: After installing a new oil supply unit (instead of the old-style oil web) an error message appears.
Solution
CAUSE: Outdated firmware.
SOLUTION: The copier/printer needs new firmware to support the Oil Supply Unit. Please refer to bulletin 4011 .
Note:
To view the above PDF, Acrobat* Reader must be installed. Acrobat Reader can be downloaded for
548
CF1501
free from the Adobe* Web site at: [[http://www.adobe.com/products/acrobat/readstep2.html| URL
http://www.adobe.com/products/acrobat/readstep2.html]]

Description
Solution
Description
Solution
Description
P-21 or P-22 shortly after power up.
Solution
CAUSE: The registration sensors (UN20 and UN21) are dirty or they are unable to read the color shift patterns on the transfer belt.

SOLUTION: Clean UN20 and UN21 and ensure that the shutter is working properly. A damaged transfer belt can cause the color shift patterns to be poorly
developed.
Description
How do you select the finisher functions from the CF 1501 copier control panel?
Solution
On the CF1501 the finisher functions are available only through the Fiery* print drive.
Description
Blurred images.
Solution
CAUSE: Transfer belt clips loose or missing.
SOLUTION: Remove the transfer belt and verify that the two clips on either side of the belt are installed. If they become loose or missing, the copies will
become blurred.
Description
What are the part numbers for the copier Flash ROM card?
Solution
The part number for the CF1501 is: 766-1501-01
The part number for the CF2001 is: 766-2001-01
549
CF2001
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
550
CF2001

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Solution
551
CF2001
Description
How to default a Macintoshdriver to black & white.
Solution
The drivercannot bedefaulted to black & white on a Macintosh. This is a limitation of the operating system. Howevera PRESET can be made in the
driver for black & white printing by performing the following:
1. Select FilePrint andfrom the PRINT box, select the drop-down from the second box under the presets box.
2. Select QUALITY.
3. Select the drop down for SELECT COLOR.
4. Select GRAYSCALE (or the desired functionalityto besaved as a preset like duplex, finishing options, etc.).
5. Select PRESETS, then SAVE AS.
6. Name the file (example: Black & White).
7. Select OK. Select this saved PRESET of Black & White wheneverblack & white printing is required.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

developed.
Description
Unable to perform gradation. After the test pattern prints, the start button stays amber.
Solution
CAUSE: The RADF feed tray has paper in it or the RADF empty sensor has failed.
SOLUTION: Either remove the paper from the feed tray or check the operation of the empty sensor (p/n 9335100011) and the actuator (p/n 4490341103).
Description
Does the copier support the FN8 finisher?
Solution
The copier does not support the FN8. Only the C350 supports the FN8.
552
CF2001P
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
553
CF2001P

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Solution
554
CF2001P
Description
Solution
2. Select QUALITY.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

developed.
Description
The printer calibration screen does not respond after selecting the X-Ritedensitometer.
Solution
CAUSE: Incorrect baud rate.

SOLUTION: The baud rate for the densitometer must be set to 19.2K.
555
CF2002
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
556
CF2002

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
Notes :
557
CF2002
Description
C-12CC at power up.
Solution
displayed.
12. Select OK.
Description
Solution
Description
C3E02 (C-3E02) code after installing a new RAM packwith firmware version 2E5 or higher installed.
Solution
CAUSE: The current version of firmware does not recognize the RAM pack.
SOLUTION: Please load firmware version 2D1as it is required for replacement and then install the new RAM pack. Power theMFP ON and verify the code
has reset. Firmware can then be upgraded to the latest level after 2D1 has been installed. Please see bulletins 4651 and 3836D for details.
Notes :
2. The latest version firmware or system software is available via the Konica Minolta Download Selector. Access the Selector from SSD Web Support (CS
Description
How to properly remove Command WorkStation from a Macintosh.
Solution
Please perform the step-by-step procedures mentioned in the attached document.
Description
Solution
558
CF2002
Description
P5, P6, P7, P8, or P9 codes are displayed.
Solution
CAUSE: The tip of the lever (p/n 4025-3558-01) that moves the shutter (4025-3555-02) covering the AIDC sensors is broken and will not move the shutter as
needed.
SOLUTION: Replace parts as necessary.
559
CF2002P
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
560
CF2002P

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Solution
561
CF2002P
Description
Solution
2. Select QUALITY.
Description
Solution
Description
Microsoft-certified printer drivers - PCL, PostScript, PostScript (P)and PostScript (V).
Solution
The Konica Minolta Microsoft-certified printer driverscan bedownloaded fromthe Konica Minolta Download Selector. Access the Selector from the the KMBS
public site ( http://www.kmbs.konicaminolta.us ) Support & Drivers tab or from SSD Web Support (CS Expert Support) by clicking on 'Download MSDS,
Drivers, Firmware and more'.
These drivers will be shown as a WHQL ( W indows H ardware Q uality L abs)Download.
Access the Download Selector and type WHQL in [Find downloads:],then click on Search->.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution
562
CF2002P
563
CF3102
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
564
CF3102

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
Notes :
565
CF3102
Description
C-12CC at power up.
Solution
displayed.
12. Select OK.
Description
Solution
Description
C3E02 (C-3E02) code after installing a new RAM packwith firmware version 2E5 or higher installed.
Solution
CAUSE: The current version of firmware does not recognize the RAM pack.
SOLUTION: Please load firmware version 2D1as it is required for replacement and then install the new RAM pack. Power theMFP ON and verify the code
has reset. Firmware can then be upgraded to the latest level after 2D1 has been installed. Please see bulletins 4651 and 3836D for details.
Notes :
Description
Background on prints and copies.
Note : Please determine the type of backgrounding present and follow the procedures as outlined in the solution.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Background on heavy stock paper.
To correct background on heavy stock paper, perform the following:
a. Change the background voltage on all colors to a value of +5.
b. Execute Stabalizer.
c. Execute Gradation Adjustment.
d. Adjust the Fuser Speed as detailed in the Service Manual.

2. Yellow dot pattern.
If the backgrounding consists of a yellow dot pattern, update the firmware to version F8. This is special firmware available if the above procedure does not
566
CF3102
work. This firmware will allow the background voltage to be adjusted +/- 5 in 20V DC steps (the previous firmware allowed +/- 5 in 10V DC steps. Be careful
about using the settings towards the extreme ends of the adjusting range as developer spew (Carrier Attachment) may occur. The firmware is available via
the Konica Minolta Download Selector. Access the Selector from SSD Web Support (CS Expert Support) by clicking on 'Download MSDS, Drivers, Firmware
and more'. Please see the attached firmware file (for accessibility in case the Download Selector cannot be accessed).
Description
Solution
Description
How do you change the default settings on the CF2002/3102 copiers?
Solution
To change the copier/scanner default settings:
1) Select the section you want to change (scanner or copier buttons on top right of the control panel).
2) Make the changes you want to be the new default settings (i.e., b&w instead of color).
3) Enter the Utility Mode.
4) Select the Input button.
5) In the Input screen select the Reset Mode button.
6) In the Reset Mode Screen select the Set-Up button.
7) After selecting the Set-Up Mode touch the enter button (this will not highlight).
8) Select the enter Button on the top of the Reset Mode screen.
9) In the Utility Mode screen select the Fin.Time button.
10) The default settings should now be the ones you set in step #2. To test, change the settings and press panel reset.
These procedures are also listed in the User Manual #1 on Page 5-4.
567
CF3102P
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
568
CF3102P

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Solution
569
CF3102P
Description
Solution
2. Select QUALITY.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution
570
CF3102P
571
CF5001
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
SC45-20 at power up or while making copies.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Color registration failure.
Perform the color correction calibration of the sensors PS8 and PS9 (p/n 4969-1729-01). To calibrate the sensors, perform the following:
a. Disable Color Registration Correction Control in the 25 mode, software dipswitch 25, bits 3 to 1 (ON) and bit 4 to 0 (OFF).
b. Run [Auto Color Registration Adjustment] in the 36 mode.
c. Enable Color Registration Control (software dipswitch 25, bits 3 to 0 (OFF) and bit 4 to 0 (OFF)).
d. Perform Auto Color Registration adjustment.

2. The shutter that covers the registration sensors PS8 or PS9 is not opening.
Clean the mechanism and ensure that the shutter functions correctly.

3. Color registration sensors have failed.
Replace the color registration unit (p\n 65AAR75800).

4. Failed PRCB.
Replace the PRCB (8050/CF5001 - p/n 65AA-9033 and bizhub PRO C500 -p/n 65AA-9035).

5. Stripped developer gearsor binding developing unit.
Note : When printing black and white prints, the black is missing on the page. Gradually the frequency of the voids increases and the SC45-20 is indicated
when the machine is powered ON.
Pull the transfer belt unit when the SC45-20 is indicated andobserve the CMYK pattern. If the K pattern is missing, then check the K developing unit (p/n1
65AA-972 2). Look for stripped developing gears (p/n 65AA 7721 0 orp/n 65AA 7722 0) and replace if necessary. If K developing unit is binding, replace the
assembly.

6. Imaging Unit not fully seated intoMFP causing a poor electrical connection and resulting in developer being depleted.
Lubricate alignment pins on front right side of imaging unit. Replace developer.

7. The toner level detection sensor located inside the corresponding color toner hopper will register a false full state. The sensor itself becomes caked with
toner.
Note : Developer will run completely out of toner even though all relevant systems are operating normally.
Open the toner hopper and clean the toner level detection sensor. This will allow the toner bottle to begin supplying the hopper with fresh toner.It maybe
necessaryto manually tone up the developer. This is accomplished by using the 47 mode.
a. First access the toner density sensor at switch 58 bit 0=yellow, bit 1=magenta, bit 2=cyan, bit 3=black.
b.Check the level, it should be between 150-180. Ifthe value is greater than 180,add toner to the developer.
572
CF5001
c.To add toner to the developer, use switch 01 bit 1=yellow, bit 4=magenta, bit 7=cyan, bit 10=black.
d.Continue to add toner untilreaching the desired value.
e.When finished, cycle the machine power, then run some test copies to verify the correction ofthe problem.

8. Defective TRansfer Belt Assembly.
Replace the Transfer Belt Assembly (p/n 65AA-261 0)
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Solution
Description
Paper skew specification.
Solution
The specificationfor skew is 0.5% to the length for 1-sided and 1.0% for 2-sided. For example, if the page is 11x17, the maximum skew would be
approximately 2mm. In 2-sided mode, a maximum of 4mm skew may occur on side 2.
SPECIAL NOTE : Solution contribution by David Aekus, Production Print/SSD
Description
SC29-07, SC29-08, SC29-09, SC29-10 error codes.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Use the SC29-xx troubleshooting flow chart prior to attempting the other resolutions below.
Notes :
a. To view a PDF, Adobe Readermust be installed. Adobe Readercan be downloaded for free from the Adobeweb site at:
b. To view a PDF requiring an Asian (Chinese, J apanese, Korean) font pack, download one for free from the AdobeWeb site at:
http://www.adobe.com/products/acrobat/acrrasianfontpack.html
c. Set PDF viewing percentage value to at least 200% for clarity.
2. Setup adjustment performed incorrectly.
Recall the process adjustment standard data and perform the gamma auto adjustment after insuring that the drum cartridges and charge coronas are properly
seated. To recall the process adjustment standard data, perform the following:
a. Power on the copier while pressing 3 and 6 on the control panel.
b. Select PROCESS ADJ USTMENT followed by RECALL STANDARD DATA.
c. Select YES and then perform the normal setup.
3. The transfer roller behind the transfer belt has dislodged from the power block assembly.
Check the corresponding transfer roller (p/n 65AA26120R) for the corresponding color code that might have dislodged from the power block assemblies (p/n
65AA-2810, p/n 65AA-2820). Also, check the continuity of the blocks.
4. Excessive yellow due to high yellow charge grid (shown on Adjustment List as Grid Y 1/1(V) setting =1015), due to failed HV-1.
Replace HV-1 (p/n 65AA84010).
5. Bias contact on the rear of the developing unit is malformed resulting in insufficient contact with the bias spring located on inside of the machine on the rear
side.
Reform the bias contact so that it contacts the spring on the inside of the machine.
573
CF5001
6. Faulty Gamma Sensor.
Replace the Sensor Unit Assembly (Image Color Registration Unit) (p/n 65AA-2950).
7. Worn developer.
Replace developer.
8. The toner spew mylar located just below the magnet roller of the developing unit is misaligned resulting in the developer on the magnet roller not
developing correctly on the sleeve resulting in PS11 (Gamma sensor) not reading the patch correctly.
Remove the developing unit, then loosen the 3 screws located on the toner spew mylar guide allowing the black plastic plate which the mylar is mounted on
to move down. Retighten the 3 screws and reinstall the developing unit.
WARNING : Do not touch the screws for the doc blade because it is factory set.
Description
SC29-11, SC29-12, SC29-13, SC29-14 error codes.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Use the SC29-xx troubleshooting flow chart prior to attempting the other resolutions below.
Notes :
a. To view a PDF, Adobe Readermust be installed. Adobe Readercan be downloaded for free from the Adobeweb site at:
b. To view a PDF requiring an Asian (Chinese, J apanese, Korean) font pack, download one for free from the Adobeweb site at:
http://www.adobe.com/products/acrobat/acrrasianfontpack.html
c. Set PDF viewing percentage value to at least 200% for clarity.
2. The drum carriage is not inserted completely resulting in both the connector on the drum carriage and main body not seating properly, might also have
caused compressed pins.
To ensure that the drum carriage is inserted properly, perform the following:
a. Remove the 3 screws securing the locating pin on the top of the drum carriage.
b. Insert the drum carriage into the machine.
c. After the drum carriage is inserted into the machine, reinstall the locating pin onto the drum carriage.
d. Check Process Detecting Wiring/1, CN361 main body connector for drum carriage (p/n 65AA90100) and Process Detection Wiring/2, CN361 drum
carriage connector (p/n 65AA90110) for dislodged or damaged pins.
3. Failure of drum potential sensor board.
Swap the Drum Potential Sensor Board assembly (HV detecting sensor assembly, page 99, REF NO. 9 whichincludes the board, rail, sensor and wiring)with
another, and if the code changes corresponding to the swapped sensor, replace failed Drum Potential Sensor Board assembly (p/n 65AA-2282). Perform the
36 Mode/Process adjustment/Recall standard Data.
Note : Themodified drum potential sensors can be identified by a RED dot on the transformer located on the circuit board.
4. Setup adjustment performed incorrectly.
Recall the process adjustment standard data and perform the gamma auto adjustment after insuring that the drum cartridges and charge coronas are properly
seated. To recall the process adjustment standard data, perform the following:
a. Power on the copier while pressing 3 and 6 on the control panel.
b. Select PROCESS ADJ USTMENT followed by RECALL STANDARD DATA.
c. Select YES and then perform the normal setup.
5. Failed Drum Bearings.
The Drum Bearings have been changed to enhance drum grounding. Thepart numbers are:
Rear Drum Bearing (p/n 65AA75051) - (2) required.
Front Drum Bearing (p/n 65AA75081) - (1) required.
Description
J 93-01 when duplexing.
Solution
CAUSE: PS19 or the Sensor Flag (actuator)for PS19 has failed.

SOLUTION: Inspect the actuator (located below the decurling roller) for wear. If the tip of the actuator has a sharp point, the actuator is worn and should be
replaced (p/n 65AA 5131 1). If the actuator appears normal, replace PS19 (p/n 08AA 8551 0).
SPECIAL NOTE : Solution provided by Winthrop Chamberlain, KMBS Washington, D.C.
574
CF80
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
575
CF80

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Solution
576
CF80
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

Description
Solution
577
CF80
Description
Solution
Explaining pagination differences between different manufacturers print drivers:
different printers.
laying out the image on the paper. Different image areas can determine different layouts. These factors can result in lines of text being moved on the paper.
If lines are moved enough, or lie close enough to the threshold of the image area, text and page breaks that are rendered in a certain position on one printer
This scenario will occur across the board for printer manufacturers. A Lexmark* is different from an Epson* which is different than an HP*, etc. Obviously, the
output from certain printers will match up closer to some printers than others. The effect of this behavior can be reduced somewhat by printing with a
common standard PDL such as PostScript*. Alternatively, the customer can print with a common driver to both printers. In other words, one can print to the
HP using the Konica driver or vice versa. In this way, at least the driver-generated output would be the same going to both machines. While the output still
may not be exactly the same, the effect of printing to two different printers can be lessened. There may even be different output within the same printer
manufacturer (i.e., Konica IP302 print controller is good, but the IP304 print controller is not; Lexmark Optra K1220 is good, but the Optra T614 is not).
578
CF900
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
579
CF900

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Solution
580
CF900
Description
Solution
Description
There is a pronounced pitch mark when making half-tone copies. This occurs at approximately 195mm from the lead-edge of the page. The width of the band
varies on different copiers and consists of a few lines about 1 mm apart.
Solution
Cause: This may be due to a vibration of the backup blade.
Solution: To minimize this vibration, a damper foam, item number 1144-4891-01, should be installed on the lever of the backup blade. Bulletin 0092
provides the installation procedure.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

581
CF900
Description
How to resolve cyan shift in the side to side direction.
Solution
Verify that the belts located on the outer edges of the transfer drum are properly located in their channels. Also verify that the attraction unit rollers are not
badly worn.
582
CF9001
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
583
CF9001

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Solution
584
CF9001
Description
Solution
Description
Why didn't the flash card download all files to the CF9001?
Solution
When using a single flash card to flash the CF9001, be sure to follow Steps 1-11 outlined on pages D-150 and D-151 in the CF9001 Field Service Manual.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

Description
When installing the copier, the developer mode cannot be accessed.
585
CF9001
Solution
CAUSE: The ADF is in the upright position. This will cause the copier to read that there is paper in the ADF, which prohibits access to the developer mode.
SOLUTION: Lower the ADF.
586
CF910
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
587
CF910

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Error code C3F80 is displayed.
Solution
CAUSE: Printer window is dirty, defective PWB-L.
SOLUTION: Verify the lower printhead window is clean; if so replace PWB L.
588
CF910
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
Description
The control panel indicates an S-2 (S2) error code after image stabilization.
Solution
CAUSE:
Incorrect exposure lamp adjustment value.
SOLUTION:
Replace the lamp with the modified version, part number 1154-6501-01. Refer to bulletin 3023 for details.
Also check that the shading sheet is clean.
Description
How to discharge developer from the CF910. The instructions in the Service Manual do not work.
Solution
CAUSE: The illustration on page D-131 of the CF910 Adjustment manual is incorrect. Both of the jig connectors must be connected to the developer unit
assembly.
SOLUTION: Please refer to Bulletin 3076 .
Description
Part number for the Poly-Switch for the toner hopper.
Solution
SOLUTION:
The part number is 7660-1144-01.
Description
C3F80 at power up.
Solution
CAUSE: The print head optics are dirty of the slit glass is out of position.
SOLUTION: Clean the optics and ensure that the glass is in the proper position.
589
CF911P
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
590
CF911P

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Solution
591
CF911P
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

Description
Fiery* Controller Parts Support.
Solution
Fiery Controller Parts Support
Notes To view the PDF, Acrobat* Reader must be installed. Acrobat Reader can be downloaded for free from the Adobe* Web site at:
592
CF911P
Description
The control panel 'locks up'.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The control panel is showing a picture of the copier therefore either the waste toner bottle is not installed or the waste toner bottle detecting sensor has
failed.
Install the waste toner bottle or replace the waste toner bottle detecting sensor.
2. Dust has entered between the housing and the touch panel. This causes the electrodes to come into contact, locking up the panel.
Please see Bulletin T0186 for the remedy to this condition.
Notes:
a. If the Start key does not work, please see Bulletin 2734 .
b. To view the above PDF(s), Acrobat* Reader must be installed. Acrobat Reader can be downloaded for free from the Adobe* Web site at:
593
CF911PE
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
594
CF911PE

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Solution
595
CF911PE
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

Description
Solution
596
CF911PE
Description
How to upgrade PCMCIA flash cards to a higher flash ROM version.
Solution
To re-write a flash card with a new version of flash ROM data a PCMCIA card slot and the appropriate software are needed.
Note: One program commonly used for this purpose is Elan Memory Card Explorer.
597
CN3101e
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
Description
Publisher.
Solution
Notes:
598
CN3101e
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Description
Does the CN3101e support the .TIF format when scanning?
Solution
SOLUTION: The CN3101e does not support the .TIF format when scanning.
Description
How to completely remove a printer driver in MicrosoftWindows 2000 or Windows XP.
Solution
When removing a printer from the Printers folder, the printer driver file is not removed from the hard disk drive. This following describes a procedure to use if a
printer driver file is corrupted:
WINDOWS 2000
WARNING : If using Registry Editor incorrectly, serious problems may occur that will require reinstallation of the operating system. Microsoft/KMBS cannot
guarantee that problems can be solved that result from using Registry Editor incorrectly. Use Registry Editor with extreme caution.
1. Remove the printer using the Printers folder in MicrosoftWindows 2000.
2. In MicrosoftWindows 2000, in Control Panel, double-click Administrative Tools, double-click Services, and then stop the Spooler service.
3. Run Registry Editor (Regedt32.exe) and go to the following subkey (note that this is all one path, which has been wrapped for readability):
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Control\Print\Environments\Windows NT x86\Drivers\Version-3\
Note : Version-3 is MicrosoftWindows 2000, and is the name of the printer to be removed.
4. Note the values on the right and write down the file names.
5. With the printer driver key selected, click Delete on the Edit menu.
6. Go to the following directory and delete the printer driver files noted in step 4:
%SystemRoot%\System32\Spool\Drivers\

Note :If unable to delete the files and folders in the above directory structure after stopping the spooler service because of an error message that the files
are in use (such as, Rasddui.dll), set the startup type for the Spooler service to Disabled, restart the computer, and then attempt to delete the files and folders
again. After deleting the files, restore the Spooler startup to Automatic.
7. In MicrosoftWindows 2000, in Control Panel, double-click Administrative Tools, double-click Services, and then start the Spooler service.
8. If reinstalling a printer, use the Printers folder.
9. Delete the %windir%\inf\oem?.inf file that is associated with the removed printer driver. This removes the printer from the printer selection list when adding
new printers.
Note : In addition to the steps listed above, it may be necessary to delete the printer's associated unidriver (Rasdd.dll, Pscript.dll, or Plotter.dll). If printing
has been initialized or if a process is using this file, it will be locked open and cannot be deleted. The file can be renamed or the system can be restarted to
free up the driver. Refer to the Printer.inf file to see which unidriver is used by a particular printer.
WINDOWS XP
599
CN3101e
Microsoft Windows XP adds a user interface feature to delete driver files so the steps for MicrosoftWindows 2000 are no longer necessary. To delete
printer driver files in MicrosoftWindows XP:
1. Click Start, and then click Printers and Faxes.
2. On the File menu, click Server Properties.
3. On the Drivers tab, click the printer driver to be deleted, and then click Remove.
Description
After loading Service Pack 4 on a Microsoft* Windows 2000 client, the CN3101e print driver no longer works. Each time the driver is accessed, an error
results.
Solution
CAUSE: Incorrect version or corrupt printer driver.
1. Delete the driver
2. Re-boot the client
3. Load the CN3101e driver version 1.18 or higher.
Description
How to divide mail merge into separate jobs based on name or address. Mail Merge staples all pages together.
Solution
To divide mail merge into separate jobs based on name or address, follow the instructions in the attached file.
600
CN3102e
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Print jobs using QuarkXpress 7.01 or higher will not print to any Fierycontroller.

Solution
CAUSE: There is a compatibility issue with QuarkXpress 7.01 and 7.02 when printing through any Fiery-based MacintoshOS 10.4x print driver. The
issue is related to the CUPS filter used by the Fierydriver and how CUPS is accessed from QuarkXpress 7.01x.

SOLUTION:There are EFIdrivers to correct this issuefor the IC-402 and the IC-406 and EFI will be updating drivers on a regular basis.If a driver has not been
updated or will not get this upgrade, EFI has released an updated CUPS filter that replaces the one used by their driver. This is a universal installer
(attached)that will cover all of the Fierydrivers that are installed.
Install this filter after the Fierydriver has been installed to overwrite the older version. This filter will also work with Intel Macintoshmachines.
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
2. Please be sure to refer to the attached Release Notes for the IC-402 and IC-406. To viewthe PDFs, Adobe Readermust be installed. Adobe Reader
can be downloaded for free from the Adobeweb site at: http://www.adobe.com/products/acrobat/readstep2.html
3.Ifa customer has a controller other than the IC-402 or the IC-406, then please establish a new problem ticket and reference this solution ID number
(TAUS0657485EN0*).This will allowcommunication ofthe field impactconcerningprovision of the drivers/installer.
SPECIAL NOTE : Solution contribution by Bill Ehmke, ESS/SSD
Description
Solution

1xx Informational

2xx Success

3xx Redirection

4xx Client Error

5xx Server Error

601
CN3102e
Description
How to print to a CN3102e with CopyTrack* turned ON without having to enter the account number.
Solution
To print to a CN3102e with CopyTrack turned ON without having to enter the account number, perform the following:
1. Select START, SETTINGS, and PRINTERS on your workstation.
2. Right click on your printer driver and choose PROPERTIES.
3. On the GENERAL tab select PRINTING PREFERENCES.
4. On the FIERY PRINTING tab select USER IDENTIFICATION and enter the account number.
5. Check ACCOUNT CONTROL and click on OK twice to save.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
Description
When installing system software to the CN3102e (Fiery* X3e ), the boot.efi and system.efi files do not load. It seems to take a very long time to load the files
and a time-out error message is indicated.
Solution
CAUSE: The size of the files being downloaded is very large.
SOLUTION: EFI* has provided a utility called the Fiery Parallel Port Drivers to reduce the download times. Refer to bulletin 4129 for details. Carefully
review the system requirements and driver installation procedure.
Notes:
1. If a time-out error still appears, try loading both programs by adding "lpt1" to the end of the command line.
Example: In paragraph 6 of bulletin 4129 the typed in command should read:
compat.exe -p c:\boot.efi lpt1
In paragraph 7 the command should read:
ecp.exe -p c:\system.efi lpt1
With the change to the two load commands, the system installation should be successful.
2. To view the above PDF(s), Acrobat* Reader must be installed. Acrobat Reader can be downloaded for free from the Adobe* Web site at:
Description
How to setup Scan to FTP server.
Solution
To setup Scan to FTP server, perform the following:
1. Enter the TCP/IP* address of the CN3102e in your web browser.
2. Click on the Scan tab to set up a One-Touch key.
3. Select the Index number you wish to set the One-Touch key under and then click on an open box.
4. On the destination screen that opens, select Scan to FTP Server and click on the Next box.
5. Name the destination name with the name you want on the machine display in the destination name field.
602
CN3102e
6. Input the remaining connection information as supplied by the network administrator.
7. Click on Create to finish creating the mailbox and making it available as a one touch key.
Description
Part number for the CN3102e hard disk.
Solution
CN3102e hard disk (p/n 7665-0275-25).
Description
Cannot select IMPOSE for Fiery* DocBuilder* Pro from Command WorkStation*. The DocBuilder Pro dongle is connected to the local workstation parallel
port. Raster data has been removed.
Solution
CAUSE: The file was printed using the PCL* driver.
SOLUTION: Imposition is only supported for PostScript*. Send the file using the PostScript driver.
603
CN3102Pro
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description

Solution

Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution

1xx Informational

2xx Success

3xx Redirection

4xx Client Error

5xx Server Error

604
CN3102Pro
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
Description
Part number for the Kodak* gray scale calibration chart used on Fiery* controllers.
Solution
Gray Scale Strip (p/n 10012662).
Description
License Verification failed with DocBuilder Pro dongle on a Dell workstation.
Solution
CAUSE: Dell computers do not have the correct hardlock driver installed for the dongle to be recognized or there is a driver conflict with LPT1.
SOLUTION: Download and install the latest hardlock driver forthe requiredoperating system. Go to http://www.aladdin.com/support/hardlock/index.asp to
access the files.
Description
Publisher.
Solution
Notes:
605
CN3102Pro
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
ColorWise Pro Tools causes a J ava error when launched.
Solution
CAUSE: An incompatible version of J ava is installed on the computer.

SOLUTION: Remove the existing version and install J ava 5, version 2. It is available with the Command WorkStation installation or from the J ava
download archives .
606
Create!
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Create!flash* information.
Solution
Create!flash spec sheet
Notes:
1. To view the above link, Acrobat* Reader must be installed. Acrobat Reader can be downloaded for free from the Adobe* Web site at:
2. [[Create!flash web page| URL http://www.createform.com/products/flashadvantages.htm]]
Description
AS/400* Create!Print Evaluation results for IP421.
Solution
AS/400 Create!Print Evaluation results for IP421. .
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Back side prints upside-down when printing from Create!form.
Solution
CAUSE:The output is specification due to first page output time.

SOLUTION:There may be a correction in the future, however the current recommendation is to replace the MFP with a 'Mosel' or 'Thames' model. Then use
the following procedure to fix back side printing:
Select utility button => User Settings => Print Setting => Basic Setting => Printing Direction Adjust. Select "Control Adjustment" to correct the
issue.
607
Create!
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
Description
Test Synopsis for Create!form*, Create!form Server and Create!print* printing sample forms/data and a custom form/data from Microsoft* Windows 98,
Windows 2000 Professional, Windows NT 4.0 Workstation using Windows NT 4.0 Server as the Create!form Server.
Solution
Description
Solution
Description
As an alternative to the HD107, Konica Minolta is offering a 1GB or 2GB compact flash card and PCMCIA adapter for the IP432.
Solution
The 2GB compact flash card is recommended for most cases, as the 1GB compact flash card may not have enough space if the customer creates large jobs.
Note: The IP-432 system code must be upgarded to a minimum version of 25.11.1 to support the use of CF card in place of the HD-107.
Note: This solution is not applicable if Create!Form or Create!Flash program is being used. You must use the HD107 with this application.
Note: To view the PDF, Acrobat* Reader must be installed. Acrobat Reader can be downloaded for free from the Adobe*
608
Creo Darwin
Description
Solution
609
CS Remote Care
Description
Troubleshooting vCare/CS Remote Care E-mail communication failure.
Solution
In the attached bizhubvCare CS Remote Care Email Communication Troubleshooting Guide1.1 are troubleshooting methods and procedures to resolve
vCare Email Communication issues.
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
vCare (CS Remote Care) E-mail Setup Instruction Guides for all supported MFPs and E-mail troubleshooting procedures.
Solution
The attacheddocument includes all E-mail Setup Instruction Guides for each individual supported MFP and E-mail troubleshooting instructions. If setting up
an MFP for vCare, please refer to the E-mail Setup Instruction Guide for that particular model.
Additionally, thedocumentis avaialble via the Konica Minolta Download Selector. Access the Selector from SSD Web Support (CS Expert Support) by clicking
on 'Download MSDS, Drivers, Firmware and more'.
SPECIAL NOTE : Solution contribution by Mark Kemp, ESS/SSD
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Cannot receive CS Remote Care host E-mail or perform CS Remote Care communication test via Sendmail\Cyrus or equivalent E-mail server environment.
ISPs will be using these SMTP and POP3 mail servers on UNIX or LINUX platforms.
Solution
CAUSE: The bizhub PRO 1050/IC-611 and bizhub PRO 920/IC-203 will not complete the three POP3 requests when retrieving the E-mail attachment sent
from CS Remote Care host system or an E-mail communication test.

1. Verify the engine SMTP and POP3 account settings are correct by performing a test using the same settings from an E-mail client.
2. Download the IC-611 firmware and version 30-SBK0 (1050 p130sbk0p.exe), IC-203 firmware version 30-SBK0 (ic203 p120sbk0p.exe), and respective
modification notices, whichare available via the Konica Minolta Download Selector.
610
CS Remote Care
Note : The latest version firmware and system software is available via the Konica Minolta Download Selector. Access the Selector from SSD Web Support
Description
RX/TX Communication Test for bizhub 600/750 CS Remote Carecannot be successfully performed until after a successful setup E-mail has been received.
As a result, if the communication test is unsuccessful, a Communication log for troubleshooting cannot be printed out.
Solution
CAUSE: Firmware update required.

SOLUTION: Special firmware (57AA-0100-GCH-30-000, version 30-CH) for the bizhub 600/750 has been released to address this issue.The RX/TX
Communication Test can now be performed normally andit is no longer necessary for the bizhub 600/750 to first receive a successful setup E-mail. This
function will be included in the next major firmware release.
Note :The latest version firmwareor system software is available via the Konica Minolta Download Selector. Access the Selector from SSD Web Support
SPECIAL NOTE : Solution contribution by Rick Veale, ESS/SSD
Description
Supporting bizhub vCare.
Solution
Initial setup documents for vCare support are attached. The attacheddocuments were sent to all the BSCs. This information is for the BSCs only. It does not
apply to dealers.
Notes :
1. Please be aware that the bizhub C203/C253/C353/C451/C550/C650 support one-way communication.
SPECIAL NOTE : Solution contribution by Greg Lantowski, Production Print/SSD
Description
An MFP (which has been authorized to be set up for vCare) is unsuccessful in communicating with the vCare Host system via E-mail.
Solution
If an MFP (which has been authorized to be set up for vCare) to communicate with the vCare Host system via E-mail, is unsuccessful in communicating, first
confirm whether the MFP has been configured to communicate by one-way or two-way E-mail.
Note : All MFPs that support one way E-mail communication also support two-way E-mail configuration.
To confirm if the SMTP and/or POP3 ports are open from the customers network to communicate with the external vCare E-mail Server, perform a Telnet
test.

If one-way E-mail, has been configured on the MFP perform a SMTP Telnet test only.
If two-way E-mail, has been configured on the MFP perform SMTP and POP3 Telnet test.
If the Telnet test is unsuccessful, consult the IT Administrator at the customer site to inquire why the POP3 and/or SMTP ports are not open.
Note : Refer to the vCare Setup E-mail instructions for the particular MFP being configured, which can be downloaded from the
mykonicaminolta.comDownload Selector.
If Telnet test succeeds, then Troubleshoot the E-mail Communication issue. This will be similar to Troubleshooting a scan to E-mail issue.
If an E-mail communication error occurs, it should display on the MFP panel.
Notes :
1.Refer to the vCare Setup E-mail instructions for the particular MFP being configured, for the instructions on printing out the vCare E-mail communication
log.
2. Have the error code and communication log available when contacting support and ready to upload to the ticket.
3. vCare (CSRC) E-mail error codes are documented in each MFP Field Service Manual.
4. Perform a search for CS Remote and locate the E-mail Error codes for that model.
5. Please see attached documentation. To viewthe PDF, Adobe Readermust be installed. Adobe Readercan be downloaded for free from the Adobe
web site at: http://www.adobe.com/products/acrobat/readstep2.html .
Description
What are the three main components of CSRC?
Solution
1. Communication Server - provide communication mechanism between the MFP and CSRC System.
2. Database Server - contains CSRC database. KM/MMIF core database as well as the database for the Web Application as well as other modules. SQL
Server or MSDE 2000 (included with CSRC install) can be currently used.
3. Web Application Server - main interface for users accessing CSRC host system.
611
CS Remote Care
Description
Are three separate servers required for CSRC?
Solution
No, three separate servers are not required for CSRC. The optimal server configuration will depend on the number of devices the CSRC system is monitoring
as well as network and operating considerations. There is a (All in One) CSRC installation.
The Web Server and Database Server can be installed on one Server and the Communication Server on another
The Web , Database and Communication Server can also be installed on 3 separate Servers
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
612
Data Administrator
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
613
Di151
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
614
Di151

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
C14A3 error code during initialization/warm-up.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1.Failed PWB-I.
Inspect the connections for the exposure lamp and interface board and ensure that proper contact takes place. Remove PWB-I from the main body and
inspect the connection for pin damage. If problem persists, replace PWB-I (p/n 11YA-9010).

2. Failed CCD.
Ensure that the connections from the CCD to PWB(I) are making proper contact. Reseat the connections as necessary. If problem persists, replace the CCD
(p/n 11YA-6010).
Description
Solution
Notes :
615
Di151
Description
Solution

1xx Informational

2xx Success

3xx Redirection

4xx Client Error

5xx Server Error

Description
How to clear a C-0500 error code.
Solution
Hold down the [Clear/Stop] key while turning on the power.
For the Di151f, hold down the [0] key while turning on the power.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
616
Di151
Description
The LCD displays erroneous characters and the control panel locks up. The Di151 works properly without the fax unit.
Solution
CAUSE: Poor connection.
SOLUTION:
Please check the harness from the control panel to the PWB-I. Also make sure the harness runs through the hole on the control panel, not behind, because
this could pinch the harness. Check for problems with the connectors and for continuity between both ends. Please refer to bulletin 3820 .
617
Di151f
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
618
Di151f

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Solution

619
Di151f

1xx Informational

2xx Success

3xx Redirection

4xx Client Error

5xx Server Error

Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

620
Di151f
2.Select File.
3. SelectPrint.
6. Select OK.
8. Select File.
9. Select Print.
11. Select OK.
Description
Are Konica Minolta MFPs compatible with Category 6 cable standard?
Solution
Konica Minolta MFPs are fully compatible with Category 6 cable standard.
Category 6 cable is a cable standard for Gigabit Ethernet and other network protocols that is backward compatible with the Category 5/5e and Category 3
cable standards.
Cat-6 features more stringent specifications for crosstalk and system noise. The cable standard is suitable for 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX and 1000BASE-T
(Gigabit Ethernet) connections and it provides performance of up to 250MHz.
621
Di152
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
622
Di152

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Solution

623
Di152

1xx Informational

2xx Success

3xx Redirection

4xx Client Error

5xx Server Error

Description
Code C14A3.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1.The V-Mirror assembly or the CCD harness connector has become dislodged.
Check the V-Mirror assembly for a dislodged mirror and check the CCD harness connector on the main board (the harness is identified by the silver mesh
covering which is routed to the rear of the machine to the main CB).
Note : Code C14A3 indicates: Start of Scan (SOS) indexing failed due to Exposure intensity.

2. Fuse (F1) is open on the Inverter board.
Check F1 and replace the Inverter board (p/n 27AE-8310) as necessary.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Description
624
Di152
How to reset C-0500.
Solution
To reset a C-0500 fuser code, turn ON the power switch while holding down the Stop key.
Description
Developer agitator screw breakage. "oL" may be indicated even though the code signifies an open cover or door.
Solution
CAUSE: The material composition of theoriginal developer agitator screw is plastic, which has a higher tendency to break, especially in adverse conditions
such as low temperature environments where the developer may become more difficult to agitate.

SOLUTION: A more durable developer agitator screw consisting of a reshaped, metal shaft is available. See attached 7115/7118 Technical Bulletin #3 for
details.
625
Di152f
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
626
Di152f

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Solution

627
Di152f

1xx Informational

2xx Success

3xx Redirection

4xx Client Error

5xx Server Error

Description
Solution
Description
Machine indicates "Talking" on the display and never comes to ready.
Solution
CAUSE: A Failed NCU or fax CB.
SOLUTION: Replace the NCU or fax CB.
Note: This message is normal if another device is using the phone line or the hand set is in use.
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
628
Di152f

details.
Description
Current firmware for the Di152f.
Solution
Refer to Bulletins #4226 and #3069b
629
Di1610
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
630
Di1610

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Solution

631
Di1610

1xx Informational

2xx Success

3xx Redirection

4xx Client Error

5xx Server Error

Description
Solution


bizhub 161f

p/n 4980122801

PWB-P (FAX/PCL)

Di1610 /Di1610f

p/n 4980101702

PWB-P

to ESS:
Windsor, CT 06095
Description
Part number for EEPROM U-39.
Solution
EEPROM(U39) will not be supplied as a spare part. Use the old EEPROM when replacing the PWB-P board as mentioned in the Service Manual.
If a new EEPROM is needed, send complete service data for the machine showing the serial number and meter reading together with the defective EEPROM
to KMBSESS department at the following address:
Windsor, CT 06095
Note : The new EEPROM will be programmed in J apan and can take up to four to five weeks.
632
Di1610
Description
What is the part number for the EEPROM on the mainboard?
Solution
The EEPROM is not supplied as an individual part because the chip contains specific information for the machine. The EEPROM must be removed from the
old board and installed on the new board.
633
Di1610fp
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
634
Di1610fp

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Part number of PCL* board.
Solution
PCL board (p/n 4980-1021-01).
Description
635
Di1610fp
Solution

1xx Informational

2xx Success

3xx Redirection

4xx Client Error

5xx Server Error

Description
Solution


bizhub 161f

p/n 4980122801

PWB-P (FAX/PCL)

Di1610 /Di1610f

p/n 4980101702

PWB-P

to ESS:
Windsor, CT 06095
Description
Unit keeps rebooting (restarting). Display indicates PLEASE WAIT. Will not allow faxes or copying.
636
Di1610fp
Solution
CAUSE: Failure of PWB-P.
SOLUTION: If a NIC is installed, remove the NIC and verify operation. If reboot does not occur, replace PWB-P (p/n 4980-1019-02).
Description
Solution
Windsor, CT 06095
637
Di1610p
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
638
Di1610p

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Solution

639
Di1610p

1xx Informational

2xx Success

3xx Redirection

4xx Client Error

5xx Server Error

Description
Solution
Windsor, CT 06095
Description
Solution
Description
Black squares on the display panel at power up and cannot clear.
Solution
CAUSE: The PBW-P board has failed.

SOLUTION: Replace the PWB-P board (p/n 4980-1016-01- Di1610, 4980-1017-01- Di1610p and 4980-1019-02- Di1610fp).
640
Di181
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
641
Di181

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Solution

642
Di181

1xx Informational

2xx Success

3xx Redirection

4xx Client Error

5xx Server Error

Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
Description
What is an M4 code on a Di181 and how can it be reset?
Solution
SOLUTION: The Di181 gives the M4 display when the drum count reaches 80k. The drum counter must be reset. Please refer to page S-18 in service
manual for details.
643
Di181
Description
Are Macintosh drivers available for the Pi1800?
Solution
It is not possible to print from a Macintosh because the Pi1800 is a Windows GDI printer.
644
Di1810
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
645
Di1810

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Solution

646
Di1810

1xx Informational

2xx Success

3xx Redirection

4xx Client Error

5xx Server Error

Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Paper size(s) and/or paper tray(s) not recognized or recognized with the incorrect paper size indicated.
Solution
CAUSE: Paper cassette (tray) is cracked.

SOLUTION: Install the cassette repair countermeasure as explained in the attached Parts Modification Notices and associated Applied Product Information.
Notes :
2. To viewattached Exceldocumentation, MicrosoftExcelor ExcelViewer must be installed. ExcelViewer 2003 (9.9MB) can be obtained free from
Description
Solution
647
Di1810
Description
Solution
Description
Intermittent jamming from paper cassette(s).
Solution

CAUSE: Paper cassettemoves forward due tomachine vibration. The cassette holder is worn/weak and t he "holding power" hasdecreasedover time.

SOLUTION: The shape of holder has been changed strengthening the power of cassette hold and by installing a Stop Ring (p/n 4348620600).
Install thecassette holdercountermeasure to preventthe cassette from unlockingas explained in the attached Parts Modification Notice and associated
Applied Product Information.To viewa PDF, Adobe Readermust be installed. Adobe Readercan be downloaded for free from the Adobeweb site at:
648
Di1810f
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
649
Di1810f

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Solution

650
Di1810f

1xx Informational

2xx Success

3xx Redirection

4xx Client Error

5xx Server Error

Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Paper size(s) and/or paper tray(s) not recognized or recognized with the incorrect paper size indicated.
Solution
CAUSE: Paper cassette (tray) is cracked.

SOLUTION: Install the cassette repair countermeasure as explained in the attached Parts Modification Notices and associated Applied Product Information.
Notes :
2. To viewattached Exceldocumentation, MicrosoftExcelor ExcelViewer must be installed. ExcelViewer 2003 (9.9MB) can be obtained free from
Description
Solution
651
Di1810f
Description
Solution
Description
Intermittent jamming from paper cassette(s).
Solution

CAUSE: Paper cassettemoves forward due tomachine vibration. The cassette holder is worn/weak and t he "holding power" hasdecreasedover time.

SOLUTION: The shape of holder has been changed strengthening the power of cassette hold and by installing a Stop Ring (p/n 4348620600).
Install thecassette holdercountermeasure to preventthe cassette from unlockingas explained in the attached Parts Modification Notice and associated
Applied Product Information.To viewa PDF, Adobe Readermust be installed. Adobe Readercan be downloaded for free from the Adobeweb site at:
652
Di1811p
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
653
Di1811p

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Solution

654
Di1811p

1xx Informational

2xx Success

3xx Redirection

4xx Client Error

5xx Server Error

Description
Solution
Description
NIC F/W ver.2.07 for NC6 and KN419.
Solution
See DLBT0501588EN00 for details.
Description
Comm Error: Cannot Connect to FTP Proxy Server message. Unable to Scan to FTP.
Solution
CAUSE: Folder destination is not designated correctly.
SOLUTION: When setting up FTP Scanning with PageScope Light, use only the forward slash (/) as the destination. The scan will go to the folder
designated on the FTP server.
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
655
Di1811p
Description
How to disable auto shutoff.
Solution
To disable auto shutoff, perform the following:
1. Press the [Utility] key.
2. Press the down arrow three times to select 'Admin. Management' and press the [Yes] key.
3. Use the 10-key pad to input the administrator access number.
4. Press the [1] key to select 'Auto Shut Off.'
5. Use the left or right [Auto/Photo] arrow keys to select 'Enable' and press the [Yes] key.
6. Select the 'Machine Setting' menu.
7. Press the [3] key to select 'Auto Shut off.'
8. Use the left or right [Auto/Photo] arrow keys to select 'Off' and press the [Yes] key.
656
Di183
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
657
Di183

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Solution

658
Di183

1xx Informational

2xx Success

3xx Redirection

4xx Client Error

5xx Server Error

Description
C03FF.
Solution
5. Press Clear.
Description
How to reset the solid Oil Can light indication for service.
Solution
The solid Oil Can light for service can be cleared by resetting the Developer Counter.
Description
Code C14A3.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1.The V-Mirror assembly or the CCD harness connector has become dislodged.
Check the V-Mirror assembly for a dislodged mirror and check the CCD harness connector on the main board (the harness is identified by the silver mesh
covering which is routed to the rear of the machine to the main CB).
Note : Code C14A3 indicates: Start of Scan (SOS) indexing failed due to Exposure intensity.

2. Fuse (F1) is open on the Inverter board.
Check F1 and replace the Inverter board (p/n 27AE-8310) as necessary.
Description
Solution
659
Di183
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
660
Di183f
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
661
Di183f

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Solution

662
Di183f

1xx Informational

2xx Success

3xx Redirection

4xx Client Error

5xx Server Error

Description
C03FF.
Solution
5. Press Clear.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
663
Di183f
Description
Solution

details.
Description
M2 is indicated after completing a PM.
Solution
CAUSE: The "SUPPLIES LIFE COUNTER" needs to be cleared.
SOLUTION: Enter the tech rep mode and scroll to CLEAR DATA mode. Enter the CLEAR DATA mode and scroll to "SUPPLIES LIFE COUNTER". Press
the clear key to clear the counter.
664
Di200
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
665
Di200

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Solution

666
Di200

1xx Informational

2xx Success

3xx Redirection

4xx Client Error

5xx Server Error

Description
Paper is exiting the copier with a curl or wrinkle.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Incorrect fuser temperature.
Adjust the fuser temperature as shown in bulletin 3890 . If the fuser temperature cannot be adjusted, please replace PWB-A, as referred to in the bulletin.
2. Incorrect tension on the paper.
Try removing the right and left lower exit rollers from the lower exit roller shaft, leaving the two center rollers intact. This will change the tension on the paper
in many cases and reduce the curl/wrinkling.
Note: To view the above PDF(s), Acrobat* Reader must be installed. Acrobat Reader can be downloaded for free from the Adobe* web site at:
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
667
Di200
Description
PROBLEM: Paper take-up jams from all paper sources.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Faulty M2.
2. Faulty PWB-A.
To determine the cause, perform the following:
Check if M2 is driving, if not check PJ 5A pin 1 for a change from logic high to logic low. If no change is detected, replace PWB-A. If a change is present
replace the motor.
Description
Machine shows "abort" when trying to copy or at power on.
Solution
Verify the routing of the fiber optic cables. If the radius of the cable where it curves is too tight, the light will refract causing a corrupt signal. The machine will
then try to reset, as it sees this as a malfunction.
Other possible causes are listed in the Field Service Manual on pages T-61 through T-63 .
Note:
To view the above PDF, Acrobat* Reader must be installed. Acrobat Reader can be downloaded for free from the Adobe* web site at:
668
Di200f
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
669
Di200f

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Solution

670
Di200f

1xx Informational

2xx Success

3xx Redirection

4xx Client Error

5xx Server Error

Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Description
AFR17, originals of an irregular size are cut off when run through the feeder.
Solution
CAUSE: The IR erasure width setting is too high, causing the machine to erase part of the original image.
SOLUTION: Set the IR erasure width setting to 0mm. This is accomplished by entering the tech rep mode and selecting tech rep choice. Select IR erasure
width, clear the value using the clear key of the control panel and enter 0. Press enter to lock in the setting.
Refer to Bulletin 3352 for additional information.
[[http://www.adobe.com/products/acrobat/readstep2.html| URL
671
Di200f
Description
Does the Di200f support TWAIN scanning?
Solution
TWAIN scanning is not supported on this model.
Description
The AFR-17 is not operating (no power).
Solution
CAUSE: The take-up motor (M2) and PWB-A are damaged causing the document feeder not to operate.
SOLUTION: PWB-A has been modified to prevent the brake current from overloading IC12 and damaging take-up motor (M2) and PWB-A. Replace the
take-up motor (p/n 4490-6101-01) and PWB-A (p/n 4490-0102-02). Please refer to bulletin 3895 .
672
Di2010
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
673
Di2010

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Solution

674
Di2010

1xx Informational

2xx Success

3xx Redirection

4xx Client Error

5xx Server Error

Description
Not feeding or misfeeding from paper trays.
Solution
CAUSE: Worn friction plate sheet in the paper tray.

SOLUTION: Replace thefrictionplate. Please seeattached Bulletin Number5881.
Description
Error messages C-2557 and COFxx.
Solution
CAUSE: After drum was replaced, a developer change was not performed.
1. Select Tech Rep mode => Counter => Special Parts =>PC Life.
2. Press the Clear Key to clear the counter value.
3. Turn OFF the main power switch.
4. Open the righthanddoor.
5. Remove the Imaging unit.
6. Remove four screws (silver) and disassemble the Photo Conductor Unit and the Developing Unit.
7. Replace the Photo Conductor.
8. Remove three screws and the Developer Scattering Plate.
9. Remove the Toner Supply Port.
10. Remove the Developer.
11 Set the developerwhile rotating the gear in the direction of the arrow.
12. Reinstall the Toner Supply Port.
13.Using three screws, secure the developer scattering prevention plate.
14. Install the four screws to the secure the Photo Conductor Unit and Developing Unit.
15. Install the Image Unit in the copier.
16. TurnON the main power switch.
17. Select Tech Rep. Mode => Function => F8 and press the Start Key.

After replacing the Developing unit, developer, drum and resetting the counters, perform the following:
1. Press utility.
2. Meter count or check details button.
3. Enter the Tech Rep mode: stop, 0, 0, stop, 0, 1.
4. Select Tech Rep Choice mode.
5. Select printer tab.
6. Select ATDC sensor gain.
7. Set valueto 165-170.
8. Back all the way out to the Ready screen, power machine OFF/ON and replenish toner through the User Management screen.
Description
Erratic operation; unable to print, copy, and scan; machine will lock up or reset.
Solution
CAUSE:FailedMFB3 board.

SOLUTION: Replace the MFB3 board (p/n 4384 1048 01).
675
Di2010
Description
Abort code 0x00f00201.
Solution
CAUSE: Machine memory is corrupt.

SOLUTION: Perform a BBram clear.
WARNING : Performing a BBram clear resets all values on the machine.
Description
Solution
Description
Machine indicates "Please wait" on the LCD screen and never comes to a ready state.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Poor connection between the ROM board and the MFB3 board. Re-seat the ROM board to the MFB3 board.
2. Defective SU-2. Please replace the SU-2.
676
Di2010f
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
677
Di2010f

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Solution

678
Di2010f

1xx Informational

2xx Success

3xx Redirection

4xx Client Error

5xx Server Error

Description
Solution

Description
Solution

1. Press utility.
Description
Solution

679
Di2010f
Description
Solution

Description
Solution
Description
C1038 code is displayed cannot be cleared.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Poor connection between PWB-A and the MFB3 board. Re-seat connection between the two boards.
2. Defective MFB3 board. Replace MFB3 board.
3. Defective PWB-A. Replace PWB-A
680
Di250
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
681
Di250

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Solution

682
Di250

1xx Informational

2xx Success

3xx Redirection

4xx Client Error

5xx Server Error

Description
Solution
Description
After installing a new print head the images on copies are enlarged (stretched).
Solution
CAUSE:
The wrong print head has been installed. The print head for the Di250/Di250f is not interchangable with the Di350/Di350f print head.
SOLUTION:
Install the print head for the Di250/Di250f.
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Description
AF6, constantly jamming.
Solution
CAUSE: A failed ACR board or paper present sensor.
683
Di250
SOLUTION: Check the connections to the ACR board and the photosensor. If jamming persists, replace the ACR board and/or the paper present sensor.
Description
C0500 error code is displayed.
Solution
CAUSE: This occurs when the fuser lamp terminals become corroded, causing a poor connection to the fuser lamp.
SOLUTION: To correct this problem, several parts are now available to convert the fuser unit from a terminal type fuser lamp, to a wired type fuser lamp. See
bulletin 3051 .
Note:
684
Di250f
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
685
Di250f

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Solution

686
Di250f

1xx Informational

2xx Success

3xx Redirection

4xx Client Error

5xx Server Error

Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Description
Can the separate scan function be used when performing scan to FTP or scan to E-mail?
Solution
The separate scan function can only be used in the copy mode. It will not work with scan to FTP or scan to E-mail.
Description
Exclamation point appears in the lower corner of the LCD.

687
Di250f

Solution
CAUSE: The hard drive is not formatted or formatted properly.

SOLUTION: Format the hard drive for proper operation.
Description
Solution
688
Di251
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
689
Di251

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Solution

690
Di251

1xx Informational

2xx Success

3xx Redirection

4xx Client Error

5xx Server Error

Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
Description
Password for PageScope Light.
Solution
691
Di251
The password for PageScope Light is 'sysadm'.
Description
How to enable/disable the banner page generated by the Pi3502 NIC.
Solution
Banner page settings can be accessed through Telnet using the following procedure:
1. From a workstation DOS prompt type telnet then a space followed by the controller's IP address.
2. Login =sysadm Password =sysadm (will not be displayed)
3. Enter 2 for LPD printers.
4. Enter 2 for banners. This will toggle between Disable and Enable.
5. Press enter then type E for exit and press enter.
6. Enter 1 then press enter.
7. Manually reboot copier/controller.
692
Di2510
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
693
Di2510

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Solution

694
Di2510

1xx Informational

2xx Success

3xx Redirection

4xx Client Error

5xx Server Error

Description
Solution

Description
Solution

1. Press utility.
Description
Solution

695
Di2510
Description
How to reset a C0500 code.
Solution
The C0500 code can be reset following the steps below:
1. Press the soft initialization on the right side of the control panel.
2. When the dot appears on the LCD after reboot, press the number 3 key.
3. The mode will change to the initialization screen.
4. Choose the selection for trouble reset.
5. After reboot the code will be cleared.
Description
Solution

Description
Paper jamming when feeding from top tray.
Solution
CAUSE: Excessive lubrication in the feed clutches. Lubrication is to prevent oxidation during shipment, not to aid in clutch operation
SOLUTION: Clean the feed clutches and check for proper paper feed.
Note: To view the above PDF(s), Acrobat* Reader must be installed. Acrobat Reader can be downloaded for free from the Adobe* Web site at:

696
Di2510f
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
697
Di2510f

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Solution

698
Di2510f

1xx Informational

2xx Success

3xx Redirection

4xx Client Error

5xx Server Error

Description
Solution

Description
Solution

1. Press utility.
Description
Solution

699
Di2510f
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

Description
Solution
700
Di251f
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
701
Di251f

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Solution

702
Di251f

1xx Informational

2xx Success

3xx Redirection

4xx Client Error

5xx Server Error

Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
703
Di251f
Description

Solution

704
Di30
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
705
Di30

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Solution
706
Di30
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
Explaining pagination differences between different manufacturers print drivers:
different printers.
laying out the image on the paper. Different image areas can determine different layouts. These factors can result in lines of text being moved on the paper.
If lines are moved enough, or lie close enough to the threshold of the image area, text and page breaks that are rendered in a certain position on one printer
This scenario will occur across the board for printer manufacturers. A Lexmark* is different from an Epson* which is different than an HP*, etc. Obviously, the
output from certain printers will match up closer to some printers than others. The effect of this behavior can be reduced somewhat by printing with a
common standard PDL such as PostScript*. Alternatively, the customer can print with a common driver to both printers. In other words, one can print to the
HP using the Konica driver or vice versa. In this way, at least the driver-generated output would be the same going to both machines. While the output still
may not be exactly the same, the effect of printing to two different printers can be lessened. There may even be different output within the same printer
707
Di30
manufacturer (i.e., Konica IP302 print controller is good, but the IP304 print controller is not; Lexmark Optra K1220 is good, but the Optra T614 is not).
Description
Solution
different printers.
708
Di3010
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
709
Di3010

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Solution

710
Di3010

1xx Informational

2xx Success

3xx Redirection

4xx Client Error

5xx Server Error

Description
Solution

Description
Solution

1. Press utility.
Description
Solution

711
Di3010
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

Description
Solution
712
Di3010f
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
713
Di3010f

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Solution

714
Di3010f

1xx Informational

2xx Success

3xx Redirection

4xx Client Error

5xx Server Error

Description
Solution

Description
Solution

1. Press utility.
Description
Solution

715
Di3010f
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

Description
Solution
716
Di350
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
717
Di350

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Solution

718
Di350

1xx Informational

2xx Success

3xx Redirection

4xx Client Error

5xx Server Error

Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Description
C0070 codes displayed.
Solution
If the machine displays C0070 codes, check the following:
1. Check the toner bottle for proper installation and that the main toner hopper is not bound.
2. Make sure fuse F-4 on PWB-A is not open.
3. Replace the fuse if it is open after clearing the toner bottle and main toner hopper of obstructions.
Description
C0650 error code.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Failure of M5, BCR, HGB, UN2, or PWB-A.
719
Di350
Please refer to pages [[T-35 and T-36 of the Field Service Manual|URL http://techweb.konicabt.com/tpm/media/Di250.pdf]] for the troubleshooting steps.
2. A failed exterior element on the Exposure Lamp.
Check the outer terminal for continuity and check for cracks or a short to the scanner frame. It might be possible to repair the element with solder.
Description
How can the code "C0500" reset?
Solution
1) Press the soft initialization on the right side of the control panel.
2) When the dot appears on the LCD after reboot, press the number 3 key.
3) The mode will change to the initialization screen.
4) Choose the selection for trouble reset.
5) After reboot the code will be cleared.
720
Di350f
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
721
Di350f

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Solution

722
Di350f

1xx Informational

2xx Success

3xx Redirection

4xx Client Error

5xx Server Error

Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Description

723
Di350f

Solution

Description
Solution
Description
AF7, black copies are output.
Solution
CAUSE: The scan cable mounting bracket is mounted too low causing the CCD unit to be blocked when the scanner changes position to scan from the
document feeder.
SOLUTION: Adjust the scan cable mounting bracket.
724
Di351
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
725
Di351

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Machine shows "abort" when trying to copy or at power on.
Solution
Verify the routing of the fiber optic cables. If the radius of the cable where it curves is too tight, the light will refract causing a corrupt signal. The machine will
then try to reset, as it sees this as a malfunction.
Other possible causes are listed in the Field Service Manual on pages T-61 through T-63 .
Note:
726
Di351
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Description
AFR17, originals of an irregular size are cut off when run through the feeder.
Solution
CAUSE: The IR erasure width setting is too high, causing the machine to erase part of the original image.
SOLUTION: Set the IR erasure width setting to 0mm. This is accomplished by entering the tech rep mode and selecting tech rep choice. Select IR erasure
width, clear the value using the clear key of the control panel and enter 0. Press enter to lock in the setting.
Refer to Bulletin 3352 for additional information.
Description
The AFR-17 is multifeeding originals.
Solution
CAUSE:
Incorrect position of pre-separator pads.
SOLUTION:
Raise the pre-separator pads .5 mm to 1 mm (maximum) towards the paper path.
Description
727
Di351
Paper is exiting the copier with a curl or wrinkle.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Incorrect fuser temperature.
Adjust the fuser temperature as shown in bulletin 3890 . If the fuser temperature cannot be adjusted, please replace PWB-A, as referred to in the bulletin.
2. Incorrect tension on the paper.
Try removing the right and left lower exit rollers from the lower exit roller shaft, leaving the two center rollers intact. This will change the tension on the paper
in many cases and reduce the curl/wrinkling.
728
Di3510
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
729
Di3510

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Solution

730
Di3510

1xx Informational

2xx Success

3xx Redirection

4xx Client Error

5xx Server Error

Description
Solution

Description
Solution

1. Press utility.
Description
Solution

731
Di3510
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

Description
Solution
732
Di3510f
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
733
Di3510f

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Solution

734
Di3510f

1xx Informational

2xx Success

3xx Redirection

4xx Client Error

5xx Server Error

Description
Solution

Description
Solution

1. Press utility.
Description
Solution

735
Di3510f
Description
Various fax communications issues.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Incorrect firmware.
A technician should make sure the firmware in the machine is current and the machine has been properly reset.
2. Phone line noise.
Check the phone line for any noise; try connecting the machine to another phone line.
3. Incorrect phone service.
Make sure that the machine is not connected to a DSL line with a filter.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

736
Di351f
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
737
Di351f

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Solution

738
Di351f

1xx Informational

2xx Success

3xx Redirection

4xx Client Error

5xx Server Error

Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
Description
C-13F0 codes are repeatedly displayed.
Solution
739
Di351f
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Poor connection. Verify that the ribbon cable from the print head to PWB-A is secure in its connector at PJ 8 on PWB-A.
2. Incorrect settings. Verify that the FD and CD adjustments of the printer are not set too high, as the SOS sensor will not be able to sense the scan start
position.
3. Incorrect operation of the print head. Verify that the polygon motor is starting (you should hear a high pitch) and replace the printhead, if nedcessary.
4. Failure of PWB-A. Replace the board.
Description
PageScope Light does not come up for the Pi3502 on a network that was running DHCP.
Solution
CAUSE: System software patch required.
SOLUTION: Please refer to service bulletin 3333 which describes a patch for the Pi3502 correcting a "bug" in the system software affecting controllers in a
DHCP environment. Try setting the controller to a static TCP/IP* address.
Notes:
2. Click on the blue-highlighted links within the PDF(s) to view additional details.
3. To open the ZIP file(s), WinZip* must be installed. WinZip can be downloaded from the [[WinZip website| URL http://www.winzip.com/ddchomea.htm]].
740
Di400
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
741
Di400

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Solution
742
Di400
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
different printers.
Description
Unable to install 32-bitdrivers on a Microsoft Windows 2003 64-bit server formigration to the 32-bit clients.
743
Di400
Solution
The 32-bit driver files are not recognized when attempting to load on a 64-bit system, therefore, the files must be pulled from a 32-bit system in order to add
additional driver support on a 64-bit server:
1. After installing the 64-bit driver on the server, install the matching 32-bit(PCL, PostScript Visual, PostScript (Plug-in) or PostScript (Adobe) driveron one of
the clients.
2. The driver files will be placed in C:\WINDOWS\inf folder on the client.
3. Share this folder on the network so that the 64-bit server has access.
4. From the server, when adding additional drivers, browse to the shared folder on the workstation
5. Select the appropriate .inf file from the shared folder on the client - the driver files will then be pulled over to the server to support other 32-bit clients when
migrating the driver files.
Note: It is important to install the same type of driver on the client to match the driver installed on the server.

Description
Solution
2. Press Enter.
744
Di450
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
745
Di450

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
How to upgrade PCMCIA flash cards to a higher flash ROM version.
Solution
To re-write a flash card with a new version of flash ROM data a PCMCIA card slot and the appropriate software are needed.
Note: One program commonly used for this purpose is Elan Memory Card Explorer.
For details on the procedure to upgrade the machine's flash rom, please refer to pages D-112 through D-116 of the Field Service Manual.
Note:
746
Di450
Description
Solution
Description
Paper jamming at the registration roller. J ams occur in the same location, regardless of which paper drawer the paper is fed from. The transport roller seems
to be turning improperly.
Solution
Clean the bearings and bushings on the pre-registration or loop roller.
Description
How to set the TCP/IP* address of the Pi5501.
Solution
To set the TCP/IP address, utilities such as BOOTP or MAP may be used. If the current TCP/IP address is known, it can also be set using the Telnet
program, as described in chapter 9 of the Pi5501 NIC Operator's Manual . In most cases, an easier way to change the TCP/IP address is to set the desired
address using PageScope Light.
Description
Peripheral Mode and Controller Type settings for the Di450/Pi5500.
Solution
Set the Peripheral Mode to 5 and the Controller Type to 0. For more information please see bulletin 3646 .
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
747
Di450
748
Di451
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
749
Di451

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Solution
750
Di451
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
Description
NVRAM replacement.
Solution
For NVRAM replacement, please follow these instructions:
CAUTION : Once a NVRAM is installed in an MFP and the MFP is powered up, the NVRAM is no longer useful for any other MFP. As a general rule,
swapping a NVRAM between different MFPs is not allowed. NEVER replace a NVRAM from a different model or from any model with a different firmware
version.

bizhub C650/C550/C451/C353/C253/C203
To replace a NVRAM;
1. Install new NVRAM in the MFP.
2. Power ON the MFP.
Note : When installing new NVRAM and turning on MFP first time, NVRAM is initialized according to the model/firmware version of the MFP in which the
NVRAM is installed. While initializing, a hourglass screen is displayed for about 90 seconds. Do not power OFF the MFP while the hourglass screen is
indicated.
3.Make following setting correctly in Service Mode.

System1 => Marketing Area
System2 => HDD
System2 => Option Board Status
System2 => Image Controller Setting
System2 => Software Switch Setting (required for bizhub product only)
* Switch Numbe 10
* Hex Assignment: 02
4.Power OFF/ON the MFP.
5.Do the setup procedure instructed in the Installation Manual.
Please refer to attached documentation for details.

7145/Di451
Please refer to attached documentation fordetails.

bizhub 500/420/360

751
Di451
7165/7155/Di650/Di551

7272/7255/Di7210/Di5510

bizhub 750/600
Note : To viewa PDF, Adobe Readermust be installed. Adobe Readercan be downloaded for free from the Adobeweb site at:
752
Di470
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
753
Di470

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Random C-099x codes (including C-0990, C-0994, C-0996, C-0997, C-0998, and C-099C) are displayed with the PF115. When the codes are re-set, the
copier works properly for a short time but the codes return.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Irregular operation of front door interlock switches in the copier. Please replace the front door interlock switches in the copier. For the Di450/Di550, the part
number of the front door interlock is 9331-2710-11, and the part number for the Di470 interlock switch is 9331-1810-21.
2. A sensor failure. Check and replace any sensors, as necessary.
3. Poor connections. Re-seat connectors and inspect for shorts, etc.
754
Di470
4.Lift motor failure. Check and replace the lift motor, if necessary
Description
Solution
Description
When scanning with the controller, can the default setting for TIFF/PDF be set to PDF? Can the default resolution be changed?
Solution
It is not possible to change the scanning default for the Pi4700e, Pi5501, or Pi5500. PDF must be selected manually to scan in PDF format. The default
scanning resolution cannot be changed.
Note: To change the resolution for an individual job, press the clear button and then entering the desired resolution.
Description
C-143E.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Failure of sensor, motor, or main board of EDH-3.
Please follow the troubleshooting steps on page T-7 of the EDH-3 Option Service Manual .
2. Objects placed on top of the EDH can cause this problem.
Please see bulletin 3145 for details.
3. The plate spring does not apply enough pressure to keep the gear assembly in position.
The pressure of the Plate Spring has been increased to prevent the C143E code from being displayed. Please see bulletin 4415 for details.
Description
Error code C10A5 (C-10A5).
Solution
CAUSE: Incorrect firmware in the copier and/or poor connection from the cabinet to the machine.
SOLUTION: The latest firmware can be obtained from the [[Konica Minolta FTP site| URL ftp://kbtdigital:kx15@ftp.konicabt.com]]. Also check both
connectors from the cabinet to the machine. Please see the Field Service Manual, Troubleshooting, Section 4, Malfunctions for additional details on these
error codes.

Description
No selection for setting TCP/IP* address in Utility Mode.
Solution
CAUSE: Incorrect controller type and peripheral mode settings.
SOLUTION: On the Di470 the controller type must be set to 6 for the Pi4700e. With controller system 1 on the Pi4700e, the peripheral mode must be set to
1. With controller system 3 or higher, the peripheral mode must be set to 2 if the hard disk is installed or to 3 if the hard disk is not installed.
Notes:
1. For details on Pi4700e version 4 please see bulletin 4796 .
755
Di470
Description
Solution

identify the link.
756
Di520
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
757
Di520

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Solution
758
Di520
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Description
What controller type setting is required for installation of a Pi6200 or Pi6000?
Solution
It needs to be set to 0. The ECC option (PWB-W) must also be installed on the Di520.
Description
A C0500 error message is displayed on power up. C-0510 and C-0550 are also displayed sometimes.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Failure of upper fuser lamp. Replace the upper fuser lamp.
2. Failure of thermistor. Replace the thermistor.
3. Failure of thermal fuse. Replace the thermal fuse.
4. Failure of PWB-A. Replace PWB-A.
5. Poor connection. Open the front door and slide out the fuser section. Check CN4 at the rear inside of the copier. CN4 is the connector that the fuser section
plugs into when the transport section is slid into position. Check for any paper that may have been lodged inside connector preventing proper contact. Please
refer to page T-56 of the service manual for additional details.
6. If the code is appearing intermittently, the problem might be caused by oxidation in the front door interlocks. Please refer to bulletin 3180 for details.
Notes:
1. To reset all fuser malfunctions, the trouble reset switch must be pressed on the PWB-S located in the front of the copier. (Opening and closing the front
door will not clear this problem.) See page T-29 in the Service Manual for information on clearing this, and other malfunctions.

Description
How to clear an M-6 (M6) code.
Solution
M-6 indicates that the exposure lamp needs adjustment or replacement. To clear the code, perform the following:
1. Enter the Tech Rep mode.
2. Enter I.R. & EDH Check.
3. Then go to Function I.R.
4. Run the Exp. Lamp Check.
5. Then run the Address Adjust.
If the code persists, change the exposure lamp. Please see bulletin 2584 .
759
Di520
Description
C-0210.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Incorrectly installed transfer/separator corona assembly. Re-install properly. (See page T-51 of the Di620 Field Service Manual.
2. Dirty or failed corona wires. Clean or replace the wires. (See page T-51 of the Di620 Field Service Manual.
3. Failure of PWB-A. Replace PWB-A. (See page T-51 of the Di620 Field Service Manual.
4. Failure of HV2. Replace HV2. (See page T-51 of the Di620 Field Service Manual.
5. Damaged coronal terminals or blocks. Replace the front & rear corona terminals/covers and rear terminal block.
Note:
To view the above PDF, Acrobat* Reader must be installed. Acrobat Reader can be downloaded for free from the Adobe* Web site at:

760
Di550
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
761
Di550

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Solution

762
Di550

1xx Informational

2xx Success

3xx Redirection

4xx Client Error

5xx Server Error

Description
Solution
Description
Parts listing for the punch unit of the FN105/FN106.
Solution
Punch assembly (p/n 3643-4051-01). Please refer to bulletin 3627 for a list of available parts for the punch unit.
Notes:
1. The punch unit is usually replaced as a complete assembly.
Description
The Pi4700e with system version 3 is unable to print a configuration page and can not be installed on the network. PageScope Light on the Pi4700e
controller is unavailable when trying to access the controller via the network.
Solution
CAUSE: Incorrect firmware on the Pi4700e.
SOLUTION: The Pi4700e print controller should be downgraded to version 1.02 firmware to allow connection with the Di550. Please flash it with the
following firmware file: [[md2sv102nfm.exe| URL ftp://techweb:HelpMe@ftp.konicabt.com/md2sv102nfm.exe]].
Notes:
1. This must be done while connected to a Di470. The instructions for flashing the controller are on page T-8 of the Pi4700e Service Manual.
2. Use controller type 0 and peripheral mode 5 (the same controller and peripheral mode settings that would be used for the Pi5501).
3. The Pi4700e Phase 2 enhancements will not be available to the Di450 or Di550.
Description
C10A5 after installing a new PWB-A board.
Solution
CAUSE: The ROM version on the new PWB-A is for a Di450 (4003 =Di450 and 4002 =Di550). The installed ROM is 4003-50G0-32, but needs to be
4002-50G0-32.
SOLUTION: Upgrade the firmware with the proper versions. Refer to Service Bulletin 3103K for information on the latest ROM versions for the
Di450/Di550.
763
Di550
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
764
Di551
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
765
Di551

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Solution
766
Di551
Description
Solution

1xx Informational

2xx Success

3xx Redirection

4xx Client Error

5xx Server Error

Description
The copier appears to have no power, expect that the timer light is blinking.
Solution
CAUSE:
A problem has occurred with the copier's firmware.
SOLUTION: Shut down the copier. When power is re-applied the copier's LCD screen will be blank and the "Timer" light will be blinking. Even though the LCD
is blank, start the "Image" program download.
Note: As soon as the program starts downloading the "Energy Saver" light will start blinking. This indicates the download has started. It may take up to 1
minute for the progress bar to start moving. Once the download is complete the copier will immediately and automatically show the normal LCD display. Do
not abort the process.
Description
SC56-04 after replacing the NVRAM.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The SC56-04 service code is generated when a new memory board is installed and the copier serial number information is not entered.
Re-enter the copier serial number after the memory board has been properly installed and reset. The new memory board must be initialized and the serial
number information must be re-entered into the copier. Refer to attached bulletin 3613 for details.

2. If an optional print controller has been installed, SC56-04 may indicate a communication problem between the print controller and the IFB (Controller
Interface Board) or between the IFB and ICB (Image Control Board).
Re-seat the connectors on the ICB.

3. The code sometimes indicates a communication problem between the operation panel and the ICB. If the copier functions normally, except when printing
from the controller, the problem is most likely related to the Interface Board.
Re-seat the connectors on the ICB and the operation panel. Verify that the copier has current firmware. If the code persists, reload the PRCB firmware and
the ICB firmware. It is also possible that the ICB (p/n 56QA-9010 ) or IFB (p/n 65AA-9120) may need to be replaced.
Description
How to disable auto T/S corona electrode cleaning.
Solution
767
Di551
To disable auto transfer/separation electrode cleaning, perform the following:
4. Scroll to software switch 2-4 or 3-4using the arrow keys.
5. Set 2-4 to 1 (OFF) for the 7055/7065. Set 3-4 to 1 (OFF) for the 7075/7085/Force75/Force85, 7155/7165/7255/7272/Force65, Di551/Di650, Di750/Di850
and Di5510/Di7210.
Description
How to disable auto charge electrode cleaning.
Solution
To disable auto charge electrode cleaning, perform the following:
4. Scroll to software switch 2-3 using the arrow keys.
5. Set 2-3 to 1 (OFF) for the 7055/7065.Set 3-3 to 1 (OFF) for the 7075/7085/Force75/Force85, 7155/7165/7255/7272/Force65, Di551/Di650, Di750/Di850
and Di5510/Di7210.
Description
J 32-02 or J 32-04. J amming in the fuser or the turnover section of the machine.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Excessive grease in one-way bearing.
Please check gear (p/n 4024-2070-01) located on the front side of the fusing unit. Clean all the grease from inside the one-way bearing and remove the
grease from the shaft.See attached Product & Technical Support Bulletin No. 3797 for details.

2. Failed ADU board.
Replace theADU drive board(p/n 4024 2892 01).
768
Di5510
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
769
Di5510

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Solution
770
Di5510
Description
Solution

1xx Informational

2xx Success

3xx Redirection

4xx Client Error

5xx Server Error

Description
Tray 4 is grayed out and not functioning. In the service history there are indications of SC 18-40 service codes.
Solution
CAUSE:
Paper in the cassette was set incorrectly, causing a tray lift failure (SC18-40). The tray was isolated automatically.
SOLUTION:
Make sure soft switch 19-bit 0 is set to "OFF". This soft switch is used for isolating tray 4 during a failure.
Description
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:


Description
SC 46-08.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
Re-flash the copier and verify that all of the firmware components are properly indicated.
771
Di5510
2. Poor connection between the Image Control Board and Printer Control Board.
Reseat the connection between the ICB and the PRCB.
3. Print head (write unit) failure.
Replace the print head (p/n 4396-1239-01).
4. Image Control Board failure.
Replace the ICB (p/n 4396-1278-01).

5. Printer Control Board failure.
Replace the Printer Control Board (p/n 4396-1239-01).
Description
Incorrect EDH registration. The image is shifted on copies about 1 to 1.5 inches when using the EDH.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Incorrect restart timing adjustment.
Please try performing the RADF restart timing to correct the issue.
2. Paper dust on sensor(s).
Please remove any paper dust from the cleaning assembly (p/n 4024-2023-01) and clean and check the operation of PS306 and PS302 .
3. Dirty cleaning pad. The cleaning pad used to remove paper dust from the registration drive roller in the RADF may have become dirty, causing the
registration roller to bind, resulting in the improper rotation of the registration drive roller.
Check for any paper dust build up on the cleaning pad assembly. Check to see that the roller rotates without binding. Perform the following:
b. Raise the open/shut cover (p/n 4024-2130-01).
c. Remove the cleaning pad assembly retaining screw (p/n 9737-0406-13) and extract the cleaning pad assembly (p/n 4024-2023-01) from the open/shut
cover.
d. Thoroughly remove any build up of paper dust from the cleaning pad. Also, ensure that registration drive roller (p/n 4024-2206-01) rotates freely on its
shaft. Remove and clean the registration driven roller and shaft as necessary.
e. Reinstall the cleaning pad assembly and install the retaining screw.
Note: To view the above PDF(s), Acrobat* Reader must be installed. Acrobat Reader can be downloaded for
free from the Adobe* Web site at: [[http://www.adobe.com/products/acrobat/readstep2.html| URL

Description
Solution
and Di5510/Di7210.
772
Di620
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
773
Di620

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
C500 service code on start up.
Solution
CAUSE: Failed wire harness at the rear of the copier where the fuser plugs into the copier.
SOLUTION: Replace the Harness (p/n 1155-6815-02).
774
Di620
Description
Part number of the main hopper holder on the Di520/ 620.
Solution
The part number for the holder is 1161-5267-02. See bulletin 2796 .
Note:
Description
Solution
Description
On the Di620 what is the part number for the main wire harness to fuser assembly. This is the main harness at the back of the copier that the fuser plugs into.
The harness is indicated but the part number is not provided.
Solution
Wiring Harness (p/n 1155-6815-02). The part is in the [[Parts Manual section 37, item 21|URL http://techweb.konicabt.com/tpm/media/Page37_Item21.pdf]].
Notes:
1. The Parts Manual for the copier is not too clear in outlining the harnesses.
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Description
Part number of the clutch in the punch unit of the FN3.
Solution
Clutch (p/n 4470-7801-01).
Note: This clutch is not the same as the ones used in other finishers for the Di620/Di520.
775
Di620
776
Di620PE
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
777
Di620PE

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Solution
778
Di620PE
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Description
How to access the tech rep mode. Availability of service panel utility for Di620PE.
Solution
Please see bulletins 2900 and 2984 .
Click here for the Di620PE service panel utility.
Click here for the Di620PE advanced service panel utility.
Note:

Description
Part/Item number for the fiber optic cable kit to connect a Di620 to a PrintLink 062.
Solution
Interface Kit F, which includes the fiber optics, is item #4623-132.
Description
Solution
Description
Parts Manual Update - Transport Section.
Solution
See Bulletin Number 4942 .
779
Di620PE
780
Di621
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
781
Di621

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Solution
782
Di621
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
different printers.
Description
Unable to install 32-bitdrivers on a Microsoft Windows 2003 64-bit server formigration to the 32-bit clients.
783
Di621
Solution
The 32-bit driver files are not recognized when attempting to load on a 64-bit system, therefore, the files must be pulled from a 32-bit system in order to add
additional driver support on a 64-bit server:
1. After installing the 64-bit driver on the server, install the matching 32-bit(PCL, PostScript Visual, PostScript (Plug-in) or PostScript (Adobe) driveron one of
the clients.
2. The driver files will be placed in C:\WINDOWS\inf folder on the client.
3. Share this folder on the network so that the 64-bit server has access.
4. From the server, when adding additional drivers, browse to the shared folder on the workstation
5. Select the appropriate .inf file from the shared folder on the client - the driver files will then be pulled over to the server to support other 32-bit clients when
migrating the driver files.
Note: It is important to install the same type of driver on the client to match the driver installed on the server.

Description
Solution
2. Press Enter.
784
Di650
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
785
Di650

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Solution
786
Di650
Description
A Pi6500e with the PostScript* 3+scan kit is installed on the copier/printer. When going into scan mode on the copier/printer, the scan to HDD option works
but the FTP and E-Mail settings are grayed out.
Solution
CAUSE: Incorrect soft switch settings.
SOLUTION: Please check the soft switch settings in the "25" mode. They should be set as shown at the bottom of page 4 of the INSTALLATION GUIDE -
Pi6500e :
DIPSW28-1 (Scan button) : OFF(0)
DIPSW28-4 (E-Mail, FTP) : ON(1)
Description
Incorrect EDH registration. The image is shifted on copies about 1 to 1.5 inches when using the EDH.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Incorrect restart timing adjustment.
Please try performing the RADF restart timing to correct the issue.
2. Paper dust on sensor(s).
Please remove any paper dust from the cleaning assembly (part number 4024-2023-01) and clean and check the operation of PS306 and PS302 .
3. Dirty cleaning pad. The cleaning pad used to remove paper dust from the registration drive roller in the RADF may have become dirty, causing the
registration roller to bind, resulting in the improper rotation of the registration drive roller.
Check for any paper dust build up on the cleaning pad assembly. Check to see that the roller rotates without binding. Perform the following:
b. Raise the open/shut cover (Part Number 4024-2130-01).
c. Remove the cleaning pad assembly retaining screw (Part Number 9737-0406-13) and extract the cleaning pad assembly (Part Number 4024-2023-01)
from the open/shut cover.
d. Thoroughly remove any build up of paper dust from the cleaning pad. Also, ensure that registration drive roller (Part Number 4024-2206-01) rotates
freely on its shaft. Remove and clean the registration driven roller and shaft as necessary.
e. Reinstall the cleaning pad assembly and install the retaining screw.

Description
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:


Description
How to set up scan to E-mail, scan to file, and scan to FTP on the Pi6500e.
787
Di650
Solution
To set up scan to E-mail, scan to file, and scan to FTP, perform the following:
1. Make sure the PS3+Scan Kit (Item #1429-001) has been installed with the correct key chip and the correct system software and patches have been
loaded.
2. Please refer to the Pi6500e Scanner Mode User Manual for details on setting up the scanning functions.
Notes:
a. If the scanning buttons are grayed out on the copier, please review the settings on page 4 of the INSTALLATION GUIDE - Pi6500e .
b. To view the above PDF(s), Acrobat* Reader must be installed. Acrobat Reader can be downloaded for free from the Adobe* Web site at:

Description
Solution
and Di5510/Di7210.
Description
Solution
and Di5510/Di7210.
788
Di7210
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
789
Di7210

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Solution
790
Di7210
Description
Solution

1xx Informational

2xx Success

3xx Redirection

4xx Client Error

5xx Server Error

Description
SC 46-08.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
Re-flash the copier and verify that all of the firmware components are properly indicated.
2. Poor connection between the Image Control Board and Printer Control Board.
Reseat the connection between the ICB and the PRCB.
3. Print head (write unit) failure.
Replace the print head (p/n 4396-1239-01).
4. Image Control Board failure.
Replace the ICB (p/n 4396-1278-01).

5. Printer Control Board failure.
Replace the Printer Control Board (p/n 4396-1239-01).
Description
Solution
and Di5510/Di7210.
Description
791
Di7210
Solution
and Di5510/Di7210.
Description
SC49-01, SC49-02, or SC49-03 codes.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Outdated firmware.
A flash ROM upgrade is available to correct this problem. The latest version firmware or system software is available via the Konica Minolta Download
Selector. Access the Selector from SSD Web Support (CS Expert Support) by clicking on 'Download MSDS, Drivers, Firmware and more'.
Notes :
a. See bulletin 3481A for details on this issue. To viewthe PDF, Adobe Readermust be installed. Adobe Readercan be downloaded for free from the
b. Make sure that the current version of system software (with applicable patches) is installed on the controller.
2. Improper shut down procedure of the controller.
Here is the correct shutdown procedure:
a. Shutdown the controller via theMFP control panel.
b. Turn off the sub switch (front switch) of the printer.
c. Turn off the main switch (rear switch) of the printer.
This procedure assures that the controller and printer are properly synchronized when power is applied. If the sub switch (front switch) is the only switch
turned off, the Service Code will be generated the next time the printer is restarted.
792
Di750
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
793
Di750

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Intermittent SC46-06, SC46-90, or SC46-91.
Solution
CAUSE: There is an image processing board FlashROM version incompatibility.
SOLUTION: Upgrade the FlashROMs to the latest revisions.
794
Di750
Description
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
Notes :
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Solution
Description
Dark band from front-to-rear, normally on the first print of a run.
Solution
CAUSE: The cleaner shaft holders (bearings) for the toner guide brush are seized resulting in improper brush rotation and a loss of ground to the brush.
SOLUTION: Replace the shaft holders front and rear (p/n 55VA 7502 0) and ensure there is a clean path to ground.
Description
Solution
795
Di750
and Di5510/Di7210.
796
Di750PE
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
797
Di750PE

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Notes :
798
Di750PE
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

2.Select File.
3. SelectPrint.
799
Di750PE
6. Select OK.
8. Select File.
9. Select Print.
11. Select OK.
800
Di850
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
801
Di850

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
802
Di850
Notes :
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Solution
Description
Dark band from front-to-rear, normally on the first print of a run.
Solution
CAUSE: The cleaner shaft holders (bearings) for the toner guide brush are seized resulting in improper brush rotation and a loss of ground to the brush.
SOLUTION: Replace the shaft holders front and rear (p/n 55VA 7502 0) and ensure there is a clean path to ground.
Description
Solution
and Di5510/Di7210.
803
Di850
Description
Solution
and Di5510/Di7210.
Description
The page counter on the operation panel does not reset properly when scanning more than 50 pages into the machine at once.
Solution
CAUSE: There is a small anomaly dealing with the operation program EPROMs version 41 that causes the operation panel counter to not reset properly when
scanning more than 50 pages into the machine at a time.
SOLUTION: A special EPROM that corrects this relatively minor issue is available on request. If you have a customer that is experiencing this problem,
please contact the NSSG and the special EPROM will be made available to you.
804
Dispatcher
Description
Konica Dispatcher software information.
Solution
Dispatcher is a task automation software solution developed by Konica's Systems Engineering Center (SEC).
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Does Dispatcher, automatically delete the TXT file associated with the image file?
Solution
Dispatcher will automatically delete the TXT file that is associated with the image file.
Description
How to make Dispatcher work with a Macintosh* running Microsoft* Virtual PC version 6.1.
Solution
Dispatcher will not work with a MAC running Virtual PC 6.1. The unlock code generated for Dispatcher is based on the hardware seen on the workstation.
Because the workstation is a MAC, the hardware is seen as incompatible and will not allow an unlock code to be generated.
Description
Dispatcher Document Task Automation Solution.
Solution
Konica Minolta Dispatcher document task automation solution allows you to streamline and simplify your most popular and often-used document manipulation
functions (scan, clean, split, merge, annotate, etc.); and do it all automatically. An easy-to use task automation application, KMBS Dispatcher performs routine
document routing, printing, backup and manipulation functions of TIFF and J pg files. These functions include:
1. Merge TIFF - in addition to splitting TIFF files, Konica Dispatcher can merge multiple TIFFs into a single document
2. Annotation - add your own text at a specified location on each image
3. Watermark - add your own background image to files
4. AutoOpen - open retrieved files automatically in their default application
5. Scanner Integration - retrieve images directly from the scanner, including the bizhub C350 and bizhub Pro 1050 models
6. Scanner Configuration Files - create configuration files for fast, easy setup of future scanners
7. PDF Files - Konica Dispatcher supports PDF retrieval in addition to TIFF
8. Print J ob - print various types of office documents that are specified in a directory without opening the applications
9. UNICODE Support - KMBS Dispatcher supports UNICODE strings for languages
10. KMBS Dispatcher is a task-based system. As the user, you setup the series of operations you wish to perform as tasks. You may then schedule these
tasks to run at the specific times and intervals that best suit your needs. Tasks are controlled from the user interface and may be stopped and started at the
touch of a button. The graphical interface lets you know instantly each task, its type and its status.
With its easy-to-use interface, powerful options and numerous new features, KMBS Dispatcher can help save you valuable time and money by freeing you up
to do the things you want to be doing.
See Bulletin #5306 .

805
Dispatcher
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Dispatcher 2.0 for Alchemy* will not install on Microsoft* Windows 98. A Windows error message may appear stating that a
file is missing.
Solution
CAUSE: Windows 98 requires updates.
SOLUTION: Make sure all latest Windows 98 OS Service Packs and patches have been installed; especially the one called
Windows 98 Customer Service Packs .
SPECIAL NOTE: Solution provided by Greg McDermott, KBT WINDSOR
Description
How to install Dispatcher on a Macintosh* using Microsoft* Virtual PC software.
Solution
Dispatcher will not work with a Macintosh even if Virtual PC is used.
806
DocuBreeze
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
DocuBreeze information.
Solution
DocuBreeze information.
Description
After using the KP utility to create the Konica Minolta printers for DocuBreeze, the alias printers are not showing up under new Device. Under new MFP the
alias does not show up in the drop-down listing.
Solution
CAUSE: The alias files were not edited.
SOLUTION: The printers will be created by the KP Utility. Go to /usr/local/SEC01/KPalias and run the KPalias utility which will create an alias file for each
printer. After creating an alias for each printer, the file that was created needs to be edited. After opening the file, there should be a line "lp -d {printername}-0
$*" which needs to be changed to "lp -d {printername}-0 $@", then saved. Now the printer alias should show in the Alias of new MFP devices.
Description
How to use the KP utility to set up printers when setting up DocuBreeze.
Solution
To use the KP utility:
1. At the root, type in less/etc/printcap.local, hit enter. A full screen text editor will appear. 2. Hit Qto take you out.
3. Type /opt/kp1.5/, then type kpappendprinter => enter.
4. At the prompt, Local printer queue name (give a friendly name - no spaces) => enter. You will be prompted for the TCP/IP address => enter ip
address. Printers port => port1 => enter. Then you will be taken back to the root.
5.Type cat/etc/printcap.local => enter. The last lines should have the printer that you just set up with the name andTCP/IP address.
6. Now type /etc/init.d/lpd restart => enter. This should start and stop theLPD service. The warning you will see is "normal";when it makes the spool queue.
7. Type /opt/kp1.5/kpconfig -a => enter. A menu choice of two items (lp and also the name of the printer).
8.Select the printer you created and hit enter.
9. Select thePPD file for that printer. Then select y for append each job. You will be prompted for Memory configuration; next will be the finisher then it will
ask about sheet feeder choice, punch unit, large capacity tray; after which, you will be back to the root.
10. At the command prompt type /opt/kp1.5/kpconfig -l => enter. This will install and append changes.
11. Type kp/opt/kp1.5/readme.txt => enter. Put number of copies to print - 1 select p to print. This will bring up the option and verify that it can print.
12. Now type in cd/usr/local/SEC01/kpalias => enter.
13. Type in pwd => enter. kpalias (name you want to see in docubreeze - no spaces) => enter, number of copies - 1. Set up the options you want for
this alias.
14.Go to text font, select the font => enter then type in courier => enter.
15.After options, press S to save and then enter. To verify, type cat /(aliasname) - to verify. Repeat the above directions to make another alias.
16.Type ../bin/dbalias =>enter after it runs type ./(aliasname) /opt/kp1.5/readme.txt =>enter.
17.Type ls -l =>enter.
18.Type rm sample =>enter type Y for yes =>enter.
You have now created printers that DocuBreeze will"see" when creating a new MFP Device for printing.
Description
Need to retrieve files from DocuBreeze server to store in alternate location.
Solution
When logged in as sysadm to the DocuBreeze server, files from the Public and Shared Archives can be selected and saved to an alternate location. It is
necessary to login as each private user to access their private archive and files to download.
807
DocuBreeze
Alternately if logging in to a console session as root and entering cd /usr/local/SEC01/archive then ls -l, the private, public and shared folders will be
displayed. Each of these folders can be accessed and the files retrieved from there or saved in a TAR file.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
What languages does DocuBreeze support?
Solution
DocuBreeze can support any language - even Unicode - with a built-in language translation tool.
Description
DocuBreeze features.
Solution
DocuBreeze features:
1. Create customized ad-hoc document workflows to automatically route documents from their collection through to their final destination.
2. Collect and distribute documents from any number of sources, including Microsoft* Windows, Macintosh*, LINUX*, mainframe, AS/400*, E-mail, FTP and
Konica multifunction devices.
3. Process documents through image processing (crop/resize, noise reduction, etc.), OCR, barcode routing/indexing, and document annotation.
4. Includes a web-based "Explorer" type file browser for public and private document archiving.
5. Features a scripting engine for convenient integration with other applications and advanced workflow.
6. Can support any language - even Unicode.
Description
DocuBreeze system requirements.
Solution
System requirements:
LINUX* 2.4
1 GHz Intel* Pentium* processor
512MB available system RAM
20GB available disk space
Minimum Microsoft* Internet Explorer 5.5, Netscape* 4.7, Mozilla* 5
Apache* 1.3.24 web server
A Konica scan-to-file device
Available Internet connection
Description
What does the DocuBreeze package include?
Solution
808
DocuBreeze
Package includes:
1. Four days of on-site training of up to 5 students
2. On-site set-up
3. Complete copy of DocuBreeze Demo Version
(Advanced Server) limited to 1 concurrent user and 1 concurrent job
4. Server hardware (approximately $3000)
5. Instructional flash presentation CD (free)
6. User Documentation (free)
7. Brochures and Datasheets
809
eCopy
Description
TWAIN driver does not connect to the MFP.
Solution
CAUSE: Improper Network Function setting.

SOLUTION: To set the Network Function setting to 'Allow', perform the following:
1. Press the Utility button.
2. Select Administrator mode, Security button, Management Function Setting, and Network Function Setting.
3. Set to Allow.
4. Select Exit.

Description
eCopy compatible machine models, firmware and TWAIN drivers list.
Solution
Please refer to attached documentation. To viewthe PDF, Adobe Readermust be installed. Adobe Readercan be downloaded for free from the
Notes :
1. The latest version firmware is available via the Konica Minolta Download Selector. Access the Selector from SSD Web Support (CS Expert Support) by
clicking on 'Download MSDS, Drivers, Firmware and more'.
2. The latest printer drivers are available via the Konica Minolta Download Selector. Access the Selector from the the KMBS public site (
Firmware and more'.
SPECIAL NOTE : Solution contribution by Cesar J imenez, Production Print/SSD and Bill Hall, Workgroup/SSD
Description
Time to acquire scan is excessive; slow scanning. The 'Connecting' message lasts a long time.
Solution
CAUSE: Scanning may seem slow because the TWAIN driver is searching for all available machines to scan from on the network.

SOLUTION:When the Select Devices dialog box is displayed, select 'from registered devices' and also select 'Use this device for future session' option.

Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Is there a TWAIN driver for eCopy?
Solution
The latest TWAIN driveris available via the Konica Minolta Download Selector. Access the Selector from theKMBS public site (
Firmware and more'.
Description
When scanning with eCopy, the preview is not displayed, the optics did not work and the message at the bottom left of the scan indicates 'Scan complete'.
Solution
CAUSE: There issomewhat of an incompatiblity with most ofthe KMBSTWAIN drivers and the eCopy ScanStation.

810
eCopy
SOLUTION:There is a driver that does work well and supports color scanning. This has been commonly referred to as the GUI-suppressed (Non GUI) driver.
Notes :
1.Prior to installation, unload the presentTWAIN drivervia Control Panel=> Add or Remove Programs. IMPORTANT : Stop ALL eCopy services in order
to remove the driver.
2. The latest TWAIN driveris available via the Konica Minolta Download Selector. Access the Selector from the the KMBS public site (
Firmware and more'.
Description
Error while removing TWAIN driver from eCopy ScanStation.
Solution
CAUSE:The eCopy license has locked the TWAIN driver and has not released it.

SOLUTION: The two eCopy services must be stopped in order to remove the TWAIN driver. Once the services have stopped, press the Retry button and
the removal process should continue. Once the TWAIN driver has been removed, restart the two services that were previously stopped.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
How to assign an eCopy Device License key to a different MFP and an overview of eCopy Licensing.
Solution
To assign an eCopy Device License key to a different MFP, the License key for the original MFP must first be deleted. Then, the same License key can be
assigned to a different MFP.
However, it may also be necessary to register a new KM device through the eCopy activation website at https://activation.ecopy.biz .
IMPORTANT : Be sure to back up ALL License information before deleting any Product or License keys.

eCopy Licensing Summary
EVERY device used with eCopy software requires a valid license. To obtain a license, enter a unique product key, valid for use with a single device, into
the local license database. Activate the product key by obtaining a license code from the eCopy activation Web site.
To license a device running embedded ShareScan OP software, add the device to the Services Manager after entering the product key.
IMPORTANT : When the key is assigned to a device, it is NO longer available for use with other devices. However, the device CAN be assigned to another
Services Manager, in which case the license moves with the device. EVERY device that is used with eCopy software requires a valid license.
A product key must be added to the license database before the ShareScan OP Services Manager can assign it to a device. In the Administration console,
the License information tab displays the status of each product key in the database. If using ShareScan OP on a ScanStation, a single product key will be
listed.

Activating Licenses
When assigning a product key to a device, the devices license can be activated immediately or it can be activated later from the License Information tab.
The license must be activated within 30 days . Internet activation is fast and easy. If an Internet connection is unavailable, use the Report button on the
License Information tab to generate a text file containing the product key information. Print the report file.
Then, from any computer with an Internet connection, go to https://activation.ecopy.biz and obtain a license code for each key. Then activate each license
individually on the License Information tab.
Related ISSUE - A message may prompt to activate a ScanStation OP product key, even though all of the product keys have already been activated. This
was initiated when trying to add eCopy ShareScan OP version 3.x or 4.x product key and then attempting to acquire a device.
Make sure to SAVE after entering Product Key before acquiring the device.
Try deleting one or more Product Keys (if others are listed).
Utilize the SSOP License Report.txt file to add the PKs again.
Stop the OP Services Manager from within the services.
811
eCopy
Shut down/restart the Administrator Console.
Restart the OP Services Manager.
Repeat the steps of adding the Product Keys and acquire the device(s) again.

Before beginning the registration process, have the following information on hand:
1. eCopy Serial Number
It is a 10-character alphanumeric designated by S/N for serial number.
Example of an eCopy Serial Number: S/N FB05C12345
The eCopy Serial Number is located in several places:
a. Serial Number is always located on a sticker on the back of the software CD case.
b. For an eCopy ScanStation OP, the hardware serial number is located on the cover of the HP PC. eCopy uses the HP S/N. On the outside of the
shipping box, there is one big sticker with several bar codes and numbers:
Customer Part #
eCopy Part #
Customer PO #
eCopy Serial #
HP serial #
On the inside packing box for the ScanStation PC, there is a sticker with two bar codes. The second bar code is labeled Asset Tag #(this is the eCopy
serial number as well).
2. If the serial number is unavailable,register using the eCopy Product Key.The Product Key is located on a sticker on the back of the software CD case.
The eCopy Product Key is a string of 21 alphanumeric characters labeled as "Product Key".
Example of aneCopy Product Key: 5ZPZSTT6TWNUCM6NK2BLM

To activate All licenses :
This operation requires an Internet connection. On the License Information tab, click Activate. When prompted, click Yes to continue.

To activate a Single license
In the console tree, click System Information => Licensing. On the License Information tab, double-click the product key to activate. The Product Key
Information window opens. Ifthere is an Internet connection, click Activate via Internet. The information is sent to the eCopy activation Web server and a
license code is returned. Use the license code to activatethe license. If there is noInternet connection, click Activate Manually and follow the instructions for
obtaining a license code manually.
IMPORTANT :As soon asthe licenses are activated, generate a license report.

Generating a license report
The license report helpswith recovery ofproduct keys and license codes, if necessary.A license report should be generated whenever activating licenses.
Keep the report in a safe place in casethere is aneed to restore the license information. A printed report is also useful if to manually activate product keys from
another computer. To generate a license report:
In the console tree, select System Information => Licensing. On the License Information tab, click Report. The Save as window opens. Specify a location
for the file and click Save.
Description
"Device not supported" message with TWAIN driver.
Solution
CAUSE: Firmware update required. Currently, there is not a NonGUI version of theTWAIN driver that is supported with version 6b.

SOLUTION: In order to connect to theMFP with the latest NonGUITWAIN driver,use version 58 firmware.

812
EMS Plug-Ins
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
813
EP1030
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Imaging Unit part number
Solution
SOLUTION: The part number is 4601-200.
Description
Item numbers for Parts or Service Manuals.
Solution
Please refer to this publications list .
Note:
Description
Solution
814
EP1030
Description
When using the single document handler on the EP1030 series, jams occur.
Solution
Check that the scanning glass is installed correctly; the bevel should be facing up and toward the entrance section of the SDH.
Description
C0000 at power up.
Solution
CAUSE: Failed PWB-A board.

SOLUTION: Replace the PWB-A board (p/n 1159-0101-05).
815
EP1030F
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution
Please refer to the COPIER/FAX/COLOR PUBLICATIONS PRICE LIST .
Description
Solution
816
EP1030F
Description
Solution
Description
C0000 at power up.
Solution

817
EP1031
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution
Note:
Description
Solution
818
EP1031
Description
Solution
Description
C0000 at power up.
Solution

819
EP1031F
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
820
EP1031F
Description
Solution
Description
C0000 at power up.
Solution

821
EP1080
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
The copier begins to cycle, and continues to cycle until the copier is powered off. This problem occurs when paper is fed from any of the paper sources
including the bypass.
Solution
Cause: UN7 has failed.
Solution: Replace UN7 "toner agitation motor drive board". This board is easily damaged if the developer assembly is slid out while the front door interlocks
are cheated.
Description
What is the part number for the developer assembly for this copier? It is not indicated in the Parts Manual.
Solution
The part number for the developer unit is 1139-0424-01. A service bulletin has never been issued for this item.
Description
Solution
Note:
822
EP1080
Description
Solution
823
EP1081
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution
824
EP1083
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
825
EP1083
Description
How to enable or disable a key counter (such as Hecon)or a coin box.
Solution
To enable or disable a key counter or coin box, perform the following:
1. Enter the service mode by pressing [Stop] [0] [Stop] [1].
2. Press [2] to enter Tech Rep Choice.The zoom ratio indication will display "C."
3. Press [6] to select C-6.
4. Press [Start] to display the current setting.
5. Press [Clear] to clear the current setting and press [1] to enable a key counter or [0] to disable a key counter and set the copier for normal operation.
6. Press [Start] to validate the new setting.
7. Press panel reset twice to return to the normal screen.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
826
EP1085
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
827
EP2010
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution
Description
How to enable or disable a key counter (such as Hecon)or a coin box.
Solution
To enable or disable a key counter or coin box, perform the following:
1. Enter the service mode by pressing [Stop] [0] [Stop] [1].
2. Press [2] to enter Tech Rep Choice.The zoom ratio indication will display "C."
3. Press [6] to select C-6.
4. Press [Start] to display the current setting.
5. Press [Clear] to clear the current setting and press [1] to enable a key counter or [0] to disable a key counter and set the copier for normal operation.
6. Press [Start] to validate the new setting.
7. Press panel reset twice to return to the normal screen.
828
EP2010
829
EP2030
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution
Note:
Description
How is starter loaded into the developing unit?
Solution
Enter the service mode of the copier and run an F8.
Description
Solution
830
EP2030
Description
Using an external auditor the vendor mode was set to coin-op or card and now the duplexing selection is gone.
Solution
When coin-op or card is selected it is normal for the duplex mode to disappear. This is because the machine cannot make more than one copy per charge on
the card or per monetary amount with the coin-op. WORKAROUND: Turn on the key counter function, turn off the vendor mode.
Description
Paper jams in the sorter when feeding into the bin.
Solution
CAUSE: Improper sorter bin adjustment.

SOLUTION: Improper sorter bin adjustment can also result in C0B60, C0B62, and C0B63 error codes. Please see attached Product and Technical Support
Bulletin 2629 for the adjustment procedures on the following sorters: S-205, S-206, ST-206,S-207, S-208, ST-207, ST-210, ST-211, ST-212, ST-213, ST-214,
ST-1000, ST-1100, ST-1200.
Description
"Remove copies from the sorter" message but there is no paper in the sorter.
Solution
CAUSE: This can be caused if paper dust accumulates on the bin empty sensor Polyester Film (p/n 4478-5612-02). This, in addition to the angle of the bin
empty sensor bracket, may allow the dirty polyester film to be mistaken for paper on the non-sort tray.

SOLUTION: Clean the polyester film. The permanent solution is to install a new mounting bracket for the sensor, as described in attached Product and
Technical Support Bulletin 2986.
Notes :
1. This applies to the following models: ST-213, ST-214, ST-1000, ST-1100, ST-1200
831
EP2050
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution
832
EP2080
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
833
EP2080
Description
Is the backlight for the display of an EP2080 replaceable?
Solution
The backlight is available only as part of the control panel. Please see bulletin 3238 for pricing and item number.
Description
Smoking, short-circuit in fuser unit.
Solution
834
EP2100
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution
835
EP2120
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution
836
EP2121
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution
837
EP2130
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution
838
EP2130 PRO
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution
839
EP2150
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
840
EP2151
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
841
EP2152
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
842
EP2152 PRO
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
843
EP3000
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution
Note:
Description
Solution
844
EP3000
Description
Smoking, short-circuit in fuser unit.
Solution
Description
Solution

ST-1000, ST-1100, ST-1200.
845
EP3050
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
846
EP3120
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution
847
EP3150
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution
848
EP3170
Description
Solution
849
EP3190D
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution
850
EP4000
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
J ams occur on the feeder (AF-5 or AFR-12) as soon as the copy cycle is started, can this be corrected?
Solution
This can be corrected by following the adjustment procedure for the jam sensors on bulletin 2563
Description
During the copy process, the document feeder stopped and is not recognized by the machine.
Solution
CAUSE: Dirty paper detection patches for the entrance and exit sensors. Original style PWB-A.
Please check the following:
1) The PWB-A in the document feeder has been changed. The part number for the AFR-13 is 4475-0102-01 and for the AFR-1000 it is 4484-0104-01. Refer
to Bulletin 2388 for further details.
2) Check the Black Patches for the Entrance and Exit J am Sensors to be sure that they are clean. Build up of paper lint will cause them to malfunction.
851
EP4000
Description
How can skewing of originals fed through the AFR-13 or AFR-1000 be corrected.
Solution
The skewing can be corrected by check the following items.
1) Check that the proper adjustments for the feeder have been carried out as outlined in the Service Manual.
2) A new style pre-separation plate is available (part number 4475-3315-03). Please refer to bulletin
2313 .
3) A anti-skew guide has also been made available (part number 4475-SKEW-01). Please see bulletin 2564 .
4) The changes described in bulletin 2711 can also reduce skewing.
Description
How to correct for skewing on the second side of the original when fed in the AFR-13 or AFR-1000.
Solution
Solution: For second side skewing, there is an adjustment that can be made to minimize the skew. The clearance between plate (4475-4303-03) and plate
(4475-4401-02) needs to be set to 2 mm.To correct for skewing in the AFR-13 or AFR-1000 carry out the following steps.
1) Remove the front cover (4475-1401-03) from the AFR-13.
2) Remove the transport belt assembly.
3) Remove the 4 screws that secure the front frame (4475-4301-01) of the turn over unit to the main frame (4475-1407-02).
4) Lift up the turnover unit so that it can be removed from the aligning pins on the main frame.
5) Move the turn over section to the left so that the screw that secures guide plate (4475-4303-03) to guide plate (4475-4401-02) is visible
through the access hole in the front frame. Caution should be taken not to move the turn over
unit to far to the left since the frame may be damaged.
6) Loosen the screw and move guide plate (4475-4303-03) so that the clearance between it and guide plate (4475-4401-02) is 2mm.
7) Follow the above steps in reverse to reassemble the feeder.
Description
Multiple sheet feeding on the AF-5/AFR-12.
Solution
Make sure that the document feeder still meets factory specifications (i.e.; that the pressure springs for the separator pads have not been cut or stretched).
The existing separator pads in the AF-5 and AFR-12 (4474-0217-03) can be replaced with the pads from the AFR-1000 (4408-0751-01) as a temporary
solution to help improve separation. Please follow the steps listed below to replace the separator pad:
1. Remove the separator pads from the AF-5/AFR-12.
2. Remove the Gray separator pad from the black holder (4474-0217-03) and discard only the gray pad.
3. Clean all the remains of the double-sided tape from the black holder. (This holder will be used again in Step 7.)
4. Remove the AFR-1000 (4408-0751-01) separator pad from the black holder and discard the holder.
5. Clean the remains of the double-sided tape from the backside of the AFR-1000 separator pad.
6. Trim 1mm from either short edge of the AFR-1000 separator pad (the gray pad may be used as template).
7. Attach the AFR-1000 separator pad into the black holder that was originally used in the AFR-12 using double-sided tape or glue.
Note: When installing the pad into the holder, the curve of the pad should be facing out and the thicker edge down toward the mylar attached to the black
holder.
Description
I have a problem with the control panel, but only the LCD needs to be replaced. Is there a part number for that by itself?
Solution
Bulletin 2322 lists the part number of the LCD
Description
Solution
852
EP4000
853
EP4050
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
854
EP415Z
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
855
EP4210
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution
856
EP4230
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution
857
EP4233
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
858
EP4300
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution
859
EP4301
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution
860
EP4320
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution
861
EP4321
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution
862
EP50
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
863
EP5000
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
During the copy process, the document feeder stopped and is not recognized by the machine.
Solution
CAUSE: Dirty paper detection patches for the entrance and exit sensors. Original style PWB-A.
Please check the following:
1) The PWB-A in the document feeder has been changed. The part number for the AFR-13 is 4475-0102-01and for the AFR-1000 it is 4484-0104-01. Refer to
Bulletin 2388 for further details.
2) Check the Black Patches for the Entrance and Exit J am Sensors to be sure that they are clean. Build up of paper lint will cause them to malfunction.
Description
The machine is very noisy during operation and there is a blank spot at the trail edge of duplexed copies.
Solution
Cause: If the incorrect firmware has been installed in the machine these problems could be experienced.For example, if an EP5000 EPROM were installed in
an EP4000.
Solution: Check that the correct firmware has been installed as it corresponds to the EP4000/EP5000.
864
EP5000
Description
Solution
Note:
Description
Why when trying to copy a small original such as a business card, does the copier display "Matching Paper Not Found."
Solution
Cause: The correct User Choice Settings have not been made.
Solution: Please make sure that the following User Choice settings have been made:
1) On screen 1 (of 6), set Copier Mode Priority to "Auto Paper."
2) On screen 4 (of 6), set Smaller Originals to "On."
Description
When the print button is pressed, the scanner scans the 8.5x11 original, but the scanner returns slowly. The machine is runnig slowly because of this.
Solution
CAUSE: Worn or damaged scanner rail pads.
SOLUTION: Please check the pads on the scanner rails. If they are discolored or dried out they should be replaced.
Description
Solution
Description
How to correct for skewing on the second side of the original when fed in the AFR-13 or AFR-1000.
Solution
Solution: For second side skewing, there is an adjustment that can be made to minimize the skew. The clearance between plate (4475-4303-03) and plate
(4475-4401-02) needs to be set to 2 mm.To correct for skewing in the AFR-13 or AFR-1000 carry out the following steps.
1) Remove the front cover (4475-1401-03) from the AFR-13.
2) Remove the transport belt assembly.
3) Remove the 4 screws that secure the front frame (4475-4301-01) of the turn over unit to the main frame (4475-1407-02).
4) Lift up the turnover unit so that it can be removed from the aligning pins on the main frame.
5) Move the turn over section to the left so that the screw that secures guide plate (4475-4303-03) to guide plate (4475-4401-02) is visible
through the access hole in the front frame. Caution should be taken not to move the turn over
unit to far to the left since the frame may be damaged.
6) Loosen the screw and move guide plate (4475-4303-03) so that the clearance between it and guide plate (4475-4401-02) is 2mm.
865
EP5000
7) Follow the above steps in reverse to reassemble the feeder.
866
EP5050
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
867
EP5320
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution
868
EP5400
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution
869
EP5401
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
870
EP5420
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution
871
EP6000
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
Description
872
EP6000
Solution
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

ST-1000, ST-1100, ST-1200.
873
EP6001
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
874
EP8010
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution
875
EP8015
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
876
EP8015
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

ST-1000, ST-1100, ST-1200.
877
EP8600
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution
878
EP8601
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution
879
EP8602
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution
880
EP8603
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution
881
EP9760
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution
882
ePware
Description
What applications can not register documents in ePware*.
Solution
It has been confirmed that the following applications cannot be registered in ePware.
Adobe* PageMaker* 6.5
Adobe Illustrator 8.0
Adobe Photoshop* 5.5
Lotus ScreenCam* 2000
Lotus WordPro* 2000 documents (when registering on Windows* 9x and Windows Me operating systems, please set OFF the DDE setting in the folder option
setting. No problems will occur with Windows NT4.0 and Windows 2000.
Excel documents without any entered information (when trying to register such file, an alert screen will be displayed from the Excel and the file will not be
converted into PDF.
Notes:
1. When registration process is operated to the above application documents, it is necessary to stop the registration process by clicking the 'cancel' button in
the 'PDF Conversion and Registration' dialog. When handling such application documents with the ePware, you need to convert the documents into PDF with
the Adobe Acrobat, and then register the PDF converted documents.
2. The caution to be noted when registering the Excel documents is the sheet valid in Excel will only be PDF-converted.
3. If the application linked with the text document (.TXT) is memo pads, you can not register a text document over 32K. Either save it as a document with an
application that can handle large volume text documents, or convert the documents into PDF before registration.
4. When registering several application documents in a batch, if the above-mentioned 'not-registrable document' is included, the file can not be registered.
Description
Is Adobe* Acrobat* (full version) including Distiller a requirement before you can install ePware*?
Solution
The full version of Adobe Acrobat version 4 or newer must be installed prior to installing ePware version 1. ePware version 2.x recommends using the full
version of Acrobat version 5 or newer.
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
'Failed to create PDF' message when loading Microsoft* Word 2000 document into software.
Solution
CAUSE: Incorrect conversion procedure.
SOLUTION: In order to properly convert documents into a PDF and transfer to the Epware database you must use the PDF Writer in Adobe* Acrobat* version
4.05 or 5.0.
Note: Please review the documentation for installing and running Epware (on the install CD) prior to using the utility.
Description
Unable to register documents after installing ePware* version 1 or version 2 on a PC or server.
Solution
Administrative rights are required to properly install and use ePware. Please refer to the Readme1st.txt file located on the user CD.
883
ePware
Description
ePware* experienced a sudden error/failure, and when the application was restarted, a document could not be registered into a cabinet.
Solution
CAUSE: The database file which managed the cabinet has collapsed.
SOLUTION: Restore the cabinet using "Cabinet Rebuilder", a cabinet restoration utility, located in the "TOOLS" folder on the product CD-ROM.

Description
When using ePware* 2.0. there appears to be an incompatibility problem with Acrobat* Professional version 6.0.
Solution
CAUSE: ePware needs to be updated.
SOLUTION: ePware version 2.2 is required to support functionality of the program when used in conjunction with Acrobat Professional 6.0.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution
Description
Is the full version of Adobe* Acrobat* required before installing either version of ePware*?
Solution
Acobat Distiller is required to support the operation of ePware. Please refer to the Readme1st.txt file located on the User installation CD. The file contains all
of the restrictions for this product.
884
FAX 820L
Description
M041, CHECK DRUM shows in LCD.
Solution
CAUSE: The drum set is near the end of it's life (message shows at 14,900 prints).
SOLUTION: Replace the drum unit with a new unit. If the drum unit was replaced and did not clear the error message, reset the drum counter using the
following steps.
1. Press [FUNCTION], [SET] and [CONTRAST] three times.
2. Press [FUNCTION], [1], [DOWN ARROW] and [SET].
3. The display should now show
SET PRINTER EEPROM
DRUM =(current drum count)
4. Press [0] five times to zero out old drum count.
5. Press [SET]; then, [STOP] twice.
6. The LCD will still show CHECK DRUM.
7. Turn the fax OFF for about five seconds; then, turn it back ON.
8. CHECK DRUM message should now be cleared.
Description
How to program a multi-station and/or program a multi-station into a one-touch key.
Solution
Note: A maximum of 200 abbreviated numbers plus 10 long hand numbers can be specified for a multi-station transmission.
PROCEDURE TO PROGRAM A MULTI-STATION
1. Place documents face down on the ADF.
2. Press [MULTI/CHAIN].
3. Specify the desired fax numbers by using abbreviated numbers or long hand dialing. Press [SET] after each number. If you specify an abbreviated
number, press the [ABBR/ALPHA] key before entering the 2-digit number.
Example: [ABBR/ALPHA], [0], [1], [SET], [ABBR/ALPHA], [0], [2], [SET] etc.
6. Press [START].
7. The fax will now scan all of the pages into memory and send the documents to each location.
PROCEDURE TO PROGRAM A MULTI-STATION TRANSMISSION INTO A ONE-TOUCH KEY
1. Press [FUNCTION], [1], [DOWN ARROW] twice and [SET].
2. Select the one-touch key you want to program by pressing the corresponding one-touch program key on the operation panel.
3. Press [SET] and the LCD will start to flash. Place a document into the ADF.
4. Press [MULTI/CHAIN]
5. Specify the desired fax numbers by using abbreviated numbers or long hand dialing. Press [SET] after each number. If you specify an abbreviated
6. Press [START].
7. The screen for storing the next one-touch program key will now be displayed.
If you want to store another one-touch key, start at step 2 and repeat the above procedure.
If you are done, press [STOP] twice.
See pages 144 to 147 and 112 to 117 in the FAX 820L/825L User's Reference Guide.
Description
How to program a fax number into an one-touch key.
Solution
Note: One-touch keys 01 to 40 are preprogrammed to dial their corresponding abbreviated numbers. Example: If you press the one-touch key 03, it will
automatically dial the fax number programmed in ABBR 03. The only time you should have to program a one-touch key, is if you want to program a special
feature, such as a multi-station.
Also, you cannot edit a one-touch key. In the case of a multi-station, stored in a one-touch key, you must completely reenter ALL locations.
To program a fax number into an one-touch key, perform the following steps.
NOTE if any documents are stored in memory programming the one-touch keys will not be available.
4. Enter the remote fax number using the numeric ten key pad Note: Use the [DIAL/-] key to insert a hyphen.
5. Press [START].
885
FAX 820L
See pages 60 to 65 in the FAX 820L/825L User's Reference Guide.
Description
How to program ABBR Numbers
(Abbreviated numbers).
Solution
To program an ABBR number, perform the following steps.
2. Enter the abbreviated number you want to store using the numeric ten key pad (00-99 and *00-*99).
3. Press [SET]; then, enter the fax number using the numeric key pad.
Note: Press the [DIAL/-] key to enter a hyphen.
4. Press [SET]; then, enter the remote station name using the one-touch keys.
Note: Use the one-touch key 39 to enter a space.
5. Press [SET]. You may now enter a second fax number for this same location and press [SET] twice or just press [SET] twice to bypass this feature.
6. The LCD will now show the next available abbreviated number.
7. To store another abbreviated number, repeat this procedure starting at step 2.
To end programming, press [STOP].
Description
Solution
If drum unit was replaced and did not clear CHECK DRUM message, reset the drum counter using the following steps.
1. Press [FUNCTION], [SET], [CONTRAST] three times.
2. Press [FUNCTION], [1], [DOWN ARROW], and [SET].
3. Display should now show
SET PRINTER EEPROM
4. Press [0] five time to zero out old drum count.
5. Press [SET] and then [STOP] twice.
7. Turn fax OFF for about five seconds, and then turn it back ON.
Description
M014
Solution
CAUSE: Printer J am.
SOLUTION: Remove paper jam and reset error message by opening and closing recording section door.
If error occurs again, check the following:
1. Burrs on inside of turnguide. Install turnguide modification (p/n FE97-1020) per FAX 820/825 Bulletin #11.
2. Replace Friction Pad (p/n 748046030) in PFU if worn.
3. Replace Paper Feed Roller (p/n 748046040) if worn.
4. Replace Paper Feed Roller Clutch (p/n 748085230) if slipping or not driving Paper Feed Roller.
5. Replace Resist Roller (p/n 7480-4610) if worn or glazed.
6. If this occurs on initial setup, check for colored shipping tape that might not have been removed from the bottom of the cassette lift-up plate.
7. The EEPROM (p/n 7500-9210) on the printer control board has failed.
8. Exit sensor or registration sensor is on at powerup.
Try printer test mode in service mode. See page 5-5 in service
manual form more details. Watch display for sensor activity.
See Bulletin #11 for detailed information on the turnguide modification.
Description
Paper jams halfway past the paper exit rollers during reception and copy.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Over a period of time the paper exit rollers may become worn, hard or glazed. Clean exit roller with isopropyl alcohol. If this symptom continues, replace
the upper exit roller (p/n 748046600) and lower exit roller (p/n 748046610).
886
FAX 820L
2. The Exit Drive Belt (p/n 748015610) is slipping due to soiling or wear. Clean or replace belt as needed.
3. Exit roller bushings (p/n 750040680) are soiled, binding, or worn. Clean or replace bushings as needed.
Description
Receive paper jams as it feeds from cassette.
Solution
CAUSE: Burrs have formed on the inside of the turnguide located on the right side of the fax.
Other causes for paper jamming from casstte are worn friction pad, worn paper feed roller or a slipping paper feed clutch.
SOLUTION: Install mylar turnguide modification (p/n FE97-1020) on guide (L) as per FAX 820/825 Bulletin #11.
If burrs are not present on turnguides or modification does not correct jamming, inspect and/or replace the friction pad (p/n 748046030), paper feed roller (p/n
748046040) and paper feed roller clutch (p/n 748085230) as needed.
Description
D282, REDIAL OVER shows in LCD.
Fax machine was not able to contact remote fax.
Solution
CAUSE: The remote fax was busy during all of the redials, fax number dialed was incorrect, or remote fax was set to Manual Receive mode and the call was
never answered.
SOLUTION: Verify fax machine and fax number of remote location and transmit again.
Description
M004
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Abnormality of heater (occurs when WAIT continues for 120 seconds). Verify the following items.
a. Fixing Heater Lamp (p/n 748085130).
b. Thermistor (p/n 748085120).
c. Thermostat (p/n 748085160).
To clear error, reset Function Parameter address 0D2, bit 0, to a 0, using the following steps.
a. Press [FUNCTION], [SET] and [CONTRAST] three times.
b. Press [FUNCTION], [1] and [DOWN ARROW] twice.
c. Press [SET], [0], [D], [2], [0], [0], [SET] and [STOP] twice.
2. Abnormality of the printer EEPROM. Replace the printer EEPROM (p/n 7500-9210) and/or printer control board (p/n 748085200) as needed.
887
FAX 820L FP
Description
How to program FAX ID.
Solution
To program the FAX ID, perform the following steps.
1. Press [FUNCTION], [SET], [8], [0], [0] and [SET] three times.
2. Enter a name using the one-touch program keys on the right side of the operation panel.
Note: Use one-touch key 39 to enter a space.
3. Press [SET], [SELECT] and [SET].
4. Enter the fax phone number using the numeric ten key pad.
Note: Use the [DIAL/-] key to enter a hyphen.
5. Press [SET] and then [STOP].
Note: The easiest way to erase or change the FAX ID is to use the steps above to overwrite the old information.
Description
M041, CHECK DRUM shows in LCD.
Solution
CAUSE: The drum set is near the end of it's life (message shows at 14,900 prints).
SOLUTION: Replace the drum unit with a new unit. If drum unit was replaced and did not clear the error message, reset the drum counter using the following
steps.
SET PRINTER EEPROM
4. Press [0] five times to zero out old drum count.
7. Turn fax OFF for about five seconds; then, turn it back ON.
Description
Receive paper jams as it feeds from cassette.
Solution
CAUSE: Burrs have formed on the inside of the turnguide located on the right side of the fax.
Other causes for paper jamming from casstte are worn friction pad, worn paper feed roller or a slipping paper feed clutch.
SOLUTION: Install mylar turnguide modification (p/n FE97-1020) on guide (L) per FAX 820/825 Bulletin #11.
If burrs are not present on turnguides or modification does not correct jamming, inspect and/or replace the friction pad (p/n 748046030), paper feed roller (p/n
748046040) and paper feed roller clutch (p/n 748085230) as needed.
Description
Solution
Note: To easiest way to erase or change the FAX ID is to use the steps above to overwrite the old information.
888
FAX 820L FP
Description
M014
Solution
8. Exit sensor or registration sensor is on at powerup.
Try printer test mode in service mode. See page 5-5 in service
manual form more details. Watch display for sensor activity.
Description
M005
Solution
CAUSE: Abnormality of printer EEPROM.
SOLUTION: Replace Printer EEPROM (p/n 7500-9210) and/or Printer Control Board (p/n 748085200).
Description
CHANGE T-BOTTLE shows in LCD.
Solution
CAUSE: The toner waste bottle needs to be replaced.
SOLUTION: Replace the toner waste bottle using the following steps.
1. Open the top cover by lifting the Top Cover Release Lever.
2. Gently pull the top edge of the front cover, under the Operation panel, toward yourself with both hands.
3. Lift the bottle cover to reveal the T-Bottle.
4. Remove the T-Bottle by pulling it straight out from the fax.
5. Install a new T-Bottle or clean and replace the old bottle.
Note: The T-Bottle MUST be clean to reset the error message. Even a light dusting of toner in the bottle may keep the message from resetting.
6. Slide the door down to cover the T-Bottle, close the front door and then close the top cover.
7. The CHANGE T-BOTTLE message should now clear. In some cases, a new error of CHANGE TONER may appear. In that case, follow the instuctions for
replacing the Toner Unit.
Note: If a replacement T-Bottle is not available, the bottle can be cleaned and reused.
Description
No dial tone on handset or speaker.
Solution
CAUSE: Dead phone line, phone line disconnected from wall jack/fax, or damaged NCU board.
SOLUTION: Plug handset directly into the phone jack at the wall. If there is no dial tone, the phone line is dead. If dial tone is present, the NCU (p/n
748187970) could be bad.
Description
How to program ABBR Numbers
(Abbreviated numbers).
889
FAX 820L FP
Solution
To program an ABBR number, perform the following steps.
2. Enter the abbreviated number you want to store using the numeric ten key pad (00-99 and *00-*99).
3. Press [SET] and then enter the fax number using the numeric key pad.
Note: Press the [DIAL/-] key to enter a hyphen.
4. Press [SET] and then enter the remote station name using the one-touch keys.
Note: Use the one-touch key 39 to enter a space.
5. Press [SET]. You may now enter a second fax number for this same location and press [SET] twice or just press [SET] twice to bypass this feature.
6. The LCD will now show the next available abbreviated number.
7. To store another abbreviated number, repeat this procedure starting at step 2.
To end programming, press [STOP].
Description
How to program multi-station and/or program multi-station into one-touch key.
Solution
3. Specify the desired fax numbers by using Abbreviated numbers or long hand dialing. Press [SET] after each number. If you specify an abbreviated
6. Press [START].
7. The fax will now scan all pages into memory and the send the documents to each location.
6. Press [START].
890
FAX 9615 FP
Description
How to initialize the FAX 9615 FP.
Solution
To initialize the fax, perform the following steps:
1. Remove the plastic cover sheet on the operation panel.
2. Actuate the service switch, located below the LCD, with a paper clip or pin point.
4. Press [4], [6], [ENTER], [0], [ENTER], [1] and [ENTER].
Description
PAPER J AM 1 message.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. If the paper reach transfer roller and the paper is skewed on the same side as the roller then check the cassette for damage.
2. Faulty J am 1 sensor. Perform self test printing. If paper reach J am 1 sensor, check and replace J am 1 sensor.
3. Defective paper supply roller. If paper does not reach J am 1 sensor, clean or replace paper supply roller.
4. If paper supply roller does not attempt to drive the paper:
a. Check for a defective paper supply solenoid.
b. Check for faulty power supply.
c. Check for faulty main PCB.
5. The intermediate cassette drive gear (CF 2 gear) is not making proper contact with the main body drive gear. Paper feed will not take place. Remove the
cassette feed unit from the main body and inspect the CF 2 gear to ensure that it is not bound up or that damage has not occurred. Ensure that the tension
spring is attached to the gear lever to provide proper gear movement. Replace if damage has occurred to the CF 2 gear (p/n 759477020).
Description
REPLACE DEV message.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. REPLACE DEV message is displayed even though a new developer unit is installed, the toner is packed on one end of the developer unit.
Gently shake the developer unit from side to side, being careful not to spill any toner. Reinstall the developer unit into the fax.
2. The toner in the developing cartridge has run out.
Replace the developing cartridge.
3. If the message is premature, the lustrous film agitator inside the developer unit has become detached from it's shaft. The toner photosensor detects the
agitator, causing the REPLACE DEV message.
Replace the developer unit, PCUA 930966.
Description
How to program a one-touch key.
Solution
To program a fax number into a one-touch program key, perform the following steps;
2. Press the one-touch key to be programmed.
3. Press [ENTER].
4. Dial the fax number of the remote party.
5. Press [ENTER].
6. If you wish to program the party's name do as follows. If no name is to be entered press [ENTER].
[ONE-TOUCH 08]: enters a space
[ONE-TOUCH 09]: cursors left
[ONE-TOUCH 10]: cursors right
Press the numeric keys below to cycle through the characters listed below.
[1]: QZqz
[2]: ABCabc
[3]: DEFdef
[4]: GHIghi
[5]: J KLjkl
[6]: MNOmno
[7]: PRSprs
891
FAX 9615 FP
[8]: TUVtuv
[9]: WXYwxy
[0]: 0
[*]: */.,[]"-
[#]: #
7. Select the modem transmission speed.
0: H (14400)
1: L (4800)
8. Press [ENTER].
9. If you do not wish to change the special speed setup press [ENTER]. To change the special speed setup press [0] for OFF and [1] for ON and press
[ENTER].
10. To program an additional one-touch key press [0] and [ENTER], then repeat this procedure. To end programming press [1] and [ENTER].
Description
How to delete memory files.
Solution
Before deleting memory files, print out the memory files list by pressing [MENU], [5], [2] and [ENTER] twice.
To delete the memory files perform the following steps;
1. Press [MENU], [1] twice and [ENTER].
2. Press [MENU] repeatedly to select the desired file.
3. Press [ENTER].
4. If there are no memory files showing on the list but memory still shows some a percentage less than 100%. Turn the machine off for 5 seconds and
reboot.
If the memory files cannot be cleared using the above procedure, initialize the memory using the following steps. Note: This will not delete user stored
numbers.
Description
How to install memory upgrade/information.
Solution
To add the memory upgrade, perform the following steps;
1. Turn fax off and unplug the AC power cord from the fax.
2. Remove the rear plastic cover (2 screws).
3. Remove the metal cover plate over Main CB (4 screws).
4. Attach 4 spacers to the memory board.
5. Fasten memory board to the back of cover plate.
6. Reinstall the cover plate, pressing down on the connector section of the cover plate to plug in memory board.
7. Secure the cover plate (4 screws) and make sure ground wires are attached.
8. Reinstall the rear cover (2 screws).
9. Plug in AC power cord and turn power ON. The LCD should now show the memory capacity.
Page capacity for fax memory.
Standard 256KB memory =approximately 11 pages*.
Optional 1MB memory expansion board (PCUA 930-968) =approximately 60 pages*.
Optional 2MB memory expansion board (PCUA 930-969) =approximately 120 pages*.
* Pages measured at 4% fill.
Description
Cannot transmit or receive.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The phone line is dead.
Check phone line with by attaching a phone. If no dail tone is present on the line, end user should contact their local phone company to have phone line
serviced.
2. If no dial tone on handset, but dial tone is present at wall jack, NCU board damaged.
Replace NCU board (p/n 759387030).
3. Fax is installed on a PBX phone system that requires dialing a 9 (or another prefix number) before the phone number.
Dial 9 before phone number to access an outside line.
892
FAX 9615 FP
4. If the machine is locked-up, initialization is required..
To initialize the fax, perform the following steps.
a. Remove the plastic cover sheet on the operation panel.
b. Actuate the service switch, located below the LCD, with a paper clip or pin point.
c. Press [MENU], [2], [8] and [ENTER] twice.
d. Press [4], [6], [ENTER], [0], [ENTER], [1] and [ENTER].
5. The modem is not outputting tones.
Bad Modem on Main Control Board. Replace main CB (p/n 759387020).
6. Faulty main control board.
Replace main control board (p/n 759387020).
Description
REPLACE DRUM is displayed.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The drum has reached the end of its life cycle.
Replace drum.
2. If the message is premature, the waste toner sensor is falsely actuated.
Reseat the drum unit to reset the waste toner sensor actuator.
3. If the message is premature, incorrect supplies were added to the FAX 9615 FP developer unit. Incorrect supplies include those not designed for the 9615
as well as supplies that do not meet Konica quality standards. This caused the waste box on the drum unit to fill prematurely.
Replace the developer and the drum units.
Description
Cannot receive.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Phone cord is plugged into the handset connector jack on the fax.
Plug the phone cord into the TEL LINE jack.
2. If the machine cannot receive in AUTO mode, the fax's memory has become scrambled and needs to be initialized.
Description
Solution
The FAX 9615 FP does not have a drum counter. Drum replacement is sensed by a flag on the drum unit waste box.
893
FAX 9660
Description
How to initialize the machine.
Solution
To initialize the machine, perform the following:
2. Hold the COPY key down while powering the machine ON.
3. Press 3.
4. ALL DATA CLR is displayed. To clear all data press YES or press NO to select LOCATION DATA CLR or CONFIG DATA CLR and press YES.
5. ARE YOU SURE? is displayed.
6. Press YES.
7. Press STOP three times to return to the standby display.
Description
How to enable the TCR/MCF.
Solution
To enable the TCR/MCF (transmit confirmation report/message confirmation report), perform the following:
1. Power ON the machine while pressing the SELECT FUNCTION key.
2. Press YES.
3. Press 0 and then 1.
4. Press NO to cycle between ON or OFF.
5. Press YES to save setting.
6. Press STOP four times to return to normal operation.
Description
How to program the fax for direct or memory transmission.
Solution
To program the FAX 9660 to transmit directly or from memory, perform the following:
1. Press the SELECT FUNCTION key.
2. Press the one-touch 09 key.
4. Enter 1 and 8 from the keypad.
5. Press NO to toggle between MEM and FEED and press YES.
6. Press STOP four times.
Description
How to program and send to a group.
Solution
The FAX 9660 can be programmed for up to 20 groups, with each location having up to 129 locations. All locations to be called in a group must be
programmed as one-touch or auto-dial numbers. To program the group, perform the following:
1. Press the [Select Function] key.
2. Press one-touch key [8/Location Program]. The display shows LOCATION PROGRAMMING.
3. On the numeric keypad, press the [#] key. The display shows GROUP SETTING.
4. Using the numeric keypad enter the 2 digit group number you want to program. The range is 01 to 20.
5. The display shows the number of your current group and SELECT LOC.(SAO).
6. You can now add a location to your group:
a. To add a one-touch location, press the one-touch key. Press [YES] to add to the group.
b. To add an auto-dial, enter the 2 digit auto-dial number. Press [YES] to add to the group.
7. After you have completed the selection by pressing [YES], the display shows SELECT LOC. again. Continue to add or delete locations from your group.
Each group can contain up to all the one-touch and auto-dial locations of the FAX 9820.
8. When finished programming the group press [NO], the display will show LOCATION PROGRAMMING.
9. To program another group go back to step 3, to end press [SELECT FUNCTION].
To Broadcast using a group, perform the following:
1. Load documents.
2. Press [SELECT FUNCTION].
3. Press one-touch key [2/ Broadcast Feeder] Display shows BROADCAST/MEMORY TX.
4. Using the numeric keypad press [#] followed by the 2 digit group number.
5. Press [YES] to confirm.
6. Press [NO] at SELECT LOCATION(S) to finish selection.
7. IF multiple locations have been selected the machine will display a confirmation screen. Follow the prompts. When all selections are correct press the
[START] key. The documents will be scanned and transmission will begin.
894
FAX 9660
Description
The image of the first page is not printed on the TCR.
Solution
To have the image of the first transmitted page printed on the TCR, perform the following:
1. Turn OFF machine.
2. Press and hold the Select Function button while turning the machine ON.
3. Press Yes.
5. Press the No button until ON is shown in the display.
6. Press Yes.
7. Turn the machine OFF/ON to exit the service mode.
Note: The image will print on the TCR report as long as a memory transmission is performed. See to page 2-60 (Image in MCF) in the FAX 9660 Service
Manual for details.
Description
How to program the paper size for the paper trays.
Solution
To program the paper trays, perform the following:
1. Press the SELECT FUNCTION button.
2. Press one-touch key 9.
3. Press YES.
4. On the key pad, press 1 and then 3.
5. Press NO until the proper paper size is displayed, then press YES.
6. The second paper tray selection will be displayed. Press NO until the correct paper size is displayed.
7. Press STOP until the standby screen is displayed.
Description
Unable to receive faxes.
Solution
CAUSE: Memory is corrupted.
SOLUTION: Initialize the machine by performing the following:
1. Power machine OFF.
2. Hold the Copy key down while powering the machine ON.
3. Press 3.
4. Press the LEFT ARROW key three times.
5. Press STOP to return to the standby display.
Description
Add Toner Message does not clear after replacing the toner cartridge.
Solution
CAUSE: Toner packed in reservoir caused lever to move out of position
SOLUTION: Reposition magnet lever in drum unit. Before replacing the toner cartridge in the future, perform the following:
1. Remove the drum/toner assembly and gently shake the assembly to the left and right.
2. Tap lightly on the left side of the drum/toner assembly to dislodge toner caked in the drum unit toner reservoir.
3. This will help the magnet lever from being forced out position within the toner reservoir prior to adding the new toner cartridge.
Description
How to adjust the buzzer volume.
Solution
To adjust the buzzer volume, perform the following:
2. Press and hold the Select Function button down while powering the machine ON.
3. Press YES.
4. Enter 0 then 7.
Note: Do not use the one-touch button 7.
5. Press NO to select LOW, MID or HIGH.
6. Press YES after making selection.
895
FAX 9660
7. Press STOP until the normal standby screen is displayed.
Description
The Activity J ournal is not automatically printing.
Solution
CAUSE: The activity journal does not print automatically. The Activity J ournal must be manually printed.
SOLUTION: To print an Activity J ournal, perform the following:
1. Press the Select Function button.
2. Press the Report Print one-touch 6 button.
3. Press the Yes button.
896
FAX 9750
Description
Solution
programmed as one-touch or auto-dial numbers.
Programming the group:
6. You can now add a location to your group . Refer to the instructions below.
To add a one-touch location Press the one-touch key. Press [YES] to add to the group.
To add auto-dial. Enter the 2 digit auto-dial number. Press [YES] to add to the group.
To Broadcast using a group:
1. Load documents.
3. Press one-touch key [2/Broadcast Feeder] Display shows BROADCAST/MEMORY TX.
7. If multiple locations have been selected the machine will display a confirmation screen. Follow the prompts. When all selections are correct press the
Refer to the FAX 9750 User's Guide pages 33, 34, 45 and 46 for further details.
Description
How to initialize the FAX 9750.
Solution
2. Hold the copy key down while powering the machine ON.
3. Press 3.
Description
Unable to transmit or receive faxes.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Phone cord is plugged into the wrong phone jack on the FAX 9750 (a dial tone will be present by pressing the Hook V.Request button). Install telephone
line from the wall into the LINE jack on the FAX 9750.
2. Phone line is dead or NCU is damaged. If a dial tone is not present after pressing Hook V.Request button with the phone line is installed properly
(telephone line connected in the proper wall jack and in the LINE jack on the FAX 9750), verify the condition of the phone line by plugging an analog phone
into the wall jack. If no dial tone is present, the phone line is dead. If a dial tone is present, the NCU (p/n 40044501) on the FAX 9750 is damaged and needs
to be replaced.
Description
Solution
3. Press 3.
4. Press the LEFT ARROW key twice.
897
FAX 9750
Description
How to enable/disable the transmit confirmation report (TCR).
Solution
To enable the TCR, perform the following:
1. Power ON the machine while pressing the FUNCTION button.
2. Press YES.
6. Press STOP three times.
Description
Solution
Reset the drum counter only when you have finished installing a new image drum. You can only reset the counter when the CHANGE DRUM SOON
message is on the display. After replacing the drum, clear the message by performing the following:
1. Wait until the time, date and the answering mode appear on the display.
3. Press the one-touch 7 key. The display shows DRUM COUNT.
4. Press the Yes key to clear the image drum unit counter.
5. Press the STOP key to finish and return to normal operation.
Note: The CHANGE DRUM SOON message is a warning that the image drum cartridge in the fax may be approaching the end of its usable life.
CAUTION: Do not reset the drum counter at this time, as this will accelerate drum life deterioration.
The drum has used approximately 90% of its life based on an internal calculation. The drum yield count is based on the following print criterion: Using the
ITU-T 4% Test Chart #1:
1 page jobs yields approximately 9000 sheets.
3 page jobs yields approximately 14,000 sheets.
Continuous job yields approximately 20,000 sheets.

The CHANGE DRUM SOON message does not mean that the drum must be replaced immediately, nor does it cause the fax to stop working. The drum can
be used as long as print quality is acceptable, however, a replacement image drum and toner cartridge should be on hand. Replace the drum when print
quality deteriorates below an acceptable level.
Description
Where is the serial number located on the FAX 9750?
Solution
The serial number is located on a white bar-coded label on the left side of the unit.
Description
Can the machine have more than 15 one-touch numbers programmed into it?
Solution
The FAX 9750 can only have 15 one-touch keys programmed.
Description
Light transmissions and copies.
Solution
CAUSE: The contact image sensor (p/n 40141401) is out of adjustment.
SOLUTION: Perform sensor calibration test by performing the following:
1. Press FUNCTION, then the COPY key twice.
2. Press the LEFT ARROW key twice.
3. Press 2, then the LEFT ARROW.
4. Load a plain piece of white paper in the ADF.
5. Press the LEFT ARROW key. The contact image sensor will be calibrated automatically.
898
FAX 9750
Description
What is required to make the FAX 9750 a printer?
Solution
The required items for printing are the MFP PC I/F Kit (PCUA 950137). and J etsuite Pro software.
Notes:
1. The machine cannot scan or be networked.
2. The machine does not support Windows* 2000 or Windows XP.
899
FAX 9760
Description
How to initialize the machine.
Solution
3. Press 3.
5. Press STOP three times to return to normal operation.
Description
CHANGE DRUM SOON message.
Solution
CAUSE: CHANGE DRUM SOON message is a warning that the image drum cartridge in the fax may be approaching the end of its usable life.
The drum has used approximately 90% of its life based on an internal calculation. The drum yield count is based on the following print criteria: Using the

SOLUTION: This message does not mean that the drum must be replaced immediately, nor does it cause the fax to stop working. The drum can be used as
long as print quality is acceptable, however, a replacement image drum and toner cartridge should be on hand. Replace the drum when print quality
deteriorates below an acceptable level.
Note: Reset the drum counter only when finished installing a new image drum. Only reset the counter when the CHANGE DRUM SOON message is on the
display. After replacing the drum, clear the message by performing the following:
Description
Solution
To program a one-touch number, perform the following:
2. Press the one-touch 8 program key. The display shows LOCATION PROGRAMMING ENTER (SRCH, OT, A/D, #).
3. Press a one-touch key 1-15 to program. The display briefly shows NO=, ID=.
Note: To program one touch keys 16-30, lift the one-touch keyboard up and swing to the right.
4. After the display clears, enter the main fax number and press the Start key. The display shows NO= for about three seconds.
5. Enter the optional alternate fax number if desired.
6. Press the Start key to finish programming. The display shows LOCATION PROGRAMMING.
7. To continue programming go back to step 3.
8. When completed, press the Select Function key.
Description
Does J etSuite* Pro version 1.1 support Windows* 2000.
Solution
J etSuite Pro version 1.1 does not support Windows 2000.
* Trademark ownership information .
Description
Cannot receive intermittently.
Solution
CAUSE: The memory has become scrambled and must be initialized.
SOLUTION: To initialize the machine, perform the following:
900
FAX 9760
3. Press 3.
Description
Black vertical lines on transmitted facsimiles and copies,
Solution
CAUSE: The CIS (Contact Image Sensor) is dirty or has failed.
SOLUTION: Clean CIS (Document Scanner Glass) with glass cleaner and soft cotton pad. Replace CIS (p/n 40141401) if the problem persists after
cleaning.
Description
What is needed to make the FAX 9760 a printer?
Solution
The machine can be made a printer by installing the MFP Kit J etSuite* Pro (PCUA 950137). The kit includes the required drivers.
Notes:
1. The machine cannot be networked.
2. The machine does not support Windows* NT.
Description
Does J etSuite* Pro version 1.1 support Windows* NT?
Solution
J etSuite Pro version 1.1 does not support Windows NT.
Description
Solution
programmed as one-touch or auto-dial numbers. To program the group, perform the following:
6. You can now add a location to your group using either of the two methods below:
a. To add a one-touch location, press the one-touch key. Press [YES] to add to the group.
b. To add auto-dial, enter the 2 digit auto-dial number. Press [YES] to add to the group.
To Broadcast using a group, perform the following:
1. Load documents.
7. If multiple locations have been selected the machine will display a confirmation screen. Follow the prompts. When all selections are correct press the
901
FAX 9760
Description
REPLACE TONER CART message after replacing the toner cartridge.
Solution
CAUSE: The toner sensor actuator is not flagging the toner sensor for the proper amount of time. The sensor is mouted on the ACDC Drop Pwr unit (p/n
40035901).
SOLUTION: Clean the black toner actuator (p/n 50405501) (on the front, left corner of the FAX 9760) and on the bottom of drum cartridge above the actuator.
902
FAX 9765
Description
Solution
3. Press 3.
Note: All settings for the machine will be reset to back factory.
Description
How to install Unimessage* Pro on Microsoft* Windows 2000.
Solution
To install Unimessage Pro, perform the following:
Note: Administrator's authority is required for installation with Windows 2000.
1. Confirm both the printer and the computer are turned OFF, connect the fax machine and the computer with a parallel interface cable. (IEEE standard
cable 1284)
2. Turn the computer ON and allow Windows to start.
3. Turn the fax machine ON. At the prompt indicating that a new device has been detected, select CANCEL.
4. Insert the Konica Unimessage Pro or LAN option CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
5. After the setup program has automatically started, click, 'Setup device driver and Unimessage Pro' and follow the on-screen instructions as appropriate.
This installs both the printer and the Unimessage Pro software.
Note: If you want to install only the driver, click 'Setup device driver'.
Note: If the setup program does not automatically start or Auto insert notification is turned off, Click 'Start Run' , Type in 'd:\setup.exe' (where D is the drive
letter of your CD-ROM drive) and click OK.
6. Click 'Next' on the Welcome Install screen.
7. Click 'Yes' on Software License Agreement screen.
8. Then 'Next' on the Language Default.
9. When 'Fax Port Installation' dialog appears, click OK.
10. When 'Welcome Add/Remove Hardware Wizard' dialog appears, click 'Next'.
11. When 'Choose a Hardware Task' dialog appears, select 'Add/Troubleshoot a device' and click 'Next'.
12. When 'New Hardware Detection' dialog appears, select 'Add a new device from the device list' and click 'Next'.
13. When 'Find New Hardware' dialog appears , select 'No, I want to select the hardware from a list' and click 'Next'.
14. When 'Hardware Type' dialog appears, select 'Ports (COM and LPT) from the list and click 'Next'.
15. When 'Select a Device Driver' dialog appears, click 'Have Disk'.
16. When 'Install from Disk' dialog appears, type 'D:\Driver\Setup\Disk1\Win2K' (where D is the drive letter of your CD-ROM drive) in 'Copy Manufacturer's
files from' and click 'OK'.
17. Select 'Konica Fax Port' from the list and click 'Next'.
18. When the 'Start Hardware Installation' dialog appears, click 'Next'.
19. When the 'Completing the Add/Remove Hardware Wizard' dialog appears, click 'Finish'.
20. Click 'Yes' to reboot. leave the CD-ROM in drive to complete installation of program at startup.
Description
Paper jams in the fuser unit.
Solution
CAUSE: Soiled or worn lower fuser roller.
SOLUTION: Clean and/or replace the roller (p/n 3PB4083-6064P002).
SPECIAL NOTE: Solution provided by Steven Deutsch, KBT Minneapolis.
Description
Does this model operate on an ISDN (Integrated Service Digital Network) phone service.
Solution
This model will only operate on PSTN (Public Switched Telephone Network) or PBX (Private Branch Exchange) which provide an analog signal.
Description
How to change dial parameters; redial tries, redial interval,dial tone detect, busy tone detect, MF (tone)/DP (pulse), PBX line, Auto start, and Dial prefix.
Solution
903
FAX 9765
To change Dial Parameters do the following:
2. Press the [9/User Program One Touch] key.
3. Press the [2] on the numeric keypad the display shows 2: DIAL PARAMETER.
4. Press the [YES ] key until the setting you want appears in the display.
6. Press the [YES
Description
How to enable the Long Document feature, 8.5 x 14 and longer. (380mm to 1500mm).
Solution
To enable long document transmission, perform the following:
1. Press Select Function key. The display will show:
SELECT FUNCTION (OT)
MEMORY AVAIL.=100%
2. Press Copy key twice. The display will show:
TECH. PROGRAMMING
YES( )
3. Press the left arrow. The display will show:
1: LOCAL TEST
YES( /1-6)
4. Press the right arrow. The display will show:
2.: TECHNICAL FUNCTION
YES ( /1-6)
5. Enter two-digit function. The display will show:
FUNCTION NO. [ ]
ENTER 01 - 31
6. Select 10 Long Document Transmission. The display will show:
10 : LONG DOC. SCAN
[ X] YES( ) uses arrows to toggle off/on.
7. Press Stop three times to return to ready screen.
Note: This feature only works to send and the receiving machine must have Page Continue or Split Page feature, or some other feature that provides the
largest size paper and to continue it onto another page.
Description
FAX 9765 will print same fax multiple times.
Solution
3. Press 3.
Description
Unable to select features after the select function key has been pressed with the one-touch keys.
Solution
CAUSE: The one-touch keypad cover is not actuating the switch on the operator panel board so that one-touch keys 16 through 30 are the only available
keys.

SOLUTION: Fully close the one touch keypad cover or adjust so that the switch is actuated.
Description
"Replace Toner Cartridge" message does not clear after adding toner.
Solution
CAUSE: Technical Function (TF31) 31 is not set to ON.
SOLUTION: To turn ON the the Toner Count Clear option, perform the following:
1. Enter the Technical Programming mode.
2. Press 2 , for Technical Function.
904
FAX 9765
3. Press YES.
4. Press 3 and 1.
5. Press NO. (Option should change to ON)
6. Press YES.
7. Press SELECT FUNCTION (The display will show PROGRAMMING).
Description
Solution
905
FAX 9820
Description
PRINTER ALARM 3 error message.
Solution
CAUSE: Fan motor rotation error has occurred.
SOLUTION: Open the printer section cover, then close it. If the error does not clear, check the fan motor and connectors.
Description
How to enable the TCR.
Solution
1. Power ON the machine while pressing the FUNCTION button.
2. Press YES.
6. Press STOP three times.
Description
How to initialize machine.
Solution
3. Press 3.
See page 2-21 and 6-25 in the FAX 9820 Service Manual.
Description
Solution
To reset the drum counter, perform the following:
1. Press FUNCTION and then ONE-TOUCH 7.
2. Press YES and then STOP.
CAUTION: The drum counter should not be reset unless new drum is installed.
Description
Solution
programmed as one-touch or auto-dial numbers.
Programming the group:
6. You can now add a location to your group . Refer to the instructions below.
To add a one-touch location Press the one-touch key. Press [YES] to add to the group.
To add auto-dial. Enter the 2 digit auto-dial number. Press [YES] to add to the group.
To Broadcast using a group:
1. Load documents.
906
FAX 9820
7. IF multiple locations have been selected the machine will display a confirmation screen. Follow the prompts. When all selections are correct press the
Refer to the FAX 9820 User's Guide pages 33, 34, 45 and 46 for further details.
Description
PRINTER ALARM 2 in display.
Solution
CAUSE: PRINTER ALARM 2 indicates an engine control error (optional second tray).
SOLUTION: Power the unit OFF/ON. If a lower tray option is installed make sure the manual feed tray is open. If this does not clear the message replace
the main CB.
Description
Solution
3. Press 3.
See page 2-21 and 6-25 in the FAX 9820 Service Manual.
Description
CHANGE DRUM SOON message.
Solution
CAUSE: CHANGE DRUM SOON message is a warning that the image drum cartridge in the fax may be approaching the end of its usable life.
The drum has used approximately 90% of its life based on an internal calculation. The drum yield count is based on the following print criterion: Using the

SOLUTION: This message does not mean that the drum must be replaced immediately, nor does it cause the fax to stop working. The drum can be used as
long as print quality is acceptable, however, a replacement image drum and toner cartridge should be on hand. Replace the drum when print quality
deteriorates below an acceptable level.
Note: Reset the drum counter only when you have finished installing a new image drum. You can only reset the counter when the CHANGE DRUM SOON
message is on the display. After replacing the drum, clear the message by performing the following:
Description
How to adjust the speaker volume.
Solution
To adjust the speaker volume, perform the following:
2. Press and hold the Select Function button down while powering the machine ON.
3. Press yes.
4. Enter 0 then 6.
Note: Do not use the one-touch button 6.
5. Press no to select off, low or high.
907
FAX 9820
6. Press yes after making selection.
7. Press stop until the normal standby screen is displayed.
Description
How to program paper trays.
Solution
To program the paper trays, perform the following:
1. Press the SELECT FUNCTION button.
2. Press one-touch key 9.
3. Press YES.
4. On the key pad press 1 then 3.
5. Press NO until the proper paper size is displayed then press YES.
6. The second paper tray selection will be displayed. Press NO until the correct paper size is displayed.
7. Press STOP until the standby screen is displayed.
908
FAX 9825
Description
Intermittent jamming under the drum.
Solution
CAUSE: Paper drive assembly, motors and\or drum are binding.
SOLUTION: To resolve the problem, perform the following:
1. To verify the drum unit is not packed with toner, perform the following:
a. Remove the toner stick.
b. If toner is packed to the top of toner entrance, vacuum out a small portion of the toner.
c. Run some copies through the FAX 9825.
d. Replace the drum (Item #950121), as necessary.
Note: This can be caused by adding toner before the Add Toner message is lit
2. Clean and lubricate the drive assembly gears and roller shafts with lithium grease. Replace the following parts, as necessary:
Pick Up roller assembly (p/n 7660-00010-00)
Pick Up roller bearings (p/n 7660-00054-00)
One-way clutch gear (p/n 7660-00047-00)
Fuser idler gear (p/n 7660-00048-00)
Eject Roller gear (p/n 7660-00049-00)
Stepping motor gear (p/n 7660-00046-00)
Reduction gear (p/n 7660-00050-00)
3. If necessary, return the printer control board (p/n 6200-00025-00) to the Electronic Service Center for modification and reinstall it when it has been returned.
CAUTION: Do not replace the Printer CB until steps 1 and 2 have been completed.
Notes:
1. See FAX 9825 Technical Bulletin 2 for repair procedures .
Description
How to connect the FAX 9825 to a network using J etSuite* for Networks.
Solution
Konica J etSuite for Networks (PCUA 950136) works in the following environments:
1. Windows 9x* peer-to-peer network (workgroup).
2. Windows NT* 4.0 server with the Konica FAX 9825 attached to an external print server like the HP J etDirect* or attached to the server's parallel port.
3. Novell* 4.x network with the Konica FAX 9825 attached to an external print server like the HP J etDirect, attached to the server's parallel port and running
the Pserver.nlm or attached to a remote station running the nprinter utility.
Konica J etSuite for Networks supports the Windows 3.x, Windows 9x or Window NT 4.0 operating systems for network clients. J etSuite for networks software
can have unlimited users.
Note: A patch (9825_NTpatch.exe) is available on the Konica FTP Site that is required for faxing with NT 4.0 workstations.
FTP site [[(Internal Link for Faxing/Printing FTP site information)| RUN V:\text\Wordpad.exe v:\text\CBC009.txt]]
FTP_ user site.txt file [[(Internal Link for Faxing/Printing FTP_ user site.txt file information)| RUN V:\text\Wordpad.exe v:\text\CBC010.txt]]
Note: For larger network environments, Konica recommends the use of an external print server like the HP J etDirect 150X or EX+. Konica recommends this
due to the ability of an external print server to provide superior installation flexibility and printing performance.
Description
Solution
To initialize the FAX 9825, perform the following:
1. Press the left arrow.
2. Press the star (*) button three times. The upper portion of the display screen will start to flash.
3. Press MENU, 6 and 2 twice.
4. Press the right arrow to select one of the following:
Documents
Phonebook
Configuration
Software Switches
Counters
Everything
5. Press ENTER.
909
FAX 9825
6. Press the START button to confirm initialization.
Description
Intermittently, paper is jamming under the drum.
Solution
CAUSE: The mylar that guides paper in the turn around area has become separated from the adhesive backing. This damaged mylar is not visible without
disassembly.
SOLUTION: Remove the damaged section of this mylar with a razor blade and ensure that any exposed adhesive backing material is also removed, and the
frame cleaned with alcohol.
Note: This procedure requires extensive disassembly to separate the plastic cover from the metal frame.
Description
Replace printer drum, Not installed message on display. There is a drum unit with toner installed in the machine.
Solution
CAUSE: The drum present/toner empty sensor is not functioning correctly.
SOLUTION: Make sure toner is evenly distributed in the drum unit by removing it from the machine and gently shaking it from side to side. Replace the drum
unit in the machine making sure that it seats properly. If this does not resolve the problem test the sensor to make sure that it is free to move. There is a small
magnet on the sensor that is attracted to the toner, lifting it moving the shutter through an optical interrupter located on the power supply board. Use a folded
piece of paper to lift the sensor and close the cover without a drum installed. After the warm-up period the unit will go into the ready state if the sensor is
detected as being up through the warm-up. If it doesn't detect the sensor being up during up it will display the drum not installed message. If the sensor is up
and the drum not installed message is still present it indicates a failed power supply board (p/n 6200-00015-00) or dirty optical interrupter. The machine will
have to be disassembled to check the interrupter condition.
Note: This is a new machine setup, verify the toner sensor magnet is installed. The magnet is not installed, replace the toner size actuator (p/n
7660-00011-00).
Description
J etSuite* for Networks software information.
Solution
Konica J etSuite for Networks (PCUA 950136) works in the following environments:
1. Windows 9x* peer-to-peer network (workgroup).
2. Windows NT* 4.0 server with the Konica FAX 9825 attached to an external print server like the HP J etDirect* or attached to the server's parallel port.
3. Novell* 4.x network with the Konica FAX 9825 attached to an external print server like the HP J etDirect, attached to the server's parallel port and running
the Pserver.nlm or attached to a remote station running the nprinter utility.
Konica J etSuite for Networks supports the Windows 3.x, Windows 9x or Window NT 4.0 operating systems for network clients. J etSuite for networks software
can have unlimited users.
Note: A patch (9825_NTpatch.exe) is available on the Konia FTP Site that is required for faxing with NT 4.0 workstations.
FTP site [[(Internal Link for Faxing/Printing FTP site information)| RUN V:\text\Wordpad.exe v:\text\CBC009.txt]]
FTP_ user site.txt file [[(Internal Link for Faxing/Printing FTP_ user site.txt file information)| RUN V:\text\Wordpad.exe v:\text\CBC010.txt]]
Note: For larger network environments, Konica recommends the use of an external print server like the HP J etDirect 150X or EX+. Konica recommends this
due to the ability of an external print server to provide superior installation flexibility and printing performance.
Description
How to flash the FAX 9825 from a computer.
Solution
To flash the FAX 9825 from a computer, perform the following:
Note: The phonebook should be printed out before the flash takes place, as it will be erased during this process.
1. Hold down SHIFT key as machine is powered on.
2. Boot to DOS (Command Prompt), by pressing F8 when Verifying DMI Pool Data appears.
3. Insert the floppy.
4. Type A: and then press ENTER from the keyboard.
5. Type "copy /b filename.rom lpt1:" and then press ENTER from the keyboard.
6. The FAX 9825 will reboot after the flash is completed.
Refer to page 2-33 in the FAX 9825 Service Manual.
910
FAX 9825
Description
How to read the total counter.
Solution
The 9825 does not have a mechanical meter. The total printed page count is listed on the Configuration Report. To print the report, sequentially press the
Menu key, the 1 key, the 3 key.
Description
NO DIAL TONE message at power up.
Solution
CAUSE: The connectors on the printer board were removed during troubleshooting and then connected at the wrong location. The LIU/J ack board (modem
board in back) connector is plugged into the main CB J 10 instead of the
SOLUTION: Insure the connector from the LIU/J ack board located at the rear of the unit on top of the printer board is connected to the LIU/J ack board,
(LIU/J ack board is mounted/piggy backed onto the main CB).
Description
How to clear a jam.
Solution
There are three main areas that you can locate and remove paper jams.
1. Pull out the paper tray and check for paper partially feed into the machine.
2. Open the printer cover (where the toner and drum are) and carefully lift the black drum unit out. Do NOT touch the green drum as this may cause poor
copy quality! Remove any paper stuck under the drum.
3. Paper can be partially fed out of the blue exit guide. In this case, push the blue plastic exit guide back into the machine to release pressure and pull the
paper out.
911
FAX 9830
Description
INVALID TONER CARTRIDGE error message.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
IMPORTANT NOTE (1-21-2003): Corrected toner is now being shipped. The toner will have the same lot number (5FA2Y165), but the magnet position has
been corrected. The individual toner can be identified by the cellophane bag the cartridge comes in. The faulty toner has a bag that is sealed on both ends
and sealed down the center. The corrected toner has been repackaged and only sealed on the bag's ends.
1. The magnet in the toner cartridge is incorrectly positioned. Move the end cap detection magnet on the toner unit from position 2 to position 3. To move
the magnet, perform the following:
a. Remove the end cap cover on the toner unit .
b. Move the end cap detection magnet on the toner unit from position 2 to position 3 .
c. Replace the end cap cover.
Note: This is a temporary solution for this problem. The faulty toner stock has been identified and will no longer be shipped. The faulty toner can be
identified as 'Made in UK' will appear on the label on the outside of the 6 carton box and the lot number is 5FA2Y165 .
2. The memory is corrupted and needs to be reset. To initialize the machine, perform the following:
a. Press the MENU/EXIT key and then, quickly, in rapid sequence, press the RESOLUTION key twice.
b. TECHNICAL PRG will be displayed. Use the down arrow and scroll to number "3. SYSTEM RESET" is displayed. Press the ENTER key.
c. Select one of the following using the up/down arrow keys.
1: ALL DATA CLEAR.
2: LOCATION DATA CLR.
3: CONFIG DATA CLR.
d. Press ENTER twice and STOP twice to return to normal mode.
e. When the display returns to the previous All data clear screen, turn the FAX 9830 OFF/ON.
3. If the message is still appears after performing ALL DATA CLEAR reset, enter the service mode and print the Self Diagnostic List. To print the Self
Diagnostic List, perform the following:
b. Select "LOCAL TEST".
c. Press ENTER.
d. Select "SELF DIAG".
e. Press ENTER.
f. FAX 9830 should be displayed in the "Device ID". The FAX 9930 is not displayed in the Device ID field; please contact the National Systems Solution
Group for further instructions.
Note: Please fax the "Self Diagnostics" page with the serial number and ticket number to 860-902-7643
4. Non-Konica toner is being used. Install Konica toner cartridge (item #950133).
5. The Toner Lockout Board has failed. Reseat the wiring harness from TLK to the main CB. Replace the TLK board (p/n 40807201), as required.
6. The lockout magnet is missing from the toner cartridge. Pry off the small gray cover and check that the magnet is in magnet holder number 3. If it is
missing replace the toner cartridge.
Hyperlink for internal use only.
Description
How to initialize the unit to factory defaults.
Solution
1. Press the MENU/EXIT key and then, quickly, in rapid sequence, press the RESOLUTION key twice.
2. TECHNICAL PRG will be displayed. Use the down arrow and scroll to number 3, SYSTEM RESET is displayed. Press the ENTER key.
3. Select one of the following using the up/down arrow keys.
1: ALL DATA CLEAR.
3: CONFIG DATA CLR.
4. Press ENTER twice and STOP twice to return to normal mode.
Description
How to enable TCR/MCF (transmission confirmation report).
Solution
1. Press MENU/EXIT button.
2. Press 7 and 0 from the keypad to display (70: MCF /Off/On).
3. Press Down Arrow button to toggle to On
4. Press ENTER button to confirm the change.
5. Press STOP three times to return to the standby mode.
912
FAX 9830
Description
MSG IN MEMORY and SWITCH OUTPUT LEVER message, but the FAX 9830 does not print the received fax.
Solution
CAUSE: The position of the grey lever on the left side of the machine is lower position (face up output).
SOLUTION: Put the grey lever to the up position for face down output.
Description
How to program a group dial (multistation).
Solution
To program a group dial, perform the following:
1. Press MENU/EXIT.
2. Press the down arrow to select LOCATION PROGRAM, press ENTER.
3. Press the down arrow to select GROUP, press ENTER.
4. Input a group number (from 1-20), press ENTER.
5. Enter the desired location by pressing either a one-touch key or a speed dial search key, press ENTER. Continue until all desired locations (up to 140) are
entered, press START.
6. Enter a group ID, press enter.
7. Press MENU/EXIT to return to standby mode.
Description
Does J etSuite* Pro version 2.1 support Windows* 2000 Professional?
Solution
J etSuite Pro 2.1 does not support Windows 2000 Professional.
Description
How to transmit a fax using a group dial.
Solution
Note: A group dial must be programmed before this feature may be used (see How to program a group dial).
To transmit using group dial, perform the following:
1. Insert document into feeder of the fax.
2. Press SPEED DIAL SEARCH.
3. Enter the first character of the group ID. The group name will appear on the display.
4. Press START.
Description
How to enable Department codes.
Solution
The FAX 9830 does not have the ability to use Department codes. This feature is available on the FAX 9825 and FAX 9925.
Description
Error codes 14C2 and 41CE when transmitting.
Solution
CAUSE: Corrupted machine memory is causing a transmission conflict.
2. TECHNICAL PRG will be displayed. Use the down arrow and scroll to 3 SYSTEM RESET. Press the ENTER key.
1: ALL DATA CLEAR.
3: CONFIG DATA CLR.
913
FAX 9830
Description
How to flash upgrade the firmware from a computer.
Solution
To flash the firmware from a computer, perform the following:
1. Press MENU/EXIT button on the FAX 9830.
2. Press the RESOLUTION button twice.
3. Press the SHIFT DOWN button four times until the display reads "PC LOADING".
4. Press ENTER to display the following:
PC LOADING
ARE YOU SURE ?
ENTER WHEN DONE
5. Ensure the parallel cable is connected between the PC and the FAX 9830.
6. If using Windows* 9x, it is highly recommended to restart the PC to the DOS Command Prompt. Reboot the PC and press the F8 function key during the
reboot.
Note: Flash updates performed from a Windows 9x Command Prompt window will not be successful.
7. If using Windows NT or 2000, perform the following:
a. Press Start.
b. Click on Run.
c. Type in 'CMD' to open command prompt window.
Note: Flash updates can be successfully performed from a Windows NT or 2000 Command Prompt window.
8. Type in the following command: "copy /b A:\filename.bin LPT1".
Notes: The filename will be different. The directory "A:\" would be different if the file was downloaded to a hard drive instead of a floppy disk.
9. Press ENTER from the keyboard.
10. Press ENTER from the FAX 9830.
Note: Steps 9 and 10 must be performed within 60 seconds of each other.
11. The FAX 9830 will display "PC LOADING/RECEIVING.
12. When the flash is completed the FAX 9830 will beep and display will read "PC LOADING/RESULT OK.
13. To initialize the machine, perform the following:
b. TECHNICAL PRG will be displayed. Use the down arrow and scroll to number 3, SYSTEM RESET is displayed. Press the ENTER key.
1: ALL DATA CLEAR.
3: CONFIG DATA CLR.
Note: To date there have been no firmware upgrades for the FAX 9830. If the machine needs to be flashed with the base level firmware, contact Technical
Support.
914
FAX 9880
Description
Solution
2. TECHNICAL PRG will be displayed. Use the down arrow and scroll to number 3, SYSTEM RESET is displayed. Press the ENTER key.
1: ALL DATA CLEAR.
3: CONFIG DATA CLR.
Description
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
b. TECHNICAL PRG will be displayed. Use the down arrow and scroll to '3. SYSTEM RESET'. Press the ENTER key.
1: ALL DATA CLEAR.
3: CONFIG DATA CLR.
b. Select 'LOCAL TEST'.
c. Press ENTER.
d. Select 'SELF DIAG'.
e. Press ENTER.
f. FAX 9880 should be displayed in the 'Device ID'. If the FAX 9880 is not displayed in the Device ID field, please contact the National Systems Solution
Note: Please fax the 'Self Diagnostics' page with the serial number and ticket number to 800-968-4213.
4. The ID/Toner Lockout Board has failed. Reseat the wiring harness from DLK to the main CB. Replace the DLK board (p/n 41286801), as required.
Description
MCF\TCR (message confirmation\transmission confirmation) report with first page of transmitted image enabled will pull from the legal size cassette instead
of the letter size cassette.
Solution
CAUSE: The machine to print MCF with image of first page transmitted image enabled
to legal sized cassette because a firmware bug.
SOLUTION: Flash the machine to the latest firmware level. To determine latest firmware level, perform the follow.
3. Press ENTER twice to print Self Diagnosis Report
4. Go the fourth line under Main Board should read PROGRAM1 VERSION AA4. If this line reads PROGRAM1 VERSION AA2 then update the machine to
latest firmware level.

To download and flash the firmware from a computer, perform the following:
1. Go to 'NSSG Web Support'.
2. Click on 'Download EPROMs' hyperlink.
3. Click 'Eprom for Plain Paper Fax' and then LIST FILES button.
4. Download 9980-codaaa4.zip to temporary directory (C:\9880).
Note: Firmware file '9980-codaaa4.zip" is used with FAX 9880 and 9980.
5. Unzip the file to temporary directory.
915
FAX 9880
PC LOADING
ARE YOU SURE ?
ENTER WHEN DONE
reboot.
12. If using Windows NT 4.0 or 2000, perform the following:
a. Click on START.
b. Click on RUN.
c. Type 'CMD' to open command prompt window.
Notes: Flash updates can be successfully performed from a Windows NT or 2000 Command Prompt window. Will have disable Unimessage* Pro and set FAX
9880 and Unimessage Pro driver to DISK during firmware upgrade.
1: ALL DATA CLEAR.
3: CONFIG DATA CLR.
Description
Solution
PC LOADING
ARE YOU SURE ?
ENTER WHEN DONE
reboot.
7. If using Windows NT 4.0, perform the following:
a. Press Start.
b. Press Programs.
c. Press Command Prompt to display C:\ or similar command prompt.
Note: Flash updates can be successfully performed from a Windows NT Command Prompt window.
1: ALL DATA CLEAR.
3: CONFIG DATA CLR.
Support.
916
FAX 9880
Description
T37 IFAX, how to setup the internet fax (sending/receiving E-mail) option.
Solution
The following information will be required before setting up the T37 IFAX:
1. Static or permanent lease TCP/IP* address assigned to the T37 IFAX.
2. Subnet mask assigned to T37 IFAX
3. Default gateway for T37 IFAX option.
4. SMTP server name or TCP/IP server address.
5. POP server name or TCP/IP server address.
6. POP User ID and POP password must be created on the POP server.
7. DNS primary and secondary DNS server's TCP/IP addresses, if required.
8. Host Name and Fax E-mail Address for T37 IFAX option.
Note: DHCP server will assign an TCP/IP address, subnet mask, gateway and primary and secondary DNS TCP/IP address to T37 IFAX.
Before setting up T37 IFAX network setting, perform the following:
1. Press MENU/EXIT.
2. Press 9 and then 3 from the keypad.
3. Press ENTER.
4. Press DOWN ARROW until '13: NIC INITIALIZE' is displayed.
5. Press OK twice.
6. Power OFF/ON.
To enter network information for the T37 IFAX, perform the following:
1. Press MENU/EXIT.
3. Press ENTER.
4. Enter the T37 IFAX TCP/IP address from the keypad and then press ENTER.
5. Press DOWN ARROW to move the cursor to 'SUBNET MASK' and then press ENTER.
6. Enter Subnet Mask from the keyboard and then press Enter.
7. Press DOWN ARROW to move the cursor to 'DEFAULT GATEWAY' and then press Enter.
8. Enter Default Gateway from keypad and then press Enter.
9. Press DOWN ARROW to scroll to 'SMTP SERVER NAME' and then press Enter.
10. Enter SMTP server TCP/IP address from keypad or server name from one-touch keys and then press Enter.
11. Press DOWN ARROW to scroll to 'POP SERVER NAME' and then press Enter.
12. Enter POP server TCP/IP address from keypad or server name from the one-touch keys and then press Enter.
13. Press DOWN ARROW to scroll to 'POP USER ID' and press Enter.
14. Enter the Pop User Id from the one-touch keys and then press Enter.
15. Press DOWN ARROW to scroll to 'POP PASSWORD' and then press Enter.
16. Enter the Pop Password from the one-touch keys and then press Enter.
17. Press DOWN ARROW to scroll to 'DNS. P. SRV ADDRESS' and then press Enter.
18. Enter DNS Primary Server TCP/IP address from keypad and press Enter.
19. Press DOWN ARROW to scroll to 'DNS S. SRV ADDRESS' and then press Enter.
20. Enter DNS Secondary Server TCP/IP address and then press Enter.
21. Press DOWN ARROW to scroll to 'HOST NAME' and then press Enter.
22. Enter Host Name from one-touch keys and then press Enter.
23. Press DOWN ARROW to scroll to 'FAX EMAIL ADDR.' and press Enter.
24. Enter the email address for FAX 9930 from one-touch keys and press Enter.
25. Power OFF/ON.
Description
How is the dial prefix option used?
Solution
The dial prefix option is used to store a four digit number/password that enables access to an outside line and is programmed to eliminate the need to dial the
password when accessing an outside line. At some locations a password is used to prevent unauthorized individuals from using the phone system. It is not
used to eliminate the dialing of the number 9 to access an outside line. When transmitting, the number 9 (normally used to access an outside line) will have
to be dialed before the fax number to access an outside line.
Description
How to enable TCR/MCF (transmission confirmation report).
Solution
917
FAX 9880
1. Press MENU/EXIT button.
2. Press 7 and 0 from the keypad to display (70: MCF /Off/On).
3. Press Down Arrow button to toggle to On
4. Press ENTER button to confirm the change.
5. Press STOP three times to return to the standby mode.
Description
How to display the print (total), scan, or drum counters.
Solution
To display the counters, perform the following:
1. Press Menu/Exit button.
2. Press Up or Down arrow buttons to display [12 COUNTER].
3. Press Enter to access counter menu.
4. Press Up or Down Arrow to scroll to display the following:
DRUM COUNT: Do not clear the drum counter until replacement drum has been installed.
PRINT COUNT: This is the total counter of receive faxes, internal test pages and copies.
SCAN COUNT: This is the total number of copies and transmitted faxes.
5. Press Enter to display the counter.
6. Press Stop to return to standby mode.
Note: The drum counter will only show when the Technical Function Service Bit (01) to set to ON. Also Two additional counters, TONER COUNT and
DRUM(T) COUNT, are available.
Description
How many fax numbers can be entered for a broadcast fax?
Solution
A broadcast fax will allow for a maximum of 20 numbers to be entered at one time.
Description
How to retrieve the password if forgotten or lost by the end user.
Solution
To retrieve the password, perform the following:
1. Power ON the fax machine while holding the MENU/EXIT key.
2. Press Down Arrow until the cursor is next to [02. ID/PASSWORD PRG].
3. Press Enter.
4. Press Down Arrow to until cursor is next to [06. DEPARTMENT CODE].
5. Press Enter.
6. Enter the 2 digit [DEPARTMENT NO.] and press Enter. If not known start at 01 and advance in single digit increments to 99. If the department number is
correct a 4 digit password will be displayed.
7. Press the MENU/EXIT key to return to normal operation.
918
FAX 9925
Description
The FAX 9925 is not keeping proper time.
Solution
The FAX 9925 time specification is +/- 5 minutes per month. If you are experiencing symptoms outside of the specifications reset the clock or replace the
main control board (3044-KON71-00). Following is the procedure for resetting the clock.
To reset the clock, perform the following:
1. Press [MENU], [6] and [1]. The LCD will display the following: _______Time_______
Time display
12 Hour
2. Press [ ] and [ENTER].
3. Press [ ] until the desired time format displays: 12 Hour or 24 Hour.
4. Press [ENTER]. The LCD will display the following:
_______Time_______
Date/time:
00-00-00 00:00PM
Enter date and time
5. Use the numeric keypad to enter the date and time.
5. Press [ ] until AM or PM is selected.
6. Press [ENTER].
7. Press [STOP] to go to standby mode.
Description
How to flash upgrade the firmware.
Solution
The firmware can upgraded either remotely or from a connected PC. Since the flash will clear all user data from the fax, print out the phonebook and
configuration page before performing the flash procedure.
To update the firmware remotely, initialize the local and remote fax and then follow the procedure for flashing the machine. To initialize the local and remote
fax, perform the following:
1. Press the left arrow once.
2. Press the star [*] button three times. The upper portion of the display screen will start to flash.
3. Press MENU, 7, 2, and 2.
4. Press the right arrow to select the following:
Everything
5. Press ENTER.
To remotely update the firmware, perform the following steps:
1. Place the FAX 9925 in the service mode by pressing No
Press , then ENTER.
4. Press until FLASH THE PROM is displayed.
5. Press ENTER.
Note: When upgrading the firmware, it is recommended to back up or at least print out current program information such as the Configuration, Phonebook
and softswitch list,
6. After the FLASH THE PROM option is selected, the display shows:
____Remote_Setup____
Password
_ _ _ _
Enter Password
7. Enter a four-digit password using the numeric keypad. The default password is 0000. Press ENTER.
8. The display shows:
____Remote_Setup____
Enter phone number:
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Enter phone number
9. Enter a phone number that the setup information is to be sent to.
10. Press Enter.
11. The FAX 9925 will call the number entered and send the flash information. Once done, the display shows SUCCESSFUL.
To update the firmware using a connected PC, perform the following:
1. Power the FAX 9925 OFF.
2. While powering the unit ON, press SHIFT on the one-touch key pad. Release the SHIFT key once the LCD displays:
M7BootXX - 10/01/99 (this data may vary)
0: Calibrate CIS
1: EMI test mode
2: Copy
4. If using Windows* 9x, it is highly recommended to restart the PC using the Command Prompt. Restart the PC into DOS mode. Reboot the PC and press
the F8 function key during reboot.
919
FAX 9925
5. The DOS prompt should be indicated.
6. Locate the file 9925-111.rom (the file name may vary) on the PC (i.e. to whichever directory the file was downloaded). If the rom file has been copied to
c:\temp\, type:
copy /b c:\temp\9925-111.rom lpt1:
7. Press Enter.
8. The file is now sent to the FAX 9925. This should normally take less than one minute.
9. After the file has been downloaded, the machine will reboot. The new firmware version will appear in the LCD.
Description
J etSuite* for Networks does not fax properly from network workstations with the FAX 9925 connected directly to a workstation or server.
Solution
Sending faxes from network workstations in a Windows* NT server environment does work with the FAX 9925 connected to the parallel port of Windows NT
server or to a HP J etDirect* 170x, 300, or 500.
Description
Solution
To initialize the FAX 9925, perform the following:
1. Press the left arrow.
3. Press MENU, 7 and 2 twice.
4. Press the right arrow to select one of the following:
Documents
Phonebook
Configuration
Software Switches
Counters
Everything
5. Press ENTER.
Description
1187 error code (No Fax Detected) when receiving faxes.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The 1187 error code will occur when a voice call is received by FAX 9925. This is normal operation when receiving a voice call.
2. The FAX 9925 needs to be initialized. To initialize the FAX 9925, perform the following:
a. Press the left arrow.
b. Press the star (*) button three times. The upper portion of the display screen will start to flash.
c. Press MENU, 7 and 2 twice.
d. Press the right arrow until 'Everything' is selected.
e. Press ENTER.
f. Press the START button to confirm initialization.
Note: Full initialization will reset the all machine settings back to factory default.
Description
Intermittently, receive faxes are partially printed or blank with Header only. Activity J ournal shows fax received OK.
Solution
CAUSE: Flash firmware requires an update.
SOLUTION: Install flash firmware version 1.13 which is available from the Konica website (www.konicabt.com). The flash procedure is outlined on pages
143 and 151 of the FAX 9925 Service Manual . The flash can be accomplished with either a PC or from a remote fax. Make sure to print all phone numbers
and machine configuration before flashing machine as the data may be erased during the flash.
For all non ECM (error correction mode) communications, set Softswitch 18 to 00001010. To change this Softswitch, perform the following:
920
FAX 9925
3. Press MENU, 721.
4. Enter the software switch 18 and then press ENTER.
5. Changes bit 7 to bit 0 to following 00001010.
5. Press ENTER and then STOP.
6. After these changes have been made, turn the fax OFF/ON to allow the machine to reset and make use of these changes.
If using J etSuite* (Pro or For Networks), set Softswitch 349, bit 6, to 0. To change this Softswitch, perform the following:
3. Press MENU, 721.
5. Change bit 6 to a 0 and then press ENTER and then STOP.
Description
791 error codes and black bars when receiving.
Solution
CAUSE: Flash firmware requires an update.
SOLUTION: Install flash firmware version 1.13 which is available from the Konica website (www.konicabt.com). The flash procedure is outlined on pages
143 and 151 of the FAX 9925 Service Manual . The flash can be accomplished with either a PC or from a remote fax. Make sure to print all phone numbers
and machine configuration before flashing machine as the data may be erased during the flash.
Note: If problem persists after flashing machine, change softswitch 23, bit 7, to 0 and softswitch 271, bit 4, to 0.
If using J etSuite* (Pro or For Networks), set Softswitch 349, bit 6, to 0. To change this Softswitch, perform the following:
3. Press MENU, 721.
5. Change bit 6 to a 0 and then press ENTER and then STOP.
Description
What is the part number for the parallel printer cable.
Solution
The printer cable is a standard parallel cable that uses a small Centronics* connector (10 feet or less, IEEE A-C 1284 with half pitch Centronics 36 IEEE Type
C connector). The cable should be sourced from a local computer or electronics store.
Description
J etSuite* Pro and J etSuite for Networks availability.
Solution
Konica is pleased to announce that both connectivity options are available for use with the Konica FAX 9925. Both J etSuite Pro and J etSuite for Networks
are software programs that help connect your FAX 9925 to become a full-featured multi-functional product.
See Info Source Bulletin #30-00 for more information.
Description
How to enable/disable the TCR.
Solution
To enable/disable the TCR, perform the following:
1. Press [MENU], [1], [7] and [1].
2. Select the desired option with the down arrow key.
3. Press [ENTER].
921
FAX 9925
922
FAX 9930
Description
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
IMPORTANT NOTE (1-21-2003): Corrected toner is now being shipped. The toner will have the same lot number (5FA2Y165), but the magnet position has
been corrected. The individual toner can be identified by the cellophane bag the cartridge comes in. The faulty toner has a bag that is sealed on both ends
and sealed down the center. The corrected toner has been repackaged and only sealed on the bag's ends.
1. The magnet in the toner cartridge is incorrectly positioned. Move the end cap detection magnet on the toner unit from position 2 to position 3. To move
the magnet, perform the following:
a. Remove the end cap cover on the toner unit .
b. Move the end cap detection magnet on the toner unit from position 2 to position 3 .
c. Replace the end cap cover.
Note: This is a temporary solution for this problem. The faulty toner stock has been identified and will no longer be shipped. The faulty toner can be
identified as 'Made in UK' will appear on the label on the outside of the 6 carton box and the lot number is 5FA2Y165 .
b. TECHNICAL PRG will be displayed. Use the down arrow and scroll to number "3. SYSTEM RESET" is displayed. Press the ENTER key.
1: ALL DATA CLEAR.
3: CONFIG DATA CLR.
b. Select "LOCAL TEST".
c. Press ENTER.
d. Select "SELF DIAG".
e. Press ENTER.
f. FAX 9930 should be displayed in the "Device ID". The FAX 9930 is not displayed in the Device ID field; please contact the National Systems Solution
Note: Please fax the "Self Diagnostics" page with the serial number and ticket number to 860-902-7643
Description
Solution
2. TECHNICAL PRG will be displayed. Use the down arrow and scroll until number 3, SYSTEM RESET is displayed. Press the ENTER key.
1: ALL DATA CLEAR.
3: CONFIG DATA CLR.
Description
Does J etSuite* Pro version 2.1 support network faxing and printing?
Solution
J etSuite* Pro version 2.1 supports only standalone faxing, printing and scanning on Windows* 9x and Windows NT 4.0 workstations.
Description
923
FAX 9930
Does J etSuite* Pro version 2.1 support Windows* 2000 Professional?
Solution
J etSuite Pro 2.1 does not support Windows 2000 Professional.
Description
T37 IFAX, how to setup the internet fax (sending/receiving E-mail) option.
Solution
The following information will be required before setting up the T37 IFAX:
1. Static or permanent lease TCP/IP* address assigned to the T37 IFAX.
2. Subnet mask assigned to T37 IFAX
3. Default gateway for T37 IFAX option.
4. SMTP server name or TCP/IP server address.
5. POP server name or TCP/IP server address.
6. POP User ID and POP password must be created on the POP server.
7. DNS primary and secondary DNS server's TCP/IP addresses, if required.
8. Host Name and Fax E-mail Address for T37 IFAX option.
Note: DHCP server will assign an TCP/IP address, subnet mask, gateway and primary and secondary DNS TCP/IP address to T37 IFAX.
Before setting up T37 IFAX network setting, perform the following:
1. Press MENU/EXIT.
3. Press ENTER.
4. Press DOWN ARROW until '13: NIC INITIALIZE' is displayed.
5. Press OK twice.
6. Power OFF/ON.
To enter network information for the T37 IFAX, perform the following:
1. Press MENU/EXIT.
3. Press ENTER.
4. Enter the T37 IFAX TCP/IP address from the keypad and then press ENTER.
5. Press DOWN ARROW to move the cursor to 'SUBNET MASK' and then press ENTER.
6. Enter Subnet Mask from the keyboard and then press Enter.
7. Press DOWN ARROW to move the cursor to 'DEFAULT GATEWAY' and then press Enter.
8. Enter Default Gateway from keypad and then press Enter.
9. Press DOWN ARROW to scroll to 'SMTP SERVER NAME' and then press Enter.
10. Enter SMTP server TCP/IP address from keypad or server name from one-touch keys and then press Enter.
11. Press DOWN ARROW to scroll to 'POP SERVER NAME' and then press Enter.
12. Enter POP server TCP/IP address from keypad or server name from the one-touch keys and then press Enter.
13. Press DOWN ARROW to scroll to 'POP USER ID' and press Enter.
14. Enter the Pop User Id from the one-touch keys and then press Enter.
15. Press DOWN ARROW to scroll to 'POP PASSWORD' and then press Enter.
16. Enter the Pop Password from the one-touch keys and then press Enter.
17. Press DOWN ARROW to scroll to 'DNS. P. SRV ADDRESS' and then press Enter.
18. Enter DNS Primary Server TCP/IP address from keypad and press Enter.
19. Press DOWN ARROW to scroll to 'DNS S. SRV ADDRESS' and then press Enter.
20. Enter DNS Secondary Server TCP/IP address and then press Enter.
21. Press DOWN ARROW to scroll to 'HOST NAME' and then press Enter.
22. Enter Host Name from one-touch keys and then press Enter.
23. Press DOWN ARROW to scroll to 'FAX EMAIL ADDR.' and press Enter.
24. Enter the email address for FAX 9930 from one-touch keys and press Enter.
25. Power OFF/ON.
Description
How to enable the TCR/MCF (transmission confirmation report/message confirmation report).
Solution
To enable the message confirmation feature (TCR/MCF), perform the following:
1. Press the MENU/EXIT key.
2. Using the ARROW key scroll to SETUP and press ENTER.
3. Scroll to REPORT OPTIONS and press ENTER.
4. Scroll to MCF. (SINGLE-LOCATION.) and press ENTER.
5. Using the ARROW key select ON and press ENTER.
924
FAX 9930
Note: To quickly access this function press the MENU/EXIT key and then press 7 and 0 from the keypad to display [70: MCF /Off/On]. Go to step 5 and
continue.
Description
How to set the FAX 9930 and J etSuite* Pro to receive faxes into the PC.
Solution
To set the FAX 9930 to PC MODE, perform the following:
1. Press Menu/Exit.
3. Press the Down Arrow until PC: PC MODE is displayed.
4. Press Enter
5. Press Stop.
To enable the Receive Fax to PC feature, perform the following procedure:
1. Open J etSuite by double-clicking on the desktop icon or the J etSuite icon in the task bar.
2. Select Options on the Menu bar.
3. Select PC Fax.
4. Select Receive and then check the box that indicates Receive to PC.
5. Select OK.
Note: J etSuite Pro desktop must be running in the background to receive faxes.
Description
Does FAX 9930 support the dual line modem and T37 IFAX board at the same time?
Solution
The FAX 9930 does not support the dual line modem and T37 IFAX board at the same time. The IFAX board and dual line modem use the same connector
on the main CB.
Description
How to program the FAX SENDER ID (company or individual name).
Solution
To program the FAX SENDER ID, perform the following:
1. In rapid sequence press the MENU/EXIT key, then 0 and 3.
2. Enter the name of the company or individual using the alphabetical keys on the upper right hand side of the operation panel.
3. Press ENTER to store the information and then press the MENU/EXIT key to return to normal operation.
Description
How to set the Option Line Type for the second fax line.
Solution
To set the Option Line Type, perform the following:
1. Press Menu/Exit.
2. Enter 3 then 1 from the keypad for OPTION LINE TYPE
3. Press Up or Down Arrow to select TX (transmit only), RX (receive only), or ALL (transmit and receive).
4. Press Menu/Exit to return to the standby mode.
925
FAX 9980
Description
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
b. TECHNICAL PRG will be displayed. Use the down arrow and scroll to '3. SYSTEM RESET'. Press the ENTER key.
1: ALL DATA CLEAR.
3: CONFIG DATA CLR.
b. Select 'LOCAL TEST'.
c. Press ENTER.
d. Select 'SELF DIAG'.
e. Press ENTER.
f. FAX 9980 should be displayed in the 'Device ID'. If the FAX 9980 is not displayed in the Device ID field, please contact the National Systems Solution
Note: Please fax the 'Self Diagnostics' page with the serial number and ticket number to 800-968-4213.
3. Non-Konica toner is being used. Install Konica toner cartridge (item #950158.
Description
Solution
PC LOADING
ARE YOU SURE ?
ENTER WHEN DONE
reboot.
7. If using Windows NT 4.0, perform the following:
a. Press Start.
b. Press Programs.
c. Press Command Prompt to display C:\ or similar command prompt.
Note: Flash updates can be successfully performed from a Windows NT Command Prompt window.
1: ALL DATA CLEAR.
3: CONFIG DATA CLR.
Support.
926
FAX 9980
Description
How to install Unimessage* Pro on Microsoft* Windows 2000.
Solution
To install Unimessage Pro, perform the following:
Note: Administrator's authority is required for installation with Windows 2000.
1. Confirm both the printer and the computer are turned OFF, connect the fax machine and the computer with a parallel interface cable. (IEEE standard
cable 1284)
2. Turn the computer ON and allow Windows to start.
3. Turn the fax machine ON. At the prompt indicating that a new device has been detected, select CANCEL.
4. Insert the Konica Unimessage Pro or LAN option CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
5. After the setup program has automatically started, click, 'Setup device driver and Unimessage Pro' and follow the on-screen instructions as appropriate.
This installs both the printer and the Unimessage Pro software.
Note: If you want to install only the driver, click 'Setup device driver'.
Note: If the setup program does not automatically start or Auto insert notification is turned off, Click 'Start Run' , Type in 'd:\setup.exe' (where D is the drive
letter of your CD-ROM drive) and click OK.
6. Click 'Next' on the Welcome Install screen.
7. Click 'Yes' on Software License Agreement screen.
8. Then 'Next' on the Language Default.
9. When 'Fax Port Installation' dialog appears, click OK.
10. When 'Welcome Add/Remove Hardware Wizard' dialog appears, click 'Next'.
11. When 'Choose a Hardware Task' dialog appears, select 'Add/Troubleshoot a device' and click 'Next'.
12. When 'New Hardware Detection' dialog appears, select 'Add a new device from the device list' and click 'Next'.
13. When 'Find New Hardware' dialog appears , select 'No, I want to select the hardware from a list' and click 'Next'.
14. When 'Hardware Type' dialog appears, select 'Ports (COM and LPT) from the list and click 'Next'.
15. When 'Select a Device Driver' dialog appears, click 'Have Disk'.
16. When 'Install from Disk' dialog appears, type 'D:\Driver\Setup\Disk1\Win2K' (where D is the drive letter of your CD-ROM drive) in 'Copy Manufacturer's
files from' and click 'OK'.
17. Select 'Konica Fax Port' from the list and click 'Next'.
18. When the 'Start Hardware Installation' dialog appears, click 'Next'.
19. When the 'Completing the Add/Remove Hardware Wizard' dialog appears, click 'Finish'.
20. Click 'Yes' to reboot. leave the CD-ROM in drive to complete installation of program at startup.
Description
How to program receive to memory.
Solution
To program the receive to memory feature perform the following:
1. Press MENU/EXIT.
2. Use the DOWN ARROW to scroll to SETUP and press ENTER.
3. Use the DOWN ARROW to select MACHINE SETTINGS and press ENTER.
4. AUTO ANSWER MODE is displayed, press ENTER.
5. Use the DOWN ARROW to select MEMORY RX and press ENTER.
6. Press the MENU/EXIT key to return to normal operation.
Description
How many fax numbers can be entered for a broadcast fax?
Solution
A broadcast fax will allow for a maximum of 20 numbers to be entered at one time.
Description
MCF\TCR (message confirmation\transmission confirmation) report with first page of transmitted image enabled will pull from the legal size cassette instead
of the letter size cassette.
Solution
CAUSE: The machine to print MCF with image of first page transmitted image enabled
to legal sized cassette because a firmware bug.
SOLUTION: Flash the machine to the latest firmware level. To determine latest firmware level, perform the follow.
3. Press ENTER twice to print Self Diagnosis Report
927
FAX 9980
4. Go the fourth line under Main Board should read PROGRAM1 VERSION AA4. If this line reads PROGRAM1 VERSION AA2 then update the machine to
latest firmware level.

To download and flash the firmware from a computer, perform the following:
1. Go to 'NSSG Web Support'.
2. Click on 'Download EPROMs' hyperlink.
3. Click 'Eprom for Plain Paper Fax' and then LIST FILES button.
4. Download 9980-codaaa4.zip to temporary directory (C:\9980).
5. Unzip the file to temporary directory.
PC LOADING
ARE YOU SURE ?
ENTER WHEN DONE
reboot.
12. If using Windows NT 4.0 or 2000, perform the following:
a. Click on START.
b. Click on RUN.
c. Type 'CMD' to open command prompt window.
Notes: Flash updates can be successfully performed from a Windows NT or 2000 Command Prompt window. Will have disable Unimessage* Pro and set FAX
9980 and Unimessage Pro driver to DISK during firmware upgrade.
1: ALL DATA CLEAR.
3: CONFIG DATA CLR.
Description
How to enable time and date stamp on received faxes.
Solution
To enable time and date stamp, perform the following:
1. Press MENU/EXIT button, then, quickly, in rapid sequence, press RESOLUTION twice to display TECHNICAL PRG.
2. Press Down Arrow until cursor is at SETUP.
3. Press Enter.
4. Press Up or Down Arrow until cursor is at [04 TIME DATE PRINT].
5. Press Enter.
6. Press Up or Down Arrow until the cursor is at the desired setting. The options are OFF, ONCE or ALL.
7. Press Enter to enable the change.
8. Press Stop button twice to return back to the standby mode.
Description
How to display the print (total), scan, or drum counters.
Solution
To display the counters, perform the following:
1. Press Menu/Exit button.
2. Press Up or Down arrow buttons to display [12 COUNTER].
3. Press Enter to access counter menu.
4. Press Up or Down Arrow to scroll to display the following:
DRUM COUNT: Do not clear the drum counter until replacement drum has been installed.
PRINT COUNT: This is the total counter of receive faxes, internal test pages and copies.
SCAN COUNT: This is the total number of copies and transmitted faxes.
928
FAX 9980
5. Press Enter to display the counter.
6. Press Stop to return to standby mode.
Note: The drum counter will only show when the Technical Function Service Bit (01) to set to ON. Also Two additional counters, TONER COUNT and
DRUM(T) COUNT, are available.
Description
How to program the FAX SENDER ID (company or individual name).
Solution
To program the FAX SENDER ID, perform the following:
1. In rapid sequence press the MENU/EXIT key, then 0 and 3.
2. Enter the name of the company or individual using the alphabetical keys on the upper right hand side of the operation panel.
3. Press ENTER to store the information and then press the MENU/EXIT key to return to normal operation.
Description
Unimessage* Pro, how many users does the software support?
Solution
Unimessage Pro supports the following number of users:
Unimessage Single User (Item #950143)
Unimessage 5 User (Item #950144)
Unimessage 10 User (Item #950173)
929
FAX800L
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
930
FAX-810L
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
931
FAX825L/FAX825L-FP
Description
M005
Solution
CAUSE: Abnormality of the printer EEPROM.
SOLUTION: Replace the printer EEPROM (p/n 7500-9210) and/or printer control board (p/n 748085200).
Description
How to program the FAX ID.
Solution
Note: To easiest way to erase or change the FAX ID is to use the steps above to overwrite the old information.
Description
How to program multi-station and/or program multi-station into one-touch key.
Solution
6. Press [START].
7. The fax will now scan all pages into memory and the send the documents to each location.
6. Press [START].
Description
How to enable/disable the TCR (transmit confirmation report).
Solution
To enable/disable the transmit confirmation report, perform the following steps.
1. Press [FUNCTION], [SET], [8], [0], [0] and [SET].
2. Press [UP ARROW] repeatedly until HOME POSITION is displayed.
3. Press [SET] four times.
4. Press [SELECT] repeatedly to select between OFF, PRINT, XMIT and PRINT&XMIT.
5. Press [SET]; then, [STOP].
Transmit Confirmation Report Options.
932
FAX825L/FAX825L-FP
OFF: Transmit report is neither printed, nor sent.
PRINT: Transmit report is automatically printed at the end of transmission (default setting is PRINT).
XMIT: Transmit report is sent to the remote station at the end of transmission.
PRINT&XMIT: Transmit report is sent to the remote station at the end of transmission; then, automatically printed.
Description
Solution
If drum unit was replaced and did not clear CHECK DRUM message, reset the drum counter using the following steps.
2. Press [FUNCTION], [1], [DOWN ARROW], and [SET].
SET PRINTER EEPROM
4. Press [0] five times to zero out the old drum count.
7. Turn fax OFF for about five seconds; then, turn it back ON.
Description
Paper jams halfway past the paper exit rollers during reception and copy.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Over a period of time the paper exit rollers may become worn, hard or glazed. Clean exit roller with isopropyl alcohol. If this symptom continues, replace
the upper exit roller (p/n 748046600) and lower exit roller (p/n 748046610).
2. The Exit Drive Belt (p/n 748015610) is slipping due to soiling or wear. Clean or replace belt as needed.
3. Exit roller bushings (p/n 750040680) are soiled, binding, or worn. Clean with isopropyl alcohol or replace bushings as needed.
Description
M014
Solution
Description
M004
Solution
CAUSE: Abnormality of heater (occurs when WAIT continues for 120 seconds).
933
FAX825L/FAX825L-FP
SOLUTION: Verify the following items.
1. Fixing Heater Lamp (p/n 748085130).
2. Thermistor (p/n 748085120).
3. Thermostat (p/n 748085160).
To clear error, reset Function Parameter address 0D2, bit 0, to a 0, using the following steps.
2. Press [FUNCTION], [1] and [DOWN ARROW] twice.
3. Press [SET], [0], [D], [2], [0], [0], [SET] and [STOP] twice.
Description
How to set clock and calendar.
Solution
1. Press [FUNCTION], [1], and [DOWN ARROW] three times.
2. Enter the time and date using following format.
Format: Year/Month/Day Hour:Minute
Example: 1995/12/01 15:59
3. Use Arrow keys to move cursor to position that needs to be changed and overwrite old data.
Note: You cannot set the time if a timer reservation has been made or if a document is in memory, waiting to be redialed.
Description
M005
Solution
CAUSE: Abnormality of printer EEPROM.
SOLUTION: Replace Printer EEPROM (p/n 7500-9210) and/or Printer Control Board (p/n 748085200).
934
FAX865L
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
935
FAX9635
Description
Internet Fax requirements.
Solution
The following is required to use the Internet Fax capability of the FAX 9635.
1. Internet Fax Kit, PCUA#950-623. Internet Fax Kit contains (1) Class 1 I/F Kit , Internet Fax Software, and Internet Fax User's Manual.
2. A RS-232C cable is required. This cable is not supplied with the Internet Fax kit.
3. The computer must be an Intel* 80486SX 20MHz or higher PC with a minimum of 16MB of memory. The PC must have a modem that works with the
user's internet service provider (ISP).
4. The user must have access to an internet service provider.
5. The operating system for the workstation can ONLY be Windows 95*. The Internet Fax capability WILL NOT work on a workstation with Windows NT*,
Windows* 3.x, OS/2*, etc.
6. The workstation must use Microsoft Exchange*.
7. Microsoft Exchange must be able to work properly with the user's internet service provider.
Description
Solution
To initialize the fax, perform the following steps:
1. Remove the plastic cover sheet on the operation panel.
2. Actuate the service switch , located below the LCD, with a paper clip or pin point.
5. Press [FUNCTION], and [#] to exit the service mode.
Description
How to put a group dial under a program key.
Solution
To put a group dial under a program key, first you must program your numbers as one-touch keys or telephone directories or use a maximum of 10 long hand
numbers.
To assist in this process, a Dial List should be printed prior to placing a group dial under a program key. To print this list, perform the following:
a. Press (MENU), (5), (4), (ENTER) and (ENTER) again.
b. Retain the printed pages for use in the following procedure.
To place a group dial under a program key, perform the following:
1. Press (MENU), (4), (1) and (ENTER)
a. display should read PROGRAM DIAL.
2. Press (ENTER)
a. SELECT OT KEY should be displayed
3. Press the one-touch key that is to be programmed.
a. if the key is already programmed as a one-touch key, ASSIGNED OT KEY will be displayed and another one-touch key must be selected.
Note: Refer to the Dial List for a unused one-touch keys.
b. P-XX (XX=corresponding two-digit one-touch key number): NEW DIAL will be displayed.
4. Press (ENTER) and SELECT LOCATION will show in the LCD.
5. Enter the full number, one-touch, or directory dial.
a. To enter a telephone directory number: Press (TEL DIRECTORY).
b. Press the key associated with the first letter of the desired destination, i.e. pressing the (2) will show the first program directory dial with a name
beginning with A, B, or C. Pressing (2) again will advance the display to the next programmed directory beginning with A, B, or C.
Note: The Directory Dial List (previously printed) can be used as a reference for first letter of the Directory Dial names and numbers
d. Press (ENTER) to place the Directory Dial destination under the program key.
6. SELECT LOCATION should be displayed. Repeat step 5 for multiple locations.
Note: (CLEAR) can be used to correct some initial entry mistakes.
7. After all locations have been entered, and the display reads SET LOCATION, press (ENTER).
8. Use the keypad to input the name of the group.
a. Press the key associated with the letter to be used, i.e. pressing the (2) will show A. Pressing (2) again will show B, and pressing (2) again will show C.
Pressing (2) again will cycle the letters in lowercase.
b. Use the right and left arrow keys (one-touch 19 and 20) to advance to next letter.
c. When group name is complete, press (ENTER).
9. Enter the time for transmission (optional).
10. Press [ENTER] and (ENTER) again.
11. 0: CONTINUE/ 1: END should be displayed. Press [1] and [ENTER].
936
FAX9635
Description
How to turn on the Transmit report.
Solution
To turn on the Transmit report. perform the following:
1. Press [MENU],
2. Press [2], [8],
3. Press [ENTER] twice,
4. Press [0], [9],
5. Press [ENTER], [1], [ENTER], [1],
6. Press [ENTER].
Description
How to enable or disable the transmission report (TCR).
Solution
To enable or disable the transmission report, perform the following steps.
3. Choose one of the following selections:
a. Press [0] to disable the transmit report printout.
b. Press [1] to enable the transmit report printout.
c. Press [2] to enable the printing of the transmit report ONLY when a communication error occurs.
4. Press [ENTER] and then [STOP].
Description
System error 003.
Solution
CAUSE: Failed thermistor and thermostat.
SOLUTION: Replace thermistor assembly (p/n 7594-5340) and thermostat (p/n 759485530).
Description
Cannot transmit or receive.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. If no dial tone on handset, but dial tone is present at wall jack, NCU board damaged.
Replace NCU board (p/n 759387030).
2. Fax is installed on a PBX phone system that requires dialing a 9 (or another prefix number) before the phone number.
Dial 9 before phone number to access an outside line.
3. If the machine is locked-up, initialization is required.
4. The modem is not outputting tones.
Bad Modem on Main Control Board. Replace main CB (p/n 121A87020).
5. Faulty main control board.
Replace main CB (p/n 121A87020).
Description
PAPER J AM 1 message.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. If the paper reaches the transfer roller and the paper is skewed on the same side as the roller then check the cassette for damage.
2. Faulty J am 1 sensor.
Perform self test printing. If paper reaches J am 1 sensor, check and replace J am 1 sensor.
937
FAX9635
3. Defective paper supply roller.
If paper does not reach J am 1 sensor, clean or replace paper supply roller.
4. If paper supply roller does not attempt to drive the paper:
a. Check for a defective paper supply solenoid.
b. Check for faulty power supply.
c. Check for faulty main PCB.
Description
Solution
To program a fax number into a one-touch program key, perform the following steps.
1. Press [MENU], [4], and [ENTER] twice.
2. Press the one-touch key to be programmed.
3. Press [ENTER].
4. Dial the fax number of the remote party.
5. Press [ENTER].
6. If you wish to program the party's name do as follows. If no name is to be entered press [ENTER].
[ONE-TOUCH 08]: enters a space
[ONE-TOUCH 09]: cursors left
[ONE-TOUCH 10]: cursors right
Press the numeric keys below to cycle through the characters listed below.
[1]: QZqz
[2]: ABCabc
[3]: DEFdef
[4]: GHIghi
[5]: J KLjkl
[6]: MNOmno
[7]: PRSprs
[8]: TUVtuv
[9]: WXYwxy
[0]: 0
[*]: */.,[]"-
[#]: #
7. Select the modem transmission speed.
0: H (14400)
1: L (4800)
8. Press [ENTER].
9. If you do not wish to change the special speed setup press [ENTER]. To change the special speed setup press [0] for OFF and [1] for ON and press
[ENTER].
10. To program an additional one-touch key press [0] and [ENTER], then repeat this procedure. To end programming press [1] and [ENTER].
Description
REPLACE DRUM is displayed prematurely.
Solution
CAUSE: The waste toner sensor is falsely actuated.
SOLUTION: Remove the drum and gently tap on the top black cover to compact the toner and reseat the waste toner sensor actuator. This will allow the
toner waste sensor to fall back downward and eliminate the REPLACE DRUM message.
938
FAX9715FP
Description
M041, CHECK DRUM.
Solution
CAUSE: The drum is close to end of it's life (message shows at 11,900 prints).
SOLUTION: Replace the drum set (PCUA number 930978) as soon as possible. If the CHECK DRUM message needs to be reset manually, perform the
following procedure.
3. Press [0] five times; then, press [SET].
4. Exit service mode by pressing [STOP] twice.
5. When back to standby, turn the fax OFF; then, back ON.
Description
How to program a one-touch key for multi-station transmission.
Solution
To program a one-touch key for multi-station transmission, perform the following steps.
Note: A maximum of 200 abbreviated numbers, plus 10 long hand numbers can be specified for a multi-station transmission.
1. Press [FUNCTION], [1], [2] and [SET].
3. Press [SET] and the LCD will start to flash. Place a document on the ADF.
4. Specify the first desired fax number by using abbreviated numbers or long hand dialing.
Note: You MUST press [SET] within two seconds after specifying the first destination. If you specify an abbreviated number, press the [ABBR/ALPHA] key
before entering the 2-digit number.
5. Enter the next number; then, press [SET].
6. Repeat step 5 until all destinations are specified.
7. Press [START].
For detailed instructions, see pages 139 to 140 (multi-station transmission) and pages 112 to 113 (program one-touch key with multi station operation) in
the FAX 9715 FP User's Reference Guide.
Description
Solution
To reset the drum counter, perform the following steps.
1. Press [FUNCTION], [SET] (displays " USER ID=_____" ), press [CONTRAST] x 3 times.
2. The display should now show SERVICE MODE.
4. Press zero five times; then, press [SET].
5. Exit the service mode by pressing [STOP] twice.
6. When back to the standby display, turn fax off; then, back on.
7. The CHECK DRUM message should now be reset.
Description
M004 is constantly displayed.
Solution
CAUSE: Fuser not heating up within 180 seconds. Possible component failure.
SOLUTION: Check fuser lamp (p/n 754085430), thermostat (p/n 754085440) and fuse (p/n 754085470). Turn power off and then on to reset the code.
Description
How to set ABBR number.
Solution
Note: Up to 200 ABBR numbers (00-99 and *00-*99) can be stored in the FAX 9715 FP.
939
FAX9715FP
To program an ABBR number, perform the following steps:
1. Press [FUNCTION], [1] and [SET].
2. Enter the ABBR number you want to store the fax number under (00-99 and *00-*99).
Example: [*] [1] [9]
3. Press [SET].
4. Enter the fax number using the numeric keypad.
Note: Use [DIAL/-] to enter a dash.
5. Press [SET].
6. Enter the name for the location using the one-touch program keys on the right.
Note: Use one-touch key [29] to enter a space.
7. Press [SET].
8. If wanted, enter a 2nd fax number; then, press [SET] twice -or- leave this entry blank and press [SET] twice.
9. If additional ABBR numbers need to be programmed, repeat the procedure starting at step 2. If programming is completed, press [STOP].
For more details, see [[page 51 to page 54| FILE V:\TEXT\PWH002.TXT NEW NoWordWrap]] in the FAX 9715 FP User's Reference Guide.
Description
Blank prints or blank areas on printed pages.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. LED printhead is soiled or defective. Clean/replace LED printhead (p/n 754085100).
2. Transfer corona unit is soiled or defective. Clean/check transfer corona unit (p/n 7540-2500).
3. Drum and toner units are not seated properly. Reseat drum and toner unit into the main body.
4. A voltage spike has possibly corrupted the memory. Power the fax OFF for about five seconds, then turn the power back ON.
Description
M014, M015 or M016
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Paper has jammed in the recording unit.
Open the top printer cover of the fax, remove paper and close the cover.
Note: If paper is in the main body, you may have to remove the drum and toner unit.
Check the registration and exit sensors. It may be necessary to turn the fax OFF and back ON to reset the fax.
If the error will not clear, perform an INITIAL ROM CHANGE using the following steps:
a. Press [FUNCTION], [SET], [CONTRAST] three times.
b. The display should now show SERVICE MODE.
c. Press [FUNCTION] and then [7].
d. The display should show INITIAL, MODE=ROM CHANGE.
e. Press [SET] to perform ROM CHANGE initialization.
f. Press [STOP] twice to return to standby display.
2. Constant M014 caused by a bad printer EEPROM. Replace the EEPROM (p/n 754085300).
3. The fuser unit not installed properly and the exit photo sensor is hung up. Reinstall the fuser unit.
4. The backstop paper guide in the paper cassette is loose. Tighten the screw in the proper position.
Description
How to enable or disable the TCR (transmit confirmation report).
How to disable the first page image on the TCR.
Solution
To enable/disable the TCR, perform the following steps.
1. Press [FUNCTION], [SET], [8], [0], [0] and [SET].
2. Press [UP ARROW] five times.
3. The display should show SETTING, HOME POSITION.
4. Press [SET] four times.
5. The display should show SET HOME, TCR =(current setting).
6. Press [SELECT] repeatedly to select between OFF, PRINT, XMIT and PRINT&XMIT.
940
FAX9715FP
Transmit Confirmation Report Options.
OFF: The transmit report is neither printed, nor sent.
PRINT: The transmit report is automatically printed at the end of transmission (default setting is PRINT).
XMIT: The transmit report is sent to the remote station at the end of transmission.
PRINT&XMIT: The transmit report is sent to the remote station at the end of transmission, and then automatically printed.
To disable printing of image, set function parameter address 163, bit 7, to 0, by performing the following steps.
2. The display should show SERVICE MODE.
4. The LCD will show SET FP across the top line.
5. Press [1], [6], and [3].
6. Press [SELECT] twice, [0], [SET] and [STOP] twice.
For more details on setting the TCR, see page 130 and 131 in the FAX 9715 FP User's Reference Guide.
Description
M005
Solution
CAUSE: The EEPROM on the Printer Control Board is bad.
SOLUTION: Replace the EEPROM (p/n 754085300) on Printer Control Board.
Note: After replacing the printer control board EEPROM, the LED print density data must be entered into the EEPROM and the EPROM's U1, U2, and U3
must be level GP (p/n 971511-05.0, 971512-05.0, and 971513-05.0) or higher.
To enter the LED print density data, perform the following steps:
2. Display should now show SERVICE MODE.
3. Press [FUNCTION] and [1].
4. Display should now show SETTING, SET EEPROM.
5. Press the [DOWN ARROW].
6. Display should now show SETTING, SET PRINTER EEPROM.
7. Press [SET] and [DOWN ARROW] twice.
8. Display should now show SET PRINTER EEPROM, PRINT DENSITY =(two digit number).
Note: Technical Support's FAX 9715 FP was set at a value of 32.
9. Enter the two digit value specified on the label attached to the LED printhead.
10. Press [SET] and [STOP] twice.
11. Display should show SELF DIAG for several seconds, and then return to the standby display.
The adjustment procedures are in the FAX 9715 FP service manual, pages 10-3 to 10-5. The EEPROM adjustments are in the service manual, pages 4-5 to
4-7.
Description
Solution
To store FAX ID, perform the following steps.
1. Press [FUNCTION] and [SET].
2. Press [8], [0], [0] and [SET].
3. Press [SET] twice.
4. Enter a name using the one-touch keys.
Note: Use one-touch key [29] to insert a space.
5. Press [SET].
6. Press [SELECT] and [SET].
7. Enter fax phone number using numeric keypad.
8. Press [SET] and [STOP].
See pages 47 to 49 in the FAX 9715 FP User's Reference Guide.
941
FaxTool
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
942
Fiery S300 for CF5001
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description

Solution

Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution

1xx Informational

2xx Success

3xx Redirection

4xx Client Error

5xx Server Error

943
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
access the files.
Description
Publisher.
Solution
Notes:
Description
Solution
944

identify the link.
Description
Solution

download archives .
Description
Solution
945
Fiery X2 for 7823
Description
What are the port names for the Fiery* X2 external print controller?
Solution
The following are the print, hold and direct ports on the external Fiery X2 controller:
print_prn-M
hold_prn-M
direct_prn-M
Note: These are not case sensitive.
The print queue is the normal print queue, and the Fiery prints jobs in the order they are received.
The hold queue is for jobs that will be printed at a later time or will be printed repeatedly. Print jobs sent to this queue will require intervention from Fiery
Spooler, WebSpooler, or Command Workstation to print.
The direct queue is used to print or download jobs without spooling. The queue is used by the Fiery Downloader to print jobs stored on the User CD such as
the Pantone* charts.
Description
Can the Fiery* X2 function in a peer-to-peer network?
Solution
The Fiery will support peer-to-peer printing in a Windows 9x*, NT or 2000 environment providing the following requirements are met:
1. The Windows 9x, NT or 2000 workstations must have TCP/IP* enabled and functioning.
2. File and print sharing must be enabled on the workstations.
3. TCP/IP must be enabled and functioning on the Fiery.
4. Windows* printing must be enabled on the Fiery.
Description
Unable to install the Downloader or the Scanner Utilities.
Solution
CAUSE: Incorrect information is being added to the Setup Screen.
SOLUTION: Verify that the following information is correctly added:
1. The server name must be the TCP/IP* address.
2. The name of the new device must be Prn-m.
Note: Any name can be used for the Nickname.
Description
Current printer driver(s) for the X2/7823.
Solution
Printer drivers can be found in the "Library" section of MyKonicaMinolta.com. Users without MyKonicaMinolta.com access can download drivers from the
public web site:
[[http://kmbs.konicaminolta.us/eprise/main/KMBS/Support_Center/Home| URL http://kmbs.konicaminolta.us/eprise/main/KMBS/Support_Center/Home]]
Description
Solution
Description
Publisher.
946
Fiery X2 for 7823
Solution
Notes:
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution

download archives .
Description
Solution
Description
Apple* Laserwriter* PostScript* driver compatibility with Fiery* print controllers from a Macintosh* system.
Solution
The Apple Laserwriter PostScript driver is not supported with Fiery print controllers. The Adobe* PostScript driver (version 8.5.1 or higher) is required for
printing from a Macintosh platform. The driver is included on the controller's User CD or can be downloaded from the Konica digital FTP site . Refer to the
FTP site index for additional information..
947
Fiery X2 for 7823
948
Fiery X2 for Pi6200
Description
Solution
Description
Parts manual for the Fiery* Pi6200.
Solution
Parts manuals for the EFI controllers are not published. However, the most commonly requested parts are listed in bulletin 3378 .
Description
Current printer driver(s) for the X2/Pi6200.
Solution
public web site:
Description
Unable to connect to the Fiery* using the Web interface from Microsoft* Internet Explorer.
Solution
CAUSE: There are several reasons:
1. Connection is through a proxy server and the local subnet is not excluded from the proxy access.
2. J ava is not installed or enabled in IE.
3. Security is configured to prevent J ava from executing the web interface.
SOLUTION: If still unable to connect using IE, it is possible to use Netscape* as an alternative. Download the latest version of [[Netscape| URL
http://www.netscape.com]] and install only the basic browser and J ava client. Netscape is less restrictive than IE and should allow access to the controller.
Ensure that the popup blocker is disabled when connecting to the Fiery.
Description
When printing scanned images (as PDFs), the print process is very slow.
Solution
CAUSE: The check box for "Print as image" is not checked when printing from Acrobat* Reader.
SOLUTION: Select the check box for "Print as image" when printing from Acrobat* Reader.
Description
How to configure Windows 2000* to print to the Fiery X2, X2e, X4, ZX, Z4, and Pi6200.
Solution
Please refer to the linked file, faq024.pdf .
949
Fiery X2 for Pi6200
Description
When installing the print driver in *Windows 98 it is possible to browse to the printer but the queue cannot seen or selected.
Solution
This can be caused if the printer has a space in its name or the printer name is longer than 10 characters. The space can be replaced by an underscore or
dash if desired.
Description
When printing from *PageMaker 6.5 running on *Windows XP, the application crashes when the PPD is selected in the print dialog.
Solution
Adobe states that PageMaker 6.5x [[may not meet expectations in Windows XP| URL http://www.adobe.com/support/techdocs/328682.html]], since it was
released prior to Windows XP and was not developed for this operating system.
If problems are encountered with PageMaker 6.5 in Win XP, it is recommended that users upgrade to PageMaker 7. Adobe has tested PageMaker 7.0 in
Windows XP, as well as Windows 2000, NT with Service Pack 5 or 6, ME, and 98. Adobe Technical Support fully supports and researches issues that arise
when PageMaker 7.0 is used in these Windows operating systems.
Description
A "spoolsv.exe" error is displayed when loading a Windows 2000 driver.
Solution
CAUSE:
Software conflict.
SOLUTION:
Install the current driver and print to Port 9100.
Description
Problem printing an image from Adobe Acrobat.*
Solution
CAUSE:
Software bug.
SOLUTION:
If only text prints out and the image causes an error page, please check the box labeled "Print As Image" in the Adobe Acrobat print dialog.
Note: This will significantly lengthen the printing time.
950
Fiery X2e for 7823
Description
How to install the 160MB upgrade kit.
Solution
To install the 160MB upgrade kit (PCUA 950603), perform the following:
1. Remove one of the 32MB DIMMS and install the 128MB DIMM that comes in the kit.
2. Install the software which comes in the kit. This requires a Laptop. The Hard Drive on the X2e MUST be formatted prior to installing the software upgrade.
The current version of system software is v1.06.
3. A software key will be required after the system is reinitialized. When the system first boots, a message will appear that states the software switch is not
authorized and a 4-digit error code will be generated. This code is required to generate the key code. The customer/technician must call Konica Technical
Support (1-800-825-5664) and provide the error code. Konica will then have to contact EFI* to obtain the key. Once Konica has the key, they will call the
customer/technician back and provide them with the key. In the near future Konica will have the key generator and will not have to contact EFI for this
number.
Notes:
a. The 160MB upgrade kit is for the X2e Fiery controller only.
b. The patch should only be applied to a system that has been fully initialized and configured at least once. If the system is modified in any manner (i.e.
Memory been upgraded or system software reloaded) the controller must be initialized and configured before adding the patch . If the memory configuration is
changed, the patch should not be applied until a software password is entered to enable the new memory configuration.
Description
How to obtain a 4-digit or 5-digit software switch when upgrading a Fiery* X2e controller from 64MB of memory to 160MB?
Solution
To obtain a 4-digit or 5-digit software switch the user needs to contact the Technical Support Hotline at 800-825-5664. The user will be sent to 2nd Level
Support to receive the 4-digit or 5-digit switch. Before receiving an authorizaton code, the user must provide a code to technical support. This code will be
displayed on the Fiery control panel and consists of alpha numeric characters.
Description
SOFTWARE SWITCH NOT AUTHORIZED message.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The system was powered OFF during initialization and the software authorization key is corrupted. Install the 50371.uxe file posted on the public FTP site
(ftp://kbtdigital:kx15@ftp.konicabt.com) in a folder called Fiery X2e. This file enables the user to recover the system from the "Software Not Authorized"
message. It will bring the system back to its original state. Configuration settings are not affected. To install the file, perform the following:
a. Power system ON
b. Press any key when LCD displays: To update/setup press any key.
c. Select option "install software" (DO NOT FORMAT DRIVE)
d. Select "parallel port option"
c. LCD will display "Please copy file to paral. port"
e. At the DOS prompt type: copy 50371.uxe lpt1 /b
f. After installation is completed, LCD displays: "must reboot after installation"
g. System will reboot, and LCD will display "Recovering system, do not turn OFF"
h. Right away, LCD will display: "Finish recovering, please turn OFF"
i. At this message, power OFF/ON the 7823.
j. At this point, the system is recovered.
k. A new section is created in the config page to reflect the patch installation. This section is called "Update info" and is located after the Printer Setup
information. The update information will display the following : 50371C
Notes:
1. If you have previously installed another patch to the system, and the Config page reflects the change; by installing patch 50371.uxe the "Update Info"
information will delete the previous info patch, and it will only display 50371C. There is no need to install the previous patch. Only the information of the
Config page has been changed. If you want both of the patches to reflect on the Config page, then first install 50371.uxe, and then install the other patches.
2. The patch should only be applied to a system that has been fully initialized and configured at least once. If the system is modified in any manner (i.e.
Memory upgraded or system software reloaded) the controller must be initialized and configured before adding the patch. If the memory configuration is
changed, the patch should not be applied until a software password is entered to enable the new memory configuration.
2. The error may occur when the memory upgrade kit is installed. A new password is required to enable the software after installing the additional memory.
If the patch file is applied before the new password is enabled, the software will become corrupt and will not function correctly. To correct this problem, the
memory will have to be brought down to the original 64MB and a new password will have to be entered to enable it. After this is done, the additional memory
can be installed and another password will have to be entered to enable it. To obtain a password, perform the following:
a. The 4 digit alphanumeric error code will be generated on the Fiery's LCD after initializing the software.
b. Call Konica National Systems Solutions Group (800-825-5664) and ask for 2nd level support.
c. Provide the 4 digit code and a password will be given to you. The password is unique to each controller and can only be generated using the 4 digit error
code.
951
Fiery X2e for 7823
Description

Solution

Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
What is the part number for the replacement hard drive for the Fiery X2e?
Solution
The part number is 45002804
Description
What are the port names for the Fiery* X2e print controller?
Solution
The following are the print, hold and direct ports on the Fiery X2e controller:
print_PRN-M
hold_PRN-M
direct_PRN-M
Note: These are case sensitive and must be entered as shown.
Description
New set-up, laptop connected to parallel port will not print and the job is disappearing.
Solution
CAUSE: Attempting to print via parallel port.
SOLUTION: Parallel port printing is not supported on this controller.
Description
Microsoft* Windows XP driver support.
Solution
Native Windows XP print drivers are not currently available. The Windows 2000 print drivers use the same driver files that are used in Windows XP and
should function correctly in that operating system.
952
Fiery X2e for 7823
Description
Solution
Description
Publisher.
Solution
Notes:
953
Fiery X2e for CF910
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description

Solution

Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Description
Publisher.
Solution
954
Fiery X2e for CF910
Notes:
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution

download archives .
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
WINDOWS 2000
955
Fiery X2e for CF910

new printers.
WINDOWS XP
Description
Solution
Description
Can Scantrip be used with the Fiery* X2e?
Solution
Scantrip cannot be used with any of the Fiery-designed controllers.
956
Fiery X3e for 7832
Description
How to enable support for Copy Track when printing from a Microsoft* Windows 2000 workstation or server.
Solution
Windows 2000 does not support the Copy Track function. This limitation is noted in the release notes enclosed with the product. System code version 2.0
bypasses this limitation by adding a menu choice under the Server Setup Menu. Enable "No Account Printing" to bypass the Copy Track feature.
Description
Unable to print from a Windows* 98 workstation with the Copy Track feature on the main body enabled. INVALID USER CODE is displayed.
Solution
CAUSE: The User ID set in the print driver is at the default of zero.
SOLUTION: To program the User ID in the print driver to a value other than zero, perform the following:
1. Click Start, go to Settings and then select Printers.
2. Right click on the Fiery* X3e driver icon.
4. Click on the Fiery Printing tab.
5. Click on User Identification in the menu.
6. Under Account Number, enter any number from 1 to 998.
7. Click Apply to save changes.
8. Close the print driver properties.
Description
What applications are supported for use with the Fiery* Scan twain driver when scanning from a Fiery connected Konica printer?
Solution
EFI* states that the only application which is supported for use with the Fiery Scan twain driver is Adobe* Photoshop* (Full or LE version 4 or above). The
Fiery Acquire plugin for Photoshop should be used in a Macintosh* environment. The Macintosh Fiery Scan twain driver has limitations on the scanned file
size and should not be used with Photoshop.
Note: It's possible that other applications will function correctly with the Fiery Scan twain driver, but problems with these applications will not be supported.
Description

Solution

Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
The Test Page does not leave the queue when setup for Windows* Printing (peer-to-peer).
957
Fiery X3e for 7832
Solution
CAUSE: The Server Name has a space character.
SOLUTION: Output a configuration test page. Under the section labeled Server Setup, confirm the Server Name does not have spaces. If spaces are used,
you will need to rename it via the Control Panel Map to omit the space(s).
Description
How to enable scan to E-mail feature after upgrading to version 2.0.
Solution
To enable scan to E-mail feature after upgrading to version 2.0, perform the following:
1. Upgrade copier firmware to the latest code using the flash card update system.
3. Press System Input followed by Peripheral Mode.
4. Select Mode 5 and then exit the screens.
Description
Fiery X3e*, the system code is corrupted.
Solution
CAUSE: The printer main body was turned OFF without first turning OFF the controller.
SOLUTION: Instruct the operators to turn OFF the controller prior to turning OFF the printer. If you are servicing the printer, requiring that it be turned
OFF/ON repeatedly, remove the controller. To turn OFF the controller, perform the following from the Fiery control panel:
1. Press the Menu button.
2. Press the Up Arrow four times. The display will read [Functions Shut Down].
3. Press the Set button.
Description
How to install the TWAIN driver for the Fiery* X3e for use with graphic applications such as Adobe* Photoshop* 5.5 and J ASC* Paint Shop Pro*.
Solution
During installation of the TWAIN driver, the SMB name of the device (i.e. FieryX3e) on the network must be used when establishing the association to the
TCP/IP address. Use Network Neighborhood or Explorer to view the SMB name of the Fiery node.
Description
How to set custom paper sizes on the Fiery* X3e.
Solution
The Fiery X3e does not allow for printing on custom paper sizes. There is no way to add additional paper sizes to the driver.
Description
What print drivers are compatible with Macintosh* OS X (Version 10)?
Solution
Konica does not currently have native Macintosh OS X print drivers. Printing from Macintosh OS 9x applications within OS X is supported using the current
[[Adobe* PostScript* drivers for Macintosh| URL http://www.adobe.com/support/downloads/product.jsp?product=44&platform=Macintosh]].
958
Fiery X3e for CF2001/CF1501
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description

Solution

Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
959
access the files.
Description
Publisher.
Solution
Notes:
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution

download archives .
Description
Solution
960
Description
Solution
WINDOWS 2000

new printers.
WINDOWS XP
961
Fiery X3e for CF2001P
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description

Solution

Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
962
access the files.
Description
Publisher.
Solution
Notes:
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution

download archives .
Description
Solution
963
Description
Solution
WINDOWS 2000

new printers.
WINDOWS XP
964
Fiery X3e for CF9001
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description

Solution

Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
965
access the files.
Description
Publisher.
Solution
Notes:
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution

download archives .
Description
Solution
966
Description
Solution
967
Fiery X3e PLUS
Description
Cannot print to the Fiery* X3e PLUS. Rebooting the Fiery X3e PLUS and/or the main body resolves the problem temporarily.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Low Power mode is set to a very short amount of time.
To change the Low Power setting, perform the following:
a. Press the Utility key.
b. Select User's Choice 1
c. Select 2/2.
d. Select Low Power.
e. Press the Clear QTY key.
f. Enter a value of 240.
g. Press Enter and then Exit twice.
2. Auto Shut Off is enabled.
To disable Auto Shut Off, perform the following:
a. Press Utility
b. Press Admin Mode
c. Enter the Administrator's Code (default is 0000)
d. Press Admin Set
e. Press Disable Shut Off Mode
f. Select YES
g. Press ENTER
h. Press EXIT twice
i. Press User's Choice 1
j. Press 2/2
k. Press Shut Off
l. Select NO
m. Press ENTER
n. Press EXIT twice.
3. Early version of software is installed on the engine.
Upgrade the engine firmware to the latest version. A utility for Windows* 2000 and Windows XP (p/n U192-0300) is available to replace the system made
available in 7915/7920 Technical Bulletin #3. The new utility uses the PCMCIA slot of a Windows 2000/XP laptop to program the flash card, instead of the old
style Swap box. The 8020/8031 requires the 16MB flash card (p/n U192-0250), the 8MB flash card for the 7915/7920 will not work.
4. Early version of system code is installed on the conroller
Reload system code on the controller with the latest version.
5. Conflicting IP address with another device on the network.
Disconnect the network connection on the controller and PING the IP address of the controller from the command prompt of a PC. If you receive a reply from
the PING while the controller is disconnected from the network, then there is another device on the network with the same IP address as the controller. Work
with the network administrator to eliminate the conflict.
6. If an administrator password is set on the Fiery X3e Plus, print jobs will not print.
This issue has been resolved with a software patch. The patch file name is 1-AK2RR.ps (only to be used with 1.2 Fiery system code) and is on the Konica
FTP site . The file is posted as 13zhpt1ak2rr.exe. To install the patch, perform the following:
a. Download/Import the patch file "1-AK2RR.ps" with either Fiery Downloader or Command Workstation to the "Direct" queue.
b. You must wait at least 60 seconds after the patch file download/import before rebooting the system. This will ensure the patch file is completely
processed.
c. The system must be rebooted twice for the patch to be effective. Please select "Shut Down" and then "Reboot System" on the Fiery LCD. If you are
using CWS 4, please select Server" on the menu bar and select Reboot Server". When the Fiery has come to Idle", repeat the steps to reboot the system.
d. Please wait until the Fiery has come to idle after the second reboot to print out the configuration page.
e. Verify the Update Info section. It should contain the patch number "1-AK2RR".
7. The PWB-F is faulty.
When the engine enters Low Power mode it may loose communications with the X3e* Plus controller. Inspect the cables from the controller to the engine for
bent pins. If no pins are bent, replace the PWB-F (65FA-9030).
8. The Fiery control board is faulty.
Replace the Fiery control board (45029059)
Description
Solution
968
Fiery X3e PLUS
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
How to setup scan to hard drive.
Solution
To setup scan to hard drive, perform the following:
1. Enter the IP address of the Fiery* X3e PLUS in your web browser.
2. Log on as an administrator.
3. Click on the File tab and then the Create box under the mailboxes.
4. Input a mailbox number and password that you select in the proper fields.
5. Click on Apply and after the browser returns to the previous screen you can create another mailbox or log-out.
6. After all your mailboxes have been created and you have logged-out as an administrator you click on the Scan tab to set up a One-Touch key.
7. Select the Index number you wish to set the One-Touch key under and then click on an open box.
8. On the destination screen that opens select Scan to Mailbox and click on the Next box.
9. Name the mailbox with the name you want on the machine display in the destination name field.
10. Select the mailbox name or number for the location using the drop down menu.
11. Click on Create to finish creating the mailbox and making it available as a one touch key.
Note: You do not have to assign a password when you are creating a mailbox. You can leave the field blank so that no password is needed. The default
mailboxes (admin, operator, and guest) can also be selected for scanning
Description
Fiery* X3e PLUS, is not recognized by the main body engine at set up.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The memory module (MU-433) was installed in the Fiery instead of the main body.
Remove the MU-433 from the Fiery and install it on the copier board which is located on the right, rear of the machine (the location where the Fiery X3e was
installed on the models 7915 and 7920). Memory Upgrade, MU-433 (256MB) (Item #960833) must be installed in the main body at initial install for proper
machine operation.
2. The incorrect controller type was selected.
Perform the following steps:
a. Enter Service Mode (Utility, Meter Count, Stop, 0, 0, Stop, 0, 1)
b. System Input
c. Peripheral Setting
d. Controller 2 and Mode 1
e. Select End and Fin.Time to return to copier display.
3. The Fiery system code has become corrupted.
Reload system code.
4.The Fiery hard drive has become inoperative.
Replace the Fiery hard drive and reload system code.
Description
What is the part number for the motherboard?
Solution
The part number for the motherboard is 45029059.
969
Fiery X3e PLUS
Description
What is the part number for the hard drive?
Solution
Hard drive (p/n 45027525).
Description
8020 ONLY, White band near the trail edge of the image when printing full bleed onto 12x18 paper.
Solution
CAUSE: Failed PWB-F board.
SOLUTION: Replace PWB-F (p/n 65FA-9030).
Description
BOOTING is displayed on the Fiery* X3e PLUS operation panel.
Solution
CAUSE: A bad memory module or wrong memory module is installed in the Fiery.
SOLUTION: Remove any memory upgrade that may have been installed. Ensure that the original 128MB memory module is installed in slot J 48 (slot nearest
the CPU). Power up the Fiery and verify operation. If BOOTING is still displayed, replace the original 128MB memory module (PCUA 950471).
Description
How to select a custom paper size.
Solution
To select a custom paper size, perform the following:
1. In the application's page setup, select PostScript* Custom Page Size. Do not enter the custom size information here or paper size will change from
PostScript Custom Page Size to Custom Page Size.
2. In the print driver select the Paper/Quality tab.
3. Select Advanced.
4. In the Page Size pull down, select PostScript Custom Page Size.
5. A new window will open. Input the actual paper dimensions for width and height, then select OK.
Description
J OB HAS BEEN DONE IMPROPERLY, CHECK THE RECORD message on the operation control panel when printing with Copytrack turned ON.
Solution
CAUSE: Account information is missing or incorrect in the driver.
SOLUTION: Input and verify the account number to print with Copytrack turned ON. To input the correct information, perform the following:
4. On the FIERY PRINTING tab select USER IDENTIFICATION and enter the account number.
5. Check ACCOUNT CONTROL and click on OK twice to save.
Note: Password is not needed unless password printing is being performed.
970
Fiery X4 for 7823
Description

Solution

Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
How to set the Fiery* X4 to parallel print.
Solution
CAUSE: Parallel printing is not available on the Fiery X4.
SOLUTION: A Fiery X2 or X2e would have to be used if parallel printing is required.
Description
Solution
Description
Publisher.
Solution
971
Fiery X4 for 7823
Notes:
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution

download archives .
Description
Solution
Description
When printing a large document from Microsoft* Publisher, a Publisher error box displays 'There is not enough memory to display a picture. Some pictures
may display incompletely or not at all. To make more memory available, save your work and close other programs: then try again.'
Solution
CAUSE: Insufficient hard drive space for the spool folder.
SOLUTION: Confirm the workstation has sufficient hard drive space to spool the print job. The Spool folder location can be confirmed by viewing the Print
Server Properties in Windows by clicking on Start, Settings, and then Printers. The Print Server Properties dialog box opens and now click on the Advanced
tab to view the Spool folder location. The default location for the Spool folder for Microsoft Windows* 2000 is C:\\WINNT\System32\spool\printers. If the C:
drive space is not sufficient, you may encounter insufficient memory errors when attempting to print which may be more evident with larger print jobs. If the
system is equipped with additional hard drives, the Spool folder location can be pointed to a drive with additional hard drive space. Be sure to obtain the
System Administrators approval before making any changes to the spool folder location.
Description
The selection for LPR port does not show up when trying to set up a printer port under Microsoft* Windows NT.
Solution
SOLUTION: Microsoft TCP/IP* Printing Services needs to be enabled from the Windows NT network setup window.
972
Fiery X4 for 7823
Description
Unable to find the Fiery* X4 when browsing the network to setup SMB printing from Windows* 9x or ME.
Solution
CAUSE: There is not a workgroup or domain name entered under Service Setup.
SOLUTION: Enter a workgroup or domain name on the Fiery X4. To enter the workgroup or domain name, perform the following:
1. Press the MENU button on the Fiery control interface then use the down arrow to access the second screen, select REBOOT SERVER. When setup
message is on the display, press any key.
2. After the START UP menu is displayed select RUN SETUP, NETWORK SETUP, SERVICE SETUP, and WINDOWS SETUP in that order.
3. Enter and verify the correct data under WINDOWS SETUP making certain that you enter a name at the SET DOMAIN NAME option.
4. Select SAVE CHANGES and reboot the server.
973
Fiery X4 for CF910
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description

Solution

Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Description
Publisher.
Solution
974
Fiery X4 for CF910
Notes:
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution

download archives .
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
WINDOWS 2000
975
Fiery X4 for CF910

new printers.
WINDOWS XP
Description
Solution
Description
Can Scantrip be used with the Fiery* X4?
Solution
976
Fiery Z4 for 7823
Description

Solution

Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Availability and specifications, Fiery* Z4.
Solution
The Fiery Z4 controller was introduced in Info Source Branch Bulletin #40-00 , dated March 24, 2000. See the Info Source bulletin for specifications and
features.
Description
How to enable support for Copy Track when printing from a Microsoft* Windows 2000 workstation or server.
Solution
Windows 2000 does not support the Copy Track function. This limitation is noted in the release notes enclosed with the product. There currently is no
workaround for this issue on the Fiery external controllers. If printing from Windows 2000, Copy Track must be disabled.
Description
Solution
Description
Publisher.
Solution
977
Fiery Z4 for 7823
Notes:
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution

download archives .
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
Description
978
Fiery Z4 for 7823
What applications are supported for use with the Fiery* Scan twain driver when scanning from a Fiery connected Konica printer?
Solution
EFI* states that the only application which is supported for use with the Fiery Scan twain driver is Adobe* Photoshop* (Full or LE version 4 or above). The
Fiery Acquire plugin for Photoshop should be used in a Macintosh* environment. The Macintosh Fiery Scan twain driver has limitations on the scanned file
size and should not be used with Photoshop.
It's possible that other applications will function correctly with the Fiery Scan twain driver, but problems with these applications will not be supported.
979
Fiery Z4 for 7832
Description

Solution

Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Description
Publisher.
Solution
Notes:
Description
Solution
980
Fiery Z4 for 7832

identify the link.
Description
Solution

download archives .
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
WINDOWS 2000

new printers.
WINDOWS XP
981
Fiery Z4 for 7832
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Is Scan to SMB supported with the Fiery controller?
Solution
No, Scan to SMB is not supported with a Fiery controller.
982
Fiery Z4 for 7920
Description

Solution

Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Patch software for Microsoft* Security Bulletin MS03-043/MS Hot-fix Q828035.
Solution
The patch file 113aptby9bs.exe is available on Konica's public FTP site and is available for immediate download.
Note: The patch and the latest firmware is available at [[http://www.konicabt.com/konicode/PubBrowser/eproms| URL
Description
Solution
Description
Publisher.
Solution
983
Fiery Z4 for 7920
Notes:
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution

download archives .
Description
Solution
Description
Is bypass printing supported on the 7920 or 7915 using the Fiery* Z4?
Solution
Bypass printing is currently only supported with the Fiery X3e running system code version 2.0. The previous system code does not provide an option to print
through the bypass.
Description
Fiery* Z4, compatibility with the model 7915.
Solution
The Fiery Z4 (PCUA 950469) is not compatible with the model 7915. The Fiery Z4 can be used with the model 7920. The Fiery X3e (PCUA 950467) can be
used with the 7915 and 7920.
Description
Fiery* Z4, optional memory compatibility with the main body optional memory.
Solution
The optional memory for the Fiery Z4 (PCUA 950447) is not compatible with the optional memory, MU-431 (PCUA 950461), for the main body of the 7915.
The 7920 comes supplied with the two MU431 memory modules installed. Two optional MU-431 modules are required for the model 7915 if an ADU is
installed. The Fiery optional memory is 256MB. The 7915 optional memory is 128MB.
984
Fiery Z4 for 7920
985
Fiery Z4 for CF2001
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description

Solution

Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Description
Publisher.
Solution
986
Fiery Z4 for CF2001
Notes:
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution

download archives .
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
WINDOWS 2000
987
Fiery Z4 for CF2001

new printers.
WINDOWS XP
Description
Solution
Description
How to distinguish between different versions of the Fiery* Z4.
Solution
The type of Fiery Z4 can be determined by the size of the video port:
The Z4 for the CF2001 has a video port about 1.5" long (not including the screws).
The Z4 for the CF9001 has a video port that is 2" long.
The Z4 for the CF910 has a video port that is 3" long.
988
Fiery Z4 for CF9001
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description

Solution

Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Description
Publisher.
Solution
989
Fiery Z4 for CF9001
Notes:
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution

download archives .
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
WINDOWS 2000
990
Fiery Z4 for CF9001

new printers.
WINDOWS XP
Description
Solution
Description
Can Scantrip be used with the Fiery* Z4?
Solution
991
Fiery Z5 for CF1501
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
Description
Parts manual for the Fiery* Z5/CF1501.
Solution
Description
Unable to access the controller on the network using Command WorkStation* (CWS).
Solution
CAUSE: Firewall software is installed and enabled on the workstation which will not allow CWS to communicate on the network. This software could include
Norton*, McAfee*, ZoneAlarm*, or other vendor. Also, Microsoft* Windows XP Service Pack 2 includes firewall software.
SOLUTION: An exception must be made for CWS within the firewall software setting. This will allow CWS to communicate with the controller on the network.
Description
Current printer driver(s) for the Z5/CF1501.
Solution
public web site:
Description
The Macintosh* OS 9.2 Chooser menu does not allow copier options to be added to the PPD.
Solution
CAUSE: The PPD folder is corrupt.
992
Fiery Z5 for CF1501
SOLUTION: To allow copier options to be added to the PPD, perform the following:
1. Remove all PPDs from the Printer Descriptions folder and place them into the trash can.
2. Go to the Preferences folder and select Printing Preferences\Printing Preferences for Adobe PostScript* Driver Prefs.
3. Place folder contents into the trash can.
4. In the Preferences folder, select the Parse PPDs folder.
5. Place folder contents into the trash can.
6. Reboot the Macintosh.
7. Reload the drivers.
Description
FTP server software for the "scan to file" feature of the controller.
Solution
PageScope Cabinet 1.6 includes an FTP server setup feature. For additional information on scanning to FTP with PageScope Cabinet, please see Section
9.2 of the [[PageScope Cabinet User Manual|URL http://techweb.konicabt.com/tpm/media/PSC_User.pdf]]. Also please see the PageScope Compatibility
Matrix .
Notes:
1. More PageScope downloads can be found at [[http://kmbs.konicaminolta.us/eprise/main/KMBS/pagescope/pagescope_downloads| URL
http://kmbs.konicaminolta.us/eprise/main/KMBS/pagescope/pagescope_downloads]].
Description
Solution
Description
Web Tools or the Fiery Utilities are inaccessible.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Web services are not enabled. Enable Web Services.
2. Queues (print, hold, and direct) are not set to yes. In the printer set-up screen of the Fiery, all queues must be set to yes.
993
Fiery Z5 for CF2001
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description

Solution

Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Description
Publisher.
Solution
994
Fiery Z5 for CF2001
Notes:
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution

download archives .
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
WINDOWS 2000
995
Fiery Z5 for CF2001

new printers.
WINDOWS XP
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
996
Fiery Z5 for CF9001
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description

Solution

Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Description
Publisher.
Solution
997
Fiery Z5 for CF9001
Notes:
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution

download archives .
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
WINDOWS 2000
998
Fiery Z5 for CF9001

new printers.
WINDOWS XP
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
999
Fiery ZX for 7823
Description
What are the port names for the Fiery* ZX external print controller?
Solution
The following are the print, hold and direct ports on the external Fiery ZX controller:
print_PRN-M
hold_PRN-M
direct_PRN-M
Note: These are not case sensitive.
Description
Solution
Description
The selection for LPR port does not show up when trying to set up a printer port under Microsoft* Windows NT.
Solution
SOLUTION: Microsoft TCP/IP* Printing Services needs to be enabled from the Windows NT network setup window.
Description
Unable to find the Fiery* ZX when browsing the network to setup SMB printing from Windows* 9x or ME.
Solution
CAUSE: There is not a workgroup or domain name entered under Service Setup.
SOLUTION: Enter a workgroup or domain name on the Fiery ZX. To enter the workgroup or domain name, perform the following:
1. Press the MENU button on the Fiery control interface then use the down arrow to access the second screen, select REBOOT SERVER. When setup
message is on the display, press any key.
2. After the START UP menu is displayed select RUN SETUP, NETWORK SETUP, SERVICE SETUP, and WINDOWS SETUP in that order.
3. Enter and verify the correct data under WINDOWS SETUP making certain that you enter a name at the SET DOMAIN NAME option.
4. Select SAVE CHANGES and reboot the server.
Description
CorelDRAW* 9 is not positioning the image correctly on the output.
Solution
CAUSE: CorelDRAW will not print correctly if the PPD (PostScript* Printer Description) is not installed correctly within CorelDRAW.
1,000
Fiery ZX for 7823
SOLUTION: To make the CorelDRAW output print in the proper orientation, install the PPD by performing the following:
1. Print out a Microsoft* Windows test page and determine the correct PPD for the printer.
2. On the general tab of the print dialog box, click the "Use PPD" checkbox. If a PPD has not been previously loaded, a "Select PPD File" dialog will appear.
3. Browse to the folder containing the PPD (search .ppd will locate the proper folder). Select the PPD stated on the Windows test page and click OK.
4. Once the PPD is selected, click on the "Properties" button in the print dialog and choose the proper paper size and orientation. The document should then
print properly.
Description
Unable to install Colorwise* Pro Tools onto a Macintosh* OS 10.x.
Solution
CAUSE: Colorwise Pro Tools for Macintosh is an OS 9.x application and will not install on OS 10.x.
SOLUTION: Colorwise Pro Tools will have to be installed on an OS 10.x Macintosh in the classic 9.x mode. If the classic mode does not launch when
installing Colorwise Pro Tools, see the system administrator about loading 9.x or using either a Macintosh with 9.x already loaded or a Microsoft* Windows
system.
Description
Solution
Description
Can Scantrip be used with the Fiery* ZX?
Solution
Description
Apple* Laserwriter* PostScript* driver compatibility with Fiery* print controllers from a Macintosh* system.
Solution
The Apple Laserwriter PostScript driver is not supported with Fiery print controllers. The Adobe* PostScript driver (version 8.5.1 or higher) is required for
printing from a Macintosh platform. The driver is included on the controller's User CD or can be downloaded from the Konica digital FTP site . Refer to the
FTP site index for additional information..
Description
Error message occurs when trying to configure the Fiery Color Calibrator software, "This application requires color server system version 6.0 or greater".
Solution
CAUSE: Incorrect information was entered in either the Server Name or Device fields.
SOLUTION: The Server Name is the IP address of the Fiery controller and the device name is PRN-M
1,001
Fiery ZX-2100
Description
Solution
Description
Can Scantrip be used with the Fiery* ZX2100?
Solution
Description
Solution
Description
How to clear the password from the Fiery*.
Solution
The Fiery password can be cleared by reinstalling System Software on the controller.
Description
Where to acquire the system software for the Fiery* controller.
Solution
System software for the controller is available on CD-ROM. Please see the list for individual item numbers.

Description
Parts manual for the Fiery* ZX2100.
Solution
Description
Current printer driver(s) for the ZX2100.
Solution
1,002
Fiery ZX-2100
public web site:
Description
Unable to connect to the Fiery* using the Web interface from Microsoft* Internet Explorer.
Solution
CAUSE: There are several reasons:
1. Connection is through a proxy server and the local subnet is not excluded from the proxy access.
2. J ava is not installed or enabled in IE.
3. Security is configured to prevent J ava from executing the web interface.
SOLUTION: If still unable to connect using IE, it is possible to use Netscape* as an alternative. Download the latest version of [[Netscape| URL
http://www.netscape.com]] and install only the basic browser and J ava client. Netscape is less restrictive than IE and should allow access to the controller.
Ensure that the popup blocker is disabled when connecting to the Fiery.
Description
Solution
Description
Web Tools or the Fiery Utilities are inaccessible.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Web services are not enabled. Enable Web Services.
2. Queues (print, hold, and direct) are not set to yes. In the printer set-up screen of the Fiery, all queues must be set to yes.
1,003
Fiery ZX-2100 for CF900
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Description
Publisher.
Solution
Notes:
Description
Solution

1,004
identify the link.
Description
Solution

download archives .
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
WINDOWS 2000

new printers.
WINDOWS XP
1,005
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution
1,006
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Description
Publisher.
Solution
Notes:
Description
Solution

1,007
identify the link.
Description
Solution

download archives .
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
WINDOWS 2000

new printers.
WINDOWS XP
1,008
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution
1,009
Fiery ZX-3300
Description
Solution
Description
Publisher.
Solution
Notes:
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution

download archives .
Description
Solution
1,010
Fiery ZX-3300
Description
Solution
WINDOWS 2000

new printers.
WINDOWS XP
Description
Solution
Description
Can Scantrip be used with the Fiery* ZX3300?
Solution
Description
1,011
Fiery ZX-3300
Solution
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
1,012
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Description
Publisher.
Solution
Notes:
Description
Solution

1,013
identify the link.
Description
Solution

download archives .
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
WINDOWS 2000

new printers.
WINDOWS XP
1,014
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution
1,015
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Description
Publisher.
Solution
Notes:
Description
Solution

1,016
identify the link.
Description
Solution

download archives .
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
WINDOWS 2000

new printers.
WINDOWS XP
1,017
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution
1,018
Font DownLoad Tool
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
1,019
FORCE50
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
1,020
FORCE50

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Solution
1,021
FORCE50
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
ISW Error Codes List
Solution

ISW Error Codes

Error Code

Description

Action

01

There is an error in the command to ISW processing unit.

Program is not executing normally. Restart from power ON and re-execute the ISW.

1F

A program error is detected.

Program is not executing normally. Restart from power ON and re-execute the ISW.

41

Input data format error

Check the ISW transfer data file.

42

Invalid machine name input data


43

Invalid board name input data


81

Input device error such as input timeout.
1,022
FORCE50

Check that the communication cable between input devices (PC or ISW Tool) is properly connected.

C1

Failed to erase flash ROM. (during ISW to image control board)

There is an error in the flash ROM on the image control board. Restart from ISW. If the error persists, the life of the image control board flash ROM may
have expired. Replace the image control board.

C2

Failed to write flash ROM. (during ISW to image control board)

There is an error in the flash ROM on the image control board. Restart from ISW. If the error persists, the life of the image control board flash ROM may
have expired. Replace the image control board.

Error Code

Description

Action

C3

ROM checksum error. (during ISW to image control board)

The checksum result after program writing does not match the ROM checksum data of the ISW transfer data file. Restart from ISW. If the error persists, the
ISW transfer data file may not be created correctly.

C4

Output device error such as output timeout

An error was detected in the ISW board targeted at that time. Check the ISW board.

E1

Failed to erase flash ROM. (during ISW to printer control board and FNS control board)

There is an error in the flash ROM on the printer control board or FNS control board. Restart from ISW. If the error persists, the life of the targeted flash
ROM may have expired. Replace the targeted control board.

E2

Failed to write flash ROM. (during ISW to printer control board and FNS control board)

There is an error in the flash ROM on the printer control board or FNS control board. Restart from ISW. If the error persists, the life of the targeted flash
ROM may have expired. Replace the targeted control board.

E3

Communication error between image control board, printer control board, and FNS control board (during ISW to printer control board and FNS control
board)

Check the I/F between the image control board and printer control board, or I/F between the printer control board and FNS control board.

1,023
FORCE50

Error Code

Description

Action

F80-11

Printer Control ISW not written

Perform ISW data install

F80-21

VIF Control ISW not written


F80-30

ISW time-out


F80-31

ISW data error


F80-32

ISW write error


F80-40

FNS ISW not written


F80-41

ZU ISW not written


Description
Solution
1,024
FORCE50
Description
Vellum paper specifications.
Solution
Vellum paper is outside of the special paper specifications of the machine therefore specific paper specification can not be provided. The paper may run
though the machine, however Konica Minolta does not support a particular brand of vellum paper.
Note : Vellum paper has tendencies to hold a static charge causing the paper to have transfer problems with possible premature wearing of the drum. This
paper, in some cases is coated, and could possibly lead to premature wearing of the fuser rollers or leave marks on the copies.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

2.Select File.
3. SelectPrint.
6. Select OK.
8. Select File.
9. Select Print.
11. Select OK.
1,025
FORCE60
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
1,026
FORCE60

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Latest EPROM level, FORCE 60.
Solution
Latest level FORCE 60 EPROM hyperlink and [[Internal Link for Faxing/Printing EPROM information.| RUN V:\text\Wordpad.exe v:\text\newrom\Force60.txt]]
Note: To allow proper Page Printing functionality, make the dipswitch settings specified under level 15.2 EPROM Enhancements (see latest level FORCE 60
EPROM hyperlink for details). Even if level level 16.2 EPROMs (or above) are installed, these dipswitch setting changes must be made.
See FORCE 60 Special EPROM Release Version 17.1 .
See 7060/7065/7150/FORCE 60 Technical Bulletin #24 for information on Level 15.2 EPROMs.
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
What are the part numbers for the level 12 EPROMs?
Solution
The part numbers for level 12 EPROMs are as follows:
Main CB
C1 (p/n DP60122-12.2)
C2 (p/n DP60123-12.2)
Image Processing Board
I1 (p/n DP60B29-16.0)
I2 (p/n DP60B30-16.0)
Operation Panel
O1, (p/n DP60216-11.0)
1,027
FORCE60
O2, (p/n DP60217-11.0)
O3, (p/n DP60212-11.0)
O4, (p/n DP60218-11.0)
Level 12 EPROMs are on the www.konicabt.com website as DP60-12C.EXE.
Latest level FORCE 60 EPROM hyperlink and [[Internal Link for Faxing/Printing EPROM information.| RUN V:\text\Wordpad.exe v:\text\newrom\Force60.txt]]
Description
FS104A, can the FORCE 60 do page printing in the duplex mode with the FS104A?
Solution
The FS-104A supports FORCE 60 page printing in both simplex and duplex mode (Face Down Output). FS-104A supports 3 position stapling in both page
and document mode.
See Info Source Bulletin #7-99 , dated J anuary 29, 1999 for more details.
Description
FS104A, intermittent jam position 13 (J 72) in duplex staple modes only.
Solution
CAUSE: Early version EPROMs installed.
SOLUTION: Upgrade main body to latest EPROMS (16.2 or higher).
Description
How to program the default ATS paper tray and the standard search order.
Solution
To program the default ATS paper tray and the standard search order, perform the following:
Note: In order to program the default paper tray, a minimum EPROM level of 14 is required.
1. Power the printer OFF.
2. Access the 25 mode (power the printer ON, while pressing the 2 and 5 keys).
4. Select software dipswitch #15 using the left up/down arrow.
5. Select the bit number of the switch (0, 1, and 2) using the middle up arrow.
6. Use the matrix below to select the ATS starting tray and search order.
Set 25 mode dipswitches:
15-1 15-0
0 0 0 Standard search order - start at Tray 2 (Default)
0 0 1 Start at Tray 1 (1=2=3=4=5)
0 1 0 Start at Tray 2 (2=3=4=5=1)
0 1 1 Start at Tray 3 (3=4=5=1=2)
1 0 0 Start at Tray 4 (4=5=1=2=3)
1 0 1 Start at Tray 5 (5=1=2=3=4)
7. Set the dipswitches for the desired action (ON/OFF).
8. Power the copier OFF to exit the 25 mode.
9. Access the Key Operator Mode (power the copier ON, while pressing the [HELP] key
10. Touch [9. Memory switches] on the touchscreen.
11. Touch the up-arrow on the touchscreen five (5) times until [No. 6: Automatic tray switching] is displayed in the dark blue band at the top of the
touchscreen.
12. Touch [Change Setting Contents] on the touchscreen until the setting displayed in the dark blue band at the top of the touchscreen is [ON].
13. Touch the up-arrow on the touchscreen three (3) times until [No. 9: ATS/APS switch (Tray 1)] is displayed on the touchscreen.
14. Touch [Change Setting Contents] to select the ON/OFF ATS state desired for Tray 1.
15. Touch the up-arrow on the touchscreen one (1) time until [No. 10: ATS/APS switch (Tray 2)] is displayed on the touchscreen.
23. Power the copier OFF/ON to exit the Key Operator Mode.
1,028
FORCE60
Description
E46-6 after approximately 3,000 prints.
Solution
Special EPROMs for the FORCE 60 referenced in the 7060/7065/7150/FORCE 60 Technical Bulletin #33 (C1/C2 level 16.2 and I1/I2 level 17.2) are
available to correct problems during processing of jobs comprised of more than 3,000 pages.
These EPROMS will only function correctly if used with the latest type Image Processing Board (p/n 55FA-9505 or above). If used with the older type Image
Processing Board (p/n 55FA-9504 or below), the Special EPROMs will not function and the error code will still display if the job is over 3,000 pages in length.
The board type can be identified by removing the board and checking the part number printed on the board. The last number of the part number is the
revision level.
Notes:
1. Latest level FORCE 60 EPROM hyperlink and [[Internal Link for Faxing/Printing EPROM information.| RUN V:\text\Wordpad.exe
v:\text\newrom\Force60.txt]]
2. To allow proper Page Printing functionality, make the dipswitch settings specified under level 15.2 EPROM Enhancements (see latest level FORCE 60
EPROM hyperlink for details). Even if level level 16.2 EPROMs are installed, these dipswitch setting changes must be made.
3. Revised FORCE 60 EPROM Release Notice with information on determining Image Processing Board type. To view this PDF, Acrobat* Reader must be
installed. Acrobat Reader can be downloaded for free from the Adobe* Web site at: [[http://www.adobe.com/products/acrobat/readstep2.html| URL
Description
Memory specifications, FORCE 60.
Solution
CAUTION: Proper performance is guaranteed ONLY with Konica specified SIMM memory modules. Memory configuration and specifications are very
complicated. As a result, purchase of memory from a vendor may result in the wrong SIMM, although the product is of a high quality. The following
specifications are guidelines.
Konica 16MB SIMM modules 32MB SIMM modules (PCUA 950781) are available at 60 or 70ns, with non-parity. These modules have tin plated contacts.
The original 16MB SIMM in the E-RDH is GOLD plated. EDO (Extended Data Output) can NOT be used.
Note: Some 60ns SIMMs are provided. 60ns memory can be used in combination with 70ns as long as a 70ns SIMM is installed in bank 0 (in the first slot).
The E-RDH does not require parity memory.
Note: After installation of any memory, the memory check procedure should be performed.
Note: IP302 Memory is different; See IP302.
VOLATILE MEMORY GUARANTEE STATEMENT
The Konica FORCE 60 uses an E-RDH (Electronic Recirculating Document Handler). This E-RDH stores each job in memory prior to printing. The standard
E-RDH configuration is 16MB of memory. The memory module used to achieve this is the 72-pin SIMM (Single In-line Memory Module) type. This memory
is volatile (i.e., all memory addresses on a module of this type are reset whenever power is removed). Optional configurations for the E-RDH allow for
memory to be increased above the standard 16MB configuration. This is done by adding other modules of the same type only, thus an optional memory
configuration would also be volatile. The process of powering the Konica FORCE 60 off via the main switch on its operation panel removes power from the
E-RDH, thus any information previously stored will be impossible to retrieve when the power switch is turned on.
(Revision 1/28/97)
Self diagnostic capability to verify SIMM functionality is provided in 47 mode, output code 198:
Note: The E-RDH must be functional. (Verification of E-RDH function is part of the test sequence.)
Operating panel displays:
MEMORY CHECK OK indicates a good SIMM
MEMORY ERROR indicates a SIMM failure
a. Mount the SIMM to be tested on the E-RDH Board, enter 47 mode, output code 198 and press START PRINT
b. Read the operation panel display.
If the display states: MEMORY CHECK OK, the SIMM is good. Install a new SIMM on the board and repeat test.
If the display states: MEMORY ERROR, proceed to step c.
c. Mount a different SIMM, enter 47 mode, output mode 198 and press START PRINT
If the display states: MEMORY CHECK OK, this indicates that the SIMM from Step a has failed.
If the display states: MEMORY ERROR, proceed to step d.
d. Replace the E-RDH Board with a new one, install the SIMM from Step #1. Enter Mode 47, output code 198.
If the display states: MEMORY CHECK OK, this indicates that the SIMM access function of the original E-RDH has failed. Use the new E-RDH board to
perform the SIMM checking procedure.
Notes:
I. This check is used only to verify SIMM condition - not the E-RDH board except to determine its SIMM access function.
II. A maximum of 4 SIMMs can be mounted
A. The Memory Check OK message will only display if all 4 SIMMs are good.
B. If any one of the SIMM fails, Memory Error will display and each SIMM must be checked to determine which has failed.
Konica Specified SIMM Memory module
1,029
FORCE60
Description
FS103B, can the FS103B exit documents face down (page print)?
Solution
The FS103B only allows face down printing (page printing) in the non-staple, single-sided mode. When duplexing or using finishing options with the FS-103B,
the documents exit face up.
1,030
Force65
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
1,031
Force65

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Solution
1,032
Force65
and Di5510/Di7210.
Description
Solution
and Di5510/Di7210.
Description
How to enable/disable job offset.
Solution
To enable/disable job offset, perform the following:
1. Press the HELP key.
2. Press Key Operator Mode which is displayed on the touchscreen.
3. Touch the down-arrow on the lower left corner of the touchscreen.
4. Touch [13 Memory switch setting] on the touchscreen.
5. Touch the down-arrow on the lower left of the touchscreen three (3) times.
6. Touch the down-arrow on the right side of the touchscreen (5) times. The highlighted indication will shift to [20 J OB offset operating] and the current
setting will be displayed on the touchscreen.
7. Touch [Change Setting Contents] on the lower middle of the touchscreen until the desired setting is displayed. The setting choices available are [OFF],
which is the default setting or ON.
8. Press RETURN on the touchscreen a couple of times to return to normal mode.
Description
Solution
As a result of the above, developer/toner spillage occurs which can cover (block) the charge corona grid causing developer to adhere to the drum and deposit
on output copies.
SOLUTION: Please refer to 7155/7165/FORCE 65 Technical Bulletin #10 for detailed information.
Description
COPIER WARMING UP, PLEASE WAIT AWHILE message and the machine never goes to a ready condition.
Solution
CAUSE: The ADU board has failed.
Note: The fuser lamps are ON and cycling properly.
SOLUTION: Replace the ADU board (p/n 55AA-9040).
1,033
Force65
Description
Solution
Description
How to store PCL fonts onto the print system hard drive or compact flash card.
Solution
To store a PCL font onto the IP controller hard drive (or compact flash card) on legacy Konica models the following prerequisites are necessary:
1. The actual font or bar code must be purchased by the user.
2. The font must be a PCL font or can be a PCL Soft font. If it is a Soft font, the font must first be edited to make it a PCL font then it can be modified for
storage on the IP unit.
3. The workstation used to edit the file must be equipped with DOS/Dos editor.
Notes :
a. Follow this step-by-step procedure for the complete installation procedures and for the proper parts ordering procedures.
1,034
Force75
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
1,035
Force75

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
PART NUMBER MODEL
55VA-9071 7075/FORCE 75
56EA-90407155
1,036
Force75
56AA-90407165
Description
Intermittent SC46-06, SC46-90, or SC46-91.
Solution
CAUSE: There is an image processing board FlashROM version incompatibility.
SOLUTION: Upgrade the FlashROMs to the latest revisions.
Description
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
Notes :
1,037
Force85
Description
Solution
bizhub C250/C252/C300/C350/C351/C450
Stop, 0, 7, 1, 3, 9, *

2. Incorrect meters


8020/CF2002/8031/CF3102


bizhub 200/250/350
6. Not printing.

bizhub 420/500

bizhub 600/750
1,038
Force85

7145/7255
1. Blank screen.


Updates/Status :
Notes :
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1,039
Force85
Notes :
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
Solution
Description
Dark copies; poor copy quality.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Overtoning; toner falling onto the T/S corona due to incorrect laser power adjustment or a defective write unit.
To check, perform the following:
a. Enter the 36 mode by holding down the 3 and 6 keys while powering the machine ON.
b. On the touchscreen, touch 1 [process adjustment].
c. On the next screen touch 5 or 6 [LD1 or LD2 offset adjustment].
d. On the next screen, touch [COPY SCREEN].
e. Select 11x17 paper and press [Start]. A laser test pattern will be printed.
f. Refer to the LD1, LD2 adjustment procedures in the 36 mode adjustment section of the service manual for adjustment specifics. If only one laser is firing
or the correct adjustment cannot be achieved, the write unit is defective and must be replaced (p/n 56VA-6500).
2. Overtoning; toner falling onto the transfer guide and T/S corona due to incorrect developing unit magnet angle.
To check and adjust, perform the following:
a. Remove the developing unit from the machine.
b. On the front side of the unit, inspect the position of the magnet angle indicator (pointer). The correct position should be between the second and third
line from the left.
c. If adjustment is needed, loosen the pointer locking screw and rotate the pointer to the correct position, then tighten the locking screw.
CAUTION: If any adjustment was performed, change the developer and perform all drum peculiarity adjustments.
Description
1,040
Force85
Solution
and Di5510/Di7210.
Description
Solution
and Di5510/Di7210.
Description
FS211 Service Manual.
Solution
FS211 Service Manual .
1,041
FormKaster
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Not able to print forms created from FormKaster on any of the newer model Konica printers.
Solution
CAUSE: Incorrect print driver version is being used.
SOLUTION: The latest version print drivers must be used when printing from FormKaster. The exception is the IP511/ 7155/7165. The work around is to
use an HP3 PCL* driver.
Note: This problem will be corrected in the next version of the driver.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Where to obtain support for solutions.
Solution
In order to obtain the best support to meetcustomer needs, please contact the appropriate source for each of the solutions listed below.

Konica Minolta Business Solutions (Technical Support Hotline): 800-825-5664
Dispatcher
Doc Builder Pro
DocuBreeze
eCopy (TWAIN driver, installation support; refer connector issues to eCopy at http://www.ecopy.com/Support_Overview.asp )
EFI Color Profiler
EFI Graphic Arts Package
Fiery Free Form
FormKaster
Linkcom
MicroPress
OmniPagePro
PageScope Account Manager
PageScope Address Book
PageScope Box Operator
PageScope Cabinet
PageScope Cabinet Server
1,042
FormKaster
PageScope Data Administrator
PageScope Direct Print
PageScope Enterprise Suite
PageScope Font Manager
PageScope Light
PageScope Net Care
PageScope Router
PageScope Web Connection
PageScope Workware
Paperport
Planet Press
PrintGroove
Recollect
Scantrip
Unify
vCare / CS Remote Care
Create!Print (v2.5)

Atlas Software : 877-647-8715
ObjectifLune
Printshop Mail

Bottomline Technologies : 800-839-9029
Create!Form
Create!Print (except v2.5)

Captaris : 520-320-7070
RightFax

Equitrac Corporation : 877-378-4872
Equitrac solutions
Printlog Accounting Server (PAS)

J amex : 800-289-6550
J amex vending solutions

KIP America Corporation : www.kipamerica.com
KIP

Prism Software : 949-855-3100
DocForm
DocRecord
DocSystem
DocTransform

Quite Software : help@quite.com
Quite Imposing Plus

Rochester Software Associates : 585-327-7129
RSA DTPrint
RSA IPDS Print
RSA MIS Print
RSA Qdirect
RSA RDO Print
RSA Web CRD
Complete information is contained in attached Bulletin Number 6255.
SPECIAL NOTE : Solution contribution by Gabe Smith, ESS/SSD
1,043
FTP Utility
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Compatibility between applications and firmware.
Solution
Please see the attached files that address compatibility between applications and firmware.
1. Compatibility with Phase 1.8 and Phase 2.0
Does the application for Phase 2.0 work on Phase 1.8 firmware?


Does the applicationfor Phase 2.5 work on Phase 3.0 firmware?
1,044
general info
Description
Parts Department information.
Solution
A dealer or end user can obtain parts directly from Konica by calling the Parts Department at 1-800-284-5555. The end user can order parts using a credit
card.
Description
Recommended transparencies for copiers and printers.
Solution
All Konica copiers and printers (except those listed below) use the standard transparency (PCUA 946427 equivalent to the 3M* type PP2500 (688/503).
Models 4065, 6090, 6090M and 7090S/RF should use (PCUA 946428), which is thicker and is equivalent to the 3M type PP2410 (703/536) which has a paper
back to actuate the light sensors. The lead edge white strip type is not recommended for these models.
The model 9028 and 7728 should use only (PCUA 947923). Use of the OHP mode and an external fuser is necessary for colors to be transparent.
Note: Feed transparencies from the bypass tray one sheet at a time for best results.
Description
Recommended EPROM programmer.
Solution
The AllWriter* Device Programmer is recommended.
System Requirements:
PC with a minimum hardware and software configuration as follows:
1. 486-33 SX
2. Microsoft Windows 95*
3. 8MB RAM
4. 4MB free hard disk space
Features:
1. Fastest baud rate of 230400 for the serial port (dependant on computer).
2. Parallel port support. This mode is typically faster than serial. The parallel interface is based on the IEEE 1284 high-speed specification.
3. The Chip List can be viewed without operating the programmer.
4. The software has a demo function, which allows you to work with the software without a programmer connected.
5. An auto-connect function bypasses the Communication Screen setup.
Note: The auto identify feature contained in the APRO* programmer (NLA) is not available at this time. Plans of releasing new software with this feature is
forthcoming.
To order, send or fax a standard Konica B-439 or B-439F (for fax) parts order form to:
System General Corporation
163 South Main Street
Milpitas, CA 95035
Tel: (800) 967-4776 or (408) 263-6667
Fax: (408) 262-9220
E-mail: Sales@systemgeneral.com
Do not mix other parts with this order. System General will ship the order to you directly, and Konica will add the charge to your monthly parts invoice.
Description
Total Counter Reset Request Form and procedure.
Solution
Total Counter Reset Request Form .
PROCEDURE
1. When a caller or web user (i.e., dealer, VAR, etc.) requests to reset the electronic total counter, explain that the procedure is confidential, and to prevent
liability on the part of Konica Minolta, a form will be E-mailed to their location.
2. The Technical Manager is the only one authorized to complete the form.
3. Once completed, it is faxed to NSSG for review (860-902-7643).
4. If approved, the counter reset information will be sent to the requesting party.
1,045
general info
Description
How can an end-user obtain a User Manual?
Solution
There are two ways an end-user can obtain User Manuals. They can go to [[Konica's Website| URL http://www.konicabt.com/Support/ug.html]]
(www.konicabt.com) and print out the manual (if available), or complete a parts order form and obtain a hard copy book.
Konica recommends printing User Manual from the website. This is by far the quickest, most efficient, and least costly method of obtaining the information
desired.
Description
Recommended paper specifications (including recycled paper).
Solution
Recommended paper specifications:
1. Executive grade bond
Brightness: 86.5
Opacity: 88.0
Moisture %: 4.40
Caliper: 4.00
Smoothness: 150
2. Recycled (20% post consumer)
Brightness: 88
Opacity: 90
Moisture %: 4.5 - 5.0
Caliper: 4.2
Smoothness 155
See Paper specifications and Guide To Paper Technical Education Bulletin #11.
Description
How to uncompress files downloaded from the Konica Minolta FTP site or the KMBS website.
Solution
Most of the files are compressed on the FTP site to save time when downloading. Always copy the file to an empty directory on a computer hard drive to save
online time when downloading. It is not a good habit to copy directly to a disk in the floppy drive. Some files are too big and will fill the disk; or they are
compressed, and when uncompressed, will fill the disk.
To use a downloaded file, perform the following:
1. Copy it to an empty directory on a hard drive.
2. Uncompress the file to the desired media (i.e., floppy disk).
3. Install it.
The system software is an executable. Place an empty disk in the floppy drive and double-click the executable. In the window that opens, type 'a' for the
A-drive. Press any key to continue, the disk image will be copied onto the diskette. If only one copy is needed, press the escape key, then close the window.
Repeat the procedure for any remaining disks. Be sure to number the disks accordingly (i.e., 1, 2, 3, etc). These disks are now ready to be inserted into the
print controller to upgrade the system software.
Print drivers can be uncompressed to a floppy, allowing the owner of the diskette(s) to load the driver(s) on different workstations. Some files when opened,
will display a Read Me. Follow the instructions to prevent any problems with installation.
Description
Does NSSG support KIP 3000?
Solution
No, support is provided by KIP Customer Care Center by calling 800-252-6793. See Bulletin 05-GB-100 and Bulletin 5183 for details.
1,046
general info
Description
Recommended recycled copy paper.
Solution
There are two brands of recycled paper recommended by Konica: Weyerhaeuser* Recycled Laser Copy Paper and Hammermill* recycled paper. Because of
wide differences in manufacturing quality, Konica cannot guarantee the results of all recycled papers. The quality of the paper - recycled or not - determines
the quality of the results.
Description
Does Konica Minolta sell external print servers?
Solution
Konica Minolta branches can order the following external print servers:
1. HP J et Direct* 300X (PCUA 709117) - Ethernet 10BaseT/100BaseT print server. Auto negotiates between 10BaseT and 100BaseT. J et Admin* software
included for installation.
2. HP J et Direct 500X (PCUA 709118) - Token Ring, connects up to 3 printers via high speed (IEEE 1284) ports. J et Admin software included for installation.
3. Xconnect*100-8N (PCUA 709119) - Ethernet 10BaseT/100 BaseT print server. XCD* also provides support for DEC* LAT and Banyan Vines*.
4. Centronics Cable for XCD Devices (PCUA 709120) - Centronics cable is required for XCD print server installation on a Konica printer.
Note: See Branch Info Source Bulletin #15-99 for more information.
1,047
HDD Backup Utility
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
C-D354 (CD354) when the HDD Backup Utility is used.
Solution
Seeattached documentationfor details. To viewthe PDF, Adobe Readermust be installed. Adobe Readercan be downloaded for free from the Adobe
web site at: http://www.adobe.com/products/acrobat/readstep2.html
Description
Solution


Description
HDD Backup Utility User's Guide
Solution
Main features covered:

1,048
HDD Backup Utility
Backing up (saving)
Restoring (recovering)
Wizard operations (program in dialog format)
Access limitations through auto protect
Encoding backup data
Please refer to the attached documentation. To viewthe PDF, Adobe Readermust be installed. Adobe Readercan be downloaded for free from the
1,049
IC-202
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
At the PC :
Notes :
At the bizhub :
7. Select Scan.
Description
Solution

1xx Informational
1,050
IC-202

2xx Success

3xx Redirection

4xx Client Error

5xx Server Error

Description
When using BOOTP Lite, what should be used to separate the MAC address information?
Solution
When entering the TCP/IP address, MAC hardware address, subnet mask (optional), and gateway (optional) into BOOTP Lite , separate the MAC
hardware address (Network address) information using colons (i.e, 00:e0:bb:05:31:d3), not spaces or hyphens. Other information is separated as normal
TCP/IP format (i.e, 198.169.2.12).
Note : The BOOTP Lite program is attached below and also can be downloaded via the Konica Minolta Download Selector. Access the Selector from SSD
Description
C3E02 after IC-202 is installed with firmware version A1 or later.
Solution
CAUSE: The current version of firmware does not recognize the IC-202.
SOLUTION: Please load firmware version 98 or laterto the copier and then install the new RAM pack. Power the copier ON and verify the code has reset.
Afterwards, download the current version of firmware to the copier.
Description
Solution

IC-202

IC-203

IC-205

IC-302
not available.
1,051
IC-202

IC-401

IC-402

IC-405

IC-611

IP-901
not available.



Description
Solution
Description
Unable to print from AdobeAcrobat8 with the Visual PostScript driver.
Solution
CAUSE:An abnormality with the Visual PostScript driver.

SOLUTION:Visual PostScript drivers areavailable that correct this issue.
MicrosoftWindows NT4/2K/XP/2K3 (32-bit)
bizhub Pro 1050 Visual PostScript driver version 3.2.0.0
bizhub 750/600 Visual PostScript driver version 3.1.0.0
1,052
IC-202
bizhub 500/420/360 Visual PostScript driver version 3.1.0.0
MicrosoftWindows XP Pro/2K3 (64-bit)
Note : The latest print drivers are available via the Konica Minolta Download Selector. Access the Selector from theKMBS public site (
Firmware and more'.
Description
Slow printing on AdobePostScript files (single-page print job) using batch print process.
Solution

CAUSE: The slow printing will depend on the PostScriptprint job parameters (single-page, 11x17, PDF parameter and low toner coverage per page).
The results are based on SSD testing:
1. The bizhub 420/500 will pause at intermittent number of jobs for the batch print job.
2. The bizhub 600/750 will pause between the first twelve jobs and then will not pause rest batch print job process.

SOLUTION: Combine all the Postscript files into one PDF file using AdobeDistller. Print the the new PDF file to the controller.
Note : SSD did receive an update from Konica Minolta Business Technologies in J apan based on escalation for this issue. Recommendation is to use
software solution to combine the batch file and send the file as one print job.

1,053
IC-203
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution

1xx Informational

2xx Success

3xx Redirection

4xx Client Error

5xx Server Error

Description
Solution
TCP/IP format (i.e, 198.169.2.12).
Description
SC49-10 upon installation of the print controller.
Solution
CAUSE: The IC-203 hard drive must be formatted in TECH REP mode.
Note : If unable to access TECH REP mode, power the machine OFF, hold the Utility key and power the machine ON.

SOLUTION: Format the IC-203 hard drive.
1,054
IC-203
Description
Unable to fold and center staple without selecting booklet mode when using the Visual PostScript driver for the bizhub PRO 920/IC-203 print system.
Solution
CAUSE: An older version of the bizhub PRO 920/IC-203 Visual PostScript driver is installed.
SOLUTION: The 2.1.0.0 version or laterof the bizhub PRO 920/IC-203 Visual PostScript driveris available via the Konica Minolta Download Selector. Access
the Selector from the KMBS public site ( http://www.kmbs.konicaminolta.us ) Support & Drivers tab or from SSD Web Support (CS Expert Support) by
clicking on 'Download MSDS, Drivers, Firmware and more'.
Before installing the driver please be sure to remove the previous version of the bizhub PRO 920/IC-203 driver from the workstation using the following
steps:
1. Open the printers and faxes dialog box.
2. Select file.
3. Select server properties.
4. Select drivers.
5. Select the bizhub PRO 920/IC-203 Visual PostScript driver and click Remove.
At this point, the 2.1.0.0 version of the bizhub PRO 920/IC-203 Visual PostScript driver can be installed to realize the new functionality.
Note : For additional information about how to manually remove printer drivers, refer to attached documentation. To viewthe PDF, Adobe Readermust be
installed. Adobe Readercan be downloaded for free from the Adobeweb site at:
Description
Solution

IC-202

IC-203

IC-205

IC-302
not available.

IC-401

IC-402

IC-405
1,055
IC-203

IC-611

IP-901
not available.



Description
Solution
Description
Solution

Firmware and more'.
Description
How to install the EM-701 on the bizhub PRO 920.
Solution
1,056
IC-203
The EM-701 expanded memory (Item#7640000942)

note ='';
if (note !=''){
ArrNotes[x] =note;
x++;
window.document.write(" " +x +" ");
}

is not installed on the bizhub PRO 920; only on the IC-203. The bizhub PRO 920 uses the standard 40GB hard drive for overlays, watermarks and expanded
memory.
1,057
IC-204
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution

1xx Informational

2xx Success

3xx Redirection

4xx Client Error

5xx Server Error

Description
Solution
TCP/IP format (i.e, 198.169.2.12).
Description
Solution
1,058
IC-204
Description
Unable to print and the print tab is missing from the Web interface.
Solution
CAUSE: The IC-204 print controller is not installed.

SOLUTION: Verify that the IC-204 is not installed on the OACB. Order and install the IC-204 print controller (p/n 16J E).
Note : The IC-204 is a little 8-pin chip that mounts on the OACB above the memory slots. There is also a yellow sticker on the chip that indicates IC-204.
Description
Solution

Firmware and more'.
Description
Slow printing on AdobePostScript files (single-page print job) using batch print process.
Solution

CAUSE: The slow printing will depend on the PostScriptprint job parameters (single-page, 11x17, PDF parameter and low toner coverage per page).
The results are based on SSD testing:
1. The bizhub 420/500 will pause at intermittent number of jobs for the batch print job.
2. The bizhub 600/750 will pause between the first twelve jobs and then will not pause rest batch print job process.

SOLUTION: Combine all the Postscript files into one PDF file using AdobeDistller. Print the the new PDF file to the controller.
Note : SSD did receive an update from Konica Minolta Business Technologies in J apan based on escalation for this issue. Recommendation is to use
software solution to combine the batch file and send the file as one print job.

Description
How to scan to a Macintoshvia FTP, E-mail or SMB.
Solution
Pleaserefer the attached'lab' instructions for scanning to a Macintoshvia FTP, E-mail or SMB (3.5MB).
Description
New firmware release for support of eCopy.
Solution
New firmware has been released for support of eCopy functions.
bizhub 360/420/500 and IC-204
Firmware level is Version 31-UL (Base Version: C 31)
bizhub 600/750 and IC-202
1,059
IC-204
Firmware level is 57AA-1000-GUJ -31-000, Version 31-UJ .
Notes :
1. Please usethe firmwareat the same time as Konica Minolta TWAIN Driver for eCopy (NoGUI), Version 2.0.11d.
2.The latest version of firmware, system software or print drivers is available via the Konica Minolta Download Selector. Access the Selector from SSD Web
Description
Solution
1,060
IC-205
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution

1xx Informational

2xx Success

3xx Redirection

4xx Client Error

5xx Server Error

Description
Solution
TCP/IP format (i.e, 198.169.2.12).
Description
Solution
1,061
IC-205

IC-202

IC-203

IC-205

IC-302
not available.

IC-401

IC-402

IC-405

IC-611

IP-901
not available.



1,062
IC-205
Description
Solution
Description
"Spooler subsystem app has encountered a problem and needs to close" message following installation of the PCL driver on a MicrosoftWindows XP
workstation with a small inkjet printer connected via a parallel connection.
Solution
CAUSE: A third-party printer driver or a third-party service prevents adding printers, or the third-party printer driver or third-party service affects the
functionality of a newly installed printer.
Note : As an example, this issue may occur if the Lexmarkprint service (LexBce Server service) is installed and is running on the computer before another
printer is added.
SOLUTION: To resolve this issue, follow these steps:
1. If the Lexmarkprint service is installed on your computer, turn off the LexBce Server service. To do this:
a. Click Start, right-click My Computer, and then click Manage.
b. Expand Services and Applications, and then click Services.
c. In the right pane, right-click LexBce Server, and then click Properties.
d. On the General tab, in the Startup type list, click Disabled.
e. Under Service status, click Stop, and then click OK.
f. Right-click the Print Spooler service, and then click Start (if it is stopped).
g. Quit Computer Management.
2. Test whether the issue is resolved. If the issue is resolved, the remaining steps are not required. If the issue is not resolved, go to step 3, and then follow
the remaining steps.
3. Start the computer in Safe Mode. For additional information about how to start the computer in Safe Mode, click Start, click Help and Support, type safe
mode in the Search box, press the ENTER key, and then click the Start Windows in Safe Mode topic.
4. Start MicrosoftWindows Explorer, then delete all the files and the folders in the following where C: is the drive that Windows XP is installed:
C:\Windows\System32\Spool\Printers
C:\Windows\System32\Spool\Drivers\w32x86
5. Start Registry Editor . To do this, click Start, click Run, type regedit in the Open box, and then click OK.
WARNING : If Registry Editor is used incorrectly, serious problems may occur that require reinstallation of the operating system. Microsoftcannot
6. Locate and expand the following registry key:
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Control\Print\Environments\Windows NT x86
View the list of subkeys. There should only be the following subkeys:
Drivers
Print Processors
7. If there are any subkeys other than the subkeys that are listed in step 6, follow these steps:
a. On the File menu, click Export .
b. In the File Name box, type a descriptive name for this key, and then click Save - for example, type WindowsNTx86regkey. Use this backup of the
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Control\Print\Environments\Windows NT x86 registry key to restore the key if any problems occur
after completing this procedure.
c. Delete all the subkeys other than the subkeys that are listed in step 6. To do this, right-click each subkey that is not on the list, and then click Delete. Click
Yes when prompted to confirm the deletion.
8. Locate and then expand the following registry key:
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Control\Print\Environments\Windows NT x86\Drivers
The registry entries for the printer drivers that are installed on the computer are stored in the Version-x subkey or subkeys, where x is a number (typically 2 or
3).
9. Expand the Version-x subkey or subkeys, and then delete the printer driver entries. To do this, right-click each printer driver subkey, and then click Delete.
Click Yes when prompted to confirm the deletion.
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Control\Print\Monitors
View the list of subkeys. There should only be the following subkeys for the default print monitors:
BJ Language Monitor
Local Port
PJ L Language Monitor
Standard TCP/IP Port
USB Monitor
a. On the File menu, click Export.
b. In the File Name box, type a descriptive name for this key - for example, type MonitorsRegkey, and then click Save. Use this backup of the
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Control\Print\Monitors registry key to restore the key iif any problems occur after completing this
procedure.
c. Delete all the subkeys other than the subkeys that are listed in step 10.
11. To do this, right-click each subkey that is not on the list, and then click Delete. Click Yes when prompted to confirm the deletion.
1,063
IC-205
12. If a local printer is attached, disconnect the printer cable from the computer and then restart the computer.
13. Verify that the Print Spooler service is running. To do this, follow these steps:
c. In the right pane, right-click the Print Spooler service, and then click Start (if it is stopped).
d. Quit Computer Management.
14. Reconnect the printer cable to the computer, add the printer and try to print a test page. To add the printer, follow these steps:
a. Click Start, and then click Printers and Faxes.
b. Click Add a printer. The Add Printer Wizard starts.
c. Follow the instructions in the Add Printer Wizard to install the printer.
Notes :
-- For additional information about how to manually remove printer drivers, refer to the attached documentation.
-- For additional information about how to troubleshoot printing problems in Windows XP, refer to article numbers 314085 and 308028 in the Microsoft
Knowledge Base.
-- To view a PDF, Adobe Readermust be installed. Adobe Readercan be downloaded for free from the Adobeweb site at:
Description
Publisher.
Solution
Notes:
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
How to configure LDAP access on a LotusNotes R5 or R6 server.
Solution
LDAP Production R5/R6 server setup:
1. Edit Notes.ini and add LDAP task. ServerTasks =Router, Replica, Update, Amgr, AdminP, CalConn, Event, Sched, Stats, HTTP, POP3, maps, LDAP.
2. Create a new Configuration document for LDAP to control Anonymous Access.
3. Create a new Configuration doc, call it Allservers in the Group or Server name, then save and close the doc.
4. Now open the Allservers doc. Note that the Basics tab has changed.
5. Select Use these settings as the default for all servers. Note that Group or Server name is now *-Default-. Also there is now an LDAP tab.
1,064
IC-205
6. Click on the fields that you want to be accessible button.
7. Set it to show First Name InternetAddress and LastName only. Do this so only limited info is available.
Notes :
a.This Allservers configuration doc will only affect the servers running LDAP. It will also allow the copiers to access LDAP without using an authentication
account and password. This is the method that all users are using according to LotusIncident 1632724.
b. Please refer to the attached document for more detail.
c. To view the document(s), MicrosoftWordor WordViewer must be installed. WordViewer 2003 (11.7MB) can be obtained free from Microsoftat
1,065
IC-301
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
What data is required from the IC301 or IC304 for troubleshooting file or printing issues?
Solution
If there is an issue with printing a specific file on the IC301, NSSG will require a few items to verify the issue.
1. Export to txt file IC301 or IC304 configuration information (info menu, configuration, export).
2. Archive actual file that is exhibiting the issue. This is done from the storage queue. File is archived into a .cab file.
3. Export file to PDF2GO format. This will provide a visual reference for what the file will look like.
4. Original file if unable to correctly print the archive file.
Description
Solution

1xx Informational

2xx Success

3xx Redirection

4xx Client Error

5xx Server Error

Description
What is the default user name and password for the IC-301 or IC304 Windows XP logon screen?
Solution
The default user name is: Operator
The default password is: colorserver
1,066
IC-301
Description
Solution
TCP/IP format (i.e, 198.169.2.12).
Description
CREO basic troubleshooting procedures
Solution
Basic troubleshooting procedures for the IC-301 and IC-304 CREO printer servercan be found in the attached PDF file.

Also see Solution ID TAUS0657590EN00.

Note: To view a PDF, Adobe Readermust be installed. Adobe Readercan be downloaded for free from the Adobeweb site at:

Description
Solution
Description
Solution
printer is added.
Drivers
Print Processors
1,067
IC-301
3).
BJ Language Monitor
Local Port
USB Monitor
procedure.
Notes :
Knowledge Base.
Description
How to scan when using the IC-301 (bizhub PRO C500) or IC-304 (bizhub PRO C6500).
Solution
TheRemote Scan utility must be loaded on a workstation or the IC-301/IC-304 to utilize scanning on the controller(s). This utility allows for the creation of
scan boxes on the bizhub PRO C500/bizhub PRO C6500 and to retrieve scans from those boxes. Scanning is performed on theprinter/copier using the scan
to HDD option from the LCD panel.
Please refer to the attached document for more detail.
Description
Print jobs appear to hang or the IC-301 loses connection with the engine with the message "Establishing Connection".
Solution
C500 Image firmware version 14-CNU0 has been released which should correct this issue. The updated special ROM also corrects SC80-40 codes which
may also occur. This ROM should be used with at least version 12 level firmware.

1,068
IC-302
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description

Solution

Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution

1xx Informational

2xx Success

3xx Redirection

4xx Client Error

5xx Server Error

1,069
IC-302
Description
J ob Properties cannot be viewed within the OS10.4 or 10.5 version of Command WorkStation. This occurs on both an Inteland Power PCversion of the
Macintosh.
Solution
CAUSE: J ava update version 6 was installed during an OS update. J ava update version 6 is incompatible with the current version of Command
WorkStation, MacintoshEdition (CWSME).

SOLUTION: An updated version of Command WorkStation and its associated utilities has been made available for download. The updated version is
1.5.0f25 for Command WorkStation and 3.8.0.22 for ColorWisePro Tools. To resolve the issue, follow these instructions:
1.Remove the previous version of CWSME.
2.Decompress the Mac_User_SW_CWSME_1_5_0f25.zip file tothe desktop.
3.In the OSX folder, double-click on the CWSME installer. Ifnot logged in as the administrator, MacintoshOSX will requirethat a root password is entered.
Follow the installer dialog by entering the appropriate responses for user agreement and installation. Installed CWSME version is 1.5.0f25 andinstalled
ColorWisePro Tools, MacintoshEdition (CWPTME) version is 3.8.0.22.
SPECIAL NOTE : Solution contribution by Bill Ehmke, ESS/SSD andIan Lynch, Production Print/SSD
Description
When using the new version ES-1000 with EFI Spot-On(serial numberrange of 870000 to 899999), the device is not recognized by the application. The
device works correctly when using it for calibration.
Solution
CAUSE: Thecurrent shipping versions of ColorWise Pro Toolswhich were released before J anuary 19, 2007 contain a configuration file for the Spot-On
application which references valid ES-1000 serial numbers. The serial numbers of the currentshipping devices areoutside of the valid serial number range as
defined by the configuration file.

SOLUTION: If ColorWise Pro ToolsSpot-Ondoes not connect tothe ES-1000, but ColorWise Pro Tools Calibratordoes, it is easy topatch any
installed version of ColorWise Pro Tools by replacing the existing 'Spoton.Device' file with the updated version distributed in1-SJ ZB3.zip which is available
for download from the Download selector or is attached to this solution along with the Release Notes.
Notes :
1. The standard location of Spoton.Device is:
a. MicrosoftWindows computers: <Program Files\Fiery\ColorWise Pro Tools>
b. MacintoshOS X computers: <Applications\Fiery\ColorWise Pro Tools >
2. To open the file(s) using WinZip, WinZipmust be installed. WinZipcan be downloaded from the WinZipwebsite:
computer to view.
3. To view the document, MicrosoftWordor WordViewer must be installed. WordViewer 2003 (11.7MB) can be obtained free from Microsoftat the
Description
Solution
TCP/IP format (i.e, 198.169.2.12).
Description
Solution

IC-202

1,070
IC-302
IC-203

IC-205

IC-302
not available.

IC-401

IC-402

IC-405

IC-611

IP-901
not available.



Description
Solution
1,071
IC-302
Description
Unable to staple and/or duplex all sheets from MicrosoftExcel with print "Entire Workbook' option selected.
Solution
CAUSE: The staple and duplex selections are only being applied to the first sheet of the Workbook. This issue is with MicrosoftExcel and not related to the
print drivers.
Note : See attached MicrosoftKnowledge Base Articles - 166274, 169033, 214383. To view a PDF, Adobe Readermust be installed. Adobe Reader
can be downloaded for free from the Adobeweb site at: http://www.adobe.com/products/acrobat/readstep2.html .

SOLUTION: The selections for duplex and stapling must be made to each sheet. The selections can made via Pagesetup for each sheet, then selected to
print the "Entire Workbook" from the "Print Dialog" window.
1,072
IC-303
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Scan to SMB setup instructions for the FieryIC-303 and IC-408.
Solution
Please refer to the attached documentation.
Description
Part number forthe IC-303 v1.02 system code.
Solution
IC-303 Service Kit System Software v1.02 (p/n 45062138) is availableto order from the Parts Department.
Description
How to create saddle-stitched booklets on the bizhub PRO C6500/C5500 from MacintoshOS 10.4x and MicrosoftWindowsXP.
Solution
The attached document details how to make a saddle-stitched booklet using the IC-303 print driver from MacintoshOS 10.4x and MicrosoftWindows
XP. These should also apply to other versions of Windows and OS 10. The document procedure was as tested with AdobeAcrobat.
Notes :
1. The IC-408 works the same way with minor differences in features in the screen shots.
2.When printing from MicrosoftWord, there is a known issue that prevents the job from printing on the correct size paper without configuring the document
in Word correctly on controllers with system software prior to 1.02.
The page size must be defined as 8.5x11S and the "Scale to paper size" option in the Word print dialog box must be set to 11x17. "Booklet Best Fit" must
also be selected in the print driver options to get the page to fit within the margins. This will result in a slightly reduced image. The other option is to send the
job to the hold queue on the Fieryand then use Command WorkStation to change the paper size to 11x17. This will result in a properly scaled print job,
but requires this extra step.
3. Version 1.02 system code does not require the Scale to paper size option in the Word print dialog box to be set to 11x17. Instead set it to either "none" or
8.5x11S. This will output an image that is not reduced.
4. To viewthe PDF, Adobe Readermust be installed. Adobe Readercan be downloaded for free from the Adobeweb site at:
Description

Solution

1,073
IC-303
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
How to upgrade memory in the IC-303.
Solution
The IC-303 ships with 1GB of standard memory. There is now a 1GBor 2GB memory upgrade kit available. This will increase available memory to either 2GB
or 3GB.
PART ITEM
7640002844 2x 512MB MEMORY FOR IC-302/IC-303
7640002845 2x 1GB MEMORY FOR IC-302/IC-303
The kit will include 2 DIMMs and will also require a patch, which must be downloaded from the Konica Minolta Download Selector. Access the Selector from
There is a separate patch for each memory upgrade. IC303_memupgrade.exe.
IMPORTANT: The memory upgrade patch is only required for system code versions below v1.1. do not use the patches on version 1.1 or higher.
Once the DIMMs have been installed in the controller, use the Command WorkStation download function to download the patch to the direct queue. Wait
30 seconds and reboot the controller. Once rebooted, reboot one more time for the patch to be installed correctly.
To verify if the memory and patch have been installed correctly, print out a configuration page. The amount of available memory should either indicate 2GB or
3GB, depending on which kit was installed. Once this is verified, connect to the controller with Command WorkStation. The amount of total RAM should
indicate .98GB if the 1GB upgrade was installed or 1.47GB if the 2GB upgrade was installed.
If RAM is removed from the controller, its possible that an error will occur when rebooting the controller as the boot.ini file is referencing an incorrect amount
of RAM. The patch cannot be uninstalled without reloading system code.
Description
MEMORY FULL message when copying or printing. The memory level on the LCD counts down to zero.
Solution
CAUSE : The cause is undetermined at this time and thisissue is being researched by SSD.

SOLUTION:Verify the following:
1. Ensure that, with the HD-506 kit installed, software DipSwitch 2-0=1 and 10-1=1.
2. Ensure that the bizhub PRO C6500/ C5500is installed with the latest firmwareversion.
Refer toattached Bulletin 5898.
3.Ensure that the IC-303 controller is updated to latest system codeversion 1.02
[use most currentSystem Software]and all the necessary patches are applied.
Refer toattached Bulletin 5945.
Note :To viewa PDF, Adobe Readermust be installed. Adobe Readercan be downloaded for free from the Adobeweb site at:

If the memory full condition does not affect machine operation, thenno action is necessary.
If the bizhub PRO C6500 is locking up and/or requires user intervention to complete printing after a MEMORY FULL message, then pleasecontact
KMBS/SSD to report the issue and please provide the following information to aid SSD in the research of this issue:
a. The customer's print file or copy processthat caused the problem.
b. The exact settings they set whenprinting the file. These settingscan be printed fromthe summary list in Command WorkStation.
c.The paper tray, type, wieght, etc.
d. The bizhub PRO C6500/ C5500peripheral configuration.
e. The bizhub PRO C6500/ C5500Management Lists with current firmware version installed.
f. The Fiery controller configuration pages with current system code version installed.
g.The exact message on the bizhub PRO C6500/ C5500LCDwhen the problem occurs.
h. Does the customer need to press a button on the bizhub PRO C6500/ C5500to continue the print process?
i. What is the exact message in Command WorkStation when the problem occurs?
j.Confirm that the memory board is the proper version. Bulletin 5898includes a photo of the board with a number desiginating the version type.
Note : Firmwareand system softwareare available via the Konica Minolta Download Selector. Access the Selector from SSD Web Support (CS Expert
Support) by clicking on 'Download MSDS, Drivers, Firmware and more'.
1,074
IC-303
Description
Unable to print cover page with booklet when cover page is a different paper weight than document. A message of "Please load designated Paper in Tray #x.
To check details, touch [Detail Check]" is indicated.
Solution
CAUSE: Function is not compatible with IC-303 system code.

SOLUTION: IC-303 system software, version 1.1isavailable to correct this issue and canbe downloadedvia the Konica Minolta Download Selector. Access
the Selector from SSD Web Support (CS Expert Support) by clicking on 'Download MSDS, Drivers, Firmware and more'.
With this new version of system code and driver, there is no selection for paper weight for thecover page tray. This selection is not needed, just simply set the
paper tray on the engine to the desired paper weight.
Thesystem code posted for download consists of two DVD ISO image files (IC-303v11_SystemSW.iso & IC-303v11_UserSW.iso)that will need to be
burned to twoDVDs. It is highly recommend to use a file download manager program due to the size of the image files. Also, the IC-303 v1.1 2-DVD setis
availablefrom the Konica Minolta Parts department (p/n 45067363).
To install thesystem software, reboot the controller withsystem software DVD in the DVD ROM drive and follow the prompts.
Note : Please be sure to print the configuration pages for reference, save and archive any needed print filesand save any color profiles.
IC-303 v1.1 code does not requires the installation of any of the previous system patches; the previous corrections and enhancements have all been
incorporated with version 1.1.
Although, as with any reload of system software, perform the FierySystem Updates to ensure that the base OS (MicrosoftWindows XP) is updated
withthe requiredperformance and security patches.
Also, be sure to check the Konica Minolta Download Selector for any additional patches thatmay have been released specifically for the IC-303 v1.1 system
code.
Additionally,for driver based printing, be sure to use the latest print driver (v1.1)thatis included with the User software DVD.
Please refer to the attacheddocumentation for additional information.
Description
Solution

1xx Informational

2xx Success

3xx Redirection

4xx Client Error

5xx Server Error

Description
The memory upgrade is not reflected on the Fieryconfiguration page. Command WorkStation does correctly reflect the installed memory.
1,075
IC-304
Description
Negative image.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
Notes :
is:
A03U010001509 - U.S.
A03UP10000697 - IKON (U.S.)

Print/SSD
Description
What data is required from the IC301 or IC304 for troubleshooting file or printing issues?
Solution
If there is an issue with printing a specific file on the IC301, NSSG will require a few items to verify the issue.
1. Export to txt file IC301 or IC304 configuration information (info menu, configuration, export).
2. Archive actual file that is exhibiting the issue. This is done from the storage queue. File is archived into a .cab file.
3. Export file to PDF2GO format. This will provide a visual reference for what the file will look like.
4. Original file if unable to correctly print the archive file.
Description
Solution

1,076
IC-304
1xx Informational

2xx Success

3xx Redirection

4xx Client Error

5xx Server Error

Description
Macintosh.
Solution

Description
What is the default user name and password for the IC-301 or IC304 Windows XP logon screen?
Solution
The default user name is: Operator
The default password is: colorserver
Description
What patches should be installed on any new IC-304 Creo controller?
Solution
Consider thesesix patches as mandatory:

PDF_Lib_7.0.7
RIP_Patch
PDF Parser Patch
Prinergy Elements Patch
Black Elements Patch
Imposition Patch
Other patches can be installed according to the customer workflow. Install the Booklet Stapled Patch for booklet makers and the Duplex Tabs Patch for Post
Inserters and Tabs printing. The patches that should be installed according to this specific order:

PDF_Lib_7.0.7
RIP_Patch
PDF Parser Patch
Prinergy Elements Patch
Black Elements Patch
Other patches can be installed without a specific order. If SP2 is not installed, that would be required prior to adding the other patches.
SPECIAL NOTE : Solution contribution by Bill Ehmke, ESS/SSD and Ian Lynch, Production Print/SSD
Description
1,077
IC-304
Solution
TCP/IP format (i.e, 198.169.2.12).
Description
CREO basic troubleshooting procedures
Solution
Basic troubleshooting procedures for the IC-301 and IC-304 CREO printer servercan be found in the attached PDF file.

Also see Solution ID TAUS0657590EN00.

Note: To view a PDF, Adobe Readermust be installed. Adobe Readercan be downloaded for free from the Adobeweb site at:

Description
Calibration page does not print. There is nomessage on the printer orcontroller that indicates the job was sent.
Solution
CAUSE:Image stabilization control has been disabled on the mainbody(dipswitch 24-2 set to1).

SOLUTION: Set dipswitch 24-2 to0 by accessing Tech Rep Mode => System Setting => Software SW Setting.
SPECIAL NOTE : Solution contribution by Rich Raynor, ESS/SSD and J im Behrends, Production Print/SSD
Description
Is Scan to E-mail supported with the IC-304?
Solution
Scan to E-mail is not supported with the IC-304. The Creo supports scan to box using the Remote Scanning Application.
1,078
IC-305
Description
Macintosh.
Solution

Description
Scan to SMB does not work only in a workgroup network environment.
Solution
CAUSE: User name format does not properly identify the user in the domain.

SOLUTION: Enter the user name in the [domain name\user name] format to properly identify the user to allow the SMB connection.
Note : Since the controller is normally not a member of the domain,it is necessaryto identify the domain name with the domain user name to allow the
connection.
Description
How to enableFierySystem Updates automatically.
Solution
To enable FierySystem Updates automatically, follow these procedures:
1. Connect to the Fieryusing a Remote Desktop connection. The User name and password is Administrator and Fiery.1.
2. Select Start => All Programs => Fiery => System Updates.
3. Select Check Important System Updates, then select the time and frequency.
4. Select Automatic for both Operating System and FierySystem.
5. Configure the proxy server settings if a proxy server used for the FieryInternet connection.
6. Select Check now to install available updates. Once updates begin downloading, they cannot be interrupted or stopped.
7. Exit Remote Desktop.
Description
Solution
TCP/IP format (i.e, 198.169.2.12).
Description
Calibration page does not print. There is nomessage on the printer orcontroller that indicates the job was sent.
Solution
CAUSE:Image stabilization control has been disabled on the mainbody(dipswitch 24-2 set to1).

SOLUTION: Set dipswitch 24-2 to0 by accessing Tech Rep Mode => System Setting => Software SW Setting.
SPECIAL NOTE : Solution contribution by Rich Raynor, ESS/SSD and J im Behrends, Production Print/SSD
Description
1,079
IC-305
Unable to staple and/or duplex all sheets from MicrosoftExcel with print "Entire Workbook' option selected.
Solution
CAUSE: The staple and duplex selections are only being applied to the first sheet of the Workbook. This issue is with MicrosoftExcel and not related to the
print drivers.
Note : See attached MicrosoftKnowledge Base Articles - 166274, 169033, 214383. To view a PDF, Adobe Readermust be installed. Adobe Reader
can be downloaded for free from the Adobeweb site at: http://www.adobe.com/products/acrobat/readstep2.html .

SOLUTION: The selections for duplex and stapling must be made to each sheet. The selections can made via Pagesetup for each sheet, then selected to
print the "Entire Workbook" from the "Print Dialog" window.
Description
Communication is lost between the MFP and controller when navigating through the controllers J ob list from the bizhub PRO C6500 LCD operation panel.
The controller button on theLCD will become "grayed out" andthe controller must berestarted.
Solution
CAUSE: A bug with the IC-303/305 system code where the communication is lost between the MFP and the controller when navigating the controllers J ob
List (Held and Printed jobs) from the MFP's LCD panel.

SOLUTION: A patch is available (1-WSUG3) for the IC-303/IC-305 that corrects this issue and canbe downloadedvia the Konica Minolta Download Selector.
Notes :
1. This patch is specific to IC-303/IC-305 version 1.1 system code and is not applicable to earlier versions of system code. Please be sure to have the
IC-303/IC-305 at system code version 1.1 prior to installing this patch.
2. Please refer to the attacheddocumentation for more information. To viewthe PDF, Adobe Readermust be installed. Adobe Readercan be downloaded
for free from the Adobeweb site at: http://www.adobe.com/products/acrobat/readstep2.html .

Description
Solution
printer is added.
Drivers
Print Processors
1,080
IC-305
3).
BJ Language Monitor
Local Port
USB Monitor
procedure.
Notes :
Knowledge Base.
Description
How to enable SMB (File Sharing) from a MacintoshOSX 10.2, 10.3 and 10.4.8, or 10.5.
Solution
Please see the attached documentsexplaining how to enable SMB (File Sharing) from a
MacintoshOSX 10.2, 10.3 and 10.4.8, or 10.5. To view a PDF, Adobe Readermust be installed. Adobe Readercan be downloaded for free from the
SPECIAL NOTE : Solution contribution by Cesar J imenez and Ed Bellone, Production Print/SSD
Description
Unable to install the FieryGraphics Arts package (premium) on the IC-305.
Solution
CAUSE: Incorrect disk being used for install.

SOLUTION: Do not use the disk labeled Feature update version 1.1 that comes with the Graphics Arts package and the dongle.Use the disk that comes with
the IC-305 labeled: EFI Pro 80/Pro 90 Feature update software version 1.0.
Follow the instructions provided in the package containing the dongle except use the version 1.0 feature update software disk.
If the version 1.0 disk is not available with all of the installation and setup disks that come with the IC-305 it can be download from the Konica Minolta
Download Selector. Access the Selector from SSD Web Support (CS Expert Support) by clicking on 'Download MSDS, Drivers, Firmware and more'. Look
under the IC-305, System Code tab.
It will be listed as 45062183 FeatureUpdate 10 Pro80.iso .
SPECIAL NOTE : Solution contribution by Greg Lantowski, Production Print/SSD
1,081
IC-305
1,082
IC-401
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
The IC401 is not recognized by the main body engine at set up.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The memory module (EM-301) was installed in the IC401 instead of the main body.
Remove the EM-301 from the controller and install it on the copier board which is located on the right, rear of the machine (the location where the Fiery* X3e
was installed on the models 7915 and 7920). Memory Upgrade, EM-301 (256MB) (Item #4599291) must be installed in the main body at initial install for
proper machine operation.
2. The incorrect controller type was selected.
Perform the following steps:
a. Enter Service Mode (Utility, Meter Count, Stop, 0, 0, Stop, 0, 1)
b. System Input
c. Peripheral Setting
d. Controller 2 and Mode 1
e. Select End and Fin.Time to return to copier display.
3. The Fiery system code has become corrupted.
Reload system code.
4.The Fiery hard drive has become inoperative.
Replace the Fiery hard drive and reload system code.
Description
How to print with Volume Track E.C.M. (ECM, EKC) enabled. Refer to solution ID 187071 for information about printing with the standard controller with
Volume Track turned ON.
Solution
To print to a IC-401, with Volume Track E.C.M. turned ON, perform the following:
4. On the FIERY PRINTING tab select USER IDENTIFICATION and then Check Account Control and enter the Account Number. Do not enter the passcode
for the account.
5. Select OK.
Description
Color scans appear to be washed out or light and do not have correct or saturated colors. Copies look fine.
Solution
Scans which are produced from the copier are processed in a different manner than scans which are produced to be transmitted or printed. Copier scans are
post processed, based on the medium type being copied, as well as preference settings for density, color and screen resolution. Most of these settings are
1,083
IC-401
not available from the scanner side, other than color or density.
The reason that some colors or densities in a scan may not look correct when viewed in an application or printed is that they are not color managed when
being scanned. The scans are created with untagged color. Most scanners come with a specific ICC profile that defines the characteristics of the scanner.
When a scan is viewed or printed, this profile can be applied to the image which places the color and density information into the correct color space, based
on the scanners characteristics. Without a scanner ICC profile, there is no way of knowing what the correct colors and densities of the scan are.
Konica Minolta does not provide an ICC profile for its built-in scanner, as they are typically targeted for use as document scanners. Ifany scanner is to be used
for continuous tone images or where optimal colors are required, a scanner profile should be created. A 3rd-party scanner profiling package will be required
along with an IT8 Color Input Target for use with the software. Konica Minolta does not have any specific recommendations for this software,or
howanICCprofile can be applied.
Description

Solution

Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
No finishing options are displayed from PageMaker* 6.5 and 7.0 using the PostScript* driver from Windows* workstation.
Solution
CAUSE: The PPD file does not show up in the list of PPD files. If the PostScript driver is loaded under Windows, PageMaker will not print correctly if the
PPD (PostScript Printer Description) is not installed correctly within PageMaker. Although PageMaker is a Windows (and Macintosh*) program, it does not
use a PostScript Windows driver in the typical manner. The PPD must be installed manually on a Windows PC, much the same as it is loaded manually into
the System\Extensions\Printer Descriptions folder on a Macintosh.
SOLUTION: With PageMaker 7.0, the PPD file provided on the driver disk must be manually copied from the disk using Explorer, File manager, etc., to the
Program Files\Adobe\PageMaker 7.0 \RSRS\USENGLISH\ppd4 for PageMaker 7.0 or Program Files\Adobe\PM65\RSRC\USENGLSH\PPD4 directory for
PageMaker 6.5. Before copying the file, make sure that PageMaker is not open. Without proper installation, PageMaker may use some other PPD or a
generic default, called General. After copying the PPD to the PPD4 directory, start PageMaker. The (Driver Name) PPD should show up in the PPD selection
of the print dialog box.
A PCL* Windows printer driver will have it's capabilities under a Setup button. Because you are loading the PostScript PPD, the printer's special capabilities
are found under Features. Scroll to the bottom of the printer features to add the proper printing options. Once this is completed the entire finishing features
will be available when printing from PageMaker.
Description
Solution

1xx Informational

2xx Success

1,084
IC-401
3xx Redirection

4xx Client Error

5xx Server Error

Description
What is the part number for the motherboard?
Solution
Motherboard (p/n 45029059).
Description
J OB HAS BEEN DONE IMPROPERLY, CHECK THE RECORD message on the operation control panel when printing with Volume Track (E.K.C.) turned on
and from a Macintosh * version 10.3.X
Solution
CAUSE: Account information is missing or incorrect in the driver.
SOLUTION: To input an account number for printing with Volume Track turned on, select the proper driver and perform the following: (Example is with a
Word Document)
1. From the MAC workstation select FILE, PRINT.
2. From the Copy & Pages drop down select Printer Features.
3. From the Features Sets drop down select User Identification.
4. Enable Account Control.
5. From the Printer Features drop down click on Fiery* J ob Notes.
6. Scroll down and enter the 3 digit Account Number (001-999)
7. Print
Description
Macintosh.
Solution

1,085
IC-402
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Unable to print internal/Fiery* test pages or network printing with the IC402 installed.
Solution
CAUSE: Incorrect main body firmware is installed.
SOLUTION: Upgrade main body firmware to latest level. Minimum confirmed firmware level for IC402 support is version 50.
Description
"Power On Controller" message on the mainbody operation panel LCD.
Solution
CAUSE: There is no communications between the Fierycontroller and the main body.
POSSIBLE SOLUTIONS:
1. Cables are not connected properly.
a. Verify that the short thick cable connects from the FierySCSI connector to the copier board SCSI connector.
b. Verify that the short thin cable connects the FieryRJ 45 labled COPIER is connected to the RJ 45 connector on the copier.
c. Verify that the network cable from the customer network is connected to the FieryRJ 45 labled LAN.
Note : To assist wih troubleshooting, connect a computer monitor to the Fieryvia the video connector (remove the small cover plate). Turn on the Fiery
and watch the boot process via the monitor.
2. Take the Fieryapart and reseat ALL components and connectors in the Fiery, including reseating CPU.
Then try booting again. If there is no display on the monitor verify voltage from the Fierypower supply (p/n 45049470).
3. Remove any memory upgrade andinstall individually. Try booting again.
4. If the monitor displays that the Fieryis booting LINUX, then this would indicate that most of the Fieryhardware is working properly, but system code may
be corrupted or there is a bad HDD.
a. Reload Fierysystem code (using the procedures in the Service Manual). If there are error messages during the Fierysystem code installation
procedure, try the procedure a second time.
b. If the problem continues, replace the FieryHDD (p/n 45049464) and load system code on the new HDD.
5. Controller is not being recognized by the engine; the Controller type is not set properly. In the TECH REP mode, select System 2, and Image Controller
Settings. For an external FieryIC-402 controller, set the controller number to 1. For the STANDARD built-in controller, the Peripheral setting would be
controller 0.
Description
How to install system software on the IC-402 (FieryX3eTY 35C-KM), IC-406 (FieryX3eTY 30C-KM) or IC-408 (FieryX3eTY2) using a USB flash drive.
Solution
Please see the attacheddocumentation for complete instructions.To view a PDF, Adobe Readermust be installed. Adobe Readercan be downloaded for
1,086
IC-402
Note :Make sure to powerOFF the Fieryusingthe dedicated AC switch; disconnect all cables from the Fieryandverify that the Service Switches are in
the normal position (downward position).
IMPORTANT : Normal isDIPSW in the Downward Position and Service isDIPSW in the Upward Position.
SPECIAL NOTE : Solution contribution by Ed Bellone, Production Print/SSD and Cesar J imenez, Production Print/SSD
Description
Unable to logon to the controller using the administrator account in Command WorkStation* or to run setup. A password is required even though a password
was not set on the controller during installation.
Solution
CAUSE: By default, Fiery* controllers that are running the new system 6 have passwords enabled for administration of the system.
SOLUTION: The default password is "Fiery.1". This is a case sensitive password.
Description
How to create (Burn) a CD from a System Code or User CD ISO file that is posted on the Konica Minolta web and FTP sites.
Solution
How to create a CD from an ISO CD image file. .
Notes:
1. Writing ISO files to CD-R
Most CD-R writing software includes a feature to create a CD from an image file. Below are instructions for some popular applications:
a. ISO Recorder is a third-party freeware add-on for Microsoft* Windows XP that adds image file writing capability. It is recommended for use by
Microsoft when burning files from the MSDN library. [[ISO Recorder Instructions| URL http://isorecorder.alexfeinman.com/HowTo.htm]].
b. Roxio* Easy CD Creator v6.1 Basic
[[Creating an ISO image with Easy CD & DVD Creator v6.1 Basic| URL http://www.roxio.com/en/support/ecddvdvc/creating_iso_image.jhtml]]
c. Nero* Burning ROM
--- Burn a CD image to CD.
--- Create a Nero CD image ( Audio ).
--- Create a Nero CD image ( Data ).
Description
Color scans appear to be washed out or light and do not have correct or saturated colors. Copies look fine.
Solution
Scans which are produced from the copier are processed in a different manner than scans which are produced to be transmitted or printed. Copier scans are
post processed, based on the medium type being copied, as well as preference settings for density, color and screen resolution. Most of these settings are
not available from the scanner side, other than color or density.
The reason that some colors or densities in a scan may not look correct when viewed in an application or printed is that they are not color managed when
being scanned. The scans are created with untagged color. Most scanners come with a specific ICC profile that defines the characteristics of the scanner.
When a scan is viewed or printed, this profile can be applied to the image which places the color and density information into the correct color space, based
on the scanners characteristics. Without a scanner ICC profile, there is no way of knowing what the correct colors and densities of the scan are.
Konica Minolta does not provide an ICC profile for its built-in scanner, as they are typically targeted for use as document scanners. Ifany scanner is to be used
for continuous tone images or where optimal colors are required, a scanner profile should be created. A 3rd-party scanner profiling package will be required
along with an IT8 Color Input Target for use with the software. Konica Minolta does not have any specific recommendations for this software,or
howanICCprofile can be applied.
Description

Solution
1,087
IC-402

Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Unable to print more than one set of a job after upgrading engine to 'Phase 2' firmware. Was printing correctly prior to the upgrade.
Solution
CAUSE: No Authentication and Account Printing is enabled.
SOLUTION: Perform the following steps to disable this function:
1. Select the "utility" button on the operation panel of the C450.
2. Select "controller details".
3. Scroll down and select "run setup".
4. Enter in the Fiery passcode.
5. Select "Server Setup".
6. Work your way through the interactive machine options. When you reach the option for "No Authentication and Account Printing" select disable by using
the arrow keys. Then select OK.
7. Continue to the end of the menu options.
8. Save the "Server Setup" settings.
To retain the functionality that the No Authentication and Account Printing allowed before it was necessarily disabled, perform the following on the C450/C351
main body.
1. Enter the administration mode on the C450/C351 printer engine.
2. Select user authentication account track.
3. Select print without authentication.
Notes:
a. Enabling this setting allows copies to be tracked while print jobs are allowed to pass through the machine untracked.
b. After the machine and the controller are rebooted you should have the ability to print multiple sets to the IC402.
Description
The user cannot select center fold & staple without also selecting booklet mode when printing through an IC402.
Solution
CAUSE: Older IC402 system code and drivers are being utilized.
SOLUTION: This constraint issue has been resolved with IC402 version 2.0 system code and the associated drivers for this code. These drivers and system
code are available for download from the [[Konica Minolta FTP site| URL ftp://kbtdigital:kx15@ftp.konicabt.com]].
1,088
IC-405
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description

Solution

Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution

1xx Informational

2xx Success

3xx Redirection

4xx Client Error

5xx Server Error

1,089
IC-405
Description
Controller drops off the network and, when printed to in Power Save mode, the job can be seen in Command WorkStationbut will not print. If the RJ 45 cable
is disconnected from the NIC and reconnected, the link lightis never lit.
Solution
CAUSE: The 1GB network wiring is faulty.

SOLUTION: Change the Fierynetwork setting from 1GB to 100BaseT/half duplex.
Description
Macintosh.
Solution

Description
Solution

Notes :
computer to view.
Description
Unable to logon to the controller using the administrator account in Command WorkStation* or to run setup. A password is required even though a password
was not set on the controller during installation.
Solution
CAUSE: By default, Fiery* controllers have passwords enabled for administration of the system.
SOLUTION: The default password is "Fiery.1". This is a case sensitive password.
Description
Can system code be reloaded/updated via a USB memory flash stick?
1,090
IC-405
Solution
For version 2, system 8, a 2GB minimum USB memory flash stick can be used. This stick needs to be conditioned with the USB Flash Tool Utility which is
includedon the USB Flash Program CD.
Notes :
2. Follow the associated System Software Upgrade Procedure or the installation procedure that comes with the particular controller.
Description
Solution
TCP/IP format (i.e, 198.169.2.12).
Description
Operation panel locks up when setting up the IC-301, IC-302, IC-405, IP-901, or IP-921.
Solution
CAUSE: Image controlf irmware is at 14-cng1 or lower.
SOLUTION: Update Image control firmware to minimum level of 14-CNO0.

1,091
IC-406
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Description

Solution

Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Unable to connect to PageScope Web Connection using the IC-406 system 1.0 even though Enable Web Service is set to Yes.
Solution
CAUSE: There is a conflict with the date on the system software and the main body preventing PageScope Web Connection from installing properly.
SOLUTION: Install patch 1-OZGZ5K on the IC-406 and then reboot the system.
Note: After the patch is installed and the fiery comes up to idle then the copier needs to be power cycled for the feature to work.
Note: The patch is not needed for controllers with serial number T00063162 and above. There controller are marked by a yellow dot on the shipping carton.
1,092
IC-406
Description
Solution

1xx Informational

2xx Success

3xx Redirection

4xx Client Error

5xx Server Error

Description
Printing to banner sized paper.
Solution
Paper up to 1200mm (47-1/4 inch) long can be loaded into the bypass tray and printed on using this machine with the appropriate setting specified from the
control panel.
Notes :
1. The latest PostScript Visual driver is required. The latest print drivers are available via the Konica Minolta Download Selector. Access the Selector from the
KMBS public site ( http://www.kmbs.konicaminolta.us ) Support & Drivers tab or from SSD Web Support (CS Expert Support) by clicking on 'Download
MSDS, Drivers, Firmware and more'.
2. The supported operating systems are:
MicrosoftWindows 2000 Professional, MicrosoftWindows XP Home and Professional, MicrosoftWindows Server 2003
3. For detailed information please view the attached documentation. To view a PDF, Adobe Readermust be installed. Adobe Readercan be downloaded
for free from the Adobeweb site at: http://www.adobe.com/products/acrobat/readstep2.html
SPECIAL NOTE : Solution contribution by Ian Lynch, Production Print/SSD
Description
Macintosh.
Solution

Description
Solution
1,093
IC-406

Notes :
computer to view.
Description
Can system code be reloaded/updated via a USB memory flash stick?
Solution
For version 2, system 8, a 2GB minimum USB memory flash stick can be used. This stick needs to be conditioned with the USB Flash Tool Utility which is
includedon the USB Flash Program CD.
Notes :
2. Follow the associated System Software Upgrade Procedure or the installation procedure that comes with the particular controller.
Description
Solution
TCP/IP format (i.e, 198.169.2.12).
1,094
IC-408
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Part number(s) for the IC-408 system code.
Solution
IC-408 system codeversion 1.0(p/n 45057679), version 1.0a (p/n U226-0190 - 2 DVD set) and version 1.1 (p/n 45072657).
IMPORTANT :There is alimited supply of the IC-408 version 1.0a system code DVDs, thus availability isnot a certainty.
All the ISO files to create a DVD (or DVDs)are available for download via the Konica Minolta Download Selector. Access the Selector from SSD Web Support
Please refer to the Release Notes and installation instructionswhich also are available via the Download Selector.To view a PDF, Adobe Readermust be
Description
Unable to select Tray 4 of the LU-202 in the print driver or Command WorkStation with a platen installed.
Solution
CAUSE: Without thedocument feederselected as an installable option,LU-202 is not available. LU-202 can be installed as an option but cannot be selected
when printing.

SOLUTION:System softwareand print driverversion 1.0a for the IC-408 areavailable that correct this issue and can be downloaded via the Konica Minolta
Download Selector. Access the Selector from SSD Web Support (CS Expert Support) by clicking on 'Download MSDS, Drivers, Firmware and more'.
The system code posted for download consists of two DVD ISO image files (IC-408_Special System_Software_v1.0a_Fiery.iso &
IC-408_Special_User_Software_v1.0a_Fiery.iso) that will need to burned to DVDs. It is highly recommend to use a file download manager program due to the
size of the image files.
IC-408 v1.0a code does not requires the installation of any of the previous system patches;many of the previous corrections and enhancements have all
been incorporated with version 1.0a.
Although, as with any reload of system software, perform the FierySystem Updates to ensure that the base OS (MicrosoftWindows XP) is updated with
the required performance and security patches and also please review the Konica Minolta Download Selector for any new IC-408 version 1.0asystem patches
that may have been released.
Please refer to the attached IC-408 v1.0a Release Notes and install addendum. To view a PDF, Adobe Readermust be installed. Adobe Readercan be
downloaded for free from the Adobeweb site at: http://www.adobe.com/products/acrobat/readstep2.html .
Description
Scan to SMB setup instructions for the FieryIC-303 and IC-408.
Solution
Please refer to the attached documentation.
Description
1,095
IC-408
Solution
Description
How to create saddle-stitched booklets on the bizhub PRO C6500/C5500 from MacintoshOS 10.4x and MicrosoftWindowsXP.
Solution
The attached document details how to make a saddle-stitched booklet using the IC-303 print driver from MacintoshOS 10.4x and MicrosoftWindows
XP. These should also apply to other versions of Windows and OS 10. The document procedure was as tested with AdobeAcrobat.
Notes :
1. The IC-408 works the same way with minor differences in features in the screen shots.
2.When printing from MicrosoftWord, there is a known issue that prevents the job from printing on the correct size paper without configuring the document
in Word correctly on controllers with system software prior to 1.02.
The page size must be defined as 8.5x11S and the "Scale to paper size" option in the Word print dialog box must be set to 11x17. "Booklet Best Fit" must
also be selected in the print driver options to get the page to fit within the margins. This will result in a slightly reduced image. The other option is to send the
job to the hold queue on the Fieryand then use Command WorkStation to change the paper size to 11x17. This will result in a properly scaled print job,
but requires this extra step.
3. Version 1.02 system code does not require the Scale to paper size option in the Word print dialog box to be set to 11x17. Instead set it to either "none" or
8.5x11S. This will output an image that is not reduced.
4. To viewthe PDF, Adobe Readermust be installed. Adobe Readercan be downloaded for free from the Adobeweb site at:
Description
Solution

1xx Informational

2xx Success

3xx Redirection

4xx Client Error

5xx Server Error

Description
Scan to E-mail addresses/one-touchesare not being retained on the MFP.
Solution
CAUSE: System code update required.

SOLUTION: Please download and install IC-408 System Code version 1.1 or greater. The latest version firmware or system software is available via the
Konica Minolta Download Selector. Access the Selector from SSD Web Support (CS Expert Support) by clicking on 'Download MSDS, Drivers, Firmware and
more'.
1,096
IC-408
Description
Macintosh.
Solution

1,097
IC-409
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution

Description

Solution

Description
Solution


Save Mode.
Notes :
1,098
IC-409
Description
Solution

1. Press utility.
Description
Solution

1xx Informational

2xx Success

3xx Redirection

4xx Client Error

5xx Server Error

Description
How to install system software on the IC-409 45C-KM Fierycontroller.
Solution
Follow the procedures as outlined in the attached IC-409 System Install document. There isa post-release patch that was installed at the factorythat will need
to be reapplied if the system code is reloaded.
The patch, 1-SF2NX.ps (attached), is also available via the Konica Minolta Download Selector. Access the Selector from SSD Web Support (CS Expert
Support) by clicking on 'Download MSDS, Drivers, Firmware and more'.
Description
Only one set will print from the IC-409 controller.
Solution
CAUSE: No Authentication and Account Printing is enabled.

SOLUTION: Disable No Authentication and Account Printing on the IC-409 under Server Setup.
1,099
IC-409
Description
Macintosh.
Solution

Description
Solution

Notes :
computer to view.
1,100
IC-611
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
How to retrieve scanned images using the FTP protocol.
Solution
The recommended method to retrieve TIFF (only) scans from the bizhub PRO 1050/IC-611 is to use TWAIN driver minimum version 2.04 which can be
downloaded from the Konica Minolta Download Selector. Access the Selector from the KMBS public site ( http://www.kmbs.konicaminolta.us ) Support &
Drivers tab or from SSD Web Support (CS Expert Support) by clicking on 'Download MSDS, Drivers, Firmware and more'.
The user box must be located on the controller HDD not the main body (box created under the Scan tab not the Store tab of machine control panel).
To retrieve scans from a browser: ftp://BOX:box#@IP address (i.e., ftp://BOX:4702@10.5.1.x ). This will bring up a login window; the User Name should be
filled in as BOX then tab to the Password field and enter the following: [box#]:[password] (i.e., 4702:1234).
When the above is entered the document(s) will be able to beviewed/retrieved.
To retrieve scans from a Commandprompt (DOS), start anFTP session withthe User BOX and the Password is [box#]:[password].
Description
Solution

1xx Informational

2xx Success

3xx Redirection

4xx Client Error

5xx Server Error

Description
Unable to print PostScript* print jobs with the PS502 option installed. PCL* prints correctly.
Solution
1,101
IC-611
CAUSE: Insufficient memory installed in the IC611.
SOLUTION: With 1050 firmware version 20 installed, it is necessary to upgrade the IC611 memory to 512M with an EM701 256MB controller memory module
(Item #15BV).
Description
How to retrieve scanned images from the 1050/IC611 hard drive using the FTP protocol.
Solution
The recommended method to retrieve TIFF (only) scans from the 1050/IC611 is to use TWAIN driver 2.04 which can be downloaded from Konica's [[FTP site|
URL ftp://kbtdigital:kx15@ftp.konicabt.com]]
[[ScanTrip version 1.73| URL http://www.sec.konicabt.com/version2/product.html?p=31492]] will not operate correctly with the 1050 at this time. ScanTrip 2.0
is being developed to interface with the 1050 and should be available soon. This will be a free update to ScanTrip 1.73.
To retrieve scans from a browser:
ftp://BOX:box#@IP address i.e. ftp://BOX:4702@10.5.1.x
This will bring up a log on Window, the User Name should be filled in as BOX
Then tab to the Password field and enter the following:
[box#]:[password] i.e. 4702:1234
When the above is entered you will be able to view/retrieve the document(s).
To retrieve scans from a Command (DOS) prompt:
Start an ftp session
The User: is BOX
The Password: is [box#]:[password]
Description
Solution
TCP/IP format (i.e, 198.169.2.12).
Description
The machine is unable to Scan-to-Email. All other scan options work successfully.
Solution
An administrator email address is required to properly Scan-to-E-mail. To enter an administrator email address you can use the operation panel or simply
browse to the NIC, perform either of the following procedures:
METHOD 1.
1. Access the PageScope Web Connection utility by browsing to the address of the IC-611 NIC.
2. Select Admin mode.
3. Input the Administrator Password.
4. Select Network.
5. Select E-Mail.
6. Select E-Mail Send.
7. Enter the E-mail address in the Administrator Mail Address field.
8. Select Apply to save setting.
METHOD 2.
1. Press Utility/Counter on operational panel.
2. Select Machine Manager Setting.
3. Select Network Setting.
4. Select Controller NIC Setting.
5. Select E-Mail.
6. Select E-Mail Send Setting.
7. Select Next twice.
1,102
IC-611
8. Enter the required administrator email address.
9. Select OK to save setting.
10. Select Exit to return to copier mode.
Description
SC49-01.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Failed IC Controller board.
replaceIC controller board (p/n 56UA-9100).

2. Incorrect settings.
Note : Other than the error, when printing the same job to 2 different machines, one prints the job right away and the other one takes time.
At the printer, make sure 'Spool' mode is set to 'Auto'. When printing from MicroPress:
Machine tab => Controller tab => 04 - Spool, select 'Auto'.
Description
Unable to Scan-to-HDD, FTP, and SMB PDF documents over 1000 pages.
Solution
CAUSE: An erroneous anomaly with 1050/IC611 scanning option in which the scanning of package PDFs in excess of 1000 pages is not properly formatted
resulting in all pages being blank or the document may be unable to open. This problem does not occur with file format of TIF.
SOLUTION: A new version of IC-611 system code is now available to correct this problem.
The correction for this problem was applied to version 20-CMN0 and is incorporated into all above versions thereafter.
IC-611 system code is available for download on the following ftp site;
ftp://kbtdigital:kx15@ftp.konicabt.com/Black_White_Products/System_Code/IC-611/
1,103
i-Option
Description
What to do if a "License Management error occurred" message is indicated after upgrading firmware or replacing the NVRAM or EEPROM board.
Solution
Whenever this message is indicated, it is necessary to perform the Repair operation (see attached "Repair Procedure").
Notes :
1. When replacing the NVRAM or the EEPROM board, if the parts are replaced with used parts, the License Management error condition cannot be resolved
by performing the repair operation. In this scenario, Initialization would then be necessary and support must be contacted.
Additionally, if both the NVRAM and the EEPROM board are replaced, Initialization will be necessary.
If Initialization is required, collect the following information before calling support:

If i-Option ever was ever licensed on the MFP and if the additional 512MB of memory was ever installed at any time

Thefirmware levelprior to the machinebeing upgraded to version 88

If the machine ever had firmware version 85 or 86

A history of recent NVRAM or EEPROM borad replacement

Obtain a machine Management List and have it ready to attach to the ticket.

A screenshot of the message returned from the LMS if "Repair" was unsuccessful

A "Request Code" from the MFP and the S/N must be obtained in order to start the "Initialization" procedure (see attached "Obtain Request Code").
2. To viewa PDF, Adobe Readermust be installed. Adobe Readercan be downloaded for free from the Adobeweb site at:
Description
"Repair" procedure is unsuccessful in resolving "License Management error occurred" message on the MFP.
Solution
CAUSE: Some reasons why the "Repair" procedure may be unsuccessful:

When replacing the NVRAM or the EEPROM board, please replace them with new parts. When the parts are replaced with used parts, the License
Management error condition cannot be resolved by performing the Repair operation.
If both the NVRAM and the EEPROM board are replaced.

SOLUTION: When the Repair procedure is unsuccessful, [Initialization] would then be necessary, which requires contacting support. The Initialization
procedure cannot be performed by technician access to the LMS (License Management Server).
If Initialization is required, collect the following information before calling support:

If i-Option ever was ever licensed on the MFP and if the additional 512MB of memory was ever installed at any time
The firmware level prior to the machine being upgraded to version 88
If the machine ever had firmware version 85 or 86
A history of recent NVRAM or EEPROM borad replacement
Obtain a machine Management List and have it ready to attach to the ticket.
A screenshot of the message returned from the LMS if "Repair" was unsuccessful
A "Request Code" from the MFP and the S/N must be obtained in order to start the "Initialization" procedure (see attached"Obtain Request Code")
IMPORTANT : If i-Option features had previously been registered on the MFP, it will be necessary to re-register and re-license the i-Option functions after
Initialization is completed (see attached"i-Option Setup Instructions and License Activation").
SSD Hotline advisor : Please contact your team leader after collecting all the necessary information.
Note : Please refer to attached remaining documentation for more details. To view a PDF, Adobe Readermust be installed. Adobe Readercan be
Description
i-Option (LK-101 & LK-102) Setup Instructions.
Solution
See attachment (i-Option Set-Up Instructions_022608.pdf) for information.
Description
1,104
i-Option
Solution
Description
Specifications for i-Option.
Solution
Description
Introduction of LK-101 and LK-102 (i-Option) License Kits.
Solution
Konica Minolta is pleased to announce the introduction of two new MFP options--the LK-101 and LK-102 License Kits. These options further enhance the
productivity and security capabilities of Konica Minoltas mid-range color products -- C650, C550, C451, C353, C253 and C203.

See attached Bulletin #07-GB-081 (07-GB-081.pdf) for information.
1,105
IP-011
Description
Does the IP011 support Microsoft* Windows 2000 printing?
Solution
Windows 2000 network printing is available using IP011 firmware version 3.02a and print driver version 13.00 or higher. The firmware and print drivers are
available on the Konica FTP site . Refer to the FTP_ user site.txt file on the FTP site for detailed information concerning site contents. [[Internal Link for
Faxing/Printing FTP site information| RUN V:\text\Wordpad.exe v:\text\CBC009.txt]]. [[Internal Link for Faxing/Printing FTP_ user site.txt file information|
RUN V:\text\Wordpad.exe v:\text\CBC010.txt]].
Notes:
1. The print drivers are for network connected IP011 controllers. They don't include the setup program and port monitoring utility which would normally be
used on an IP011 directly connected to a PC. Driver files that include the setup program will soon be uploaded to the Konica FTP site.
2. Instructions on updating IP011 firmware .
3. The IP011 Windows 2000 print drivers are to be only used with Windows 2000 operating systems. This driver will NOT install correctly on any other
operating system.
4. If using this driver in an environment with both NT4 and Windows 2000, the NT4 driver must be loaded on the NT4 clients or the server.
5. If a Windows 2000 client attaches to an NT4 server, the printer will only be partially created on the client. You must install the Windows 2000 driver locally
on the client.
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
What driver should be used when printing from Microsoft* Windows XP?
Solution
The Konica IP011 Nozomi version 13.02 Windows 2000 driver (which is not part of Windows XP), has been tested and approved for use in Windows XP.
Description
Will the IP011 support DOS printing?
Solution
The IP011 will not support DOS printing. The IP011 can only be installed on Windows* based computers running Windows 9x, Windows NT 4.0, and
Windows 2000. Using the optional KN304 network interface (Item #950235), the IP011 also supports the following:
Networks: 100BaseT/10BaseT Ethernet
Protocols: IPX/SPX (NetWare*), LPD/LPR (TCP/IP*), and peer-to-peer (TCP/IP)
Description
On what platforms can the IP011 be installed?
Solution
The IP011 can only be installed on Windows* based computers running Windows 9x, Windows NT 4.0 and Windows 2000. Using the optional KN304
1,106
IP-011
network interface (Item #950235), the IP011 also supports the following:
Description
How to reset the KN304 back to factory defaults.
Solution
The preferred method of resetting the KN304 to defaults is through MAP or a web browser. There is a choice for Factory Defaults under the Network
Configuration page. Once reset, Power OFF the main power switch on the side of the printer for 10 seconds before powering ON. This will ensure that the
card is properly reset.
If the KN304 is not accessible on the network, the KN304 card can be reset with jumper OP2 . To perform a reset using jumper OP2, perform the following:
1. Move jumper OP2 on the KN304 from the top 2 pins to the lower 2 pins.
2. Place the IP011 back in the printer and power it ON for about 5 minutes.
3. After 5 minutes, power it OFF, remove the controller and move the OP2 jumper back to its original pins.
4. Replace the controller and power back ON.
5. The KN304 should now be reset.
Description
Which external print servers are compatible with the IP011?
Solution
The IP011 has been tested with an HP* J etDirect* 300X print server. The parallel interface on the J etDirect will function correctly when set to Centronics*,
Bitronics* and ECP.
Description
Can the machine scan using the IP011?
Solution
Scanning is not available with the IP011. The IP421 controller (available for the 7020 and 7030) allows scanning.
Description
What is the print driver emulation?
Solution
The IP011 print driver is a GDI driver. It does not emulate any other print driver.
Description
Will the IP011 support Macintosh*?
Solution
The IP011 will not support printing from a Macintosh. The IP011 can only be installed on Windows* based computers running Windows 9x, Windows NT 4.0,
and Windows 2000. Using the optional KN304 network interface (Item #950235), the IP011 also supports the following:
1,107
IP-101
Description
KN101, installation procedures for the network card.
Solution
Procedures are outlined in the IP101 Service Manual, [[Page 3-4| FILE V:\TEXT\wce003.txt NEW NoWordWrap]].
KN101 Installation Kit Photo . IP101 Back Panel Photo . CIC Board Photo . IP101 Interior Photo
Description
Site requirements and installation procedures, IP101.
Solution
Verify that all Site Requirements are met prior to IP101 installation.
=====================================
IP101 INSTALLATION SITE REQUIREMENTS
=====================================
I. MACHINE CONFIGURATION
PCUA NUMBER ITEM
947948 IP101 Print Controller
947946 7728 Video Interface Kit
947943 Full Color Upgrade**
947944 PostScript(5) Upgrade**
947942 KN101 Network Card**
** Options. Not required for basic non network PC installation.
II. POWER REQUIREMENTS
Grounded 115V, 10A AC line separate from 7728.
III. PC PARALLEL CONNECTION (Not supplied by Konica Minolta)
Parallel cable with DB25 male to male connectors (25-wire). Length not to exceed 25 feet (Customer supplied).
IV. PC SERIAL CONNECTION (Not supplied by Konica Minolta)
Null modem cable (9-wire) with DB9 female connector for IP101 and either DB9 or DB25 female connector for PC connection. (Customer supplied).
V. MACINTOSH* CONNECTION
KN101 network card.
Ethertalk Port with either 10BaseT or 10Base2 connector (Customer supplied).
10BaseT or 10Base2 cable. If Macintosh is not connected to a network but directly connected to KN-101, 10Base2 cabling must be used with T connectors
and terminators (Customer supplied).
VI. PC SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS (Without KN101 network card)
DOS version 5.0 or greater (Customer supplied).
Microsoft* Windows version 3.1, 3.11 or Windows 95.
7728 Windows PCL* printer driver (not Windows 95 compatible).
7728 Windows PostScript* printer driver (Optional - Need PostScript upgrade kit).
VII. MACINTOSH SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS (With KN101 network card)
AppleTalk* Network operating system (Customer supplied).
Macintosh System 7.x or greater (Customer supplied).
Apple Laserwriter* printer driver, version 8.3.3 or greater (Customer supplied).
7728 Macintosh printer driver (Included in PostScript upgrade kit).
PostScript upgrade kit.
VIII. NETWORK CONNECTION (With KN101 network card)
Ethernet Network Interface.
10BaseT or 10Base2 cabling.
VIIII. SUPPORTED NETWORK OPERATING SYSTEMS (With KN101 network card)
Novell Netware* 2.15 or greater.
HPUNIX*; IBMAIX*; SCO SVR4 on Intel Platform; Silicon Graphics INDYIRIX; SUN OS 4.1.3 BSD on SPARC; SUN OS 5.2 SVR4 on SPARC; SUN OS 5.1
SVR4 on Intel x86.
OS/2* LAN Manager V2.0c or higher; IBM* LANServer V1.3 or higher.
Macintosh system 7.x or higher.
============================
IP101 INSTALLATION CHECKLIST
============================
Special Tools required:
Gradation correction chart #3 (p/n U131-1290) for printer color balancing.
Gradation correction chart #4 (p/n U131-1300) for printer color balancing.
PLCC extractor (p/n 50F5444). For upgrading EPROM's and PAL's.
1,108
IP-101
External monitor and keyboard. Optional but useful in troubleshooting.
Laptop computer or Data Generator (p/n U131-1360). Optional but helpful in testing equipment prior to connecting to customer PC.
9-pin null modem cable or 9-pin serial cable with null modem adapter. Optional but helpful in troubleshooting printing problems.
Parts Required:
DB25 pin male to male shielded 25 conductor cable. 10' or less (pre-tested on IP101 to verify operation)
Video interface kit
Full color upgrade (optional). To enable 16.7M color palette on 8.5x11 paper.
PostScript Upgrade (optional). To print postscript images. Needed for full color upgrade.
Installation Steps:
1. Install video interface kit. Verify that 3 new EPROMs are installed in correct sockets and ROM/T is removed from old video interface board and installed
on new board. (Service 2-1 to 2-4)
2. Verify that all 7728 main body adjustments have been performed and color balance has been optimized.
3. Remove the cover of the IP101 and install the full color upgrade if available. Make sure that the 4MB SIMM in bank 0 is removed and the 16MB SIMM in
bank 1 is moved to bank 0. Observe anti-static procedures and use demagnetized tools. (Service 2-5).
4. Verify that all connectors and boards are seated properly then replace cover.
5. Connect Connectors 1 & 2 from the 7728 to the proper connectors on the back of the IP101. (Service 2-4).
6. Plug the IP101 into a grounded outlet and turn on power. Turn on power of the 7728 after the IP101 is turned on.
7. If the 7728 initializes, print the PCL test print from the menu screen on the 7728 control panel. (URG 3-4).
8. Turn off the 7728; then, the IP101. Insert the PostScript upgrade disk (If available) into the IP101 floppy drive and turn on power to the IP101. When the
IP101 starts beeping, installation is complete. Turn off power to the IP101 and remove the disk from the floppy drive. (Service 2-5).
9. Turn on the IP101; then, the 7728. After the 7728 is ready to print, print the PostScript test print from the menu screen on the 7728 control panel. (URG
3-4).
10. Turn the 7728 OFF; then, the IP101. Connect the 25 pin cable to the parallel port of the IP101 (found on the CIC card) and connect the other end to the
laptop or data generator if available.
11. Verify that the 7728 PCL and PostScript (if PostScript is installed) printer drivers are loaded on the PC being used for testing. Using the 7728 PCL driver,
print a test document from Windows Write if using a laptop. If PostScript is installed, print the same document using the 7728 PostScript driver. Refer to Data
Generator User Manual for instructions on its use for printing.
12. Perform all printer balancing adjustments as outlined in Section 4 of the IP101 service manual.
[[Installation procedures| FILE V:\TEXT\WCE002.TXT NEW NoWordWrap]] are outlined in the IP101 Service Manual, Pages 2-1 thru 2-5 and 4-1 thru 4-4.
[[Site Requirements| FILE V:\TEXT\WCE005.TXT NEW NoWordWrap]].
IP101 Internal Photo .
IP101 Rear Panel Photo .
Description
Microsoft* Windows 95 Installation/Configuration information for 7728 PostScript* print driver.
Solution
The 7728 print drivers are not available on the Windows 95 disk and need to be installed separately. The available print drivers can be made available by
contacting your local service provider.
Description
How to install Windows* printer drivers.
Solution
Printer drivers are installed in Control Panel using the 'Install Unlisted or Updated Printer' option. Select 'Control Panel' from the 'Main' program group. Select
'Printers' from 'Control Panel'. Select 'ADD' and highlight 'Install unlisted or updated printer'. Select install and place driver disk into the floppy drive and press
'OK'.
Description
Large fonts/graphics won't print when using the 7728 PCL* driver.
Fonts above 48 will not print. PCL printer driver versions below 13 are affected.
Solution
Version 13 of the PCL Printer Driver corrects this problem. Upgrade to the current release levels. Part number IP101M1-13.0
1,109
IP-101
Description
KN101, how to setup the KN card on Windows* NT 4.0.
Solution
What you need before starting:
a. TCP/IP* protocol loaded on the NT Server
b. TCP/IP Printing Services loaded on the NT Server
c. Defined IP address that is to be assigned to the KN101
d. Ethernet address of the KN101 network card
e. 7050 PostScript* print driver for NT 4.0
f. 7050 print drivers for client workstations
g. The NT 4.0 Server CD
1. Verify that the TCP/IP Printing Services are loaded. The services are loaded in the Network group under control panel.
2. Once the TCP/IP print services are loaded, functionality of the TCP/IP protocol must be verified. From your server, open a DOS window and type ipconfig
/all
This will display information regarding the server IP address, Subnet mask, Routing and DHCP* information. This information may not initially be useful other
than for verifying that TCP/IP is recognized on the system but is required information when trying to troubleshoot a TCP/IP related problem.
3. The next step is to verify whether TCP/IP is functioning correctly on the segment that the KN101 is to be installed on. Type ping 127.0.0.1 to verify if
TCP/IP is running. If a response is received, ping the address of the host NT Server. If a response is received, ping another address on the same segment
as the Host Server. If the KN101is going to be installed on another segment and routing is enabled, ping a known address on the segment that is being
routed. If a response is not received from any of the tests, there may be a problem on the network which will need to be resolved before proceeding further.
4. The IP address must now be set on the KN101 using ARP (Address Resolution Protocol).
Note: The syntax for the ARP command is 'arp -s [Desired IP address of the card] [ethernet address of the card] [IP address of the host server]'. The
ethernet address must be entered in pairs with a - between each pair (e.g. 00-40-92-00-a2-a0). After the IP address has been set on the KN101/KN201, enter
'arp -a' to verify that the ARP entry has been entered in the ARP table. After verifying the ARP entry, ping the IP address of the KN101. Initialization takes
approximately 2 minutes.
If there is no response to the ping command after reset, the IP address may not have been set, the KN101 may not be functioning, the IP address may be
invalid for the network segment or the network connection to the KN101is not functioning.
5. The next step involves creating the printer. Press the START button and select Settings and Printers. Select Add Printer
6. Select 'My Computer' when creating the 7050 printer from the Server. Printer administration and spooling will then be performed on the server.
7. The Network port must now be created. Select 'Add
Port'. From the Printer Ports Dialog, select 'LPR Port' and Press 'New Port'
Note: If LPR Port is not a selection, TCP/IP Printing Services are not loaded.
8. Enter the IP address that was assigned to the KN101 as the address of server providing LPD and enter PORT_1 as the print queue on that server. Press
OK.
9. After selecting OK to create the LPR Port, there will be a 5 minute delay before the port is created.
Note: This delay and subsequent error message only occurs if the KN101 is using firmware version 611. This delay and error message does not occur with
firmware version 612 or with the KN201.
The KN101 does not support NT's test command and requires 5 minutes before the test times out and creates an error message. Press OK when the error
message comes up and the port will have been created. Select 'Next' in the Printer Wizard to load the print driver.
10. Select 'Have Disk' when choosing which driver to install. Insert the Konica 7050 PostScript driver disk into Drive A and press OK.
11. Choose the Konica 7050PS-US driver and press NEXT.
12. Assign a name to the printer. This name is not the name that will be used as the shared name.
13. The next dialog box will ask if the printer will be shared and what the share name is. You will also have the option of loading printer drivers for the servers
clients
Note: This only applies to Windows 95* or NT Workstation clients.
Press Next when finished.
14. Select YES to print a test page after the print drivers are loaded.
15. The files will start to load from the floppy at this point and then NT will ask for the location of the driver files on the NT CD. The typical directory for these
files is the i386 directory.
16. If installed correctly, a test page should have printed shortly after this message appears. At this point the printer is setup on NT 4.0
Note: If the test print was not successful, the printer and controller may need to be reset before the network correctly recognizes them. Turn off the print
controller and 7050 and then turn them on. Send another test print after they are in a ready to print status.
The driver can now be configured if necessary with default settings. Access permissions can also be assigned at this time.
17. To configure the driver, right click with the mouse on the newly created printer icon and select properties from the drop down menu.
18. The printer properties screen will come up. Port Configuration, Scheduling, Sharing, Security and the 7050 Device settings are administered from here.
Note: This is reprinted from the Installation Procedures on the Konica Web page. File name is KN NT40.pdf
Description
Screen colors/Print colors don't match on the 7728.
Solution
CAUSE: Computer monitors use RGB light to produce colors and the 7728 prints with CMYK toners. To compensate for this difference, monitors and printers
are calibrated to a set of color standards which are set by the manufacturer of each product. No single standard currently exists which will allow for consistent
color calibration, which makes color matching difficult.
SOLUTION: There are color calibration software programs that can interpret the colors selected in a software program to more closely match the monitor
output to the printed output.
All color calibration programs adjust the color information on the PC and don't affect the actual color calibration of the printer device.
1,110
IP-101
Description
Will the 7728 Windows* printer drivers work with Windows 95?
Solution
The PCL* driver is only compatible with Windows 3.1 and 3.11. There is a Windows 95 PostScript driver available by contacting your local service provider.
Description
Solution
TCP/IP format (i.e, 198.169.2.12).
Description
Procedures for installation of Video Interface Kit in the 7728
Solution
Installation procedures for the Video Interface are outlined in the Service Manual, Pages 2-1 through 2-4. ROM/T from the old Video Interface Board must be
removed and installed on the new Video Interface Board. ROM/2 (C5) and ROM/1 (C1) are installed on the Main Control Board and ROM (C2) is installed on
Control Board 3.
1,111
IP-102
Description
Solution
TCP/IP format (i.e, 198.169.2.12).
Description
On a 7728 printer using an HP J et Direct* external print box, every job using the PostScript* driver results in an IP error and it does not print. When using a
PCL* driver, everything prints fine.
Solution
CAUSE: Corruption in communication.
SOLUTION: Remove, clean and reseat the CIC and PostScript cards. If problem persists, replace the PostScript card.
Description
The IP102 is not recognized on a Windows* NT 4.0 network using DHCP* (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol).
Solution
CAUSE: The DHCP (which is a part of Windows NT package) is designed to be used on larger networks where hardware is changing constantly i.e.
workstations, servers, etc. are moved or added on a daily basis. DHCP automatically recognizes changes and reassigns IP addresses. As a result, all IP
addresses on the network may change daily, including the IP102 IP address.
SOLUTION: On a NT network running DHCP, the KN101 must receive a STATIC IP address (an address that will not be changed by DHCP). The network
administrator must assign this static address (which is outside the DHCP pool).
Description
PostScript* upgrade PCUA number.
Solution
The PostScript upgrade is PCUA 947952.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
printer is added.
1,112
IP-102
Drivers
Print Processors
3).
BJ Language Monitor
Local Port
USB Monitor
procedure.
Notes :
Knowledge Base.
Description
Publisher.
Solution
1,113
IP-102
Notes:
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Description
What type of memory is used in the IP102 and how is it configured?
Solution
The memory used in the IP102 is standard SIMMS memory. See page 2-6 of the service manual for further details.
1,114
IP-201
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
KN101 or KN201, how to install the KN card on a Windows* NT 4.0 network.
Solution
What you need before starting:
If installing the KN201 and DHCP* is enabled on the network, refer to KN201 INSTALLATION ADDENDUM FOR DCHP ENABLED NETWORKS at the end of
this solution for additional information prior to installation
c. Defined IP address that is to be assigned to the KN101/KN201
d. Ethernet address of the KN101/KN201 network card
e. 7050 PostScript* print driver for NT 4.0
f. 7050 print drivers for client workstations
g. The NT 4.0 Server CD
2. Once the TCP/IP print services are loaded, functionality of the TCP/IP protocol must be verified. From your server, open a DOS window and type ipconfig
/all
This will display information regarding the server IP address, Subnet mask, Routing and DHCP information. This information may not initially be useful other
than for verifying that TCP/IP is recognized on the system but is required information when trying to troubleshoot a TCP/IP related problem.
3. The next step is to verify whether TCP/IP is functioning correctly on the segment that the KN101 is to be installed on. Type ping 127.0.0.1 to verify if
TCP/IP is running. If a response is received, ping the address of the host NT Server. If a response is received, ping another address on the same segment
as the Host Server. If the KN101/KN201 is going to be installed on another segment and routing is enabled, ping a known address on the segment that is
being routed. If a response is not received from any of the tests, there may be a problem on the network which will need to be resolved before proceeding
further.
4. The IP address must now be set on the KN101/KN201 using ARP (Address Resolution Protocol).
Note: If the KN201 has had an IP address previously entered on the card, ARP will not change this address. The KN201 will need to be reset back to factory
defaults to allow a new address to be set using ARP. Instructions for a hardware reset can be found on page A10 of the KN201 user guide. The syntax for
the ARP command is 'arp -s [Desired IP address of the card] [ethernet address of the card] [IP address of the host server]'. The ethernet address must be
entered in pairs with a - between each pair (e.g. 00-40-92-00-a2-a0). After the IP address has been set on the KN101/KN201, enter 'arp -a' to verify that the
ARP entry has been entered in the ARP table. After verifying the ARP entry, ping the IP address of the KN101/KN201. The KN201 will not respond to the
ping command at this time but the KN101 should. The KN201 will have to be reset by powering it down for 30 seconds and then powering on. Initialization
takes approximately 2 minutes.
Note: Any time the IP301 is reset, the power must be off for 30 seconds or the KN201 will not reinitialize and may not connect to the network.
If there is no response to the ping command after reset, the IP address may not have been set, the KN101/KN201 may not be functioning, the IP address may
be invalid for the network segment or the network connection to the KN101/KN201 is not functioning.
6. Select 'My Computer' when creating the 7050 printer from the Server. Printer administration and spooling will then be performed on the server.
7. The Network port must now be created. Select 'Add
Port'. From the Printer Ports Dialog, select 'LPR Port' and Press 'New Port'
Note: If LPR Port is not a selection, TCP/IP Printing Services are not loaded.
8. Enter the IP address that was assigned to the KN101 as the address of server providing LPD and enter PORT_1 as the print queue on that server. Press
OK. The KN201 uses PORT1 as the print queue on that server.
9. After selecting OK to create the LPR Port, there will be a 5 minute delay before the port is created.
message comes up and the port will have been created. Select 'Next' in the Printer Wizard to load the print driver.
10. Select 'Have Disk' when choosing which driver to install. Insert the Konica 7050 PostScript driver disk into Drive A and press OK.
1,115
IP-201
13. The next dialog box will ask if the printer will be shared and what the share name is. You will also have the option of loading printer drivers for the servers
clients
Note: This only applies to Windows 95 or NT Workstation clients.
14. Select YES to print a test page after the print drivers are loaded.
KN201 INSTALLATION ADDENDUM FOR DHCP ENABLED NT NETWORKS
The KN201 comes configured with DHCP support enabled. The KN201 can have an IP address entered through the use of ARP or NTBOOTP. Once an IP
address is set, ARP or NTBOOTP cannot be used to change that address. Once an IP address is set, the Konica MAP program, an internet browser pointing
to the KN201's IP address or a Hardware reset are the only methods that can be used to change the IP address. If DHCP is running on the network, the
DHCP manager will automatically assign an address to the KN201 upon powerup. Use the following procedure to assign a permanent fixed address to the
KN201 if DHCP is enabled on the network.
1. If this is a new KN201, after installation and connection to the network, power the IP301 on. If the KN201 has been used on previous installations or you
are unsure as to whether this is a new unit, perform a Hardware Reset on the card prior to installing it on the network.
a. To perform a hardware reset, with power off, move J umper #10 on the KN201 to the FACT position then power the unit on for approximately 30
seconds. Power the unit off and move the J umper back to the NORM position.
Note: This procedure uses the KN201's built in HTTP server to change the IP address that was assigned with DHCP
2. After the KN201 is powered on and initialized (a process that can take approximately 2 minutes), a test page generated by the KN201 should print out.
The IP address that has been assigned to the KN201 will be listed under the TCP/IP* Network Information section of the test page. Using either a Netscape*
or Microsoft* browser, enter the HTTP address of the KN201 to browse to the KN201's internal HTTP server. The KN201's configuration menu should then be
visible in the browser window. Select the 'Setup TCP/IP' menu choice and enter the new IP address
Note: Ensure that the new IP address is not an address that is available in the DHCP pool. In this case the address would need to be excluded from the pool.
A password must be entered in the box at the bottom of the setup screen. The default password is sysadm in lowercase letters. Press the Accept Settings
button. Turn the IP301 off and leave off for a minimum of 30 seconds. Turn the unit back on and the next test page that is printed should reflect the changes
made to the IP address. Now skip to step #5 of the NT 4.0 installation procedures.
Note: This is reprinted from the Installation Procedures on the Konica Web page. File name is KN NT40.pdf
Description
KN101, how to set up the KN card under Novell* NetWare* 4.x.
Solution
CAUTION: Novell NetWare 4.x and higher uses 'Network Directory Services' whereas previous versions use 'Bindery Emulation'. KN101 will not work with
'Network Directory Services' nor can it be administered as an 'Network Directory Services' tree object.
Using the Konica Utilities, the Administrator must define the KN101 in the context that the Bindery is set on the file server. To find this information print or
view the 'autoexec.ncf'. An example follows: SET BINDERY CONTEXT O=KONICA;OU=SUPPORT.O=KONICA. An alternate procedure is use
'SERVMAN.NLM' by:
1. Go to File Server Console and 'Load Servman'
2. Select the option 'Server Parameters'
3. Choose 'Directory Services'
4. Using the down arrow key, scroll down to the bottom and find the syntax that states (to the effect): Bindery Context=KONICA;OU=SUPPORT.O=KONICA.
Use this as an example.
Note: PCONSOLE is used to set up a Print Server under Netware 4.x and is slightly different than 3.x procedures. For information on this procedure see the
Solution dealing with setting up PCONSOLE under NetWare 4.x
Description
IMAGE PROCESSOR NOT RESPONDING message.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The 25 mode, address 89 is not set to 7. If the address is left at the default of 0, the 7050 will first initialize as a copier and when the IP201 tries to
communicate with the 7050, the error message will be generated. When troubleshooting the 7050 as a copier, the IP201 must either be disconnected or
turned off and 25 mode, address 89 set to a 0.
2. Older system software installed. Install the latest version IP system software. The latest version system software is available on the Konica FTP site .
Refer to the FTP_ user site.txt file on the FTP site for detailed information concerning site contents. [[Internal Link for Faxing/Printing FTP site information|
RUN V:\text\Wordpad.exe v:\text\CBC009.txt]]. [[Internal Link for Faxing/Printing FTP_ user site.txt file information| RUN V:\text\Wordpad.exe
v:\text\CBC010.txt]].
1,116
IP-201
Description
Are the Konica print drivers currently supported in a Windows* 2000 environment?
Solution
At present, the use of Konica print drivers in a Windows 2000 environment is not officially supported. Konica does not currently have native Windows 2000
print drivers, but does have a workaround that allows for the installation of Windows NT4 drivers under Windows 2000. This pertains only to PostScript*
drivers (PCL* drivers are not supported at this time).
Note: Installation procedures can be found in the Adobe* Acrobat document w2Kknsetup.pdf. This document can be found on the Konica FTP site in the
Network_install_docs folder. Refer to the FTP site index for additional information.
Description
KN101, how to install the KN card in the IP201.
Solution
CAUTION: If the procedure is not performed correctly, critical damage to the IP201 or KN101 will result.
The red stripe on the KN101 ribbon cable indicates pin #1. Pin #1 is towards the motherboard on the KN101 and away from the motherboard or towards the
front of the machine when connected to the CIC card.
Note: Remove the washer and nut of the BNC connector to install card and reinstall them after KN101 installation is completed.
Ensure that the 'key' on the ribbon cable does not prevent the connector from sliding all the way onto the KN101 card. If this occurs, the ends of the ribbon
cable have been reversed.
KN101 ribbon cable
Description
KN201, is the KN card compatible with the IP201?
Solution
The KN201 is compatible with the IP201.
Description
How to place the system software onto a floppy disks when downloading from Konica's FTP site.
Solution
To place the system software onto a floppy disk, perform the following:
1. Download the files from the FTP site and save them to the hard drive.
2. After the download is complete, place a empty, formatted floppy disk in the drive and double click on the newly downloaded file.
3. A screen will appear asking to designate the drive the files are to be copied. Select the proper floppy drive where you placed the disk.
4. The proper files will then be copied to the floppy disk.
Note: The latest version system software is available on the Konica FTP site . Refer to the FTP_ user site.txt file on the FTP site for detailed information
Description
Memory specifications, IP201.
Solution
Performance is guaranteed only with Konica Specified SIMM Memory modules of 16MB and 32MB. At this time, other manufacturers SIMM's have not been
specifically tested. Memory modules should be 16MB or 32 MB at 60ns or 70ns with true parity. Tin plated contacts should be used. Any 70ns SIMM must
be installed in bank 0 in the first slot. The IP201 does not support EDO memory.
Description
Is there a print driver for Windows* NT 4.0?
Solution
The latest print drivers are available on the Konica FTP site . Refer to the FTP_ user site.txt file on the FTP site for detailed information concerning site
contents. [[Internal Link for Faxing/Printing FTP site information| RUN V:\text\Wordpad.exe v:\text\CBC009.txt]]. [[Internal Link for Faxing/Printing FTP_ user
site.txt file information| RUN V:\text\Wordpad.exe v:\text\CBC010.txt]].
1,117
IP-201
1,118
IP-301
Description
KN201, how to install on a Microsoft* Windows NT 4.0 network.
Solution
PREREQUISITES
Note: If installing the KN201 and DHCP* is enabled on the network, refer to KN201 INSTALLATION ADDENDUM FOR DHCP ENABLED NETWORKS at the
end of this solution for additional information prior to installation. Also, the latest Service Pack should be installed on the NT Server.
c. Defined TCP/IP address that is to be assigned to the KN101/KN201
d. Ethernet address of the KN101/KN201 network card
f. 7050 PostScript* print driver for NT 4.0
g. 7050 print drivers for client workstations
h. The NT 4.0 Server CD
2. Once the TCP/IP print services are loaded, functionality of the TCP/IP protocol must be verified. From the server, open a DOS window and type ipconfig
/all. This will display information regarding the server TCP/IP address, Subnet mask, Routing and DHCP information. This information may not initially be
useful other than for verifying that TCP/IP is recognized on the system but is required information when trying to troubleshoot a TCP/IP related problem.
3. The next step is to verify whether TCP/IP is functioning correctly on the segment the KN201 is to be installed on. Type ping 127.0.0.1 to verify if TCP/IP is
running. If a response is received, ping the address of the host NT Server. If a response is received, ping another address on the same segment as the Host
Server. If the KN101/KN201 is going to be installed on another segment and routing is enabled, ping a known address on the segment that is being routed. If
a response is not received from any of the tests, there may be a problem on the network which will need to be resolved before proceeding further.
4. The TCP/IP address must now be set on the KN101/KN201 using ARP (Address Resolution Protocol).
Note: If the KN201 has had an TCP/IP address previously entered on the card, ARP will not change this address. The KN201 will need to be reset back to
factory defaults to allow a new address to be set using ARP. Instructions for a hardware reset can be found on page A10 of the KN201 user guide. The
syntax for the ARP command is 'arp -s [Desired TCP/IP address of the card] [ethernet address of the card] [TCP/IP address of the host server]'. The ethernet
address must be entered in pairs with a - between each pair (e.g. 00-40-92-00-a2-a0). After the TCP/IP address has been set on the KN101/KN201, enter
'arp -a' to verify that the ARP entry has been entered in the ARP table. After verifying the ARP entry, ping the TCP/IP address of the KN101/KN201. The
KN201 will not respond to the ping command at this time but the KN101 should. The KN201 will have to be reset by powering it down for 30 seconds and
then powering on. Initialization takes approximately 2 minutes.
Note: Any time the IP301 is reset, the power must be off for 30 seconds or the KN201 will not reinitialize and may not connect to the network.
If there is no response to the ping command after reset, the TCP/IP address may not have been set, the KN101/KN201 may not be functioning, the TCP/IP
address may be invalid for the network segment or the network connection to the KN101/KN201 is not functioning.
Use a web browser to input the TCP/IP address and access the MAP Utility. Check/set the subnet mask and default gateway via the TCP/IP setup function.
If a password is required to make any change, the default password is sysadm (all lowercase letters).
6. Select MY COMPUTER when creating the 7050 printer from the Server. Printer administration and spooling will then be performed on the server.
7. The Network port must now be created. Select ADD PORT. From the Printer Ports Dialog, select LPR PORT and Press NEW PORT
Note: If LPR Port is not an available selection, TCP/IP Printing Services are not loaded.
8. Enter the TCP/IP address that was assigned to the KN101/KN201 as the address of server providing LPD. PORT_1 is the only name allowed as the print
queue name when using the KN101 card. PORT1 is the only name allowed as the print queue name when using the KN201 card. Press OK.
9. After selecting OKAY to create the LPR Port, there will be a 5 minute delay before the port is created.
message comes up and the port will have been created. Select NEXT in the Printer Wizard to load the print driver.
10. Select HAVE DISK when choosing which driver to install. Insert the Konica 7050 PostScript driver disk into Drive A and press OK.
13. The next dialog box will ask if the printer will be shared and what the share name is. There is also the option of loading printer drivers for the server
clients.
Note: This only applies to Windows 95 or NT Workstation clients.
14. Select NO to print a test page after the print drivers are loaded.
KN201 INSTALLATION ADDENDUM FOR DHCP ENABLED NT NETWORKS
The KN201 comes configured with DHCP support enabled. The KN201 can have a TCP/IP address entered through the use of ARP or NTBOOTP. Once an
IP address is set, ARP or NTBOOTP cannot be used to change that address. Once a TCP/IP address is set, the Konica Minolta MAP program, an internet
browser pointing to the KN201 TCP/IP address or a hardware reset are the only methods that can be used to change the TCP/IP address. If DHCP is running
on the network, the DHCP manager will automatically assign an address to the KN201 upon power up. Use the following procedure to assign a permanent
fixed address to the KN201 if DHCP is enabled on the network.
1. If this is a new KN201, after installation and connection to the network, power the IP301 on. If the KN201 has been used on previous installations or there
is doubt as to whether this is a new unit, perform a Hardware Reset on the card prior to installing it on the network.
a. To perform a hardware reset, with power off, move J umper #10 on the KN201 to the FACT position then power the unit on. Power the unit off for a
1,119
IP-301
minimum of 30 seconds and move the J umper back to the NORM position.
Note: This procedure uses the KN201's built in HTTP server to change the TCP/IP address that was assigned with DHCP
2. After the KN201 is powered on and initialized (a process that can take approximately 2 minutes), a test page generated by the KN201 should print out.
The TCP/IP address that has been assigned to the KN201 will be listed under the TCP/IP Network Information section of the test page. Using either a
Netscape* or Microsoft browser, enter this address to browse to the KN201 internal HTTP server. The KN201 configuration menu should then be visible in
the browser window. Select the "Setup TCP/IP" menu choice and enter the new TCP/IP address.
Note: ensure that the new TCP/IP address is not an address that is available in the DHCP pool. In this case the address would need to be excluded from the
pool.
A password must be entered in the box at the bottom of the setup screen. The default password is 'sysadm' in lowercase letters. Press the Accept Settings
button. Turn the IP301 controller off and leave off for a minimum of 30 seconds. Turn the unit back on and the next test page that is printed should reflect the
changes made to the TCP/IP address. Now skip to step #5 of the NT 4.0 installation procedures.
Notes:
a. HTTP access is not possible with the KN101 card. Refer to the KN_NT40setup.pdf for additional information.
b. See the [[NSSG Quick Reference Guide|URL http://techweb.konicabt.com/tpm/media/IP_KN_Driver_matrix.pdf]] which includes the IP unit and KN card
compatibility along with the latest IP unit Start-Up version (system code) and KN card firmware version. The new matrix now includes PCL and PostScript
support listing for Microsoft Windows operating systems and the latest public release version number for each driver. This matrix does not include any
information pertaining to special or beta code/drivers, HOST, UNIX, printing.
c. Matrix is subject to change without notice.
d. To view the PDF, Acrobat* Reader must be installed. Acrobat Reader can be downloaded for free from the Adobe* Web site at:
Description
Are the Konica print drivers currently supported in a Windows* 2000 environment?
Solution
At present, the use of Konica print drivers in a Windows 2000 environment is not officially supported. Konica does not currently have native Windows 2000
print drivers, but does have a workaround that allows for the installation of Windows NT4 drivers under Windows 2000 (server only). This pertains only to
PostScript* drivers (PCL* drivers are not supported at this time).
Notes:
1. Installation procedures can be found in the Adobe* Acrobat document w2Kknsetup.pdf .
Description
KN301, can the KN301 be used with the IP301?
Solution
The KN301 will not function with the IP301. The IP301 only supports the KN101 and KN201 network cards. The KN301 can only be installed in the IP302,
IP302 PLUS, IP303, IP402 and IP402 PLUS.
See the NSSG Quick Reference Guide for more detailed information.
Description
How to copy downloaded IP system software to floppy disk.
Solution
To copy downloaded IP system software to floppy disk, perform the following steps:
1. When downloading the system software, it should be saved to a directory created on the hard drive of your system.
2. When the file is executed it will ask where the information should be copied to. Pressing 'A' on the keyboard will copy the files to the floppy drive.
3. The files will each expand as they are downloaded to an individual disk. Each of the files downloaded from the website should be copied to one floppy
disk.
Description
KN201, how to configure for a Microsoft* Windows 95 peer-to-peer network.
Solution
1,120
IP-301
To configure the KN201 for a Windows 95 peer-to-peer network, perform the following:
1. Verify the KN201 has at least version 1.06 firmware installed.
2. Install the Konica Minolta peer-to-peer utility. There is currently an IP and IPX version of the peer-to-peer utility available.
3. Connect the KN201 to the network.
4. Load the 'Redirecter Utility' from the driver disk provided, onto each Windows 95 workstations that will print to the Konica Minolta printer.
5. Reboot the Workstation, Printer, and IP unit.
6. Verify that IP or IPX protocols are active on the PCs to be networked.
7. Use the ADD PRINTER WIZARD to install a new LOCAL printer.
8. From the list of available printer ports, select the KN2-xxxxxx-0.
Notes:
a. The KN201 does not support Windows 3.11 on a peer-to-peer network. Konica Minolta recommends an HP* or Intel* external print server.
b. The latest peer-to-peer utilities are available from the [[Konica Minolta FTP site| URL ftp://kbtdigital:kx15@ftp.konicabt.com]].
See page A-11 in the KN201 User's Reference Guide and the [[NSSG Quick Reference Guide|URL
http://techweb.konicabt.com/tpm/media/IP_KN_Driver_matrix.pdf]] for more information.
c. Matrix is subject to change without notice.
d. To view the PDF, Acrobat* Reader must be installed. Acrobat Reader can be downloaded for free from the Adobe* Web site at:
Description
Is there a PCL* driver for Windows* NT workstation for the IP301?
Solution
There is no PCL driver for Windows NT workstation. The PostScript* driver must be used.
Description
Solution
Performance is guaranteed only with Konica SIMM Memory modules. At this time, other manufacturers SIMM's have not been specifically tested. Memory
module MU-103 is 32MB at 60ns with non parity and tin plated contacts. EDO memory should not be mixed with regular fast page memory that comes with
the IP301. The memory must be added in pairs.
Note: The IP301 comes with 16MB of memory.
Description
How to set up an HP* J etDirect* to Microsoft* Windows NT 4.0 using LPR.
Solution
To set up an HP J etDirect to Windows NT 4.0 using LPR, perform the following:
1. Set the TCP/IP* address on the HP J etDirect.
2. Set the port name as raw1 in lowercase characters.
3. Set the parallel port configured as Centronics*
Note: The default setting is Bitronics*.
Description
KN201, does the KN card support Macintosh* printing?
Solution
The KN201 supports printing in a Macintosh environment with the following restrictions:
1. The IP301 requires firmware k2.03.
2. KN201 above serial number 50000 or modified by board repair.
3. CIC card with assembly number ASSY-01-0520 or modified by board repair.
4. Enable AppleTalk* support from the configuration menu of the 7050 or FORCE 50.
5. If a Microsoft* Windows NT 4.0 server is being used to provide a print queue, Macintosh print services must be loaded on the NT server.
Notes:
a. KN201 cards below serial number 50000 (or ones that have not been modified by board repair) only support ASCII file format. They do not support the
binary format used on most Macintosh.
b. The KN101 also supports Macintosh printing.
c. Refer to the [[NSSG Quick Reference Guide|URL http://techweb.konicabt.com/tpm/media/IP_KN_Driver_matrix.pdf]] which includes the IP unit and KN
card compatibility along with the latest IP unit Start-Up version (system code) and KN card firmware version. The new matrix now includes PCL* and
PostScript* support listing for Microsoft* Windows* operating systems and the latest public release version number for each driver. This matrix does not
1,121
IP-301
include any information pertaining to special or beta code/drivers, HOST, UNIX, printing.
d. Matrix is subject to change without notice.
e. To view the PDF, Acrobat* Reader must be installed. Acrobat Reader can be downloaded for free from the Adobe* Web site at:
Description
Where to find the latest print driver(s) for the IP301 (7050/FORCE 50).
Solution
The latest print drivers are available on the Konica Web site (www.konicabt.com). Click on Drivers/Users Guides in the lower right corner of the page.
1,122
IP-302
Description
Microsoft* Windows 2000 print driver availability.
Solution
Konica Windows 2000-compatible print drivers with an approved Microsoft* Digital signature are not yet available.
Notes:
1. Konica Windows 2000 print drivers are available on the [[Driver selector on the Konica Minolta Web Site| URL
http://www.konicabt.com/Support/Drivers2/info.html]]
2. Currently, only Windows 2000 PostScript* drivers are available.
3. These drivers are only for Windows 2000 systems (Professional or Server) and are not be used with Windows NT systems (Workstations or Server).
4. The PostScript driver to be used with the 7050 and IP302 controller configuration is version 1.3.4.
6. The IP302 must have, as a minimum, system software version 4.1.2.
Description
KN301 cannot be seen on the network. May not be able to ping the card or see it with the MAP utility/web browser.
Solution
IMPORTANT NOTE: Konica is collecting information regarding KN301 cards that cannot be seen on networks in efforts to isolate and correct this issue.
When receiving a call for this issue, please record the following information:
1. Serial number of KN301 card.
2. KN301 firmware level.
3. Is the KN301 connected to a switchable hub?
a. If yes, please provide the name and model of switchable hub.
b. If no, please provide the name and model of the hub.
4. Network operating system.
5. Is it having problems connecting to a server? If so, which server OS and version?
6. Are there any service packs applied to the server? If so, which service packs?
7 Software level of IP302.
8. Is network traffic light or heavy?
9. Is problem intermittent or constant?
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The KN301 card is improperly configured, has an incorrect IP address or contains corrupted data. Perform the following to initialize the KN301 card:
a. Power down the IP unit and remove the cover.
b. Remove the KN301 from the IP unit.
c. Set jumper OP2 to the FACT position (for factory initialization).
d. Reseat the card in the IP unit.
e. Power the IP unit ON and leave it on for five minutes.
f. Power down the IP unit and remove the KN301 card.
g. Reset jumper OP2 to the NORMAL position.
h. Reseat the card into the IP unit and reassemble the cover.
i. The card should now be initialized and should print a status page once both the IP unit and the printer have come to a ready state.
2. The system software requires updating. The controller should be updated to the latest IP system software, version 4.1.2 (noa2 code). This is available
from the Konica FTP site . Refer to the FTP_ user site.txt file on the FTP site for detailed information concerning site contents. [[Internal Link for
Faxing/Printing FTP site information| RUN V:\text\Wordpad.exe v:\text\CBC009.txt]]. [[Internal Link for Faxing/Printing FTP_ user site.txt file information|
RUN V:\text\Wordpad.exe v:\text\CBC010.txt]].
Note: Updating the IP system software to version 4.1.2 requires updating the KN301 card to firmware version 5.55 or later, which is available on the Konica
FTP site.
3. The KN301 card may require updating to the latest level firmware. Install firmware version 5.55, which is available on the Konica FTP site . This level
firmware may add some stability in an environment with 10/100BaseT auto-switching hubs. Refer to the FTP_ user site.txt file on the FTP site for detailed
information concerning site contents. [[Internal Link for Faxing/Printing FTP site information| RUN V:\text\Wordpad.exe v:\text\CBC009.txt]]. [[Internal Link
for Faxing/Printing FTP_ user site.txt file information| RUN V:\text\Wordpad.exe v:\text\CBC010.txt]].
4. The environment is using switchable hubs so they can run 100MB/s or 10MB/s signal speed. The KN301 auto-senses the network speed and, therefore,
may have a problem with switchable hubs, causing the KN301 to drop off the network. Install a mini-hub that is set for one speed (10MB/s recommended)
and connect the KN301 to that hub, then connect the hub to the network.
Description
How to print from a Macintosh*.
Solution
IP system software, version 3.0.4 or later is required for Macintosh connectivity and support is currently available using a KN101 or KN301 ONLY. A KN201 is
not supported on Macintosh connections. The KN301 must also have firmware version 5.26 or later installed on the card.
1,123
IP-302
Notes:
1. When using system software version 3.0.4, the seventh disk or spooling disk is used to turn off spooling for the Macintosh environment. When using
system software version 4.1.2, disk 7 is not used.
2. LPR printing is available in a Macintosh environment using a KN101 or KN301 card. See the KN101/KN301 LPR Printing Procedure hyperlink for
detailed instructions.
3. Refer to the [[NSSG Quick Reference Guide|URL http://techweb.konicabt.com/tpm/media/IP_KN_Driver_matrix.pdf]] which includes the IP unit and KN
card compatibility along with the latest IP unit Start-Up version (system code) and KN card firmware version. The new matrix now includes PCL* and
PostScript* support listing for Microsoft* Windows* operating systems and the latest public release version number for each driver. This matrix does not
include any information pertaining to special or beta code/drivers, HOST, UNIX, printing.
4. Matrix is subject to change without notice.
Description
Unable to print when short edge bind is selected.
Solution
CAUSE: The 3.0.4 system software code (or earlier) does not work with short edge bind.
SOLUTION: Install latest version system software to correct the short edge bind issue. The latest version system software is available on the Konica FTP
site . Refer to the FTP_ user site.txt file on the FTP site for detailed information concerning site contents. [[Internal Link for Faxing/Printing FTP site
information| RUN V:\text\Wordpad.exe v:\text\CBC009.txt]]. [[Internal Link for Faxing/Printing FTP_ user site.txt file information| RUN V:\text\Wordpad.exe
v:\text\CBC010.txt]].
Description
KN302, how to set up the KN card on a Novell* 4.x network using NDS (NetWare* Directory Services).
Solution
To set up a KN302 on a Novell 4.x network using NDS, perform the following:
Set up the printer objects using NWadmin.exe at the workstation:
1. Log on as administrator or equivalent for the container where the printer objects will be placed.
2. Enter NetWare Administrator (NWadmin95.exe located in the public directory on the server volume).
3. Move to the context where the printer objects will be placed.
4. Select tools on the pull down menu.
5. Select Print Services Quick Setup. If you do not have access to this function, then you do not have sufficient rights to create objects (do not continue).
6. Enter the print server name (example: KN302_74E2).
7. Enter the printer name (example: 7060).
8. Enter the print queue name (example: Konica_7060)
Note: Windows* 9x/NT workstations will see the queue name in the printers area, use a name that users can identify with.
9. Under Type select other/unknown.
10. Under Banner select text.
11. Press OK. The three objects will be created and attached on each other in the container.
Set-up the KN302 card using the MAP utility at the workstation:
1. Load the Konica map 3.7 utility on a Windows 9x or Windows NT workstation. The map program can be downloaded from the Konica Digital FTP site .
The utility is an executable file, MAP37.exe, located in the Map_utilities folder found under the KN3xx_Utilities folder. Refer to the FTP_ site.txt file on the
FTP site for detailed information concerning site contents.
Note: TCP/IP* must be installed and configured on the workstation in order to use the MAP utility.
2. After installing MAP, select MAP set-up and configure the utility to search using IP and IPX, and select OK to complete setup.
3. Open the MAP program (the program is a browser utility that will search for the KN302 cards) and select the KN card.
4. Select Setup NetWare.
5. Enter the print server name. Use the same name that was entered in NetWare (example: KN302_74E2).
6. Enter the preferred file server name (server object name).
7. Enter NDS context where the printer objects were created. For example if the printer object's NDS context is:
O =CORP
OU =HEADQUARTERS
then enter .ou=headquarters.o=corp (typeful) OR headquarters.corp (typeless)
8. Enter preferred NDS tree.
9. Enter the password sysadm (must be lowercase).
10. Select Accept settings.
11. Reboot the controller and check the status page for network information.
[[Internal Link for Faxing/Printing FTP site information| RUN V:\text\Wordpad.exe v:\text\CBC009.txt]]
[[Internal Link for Faxing/Printing FTP_ user site.txt file information| RUN V:\text\Wordpad.exe v:\text\CBC010.txt]]
1,124
IP-302
Description
DLL errors while loading PCL* driver.
Solution
CAUSE: DLL error messages may occur if one of the following programs are running while loading the print driver:
1. Microsoft* Office Tool Bar.
2. Virus protection software.
3. File and Printer Sharing is enabled. File and Printer Sharing can be enabled after the driver is loaded.
4. There may be problems if HP J etAdmin* software is running on the PC while the driver is being installed.
5. The PCL driver was installed and one of the PCL driver files is corrupt.
SOLUTION: Shut down all programs and tool bars prior to loading the PCL driver. Completely delete the PCL driver from the PC:
1. Use add/remove programs in control panel to remove the PCL driver.
2. Verify that the following files were deleted from the PC:
Windows* 9x PCL driver for the 7060/7150/FORCE 60 (old style IP302 driver and 3.0.4 system software compatible driver).
C:\windows\system\kbm7060.pdd
C:\windows\system\ppgprint.ini
C:\windows\system\efgnpcl2.drv
C:\windows\system\efgndlg2.dll
C:\windows\system\efgnplay.exe
C:\windows\system\efgn5fx2.dll
C:\windows\system\tab16d20.dll
C:\windows\system\pclwin95.hlp
Windows 9x PCL driver for the 7050/FORCE 50 (3.0.4 system software compatible driver).
C:\windows\system\kbm70502.pdd
C:\windows\system\ppgprint.ini
C:\windows\system\efgnpcl2.drv
C:\windows\system\efgndlg2.dll
C:\windows\system\efgnplay.exe
C:\windows\system\efgn5fx2.dll
C:\windows\system\tab16d20.dll
C:\windows\system\pclwin95.hlp
Delete all of these files prior to loading the PCL driver. If any of these files remain in the windows\system directory and are corrupt, loading the PCL driver
again will not resolve the problem. The corrupt file will not be rewritten by the new driver.
Notes:
1. Exclude the PCL driver files from being scanned by antivirus software to reduce the occurrence of file corruption after the driver is installed. For specific
instruction on how to exclude files from being scanned, review the documentation for the virus protection software being used.
2. The latest print drivers are available on the Konica FTP site . Refer to the FTP_ user site.txt file on the FTP site for detailed information concerning site
contents. [[Internal Link for Faxing/Printing FTP site information| RUN V:\text\Wordpad.exe v:\text\CBC009.txt]]. [[Internal Link for Faxing/Printing FTP_ user
site.txt file information| RUN V:\text\Wordpad.exe v:\text\CBC010.txt]].
Description
KN301, unable to send a job from Windows* NT 4.0 server using a LPR port.
Solution
CAUSE: The LPR port name was setup as PORT1 in lowercase letters or with an incorrect name.
SOLUTION: The LPR port must be created as PORT1 using all uppercase letters.
Note: The PORT1 entry, when setting up a LPR port, is no longer required with firmware version 5.45. The port entry can be left blank or any value can be
used.
Description
How to obtain IP302 system software.
Solution
The latest version system software is available on the Konica FTP site . Refer to the FTP_ user site.txt file on the FTP site for detailed information
Description
1,125
IP-302
Solution
CAUTION: Proper performance is guaranteed only with Konica-specified SIMM 32MB memory modules (MU-103, PCUA 950781). The memory is 32MB,
non parity, tin plated contacts. Purchasing memory from an outside vendor may result in the wrong SIMM, even though the product is of high quality.
The following specifications can be used as a guideline:
1. SIMM modules should use either Fast Page Mode (FPM) or EDO 5 Volt DRAM.
Note: Do not mix FPM or EDO DRAM memory in the same controller.
2. The maximum amount of memory that can be installed in the IP unit varies depending on the system code installed:
a. Version 3.0.4 system software: If more than 128MB of RAM is installed, the IP unit locks up and will not print.
b. Version 3.1.4 system software: If less than 512MB of RAM is installed, the IP unit may not lock up. When 512MB of RAM is installed, the IP unit will
lock up.
c. Version 4.1.2 system software: If 512MB of RAM is installed, the IP unit does not lock up. All of the 512MB of RAM is recognized.
3. If the IP302 is equipped with an IP302 PLUS motherboard, a single 32MB DIMM is installed. A maximum memory capacity of 512MB is available using
combinations (in 4 DIMM slots) of the memory listed below:
PART NUMBER PCUA ITEM DIMM
Not Available 950022 MU-104 16MB
U131-4583 950023 MU-105 32MB
U131-4584 950807 MU-301 64MB
Not Available 950808 MU-302 128MB
The following memory requirements MUST be met:
1. DIMM PCB must meet UL standard.
2. DIMMs can be Synchronous DRAM (SDRAM), 3.3V DC, 66MHz or 100MHz.
3. The DIMM leads must be 168-pin, tin lead style.
4. There cannot be mixed brands of ICs within the same DIMM. The following are approved IC manufacturers:
Fujitsu
Micron
Texas Instruments
IBM
Toshiba
Mitsubishi
Samsung
Siemens
NEC
5. DIMM does not have to be installed in equal pairs.
6. Konica stocks DIMM modules.
Notes:
a. Printer E-RDH still uses SIMM memory.
b. The DIMM slots are not presently used on the original IP302 motherboards.
c. The latest version system software is available on the Konica FTP site . Refer to the FTP_ user site.txt file on the FTP site for detailed information
concerning site contents.
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
1,126
IP-303
Description
Solution
Notes:
1. Konica Windows 2000 print drivers are available on the [[Driver selector on the Konica Web Site| URL http://www.konicabt.com/Support/Drivers2/info.html]]
4. The PostScript driver, to be used with the 7055 and IP303 controller, is version 1.5.3.
5. The PostScript driver, to be used with the 7065 and IP303 controller, is version 1.5.3.
Description
Unable to print. The IP controller appears to intermittently lock up. Rebooting the controller may temporarily resolve the problem.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. If the main body is powered OFF then ON without rebooting the IP unit, IP lock-up may occur due to loss of communication with the main body. Instruct
end-users to reboot both the IP and mainbody if rebooting is required.
2. Software patch required.
Konica Corporation has provided several different patches which should prevent these lockups. Install the latest version IP system software and system
software patches.
Note: The latest version system software is available on the Konica FTP site .
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Tandem printer/tandem copier, availability and information.
Solution
The Tandem Print kit (PCUA 950810) is currently available for the 7065 using the IP303 controller.
Notes:
1. The IP303 must be at the latest code of system software. The latest version system software is available on the Konica FTP site . Refer to the FTP_
user site.txt file on the FTP site for detailed information concerning site contents. [[Internal Link for Faxing/Printing FTP site information| RUN
V:\text\Wordpad.exe v:\text\CBC009.txt]]. [[Internal Link for Faxing/Printing FTP_ user site.txt file information| RUN V:\text\Wordpad.exe v:\text\CBC010.txt]].
2. The Tandem Copy Kit (PCUA 950654) is available. Tandem Copy Kit, PCUA 950792, will not work with the Konica 7065. Be sure to use PCUA 950654
when ordering the Tandem Copy Kit for the 7065. Level 14 EPROMs are required to tandem print and tandem copy simultaneously. Latest EPROM level
and [[Internal Link for Faxing/Printing current 7065 EPROM information.| RUN V:\text\Wordpad.exe v:\text\newrom\7065.txt]]
3. The Tandem Print Kit is only for connecting two 7065s using an IP303 controller. No other configuration of printers or controllers can be used.
1,127
IP-303
See Info Source Bulletin #117-99.
Description
Is AS/400* printing supported with the IP303?
Solution
AS/400 and host environment connectivity are supported in most environments. A KNAS form should be submitted to evaluate specific environments.
Description
What print drivers are available?
Solution
Printer drivers are available for download from the [[Support & Drivers| URL http://kmbs.konicaminolta.us/eprise/main/KMBS/Support_Center/Home]] section
on the public web site and on the [[FTP site| URL ftp://kbtdigital:kx15@ftp.konicabt.com]].
Description
How to obtain the Macintosh* PPD file.
Solution
The Macintosh PPD file is located within the IP303 PostScript* driver. The latest print drivers are available on the Konica FTP site . Refer to the FTP_ user
site.txt file on the FTP site for detailed information concerning site contents. [[Internal Link for Faxing/Printing FTP site information| RUN V:\text\Wordpad.exe
v:\text\CBC009.txt]]. [[Internal Link for Faxing/Printing FTP_ user site.txt file information| RUN V:\text\Wordpad.exe v:\text\CBC010.txt]].
The PostScript driver file name is Winps153.exe. When the PostScript driver is installed in the Macintosh computer the only file that will be seen will be the
PPD file needed to create the printer.
Description
KN301, how to setup the KN card on a Macintosh* network.
Solution
To setup a KN301 on a Macintosh network perform the following:
1. Verify Macintosh OS (Operating system) is version is 7.5 or higher. (To check Macintosh OS version, click Apple*, then [about this computer]).
2. Click on Apple, control panel, AppleTalk*, click down arrow, Ethernet needs to show up. (If Ethernet does not show up, click Apple, control panel,
extensions manager, scroll down to Ethernet built in, check box in front of Ethernet built in. Close windows and restart the Macintosh).
3. Insert the Konica Macintosh driver disk.
4. Click on the disk
5. Click on the Macintosh hard drive.
6. Click on system.
7. Click on extensions.
8. Click on printer descriptions.
9. Drag the PPD from the disk to the printer description folder.
10. Close all windows.
11. Click Apple, control panel, AppleTalk, down arrow to Ethernet.
12. Click close box, then save.
13. Click Apple, chooser, then click LaserWriter* 8.
14. Highlight the KN301.
15. Click create, highlight PPD, click select. KN301 is now an icon on the desktop.
16. Click setup, click configure, make selections on printer configuration, and then click ok.
17. Close the window.
18. Click Apple, notepad, file, and print one.
Note: LPR printing is available in a Macintosh environment using a KN101 or KN301 card. See the KN101/KN301 LPR Printing Procedure hyperlink for
detailed instructions.
Description
KN301, how to reset to factory settings.
Solution
To reset the KN301 card to factory settings, perform the following:
1. Power down the IP unit and remove the cover.
1,128
IP-303
2. Remove the KN301 from the IP unit.
3. Set jumper OP2 to the FACT position (for factory initialization).
4. Reseat the card in the IP unit.
5. Power the IP unit ON and leave it on for five minutes.
6. Power down the IP unit and remove the KN301 card.
7. Reset jumper OP2 to the NORMAL position.
8. Reseat the card into the IP unit and reassemble the cover.
9. The card should now be initialized and should print a status page once both the IP unit and the printer have come to a ready state.
Description
IP303 controller/printer compatibility.
Solution
To date, it is compatible with only the 7055 and 7065. The controller is NOT compatible with the 7033, 7040, 7050, 7150, 7060, 7075, FORCE 50, or FORCE
60.
1,129
IP-304
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Intermittent bolding of text when printing from Microsoft* Office* applications with the IP304 PCL* driver.
Solution
CAUSE: An anomaly with the IP304 PCL driver causing intermittent/random bolding of text from various Microsoft* Office* applications.
SOLUTION: A new IP304 PCL driver is now available that resolves this issue..
Notes:
1. New driver versions; Windows* 2000/XP ver. 2.0.11, Windows 9x/Me ver. 1.7.16, Windows NT4 ver. 1.7.16.
2. These drivers apply to the 7055/7065 IP304 configuration.
2. These drivers are available for download on the Konica FTP site
Description
IP304 is not recognized by the main body.
Solution
CAUSE: Incorrect EPROM levels on the main body (7055 or 7065).
SOLUTION: Install the latest level EPROMs.
Note: The following are the minimum EPROM levels required to allow recognition of the IP304:
Latest 7065 EPROM level and [[Internal Link for Faxing/Printing current 7065 EPROM information.| RUN V:\text\Wordpad.exe v:\text\newrom\7065.txt]]
Latest 7055 EPROM level and [[Internal Link for Faxing/Printing current 7055 EPROM information.| RUN V:\text\Wordpad.exe v:\text\newrom\7055.txt]]
DF312 Technical Bulletin #1 for information on DF312 EPROMs.
Description
When printing from Microsoft Word*, multiple print jobs are stapled together when using the Visual PostScript driver (version 1.0.3.5) with a Force 60 as the
main body.
Solution
CAUSE: Incorrect dipswitch settings.
SOLUTION: Set main body dipswitches 14-3 =1 and 14-4 =1 using the 25 mode.
1,130
IP-304
Description
PU108, punch unit will not operate in printer mode.
Solution
CAUSE: Memory switch 13-6 is not set correctly.
SOLUTION: To program the punch unit to operate in printer mode, perform the following:
1. Access 25 mode (hold the 2 and 5 keys while powering on).
2. Select Software switch setting
3. Scroll to dipswitch 13-6 and set to ON (1).
Description
OUT OF MEMORY message on the main body during printer operation at page 1500.
Solution
CAUSE: Improper software dipswitch settings on the main body.
SOLUTION: To change the dipswitch settings, perform the following:
4. Change the following dipswitch settings:
DIPSWITCH VALUE
14-3 1
14-4 1
16-5 0
17-5 0
Description
After installing the PostScript* option, code prints out instead of the test page.
Solution
CAUSE: Systems software needs to be upgraded to version 5.1.0 or later to allow PostScript recognition.
SOLUTION: Install latest system software.
Description
IP304 Introduction Info Source No. 54-01.
Solution
IP304 Introduction Info Source No. 54-01 .
Description
Cannot print test pages from NetFusion card when installed in an IP304. The PRT light is ON solid.
Solution
CAUSE: Parallel port setting on the NetFusion card must be set to Standard. The current setting is FAST.
SOLUTION: To set the NetFusion card to Standard, perform the following:
1. Access the NetFusion card with a web browser and click on Advance Configuration.
2. Click on Logical printers and select the first logical printer in the list.
3. In gray, click PORT and change the parallel port setting to STANDARD.
4. Scroll to the bottom and click the Save button.
5. After the screen refreshes, click the Printer Administration link and then select Restart Print Server.
6. When the screen is refreshed, click the RESTART button.
1,131
IP-304
7. When the print server is restarted, press the Test button on the back of the NetFusion card to generate the test pages.
Description
Unable to print booklets on 8.5x11R paper.
Solution
CAUSE: Booklet mode through the print driver allows only 11x17 paper to be used.
SOLUTION: To create 8.5x11R booklets, print the document onto single sided 8.5x11 paper. Load the printed document in the document feeder, select
booklet mode from Applications, select 8.5x11R paper and run the copy job.
1,132
IP-402
Description
Unable to print. The IP controller appears to lock up. Rebooting the controller may temporarily resolve the problem.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. If the main body is powered OFF then ON without rebooting the IP unit, IP lock-up may occur due to loss of communication with the main body. Instruct
end-users to reboot both the IP and mainbody if rebooting is required.
2. Software patch required.
Konica Corporation has provided several different patches which should prevent these lockups. Install the latest version IP system software and system
software patches.
Note: The latest version system software is available on the Konica FTP site .
Description
Solution
Konica Windows 2000-compatible print drivers with an approved Microsoft Digital signature are not yet available.
Notes:
1. Konica Windows 2000 print drivers are available on the [[Driver selector on the Konica Minolta Web Site| URL
http://www.konicabt.com/Support/Drivers2/info.html]]
Description
Intermittent lockup.
Solution
Please download and install the 422_lock-up_patch located on the FTP site to resolve the symptom of intermittent lock-up on the IP402.
Requirements:
1. IP402 code version 4.1.2 must be installed prior to installing this patch update.
2. The main body must be equipped with a finisher and the firmware levels should be at version 44 control and 26 image.
Description
PRINTER BOARD FAILURE message on the printer LCD.
Solution
CAUSE: The EIC board is not communicating with the 7033/7040.
SOLUTION: Reseat the EIC board and the IP upgrade kit box unit respectively. Replace the EIC board (p/n U131-6600) if problem persists.
Note: The EIC board is installed within the IP upgrade kit box unit, which is located on the back of the 7033/7040. The EIC board allows the IP402 PLUS and
the 7033/7040 to communicate.
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
1,133
IP-402
Description
KN301, how to set up the KN card on a Novell* 4.x network using NDS (NetWare* Directory Services).
Solution
To set up a KN301 on a Novell 4.x network using NDS, perform the following:
Set up the printer objects using NWadmin.exe at the workstation:
1. Log on as administrator or equivalent for the container where the printer objects will be placed.
2. Enter NetWare Administrator (NWadmin95.exe located in the public directory on the server volume).
3. Move to the context where the printer objects will be placed.
4. Select tools on the pull down menu.
5. Select Print Services Quick Setup. If you do not have access to this function, then you do not have sufficient rights to create objects (do not continue).
6. Enter the print server name (example: KN301_74E2).
7. Enter the printer name (example: 7040).
8. Enter the print queue name (example: Konica_7040)
Note: Windows* 9x/NT workstations will see the queue name in the printers area, use a name that users can identify with.
9. Under Type select other/unknown.
10. Under Banner select text.
11. Press OK. The three objects will be created and attached on each other in the container.
Set up the KN301 card using the MAP utility at the workstation:
1. Load the Konica map 3.7 utility on a Windows 9x or Windows NT workstation. The map program can be downloaded from the Konica Digital FTP site .
The utility is an executable file, MAP37.exe, located in the Map_utilities folder found under the KN3xx_Utilities folder. Refer to the FTP_ site.txt file on the
FTP site for detailed information concerning site contents.
Note: TCP/IP* must be installed and configured on the workstation in order to use the MAP utility.
2. After installing MAP, select MAP set-up and configure the utility to search using IP and IPX, and select OK to complete setup.
3. Open the MAP program (the program is a browser utility that will search for the KN301 cards) and select the KN card.
4. Select Setup NetWare.
5. Enter the print server name. Use the same name that was entered in NetWare (example: KN301_74E2).
6. Enter the preferred file server name (server object name).
7. Enter NDS context where the printer objects were created. For example if the printer object's NDS context is:
O =CORP
OU =HEADQUARTERS
then enter .ou=headquarters.o=corp (typeful) OR headquarters.corp (typeless)
8. Enter preferred NDS tree.
9. Enter the password sysadm (must be lowercase).
10. Select Accept settings.
11. Reboot the controller and check the status page for network information.
Description
How to install the IP402 controller with the KN301, IP Upgrade kit, and PostScript* kit.
Solution
Follow the controller installation/upgrade procedure .
To flash the 7033/7040 ROMs, use the Windows* 95 flash procedure.
Description
IP402 controller features.
Solution
Items necessary to upgrade 7033/7040 to copier/printer:
PCUA 950408 IP402 Print Controller (including EIC kit)
PCUA 950417 IP Upgrade kit (required with print controller)
PCUA 950419 PostScript* kit (optional)
PCUA 950789 KN301 Ethernet Network Interface Card
Note: The IP402 includes the Engine Interface Card (EIC), but you also need to purchase the IP Upgrade Kit for connection to the 7033/7040.
Specifications:
1,134
IP-402
Processor: Intel* Pentium 200 MMX
Motherboard: PCI*, ISA Bus - Slots
Memory: Std. 72-pin SIMM (4 Slots)
16MB, Expandable to 256MB
Hard Drive: IDE 1.6 Gigabyte
Software: Konica's NOA
PDL Support: Standard - PCL*5e, Electronics for Imaging, Pipeline Division.
Support: Windows* 3.1, Windows 95*, Windows NT*
Optional: PostScript, PowerPage 2, Electronics for Imaging, Pipeline Division.
Support: Windows 3.1, Windows 95, Windows NT 3.5x and 4.0, Macintosh* System 7.x, 8.x (Filter File): UNIX*, Solaris, DEC, SCO*, HP-UX, AIX
Connections:
Serial: RS-232C, DB9
Parallel: IEEE 1284, DB25
Optional Network: KN301, Ethernet, 10/100BaseT, RJ 45
Network Protocols Supported: Novell Netware* 3.x, 4.x, IPX/SPX, AppleTalk*, EtherTalk, TCP/IP*, LPD/LPR, LAN Manager/Server, NETBUIS.
Remote Process Calling: HTTP, SNMP, FTP, POP3
High End Network: AS/400*, UNIX, Solaris, DEC, SCO, HP-UX, AIX
Font Support: PCL - 45, PS - 45
PCI Bus Connection: Now your RIP data goes directly into the IP302 motherboard via PCI Bus communication. Your customer no longer needs to tie up the
parallel port to connect a network option to Konica's IP302 nor IP402 print controllers.
A free parallel port allows plug in connection directly to the IP302 or IP402 which will enable printing from a notebook computer.
Features: 2-in-1/4-in-1, Automatic Tray Switching, Automatic Emulation Switching, Automatic Port Selection, Multiple Page Buffering, Page/Document
Printing, Wait Mode, Interrupt Mode.
Optional Functions (available soon): TIFF, CGM, PDF, GIF, Internet Printing
The KN301 Network Interface:
KN301 Network Interface Card adds more to the very impressive capabilities of Konica's KN201 card by improving communication speed, throughput and the
user interface. The first major benefit is 10/100BaseT communication (also called Fast Ethernet). What will 100BaseT do for the end user? It is a high-speed
version of 10BaseT, providing communication at the rate of 100MBps rather than 10MBps. This reduces network traffic and allows for faster throughput.
Enhanced Web Status Utility
A Web Status Utility for the KN301 improves on the current KN201 utility. The new utility is a great tool for the network administrator because it provides the
ultimate control of Konica print engines from the desktop. Any Konica printer or printer/copier connected to an IP402 (with the KN301) can be accessed via
an IP web browser to both reduce the cost and to increase the efficiency of remote printing.
Web Status Utility Pages:
Main page
Printer Status page
Advanced Features page
Network Setup page
Printer Setup page
Language Select page
Note: Each page displays the Konica logo in the upper left corner of the screen. Buttons appear under the Konica logo to enable users to access all of the
pages, as well as the Konica Home Page. On each page, the Refresh button is available to allow users to make quick updates to the current page.
1. Main Page
The Main Page is a greeting page that displays basic current printer status. "Ready" or "Offline" will be highlighted. If the printer is "Ready," an accompanying
"Ready To Print" message will be highlighted in the Message block on the right. If the printer is "Offline," an accompanying message will be highlighted to
describe the condition, such as, "No Paper."
2. Printer Status Page
Printer Status displays detailed status of the printer by focusing on three separate areas of the system: IP Controller; Printer Engine; and Print J ob. By viewing
this page, you will quickly know whether the status of the printer is related to the controller, the engine, or the previous print job. Should you require additional
information about the controller, for example, click on the name "IP- Print Controller" which links you to a sub-page that displays information about the
controller's configuration. Similarly, the name "Engine" is linked to the sub-page that displays additional information on the printer engine.
a. IP - Print Controller
The sub-page of the IP - Print Controller displays the current configuration of the print controller, including the hardware and software version/revision number,
as well as the RAM and Hard Disk size and the amount of free space available on the Hard Disk.
b. Engine
The sub-page of the Engine displays the current configuration of the printer engine, including engine type, finisher type, code version, country code, display
language, tray configurations and paper count information.
3. Advanced Features Page
Access to the Advanced Features page is available only to the printer Administrator (an Administrator Password is required) who may need to perform the
following advanced functions:
a. Re-program the IP/Engine software via Telnet
b. Send and receive files via FTP View and edit IP Spool Queue
c. Send and receive E-mail jobs Other administrative functions
4. Network Setup Page
The Network Setup page provides access to board-specific pages that are used for setting up and monitoring the printer system.
The market is asking for creative solutions to their document production requirements. The IP402 and KN301 provide more tools to meet your customers
needs. The IP402 uses the same technology incorporated in the IP302. Please consult the IP302 Proguide for more information.
The IP402 uses both RAM-based and hard drive-based job processing technology for increased speed and reduced network traffic, called Konica
1,135
IP-402
Intellistream*.
For additional information, call Kurt Swanke at x2681 or E-mail (kswanke@konicabt.com).
Description
The controller reboots constantly with the latest system software (version 4.1.2) installed.
Solution
CAUSE: The IP402 patch for system software version 4.1.2 has not been installed.
SOLUTION: Install the IP402 patch. The patch (402P3800.EXE) can be downloaded from the Konica FTP site . Refer to the FTP site index for additional
information. Once the disk is created it can be installed in the controller and a beep code will be heard when finished. Print out a configuration page from the
operation panel and verify that the following modules are at these levels:
Startup: 4.2.0
FW0: 1.01/1.04
PED40: 4.2.1
CAUTION: It is extremely important to verify that version 4.1.2 system software has been installed, and that the IP and engine has been initialized
successfully. Execute a test page to be sure. Failure to initialize the 4.1.2 installation may result in damage to the EIC when the patch is applied (i.e.,
installing all 6 disks plus the patch disk in one process). If the 4.1.2 configuration has been in use, the patch can be installed right away.
Note: The 7033/7040 FlashROM version must be at least level 37 (system) and version 25 (image).
Description
KN301, can the KN card be used in a peer-to-peer environment?
Solution
The KN card can be used as long as the correct KN301 peer-to-peer utility is used. There is a utility for IPX networks and a utility for TCP/IP* networks
(depending on the protocols being used).
Use the IPX peer-to-peer utility (IPX-P2P16.exe) for networks that are using the IPX protocol and the TCP/IP peer-to-peer utility (IP-P2P26.exe) for networks
using the TCP/IP protocol.
These utilities are available from the Konica FTP site .
Note: If the IPX/SPX protocol is used and the frame type for the KN card and the network do not match, the card will not be recognized. Set the frame type of
the network to 802.2 (used by the KN301 card).
1,136
IP-411
Description
Solution
Notes:
1. Konica Windows 2000 print drivers are available on the [[Driver selector on the Konica Web Site| URL http://www.konicabt.com/Support/Drivers2/info.html]]
Description
Installation requirements, IP411 with and without scanning capabilities.
Solution
The following is a list of hardware and firmware requirements to properly install the IP411 (Item #950401):
1. The 7033/7040 must be at minimum firmware level 37 (scanning requires level 42) for the system and level 25 for the image board. The DF311 (RADF)
should be at a minimum of level 16 and the FS105 (finisher) should be at a minimum of level 18. A finisher is NOT required for printing or scanning with the
IP411.
2. The IP Upgrade kit (Item #950417) and IP411 kit are required. The IP Upgrade kit is the enclosure in which the IP411 mounts. If the IP411 is replacing
an existing IP402 installation, the upgrade kit would already be installed in the printer.
CAUTION: Use contact fixed plate/K (p/n U135-4590) that is included in the IP411 kit (Item #950401) IP411 board (pcua U135-4510), rather than the contact
fixed plate/K (p/n 127L10040) included with the IP Upgrade kit. Refer to the IP411 Installation Instructions for more detail.
3. If PostScript * is required, the PostScript upgrade kit (Item #950419) is required. The PostScript chip can be installed in either socket U21 or U34 on the
IP411 main board.
4. The KN302 (Item #950400) is the network interface for the IP411. A 3rd-party external print sever has not been tested, and none are not currently certified
on this product. When testing is complete, a bulletin will be issued regarding 3rd-party support. Refer to the KN302 Installation Instructions for more detail.
5. Print drivers for the IP411 are the same as those used on the IP402 with the latest system software installed. The drivers can be found on the [[Konica
FTP site| URL ftp://kbtdigital:kx15@ftp.konicabt.com]].
6. The IP411 comes with 32MB of RAM (Item #950023). The memory can be upgraded by replacing the single DIMM with either a 64MB DIMM (Item
#950807) or 128MB DIMM (Item #950808).
CAUTION: The 128MB DIMM is available, but may cause problems when printing jobs of 50 pages or greater.
Note: EPROM files for the 7033/7040 RADF and finisher can be downloaded from the [[NSSG Web Support page| URL
http://techweb.konicabt.com/scripts/web_access.cgi?FUNC=DISP_LOGIN]].
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
How to update the IP411 system software to allow the scanning option.
Solution
1,137
IP-411
To identify the system software version, print a system configuration page. If any code lower than 4.1.13 is identified, scanning is not available.
As there are currently no utilities for loading system software on an IP411 hard drive, the following instructions explain how to use an IDE adapter to load the
system software by connecting the hard drive to a standard IP controller or PC.
These items are required to load system software in the field:
3. System software 3-disk set. This software can be downloaded from the Konica FTP site and requires a keyboard and monitor to install.
To install the latest system software, perform the following:
1. Power OFF the IP/PC and disconnect the power cord.
2. Connect the HD104 to the 40-pin connector on one side of the adapter and connect the IP/PC's IDE cable to the 44-pin connector on the other side of the
adapter.
Note: Ensure that Pin 1 on the IDE connector and hard drive are connected to Pin 1 on the adapter .
3. Connect the power connector to the IP/PC's power supply.
4. Place Disk #3 into the floppy drive of the IP/PC, reconnect the IP/PC power cord, and power ON the IP/PC.
6. Type "setup". This will run a batch file that formats the hard drive.
=================================C A U T I O N=================================
If the IP411 hard drive is not connected to the IDE master channel, and is not configured to be the MASTER drive, the setup program will format
whatever drive is connected and setup as the MASTER drive.
=============================================================================
7. Once the hard drive is formatted, at the A: prompt type "install" to start loading system software. Follow the prompts on the monitor to continue installation
of the system software.
Note: System software installation starts and ends with Disk #3.
8. Once Disk #3 completes loading, power OFF the IP/PC and disconnect the adapter from the main IDE cable and power supply.
9. Install the 2.5" hard drive back into the IP411 for use.
Description
Where is the PostScript* chip (CPC) installed on the IP411 board?
Solution
The CPC chip must be inserted into either the U21 or U34 socket on the IP411 board.
Note: The copy protection chip (CPC) in PostScript upgrade kits for the IP301 (Item #950771) and IP302 (Item #950800) are interchangeable with the CPC
for the IP411. The driver diskettes and documentation are different in the IP301 and IP302 kits.
Description
PRINTER BOARD FAILURE message when booting after installation of the controller and hard drive (HD104).
Solution
CAUSE: Circuitry on the IP411 board came in contact with the hard drive because an insulating nylon washer was not installed when securing the HD104 to
the motherboard.
SOLUTION: Install the nylon washer (included in the HD104 kit) on the mounting hole in the IP411 board closest to J P7 .
Description
Hard drive (HD104) system software installation procedures in the event of a system failure.
Solution
As there are currently no utilities for loading system software on an IP411 hard drive, the following instructions explain how to use an IDE adapter to load the
system software by connecting the hard drive to a standard IP controller or PC.
These items are required to load system software in the field:
3. System software 3-disk set. This software can be downloaded from the Konica FTP site and requires a keyboard and monitor to install.
To install the latest system software, perform the following:
1. Power OFF the IP/PC and disconnect the power cord.
2. Connect the HD104 to the 40-pin connector on one side of the adapter and connect the IP/PC's IDE cable to the 44-pin connector on the other side of the
adapter.
Note: Ensure that Pin 1 on the IDE connector and hard drive are connected to Pin 1 on the adapter .
3. Connect the power connector to the IP/PC's power supply.
4. Place Disk #3 into the floppy drive of the IP/PC, reconnect the IP/PC power cord, and power ON the IP/PC.
1,138
IP-411
6. Type "setup". This will run a batch file that formats the hard drive.
=================================C A U T I O N=================================
If the IP411 hard drive is not connected to the IDE master channel, and is not configured to be the MASTER drive, the setup program will format
whatever drive is connected and setup as the MASTER drive.
=============================================================================
7. Once the hard drive is formatted, at the A: prompt type "install" to start loading system software. Follow the prompts on the monitor to continue installation
of the system software.
Note: System software installation starts and ends with Disk #3.
8. Once Disk #3 completes loading, power OFF the IP/PC and disconnect the adapter from the main IDE cable and power supply.
9. Install the 2.5" hard drive back into the IP411 for use.
Description
Scanning option information.
Solution
The scanning feature allows users to scan original documents from either the platen glass or the document feeder directly to the hard disk of the embedded
IP. In the process, image data scans through the E-RDH of the main body machine. As the scanned data uploads to the hard disk of the print controller (IP),
the data is compressed into a CCITT Group 4 TIF and stored on the IP hard disk. The data will remain on the hard disk until retrieved by the user from any
connected PC. This process eliminates contention issues because the data does not travel across the network until it is retrieved.
Since TIFs stored on the IP hard disk will remain there until deleted by the user, the hard disk should be considered only as a temporary storage location. If
the hard disk becomes full, additional data may not be stored unless memory space is made available through deletion of existing stored jobs. Therefore,
routine management of the files stored on the hard disks is recommended to keep the IP hard disk capacity from reaching its limit.
The scanning operation is performed entirely from the main body machine using the control panel and new functions on the intuitive touchscreen .
Before initiating the scan to store a TIF, the user will be prompted to enter a four-digit box number to identify the storage location. Several TIFs may be stored
under the same box number, as determined by the system administrator. In fact, it may be much easier if each individual user in the workgroup selects a box
number that will be used consistently, allowing the scanning location to be saved as a favorite on the web browser.
To keep these files organized, each TIF stored in a box number will be assigned a unique file number by the system to allow easy tracking and retrieval.
PAGE HEADINGS AS LEAD EDGE
Insert the page heading edge into the document feeder or align the page heading edge on the platen glass. The engine will recognize the lead edge as the
top of the document. If the document is placed on the ADF in the same manner that is used to make copies, the image will appear inverted at the PC. This
can be corrected through the rotation icon. Up to 50 sheets at a time can be placed in the document feeder.
SCANNING MORE THAN 50 ORIGINALS
If the user needs to scan more than 50 originals, use the SCAN button on the touch screen to store the pages. Press the START key after all required pages
have been scanned. This unique feature provides the ability to scan basically an unlimited number of originals.
SCAN DOCUMENTS FROM THE ADF AND PLATEN GLASS IN A SINGLE J OB
Originals may be scanned from the document feeder and the platen glass in one job. The user may switch modes as often as necessary, since the scanned
originals will be transferred to the hard drive of the IP411 only when the user presses the START key.
ORIGINAL SIZES
Originals can be letter, legal, ledger and mixed sizes. When mixed sizes are scanned together, the user must select MEMORY in the Applications Screen,
under File Edit. The memory function enables the machine to memorize and preserve each size during scanning.
Note: If MEMORY is not selected for mixed originals, each original will be scanned to match the larger size.
PASSWORD PROTECTION
The security of each document is controlled through a four-digit password that is required to scan a job. That same password is required to retrieve the job at
the PC location.
BASIC SCANNING OPTIONS
After the password is entered, the touchscreen reveals a number of basic options from which the user may choose. They include:
TEXT/PHOTO ENHANCE (increase Contrast, Photo, Text, Text/Photo)
SCAN DENSITY (Light/Darkness Adjustment)
SCAN MODE (Originals One-sided or Two-sided, Magnification settings - reduce/Enlarge)
QUALITY (200/300/400dpi, or APS mode)
In addition, there are a number of special application options that can be used as required. They include Dual Page, Memory, Flip Side, Reverse Image,
Frame/Fold,
Non-Image Area Erase, and Upside Down.
Once the document is scanned, the user may go to any connected PC to retrieve the document using their browser.
USING FTP SOFTWARE
In order to "see" the hard drive and pull down scanned images, the user must use Microsoft* Internet Explorer 5.x with its Virtual Machine plug-in (IE version
5.x is currently the only browser that will provide FTP access). This may be downloaded from the Microsoft Windows Update web site at
http://windowsupdate.microsoft.com.
Note: Also download the IE Browsing Enhancements plug-in from the Microsoft Windows Update page.
Type in the URL on your IE 5.x browser, using the IP address of the KN302 network card as follows (where 2311 represents the box number or password):
ftp://scan:2311@130.10.106.222
Once this URL is entered, the browser will display all of the contents of that particular four-digit password or mailbox number. Each Group 4 TIF file is marked
with the Windows* Imaging or Kodak* Imaging icon along with a standard text file (.txt) that indicates TWAIN acceptance. When this is displayed, the user is
merely looking at the content of that location on the hard drive. The file must be stored in a new location before the document can be viewed. Simply "right
1,139
IP-411
click" on the Imaging icon to Save to a File and Copy to a Folder.
The user may store the document to their local workstation on their PC or to a separate location on the network. For convenience and accessibility, it may be
a good idea for the user to create a separate directory or folder for the storage of these scanned images for later retrieval.
Once the open-architecture Group 4 TIF is saved to a separate location the user can simply "double-click" on the icon and view the contexts of the document.
Within the Windows Imaging program the user can view each page of the document as well as have "thumbnails" of each page appear down the left margin.
There are a number of tasks that can be performed within this standard program including: Rotation and Zoom In and Out; there is even an Annotation
Toolbar that allows the user to highlight an area of the document or add a text box.
ADVANCED DOCUMENT STORAGE
To perform more advanced functions for document storage and retrieval such as Optical Character Recognition (OCR) or editing of the document, a
third-party document management software package is required. Since the file created is an open architecture Group 4 TIF, there are a myriad of packages
available to the user. In
addition, if the user has a solution currently being utilized, the chances are that the package can continue to be used. Konica will promote and offers software
packages through our Professional Consulting Group specifically designed for the corporate environment. For more information on document management
solutions from the PCG, please contact Christine Kwik at the Professional Consulting Group at 1-800-456-6422 x4243.
Description
KN302, how to reset to factory settings.
Solution
3. Set jumper OP2 to the FACT position (for factory initialization).
7. Reset jumper OP2 to the NORMAL position.
Description
How to obtain the Macintosh* PPD file.
Solution
The Macintosh PPD file is located within the IP411 PostScript* driver. The latest print drivers are available on the Konica FTP site . The PostScript driver zip
file name is WinPS155.exe. When the PostScript driver is installed in the Macintosh computer, the only file that will be seen will be the PPD file needed to
create the printer.
Note: Refer to the FTP_ user site.txt file on the FTP site for detailed information concerning site contents.
[[Internal Link for Faxing/Printing FTP site information| RUN V:\text\Wordpad.exe v:\text\CBC009.txt]].
[[Internal Link for Faxing/Printing FTP_ user site.txt file information| RUN V:\text\Wordpad.exe v:\text\CBC010.txt]].
1,140
IP-412
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
IP412 printing capabilities.
Solution
The IP412 drivers can only be installed on Windows* based computers running Windows 9x and Windows NT 4.0. Using the optional network interface (Item
#950623), the IP412 supports the following:
Protocols: IPX/SPX (NetWare*), LPD/LPR (TCP/IP*), peer-to-peer (TCP/IP), and NetBEUI
Printing resolution: 600 dpi
Command type: PCL5e (PostScript* is not available)
Description
Can not access the IP412 through the network. BiAdmin* does not locate the network card. The link light on the network card is solid green.
Solution
CAUSE: Failed network card.
SOLUTION: Cycle power for the main body and check communication through BiAdmin. Reseat the connector for the card located on the IP412. If problem
persists, replace the network card (PCUA 950623).
Description
Network card is not seen on the network. 7415 power has to be cycled in order for the network card to be seen.
Solution
CAUSE: NIC firmware bug.
SOLUTION: Upgrade the firmware of the network card. The firmware upgrade and procedure are available on Konica's public FTP site and is available for
immediate download. Refer to the FTP site index and click on the appropriate link to access the file.
Description
How to print out a status sheet for the Konica network card.
Solution
To print out the status page, perform the following:
1. Open BiAdmin* utility.
2. Select Diagnostics on the tool bar.
3. Select Print Test Page.
4. Select Parallel Port 1.
1,141
IP-412
Description
When printing, characters are scrambled or enlarged. Sending the print job again allows it to print correctly.
Solution
CAUSE: IP412 firmware bug.
SOLUTION: Upgrade the firmware of the print controller. The firmware upgrade and procedure are available on the Konica FTP site . Refer to the FTP site
index on the FTP site for detailed information concerning site contents.
To update the firmware of the IP412, perform the following:
1. Ensure the 7415 is in idle mode.
2. Connect the laptop or PC to the parallel port (LPT1).
3. From the DOS Prompt, change directory to where the flash file has been placed.
4. From that directory run the command "copy /b filename LPT1".
5. The 7415 will display "UPDATING F/W". Once update is complete, the 7415 will reboot and update is done.
Description
How to set the TCP/IP* address on the IP412 NIC.
Solution
To set the TCP/IP address, perform the following:
1. Open BiAdmin* utility.
2. Select Configuration on the tool bar.
3. Select TCP/IP.
4. Select Fixed TCP/IP Address. Set the desired TCP/IP Address, Gateway and Subnet Mask.
5. Select Save to Device.
Description
Unable to print.
Solution
CAUSE: Failed printer control board.
SOLUTION: Verify that the parallel port connector is attached to J P3 (upper middle of printer CB). The red wire for the cable should be on the left of J P3 and
at the top of the incoming parallel port. Reseat the wiring harness from the printer CB to PWB-I. Check for damage or pinching of wiring harness. If problem
persists, replace the IP412 (PCUA 950709).
Description
NO PAPER LOADED message when parallel printing.
Solution
CAUSE: The parallel print ribbon cable was incorrectly installed.
SOLUTION: Install the parallel ribbon cable on J P3 (upper right pins) of the IP412. Ensure that the red wire on the cable is to the left.
Description
Is network scanning available?
Solution
Network scanning is not available. In order to scan documents using the 7415, the FK116 (PCUA 950703) must be installed and the TWAIN driver (PCUA
950649) must be loaded on the workstation. Connection is made using the serial port of the FK116 (RS232C with 9-pin D-SUB male on machine end).
Documents would then be placed in a shared folder on that workstation so that other workstations may access the document.
1,142
IP-413
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Replacement procedure for EPROM included in the IP413 installation kit.
Solution
The EPROM included in the IP413 installation kit will be installed in U8 on PWB(C). Previous to replacing the EPROM, verify which version is installed in the
main body. It is possible that the EPROM will not have to be updated if the version is 3.51 or above.
To verify installed EPROM version on non-fax units, perform the following:
1. Enter the Tech Rep mode by pressing Counter, Stop, 0, 0, Stop, 0, 1.
2. Enter 6 for ROM version and press Start.
3. The first three digits of the version will display. Use the Image Darker key to scroll to all 12 digits. The last four digits are the ROM version.
To verify the ROM version on fax installed units, perform the following:
1. Enter Service Mode by pressing Initial Set, Stop, 0, 0, Stop, 0, 1.
2. Press the down arrow until 4) Display is shown. Press Yes.
3. Press the down arrow until Engine F/W Ver. is displayed. Press Yes. The last four digits on the display will be the ROM version. If all zeroes are
displayed, check the EPROM label on PWB(C).
Description
IP413, printing capabilities.
Solution
The IP413 drivers can be installed on all Windows* based computers as long as the system code on the IP413 is version 3.27. Using the optional network
interface (Item #950623), the IP413 supports the following:
Protocols: IPX/SPX (NetWare*), LPD/LPR (TCP/IP*), peer-to-peer (TCP/IP), and NetBEUI*.
Printing resolution: 600 dpi
Command type: PCL5/6e (PostScript* is not available)
Description
How to set up the IP413 in a Macintosh* environment.
Solution
The IP413 is a PCL* printer only and does not support PostScript* which is necessary for Macintosh printing.
Description
Printer memory information.
Solution
The IP413 comes with standard printer memory of 32MB, with the option of getting a 64MB (MU406) (Item #950283) or a 128MB (MU407) (Item #950283).
The memory is additive for a total of 160MB.
1,143
IP-413
Note: The printer memory upgrade is proprietary and can not be acquired through an outside source. It is not exchangeable with copier or fax memory of the
7115/7118.
Description
Solution
TCP/IP format (i.e, 198.169.2.12).
Description
KN305, how to install the IP413 in a Microsoft* Windows 95, Windows 98, or Windows ME peer-to-peer environment.
Solution
To install the KN305/IP413 in a peer-to-peer environment, perform the following:
1. Specify a fixed IP address for the KN305.
2. Ensure that the TCP/IP protocol in installed on Windows.
3. Install the PCL print driver for Windows 95, Windows 98 and Windows ME as a local printer.
4. Right click the new printer icon and select Properties from the menu.
5. Display the Details tab.
6. Click the Add Port button.
7. Click Other, select Peer2Peer and click OK.
8. Enter the IP address of the KN305 in the Printer IP/Name box. A DNS name can be used instead of the IP address. Port Name can stay at the default
setting. Click OK.
9. Ensure that the new port is selected under Print To Following Port and click Apply.
10. Print a test page from the General tab to ensure proper installation.
Description
Microsoft* Windows 2003 Server PCL* printer driver support.
Solution
Currently, there is no Konica PCL driver available for Microsoft Windows 2003 Server printing via the IP413.
Description
How to update system code.
Solution
The IP413 is equipped with a flash ROM and the firmware can be upgraded via the parallel port. The latest system code for the IP413 can be found on the
Konica FTP site .
1. Connect the IP413 through the parallel cable to the PC or laptop being used for the upgrade.
2. Copy the firmware file (*.bin) onto the hard drive of the PC.
3. Power on the main body and select the Copy mode.
4. Open a DOS Prompt.
5. Enter the following command in DOS: copy /b filename.xxx lpt1
Note: For the filename.xxx, you can go to the folder that contains the firmware and drag and drop it into the DOS prompt. The location will auto-fill in DOS.
For example: C:\ copy /b C:\IP413\14bafw129s1\a129.bin lpt1.
6. Press Enter to execute the command.
7. On the main body, the LCD should read PCL6 F/W DOWNLOAD PLEASE WAIT.
8. Once the update completes, the LCD will read PROGRAM COMPLETE POWER SUPPLY OFF/ON.
9. Power the machine OFF/ON to return to the standby display.
Description
Solution
1,144
IP-413
1,145
IP-418
Description
Solution
TCP/IP format (i.e, 198.169.2.12).
Description
Unable to print after installing the IP418.
Solution
CAUSE: Firmware incompatibility between the 7218 and the IP418 does not allow proper communication.
SOLUTION: The 7218 and IP-418 firmware and system software needs to be upgraded to the following levels:
7218 copier version 7.01
7218 fax version 7.01
IP418 system software ver. 1.77
KN419 version 2.05
Notes:
1. These files are available for download from the [[Konica Minolta FTP site| URL ftp://kbtdigital:kx15@ftp.konicabt.com]].
2. If the update utility does not allow communication with the 7218, the KN419, IP418 and the fax kit must be removed from the system and the jumper on
CJ 1 (PWBC/C) must be moved to pins 1/2 before the update will proceed.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
printer is added.
1,146
IP-418
Drivers
Print Processors
3).
BJ Language Monitor
Local Port
USB Monitor
procedure.
Notes :
Knowledge Base.
Description
Scrambled text when print the print driver test page or from an application. Text pages from the web utility print correctly.
Solution
CAUSE: The PCL* print driver was corrupted during the installation process.
SOLUTION: To remove the corrupt print driver, perform the following:
1. Print out a test page of the PCL driver for the listing of additional files being used.
2. Delete the printer icon from the Printer window.
3. From the Printer window select File/Server Properties and click on the Driver tab.
4. Locate the IP418 PCL driver and click Remove.
5. From the PCL test page that was printed, delete the files listed from the designated folders. It is highly recommended to reboot the PC since certain files
will not delete fully and will allow the issue to persist..
6. At this time, load the newly downloaded PCL print driver and verify operation.
Description
Publisher.
1,147
IP-418
Solution
Notes:
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
WINDOWS 2000
1,148
IP-418

new printers.
WINDOWS XP
Description
KN419, what is the RAW Port Configuration?
Solution
The proper RAW Port Configuration for the KN419 is 9100.
1,149
IP-421
Description
What is required to successfully use the PostScript* kit, PS-341 (Item #950320)?
Solution
PostScript Upgrade Requirements:
1. PS-341 Kit (includes 16MB Compact Flash Card and CPC chip).
2. The latest IP421 PostScript and PCL* Compact Flash (CF) files.
3. The IP421 controller requires a minimum of 64MB of ram to use the PostScript feature.
The IP421 is shipped with 32MB of base memory and can be upgraded to a maximum of 160MB of RAM. Available memory modules (SODIMM):
MU-403 - 32MB (Item #950217)
MU-404 - 64MB (Item #950218)
MU-405 - 128MB (Item #950219)
CAUTION:
a. The memory card slot is only designed for expansion of 32MB, 64MB, and 128MB DIMMs.
b. There are two types of 128MB DIMM. One type has 1 tipselect signal and the other has 2 tipselect signals in the circuit configuration. The MU-405 is a
DIMM using 1 tipselect signal. When a DIMM with 2 tipselect signals is used on the IP431, only 64MB of the available 128MB is recognized.
CAUTION: To rewrite the PostScript system software version 5.5.0, the only method available, at this time, is via the Compact Flash procedure.
To upgrade the system software via the Compact Flash method, the following tools are required:
Notebook PC with PCMCIA slot.
Windows* 95/98/2000
PCMCIA-CF adapter- ADTEC*, TDK*, Green House* or other comparable compact flash adapter.
To rewrite the PS-341kit compact flash (CF) card, use the following procedure:
1. Insert the CF card into the CF adapter and then insert the CF adapter into the PCMCIA slot. Use Windows Explorer to ensure that the CF is recognized as
a drive.
3. Format the CF card using Explorer. It is recommended to do a full format of the CF.
4. Copy the latest PostScript files onto the CF card.
5. After files have been copied into CF card, remove the CF from the adapter using the following procedure:
a. Go into Control Panel and double click on PC card (PCMCIA).
b. Select the adapter from the list, click Stop or End and then OK.
c. When the message "You can safely remove the device safely" is displayed, click OK.
d. Remove the CF.
6. Install the PostScript CF card into the IP421 as described in the PS341 installation instructions.
Notes:
1. It is also required to update the PCL Compact Flash card to latest version (5.5.2) when installing the PostScript upgrade. The PCL Compact Flash card is
the card that comes with the IP421 and it mounted on top of the Printer relay board/3.
Remove the PCL card and update its system software using the same procedure used for the PostScript Compact flash card.
2. The latest version of PCL and PostScript system software is available on the Konica FTP site .
3. PostScript system software version 5.5.0 and PCL system software version 5.5.2 and above no longer require to install the HD103 when installing the
PostScript option (PS-341), although please be aware of the following capabilities that are lost with out the HD103 installed;
a. Print jobs can no longer be spooled to HD. Spooling print jobs to a HD can speed up printing and relieve network traffic.
b. The ability to download fonts with a print job is not available without a HD installed.
c. Scanning is not available without a HD installed.
d. The full functionality of PC faxing is unavailable without a HD installed.
e. Password print option is unavailable without a HD installed.
Description
What is required for scanning with an IP421 and a 7020/7025/7030/7035?
Solution
The HD103 hard drive kit (PCUA 950231) and the KN303 network card (PCUA 950230) are required to use the scanning feature of the 7020/70257030/7035
with an IP421. A TWAIN driver is supplied on the IP421 User CD which will allow scanning from any TWAIN-compliant application.
Description
Is Windows* 2000 and Windows NT 4.0 supported?
Solution
There is a new Windows PostScript* driver which allows printing from Windows 9x, Windows NT, and Windows 2000. In order to print using the PostScript
driver the PostScript kit, PS-341 (Item #950232) must be installed.
2. The latest IP421 PostScript and PCL Compact Flash (CF) files.
MU-403 - 32MB (Item #950217)
MU-404 - 64MB (Item #950218)
1,150
IP-421
MU-405 - 128MB (Item #950219)
CAUTION:
CAUTION: To rewrite the PostScript system software version 5.5.0, the only method available, at this time, is via the Compact Flash procedure.
Windows* 95/98/2000
a drive.
d. Remove the CF.
Notes:
2. The latest version of PCL and PostScript system software is available on the Konica FTP site . Refer to the FTP site index on the FTP site for detailed
information concerning site contents.
e. Password Print option is unavailable without a HD installed.
Description
System software update procedure (via parallel port).
Solution
The IP421 is equipped with a compact flash card that can be upgraded via the parallel port. This only applies to PCL only controllers. To rewrite the PCL only
system software, perform the following:
Rewriting PCL system software via the parallel port, by performing the following:
1. Boot the PC to a DOS command prompt or boot from a DOS start up disk. To get to a DOS command prompt, press F8 before the Windows* splash
screen comes up. When the Windows Start Menu comes up, Press Shift F5 to get to a command prompt. Place the copier in printer mode before updating
firmware. Select the settings tab from the printer LCD.
2. Change directories to the one in which the PCL pkg files are stored. Copy the PCL file to the LPT1 port using the 'Copy' command.
Example: C:\copy /b filename.pkg lpt1 (where C: is the location of the pkg firmware file)
3. From the settings screen you will get a message that the firmware is being updated and then a message that the update is complete.
CAUTION: Do not power OFF the printer during the update.
4. When the update is complete, turn the main power switch OFF and wait approximately 15 seconds and turn the main power back ON.
5. When the IP421 is completely initialized, print out a printer configuration page to verify that the system code has been updated.
To rewrite the PostScript system software version 5.5.0, the only method available, at this time, is via the Compact Flash procedure.
Windows* 95/98/2000
a drive.
d. Remove the CF.
Notes:
1,151
IP-421
2. The latest version of PCL and PostScript system software is available on the Konica FTP site . Refer to the FTP site index on the FTP site for detailed
information concerning site contents.
Description
PRINTER INITIALING message after updating system software or after installation of PS kit with hard drive. Reformatting the hard drive does not resolve the
issue.
Solution
CAUSE: Hard drive corrupt/failed or the IP system code on the CF card is corrupt.
SOLUTION:
1. If accessable, perform a hard drive reformat from the operation panel, then reboot.
2. If necessary, remove the hard drive from the IP-421 and boot the machine without the drive installed.
3. If necessary, examine the CF card to determine if the correct files and file structure are contained on the card.
Description
PC/LAN Fax and Password Print hardware, firmware and software requirements.
Solution
The following are the hardware requirements for PC/LAN Fax and Password Print option:
IP421 Print Controller (Item #950229)
KN303 Ethernet Network card (Item #950230)
HD103 Hard Disk drive (Item #950231)
FK101 Fax Kit (Item #950227)
The following are firmware and software minimum requirements to allow PC/LAN Fax and Password Print to function:
7020 System control firmware version 32 and Image control version 28.
FK101 firmware version 17.
IP421 system software version 5.3.1.
KN303 firmware version 5.70.
IP421 PCL* Print driver version 1.5.10.
Note: See to Info Source Bulletin #87-01 for functionality information. . To view the PDF, Acrobat* Reader must be installed. Acrobat Reader can be
downloaded for free from the Adobe* Web site at: [[http://www.adobe.com/products/acrobat/readstep2.html| URL
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
1,152
IP-421
Description
KN303, how to reset to factory defaults.
Solution
3. Set jumper OP2 to pins 1 and 2 (left and middle) for factory initialization.
7. Reset jumper OP2 to pins 2 and 3 (left and middle).
Description
Does Konica Minolta provide an IP421 PCL* driver to support printing in Microsoft* Windows XP?
Solution
To print from Microsoft Windows XP Home and Professional, use the Windows NT/2000 IP421 PCL driver version 1.3.14 or higher.
Note: The driver is available for download from the [[Support & Drivers| URL http://kmbs.konicaminolta.us/eprise/main/KMBS/Support_Center/Home]] section
on the public web site and on the [[FTP site| URL ftp://kbtdigital:kx15@ftp.konicabt.com]].
Description
KN303, how to recover an inactive KN303 network card.
Solution
Occasionally a KN303 network card may become inactive during or after a firmware upgrade. In this instance, the IP controller will not boot with the KN303
installed and will only boot with the card removed. The following is a procedure on how to re-flash the KN303 firmware to reactivate the card.
CAUTION: The IPX recover utility (IPX_recover121.exe) is a Netware-only utility and the workstation it is run from must have supervisor privileges to the
container where the print server object is located. This procedure will only work if the green LED on the back of the KN303 lights when installed in the
controller and powered ON.
FLASH PROCEDURE
To flash the KN303 the following tools are required:
1. Download the IPX recover utility found on the Konica [FTP site] ([Internal Link for Faxing/Printing FTP site information]). The file name is
IPX_recover121.exe and it is located in the KN_cards, Kn3xx_Utilities folder.
Note: IPX/SPX must be enabled on the workstation from which that the flash utility is going to be run. Extract the IPX_recover121.exe file to a floppy or
workstation, execute the setup.exe file and then follow the prompts.
2. KN303 firmware version 5.67 can be found on the Konica FTP site ( FTP site index ). The name is kn3xx567.exe and is located in the
KN301_303_firmware folder under the KN_cards folder.
Note: Extract the kn3xx567.exe file to a floppy or workstation to extract the kn3567a.upd file.
RECOVERY PROCEDURE
To recover the card, perform the following:
1. Power OFF the controller and remove the cover.
2. Remove the KN303 from the IP controller.
3. Move the jumper that is on OP5 to the OP6 pins (also labeled as Bypass).
4. Reinstall the KN303 into the IP controller.
5. Apply power to the IP controller and wait approximately 2 minutes.
Note: When power is applied to the IP controller, it will not boot. This is normal and will not affect the flash process. Setting the jumper to OP6 allows the
KN303 to boot without waiting for the controller.
6. Run the IPX flash utility (IPX_flash122.exe) and look for a card that is called DWN_KON_xxxxxx, where x is the serial number of the card.
Note: If the card does not appear in the utility after 5 minutes, the card most likely is not recoverable. Verify that IPX/SPX is running and the network
connections are good before assuming the card is unrecoverable.
7. When the card appears on the list, reprogram it with the 5.67 firmware (kn3567a.upd file).
8. After the programming is complete, power OFF the IP controller and remove the KN303.
9. Move the jumper from OP6 (Bypass) back to its original position on OP5.
10. Install the KN303 and power the IP controller ON.
11. If a monitor is connected to the controller, wait for the message that indicates the DPO is initialized. If no monitor is attached, wait 3 minutes.
12. At this point, reboot the IP controller one more time and wait for a configuration page to be printed, indicating a successful update.
1,153
IP-421
1,154
IP-422
Description
Solution
SOLUTION: Replace the hard drive (Item #950258) and apply base system code version 5.8.2 along with the 5.8.2n patch. Keeping the old HD107 and only
installing the new patch may or may not resolve the problem depending upon how much the drive was accessed.
Also, a compact flash card hard drive is available to eliminate failures of the regular hard disk. The 2GB compact flash card is recommended for most cases,
as the 1GB compact flash card may not have enough space if the customer creates large jobs.
Note: The IP-422 system code must upgarded to a minimum version of 5.9.0 to support the use of CF card in place of the HD-107.
Description
Solution
In order to utilize Scan to E-mail, the printer must be connected to a network and have a dedicated E-mail server attached (and in the same physical network
segment). Also, the 422NIC must have a minimum firmware version of 6.29c which requires update using the 1.40dFTP download utility.
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
1,155
IP-422
Description
IP422 NIC, how to reset to factory defaults.
Solution
To reset the NIC, perform the following:
1. Remove the IP422 from the main body and then remove the top cover.
2. Locate SW2 and SW3 and toggle them to the FACT position. CUST and FACT are printed in the proximity of the switch.
3. Reinstall the IP unit. Power the unit ON and wait 5 minutes.
4. Power the unit OFF.
5. Remove the IP unit and toggle SW2 and SW3 back to CUST.
6. Reinstall the cover and IP unit and then power the unit ON.
Description
PRINTER INITIALIZING at start up.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Corrupted system code (HD107). The hard drive needs to be formatted.
1. Press the Scan/Print button.
2. Press [Setting].
3. Press [Next].
4. Press [7].
5. Press [OK]. The following message will be displayed: Are you sure you want to format HD? 1. Yes 2. No.
6. Press [1].
7. Press [OK].
8. The following message will display: Power off and restart the system.
Note: If this procedue does not correct the issue, format the drive using Fdisk and format by placing the drive in a laptop PCMCIA slot.
2. Failed hard disk drive (HD107).
Reseat the HD107 and verify that printing takes place. If problem persists, remove the HDD and try printing without it installed. If printing takes place, replace
the HD107 (PCUA 950258).
Description
How to reformat the CF card to VxWorks*-style formatting.
Solution
To reformat the CF card to VxWorks-style formatting, perform the following:
1. Connect the IP422 with the computer via serial port (RS-232C null cable) and startup hyper terminal on PC so that service port becomes ready to use.
Note: Please see the IP422 Service Handbook for details concerning service port .
2. Turn ON main power switch of 7022/7130.
7. After formatting the CF and hard drive, turn OFF main switch of 7022/7130. Remove the IP422 from main body and then the CF from IP422.
11. Install IP422 to the 7022/7130 and turn ON the main switch. The 7022/7130 will boot without issue.
Notes:
a. If the files on the PCMCIA hard drive are viewed after following this procedure by using the PCMCIA slot on the Microsoft* Windows-based laptop, the
above procedure will need to be followed again as it corrupts the drive every time with a 87-3 code. The IP will also keep rebooting over and over.
b. To view a PDF, Acrobat* Reader must be installed. Acrobat Reader can be downloaded for free from the Adobe* Web site at:
Description
1,156
IP-422
IP422 NIC, unable to set the TCP/IP* address or gateway through the operation panel or through the web utilities.
Solution
CAUSE: The IP422 NIC is locked up and needs to be reset.
SOLUTION: To reset the NIC, perform the following:
2. Locate SW3 and toggle it to the FACT position. CUST and FACT are printed in the proximity of the switch.
5. Remove the IP unit and toggle SW3 back to CUST.
7. The password should be reset back to sysadm.
Description
IP422 NIC unable to connect to the Novell* Server.
Solution
VERY IMPORTANT - reset the NIC to factory prior to setting up the device in in Netware:
1. Remove the IP422 from the main body and then remove the rear cover.
Other reasons a NIC may not attach to a Novell server in an NDS queue based prining environment.
1. The SET 'reply to request for nearest server' setting is not enabled.
2. Not enough licenses. The 422NIC acts as a queue server (not a remote printer) and requires a license to broadcast on the network.
3. Signature level not set between 0 - 2. Signature level 3 (packet encryption) is not supported.
4. No autosense. If the NICs are bound to three or more LAN protocols, then the autosense of media type fails. Select a frame type manually.
5. NDS and the local schema are corrupt and need to be repaired with DSRepair.
6. Printer object is not set up as remote/unknown. Wipe all objects and recreate them with Quick Setup - Tools - NWadmin
7. The Disable Bindery setting is checked in the IPX setup on the KN card. It disables everything.
8. Using autosense hubs. The port needs to be set up as a single speed or a single speed hub needs to be placed between the autosense hub and the KN
card.
9. If AppleTalk* is not needed, disable it. Both AppleTalk and Novell protocols are chatty.
Description
As an alternative to the HD107, Konica Minolta is offering a 1GB or 2GB compact flash card and PCMCIA adapter for the IP422.
Solution
The 2GB compact flash card is recommended for most cases, as the 1GB compact flash card may not have enough space if the customer creates large jobs.
Description
IP422 NIC, the password has been changed from sysadm and the new password is unknown or forgotten.
Solution
CAUSE: The IP422 NIC has to be reset manually to return the password to sysadm.
SOLUTION: To reset the NIC, perform the following:
7. The password should be reset back to sysadm.
1,157
IP-422
1,158
IP-423
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
SOLUTION: Replace the hard drive (Item #950258) and apply base system code version 5.8.2 along with the 5.8.2p patch. Keeping the old HD107 and only
installing the new patch may or may not resolve the problem depending upon how much the drive was accessed.
Also, a compact flash card hard drive is available to eliminate failures of the regular hard disk. The 2GB compact flash card is recommended for most cases,
as the 1GB compact flash card may not have enough space if the customer creates large jobs.
Description
IP423 NIC, how to reset the internal NIC to factory defaults.
Solution
To reset the NIC, perform the following:
1. Remove the IP423 from the main body and then remove the rear cover.
Description
Solution
segment).
1,159
IP-423
1. Access the Web utilities using the MAP utility or browse to the address of the IP423NIC.
Description
How to reformat the CF card containing the IP423 operating system to VxWorks*-style formatting.
Solution
To reformat the CF card to VxWorks-style formatting, perform the following:
1. Connect the IP423 with the computer via serial port (RS-232C crossover cable) and startup hyper terminal on PC so that service port becomes ready to
use.
Note: Please see the IP422 Service Handbook for details concerning service port .
2. Turn ON main power switch of the printer.
7. After formatting the CF and hard drive, turn OFF main switch of the printer. Remove the IP423 from main body and then the CF from IP423.
11. Install IP423 to the printer and turn ON the main switch. The printer will boot without issue.
Notes:
a. If the files on the PCMCIA hard drive are viewed after following this procedure by using the PCMCIA slot on the Microsoft* Windows-based laptop, the
above procedure will need to be followed again as it corrupts the drive every time with a 87-3 code. The IP will also keep rebooting over and over.
b. To view a PDF, Acrobat* Reader must be installed. Acrobat Reader can be downloaded for free from the Adobe* Web site at:
Description
When scanning to the hard drive and selecting PDF as the format, the image can not be viewed or retrieved when using the Konica TWAIN driver with
applicable software.
Solution
CAUSE: The Konica TWAIN driver does not support PDF.
SOLUTION: The Konica Scantrip utility will function properly when selecting PDF and scan to hard drive. Konica has developed an FTP download utility
called Scantrip. This utility allows downloading of files from the hard drive to the workstation.
Notes:
1. Scanning utilities (Scantrip and Scantrip Admin) are now posted on the [[Konica SEC website| URL http://www.sec.konicabt.com/main.html]].
2. Retrieving PDF documents from the hard drive can also be accomplished using Microsoft* Internet Explorer version 5.5 or above. Below is an example of
the syntax typed in the address bar of the browser to access the box on the hard drive where the document is stored:
ftp://scan:0001@192.168.2.115
scan =ftp user ID, 0001 =ftp password (box number where documents were scanned), 192.168.2.115 =the TCP/IP* address of the NIC card on the
machine.
Description
Can the default scan file format be changed from TIFF to PDF?
Solution
CAUSE: This feature was added with special firmware version 13-CHT1.
SOLUTION: Upgrade main body control firmware to version 13-CHT1 (or later), and in the key operator mode change the file format to the desired setting
1,160
IP-423
(PDF or TIFF). To change the default file format in the key operator mode, perform the following:
1. Select copy mode and press the help key.
2. Select Key-Ope Mode.
3. Enter 4 digit key operator password (if necessary).
4. Select Printer.
5. Using the up and down arrows scroll until File Format Default is highlighted.
6. Press Edit until the desired format (PDF or TIFF) is selected.
7. Press Return to go back to Copy Mode.
8. Ensure that 25 mode DIP Switch 28-0 is set to 1.
Notes:
a. The latest firmware is available on the [[Konica Minolta FTP site| URL ftp://kbtdigital:kx15@ftp.konicabt.com]].
b. Software Dip Switch 28-0 must be enabled for the file format setting to remain.
Description
What is the part number for the IP423 internal NIC?
Solution
IP423 internal NIC (p/n 13WJ -9020).
Description
IP423 NIC, TCP/IP* address will not stay as set. A default TCP/IP address is listed instead.
Solution
CAUSE: DHCP is enabled and the TCP/IP address has not been set in NVRAM.
SOLUTION: To disable DHCP and set the TCP/IP address, perform the following:
1. Press the Scan/Print button. The Print screen will appear.
2. Press Setting on the LCD.
3. Press 5 on the LCD for Network Setup. Press OK.
4. Press 4 on the LCD for TCP/IP Setup. Press OK.
5. Press Next to go to the next page.
6. Press 6 on the LCD for Enable DHCP. Press OK.
7. Press 2 on the LCD for DHCP Disable. Press OK.
8. Press 7 on the LCD for TCP/IP Address in NVRAM. Press OK.
9. Press 1 on the LCD for Yes. Press OK.
10. Needed settings are complete. Press CANCEL on the LCD to go back one screen.
11. Press 2 on LCD for Update NIC. Press OK.
12. Press 1 on LCD for Yes. Press OK. Main body and IP423 will reinitialize. Verify the correct TCP/IP address on the printed Status Page.
Description
What is the item number for the PostScript* option?
Solution
ITEM 950366 (PS345) is designated for use only on the IP423. ITEM 950343 (PS343), originally designated for use on the IP422, is not compatible with the
IP423.
1,161
IP-424
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
How to use the password print (secure printing) function.
Solution
To use password print, a hard drive is required in the main body (HD103a), the ECM mode must be enabled, user ECM account(s) must be created, software
dip switch 26-4 must be turned ON, and the ECM User ID and password must be entered in the print driver.
To turn ON software dip switch 26-4, perform the following:
3. Select SOFTWARE SW.
4. Using the up/down arrows, scroll to software switch 26-4.
5. Select ON.
To enable ECM mode for password printing, perform the following:
1. Press the Help to enter Key Operator mode.
2. Press the Key-Ope Mode button on the touch screen.
3. Enter the Key Operator password (if necessary) and press OK.
4. Press System/Copier.
5. Press ECM.
6. Enter the 8 digit ECM master code (the default passcode is 00000000).
7. Press ECM ON/OFF Setting.
8. Select the ON setting for (Copier, Fax, or Printer) as desired.
9. Press OK.
10. Make any additional changes to the ECM accounts as desired.
To perform password printing (using the PCL, PostScript or Visual PostScript driver), perform the following:
1. From the document to be printed, select file then print from the file menu.
2. Select properties in the print driver dialog box.
3. Check the password check box.
4. In the ID box of the Password Setting dialog box enter the ECM user account number.
5. Enter any numeric password up to 8 digits in the password box.
6. Select OK.
7. Make any additional desired changes to the print driver and select OK.
8. Select OK to print the document.
9. On the operation panel of the machine, press the Scan/Print button.
10. Press Password Print on the LCD touch screen.
11. Enter the ECM user account number in the User ID space using the numeric keys on the touchscreen.
12. Press OK.
13. Enter the same numeric password that was entered in the print driver using the numeric keys on the touchscreen.
14. Select the number of the job to be printed and press the print button.
Note: The print job will not be printed until the matching password is entered at the main body. The password print feature will increment the ECM user
account.
Description
1,162
IP-424
How to set up SMB (PC) Scanning to a Windows* NT, 2K or XP workstation.
Solution
Workgroup Name of the computer. Use only the name of the computer, do not include the domain name. Make sure the computer name is NOT longer than
13 characters or you will receive N-32 errors.
Description
N54 is displayed when scanning to email.
Solution
CAUSE: N54 is an indication of communication failure between the machine and the email server.
SOLUTION: To resolve the error, verify the following:
1. The email server must be local and in the same IP subnet as the machine.
2. The email server must be configured to relay SMTP email from the machines IP address as the machine cannot log on to the email server.
3. When entering a TCP/IP address in the EMAIL (SMTP) SET UP screen you can not include the unused zeros of the octets. 125.000.001.024 would be an
address for the mail server that would cause an N54 code. The address 125.0.1.24 without the unused zeros will not generate the error and the email will
transfer correctly.
4. Verify the proper DNS entry for the email server on main body.
Description
What print driver is used to print from a DOS-based program?
Solution
Konica Minolta printer/controllers are designed for MicrosoftWindow-based applications. DOS applications cannot take advantage of the advanced features
of the Konica Minolta printer.
Some DOS applications do not have the ability to select a relatively compatible HPprinter. The DNA response clearly states that DOS applications are not
supported by the printer in question.
Likewise, support via application testing is not available for DOS-based applications. For non-core platform applications, DOS, Vertical, HOST, etc.,
enhanced application support will be made available for an hourly fee. An estimate would be provided as to the time involved for testing and feedback on the
results.
DOS applications are not technically supported since each DOS application carries its own set of printer drivers instead of a single driver that the Microsoft
Windows operating systems use.
Therefore, printing in DOS is a case-by-case basis. However, some printing functionality can be obtained using the following recommendations:
1. The application has a driver for a nearly compatible printer such as the HP5SiMX.
2. The user does not select any special function for the HPprinter.
3. The user does not expect to use special modes such as staple, booklet, letterhead, etc.
Description
Unable to set up peer to peer printing on a Microsoft* Windows 98 workstation using the IP-P2P utility version 2.7.
Solution
CAUSE: The IP424 is not compatible with the IP-P2P utility.
SOLUTION: The IP424 has its own peer to peer utility which is available on the IP424 User CD or can be downloaded from the Konica FTP site .
Description
N-32 (N32)error when SMB scanning to a MicrosoftWindows NT, 2000 or XP workstation.
Solution
CAUSE: Incorrect host name for the destination PC
SOLUTION: Properly set the destination PC name. The network name of the workstationto scan to is the host name. To find the host name of the destination
on a:
MicrosoftWindows NT PC
1. Open the Windows Control Panel by pressing the Start button and select Settings=> Control Panel from the menu.
2. Double-click the Network applet. The Network dialog should appear.
3. Select the Identification tab of the Network dialog. The computer name will be displayed in the dialog.
1,163
IP-424

MicrosoftWindows2000/XP PC
Right-click My Computer, select Properties, select the Network Identification tab (Computer Name tab for XP)and note the Full Computer Name.
IMPORTANT :Use only the name of the computer. Do not include the domain name.
Description
N-33 error when scanning to SMB. The shared folder is on the domain server, the user account has full control of the folder.
Solution
CAUSE: Scanning SMB to a shared folder of a domain controller is not possible as there is no workgroup name associated with this server.
SOLUTION: Create a shared folder on a non-domain server or workstation. When configuring SMB scanning on the scanner use the workgroup name of the
workstation/server.
Description
Solution
TCP/IP format (i.e, 198.169.2.12).
Description
IP424, how to disable the main body banner page.
Solution
To disable the main body generated banner page, perform the following:
1. Press the [PRINT] key.
2. Touch [Printer Set] on the touchscreen.
3. Touch [2] on the bottom of the touchscreen for [Controller Set].
4. Touch [OK] on the touchscreen.
5. Touch [1] on the bottom of the touchscreen [Banner Page].
7. Touch [2] on the bottom of the touchscreen [Off].
9. Power the printer OFF/ON to reboot the IP unit and lock in the changes.
1,164
IP-431
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Can the IP431 be utilized in a Microsoft* Windows NT environment?
Solution
Windows NT printing is not yet officially supported. The IP431 is currently only supported in an environment with Windows 9x clients using PCL*. The IP431
can be connected to a network running Windows NT 4.0 Server, but there are currently no official Windows NT4.0 print drivers. To set up the IP431 on a
Windows NT4.0 server, a 'generic' HP* PCL driver must be installed to create the printer share (an HP5si PCL driver is recommended). Once the share is
created, the 7045 print driver is loaded locally on the Windows 9x workstations. In this scenario, the HP5si driver on the server is being used only as a
placeholder for the jobs that are being spooled, and is not used for actual printing.
Description
What is required for scanning with the IP431 controller and 7045 printer?
Solution
The HD103 hard drive kit (Item #950231) and the KN303 network card (Item #950230) are required to use the scanning feature of the 7045 with an IP431. A
TWAIN driver is supplied on the IP431 User CD which will allow scanning from any TWAIN-compliant application.
Description
The controller is not initializing after PostScript* kit (PS-342) a flash upgrade.
Solution
2. The latest IP431 PostScript and PCL Compact Flash (CF) files.
MU-403 - 32MB (Item #950217)
MU-404 - 64MB (Item #950218)
MU-405 - 128MB (Item #950219)
CAUTION:
c. To rewrite the PostScript system software version 5.5.0, the only method available, at this time, is via the Compact Flash procedure. To upgrade the
system software via the Compact Flash method, the following tools are required:
Microsoft* Windows 9x/2000
PCMCIA-CF adapter- ADTEC*, TDK*, Green House* or other comparable compact flash adapter
To rewrite the PS-341 kit compact flash (CF) card, use the following procedure:
I. Insert the CF card into the CF adapter and then insert the CF adapter into the PCMCIA slot. Use Windows Explorer to ensure that the CF is
recognized as a drive.
II. Format the CF card using Explorer. It is recommended to do a full format of the CF.
III. Copy the latest PostScript files onto the CF card.
IV. After files have been copied into CF card, remove the CF from the adapter using the following procedure:
1,165
IP-431
A. Go into Control Panel and double click on PC card (PCMCIA).
B. Select the adapter from the list, click Stop or End and then OK.
C. When the message "You can safely remove the device safely" is displayed, click OK.
D. Remove the CF.
V. Install the PostScript CF card into the IP431 as described in the PS-342 installation instructions.
Notes:
--- It is also required to update the PCL Compact Flash card to latest version (5.5.2) when installing the PostScript upgrade. The PCL Compact Flash card is
--- The latest version of PCL and PostScript system software is available on the [[Konica FTP site| URL ftp://kbtdigital:kx15@ftp.konicabt.com]].
--- PostScript system software version 5.5.0 and PCL system software version 5.5.2 and above no longer require to install the HD103 when installing the
a. Print jobs can no longer be spooled to the hard drive. Spooling print jobs to a HD can speed up printing and relieve network traffic.
Description
Solution
Description
PRINTER INITIALING message after updating system software or after installation of the PostScript* kit with hard drive. Reformatting the hard drive does not
resolve the issue.
Solution
CAUSE: Hard drive is corrupt/failed or the IP system code on the CF card is corrupt.
SOLUTION: To resolve the problem, perform one or more of the following:
1. If accessible, reformat the hard drive from the operation panel, then reboot.
2. If necessary, remove the hard drive from the IP431 and boot the machine without the drive installed.
3. Examine the CF card to determine if the correct files and file structure are contained on the card.
Notes:
a. If the IP/machine boots properly without the hard drive installed and/or the hard drive cannot be reformatted, then the hard drive has failed.
b. Complete a SRF by contacting a Support Engineer via the Hotline. In NSSGs continuing review of support processes, the method of requesting
advanced levels of support have been redefined. NSSG no longer requires that a SRF form be filled out by the technician and faxed. Instead, to streamline
the process and reduce the process time, NSSG will now take all the information live on the phone at the Contact Center. Contact Center Engineers are
responsible for providing troubleshooting support. Most calls are resolved with only one call, but in the event that several calls have been made and the
problem remains open, the Engineer will start the on-site support process by assisting the caller with the Support Request Form (SRF). SRFs are also used
for Complex Installation Support, Application Support, Enhanced Application Support, Enterprise Print Consulting and Workshops.
The Contact Center number is 800-825-5664. Use the assigned NSSG User ID for access and the Support Engineer will be happy to assist complete the
SRF.
Description
System software update procedure (via PCMCIA/CF Compact Flash method).
Solution
To upgrade the system software, the following tools are required:
Microsoft* Windows 9x/2000
Note: The latest version system software is available on the [[Konica FTP site| URL ftp://kbtdigital:kx15@ftp.konicabt.com]].
To rewrite the compact flash (CF), use the following procedure:
1,166
IP-431
1. Remove the CF from the image processor (IP).
2. Insert the CF into the CF adapter and then insert the CF adapter into the PCMCIA slot. Use Windows Explorer to ensure that the CF is recognized as the
driver.
3. Format the CF using Explorer. It is recommended to do a full format of the CF.
4. Copy the latest files onto the CF.
5. Remove the CF from the adapter, use the following procedure:
d. Remove the CF.
6. Install the CF in the IP431.
Description
F87-02 during initialization of the printer.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Damaged interface connector main control board (main CB).
Remove the main CB and inspect the connector which interfaces with the IP431. Thin or cold solder joints may exist. Replace main CB as necessary (p/n
55YA-9300).
2. Corrupt system code on the IP.
Remove the HD103 (Item #950231) and recover it by installing it in a PC. Use a Microsoft* Windows 98 boot disk and the fdisk utility to clean and reformat
the drive on a PC. The following instructions explain how to use an IDE adapter to attach the HD103 to a standard PC to reformat the drive:
a. A 2.5" laptop IDE hard drive adapter. This adapter can be found at most computer stores that sell a wide variety of cables and adapters. One online
b. An IP controller or standard PC. The IDE adapter will need to be plugged into a standard IDE cable that is connected to the master channel of the PC or
c. Use a Microsoft Windows 98 boot disk which can be created on a Windows 98 workstation.
d. Connect the hard drive to the 40-pin connector on one side of the adapter and connect the IP/PC's IDE cable to the 44-pin connector on the other side
of the adapter. Ensure that Pin 1 on the IDE connector and hard drive is connected to Pin 1 on the adapter .
e. Insert the 98 Boot disk into the floppy drive of the IP/PC, reconnect the IP/PC power cord, and power ON the IP/PC.
f. Once the IP/PC boots from the floppy, press return at the date and time prompts to get to the A: prompt.
g. Use FDISK to create a primary DOS partition and set it as active.
WARNING: Do not use large disk support.
h. Format the newly-created partition with the /s switch to transfer system files.
=================================C A U T I O N=================================
If the hard drive is not connected to the IDE master channel, and is not configured to be the MASTER
drive, the setup program will format whatever drive is connected and setup as the MASTER drive.
=============================================================================
i. Remove the hard drive from the PC and reinstall it the IP unit. Allow the IP and main body to completely boot or this process will have to be repeated.
Description
Does Konica provide an IP431 PCL* driver to support printing in Microsoft* Windows XP?
Solution
To print from Microsoft Windows XP Home and Professional, use the Windows NT/2000 IP431 PCL driver version 1.4.0 or higher.
Note: The driver is available for download from the [[Support & Drivers| URL http://kmbs.konicaminolta.us/eprise/main/KMBS/Support_Center/Home]] section
on the public web site and on the [FTP site| URL ftp://kbtdigital:kx15@ftp.konicabt.com]].
Description
Solution
MU-403 - 32MB (Item #950217)
MU-404 - 64MB (Item #950218)
CAUTION:
a. The memory card slot is only designed for expansion of 32MB and 64MB DIMMs.
b. Initial information erroneously indicated that the memory could be upgraded to a maximum 160MB and that 128MB (MU-405) could be used in the
controller.
Note: The memory used in the IP431 is a 144-pin SODIMM module, 100MHz, 10ns or faster, with gold contacts.
1,167
IP-431
1,168
IP-432
Description
PRINTER BOARD FAILURE message after upgrading the system code via the Compact Flash (CF) procedure. Printer unit will not initialize.
Solution
CAUSE: The CF card was formatted to Windows* format before copying the new firmware files to it.
SOLUTION:
1) Connect CF connector of IP-432 with the CF to be formatted.
2) Connect IP-432 with 7145 main body.
3) Connect the IP-432 with the computer via serial port (DB9 null modem cable) and startup hyper terminal on PC so that service port (*1)
becomes ready to use.
((*1) Please see IP-432 Service Handbook for the details of service
port)
4) Turn ON main power switch of the IP432.
5) While "xxxxxx Ext Memory Passed" is being displayed on Hyper terminal
of PC, press the "k"then the "a" keys continually until enter new date appears as described in step 6. If unsuccessful reboot the pc and try again.
6) When "Enter new date(mm-yy-dd):" is displayed, press [Enter] key.
7) When "Enter new time(hh:mm:ss):" is displayed, press [Enter] key.
3) According to CF type (*2), execute partition configuration setting
command.
(*2) CF type is the alphabet and numeric printed on the rear side of CF
at right bottom.
Type Capacity Manufacture Command
HB289016C4 16MB Hitachi cf16h4
HB28C016C6 16MB Hitachi cf16h4
Ex: When HB289016C4, input "cf16h4" then press [Enter] key.
Note) Operation is guaranteed only for the CF in the above list.
9) Type "reboot" and press [Enter] key and restart IP-432.
10) While "xxxxxx Ext Memory Passed" is being displayed on Hyper terminal
of PC, press [k] - [a] keys.
11)When "Enter new date(mm-yy-dd):" is displayed, press [Enter] key.
12)When "Enter new time(hh:mm:ss):" is displayed, press [Enter] key.
13) Type "vxformat" and then press [Enter]key.
14) After formatting CF, turn OFF main switch of 7145 and remove
IP-432 from main body then CF from IP-432.
15) Set CF to the general compact flash reader etc. so that PC can
recognize it.
16) Copy the following folder with files to the CF by using Explorer.
All folders and files in the ip432 folder.
17) Install the CF to the IP-432.
18) Install IP-432 to the 7145 series and turn ON the main switch.
You can check the version by the following procedure.
1) Touch the Setting key to display the main screen. Touch the number
key for Test Print and then touch OK.
2) Touch a number key for Config.Data and then touch OK.
3) Among the version information in the outputted Config.Data,
the following items show the versions.
SYS: 5.6.21 (firmware version)
* Windows is the registered trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and respective countries.
* Other company names and product names are the registered trademarks for
respective companies.
Description
1,169
IP-432
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Is the IP432 capable of scanning to POP3 E-mail servers?
Solution
POP3 E-mail scanning is not available at this time. The POP3 E-mail feature on the 7145/IP432 is for incoming (to the machine) E-mail only. SMTP E-mail is
available for outgoing E-mail and requires an anonymous log-in at the local E-mail server.
Description
What is the password for the IP432 web utilities?
Solution
The password for the web utilities is the 7145 main body Key Operator default password (0000).
Description
How to use the password print (secure printing) function.
Solution
To use password print, a hard drive is required in the main body (HD103a), the ECM mode must be enabled, user ECM account(s) must be created, software
dip switch 26-4 must be turned ON, and the ECM User ID and password must be entered in the print driver.
To turn ON software dip switch 26-4, perform the following:
3. Select SOFTWARE SW.
4. Using the up/down arrows, scroll to software switch 26-4.
5. Select ON.
To enable ECM mode for password printing, perform the following:
4. Press System/Copier.
5. Press ECM.
6. Enter the 8 digit ECM master code (the default passcode is 00000000).
8. Select the ON setting for (Copier, Fax, or Printer) as desired.
9. Press OK.
To perform password printing (using the PCL, PostScript or Visual PostScript driver), perform the following:
3. Check the password check box.
4. In the ID box of the Password Setting dialog box enter the ECM user account number.
5. Enter any numeric password up to 8 digits in the password box.
6. Select OK.
1,170
IP-432
9. On the operation panel of the machine, press the Scan/Print button.
10. Press Password Print on the LCD touch screen.
11. Enter the ECM user account number in the User ID space using the numeric keys on the touchscreen.
12. Press OK.
13. Enter the same numeric password that was entered in the print driver using the numeric keys on the touchscreen.
14. Select the number of the job to be printed and press the print button.
Note: The print job will not be printed until the matching password is entered at the main body. The password print feature will increment the ECM user
account.
Description
How to set up SMB (PC) Scanning to a Windows* NT, 2K or XP workstation.
Solution
Description
Unable to use Scan to FTP feature. Files will not transfer from the machine to the folder on the FTP server. The FTP server log file indicates: 550 Cannot
STOR. No permission
Solution
CAUSE: The root directory to the FTP server in incorrectly input on the operation panel of the mainbody.
SOLUTION: In the file path entry on the op panel screen, define the root directory as \
Note: If attempting to enter the file path to the actual folder located on the FTP server (i.e., c:\konica) an error will occur and will be present in the log file of
the FTP server utility for example:
STOR c:\konica/1493.pdf
asked to upload 'c:\konica\1493.pdf' in 'c:\konica\' -- Access denied.
550 Cannot STOR. No permission.
QUIT
221 Bye bye ...
The reason for this is the FTP server already has c:\konica defined as the root directory. This does not have to be redefined on the machine, in fact, doing so
will result in the machine attempting to place files in a directory called c:\konica\c:\konica which does not exist on the FTP server.
[[Screen shot of the operation panel - Link for internal use only| RUN v:\PDFfiles\AcroRd32.exe V:\pdffiles\scan-to-ftp.pdf]]
Description
PRINTER BOARD FAILURE message with F87-2 and F87-1 failure codes.
Solution
CAUSE: The main body System CB has failed.
Solution: Replace the failed System CB:
To identify if the System Control board as type 1 or type 2, view the ROM version in the 25 mode. System Control Board Type (type1 or type2) will be
displayed on operation panel.
System Control board (p/n 40LA-930x) is a type 1 board and needs to be flashed with System Control firmware 32 or lower.
System Control board (p/n 40L0-930x) is a type 2 board and needs to be flashed with System Control firmware 41 or higher.
Note: ISW tool Ver. 3.48 is available for the new style board.
Description
When the 7145/IP432 is turned ON, it may cause another device on the network to drop off the network. This will only occur on a network utilizing a
192.168.0.xxx TCP/IP* addressing scheme.
Solution
CAUSE: Firmware level 10 will cause this issue.
SOLUTION: Flash the 7145 with the latest firmware. System control firmware level 11 and Image processing firmware level 11 will resolve this problem.
Note: The latest firmware is available at [[http://www.konicabt.com/konicode/PubBrowser/eproms| URL
1,171
IP-432
Description
Printer locks up when printing large files.
Solution
CAUSE: Insufficient ERDH and/or IP controller memory.
SOLUTION: Install additional memory as needed to accommodate the printing of large print files.
The 7145 is equipped with 64MB of memory embedded on the main CB. The main CB has one additional slot that can accept the following memory module,
for a maximum of 320MB:
256MB, MU413A (Item #960405).
The IP432 is equipped with 64MB, and will accept the following memory modules, for a maximum of 192MB:
64MB, MU404 (Item #950218).
128MB, MU405 (Item #950219).
Note: The addition of the FK102a installed to the 7145 will reduce the amount of available 7145 ERDH memory, as it allocates 16MB of ERDH memory for
fax functionality.
1,172
IP-511
Description
Solution
segment). Also, the 511 NIC must have a minimum firmware version of 6.29c which requires update using the FTP download utility .
Scan to E-mail can be configured by using the operation panel or simply browsing to the NIC. To configure Scan to E-mail perform either of the following
procedures:
METHOD 1.
2. Select Advanced Features and the (locate Default SMTP Message Parameters) section.
METHOD 2
1. Press the MODE key to select PRINTER.
2. Press Network Setup on the touchscreen.
3. Press the DOWN arrow until E-mail Setup is indicated. Select E-mail Setup and press OK.
8. In the SCAN TO E-MAIL section, enter an internal E-mail account or E-mail address of the person to be notified if the E-mail is rejected or denied or the
name of the machine (Example7165/IP511@konicabt.com) where FROM is indicated.
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
How to configure and perform the Scan-to-FTP option.
Solution
Preliminary Note: To utilize Scan-to-FTP, the IP511 must be connected to a network and have a dedicated (local) FTP server attached.
To configure and perform Scan-to-FTP perform the following:
1. From the main body operation panel, access the PRINTER mode using the MODE key located above the CHECK and HELP keys.
2. On the LCD touch screen, using the arrows on the right, scroll to and select NETWORK SETUP.
3. From NETWORK SETUP, scroll to and select FTP SETUP.
4. Select FTP PORT NUMBER.
5. Set the PORT number to match that of the FTP server, default is 21.
6. Select FTP TIMEOUT.
1,173
IP-511
7. Set the TIMEOUT as desired between 1 and 60 seconds, the default is 15.
8. Press CANCEL once.
9. Scroll to and select UPDATE NIC.
Note: The UPDATE NIC selection will be unavailable (grayed out) if no changes were made to the FTP PORT NUMBER or TIMEOUT.
10. Select YES.
11. Enter the necessary NIC password. The default is [sysadm] all lower case.
Note: The LCD will display PRINTER INITIALIZING.
12. After the printer initializes, and READY TO PRINT is displayed again, power OFF/ON the main power switch (SW1) located on the left rear corner of main
body for at least 10 seconds.
13. After the printer has come back to READY, from the main body operation panel, access the SCANNER/SERVER mode using the MODE key located
above the CHECK and HELP keys.
14. On the LCD touch screen, select SCAN TO NETWORK.
15. Select FTP.
16. Select ADDRESS MANUAL INPUT.
17. Enter a PROFILE NAME; this name can be any alphanumeric name up to 10 characters long. This name will display in the TRANSMISSION OBJ ECT
window.
18. Enter the HOST ADDRESS; this is the TCP/IP* address of the FTP host server.
19. Enter the FILE PASS (path) by entering a backslant. As the FTP software knows where to send the document, a backslant \ is all that is needed.
20. Enter the LOGIN (username) of the FTP server, up to 47 characters long that may be case sensitive, depending on the setup.
Example: ftp://USERNAME:password@ftp.konicabt.com/
21. Enter the PASSWORD of the FTP server.
Example: ftp://username:PASSWORD@ftp.konicabt.com/
22. This is an optional step - Press the PORT NO. Key, the ENTER PORT NO. screen appears. Enter the port number for the FTP server. This step is only
needed if the PORT NO. differs from the default that was set in step 5.
23. Press the [ENTRY] key to register (save) the information that was entered.
24. The PROFILE NAME will now be displayed in the [SELECT TRANSMISSION OBJ ECT] screen, select it and press OK.
25. Insert the document(s) in the RADF or on the PLATEN GLASS to be scanned and select the desired scanning options on the LCD screen and press
START.
26. Download the document(s) using an FTP utility such as [[SmartFTP*| URL http://www.smartftp.com/download/]] or [[FTP Surfer*| URL
http://www.whispertech.com/surfer/download.htm]].
27. Select a file from the FTP server (remember where you put it) and then download it to the PC. It should now be able to be retrieved and opened.
Description
Unable to send to a remote E-mail address. E-mail sent to local LAN users work fine. The E-mail server is on the local LAN.
Solution
CAUSE: SMTP routing has to be enabled on the local E-mail server to send E-mail to remote addresses. Some E-mail servers are set up to prevent direct
SMTP requests from being routed. This requires the user to validate on the server before remote mail can be sent.
SOLUTION: The IP511 does not have the ability to log onto a SMTP server, and, therefore, cannot send remote E-mail if SMTP routing is not enabled. In
some cases, an exception list can be created for addresses that can have their SMTP requests forwarded.
Description
How is system code loaded on the IP511?
Solution
System code is loaded on the IP511 through the parallel port. The installation method is the same as used on the IP421 and IP431. A PKG file is copied to
the parallel port and extracted onto the controllers hard drive. If a crossover serial cable is connected to the IP511 service port, the software installation can
be observed through a Hyper Terminal session.
Description
ECM print is inoperable with the PostScript* (visual) driver.
Solution
CAUSE: Earlier versions of the PostScript (visual) driver for Microsoft* Windows NT4, 2000, XP and for Microsoft Windows 9x and ME do not properly send
the ECM password information to the IP511 when it is input into the SETTING's dialog box. All print jobs sent using ECM print will not print and the STATUS
is displayed as USER ID DIFFER in the NON COMPLETE J OB LIST.
SOLUTION: The latest version of the PostScript Visual driver corrects this problem. The required driver is available for download from the [[Support &
Drivers| URL http://kmbs.konicaminolta.us/eprise/main/KMBS/Support_Center/Home]] section on the public web site and on the [[FTP site| URL
Note: Be sure to uninstall the previous driver using the either the uninstall program provided with the driver or from the Add/Remove Programs utility found in
Windows Control Panel.
1,174
IP-511
Description
Reasons why the NIC/print server card might not connect to a Novell* NDS server.
Solution
1. (CRITICAL Step) Reset the 511 NIC to factory specs using J P2 on the card, then recreate the objects in Netware* with quick set-up, using different printer,
print server and queue names than were used previously.
2. The SET 'reply to request for nearest server' setting is not enabled.
3. Not enough licenses. The 511 NIC acts as a queue server (not a remote printer) and requires a license to broadcast on the network.
4. Signature level not set between 0 - 2. Signature level 3 (packet encryption) is not supported.
5. No autosense. If the NICs are bound to three or more LAN protocols, then the autosense of media type fails. Select a frame type manually.
6. NDS and the local schema are corrupt and need to be repaired with DSRepair.
7. Printer object is not set up as remote/unknown. Wipe all objects and recreate them with Quick Setup - Tools - NWadmin
8. The Disable Bindery setting is checked in the IPX setup on the KN card. It disables everything.
9. Using autosense hubs. The port needs to be set up as a single speed or a single speed hub needs to be placed between the autosense hub and the KN
card.
10. If AppleTalk* is not needed, disable it. Both AppleTalk and Novell protocols are "chatty".
Description
The PDF option is grayed out when trying to scan to the hard drive.
Solution
CAUSE: Scanning to the hard drive in PDF format requires 25 mode dipswitch 25-0 be set to 1. Also the main body ROMS must be at least versions I51/P36
and the IP511 must have system code/startup of at least 600d.
SOLUTION: Upgrade the printer and controller to the necessary levels and set 25 mode dipswitch 25-0 to 1.
Description
How to reset the internal NIC to factory defaults.
Solution
To reset the IP511 NIC to factory settings, perform the following:
1. Power down the IP unit and remove the small rear IP511 cover.
2. Set jumper OP2 to the lower 2 pins, (bottom and middle) for factory initialization.
4. Power down the IP unit and reset jumper OP2 to the upper 2 pins (upper and middle).
5. Install the rear cover.
Note: Please remove the network connector from the NIC when performing the reset.
Description
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The IP-511 hard drive start up code is corrupt.
clicking on 'Download MSDS, Drivers, Firmware and more'. In most cases ghosting the IP-511 hard drive will resolve the SC49-01 issue.
Note : The IP511 620 20g drive.exe or IP511 620 6g drive.exeimage can be used with a licensed version of Symantec Ghost(version 6.5 or greater)on a
formatted PC or laptop hard drive. These files were created by request for Konica Minolta service organizations who use the Symantec Ghostapplication.
CAUTION : The drives from which these images wer createdare different.IP511 620 20g drive.exe is a 20GB drive image and IP511 620 6g drive.exe is a
6007MB (6GB) drive image. Use ONLY on a drive of the same size when "ghosting" these images to another drive. The upgrade procedure for this method is
contained the attached document.To viewthe PDF, Adobe Readermust be installed. Adobe Readercan be downloaded for free from the Adobeweb site
at: http://www.adobe.com/products/acrobat/readstep2.html .
Ifunable to purchasea licensed copy of Symantec Ghost, please use the standard method of updating IP-511 code.
2. The IP-511 hard drive has failed.
Replace the failed hard drive (p/n 13RP-9040).
Ensure that the system code on the IP-511 is at minimum version 6.2.0. Remove the IP-511 from the main body and inspect the connection to the main body
1,175
IP-511
for any damage or pins out of place. Reseat the IP-511 onto the main body and verify operation. If the service code continues to occur, replace the printer
control board assembly (p/n 13RN-7320).
4. Failed IP-511 memory module.
5. The main body Printer CB has failed.
Replace the failed main body PCB (p/n 56AA-9021).
6. The power being supplied to the printer suspect.
1,176
IP-511 Type-A
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
Description
How to use the ECM mode for printing.
Solution
To enable ECM mode for printing, perform the following:
4. Press System/copier.
5. Press ECM.
6. Enter the 8-digit ECM master code (the default passcode is 00000000).
1,177
IP-511 Type-A
8. Select the ON setting.
9. Press OK.
Note: The ECM mode will count print jobs for the ECM user account only if the ECM user account is entered in the print driver.
To enter the ECM code in the print driver (PCL*, PostScript* or Visual PostScript), perform the following:
3. Select the Setting button (do not check the password check box).
4. In the ID box of the Password Setting dialog box enter the ECM user account number (do not enter anything in the password box)
5. Select OK.
Notes:
a. The document will be printed and the ECM user account will be incremented.
b. The ECM user account ID will now be the default ECM user account for that print driver, each document printed using that print driver will increment the
ECM user account unless the user ECM account is cleared from the dialog box.
Note: 25 mode, DIP Switch 23-1 must be set to ON in order to delete job that do not match ECM passcodes.
Description
Is the IP511A compatible with the 7155/7165/FORCE 65?
Solution
The IP511A is only compatible with the 7255 and the 7272.
Description
Solution
CAUSE: The IP511A hard drive has failed.
SOLUTION: Perform a recovery of the system code using the instructions below. If the problem persists, replace the IP511A hard drive (p/n 14KX-9040).
The IP511A contains an image of the system code on a separate partition of the hard drive. To recover the system, perform the following:
1. Connect a null modem cable (RS232C serial cable terminated in a female 9-pin D-Sub connector on both ends) to the service port of the IP511A and a
serial port of a laptop or PC running Windows.
2. Run Hyper Terminal with a setting of 9600, 1 stop bit, no parity, and no flow control.
3. Once Hyper Terminal is started, power ON the printer.
4. Once the memory test screen starts, press "k" and then "a".
5. The system should start to boot to DOS. Press Enter when asked for Date and Time.
6. At the DOS prompt, type "d: Recovery". The controller will initiate a batch file that reloads system code. This process will take approximately 3 - 4
minutes.
7. Once writing is complete, a message "Recovery Done" will display in the Terminal Session. Power OFF the machine and remove the serial cable. The
system can now be initialized.
8. If the system image is older than current system code, updated system code can now be installed once the printer has initialized completely.
Notes:
a. The recommended file to use when performing a recovery of the system software is the Recovery. bat file. However, there are three recovery files on
the D partition D:\Recovery.bat, D:\VER600\install.bat (same as recovery.bat), and D:\VER570\Install.bat.
b. If the recovery does not complete from the Recovery. bat file then change directories and run the VER570\install.bat file. This will install version 5.5.1
system software (not version 5.7.0). Once 5.5.1 is loaded and initializes correctly, install version 6.0.0 system software and any related patches.
c. If any of the processes do not take place, check the contents of the D:\ drive by performing a dir command. If the contents do not list D:\Recovery.bat,
D:\VER600\install.bat, and D:\VER570\Install.bat then the D: partition has not been installed correctly. The drive must be sent back to the NSSG test lab for
recovery.
Description
Part number for the internal NIC.
Solution
IP-511/IP-511A NIC (p/n 13RN-9020).
Note : In the Parts Information Catalog it is listed as the LAN control base plate assembly.
1,178
IP-511 Type-A
Description
How to configure and perform the Scan-to-FTP option.
Solution
Preliminary Note: To utilize Scan-to-FTP, the IP511A must be connected to a network and have a dedicated (local) FTP server attached.
To configure and perform Scan-to-FTP, perform the following:
1. From the main body operation panel, access the PRINTER mode using the MODE key located above the CHECK and HELP keys.
2. On the LCD touchscreen, using the arrows on the right, scroll to and select NETWORK SETUP.
3. From NETWORK SETUP, scroll to and select FTP SETUP.
4. Select FTP PORT NUMBER.
5. Set the PORT number to match that of the FTP server, default is 21.
6. Select FTP TIMEOUT.
7. Set the TIMEOUT as desired between 1 and 60 seconds, the default is 15.
8. Press CANCEL once.
9. Scroll to and select UPDATE NIC.
Note: The UPDATE NIC selection will be unavailable (grayed out) if no changes were made to the FTP PORT NUMBER or TIMEOUT.
10. Select YES.
11. Enter the necessary NIC password. The default is [sysadm] all lowercase.
Note: The LCD will display PRINTER INITIALIZING.
12. After the printer initializes, and READY TO PRINT is displayed again, power OFF/ON the main power switch (SW1) located on the left rear corner of main
body for at least 10 seconds.
13. After the printer has come back to READY, from the main body operation panel, access the SCANNER/SERVER mode using the MODE key located
above the CHECK and HELP keys.
14. On the LCD touchscreen, select SCAN TO NETWORK.
15. Select FTP.
16. Select ADDRESS MANUAL INPUT.
17. Enter a PROFILE NAME; this name can be any alphanumeric name up to 10 characters long. This name will display in the TRANSMISSION OBJ ECT
window.
18. Enter the HOST ADDRESS; this is the TCP/IP* address of the FTP host server. For example, with the following ftp URL;
ftp://username:password@FTP.KONICABT.COM/, communication with the host server; FTP.KONICABT.COM, is made via TCP/IP, therefore this TCP/IP
address is entered in the HOST ADDRESS field.
19. Enter the FILE PASS (path) by entering the path of the folder the documents will be scanned to. For example, with the following URL;
ftp://username:password@ftp.konicabt.com/, all you will need to enter is a back slash [\] (root of the server). But with a URL of;
ftp://username:password@ftp.konicabt.com/documents/, the file path you would enter would be [\documents].
20. Enter the LOGIN (username) of the FTP server, up to 47 characters long that may be case sensitive, depending on the setup.
Example: ftp://USERNAME:password@ftp.konicabt.com/
21. Enter the PASSWORD of the FTP server.
Example: ftp://username:PASSWORD@ftp.konicabt.com/
22. This is an optional step - Press the PORT NO. Key, the ENTER PORT NO. screen appears. Enter the port number for the FTP server. This step is only
needed if the PORT NO. differs from the default that was set in step 5.
23. Press the [ENTRY] key to register (save) the information that was entered.
24. The PROFILE NAME will now be displayed in the [SELECT TRANSMISSION OBJ ECT] screen, select it and press OK.
25. Insert the document(s) in the RADF or on the PLATEN GLASS to be scanned and select the desired scanning options on the LCD screen and press
START.
26. Download the document(s) using an FTP utility such as [[SmartFTP*| URL http://www.smartftp.com/download/]] or [[FTP Surfer*| URL
http://www.whispertech.com/surfer/download.htm]].
27. Select a file from the FTP server (remember where you put it) and then download it to the PC. It should now be able to be retrieved and opened.
Description
When browsing the web utilities with Microsoft* Internet Explorer, the page is in J apanese.
Solution
CAUSE: The NIC firmware is corrupted.
SOLUTION: Reset the NIC to factory defaults. To reset the IP511A NIC to factory settings, perform the following:
1. Power down the IP unit and remove the small rear IP511A cover.
Note: Please remove the network connector from the NIC when performing the reset.
2. Set jumper OP2 to the lower 2 pins, (bottom and middle) for factory initialization.
4. Power down the IP unit and reset jumper OP2 to the upper 2 pins (upper and middle).
5. Install the rear cover.
1,179
IP-511 Type-A
Description
Does the IP511A use LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol)?
Solution
LDAP is supported with the 7155/IP511 when using Pagescope* address book..1A.
1,180
IP-601
Description
What is required for PostScript* printing?
Solution
The following items are required for PostScript support:
1. The 7075 main body firmware should be at minimum version 31 for Control and for Image. A new version of the ISW program, version 3.25, is
recommended to update the 7075 because the utility also includes support for the FORCE 75 and 7045.
2. IP601 system software version 4.5.0 is required for PostScript support. This software is also recommended for PCL* only systems, as the PCL interpreter
has been updated.
3. The Windows* 9x PCL driver has been updated to version 1.2.23 and the PostScript driver is at version 1.1.8. The PostScript driver uses Adobe*
PostScript driver which can be downloaded from the FTP site or directly from Adobe's web site at [[http://www.adobe.com/support/downloads/main.html| URL
http://www.adobe.com/support/downloads/main.html]]. When installing the Adobe PostScript driver, the installation program will prompt to select the printer
model. By default, a generic PostScript printer is selected. Click on the Browse button and locate the 7075 PPD file (K0601751.ppd). If this is not done, the
printer will not be setup using the Konica driver files.
Notes:
a. The PostScript 3 option (Item #950648) for the Konica 7075 is released, but will be initially on allocation due to the tremendous response for this
capability. Orders can be placed and will be filled on a limited basis until full inventory is received.
b. After loading system code, the PostScript test pages are not shown under the test print menu on the 7075/FORCE75 until a PostScript page is sent to
the IP601 (the PostScript Demo, Fonts and Config pages will not show). Once a PostScript page is sent through the network or parallel port, these items will
always be in the Test Print menu. This issue only occurs after install of the system code.
c. The latest version system software, print drivers, firmware and utilities are available on the [[Konica FTP site| URL
Description
Can the IP601 be utilized in a Microsoft* Windows NT PCL* environment?
Solution
A PCL driver is available for download from the [[Support & Drivers| URL http://kmbs.konicaminolta.us/eprise/main/KMBS/Support_Center/Home]] section on
the public web site and on the [[FTP site| URL ftp://kbtdigital:kx15@ftp.konicabt.com]].
Note: This driver also supports secure printing when used with IP601 system code 5.1.0 or higher. A hard drive is required on the 7075/FORCE 75 for
secure printing.
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
ERROR IN GETTING NODE FROM EUI message on a monitor prior to the completion of warm-up.
Solution
CAUSE: The printer relay board/2 has failed (engine component).
SOLUTION: Confirm the printer relay wiring is secured into the socket of the printer relay board 2. Replace printer relay board 2 (p/n 13J Q-7330) as
necessary.
1,181
IP-601
Description
Can the IP601 be utilized in a Macintosh* environment?
Solution
The IP601 can be utilized in a Macintosh* environment under the following conditions:
1. IP601 PostScript upgrade PS-361 contains Macintosh Adobe* PostScript* drivers for system versions 7.1 or higher (PS version 8.5.1) and system versions
8.1 or higher (PS version 8.7).
2. It has been found that Adobe PS version 8.7 for OS 8.1 or higher is not compatible with all MAC* systems running OS version 8.1 even though Adobe's
documentation states that it is. To avoid possible problems, do not load this driver on a MAC with an OS version below 8.5. It is recommended that the
Adobe PostScript driver version 8.6 be loaded on MAC OS versions 7.5.5 to 8.1.
Notes:
a. This driver is not on the PS-361 CD but can be downloaded from the [[Adobe web site| URL http://www.adobe.com/support/downloads/584e.htm]].
b. Adobe PostScript version 8.5.1 can be loaded from the CD and is located in the OS7_1 or higher folder.
3. If the Adobe PostScript version 8.7 driver is loaded on a MAC running OS 8.1, the following error message may be indicated when trying to create a
printer:
'The application "Chooser" has unexpectedly quit, because an error of type 3 occurred.'
If this error occurs, a printer will not be able to be created using either the Adobe PostScript driver or the Apple* LaserWriter* driver. To correct this problem,
A. Download the Adobe PostScript driver version 8.6 from the [[Adobe web site| URL http://www.adobe.com/support/downloads/584e.htm]].
B. Open the Extensions folder on the MAC (found in the System Folder) and drag the PrintingLib file to the trash can.
C. Install the Adobe PostScript 8.6 driver and restart the system. The driver file is in MAC BinHex format and will require a program like StuffIt*
Expander to extract. This is a free program and can be found at the [[Aladdin Systems website| URL http://www.stuffit.com/expander/macindex.html]].
D. Once the system is restarted, printing should occur normally.
Description
Network scanning firmware and software requirements.
Solution
To enable network scanning, install the following upgrades:
1. 7075 minimum firmware version 51
2. IP601 minimum system software version 5.1.0
3. KN302 minimum firmware version 5.69, but download the latest version from the FTP site.
Notes:
a. All the necessary updates to enable Network Scanning are available on the Konica FTP site.
b. If SC56-04 occurs after installing scanning firmware to the 7075, then set software switch 23-4 to 1.
c. To view PDFs, Acrobat* Reader must be installed. Acrobat Reader can be downloaded for free from the Adobe* Web site at:
Description
KN302, how to recover an inactive KN302 network card.
Solution
Occasionally a KN302 network card may become inactive during or after a firmware upgrade. In this instance, the IP controller will not boot with the KN302
installed and will only boot with the card removed. The following is a procedure on how to re-flash the KN302 firmware to reactivate the card.
CAUTION: The IPX recover utility (IPX_recover121.exe) is a Netware-only utility and the workstation it is run from must have supervisor privileges to the
container where the print server object is located. This procedure will only work if the green LED on the back of the KN302 lights when installed in the
controller and powered ON.
FLASH PROCEDURE
To flash the KN302 the following tools are required:
1. Download the IPX recover utility found on the Konica FTP site.
Note: IPX/SPX must be enabled on the workstation from which that the flash utility is going to be run. Extract the IPX_recover121.exe file to a floppy or
workstation, execute the setup.exe file and then follow the prompts.
2. The latest KN302 firmware version can be found on the Konica FTP site .
RECOVERY PROCEDURE
To recover the card, perform the following:
1. Power OFF the controller and remove the cover.
2. Remove the KN302 from the IP controller.
3. Move the jumper that is on OP5 to the OP6 pins (also labeled as Bypass).
4. Reinstall the KN302 into the IP controller.
5. Apply power to the IP controller and wait approximately 2 minutes.
Note: When power is applied to the IP controller, it will not boot. This is normal and will not affect the flash process. Setting the jumper to OP6 allows the
1,182
IP-601
KN302 to boot without waiting for the controller.
6. Run the IPX flash utility (IPX_flash122.exe) and look for a card that is called DWN_KON_xxxxxx, where x is the serial number of the card.
Note: If the card does not appear in the utility after 5 minutes, the card most likely is not recoverable. Verify that IPX/SPX is running and the network
connections are good before assuming the card is unrecoverable.
7. When the card appears on the list, reprogram it with the latest firmware.
8. After the programming is complete, power OFF the IP controller and remove the KN302.
9. Move the jumper from OP6 (Bypass) back to its original position on OP5.
10. Install the KN302 and power the IP controller ON.
11. If a monitor is connected to the controller, wait for the message that indicates the DPO is initialized. If no monitor is attached, wait 3 minutes.
12. At this point, reboot the IP controller one more time and wait for a configuration page to be printed, indicating a successful update.
Description
Is tandem printing supported by the IP601?
Solution
Tandem printing support (i.e., one IP601 controlling two 7075/FORCE 75 engines) is not available at this time.
There are workarounds to "dispersing print jobs" amongst multiple machines. However, each mainbody must be equipped with an IP601:
1. Microsoft* Windows NT Server running Unify Konica Cluster Printing
Unify is a browser-based printing system that runs on a specially equipped Windows NT4.0 server. Clients attach to the server via a "Unify" print queue,
which opens a browser to the server. Print job features and variations of job splitting can be selected through this medium. The features on the AHT server
are based on the IP601 PostScript* driver allowing users to group from two to ten Konica 7075 or FORCE 75 printers in a cluster for higher print production
output.
Large print jobs can be split and sent to multiple printers simultaneously in order to reduce printing time.
2. A standard Windows NT4.0 server running printer pooling services.
A printer pool is essentially a single printer that prints to more than one print device. The IP601 with the lower IP address will always be the first machine to
print. If multiple jobs are sent, the NT server will start to alternate the print jobs between the units. There is however, no splitting of the individual print job.
The end user just uses a single print driver and redirection of the print jobs is done in NT. If the printer with the lowest TCP/IP* address is being used as a
copier it will still get the first job since there is no two-way communication.
Notes:
a. The printers need to be the same type and use the same print driver.
b. To view the above printer pool link, Acrobat* Reader must be installed. Acrobat Reader can be downloaded for free from the Adobe* Web site at:
PREPARATION
Before beginning, ensure that the following requirements are met:
1. Both machines must have the latest firmware levels for main body and options.
2. Both machines must have the same option configurations with the exception of LCTs.
3. Both machines must have the same settings for 25 mode software dipswitches and key operator memory switches (print management list #2 to compare
software switches).
4. Connect the two machines with a crossover cable (category 5, 100BaseTX ) no longer than thirty feet in length. The cable must be obtained locally.
5. Select the tandem copy mode option. To select the tandem copy mode option, perform the following:
a. Press OUTPUT APPLI on the LCD.
b. Press TANDEM.
c. Press OK.
PROCEDURE
The following is to be done on both machines:
1. Access the 25 mode (power the copiers on while simultaneously pressing the 2 and 5 keys).
2. Select option 1, SOFTWARE SWITCH.
3. Scroll to software dipswitch 22-0.
4. Set it to 1 by selecting ON, then power the machines OFF.
5. Access the Key Operator Mode (hold the Help key while powering ON).
6. Select option 1 (System initial Setting).
7. Select option 3 (IP Address Setting).
8. Enter consecutive TCP/IP addresses for each machine (i.e., 10.10.10.1 for machine 1 and 10.10.10.2 for machine 2).
9. Set gateway and subnet to all zeroes (0.0.0.0)
10. Touch Line Speed Setting then touch 100M Full Duplex..
11. Touch OK then power the machines OFF.
12. Access the 36 mode (power the copiers ON while simultaneously pressing the 3 and 6 keys).
13. Touch 8 (Tandem mode initial setting) on both machines.
14. Ensure that both machines display START on the display.
15. Touch START on both machines.
16. Ensure that both machines display OK.
17. Power both machines OFF/ON.
RESTRICTIONS
1. For tandem copying to function, the copy quantity must be set to 4 or more.
2. Tandem copying cannot be used if ECM is enabled.
3. Will only work with two (2) IP601 print controllers and two (2) Video Iinterface boards - one for each machine.
Note: Instructions for setup can be found in Windows NT4.0 Server Help screens or the Windows NT4.0 Server book.
1,183
IP-601
Description
Can edge-to-edge printing be accomplished with the 7075? This feature is available when the unit is configured as a copier.
Solution
The 7075 PCL* driver will only allow printing to 0.1" from the page edge. This appears to be a printer specification. Printing cannot occur any closer to the
edge of the paper, regardless of paper size. Although, 11x17 Full Bleed printing can be accomplished using 12x18 paper.
Description
Adobe* PageMaker* not printing correctly.
Solution
CAUSE: If the PostScript* driver is loaded under Microsoft* Windows, PageMaker will not print correctly if the PPD (PostScript Printer Description) is not
installed correctly within PageMaker. Although PageMaker is a Windows (and Macintosh*) program, it does not use a PostScript Windows driver in the typical
manner. The PPD must be installed manually on a Windows PC, much the same as it is loaded manually into the System\Extensions\Printer Descriptions
folder on a Macintosh.
SOLUTION: With PageMaker 6.0 and 6.5, the PPD file provided on the Konica disk must be manually copied from the disk (using Explorer, File manager,
etc.) to the Pm6\Rsrc\Usenglsh\Ppd4 directory. Before copying the file, make sure that PageMaker is not open. For a network installation, the path is
different. The program looks for the PPD in Pm6\Pm6user\Ppd4.
Without proper installation, PageMaker may use some other PPD or a generic default, called General. After copying the PPD to the PPD4 directory, start
PageMaker. The (Driver Name) PPD should show up in the PPD selection of the print dialog box. A PCL* Windows printer driver will have its capabilities
under a Setup button. Because the PostScript PPD is being installed, the printer's special capabilities are found by clicking on the Features button.
Notes:
1. See the PDF document PPD Installation For Adobe Pagemaker .
1,184
IP-601M
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Unable to print. The IP controller appears to lock up.
Solution
CAUSE: An irregularity with system software which causes the IP601M to reboot with specific PCL* files.
SOLUTION: Update the IP601M system software. There are currently patches that will update system software to minimum version 5.5.4f. These patches
are available on the FTP site .
Notes:
1. This problem may only occur when the IP601M is first powered up and has come to ready and prior to any other printing/test prints are performed.
2. As an interim solution, print out the IP601M configuration page after the IP601M has come to ready. This may allow the job to print without a problem.
3. System software must be at version 5.5.4 prior to installing the patches.
4. It is highly recommended that the IP is rebooted and an IP configuration page is printed after each system software patch is installed.
5. It is highly recommended that the main body firmware is updated to the latest firmware listed on the [[Konica FTP site| URL
Description
The IP will not completely boot up with the KN302A card installed.
Solution
CAUSE: The KN card is installed in an incorrect PCI slot.
SOLUTION: Confirm that the IP will boot normally without the KN card installed. If the IP boots properly without the KN card installed, install the KN card in
third PCI slot from the top.
Description
What is the maximum amount of memory that the IP601M recognizes?
Solution
The IP601M will currently recognize 256MB of RAM memory. If more than 256MB of RAM is installed or the largest DIMM is not in the first memory slot, the
IP will not boot. If installing a 128MB memory module along with the installed 64MB, place the larger DIMM in memory slot 1.
Note: Supported memory modules are:
PCUA ITEM DIMM
950631 MU-401 64MB
950632 MU-402 128MB
Description
Solution
CAUSE: The printer relay board/2 has failed (engine component).
SOLUTION: Confirm the printer relay wiring is secured into the socket of the printer relay board 2. Replace printer relay board 2 (p/n 13J Q-7330) as
necessary.
1,185
IP-601M
Description
[[GENERAL PROTECTION FAULT message| URL http://techweb.konicabt.com/tpm/media/GPF.pdf]] on the attached monitor when the controller is powered
ON.
Solution
CAUSE: The hard drive file allocation table (FAT) has become corrupted.
SOLUTION: The hard drive must be re-partitioned and re-formatted. To re-partition and re-format the hard drive, perform the following:
1. Create a Microsoft* [[Windows 95 boot disk| URL http://web.tampabay.rr.com/jokrow/downloads/boot95b.exe]] or Windows 98 boot disk .
2. Power ON the IP controller with the boot disk in the floppy drive.
3. At the DOS prompt, type FDISK and press ENTER.
4. The first screen that appears asks, "Do you wish to enable large disk support?" Select NO and press ENTER.
5. Select [Delete Partition] or [Logical Drive] and press ENTER.
6. Select [Delete Primary DOS Partition], press ENTER, then follow the prompts.
7. When prompted to restart, cycle the power on the IP unit.
8. The first screen that appears asks, "Do you wish to enable large disk support." Select NO and press ENTER.
9. Select [Create DOS Partition] or [Logical DOS drive] and press ENTER.
10. Select [Create Primary DOS Partition] and press ENTER.
11. "Do you want to create the largest partition possible", is asked. Select YES.
12. When prompted to restart, remove the boot disk and cycle the power on the IP unit.
13. Reload system software.
Description
What is the order number for the IP601M PostScript* Kit?
Solution
The IP601M PostScript Kit (PS-361M) order number is Item #950610.
Note: The IP601M PostScript kit in not interchangeable with the IP601 PostScript kit.
Description
What print driver is used to print from a DOS-based program?
Solution
Konica Minolta printer/controllers are designed for MicrosoftWindow-based applications. DOS applications cannot take advantage of the advanced features
of the Konica Minolta printer.
Some DOS applications do not have the ability to select a relatively compatible HPprinter. The DNA response clearly states that DOS applications are not
supported by the printer in question.
Likewise, support via application testing is not available for DOS-based applications. For non-core platform applications, DOS, Vertical, HOST, etc.,
enhanced application support will be made available for an hourly fee. An estimate would be provided as to the time involved for testing and feedback on the
results.
DOS applications are not technically supported since each DOS application carries its own set of printer drivers instead of a single driver that the Microsoft
Windows operating systems use.
Therefore, printing in DOS is a case-by-case basis. However, some printing functionality can be obtained using the following recommendations:
1. The application has a driver for a nearly compatible printer such as the HP5SiMX.
2. The user does not select any special function for the HPprinter.
3. The user does not expect to use special modes such as staple, booklet, letterhead, etc.
Description
Printing errors or incomplete print jobs when printing from Macintosh*-based operating systems.
Solution
CAUSE: Although rare, when printing from Macintosh-based operating systems with spooling enabled from the main body operation panel, it is possible for
print jobs to contain errors or print incompletely.
SOLUTION: Remove power from the 7075/IP601 printing system by turing the main power switch on the left hand side of the 7075 OFF. After turning the
power to the printing system back ON, set the spool setting to OFF by performing the following actions:
1. Access the printer menu by pressing the Mode key on the main body 7075.
2. Select the printer menu.
3. Select controller set.
4. Select spool.
5. Select off.
1,186
IP-601M
At this point, printing from the Macintosh can be resumed.
Description
How to print onto 8.5x11 inch tab paper.
Solution
Requirements:
1. Konica 7155/7165 Visual PostScript driver 7.01 or higher.
2. 11x8.5 plus 1/5 cut tabs paper.
PROCEDURE
On the main body:
1. Load tab paper in the "R" orientation into the bypass tray with the tabs facing the front of the machine.
2. On the main body operation panel press the button which represents the bypass tray.
3. Select paper type/size.
4. Select non STD size.
5. Input a height of 229 mm.
6. Input a width of 279 mm.
7. Select OK.
Within the document to be printed:
1. Select file from the menu bar then select page setup.
3. Select the set up tab.
4. Select landscape.
5. Select custom as the original paper size.
6. Using millimeters as the unit of measure, input a value of 2790 for the length and 2290 for the width.
7. Select the bypass tray as the paper source.
8. Select OK (twice).
9. The print driver and main body are now configured for printing onto tab paper.
1,187
IP-602
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
The IP602 is shipped with 64MB of base memory and can be upgraded to a maximum of 512MB. To achieve this capacity, install four MU-402 1B memory
modules (128MB) into memory slots 1 through 4 of the IP602 motherboard.
Notes:
1. Please refer to IP602 Technical Bulletin #1 for complete memory upgrade options for the IP602.
Description
When printing an Adobe* Acrobat* document containing graphics via the PostScript* driver, the document prints very slow and only one page at a time.
Solution
CAUSE: The Pass-through setting is not selected on the print driver. If the graphics contained in the document are EPS (Encapsulated PostScript), the
driver settings can be set to Pass-through and the driver will not act on (render) the existing PostScript information. This will speed up processing time when
printing these types of documents.
SOLUTION: Select the Pass-through setting in the driver in the advanced tab under PostScript settings.
Description
Solution
Description
How to enable the mainbody mixplex and tab printing functionality.
Solution
1,188
IP-602
To enable mixplex and tab printing ensure that:
1. The mainbody minimum firmware versions are:
Control version 14
Op Panel version 20
Image version 20
2. The IP602 must be at system code version 5.7.0 or later.
3. The 25 mode dipswitch 28-0 must be set to 1.
Note: The listed firmware versions are minimum versions. Please visit the Konica FTP site for the most up-to-date version information.
Description
Solution
CAUSE: The printer relay board/1 or relay board/2 has failed (engine component).
SOLUTION: Confirm connections of both relay boards. Replace printer relay board 1 (p/n 13J Q-7310) or printer relay board 2 (p/n 13J Q-7330) as needed.
Note: In most cases, the problem is a failed printer relay board 2.
Description
Procedure for Tab Printing and/or Inserting.
Solution
Tab Printing and/or Inserting procedure using the Konica Visual PostScript* driver
Notes:
1. The 7085/FORCE 85 and the IP602 print controller must be flashed to the latest code and the PostScript option must be installed. Download the required
software/firmware from the [[Konica FTP site| URL ftp://kbtdigital:kx15@ftp.konicabt.com]].
2. The print driver is available for download from the [[Print Driver Selector| URL http://www.konicabt.com/Support/Drivers]] on the Konica website and on the
FTP site .
Description
IP602 or IP602M will not boot.
Solution
CAUSE: IP602 DC power supply failure. No DC output.
SOLUTION: Replace the DC power supply (p/n 13MP84510).
Description
Macintosh* OS 10.2.x printer driver.
Solution
A Konica Minolta driver for the IP602/M is available for Macintosh* OS 10.2.x.
The driver is available for download from the Konica Minolta [[Print Driver Selector| URL http://techweb.konicabt.com/DownloadSelector/Search.aspx]] and on
the Konica Minolta NSSG FTP site .
Notes:
1. The IP602/M NIC (KN306) firmware must be upgraded to minimum version 6.33i, this file is available for download from the Konica Minolta NSSG FTP
site.
2. The IP602/M printer files must NOT be extracted (unstuffed) on a Windows* OS as this may corrupt the files for use on the Macintosh* system.
3. Previous versions of the PDE and IP602 driver files must be removed from the Macintosh* 10.2.x system prior to installation. Please refer to the Uninstall
PDF files for the uninstall procedures.
Description
IP602M, abnormal noise (buzzing sound) that will not stop after boot-up. This does not apply to the IP602.
Solution
CAUSE: The IP602M does not have a DUAL BIOS motherboard (like the IP602). If the BIOS settings were changed by the technician or through an
electrical malfunction they must be reset manually.
1,189
IP-602
SOLUTION: Select "LOAD OPTIMIZED DEFAULTS" from the CMOS Setup utility (at power-up, press delete to access the BIOS or CMOS settings).
Following making these settings, press F10 and save.
Note: At reboot, the speaker will continue to make an abnormal sound.
After loading optimized defaults the following IP602M BIOS settings will need to be changed:
STANDARD CMOS FEATURES:
Halt On All, But Keyboard
ADVANCED BIOS FEATURES
Boot Up Floppy Seek Enabled
ADVANCED CHIPSET FEATURES
AGP Device 4K Support Disabled
INTEGRATED PERIPHERALS
Init Display First Onboard/AGP
AC BACK Function Full-On
POWER MANAGEMENT SETUP
PME event wake up Enabled
PnP/PCI CONFIGURATIONS
Resources Controlled By Auto
PCI1 IRQ Assignment 12
PC HEALTH STATUS
CPU Warning temperature 90 C/194 F
CPU fan fail Warning Enabled
Power fan failure Warning Enabled
System fan failure Warning Enabled
FREQUENCY/VOLTAGE CONTROL
CPU Host Clock Control Disabled
After making these settings press F10 to save and reboot.
Note: Please confirm that the PCI slot boards are installed as follows:
Firewire card - top
KN306 - middle
Parallel card - bottom
1,190
IP-711
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Installation Guide, IP711.
Solution
IP711 Installation Guide .
Description
Solution
TCP/IP format (i.e, 198.169.2.12).
Description
"J ob has been done improperly, check the record" message on the operation control panel when printing, with Copy Track turned on and using an IP-711
controller.
Solution
CAUSE: With Copy Track enabled there is no Access number assigned in the driver or the Access number box has not been check off. (Enabled).
SOLUTION: With Copy Track enabled on the copier, check the IP-711 driver to ensure there is an Access number and it is enabled, (checked off). Perform
the following steps.
1. Right click on the driver and select Properties.
2. Click on Printing Preference.
3. Select the J ob Management tab.
4. Check off the Access Code box (enable It.) and put in the corresponding Acess Number which was assigned when set up Copy Track on the copier.
Example, 001,002,003, etc.
Description
How to change the default settings for the Scan Mode.
Solution
To specify the default settings of the Scan Mode, perform the following:
1. Press the [Scan] key on the copier operation panel to enter the Scan Mode.
2. Select the setting to make the default value in the Scan Mode.
3. Press the [Utility] key.
4. Touch the [Input] key.
1,191
IP-711
5. Touch the [Reset Mode] key.
6. Touch [Scan] followed by [Set-up Mode].
7. Touch [OK].
Note: You can set the default settings of the Scan Mode to factory default by touching [Factory Default].
Description
User's Manual, IP711.
Solution
IP711 User's Manual .
Description
'C:\WINNT\Explorer.exe' error window is displayed when attempting to select the printer properties of the PCL5c driver on a Microsoft* Windows NT or
Windows 2000 client.
Solution
CAUSE: This issue may appear immediately following the installation of Microsoft's service pack (SP4) for Windows NT or Windows 2000 operating systems.
SOLUTION: Download the revised PCL5c printer driver, version 2.02 (filename: 13zbdr2k202s1.exe) from Konica's FTP site [[Print Driver Selector| URL
http://www.konicabt.com/Support/Drivers]] on the Konica website and on the FTP site .
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
printer is added.
1,192
IP-711
Drivers
Print Processors
3).
BJ Language Monitor
Local Port
USB Monitor
procedure.
Notes :
Knowledge Base.
Description
Publisher.
Solution
1,193
IP-711
Notes:
1,194
IP-901
Description
Printing to the IP901 controller through Microsoft* Windows 2000 is slow.
Solution
CAUSE: There is a problem with the standard TCP/IP* port implementation in Windows 2000 and possibly Windows XP. The Windows port monitor is
waiting for an ack (response) from the printer within a preset amount of time and will not send the next packet until receiving the ack. Controllers that are
running Windows seem to be mostly affected by this. Embedded Fiery controllers are running LINUX* and do not seem to have an issue.
SOLUTION: There is a temporary fix for this that is currently only available by calling Microsoft. Microsoft Knowledge Base Article - 816627. This fix is
specific to Windows 2000 only. Konica Minolta cannot provide this patch as it is only available by directly contacting Microsoft and requesting it. It is not
publically available for download. An easier workaround is to load the "Print Services for Unix" on Windows 2000 . To install "Print Services for Unix",
1. Click on Start = Settings = Control Panel.
2. Start "Add Remove Programs" and select "Windows Components".
3. From the "Windows Components" list, select "Other network file and print services" . "Print Services for Unix" is the only selection available from that list.
4. Once loaded, this will add "LPR port" to the ports list when adding a new printer port.
5. When selecting an LPR port, the top line of the LPR port dialog box is the TCP/IP address of the Fiery and the bottom line is the queue to be printed to.
The choices for the bottom line would be print, direct, or hold.
Notes:
a. Printing with the LPR port should be significantly faster on a 100BaseT network when sending large files.
b. The latest version of [[Windows Media Player| URL http://www.microsoft.com/windows/windowsmedia/download/default.asp]] must be installed to view
the above link.
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
How to make booklets on the 8050/IP901 with version 1.1 system code.
Solution
Booklet mode settings vary slightly, depending on the application being used.
8050 IP-901 Booklet Mode V1.1 System Code document.
These instructions illustrate the specific application and driver settings required to make a booklet on 8.5x11 or 11x17 paper, 12 X 18 is not supported as a
printer function.
Note: These instructions are specific to version 1.1 system code and do not apply to version 1.0.
Booklet mode settings vary slightly, depending on the application being used. Updated instructions can be found in the 8050 IP-901 Booklet Mode V1.1
System Code document. These instructions illustrate the specific application and driver settings required to make a booklet on 8.5x11 or 11x17 paper.
Notes:
1. These instructions are specific to version 1.1 system code and do not apply to version 1.0.
Description
1,195
IP-901
Failure to properly print booklets from Pagemaker* version 6.5 or version 7.
Solution
This feature is not supported when printing from any version of Pagemaker* due to a problem with Pagemakers interaction with the PPD file that is installed in
Pagemakers PPD4 folder. Booklets must be setup in the application and sent to the printer as a normal print job for finishing.
There is a workaround for this issue that may allow booklet mode to function correctly. This is only for Windows based systems. This workaround should in no
way be considered a fix for this issue and is completely unsupported. No support can be given for any booklet mode print job from Pagemaker to the 8050
with an IP-921 or IP-901 controller running 1.0 or 1.1 system code.
1. Move all of the ppd files from the USENGLSH/PPD4 into another folder. It doesn't matter where, as long as there are no PPD files left in the PPD4 folder.
Or you can rename the PPD4 folder.
2. Launch Pagemaker and open your document. When you select "Print" from the file menu, an error will occur which states: "Output may not look as
expected", "No valid PPD files were found. Check the PPD4 directory in USENGLSH". Ignore this error and press Continue. If the 8050 is not the default
driver, select it. This error will occur again. Press continue if the error comes up.
3. Press the "Setup" button. This will launch the normal GUI interface of the Fiery driver. You can now make any driver selection that would normally be
selectable from any application. This also includes being able to select features that were not part of the PPD file. i.e. Secure Print, User ID, etc...
Description
The EFI* Color Profiler Kit is not working correctly with some of the add-on packages for the IP901. If using the ES-1000 for calibration, the device is
recognized by the controller. If running the Spot-On program, the ES-1000 is not recognized by the controller.
Solution
CAUSE: ColorWise* Pro Tools version 3.2.24 is installed. This is the version that comes with the IP901.
SOLUTION: The latest Color Profiler Kits from EFI* are shipping with Color Profiler software version 1.5 and have an updated version of firmware from earlier
units. This version of firmware v1.02 is incompatible with soft features of v3.2.24 ColorWise Pro Tools. EFI has released an updated version of Command
Workstation* v4.1.0.45 which comes bundled with v3.2.36 ColorWise Pro Tools. This version of Command Workstation has been posted on the Konica
Minolta FTP site . This update should address issues using the Graphics Art package on the IP901.
Description
What is the password for entering the IP901 with a FACI kit?
Solution
The password is: 'Fiery.1'. The password is case sensitive.
Description
How to secure the IP901 against future virus and worm attacks.
Solution
Security hotfixes will only protect against current virus or worm threats, but may not prevent future attacks if a new vulnerability is found in the Microsoft*
Windows operating system. If TCP/IP* port filtering is enabled on the controller, port access can be controlled, so it is less likely a new virus or worm can get
into the controller. To enable port filtering, access to the Windows desktop on the IP901 is required. This can be accomplished two ways. If a FACI kit is
installed or by enabling Remote Desktop.
Konica Minolta has posted a patch on the Konica Minolta FTP site that will enable Remote Desktop. Download the patch and the instruction file
S300_Port_Configuration.pdf. The instruction file will explain how to enable and use Remote Desktop. It also details how to enable and configure port
filtering on the IP901. Screen shots are included to illustrate each item, as it is difficult to explain these concepts using just text.
Description
How to automatically update Microsoft* security patches on the IP-901.
Solution
EFI has released the new System Updates Utility (patch 1-H23O1 ) for the IP901/S300. The System Updates Utility allows automatic updates of all
Microsoft security patches that have been approved by EFI. This patch is available for download from the [[Konica Minolta FTP site| URL
ftp://kbtdigital:kx15@ftp.konicabt.com]]. This patch requires the use of the FACI kit or Remote Desktop for manual updates, or can be configured through a
web browser for automatic updates. The System Updates Utility will not automatically install normal Fiery system code patches, these will need to be installed
manually following their normal installation procedures.
1,196
IP-901
Description
Can the new Version 2.0 System 6 SP1 be used to upgrade an existing IP-901 that is running Version 1.1 code?
Solution
The new Version 2.0 code is shipping on new IP-901 controllers, but cannot be loaded on an existing Version 1.1 system unless the upgrade kit is purchased,
KM P/N 7640001347. Do not install Version 2.0 code unless you have this upgrade kit as it will render your controller inoperable. The new Version 2.0 code
requires a modification to the bios to function. The upgrade kit includes a dongle which modifies the bios for use with System 6 SP1. If the bios is not
upgraded, the controller will not function with the new system code. The version 2.0 upgrade also requires a minimum of 1GB of RAM be installed in the
IP-901. Do not upgrade to v2.0 unless the controller currently has 1 GB or is being upgraded to 1 GB of RAM.
Description
How to select center fold and staple using 12x18 paper size with the Fiery* 50C-M PostScript* printer driver version 1.1.
Solution
A bug was reported and a correction was provided. Please obtain the new IP-901 Special patch and PPD : 1-I63F9.
The file configuration of the special patch is as follows.
- 1-I63F9.ps : Special patch file
- 20auppdmac1i63f9s1.sit : Special PPD file for Macintosh
- 20auppdwin1i63f9s1.zip : Special PPD file for Windows
- readme_e.txt : Readme file
1,197
IP-921
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Not booting after new installation; unable to see the controller icon or the details when pressing the PRINT button on the operation panel.
Solution
CAUSE: The IP921 controller is unable to boot or communicate with the machine.
SOLUTION: Reseat the connectors on the controller and check for bent pins on the hard drive connector.
Description
Intermittent CONTROLLER OPERATING or READY TO COPY/ALIGN THE ORIGINAL ON RADF message. The SCAN MODE function can not be selected
from the operation panel with the IP-921 connected.
Solution
CAUSE: System code firmware bug.
SOLUTION: A patch upgrade is needed for the IP-921 to prevent this issue. This patch file is the 1-G1R12.exe (attached).Thepatch is alsoavailable via the
Konica Minolta Download Selector. Access the Selector from SSD Web Support (CS Expert Support) by clicking on 'Download MSDS, Drivers, Firmware and
more'.
Note : Main body must have at least version 50 firmware loaded to apply this patch.
Description
IP921 locks up randomly.
Solution
CAUSE: Wrong type memory installed.
SOLUTION: If p/n 7640000106 (256Mb DIMM) is used in the IP921 it will cause lockup issues. Please remove this memory and use p/n 7640000801
(256Mb DIMM).
Notes:
1. The 7640000106 DIMM can be identified by the word "CANRAM" printed on the circuit board.
2. If the 7640000106 DIMM was ordered for the IP921 it can be returned for replacement with the correct DIMM free of charge using the standard warranty
RA process.
Description
IP921 installation instructions.
Solution
IP921 Installation Procedure.
1,198
IP-921
Description
How to make 11x17 inch booklets from Microsoft* Word with the IP921.
Solution
To make 11x17 inch booklets from Microsoft Word, perform the following:
1. Go to page setup in Word.
2. Change the paper size to 8.5x11R under Page Setup.
3. Verify this setting applied to the whole document.
4. Access print driver properties from Word.
5. Change Page Size under Paper Source to 8.5x11R.
7. Change Printsize to 11x17.
8. Set Duplex to Top-Top.
9. Set Booklet to Left Binding.
10. Uncheck the Imposition Reduction checked box.
11. Set Stapling Mode to Center.
12. Set Folding =Center Fold.
Description
Operation panel lockup only when equipped with the IP921 embedded controller.
Solution
CAUSE: System code firmware bug.
A patch upgrade is needed for the IP921 to prevent this issue. This patch file can be found in the scanner_lockup_patch folder located on the Konica FTP
site .
Note: This patch must be used with firmware version 50 on the main body. The patch is not functional with firmware levels below 50.
Description
Printed jobs are printing out without an ECM password.
Solution
CAUSE: Dipswitch 23-1 is set to 0 (OFF) in the 25 mode.
SOLUTION: Set dipswitch 23-1 to a 1(ON) in the 25 mode.
Description

Solution

Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
1,199
IP-921
Solution

1xx Informational

2xx Success

3xx Redirection

4xx Client Error

5xx Server Error

1,200
ISWTrns
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
The USB selection is "grayed out" on the ISWTRNS utility (version 3.67e) on MicrosoftVISTA workstations.
Solution
CAUSE: The installed version of ISWTrns utility is incompatible with the VISTA workstation.

SOLUTION: Install the latest version of ISWTrns (3.73E) which supports this operating system. The latest utility is available via the Konica Minolta
Download Selector. Access the Selector from SSD Web Support (CS Expert Support) by clicking on 'Download MSDS, Drivers, Firmware and more'.
SPECIAL NOTE : Solution contribution by Ron Reed, ESS/SSD
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
When installing the ISWTRNS utility on a MicrosoftWindows Vista PC, the USB selection is greyed out.

Solution
CAUSE: Incorrect setup procedure.

SOLUTION: Procedure:
1. With the utility closed, plug in USB connector into PC andMFP in the powerON idle state. 2. When prompted to install the correct Konica Minolta USB
driver, select YES, install.
3. Once installed correctly, right-click the ISWTRNS icon on the desktop.
4.Select Properties/Compatibility tab.
5.Under Compatibility mode, check "Run this program in compatiblity mode for Windows XP (SP2)".
6. Then check "Run this program as an administrator". Press Apply.
7.Select "Show settings for all users".
8.Select Continue.
9.Under Compatibility mode, check "Run this program in compatiblity mode for Windows XP (SP2)".
10.Then check "Run this program as an administrator". Press Apply.
11. Open the ISWTRNS utility and select Allow.
12.In the utility select the Setting button and set communication. The USB selection should now be available for use.
Note : A MicrosoftWindows Vista version of the ISWTRNS utilitywillbe available in the future.
1,201
KL-3015
Description
What telephone number do customers call for technical support on their unit?
Solution
The number customers call is (800) 934-2679.
Description
A RUNDLL32 error is displayed on the workstation when the KL3015 PCL* driver is selected or when a PCL print job is sent to the printer.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The KL3015 PCL driver is corrupted due to open software applications during the driver installation. Follow this procedure before reloading the KL3015
PCL print driver:
a. Delete the current KL3015 printer icon from the Printer window.
b. Delete the following files from the directory C:\WINDOWS\SYSTEM\
KO301510.PDD
PPGPRINT.INI
EFGNPCL1.DRV or EFGNPCL2.DRV
EFGNDLG1.DLL or EFGNDLG2.DLL
EFGNPLAY.EXE
EFGN5FX1.DLL or EFGN5FX2.DLL
TAB16D20.DLL
c. Before installing the driver ensure that all software applications are closed. This includes any virus protection software, toolbars, or any other programs
that maybe running in the background. We recommend running the Task Manager to view any TSR programs. In some cases, temporarily disabling Print
and File Sharing may be required while loading the driver.
d. Install the new print driver using the Add Printer Wizard.
2. A program was added to the PC that is conflicting with the print driver. As a test, uninstall any newly added software that may be interfering with the print
driver.

Description
TEST FAILED. EFI DIMM type IB0x1823.
Solution
CAUSE: Failed or corrupted PostScript* DIMM.
SOLUTION: Replace the DIMM (PCUA 950039) or install the files from the KL3015 Support CD-ROM (p/n 3015SUPTCD-1.0) and flash the DIMM.
Description
Are the Konica print drivers currently supported in a Microsoft* Windows 2000 environment?
Solution
The KL3015 supports Windows 2000 PostScript* printing. The Postscript print driver is part of Windows 2000. Windows 2000 PCL* printing is not supported.
Description
Poor print quality.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Dirty laser optic glass. Clean laser optic glass by sliding the write unit glass cleaning knob fully back and forth one time. Be sure to return the cleaning
knob back to its original position marked by a triangle (left side)
2. Dirty paper charging brush. Clean the drum charging wire by sliding the main wire cleaning knob back and forth several times. Be sure to return the
cleaning knob to its original position marked by a triangle (left side).
3. Dirty transfer roller. Replace the transfer maintenance kit (PCUA 950035).
4. Light density is caused by a high content of moisture in paper. Replace paper with paper from an unopened ream of paper.
1,202
KL-3015
5. Install firmware level 21.1. This firmware helps correct for yellow toner reproduction. Level 21.1 EPROM is available from Konica's website
(www.konicabt.com) as 3015-21A.EXE and through the Parts Distribution Center as p/n 3015102-21.1.
[[Internal Link containing KL3015 image quality/error code information.| RUN V:\text\Wordpad.exe v:\text\CBC003.txt]]
Latest EPROM level and [[Internal Link for Faxing/Printing current KL3015 EPROM information.| RUN V:\text\Wordpad.exe v:\text\newrom\3015.txt]]
Description
Cannot print from Windows* NT 4.0 Server. The KL3015 was just installed.
Solution
CAUSE: The KL3015 and NT 4.0 Server needs to have TCP/IP* and an LPR port set on the NT Server for network printing.
SOLUTION: Enable TCP/IP and create a LPR port on the NT 4.0 Server.
Note: The TCP/IP Protocol and Microsoft* TCP/IP Printing software should already be installed on the Windows NT workstation.
To setup TCP/IP and LPR printing for Windows NT 4.0, perform the following steps.
1. Open the Printer Properties dialog box for the KL3015. Click Ports to display the Ports property tab.
2. Click Add Port. The available port types are displayed.
3. Select LPR Port and click New Port. If the LPR port is not listed, install the TCP/IP protocols. For details, see your Windows NT documentation.
4. In the Add LPR compatible printer dialog box, enter the IP address of the KL3015. If your network uses Domain Name Services (DNS), enter the DNS
name assigned to the KL3015 instead of the IP address.
5. Press Tab and type the internal name of the Konica KL3015 in lowercase letters. The name must be one of these:
xjdirect
xjprint (Use this internal name only if your printer has a hard disk drive and a minimum of 32MB of memory.)
Note: Type this name exactly as shown; it is required for communication with the KL3015.
6. Click OK. The workstation checks the address or DNS name that you entered and notifies you if it cannot resolve the address.
7. Close the Printer Ports dialog box. The Ports property tab shows the new port configuration.
8. Click OK to close the Ports property tab. The new port has been configured. You should now print a test page to verify the connection.
9. Open the Printer Properties dialog box for the KL3015. Click General to display the General property tab and click Print Test Page.
When you print, your PCL files are transmitted over the LPR Port connection to the KL3015.
10. Click OK to exit the Printer Properties dialog box.
See pages 1-17 to 1-19 in the KL3015 User's Manual.
Description
Macintosh* compatibility.
Solution
The KL3015 supports Macintosh Operating Systems v7.5x, 7.6x & 8. The KL3015 will work with a Macintosh in a networked environment. The KL3015
requires an optional ethernet or token ring network interface card to be networked. Macintosh drivers are available on the KL3015 User's Software & Utilities
Cdrom that comes with the printer.
Notes:
1. The KL3015 cannot be directly connected to a Macintosh. The KL3015 must be networked to be used by a Macintosh. An option is to create a small
ethernet network by putting an ethernet card in the Macintosh computer and an ethernet card in the KL3015. The Macintosh and the KL3015 can then be
connected using a four port ethernet hub.
2. PostScript* must be installed on the printer as the Macintosh only supports PostScript printing.
Description
How to verify the PostScript* option is installed.
Solution
Verify the PostScript option by printing out the configuration page. To print the configuration page, perform the following steps.
1. Press [MENU] and [ONLINE\ENTER] twice.
2. Go to the eighth line under Printer Information. If the
PostScript option is installed, a PostScript Version number will show on this line.
Description
F59 error message.
1,203
KL-3015
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. A laser index error. Occasionally, a F59 error message may erroneously occur. F59 errors can be remedied by upgrading existing controller firmware
using the KL3015 Support CD ROM (p/n 3015SUPTCD-1.0) which contains the latest code level "ROMAN" and by upgrading existing engine firmware to
EPROM level 18 (p/n 3015102-18.0) or later, which is also available on the Konica BBS as filename 3015-18a.exe.
Note: This EPROM should only be used in production models with serial number 08AE00071 or higher. [[Internal Link containing KL3015 image quality/error
code information.| RUN V:\text\Wordpad.exe v:\text\CBC003.txt]] Latest EPROM level and [[Internal Link for Faxing/Printing current KL3015 EPROM
information.| RUN V:\text\Wordpad.exe v:\text\newrom\3015.txt]]
2. The write unit has failed. Replace the write unit (p/n 08AA-6500) as needed.
Description
What type of DIMM memory is used in the KL3015?
Solution
16MB DIMM memory (Item #950022) is available for the KL3015. The memory is 10ns SDRAM, 3.3V, unbuffered memory. DIMM memory modules should
be obtained from Konica. There can be false error codes on the KL3015 if Konica memory is not used. Due to specification changes, the (MU-105) 32MB
memory module (Item #950023) for the KL3015 color laser printer is no longer available directly through Konica Business Technologies. The 32MB memory
module can be ordered through Konica Computer Solutions by calling 858-549-2199 x2267. The (MU-104) 16MB DIMM (Item #950022) can still be ordered
directly through Konica Business Technologies.
Notes:
1. The maximum memory for the KL-3015 printer using the (MU-104) 16MB DIMM is 48MB.
2. The (MU-105) 32MB memory module (Item #950023) is still available as an option for our popular IP print controller series.
3. The KL3015 color printer ships standard with 16MB of memory
4. See InfoSource Bulletin #101-00 for information on obtaining 32BM DIMM through Konica Computer Solutions. To view this PDF link, Acrobat* Reader
must be installed. Acrobat Reader can be downloaded for free from the Adobe* Web site at: [[http://www.adobe.com/products/acrobat/readstep2.html| URL
1,204
Konica Minolta Fax2900
Description
Toner Cartridge TC type setting.
Solution
To change the TC type to match the market area, power OFF/ON while holding the "Panel Reset" and "No" keys together. Then go to the service mode and
the TC type can be adjusted.
Note: In the USA no TC is needed.
Description
After upgrading firmware via the RSD utility, copies and transmitted faxes are black or have gray background.
Solution
CAUSE: When performing a firmware upgrade all the settings are at default level and the CIS is not calibrated after the update. The shading may need to be
refreshed.
SOLUTION: To correct:
1. Access the RSD utillity.
2. Press Stop 0, 0, Stop 0, 1.
3.Press the down arrow to[2. ADJ UST].
4.Press up arrow to SHADING LEVEL.
5.Insert asheet of white 8.5x11Rand press START.
6.Adjusment will display COMPLETE, then press Panel Reset twice.
Description
Lock up, gibberish display, and/or wrong characters in activity journal.
Solution
CAUSE: Corrupt firmware.
SOLUTION: Please update the firmware to level 1.05
Description
Introduction of the Konica Minolta FAX 2900.
Solution
See [[Bulletin #04-GB-096|URL http://techweb.konicabt.com/tpm/media/Bulletin04-GB-096.pdf]] for details.
Description
How to upgrade (download) the firmware.
Solution
Please refer to pages D-42 through D-44 of the Field Service Manual.
Note:
Description
Data or faxes are stuck in memory. The machine may not print reports. Faxes may not print. It may not be possible to send faxes. The machine could be
locked up.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Incorrect marketing area. Please make sure the machine is set to the USA marketing area. The machine Shipping destination should be set to "Inch."
2. Memory full. To Free up the memory do a DRAM clear and power-cycle the machine. Please see section 5 of the Field Service Manual for details.
1,205
Description
There a drum change indication even though the drum unit has been changed.
Solution
CAUSE: The I/C counter requires resetting.

SOLUTION: Go into the service mode under the clear data menu and reset the I/C counter.
Description
Solution
Description
PF125, Can legal paper be loaded in the PF125?
Solution
The PF125 supports letter paper only. To run legal paper, install the paper into the main body paper tray or bypass tray.
Description
CNG and baudrate (Protocol signals) are displayed while sending faxes on a new install.
Solution
CAUSE: Initialization was not performed.
1. Enter the Tech rep mode.
2. Using the up arrow scroll to [9. data clear].
3. Select YES on the display panel.
4. Scroll to [SRAM CLEAR].
5. Select YES, and follow the instructions on the display panel.
1,206
Description
Data or faxes are stuck in memory. The machine may not print reports. Faxes may not print. It may not be possible to send faxes. The machine could be
locked up.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Incorrect marketing area.
Please make sure the machine is set to the USA marketing area. The machine Shipping destination should be set to "Inch."
2. Memory full.
To free up the memory do a DRAM clear and power-cycle the machine. Please see section 5 of the [[Fax 2900/3900 Service Manual|URL
http://techweb.konicabt.com/tpm/media/FAX29003900.pdf]] for details.
Description
After upgrading firmware via the RSD utility, copies and transmitted faxes are black or have gray background.
Solution
CAUSE: When performing a firmware upgrade all the settings are at default level and the CIS is not calibrated after the update. The shading may need to be
refreshed.
SOLUTION: To correct:
1. Access the RSD utillity.
2. Press Stop 0, 0, Stop 0, 1.
3.Press the down arrow to[2. ADJ UST].
4.Press up arrow to SHADING LEVEL.
5.Insert asheet of white 8.5x11Rand press START.
6.Adjusment will display COMPLETE, then press Panel Reset twice.
Description
Lock up, gibberish display, and/or wrong characters in activity journal.
Solution
CAUSE: Corrupt firmware.
SOLUTION: Please update the firmware to level 1.05
Description
How to perform initialization.
Solution
1. Enter the Tech rep mode.
2. Using the up arrow scroll to [9. data clear].
3. Select YES on the display panel.
4. Scroll to [DRAM CLEAR].
5. Select YES, and follow the instructions on the display panel.
Description
Unable to send or receive, but the phone line is working.
Solution
CAUSE: NCU modem is damaged.
SOLUTION: Do a SRAM clear and DRAM. If no results replace the NCU (p/n 1391101401). The main fax board (PWB Assy Main - p/n 1391102001) may
need to be replaced as well.
Note: Reseat NCU board on the fax CB and harness and connectors, before replacing any of the boards.
Description
1,207
PF125, legal size receive faxes print on letter paper with an additional blank page printed.
Solution
CAUSE: Reduction RX is OFF.
SOLUTION: To enable Reduction RX perform the following:
1. Press Utility.
2. Press the up arrow to RX OPERATION?
3. Press YES.
4. Press the down arrow to 3 REDUCTION RX?
5. Press left or right arrow to select ON.
6. Press YES to confirm setting.
7. Press PANEL RESET for the STANDBY MODE.
Note: Reset your Marketing Area to U.S.A. and confirm the Paper Tray Priority is set for Letter paper.
Description
Machine indicates A4 on the LCD.
Solution
CAUSE: Marketing Area in Service Mode is not set to U.S.A.
SOLUTION: To Access the Marketing Area in the Service Mode, perform the following:
1. With power ON, enter the Service Mode by pressing Utility, Stop, 0, 0, Stop, 0 and then 1.
2. Service Mode Screen appears in the display.
3. Service Choice [1] press Yes to select Marketing Area appears on the screen.
4. Press the up arrow [Delete] or the down arrow [Space] until U.S.A. is displayed on the screen.
5. Press Yes.
6. Press No until unit is at standby.
Description
How to upgrade (download) the firmware.
Solution
Please refer to pages D-42 through D-44 of the Field Service Manual.
Note:
Description
There a drum change indication even though the drum unit has been changed.
Solution
CAUSE: The I/C counter requires resetting.

SOLUTION: Go into the service mode under the clear data menu and reset the I/C counter.
Description
Solution
1,208
KONICA MINOLTA Scanner Driver
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
1,209
Konica Network Scanner Driver
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
1,210
LP3110
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description

Solution
Description
Magnetic backed paper support.
Solution
Magnetic backed paper is not a supported medium.
1,211
magicolor 2210
Description
Solution

Answer Base

Phone: 1 877-778-2687
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description

Solution
Description
Solution
1,212
magicolor 2480MF
Description
Solution

Answer Base

Phone: 1 877-778-2687
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Description
End user documentation.
Solution
See attacheddocumentationfor the applicable model. Attached are the User's Guides (6.7MB), Installation Guides (4.5MB)and Quick Guides (1.4MB).
Notes :
1. To open the attached file(s) using WinZip, WinZipmust be installed. WinZipcan be downloaded from the WinZipwebsite:
3. Most documentation (manuals, etc.) can be downloaded from the MyKonicaMinolta.com Supported Models Library or from the KMBS public site (
1,213
magicolor 2480MF
Description
Media types supported by the magicolor 2400 series.
Solution
Please refer to thefollowing documentation:
1. Media types for the magicolor 2400 series (download thisZIP file).
2. Seealso the magicolor 2400 Series Approved Media List , Media Sizes Support by the magicolor 2400 Series , and Discussion on Paper Weights
and Paper Grades .
3.Please pay attention to the Installing Duplex Option on the magicolor 2430 DL and magicolor 2450 document .
Notes :
a.To open the ZIP file(s), WinZipmust be installed. WinZipcan be downloaded from the WinZipwebsite at: http://www.winzip.com/ddchomea.htm .
b.To viewa PDF, Adobe Readermust be installed. Adobe Readercan be downloaded for free from the Adobeweb site at:
Description
In a MicrosoftWindows Vista(Ultimate/Business/Home Premium/Home Basic) environment, the TWAIN driver might not be able to install.It also might not
work even if it does successfully install.
Solution
CAUSE: TWAIN driver upgrade required.

SOLUTION: In the interim, scan using the WIA (Windows Image Acquisition)driver.
Please upgrade the Scan driver to Version 1.89 or later. Please refer to theattachedinstaller program whichis able to install the Printer driver and Scanner
driver at the same time.
The following are included:
- Printer Driver: v2.0.2524.0
- Scanner Driver: v1.89.0.0 (NEW)
- README : v1.0-b
Please uninstall the installed driver first;the current printer driver and scanner driver will be uninstalled. IMPORTANT : Double-click on the "SetupAIO.exe" file
instead of "setup.exe".
computer to view.
Description
In a MicrosoftWindows XP SP2 environment, when printing duplex from Tray 2 (Tray 1 is empty), printing does not resume after a jam.
Solution
CAUSE: Controller firmware upgrade required.

SOLUTION: In the interim, load the paper intoTray1to resumeprinting.
Please upgrade the Controller firmware to version 2.9/3.1 or later. Downloadtheattachedfirmware file which will confirm old firmware automatically, and install
thefirmware that corresponds to the particularversion.
<Old> <New>
Ver. 2.7 => Ver. 2.9
Ver. 3.0 => Ver. 3.1
computer to view.
Description
In a MicrosoftWindows Vista (Ultimate/Business/Home Premium/Home Basic) environment, immediately after the Scan driver is installed, the default set
value of "Brightness" and "Contrast" in the WIA (Windows Image Acquisition) driver "Advanced Properties" is [-1]. Correct default set value of "Brightness"
and "Contrast" is [0]. Moreover, even if the Reset key is clicked,the set value does not become [0].
Note : Please see the attached document fordetails. To view the PDF, Adobe Readermust be installed. Adobe Readercan be downloaded for free from
the Adobeweb site at:
Solution
CAUSE: WIA driver upgrade required.

SOLUTION: Please upgrade the Scan driver to Version 1.89 or later.Refer to theattachedinstaller program whichis able to install the Printer driver and
Scanner driver at the same time.
1,214
magicolor 2480MF
- README : v1.0-b
Please uninstall the installed driver first;the current printer driver and scanner driver will be uninstalled. IMPORTANT : Double-click on the "SetupAIO.exe" file
instead of "setup.exe".
computer to view.
SPECIAL NOTE : Solution contribution byKMBT (J apan).
Description
In a MicrosoftWindows Vista (Ultimate/Business/Home Premium/Home Basic) environment, a set value of "Brightness" and "Contrast" in the WIA
(Windows Image Acquisition) driver "Advanced Properties" randomly changes when executing the "Preview" or "Scan". Moreover, even if the Reset key is
clicked,the set value does not become [0].
Note : Please see the attached document for details. To view the PDF, Adobe Readermust be installed. Adobe Readercan be downloaded for free
Solution

CAUSE: WIA driver upgrade required.

SOLUTION: Please upgrade the Scan driver to Version 1.89 or later.Refer to theattachedinstaller program whichis able to install the Printer driver and
Scanner driver at the same time.
- README : v1.0-b
Please uninstall the installed driver first;the current printer driver and scanner driver will be uninstalled. IMPORTANT : Double-click on the "SetupAIO.exe"
file instead of "setup.exe".
computer to view.
Description
When MicrosoftWindows Vista Home Premium or Home Basic is installed on theHP Pavilion TX1000notebook or HP Pavilion6000DV,printing capability
is hindered.
Solution
This issue is being investigated by Konica Minolta J apan.

Workaround :
Please delete print job while spooledbefore print job isprinted,then reboot the PC.Disable UAC (User Account Control):
1. Select the "User Accounts" from "Control Panel".
2.Select "Turn User Account Control On or Off" and clear the check mark on "Use User Account Control (UAC) to help protect your computer".
Note : Please refer to the attached documentation for additional detail. To view a PDF, Adobe Readermust be installed. Adobe Readercan be
downloaded for free from the Adobeweb site at:
1,215
magicolor 2490MF
Description
Solution

Answer Base

Phone: 1 877-778-2687
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Description
End user documentation.
Solution
See attacheddocumentationfor the applicable model. Attached are the User's Guides (6.7MB), Installation Guides (4.5MB)and Quick Guides (1.4MB).
Notes :
1. To open the attached file(s) using WinZip, WinZipmust be installed. WinZipcan be downloaded from the WinZipwebsite:
3. Most documentation (manuals, etc.) can be downloaded from the MyKonicaMinolta.com Supported Models Library or from the KMBS public site (
1,216
magicolor 2490MF
Description
Media types supported by the magicolor 2400 series.
Solution
Please refer to thefollowing documentation:
1. Media types for the magicolor 2400 series (download thisZIP file).
2. Seealso the magicolor 2400 Series Approved Media List , Media Sizes Support by the magicolor 2400 Series , and Discussion on Paper Weights
and Paper Grades .
3.Please pay attention to the Installing Duplex Option on the magicolor 2430 DL and magicolor 2450 document .
Notes :
a.To open the ZIP file(s), WinZipmust be installed. WinZipcan be downloaded from the WinZipwebsite at: http://www.winzip.com/ddchomea.htm .
b.To viewa PDF, Adobe Readermust be installed. Adobe Readercan be downloaded for free from the Adobeweb site at:
Description
Printed images are "stretched" when printing from AdobePhotoshopCS3 with the default resolution (1200x600dpi) set in the printer driver. The
"stretched" image is displayedin Print Preview and occurs with both 1200x600dpi and 2400x600dpi resolutions, butdoes not occurwith AdobeIllustrator
CS3.
Solution

CAUSE: Settings in printer driver need to be changed.

SOLUTION: Change the resolution to 600x600dpi in the printer driver.
Note : This problem is related to the application and is described in AdobeTechNote ID: kb 402024 .
SPECIAL NOTE : Solution contribution by Chieko Kasada, KMBT J apan.
Description
When MicrosoftWindows Vista Home Premium or Home Basic is installed on theHP Pavilion TX1000notebook or HP Pavilion6000DV,printing capability
is hindered.
Solution
This issue is being investigated by Konica Minolta J apan.

Workaround :
Please delete print job while spooledbefore print job isprinted,then reboot the PC.Disable UAC (User Account Control):
1. Select the "User Accounts" from "Control Panel".
2.Select "Turn User Account Control On or Off" and clear the check mark on "Use User Account Control (UAC) to help protect your computer".
Note : Please refer to the attached documentation for additional detail. To view a PDF, Adobe Readermust be installed. Adobe Readercan be
downloaded for free from the Adobeweb site at:
Description
Prints all blank or all black pages.
Solution

All black or all blank pages can have multiple causes:
1. If the page is printing all black only, check condition of the copper contact on the OPC drum cartridge .
2. The laser lens may be soiled/dirty. Clean the laser lens (magicolor 2400W/2430DL).
3.Drum cartridge may not be properly seated. Remove and reinstall the drum cartridge( magicolor 2400W/2430DL/2450 and magicolor
2480MF/2490MF ).
4. Install (or reinstall) the latest driver ( magicolor 2450 and magicolor 2480MF/2490MF ).
Firmware and more'.
5. Restore factory defaults on the printer ( magicolor 2450 and magicolor 2480MF/2490MF ).
6. Remove and then reinstall the Transfer Belt ( magicolor 2450 and magicolor 2480MF/2490MF ).
Description
The following error reports might be automatically printed out. In addition, the following error reports are not described in the Service Manual, yet, the error
report described in the Service Manual is omitted.
1. BACKUP RAM ERROR -When a RAM error occurs because of the battery damageor low battery conditionfor the IPB board, and the system does not
work, "BACKUP RAM ERROR" occurs. Print out is automatic after powerON if a system problem happens. Please refer to the attached Error report sample.
2. LOST REPORT -When image data backupfailed due to powerOFF after power OFF/ON, then the machine will print out the report automatically. Please
refer to the attachedError report sample(s).
1,217
magicolor 2490MF
Note : To viewthe PDFs, Adobe Readermust be installed. Adobe Readercan be downloaded for free from the Adobeweb site at:
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. BACKUP RAM ERROR -Failed controller board (IPB) or the batteryon the controller board has been damaged.
Replace the IPB (p/n 8314556-R700-00).
2. LOST REPORT -Failed controller board (IPB) because data in the SRAMwas lost.
Replace the IPB (p/n 8314556-R700-00).
Description
Though the printer and scanner driver can be installed correctly on MicrosoftWindows Server 2003, neither "Windows Scanner and Camera Wizard" nor
"PaperPort SE" detects any installed scanner.
"The service cannot be started, either because it is disabled or because it has no enabled devices associated with it." message when trying to scan using the
"Windows Scanner and Camera Wizard".
WIA is listed in the MicrosoftWindows Device Manager correctly.
This problem is related to the setting of the services on MicrosoftWindows Server 2003.

Solution
CAUSE: Windows Image Acquisition (WIA) service is disabled.

SOLUTION: Enable Windows Image Acquisition (WIA) service in Administrative Tools (Start => Programs => Administrative Tools => Services).
Note : By default, this service is disabled on MicrosoftWindows Server 2003.
1,218
magicolor 2590MF
Description
Solution

Answer Base

Phone: 1 877-778-2687
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
Description
Fuse/ICP list.
Solution
Description
Specifications for the magicolor 2590MF.
Solution
1,219
magicolor 2590MF
Description
MSDS information.

Solution
computer to view.
Description
Supplies (Configuration) information.
Solution
Supplies (Configuration) information for the magicolor 2590MF .
1,220
magicolor 3100
Description
Solution

Answer Base

Phone: 1 877-778-2687
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description

Solution
Description
Solution
1,221
magicolor 3300
Description
Solution

Answer Base

Phone: 1 877-778-2687
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description

Solution
Description
Solution
1,222
magicolor 4650DN
Description
Solution

Answer Base

Phone: 1 877-778-2687
Description
Solution
Description
User's Guide.
Solution
Attached is the magicolor 4650EN/4650DN User's Guide.
Note : Most documentation (manuals, etc.) can be downloaded from the MyKonicaMinolta.com Supported Models Library or from the KMBS public site
(http://www.kmbs.konicaminolta.us) Support & Drivers tab.
Description
Installation Guide.
Solution
Attached is the multi-language magicolor 4650EN/4650DN Installation Guide.
To view the PDF, Adobe Readermust be installed. Adobe Readercan be downloaded for free from the Adobeweb site at:
Note : Most documentation (manuals, etc.) can be downloaded from the MyKonicaMinolta.com Supported Models Library or from the KMBS public site (
Description
Safety Information Guide.
Solution
Attached is the multi-language magicolor 4650EN/4650DN Safety Information Guide.
1,223
magicolor 4650DN
Description
Service Manuals.
Solution
Attached are the magicolor 4650DN_EN Service Manuals, version 1.0 (Theory of Operation and Field Service). Also attached are the wiring diagrams.
To open the file using WinZip, WinZipmust be installed. WinZipcan be downloaded from the WinZipwebsite: http://www.winzip.com/ddchomea.htm .
The file can either be saved to disk or opened. It is recommended to download the ZIP and open from the local computer to view or run.
Description
Reference Guide.
Solution
Attached is the magicolor 4650EN/4650DN Reference Guide.

Description
Specifications for the Magicolor 4650 series.
Solution
See attachment (mc_4650_specsheet_v1107.pdf) for information.
Description
Solution
Supplies (Configuration) information for the magicolor 4650 .
Description
MSDS information.

Solution
See attached MSDS documentationfor the magicolor 4650 series.
computer to view.
1,224
magicolor 4650EN
Description
Solution

Answer Base

Phone: 1 877-778-2687
Description
Solution
Description
User's Guide.
Solution
Attached is the magicolor 4650EN/4650DN User's Guide.
Description
Installation Guide.
Solution
Attached is the multi-language magicolor 4650EN/4650DN Installation Guide.
To view the PDF, Adobe Readermust be installed. Adobe Readercan be downloaded for free from the Adobeweb site at:
Description
Solution
Attached is the multi-language magicolor 4650EN/4650DN Safety Information Guide.
1,225
magicolor 4650EN
Description
Service Manuals.
Solution
Attached are the magicolor 4650DN_EN Service Manuals, version 1.0 (Theory of Operation and Field Service). Also attached are the wiring diagrams.
Description
Reference Guide.
Solution
Attached is the magicolor 4650EN/4650DN Reference Guide.

Description
Specifications for the Magicolor 4650 series.
Solution
See attachment (mc_4650_specsheet_v1107.pdf) for information.
Description
Solution
Supplies (Configuration) information for the magicolor 4650 .
Description
MSDS information.

Solution
See attached MSDS documentationfor the magicolor 4650 series.
computer to view.
1,226
magicolor 5650EN
Description
Solution
1,227
magicolor 8650DN
Description
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
Notes :
201-934-5339.

Description
Solution

Answer Base

Phone: 1 877-778-2687
Description
Solution
1,228
magicolor 8650DN
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description

When printing a document with a Custom paper sizeregisteredby "Save Custom Size"under the Settings tab of the PCL driver properties, a document is
printedas default paper size (Letter).

When printing a document with a paper size set in Print Server Properties under the Settings tab of the PCL driver, a documentis also printedas default
paper size (Letter).
Solution
CAUSE: Printing Preferences setting requires a change.

SOLUTION: As a temporary countermeasure, w hen printing a document with Custom paper size, please registerthe paper size by using "Custom
size"under "Original size" or "Paper size" of Printing Preferences.
Notes :
1.This issue will be fixed with i-Option2 driver which is scheduled tobe released at the end of May 2008.

2. Regarding the magicolor 8650, the date of the releasehas not yet beenfixed.
Description
Hardware Troubleshooting Guide.
Solution
Attached is the Hardware Troubleshooting Guide provided by Konica Minolta in J apan. The followingare issuesaddressed in the guide.

No.

INDEX

1

The lower part of the touch panel shows no response

2

Noise when original glass moves (C8104)

3

MK711 cannot be set in the main body
1,229
magicolor 8650DN

4

Abnormally high toner density detected TCR sensor (C2552,4,6,8) occurs (Part. 1)

5

Abnormally high toner density detected TCR sensor (C2552,4,6,8) occurs (Part. 2)

6

Image failure with yellow bands during gradation correction

7

White dots

8

White lines image

9

If CSRC connector is connected, the cover can be not closed

10

C-8103 Lift-up mechanism trouble

11

Open indication in DF

12

C2152 Transfer Belt Pressure welding alienation

13

Frame edge of FS-519 went to rust

14

Set Imaging unit is not disappeared

15

Two colors printing is light density

16

Sticky filament tape was left when unpacking

17

Bypass Size detection failure

18

1,230
magicolor 8650DN
Toner is sprinkled (Fringe)

19

B4 is detected instead of A2 original

20

C2151 Secondary Transfer roller pressure welding alienation

21

The machine often freezes

22

Set toner indication appears in TN-213K

23

Set Imaging Unit appears even though it has already set

24

After KM logo appears, CD00F of trouble code occurs

25

Holder damage in DK-504

26

A4 paper is detected when there is no paper in DF-611

27

CB001 (Fax board error 1)

28

NVRAM malfunction

29

The start printing position of 1st tray leading edge does not fit that of the other tray.

30

Main power cannot turn ON

Description
Installation Guides.
Solution
Attachedare the multi-language magicolor 8650 Installation Guide and the Installation Manuals (zipped)for the AU-101, AU-201, DK-505, EK-603, FS-519,
FS-609, HD-508, MK-711, MT-502, OT-602, PC-106, PC-205,PC-406, PK-501, PK-515, SC-503and SD-505.
1,231
magicolor 8650DN
To viewthe PDFs, Adobe Readermust be installed. Adobe Readercan be downloaded for free from the Adobeweb site at:
To open the ZIP file, WinZipmust be installed. WinZipcan be downloaded from the WinZipwebsite: http://www.winzip.com/ddchomea.htm . The file
can either be saved to disk or opened. It is recommended to download the ZIP and open from the local computer to view or run.
Description
User's Guide.
Solution
Attachedis themagicolor 8650 User's Guide (22.4MB).
Description
Service Manuals.
Solution
Attached are themagicolor 8650Theory of Operation (24.4MB) andField Service (22.1MB) Service Manuals as well as the wiring diagrams (2.7MB).
1,232
MARS 4
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
1,233
MARS Mini II
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
IC and PW board-A change.
Solution
See KOM060298.pdf for details.
Description
How to setup LDAP setting on an MFP device.
Solution
Refer to the How to setup LDAP Setting on MFP Device document.
1,234
MF161
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution
1,235
MF1700
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
The fax unit is printing very light copies.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The transfer roller if the image on the drum is dark. Clean or replace, as necessary.
2. Dirty optics in the printhead. Clean or replace, as necessary.
Description
Explanations for error messages:
* LD error
* Heater error
* Fan error
Solution
Please refer to bulletin 2527 .
Note:
1,236
MF1700
Description
How to release documents that do not automatically eject after canceling the transmission.
Solution
To eject documents press: STOP, COPY, & STOP again.
Description
The fax prints blank pages.
Solution
CAUSE: In the take-up section the spring has stretched beyond its limit.
SOLUTION: Replace the Gear, Collar, and Spring in the take-up section.
Note: The MF1800 has the same feeding section as the MF1700/MF1900.
Description
How to delete or modify a number in a Group Dial.
Solution
The Group Key must be deleted before modifying/deleting One Touch or Speed Dial. Please refer to the Operator's Manual for details.
Description
Solution
Note:
Description
Various fax communications issues, MF1700.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
Ensure the firmware in the machine is current and the machine has been properly reset.
Check the phone line for any noise and/or try connecting the machine to another phone line.
Ensure that the machine is not connected to a DSL line with a filter.
1,237
MF351
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
1,238
MicroPress 6
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Description
What is required to calibrate the bizhub PRO C500 on a MicroPresssystem?
Solution
MicroPressrequires a densitometer or color spectrophotometer. Supported models are the X-RiteDTP32, DTP34, DTP41, or DTP51 Scan Instruments as
well as the ES-1000 color spectrophotometer.
Description
Current firmware levels of the MicroPressPrintLinks and PrintStations.
Solution
1,239
MicroPress 6
For MicroPressSystems running version 6.3.0.2, the following firmware should be used in the PrintLinks/PrintStations:
PrintStation 065m with the following firmware version:
Firmware version: 305-001106-13.bin
Engine Flash Rom versions: I=52, P=38, VIF=7
PrintLink firmware for Di750/850: 305-000829-68.bin
PrintLink firmware for Di750PE: 305-000829-69.bin
Di750 Engine Flash Rom versions: I=56-68, O=52, P=52, VIF=22
Di850Engine Flash Rom version: I=41, O=41, P=18, VIF=14
PrintStation 2020m with the following firmware versions:
Boot Code: 305-000905-012.bin
PrintLink firmware: 305-000906-49-002-033-012.bin
Engine Flash Rom version: 52
PrintLink firmware: 305-000804-01.bin
PrintStation 062 with the following firmware version:
PrintStation Cii with the following firmware version:
PrintLink and PrintStation firmware are normally copied to the server hard disk when MicroPressis installed. Use MicrosoftWindows Explorer to browse to
the \MicroPress\Firmware folder, then go to the folder for the PrintLink or PrintStation.

Notes :
a. The firmware for PrintStation 2020m is a newer version than what was included with MicroPress6.2.5i SR1. This requires CF2001 firmware version 45 or
higher.
b. The remainder of these Flash ROM files are found on disk 2 of the MicroPress6.3.0.2 CD set and should be copied to the server hard disk during
installation. In the MicroPressfolder, look in the firmware folder. It contains a folder for each type of engine and also includes the NetFlash and FlashWrite
utilities (also attached)for loading the firmware files into the PrintLinks.
c. Please see bulletin 4782 for details.To viewthe PDF, Adobe Readermust be installed. Adobe Readercan be downloaded for free from the Adobe
web site at: http://www.adobe.com/products/acrobat/readstep2.html .
Description
"The security device seems to be missing. Check driver installation and attachment of dongle" or "ERROR - Security Device Missing. Running in
demonstration mode" messagewhen starting MicroPressandMicroSpool is launched.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1.A purple MicroPressdongle is either missing or invalid.
Use a valid purple MicroPressdongle.

2. Not signed into the local machine with at least local administrative rights.
Sign onto the MicroPressserver with a user accounthaving, at least, Local Administrator rights.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
1,240
MicroPress 6
Description
How to completely remove the MicroPressapplication utilizing the Registry Editor.
Solution
When preparing to reinstall the MicroPressapplication, is is very important to uninstall the existing application properly; otherwise, the reinstalled program
may not function correctly. See the attached PDF for complete step-by-step instructions.
Notes :
1. To view a PDF file, Adobe Readermust be installed. Adobe Readercan be downloaded for free from the Adobeweb site at:
2. WARNING : Using Registry Editor incorrectly can cause serious problems that may require reinstallaton of the operating system. Konica Minolta or
Microsoftcannot guarantee that problems resulting from the incorrect use of Registry Editor can be solved. Use Registry Editor at your own risk.
a. For information about how to edit the registry, view the attached "Change Keys And Values","Add and Delete Information in the Registry" and "Edit
Registry Information" Help topics.
b. Back up the registry before editing it and updateany Emergency Repair Disk (ERD).
1,241
MicroPress 7
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
How to print from MacintoshOSX to MicroPress7.x
Solution
At the MicroPress, complete the following steps (the first five steps will only have to be completed on an SX or DX Server. If an MX Server is available, go
directly to step 6):
1. Right-click on My Network Places and select Properties.
2. Right-click on Local Area Connection and select Properties.
3. Select Install.
4. Select Protocol and click Add.
5. Select the DLC Protocol then click Ok.
6. Go to Start/Settings/Control Panel.
7. Double-click on Add/Remove Programs.
8. Double-click on Add/Remove Windows Components.
9. Scroll down and put a check next to Other Network File and Print Services.
10. Click on Details.
11. Make sure there is a check mark in front of Print Services for Unix.
12. Click OK. The necessary software will be installed and the window will close.
13. Then close the Add/Remove Programs window.
14. Go to Start/Setting/Printers.
15. Double-click on Add Printers and click Next.
16. Select Local printer and make sure that Automatically detect and Install My Plug and Play Printer is deselected and then click Next.
17. Select Create a new port and from the drop menu select LPR Port.
18. Go to Start/run/cmd.
19. Type net start lpdsvc and hit enter on the keyboard.
20. Complete the next window: Name or TCP/IP address of the server providing LPD and Name of printer or print queue on that serverto whichyou wish to
print. The queue name should be the name of the printer as it appears in the Printers window. It would be a good idea for the printer name and share name to
be the same. Example: MP 085r Monochrome N1, and then click OK.
21. In the next window under Manufacturers scroll down and select T/R Systems.
22. In the same window under Printer select the appropriate driver for the printer and then click Next.
23. Select Keep existing driver (recommended) and then click Next.
24. Select a Printer name for the printer, eight characters or less and then click Next.
25. In the next window select Share as and the printer name will automatically come up from the last window, it can be changed. Then click Next.
26. Click Next again because it is not necessary to put in a Location or Comments
27. Select Yes and allow it to print a test page then click Next.
28. In the next window click Finish.
On the Macintosh,do the following:
1. Double-click on the hard drive.
2. Double-click on the Applications folder.
3. Double-click on the Utilities folder.
4. Double-click on the Print Center utility.
5. When this utility comes up, click on Add. The Name of the MicroPressor its TCP/IP address will be required. The Name of the Print Queue will also be
required.
6. Once this is done, open an application and print a job to the MicroPressto confirm that it is set up correctly.
Notes :
a. After Selecting Unix Print Servicesstart the servicevia Admin Tools/Services as it is set to MANUAL.
b.Re-boot the Macintoshif printing fails
SPECIAL NOTE : Solution contribution by Ed Bellone and Mark D'Attilio, Production Print/SSD
1,242
MicroPress 7
Description
SC49-01.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Failed IC Controller board.
replaceIC controller board (p/n 56UA-9100).

2. Incorrect settings.
Note : Other than the error, when printing the same job to 2 different machines, one prints the job right away and the other one takes time.
At the printer, make sure 'Spool' mode is set to 'Auto'. When printing from MicroPress:
Machine tab => Controller tab => 04 - Spool, select 'Auto'.
Description
Solution
Description
The Konica Minolta 1050 indicates the following error: 'The engine reported an invalid eject count'.
Solution
CAUSE: This issue occurs when printing a job that was imposed and printed on 11x17 paper due to a software switch setting in the Konica Minolta 1050.
SOLUTION: Change the software switch setting in the Konica Minolta 1050.
How to:
1. At the 1050 press: Stop / 0 / 0 / Stop / 0 / 1.
2. At the top of the screen it should say Service Mode.
3. Press 7 System Setting.
4. Press 01 Software SW Setting.
5. The first small window needs to be set to 4 so press the up arrow until the first window is set to 4.
6. Select the second small window and press the up arrow until the number is set to 7.
7. Select Off for this option.
8. Press Return until back to the main window and then press Exit.
9. Cycle the power on the copier.
Note: This software setting changes the way that the copier reports the copy count for 11x17 to the MicroPress*. This will keep the copier from reporting
invalid eject counts and you will no longer get the Error Separator and reprints of the job. An official tech note is being created.
Description
How to set up Color/Black & White Splitting with MicroPress.
Solution
For Color Splitting, MicroPressversion 7.0.0.6 or greater must be running on the bizhub PRO 920 and MicroPressversion 7.0.0.8 or greateron the bizhub
PRO 1050 to use the Post Inserter.
This feature creates a copy of each monochrome page of a job and routes these pages to the Monochrome Spool printer in the Input Controller. A place
holder for the color pages is automatically generated. The monochrome printer should be set to Hold. This will allow the color pages to be printed and then
placed in the post process inserter to rebuild the job on the fly.
1. From the MP_Rip menu, Stop Inputs.
2. Select Page Setup Manager.
3. Select the Page Setup for the color device you want to modify. Then select Copy.
4. Check the Enable Feature box under the Processing section.
5. In the pull-down window below the Enable Feature box, be sure that the SplitColorJ ob is selected.
6. Click Save as to exit this menu. Name the new Page Setup ColorSplit Printer.
7. Close Page Setup Manager.
8. Open the Input Controller.
9. Edit the MonochromeSpool.
10. For Page Setup, select the monochrome printer that will process the Black and White pages.
11. Make sure to put a check in the box next to Enable before Selecting OK and closing the Input Channel Edit.
12. To Publish the new printer, close down the RIP and MicroSpool. Then restart the RIP and then MicroSpool.
13. Go to the Black and White printer in PrintStation Manager, double-click on it and go to the device tab. Scroll down to Color Insertion tray and set up the
proper tray.
1,243
MicroPress 7
14. Once a job is sent to the ColorSplit printer, all the color pages will print on the selected color printer. In PrintStation Manager, go to the color split job
being held on the color printer, right-click on the job and go to Info.
15.Select the Output Option tab and then select Insert Color Pages.
16.Release the job once the color inserts from the color printer have been put in the proper tray on the Black and White machine.
Description
How to configure Needless Tab ejection on the 1050.
Solution
To configureneedless tab ejection, perform the following;
1. Select Utility/ counter button.
2. Select [02. Function Settings].
3. Select [Each Function Setting].
4. Highlight [ON/OFF] for the Needless Tab Paper Exit.

Note: With Micropress version 7.0.1.1 (PSM 7979) and above, needless tab ejection should be set to OFF when printing tab jobs.
Description
Tab job errors when printing to the 0105km (Konica Minolta 1050) using MicroPressversion 7.0.1.1km. The error in job message "The eject tray that you
have selected does not support the advanced tab ejection."
Solution

SOLUTION:Perform one of the following:
1. The Destination tray in J ob Info has to be set to a specific paper tray in the Output Options tab.
2. Ifthe Destination tray is set to Auto Select, Disable J ob Validation must be selectedon the J ob Settings tab.
Description
Solution

identify the link.
1,244
MicroPress 7.5
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
How to print from MacintoshOSX to MicroPress7.x
Solution
At the MicroPress, complete the following steps (the first five steps will only have to be completed on an SX or DX Server. If an MX Server is available, go
directly to step 6):
1. Right-click on My Network Places and select Properties.
2. Right-click on Local Area Connection and select Properties.
3. Select Install.
4. Select Protocol and click Add.
5. Select the DLC Protocol then click Ok.
6. Go to Start/Settings/Control Panel.
7. Double-click on Add/Remove Programs.
8. Double-click on Add/Remove Windows Components.
9. Scroll down and put a check next to Other Network File and Print Services.
10. Click on Details.
11. Make sure there is a check mark in front of Print Services for Unix.
12. Click OK. The necessary software will be installed and the window will close.
13. Then close the Add/Remove Programs window.
14. Go to Start/Setting/Printers.
15. Double-click on Add Printers and click Next.
16. Select Local printer and make sure that Automatically detect and Install My Plug and Play Printer is deselected and then click Next.
17. Select Create a new port and from the drop menu select LPR Port.
18. Go to Start/run/cmd.
19. Type net start lpdsvc and hit enter on the keyboard.
20. Complete the next window: Name or TCP/IP address of the server providing LPD and Name of printer or print queue on that serverto whichyou wish to
print. The queue name should be the name of the printer as it appears in the Printers window. It would be a good idea for the printer name and share name to
be the same. Example: MP 085r Monochrome N1, and then click OK.
21. In the next window under Manufacturers scroll down and select T/R Systems.
22. In the same window under Printer select the appropriate driver for the printer and then click Next.
23. Select Keep existing driver (recommended) and then click Next.
24. Select a Printer name for the printer, eight characters or less and then click Next.
25. In the next window select Share as and the printer name will automatically come up from the last window, it can be changed. Then click Next.
26. Click Next again because it is not necessary to put in a Location or Comments
27. Select Yes and allow it to print a test page then click Next.
28. In the next window click Finish.
On the Macintosh,do the following:
1. Double-click on the hard drive.
2. Double-click on the Applications folder.
3. Double-click on the Utilities folder.
4. Double-click on the Print Center utility.
5. When this utility comes up, click on Add. The Name of the MicroPressor its TCP/IP address will be required. The Name of the Print Queue will also be
required.
6. Once this is done, open an application and print a job to the MicroPressto confirm that it is set up correctly.
Notes :
a. After Selecting Unix Print Servicesstart the servicevia Admin Tools/Services as it is set to MANUAL.
b.Re-boot the Macintoshif printing fails
SPECIAL NOTE : Solution contribution by Ed Bellone and Mark D'Attilio, Production Print/SSD
1,245
MicroPress 7.5
Description
Solution
Description
How to set up Color/Black & White Splitting with MicroPress.
Solution
For Color Splitting, MicroPressversion 7.0.0.6 or greater must be running on the bizhub PRO 920 and MicroPressversion 7.0.0.8 or greateron the bizhub
PRO 1050 to use the Post Inserter.
This feature creates a copy of each monochrome page of a job and routes these pages to the Monochrome Spool printer in the Input Controller. A place
holder for the color pages is automatically generated. The monochrome printer should be set to Hold. This will allow the color pages to be printed and then
placed in the post process inserter to rebuild the job on the fly.
1. From the MP_Rip menu, Stop Inputs.
2. Select Page Setup Manager.
3. Select the Page Setup for the color device you want to modify. Then select Copy.
4. Check the Enable Feature box under the Processing section.
5. In the pull-down window below the Enable Feature box, be sure that the SplitColorJ ob is selected.
6. Click Save as to exit this menu. Name the new Page Setup ColorSplit Printer.
7. Close Page Setup Manager.
8. Open the Input Controller.
9. Edit the MonochromeSpool.
10. For Page Setup, select the monochrome printer that will process the Black and White pages.
11. Make sure to put a check in the box next to Enable before Selecting OK and closing the Input Channel Edit.
12. To Publish the new printer, close down the RIP and MicroSpool. Then restart the RIP and then MicroSpool.
13. Go to the Black and White printer in PrintStation Manager, double-click on it and go to the device tab. Scroll down to Color Insertion tray and set up the
proper tray.
14. Once a job is sent to the ColorSplit printer, all the color pages will print on the selected color printer. In PrintStation Manager, go to the color split job
being held on the color printer, right-click on the job and go to Info.
15.Select the Output Option tab and then select Insert Color Pages.
16.Release the job once the color inserts from the color printer have been put in the proper tray on the Black and White machine.
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
What are the supported firmware levels for MicroPress7.5.0.1?
Solution
System support for MicroPress7.5.0.1 includes:
1. PrintStation 6565km with the following version:
Server version: AB.13057
CAUTION : The controller must have server version AB.13057 installed BEFORE the MicroPressis physically connected to the engine. Failure to do so
may render the controller inoperable.
2. PrintStation 5050km2 with the following version:
Server version: 2.01 and 2.0 are both supported
CAUTION : The controller must have server version 2.01 or 2.0 installed BEFORE the MicroPressis physically connected to the engine. Failure to do so
may render the controller inoperable.
Patch versions:
a. Server 2.01 requires Base Patch: 1-RP1E5
b. Server 2.0 requires Base Patch: 1-PUR26
Note : MicroPressconnectivity requires specific Fierypatches. General Fierypatches are not supported for MicroPressconnectivity and therefore
should not be installed.
CAUTION :Loading a patch file other than that which is listed may render the controller inoperable.
1,246
MicroPress 7.5
3. PrintStation 5050km with the following version:
Server version: 1.1
CAUTION : The controller must have server version 1.1 installed BEFORE the MicroPressis physically connected to the engine. Failure to do so may
render the controller inoperable.
Patch versions:
a. Base Patch: 1-GFDOT
b. 1st Additional Patch: 1-J BPY1
c. 2nd Additional Patch: 1-MU235
d. 3rd Additional Patch: 1-PVUK1
Note : Approved patches must be applied in the order indicated. MicroPressconnectivity requires specific Fierypatches. General Fierypatches are
not supported for MicroPressconnectivity and therefore should not be installed.
CAUTION :Loading a patch file other than that which is listed may render the controller inoperable.
4. PrintStation 092km with the following firmware versions:
IP Control: 70-COB1
Image Control: 40-0000
Print Control: 14-0000
5. PrintStation 0105km with the following firmware versions:
IP Control: 72-COH0
Image Control I1: 50-COM0
Image Control I2, I3 & I4: 50-0000
Print Control: 50-0000
SPECIAL NOTE : Solution contribution by Bob Felch, ESS/SSD
Description
"Unable to connect to Sentinal Service" message during installation of the MicroPress.
Solution
CAUSE: An incorrect key code is entered during installation of MicroPressDisk Two. This may be misleading, as the message is due to an invalid key
code.

SOLUTION: Enter the correct keycode provided by EFI.
Note : Keycode is case sensitive. Make certain that the key lock is off and the correct case is observed.
SPECIAL NOTE: Solution contribution by Bob Felch, ESS/SSD and J im Behrends, Production Print/SSD
Description
Solution
Description
What is required to calibrate the bizhub PRO C500 on a MicroPresssystem?
Solution
MicroPressrequires a densitometer or color spectrophotometer. Supported models are the X-RiteDTP32, DTP34, DTP41, or DTP51 Scan Instruments as
well as the ES-1000 color spectrophotometer.
1,247
MicroSP 2000
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
1,248
MicroSP 2000/3000/6000/7000 Printer
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
C-1520, C-1521, C-1522, C-1523, and C-1524 are not listed in the Service Manual. What do these codes indicate?
Solution
These codes are listed in Product & Technical Support Bulletin 3298.
C-1520 : Fusing Unit Malfunction (fusing unit -p/n 0993-0347-03)
C-1521 : Laser Diode Failure (print head unit -p/n 0993-0531-22)
C-1522 : Polygon Motor Failure (print head unit -p/n 0993-0531-22)
C-1523 : Main Motor Failure (M1 -p/n 0993-6101-01)
C-1524 : Fan Motor (M3 -p/n 0993-6104-01, M4 -p/n 0993-6103-01)
1,249
MicroSP 3000
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
1,250
Minolta Micropress Cluster Printing System
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
How to set up and connect MicroPress* to the bizhub C500.
Solution
Follow the instructions in the Setup Guide to configure the bizhub C500 for use with the MicroPress. The bizhub C500 will require a minimum firmware level
of 12 to support connectivity with the version 7.x MicroPress.
Description
How to set the TCP/IP* address of PrintLink.
Solution
Changing the TCP/IP address requires the use of Telnet. To use Telnet to change the TCP/IP address, perform the following:
1. Go to the Start menu.
2. Click Run.
3. When the Run dialog is displayed, type telnet 10.10.10.2 (or the current TCP/IP address of the Print Link) and click OK.
4. At the next prompt, type setip and press Enter.
5. Press Enter until inet on ethernet (e) : is displayed. The current TCP/IP address is displayed also.
6. Enter the new TCP/IP address and press Enter until other (o) : is displayed. Press Enter again and the - prompt will be displayed, signifying that the new
TCP/IP address has been recorded (it may take a few seconds for this to happen).
7. Power the engine OFF/ON to switch to the new TCP/IP address.
Description
Solution
Description
A Sentinel error or dongle error is indicated when loading the second CD of the MicroPress* v7 upgrade.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Sentinal service needs to be uninstalled and reinstalled.
Please see the MicroPress Tech Note .
2. A corrupt DLL file.
1,251
3. An incorrect license code has been entered.
Please re-enter the correct code.
4. There is a corrupt key in the registry.
5. In some cases MicroPress version 7 requires a new dongle.
This is a chargeable upgrade.

Description
There is no scanning option on the 1050 when using the MicroPress* system. How can the scanning feaures of the IC611 be utilized?
Solution
There is updated IC firmware (version 71) which allows connectivity between the MicroPress and IC611. This firmware is currently on the Beta FTP site as
there is an issue if someone is printing from the MicroPress and then also send a job directly to the IC611. If a MicroPress 7 customer requires scanning
capabilities, version 71 can be supplied, but BT will not support any issues that may occur when using functions outside of the MicroPress. To enable dual
functionality, they need to enable DIPSW (48-1) to Off (0). This firmware also requires the EM-701 upgrade so IC memory is at 512MB.
*[[Trademark ownership information| FILE V:\TEXT\TRADEMRK.TXT NEW]
Description
How is support handled for hardware-related issues on the MicroPress* server?
Solution
The MicroPress server and Microsoft* Windows operating system are directly supported by DELL*. There is a Service Tag somewhere on the case that is
used as a reference for this support. To contact DELL, call 888-560-8324. The Service Tag is required and have the original shipping address for the server
available. If asked, the point of origin is:
EFI
17250 North Hartford Drive Suite 101
Scottsdale, AZ 85255
The original warranty is for 3 years from the EFI ship date.
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
1,252
Description
How to retrieve a lost MicroPress* license code (key code).
Solution
Call into the NSSG Hotline or submit a request through the NSSG Web Support site to request the license code. EFI can retrieve the license code if given the
dongle number. If the RIP password is also needed it will be necessary to provide the dongle serial number and Harlequin security code.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
1,253
MINOLTAFAX 1600
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Unimessage PRO won't log on.
Solution
CAUSE: Unimessage has 3 parts to its program: the scheduler, the user interface, and the device drivers. This error usually occurs when the scheduler is
not running on the system and a client (user) is trying to log on.
SOLUTION: Start the scheduler.
Note: See section 1 of the quick start guide for more details.
Description
The message "Caution Recording Paper J am" is indicated on the LCD. When the machine prints there is no paper lift and a recording paper jam occurs in the
paper take-up section.
Solution
CAUSE: Sometimes the gear used for the mechanical clutch is not turned by the tension of the torsion spring even if the paper take-up solenoid is energized.
As a result, the paper take-up roller does not turn.
SOLUTION: Replace the torsion spring in the clutch with the enhanced spring. The new spring will apply more pressure to the gear in the mechanical clutch
ensuring reliable paper lift. The part number is 4111-3319-05. Please see Bulletin 3546 for further details.
Description
Can the fax be used as a PC TX/RX device?
1,254
MINOLTAFAX 1600
Solution
SOLUTION: Section 10 in the Operator Manual explains in further detail. The PC must have fax software (such as UniMessage or WinFax Pro).
Description
Can a document be scanned into a PC with the MF1600?
Solution
The MF 1600 does have scan to PC capabilities. Detailed information can be found in Section 10 of the Operator's Manual. The PC must have fax software
installed such as UniMessage or Winfaxpro.
Description
An XSYSxx trouble code is displayed.
Solution
CAUSE: An XSYSxx trouble code is an indication of a problem in the PWB-MAIN.
SOLUTION: The code may be reset by turning the power off and on. If this does not resolve the problem, the PWB-MAIN will need to be replaced.
Description
Lines or bars in the feed direction only when transmitting or copying. Receptions or printing reports are ok.
Solution
CAUSE: The CIS is dirty or needs adjustment.
SOLUTION: Clean the CIS unit make sure that there is no dirt imbedded into the glass. Perform a shading adjustment. If necessary, replace the CIS unit.
Description
There is noise from the paper take-up section.
Solution
CAUSE: The separation pad and guide are worn.
SOLUTION: Replace the separation pad and guide. For part numbers, see Service Bulletin 2845 .
1,255
MINOLTAFAX 1600e
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
The display indicates "Do Shading Adjustment" and the MF1600e won't copy or transmit faxes.
Solution
The SRAM has lost its settings. This is usually caused by a SRAM clear. Do a Shading adjustment. See service manual page G-21 for futher information.
Description
Various fax communications issues, MF1600e.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
Description
1,256
MINOLTAFAX 1600e
Solution
Description
To what doe the "Machine Trouble." message refer?
Solution
Refer to the Video I/F section of the Service Manual (located in the service mode section). See Bulletin 2937 for additional information.
Description
Solution
Description
Can a document be scanned into a PC with the MF1600?
Solution
The MF 1600 does have scan to PC capabilities. Detailed information can be found in Section 10 of the Operator's Manual. The PC must have fax software
installed such as UniMessage or Winfaxpro.
Description
The message "Caution Recording Paper J am" is indicated on the LCD. When the machine prints there is no paper lift and a recording paper jam occurs in the
paper take-up section.
Solution
CAUSE: Sometimes the gear used for the mechanical clutch is not turned by the tension of the torsion spring even if the paper take-up solenoid is energized.
As a result, the paper take-up roller does not turn.
SOLUTION: Replace the torsion spring in the clutch with the enhanced spring. The new spring will apply more pressure to the gear in the mechanical clutch
ensuring reliable paper lift. The part number is 4111-3319-05. Please see Bulletin 3546 for further details.
1,257
MINOLTAFAX 161
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
1,258
MINOLTAFAX 170
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
1,259
MINOLTAFAX 1800e
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
Description
Solution
1,260
MINOLTAFAX 1800e
Description
Solution
Description
The unit will transmit but can not receive.
Solution
CAUSE: The unit is not in FAX Mode.
SOLUTION: Depress the Mode key until FAX is in the display.
Description
When transmitting, the received pages are all black. Same with copies.
Solution
CAUSE: Adjustment is necessary.
SOLUTION: Run the CIS Compensation adjustment in Service Mode.
Description
How to set up the unit to recognize legal size paper.
Solution
Place legal size paper in the tray, and make a copy with a legal size document.
Description
"Engine error" message.
Solution
CAUSE: There are several possible causes. Diagnostics does not identify the failed component.
SOLUTION: Please refer to bulletin 2397 for details.
1,261
MINOLTAFAX 1900
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution
Note:
Description
Various fax communications issues.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
A technician should make sure the firmware in the machine is current and the machine has been properly reset.
Check the phone line for any noise; try connecting the machine to another phone line.
Make sure that the machine is not connected to a DSL line with a filter.
1,262
MINOLTAFAX 1900
Description
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
Description
Solution
Description
The fax unit is printing very light copies.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The transfer roller if the image on the drum is dark. Clean or replace, as necessary.
2. Dirty optics in the printhead. Clean or replace, as necessary.
Description
Explanations for error messages:
* LD error
* Heater error
* Fan error
Solution
Please refer to bulletin 2527 .
Note:
Description
How to delete or modify a number in a Group Dial.
Solution
The Group Key must be deleted before modifying/deleting One Touch or Speed Dial. Please refer to the Operator's Manual for details.
1,263
MINOLTAFAX 195
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
1,264
MINOLTAFAX 210
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution
1,265
MINOLTAFAX 2300
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
Description
MF2300 or MF3700 making blank copies. The TX side was fine, but copies and RX faxes were blank.
1,266
MINOLTAFAX 2300
Solution
CAUSE: The black flap/shutter inside the printhead metal plate is blocking the laser beam.
SOLUTION: Re-position the shutter.
Description
Copies and received documents are printing out light and blotted.
Solution
CAUSE: The transfer roller material is dissolving or deteriorating.
SOLUTION: Replace unit or roller.
1,267
MINOLTAFAX 2500
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Paper size error is displayed intermittently.
Solution
The PC Drum's protective shutter may be out of timing. Also check for a broken actuator, PC1.
Description
Paper skew jams occur frequently at the transport section of the MF2500.
Solution
To correct this problem, the transport roller 01 has been changed from two small rollers to one larger roller. Please refer to bulletin 2429 for a detailed
explanation including part numbers and serial number cut in's for this modification.
Link
Description
Sporadically, the first 24 speed dial entries are lost (Speed Dials 00 to 23).
Solution
CAUSE: The Speed Dials may be lost by powering down the unit or if power is lost due to problems with the line voltage.
SOLUTION: A firmware upgrade to Version 1.00A-24 has been released to correct this issue. The Speed Dials will now be
retained in memory when the unit is powered down or when power is lost. Please refer to bulletin 2360a .
1,268
MINOLTAFAX 2500
Note:
Description
The red PAPER J AM indicator light is lit and the display message read PLEASE REMOVE PAPER. Paper jams occur everytime the fax unit is printing a
document.
Solution
CAUSE: It is possible that the exit sensor actuator has popped from its housing, feeding back faulty signals to the main board.
SOLUTION: Please see bulletin 2431 for details.
Note:

Description
Solution
Note:
Description
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
Description
Solution
1,269
MINOLTAFAX 2600
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
What printer driver should be used for PC printing?
Solution
Add a printer using the HP Laserjet* IIP driver and enable (ON) PCL4. Please refer to section 5.2, page 5-11 of the Operator's Manual. The setting is
referenced under GROUP [8. SET PRINTER], SETTING ITEM [7. PCL4].
Description
How to change the redial interval.
Solution
Please refer to the service manual and bulletin 2664 and change soft switch #48-bit7.
Note:
Description
There is no flap detect (change of the control panel menu based on the one-touch button template).
1,270
MINOLTAFAX 2600
Solution
CAUSE: Memory problem.
SOLUTION: If there is no flap detect, perform a country code reset and an SRAM clear.
Description
Talking is indicated on the LCD when the telephone line cord is plugged into the machine.
Solution
Make sure that no other devices are sharing the line. Make sure that your are using a 2-conductor line cord. If that does not resolve the problem, then replace
the NCU board. See Bulletin 2680 for details.
Description
How to disable auto reception.
Solution
Auto reception can be disabled by going into the "set utilities" under the RX operation heading and setting the RX mode for manual. See operations manual
pages 5-11 and 5-19 for further information.
Description
Squealing from the speaker after replacing CPU assembly.
Solution
CAUSE: The wrong CPU assembly is being used
SOLUTION: Order the correct board. Please see bulletin 3037 .
Note:
Description
What is the procedure to enter service mode?
Solution
The service mode can be entered by pressing the right arrow key three times, pressing the asterisk (*) key, and then pressing the start key. See page 4-1 in
the fax service manual for further information.
1,271
MINOLTAFAX 2800
Description
How to clear the drum counter.
Solution
To clear the drum counter press the Program key. Scroll to Machine Operations and press Yes. Scroll to Drum Counter and press Yes. Press No to delete the
current count. (The count will only clear if it has reached a count of 20,000.)
See page 4-12 in the operations manual for more details.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
The machine is resetting itself.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Power supply issues. Check that the power supply is not dropping out and resetting.
2. Firmware problem. Make sure the firmware is at least version 1.29 or higher.
3. Failed main board. If the machine generates a CSUM error replace the main fax board.
4. Failed PWB-MC. If the machine does not generate a CSUM error try replacing the PWB-MC board.
5. Incorrect line voltage. Use a line monitor to see if the AC power supply is varying out of specifications. There may also be damage to electrical components
due to the fluctuating power. Monitor the DC power supply for proper voltage output, check for abnormal electrical loads such as a shorted motor, etc.
Description
When sending a fax or copying a single page, multiple pages will be received or printed, each having only part of the original page printed on each page.
Solution
CAUSE: This is usually caused by ADF sensor actuators that have been knocked out of place when originals have been removed improperly.
SOLUTION: Please check the mounting of all sensors, and sensor flags in the ADF.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
1,272
MINOLTAFAX 2800
one.
Description
What can be done about the memory full indication when faxing large documents or multiple transmissions?
Solution
The memory full message can be corrected with the installation of the fax memory upgrade. The part number is: 4968-560
Description
Cannot print to the serial port using the PCL5e driver.
Solution
Only the GDI and PCL4 drivers can print to the serial port.
Description
After installing the PCL5e driver kit the MF2800 won't print large print jobs.
Solution
The 16MB memory upgrade is recommended with this upgrade. The part number is: 4968-260
Description
The machine comes with a printer port already installed. What print driver is used?
Solution
SOLUTION: The GDI driver can be used to print directly to the machine without any other upgrades, order part number 4968-520.
1,273
MINOLTAFAX 3000
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution
1,274
MINOLTAFAX 3300
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution
1,275
MINOLTAFAX 3600
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
The LCD is too light to read.
Solution
If the LCD display is too light to read please follow the steps below to correct the problem:
1) Try to adjust the contrast control. See page 5-22 of operations manual.
2) Check all connections between the control panel and the board.
3) Try another LCD display.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
What printer driver should be used for PC printing?
Solution
Add a printer using the HP Laserjet* IIP driver and enable (ON) PCL4. Please refer to section 5.2, page 5-11 of the Operator's Manual. The setting is
referenced under GROUP [8. SET PRINTER], SETTING ITEM [7. PCL4].
Description
All black, or mostly black image when scanned for copy or transmission.
Solution
Cause: The shading adjustment is not set properly.
1,276
MINOLTAFAX 3600
Solution: Carry out the shading adjustment following the steps listed on bulletin 2666 .
Description
Solution
Note:
Description
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
Description
Solution
Description
After a fax has been received the machine repeatedly prints it.
Solution
CAUSE: Corrupted video file in memory.
SOLUTION: The only way to clear this is to perform a DRAM clear. This clear will not affect any of the adjustments; it will only delete any documents in the
working memory. Refer to the MF2600/MF3600 Service Manual, page 4-19 .
1,277
MINOLTAFAX 361
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
1,278
MINOLTAFAX 3700
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
Description
MF2300 or MF3700 making blank copies. The TX side was fine, but copies and RX faxes were blank.
1,279
MINOLTAFAX 3700
Solution
CAUSE: The black flap/shutter inside the printhead metal plate is blocking the laser beam.
SOLUTION: Re-position the shutter.
Description
Copies and received documents are printing out light and blotted.
Solution
CAUSE: The transfer roller material is dissolving or deteriorating.
SOLUTION: Replace unit or roller.
1,280
MINOLTAFAX 380
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution
1,281
MINOLTAFAX 3800
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
NIC NOT EXIST false error message.
Solution
CAUSE: The error message is the result of a firmware issue.
SOLUTION: Please upgrade firmware to minimum version 1.29. Refer to bulletin #4677 for more detail.
Description
Scanning one page but it is counted as multiple pages. Some pages may only be partial.
Solution
CAUSE: Check the ADF sensors for loose actuators, connections or sensors.
SOLUTION: Ensure all connections and mounting hardware are secure.
Description
When attempting to do a fax broadcast, the machine goes into the redial waiting state.
Solution
CAUSE: The machine's second line is not set properly. The machine is trying to use the second line for some of the broadcast.
SOLUTION: If the second line is not being used it must be set for TX Prohibit.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
1,282
MINOLTAFAX 3800
one.
Description
Cannot print to the serial port using the PCL5e driver.
Solution
Only the GDI and PCL4 drivers can print to the serial port.
Description
Can the machine be used for network printing?
Solution
To print via the network, the LAN print card or NIC (p/n 4968-530) must be installed.
Description
Cannot fax from the MF3800 using the second line on a new, out of the box machine.
Solution
The MF3800 comes configured for single line use out of the box.
Description
"Too Much Voltage" error message.
Solution
Try powering it OFF, unplugging the unit and then starting it back up again. Try a SRAM clear.
1,283
MINOLTAFAX 5500
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution
Press program, J , 2 , 1, and enter twice.
Note: See page 7 of the MF5500/e operators manuals.
Description
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
Description
1,284
MINOLTAFAX 5500
Solution
Description
No power control display lit, not cycling to power up condition.
Solution
CAUSE: Possible failed main board.
SOLUTION: Replace the PWB-MAIN US BOARD, EPROM and jumper's no. 1 and no.2.
SPECIAL NOTE: Solution provided by PETER CODRINGTON, KMBS NEW YORK
Description
Solution
Description
The red PAPER J AM indicator light is lit and the display message read PLEASE REMOVE PAPER. Paper jams occur everytime the fax unit is printing a
document.
Solution
CAUSE: It is possible that the exit sensor actuator has popped from its housing, feeding back faulty signals to the main board.
SOLUTION: Please see bulletin 2431 for details.
Note:

Description
Solution
1,285
MINOLTAFAX 5600
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Press program, J , 2, 3, and enter twice.
Note: See page 7 of the MF5600 operators manual.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Can the machine be configured to dial a "9" for a PBX system to get an outside line?
Solution
This machine does not support automatic dialing of a "9" for an outside line on a PBX system.
Description
Solution
Note:
1,286
MINOLTAFAX 5600
Description
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
1,287
MINOLTAFAX 851
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution
1,288
MS2000
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
1,289
MS3000
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
1,290
MS6000
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
How can scanning be enabled on workstations with "User/PowerUser" rights using driver version 4.0.6.4?
Solution
Solution: Scanning can be enabled on workstations with "User/PowerUser" rights by preforming the following steps:
1) Sign on as administrator, install scanner and driver.
2) Reboot PC per driver installation request.
3) Sign on as administrator and delete file "jflmread.sys". Using the Search Tool on the Start Menu is most helpful.
4) Update ASPI Layer and reboot PC.
5) Sign on as administrator and run config tool to remove the scanner with red "X" through it.
6) Re-start the PC and sign on as user. Scanning should now be possible.
Note: On the MS2000, MS3000, and PS3000 the Enhanced SCSI board and the proper version eproms must be installed.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
What type fuse is used on the UC-6?
Solution
The fuse is a 2A slow-blow fuse, measuring 5mmx20mm.
Description
1,291
MS6000
Is it normal for the scanner to be seen in Device Manager with an exclamation point?
Solution
The scanner will be seen in Device Manager under Other Devices with an exclamation point (!). This is normal.
Description
Can the fixed zoom in the PR mode be changed?
Solution
The fixed zoom in the PR mode can be changed. Bulletin 3363 provides the necessary steps to make the change.
Description
When doing sequential printing with a MS6000, RFC15 and MARS4 Controller, only the first page is printed even though the MARS shows it is printing
properly.
Solution
A firmware update has been issued to correct this issue. Please update to version 25G003-00 per Service Bulletin 3545.
Link
Description
How to change the fixed Auto Image Zoom ratio in the PR mode.
Solution
Please refer to bulletin 3363 for detailed instructions on how to change the setting.
Note:
Description
Will the Hybrid and Planetary Scanners work in a UNIX* environment?
Solution
The scanners will not work in an UNIX environment.
1,292
MS6000 MKII
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution
Description
Part number for the USB (firmware)EPROM.
Solution
USB firmware (p/n 0820USBKIT).
Description
How to reset the unit.
Solution
To reset the unit, enter F8 mode and then press the "Drum dry" reset button in the front.
When the display flashes, the unit is reset.
1,293
MS6000 MKII
Description
CE is indicated after the USB kit was installed.
Solution
CAUSE: Firmware upgrade required.

SOLUTION: Upgrade the firmware to the USB version (25G1-02-00).
Notes :
1. USB firmware (p/n 0820USBKIT).
2. See page 120 in the Service Manual for the firmware upgrade procedure.

Description
After installing the RFC-21 the projection lamp no longer lights.
Solution
CAUSE:If the RFC-21 film carrier is installed without installing the included power supply board, there is a chance that the Projection lamp Drive board PU-2
may become damaged.

SOLUTION: Be sure to install the power supply board first before connecting the RFC-21. If by chance the projection lamp is not coming on, check the
continuity of the lamp first. If the lamp is intact, then replace the Projection Lamp Driver Board PU-2 (p/n 0876-6208-12).
Description
TWAIN driver and firmware for use with MicrosoftWindows Vista.
Solution
The TWAIN driver for the PS5000Cis minimum version1.5.1.0 and the firmware is minimum version1.56. The latest print drivers and firmware are available
via the Konica Minolta Download Selector. For printer drivers, access the Selector from the KMBS public site ( http://www.kmbs.konicaminolta.us ), Support
& Drivers tab, or for drivers and firmware, from SSD Web Support (CS Expert Support) by clicking on 'Download MSDS, Drivers, Firmware and more'.
Notes :
1.For the PS5000C.theItem number for the firmware is 7119660307. There is no recently released firmware for the MS6000/MS7000 MKII.
2. Please refer to attachedMarketing Bulletinfor additional information. To view a PDF, Adobe Readermust be installed. Adobe Readercan be
1,294
MS7000
Description
Solution
Description
Information for parts number (housing).
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
How is the scanner on the MS6000, MS7000 initialized to Factory Defaults?
Solution
SOLUTION: To reset the scanner to factory defaults, use the F8 function. Refer to the service manual for more details.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution
1,295
MS7000
Description
Solution
Description
Will the Hybrid and Planetary Scanners work in a UNIX* environment?
Solution
The scanners will not work in an UNIX environment.
Description
How to enable the check stacking mode.
Solution
Check stacking mode is enabled by changing Y8 from d0 to d1 in service mode.
Description
Check stacking mode works in PR mode, but not in PC mode.
Solution
CAUSE: Outdated software.
SOLUTION: Please download version 4.0.5.6 TWAIN driver (or higher) to enable the check stacking function in PC mode.
1,296
MS7000 MKII
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution
Description
Part number for the USB kit.
Solution
The USB kit is standard on the unit. There is no 'part number'.
Description
How to reset the unit.
Solution
To reset the unit, enter F8 mode and then press the "Drum dry" reset button in the front.
When the display flashes, the unit is reset.
1,297
MS7000 MKII
Description
L4 error.
Solution
CAUSE: Optics irregularity.

SOLUTION: Check the optics section for proper operation including the scan mirror andlens. Enter the F8 mode and press theMemory Input Key;after the
LED flashes, the unit is reset.
Description
How to re-scan before the ACF-7 ejects the card in the ouput tray.
Solution
To re-scan before the ACF-7 ejects the card in the ouput tray, perform the following:
1. Remove the communication Cable between the main unit (Scanner) and the ACF-7. By doing this, each unit (Scanner and ACF-7) will function individually.
a.Feed the card into ACF-7 by depressing the "Eject/Feed button" on ACF-7.
b. Scan the image from either PC (driver) or depress the "Scan button" on the scanner. This action causes the scanner to scan the image.
c. Check the scanned image quality.
d. If it is not acceptable, go back to stepb.
e. Verify it as an acceptable condition then depress the "Eject/Feed button" on ACF-7.
Description
Solution
Notes :
Description
How can the ROM version of the unit be checked?
Solution
The ROM version of the MS7000MKII can be checked using the following steps:
1) Press the Exposure Mode Selection (Auto)Key, Multi-Print Key and the Clear/Stop Key at the same time and hold them down until the S is displayed.
2) Press the Multi-Print Key until the F is displayed.
3) Press the Lighter Exposure Adjustment Key until the 1 is displayed.
4) With F1 being shown on the display press the Start Key to display the ROM version.
SPECIAL NOTE : Solution contribution by Dave Bruni, Workgroup/SSD
1,298
Objectif Lune
Description
When the printer is turned off, forms that were loaded with PlanetPressdisappear.
Solution
CAUSE: PlanetPressserializes the form by using a Majic number series. This Majic number is based on the serial number being given from the PostScript
interpreter.
The serial number given by the PostScript interpreter is too small, only two digits, for PlanetPressto recognize, therefore, the form is not applied to the hard
drive.

SOLUTION:Load Phase 3 system code, minimum version G30-70.
Please confirm the serial number is input to the system Input-Serial Number in the Tech Rep mode.
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
How to do tray pulls as well as ATS between Tray 4 and Tray 5 on the 1050 using PlanetPress*.
Solution
Set the trays in ATS as the same color and pull that color from PlanetPress. The following is how the 1050 is set up:
TRAY LABEL
1 Yellow
2 Blue
3 White
4 Pink
5 Pink
Set up the printer as the following:
1. Utility-Function setting - Feed tray- Feed tray auto selection=ALL trays in the following order, 4, 5, 1, 2, 3.
2. ATS Permit =ON
3. Auto paper type =Normal, 72-91gm (White, Yellow, Pink, Blue), No Hole-punch
Note: In PlanetPress, use the Ko1050u-1.ppd PPD. This PPD has been rewritten to include auto tray select. The only time to use it is for the entire
document, not for individual pages. Set the tray call to Printer default, fill in the appropriate color, type and weight and then select media selection. Obtain the
PPD from the [[Konica Minolta FTP site| URL ftp://kbtdigital:kx15@ftp.konicabt.com]] under Solutions/PlanetPress.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
1,299
Objectif Lune
Description
Is Objectif Lune PlanetPress* compatible in an AS/400* environment?
Solution
PlanetPress has been tested and functions correctly in this environment.
Description
Solution
Description
When a job is created with PlanetPress* and is sent to the printer, in a small number of cases, the job prints very slow. If the job is recreated, it prints at
normal speed.
Solution
CAUSE: The incorrect print driver is used to create files in PlanetPress.
SOLUTION: Do not use the Visual PostScript* driver to create the files. Use only the PostScript driver.
Note: This limitation is scheduled to be corrected in the next software release.
Description
After adding the Adobe* PPD to PlanetPress*, the Advance Paper Handling feature shows blank entries for options.
Solution
CAUSE: Following the OpenUI commands in the PPD, there are two spaces before the procedure label. PlanetPress can not translate this and when the
form is being developed and the page options are being set, those options are not displayed. As an example, in the fourth line entry below, there are 2
spaces prior to the page size procedure label.
1 *% Paper Handling ===================
2 *% Use these entries to set paper size most of the time, unless there is
3 *% specific reason to use PageRegion.
4 *OpenUI *PageSize/Page Size : PickOne
5 *OrderDependency: 90 AnySetup *PageSize
6 *DefaultPageSize: Letter
SOLUTION: Remove the extra space from the line or obtain the [[modified PPD|URL http://techweb.konicabt.com/tpm/media/Modified_PPD.zip]].
CAUTION:
1. Attempting to modify any PPD file may result in corrupting the file. Always make a copy of the original prior to editing.
2. This issue ONLY applies to the Adobe PPD being used with PlanetPress. The file should not cause problems with any other tested application.
Description
PlanetPress* 4 wants to print black and white or greyscale when a PDF or PP4 file is in color.
Solution
CAUSE: Incorrect settings.
SOLUTION: Go to to advanced paper handling by selecting the document in the document structure, then from the menu select Format and Document --
select Advanced Paper Handling. In the Paper handling before the document dialog box right-click and select the ADD button. In the section field, select the
Color Mode option; in the General field select Greyscale. Select OK. Select OK.
1,300
Objectif Lune
Description
How To Create a FreeForm Master document with PlanetPress*.
Solution
To Create a FreeForm Master document with PlanetPress:
1. Go to the Format menu = Select Document
2. Under Basic Attributes = Associate the correct PPD, under "Designed for" drop down box. Do not attach a sample data file.
3. Do not include any variable elements in the master document.
4. Under Compilations Options = "Caching Method" dropdown box select "FreeForm".
5. In the "Behavior Area"and uncheck the "Skip blank data pages"
6. Under Caching Options - Select the number to assign the Master and Identify it as a master document by putting a check box in the appropriate box.
7. Print the master document (do not use "send to printer"). This will print out the master document as well as put it in the master document list of the printer.
Create a PlanetPress Document that Uses the FreeForm Master:
1. Create a standard PlanetPress document that uses FreeForm caching (use the same directions as above but do not check the checkbox identifying it as a
Master).
2. When desired, indicate the FreeFrom master ID and page number in a PlanetPress page's Basic Attributes.
1,301
Omnipage Pro
Description
Can Omnipage Pro OCR an image file and then have the information bought into another application?
Solution
Image files can be imported or scanned into OmniPage Pro and then have OCR performed on them. The OCR'd text can be either saved to a file format or
copied to the Clipboard and pasted into another application that supports having text pasted from the Clipboard.
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Unable to scan more than one page at a time using OmniPage* Pro version 10 using the Microsoft* Windows 9x TWAIN driver. Although, the entire
document can be downloaded from Scantrip.
Solution
CAUSE: Incorrect setting within OmniPage Pro Scan Manager.
SOLUTION: Change 'Support TWAIN Batch Scanning' to YES. To change the setting, perform the following:
1. Click on 'Start'.
2. Highlight 'Settings'.
3. Click on 'Control Panel'.
4. Double click on the 'Scan Manager' icon.
5. Double click on the TWAIN driver icon.
6. Click on the 'TWAIN Scanner Settings' tab.
7. Select 'YES' for 'Support TWAIN Batch Scanning'.
8. Click on 'Apply'.
9. Click on 'OK'.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Image is clipped when using the TWAIN driver with OmniPage* Pro 10.
Solution
CAUSE: Improper TWAIN scanner setting.
1,302
Omnipage Pro
SOLUTION: Change the [Show TWAIN settings before scan] to 'Yes'. To change this setting, perform the following:
1. Select Start.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Control Panel.
4. Double-click on the OmniPage Pro icon.
5. Right-click on the TWAIN driver icon.
7. Select [TWAIN Scanner Settings] tab.
8. Select 'Yes' for [Show TWAIN settings before scan].
9. Select Apply.
10. Select OK to exit.
Description
PLEASE ENTER AN INTEGER BETWEEN 1 AND 100 message while attempting to make changes to the scanner settings within OmniPage Pro*. Any input
from 1 to 100 does not allow settings to change, and selecting CANCEL deletes the message.
Solution
CAUSE: The Konica TWAIN driver does not support settings such as paper size, ADF, brightness, and contrast.
SOLUTION: Do not attempt to adjust any scanner settings for the Konica TWAIN driver in OmniPage Pro. These settings are accomplished at the printer
before scanning.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
Description
Microsoft* Word (winword.exe) or Adobe* Acrobat* failure when printing via the Visual PostScript* 8.0.1.0 driver using simplex-duplex selecting page range in
the advanced insertion area of the driver. Researching the error code reveals a conflict with file K602psu.dll which is contained in the visual PostScript driver.
Solution
CAUSE: The Direct OCR module in OmniPage* Pro application is running in the background and conflicting with the driver file K602psu.dll. The result is a
Winword.exe or Adobe.exe application failure.
SOLUTION: Disable Direct OCR in the OmniPage Pro application. To disable Direct OCR in the OmniPage Pro application, perform the following:.
1. Click Tools.
2. Click Options.
3. Click Direct OCR.
4. Uncheck Enable Direct OCR.
5. Reboot the workstation.
Description
1,303
Omnipage Pro
Information concerning unityDESKTOP and unityDESKTOP Professional.
Solution
unityDESKTOP and unityDESKTOP Pro information and specifications .
1,304
PagePro 4650EN
Description
Solution

Answer Base

Phone: 1 877-778-2687
Description
Solution
Description
Reference Guide.
Solution
Attached is thePagePro 4650EN/5650EN Reference Guide.

Description
User's Guide.
Solution
Attached is the PagePro 4650EN/5650EN User's Guide.
Description
Service Manuals.
Solution
1,305
PagePro 4650EN
Attached are the PagePro 4650EN/5650ENService Manuals (Theory of Operation and Field Service/Wiring).
Description
Solution
Attached is the multi-language PagePro 4650EN/5650EN Safety Information Guide.
Description
Installation Guide.
Solution
Attachedis the multi-language PagePro 4650EN/5650EN Installation Guide.
Description
Specifications Sheet.
Solution
Attached are the Specification Sheets for the PagePro 4650EN/5650EN.
Description
Solution
Supplies (Configuration) information for the PagePro 4650EN and PagePro 5650EN .
Description
MSDS information.
Solution
See attached MSDS documentationfor thePagePro 4650EN and the PagePro 5650EN.
computer to view.
1,306
PagePro 5650EN
Description
Solution

Answer Base

Phone: 1 877-778-2687
Description
Solution
Description
Reference Guide.
Solution
Attached is thePagePro 4650EN/5650EN Reference Guide.

Description
User's Guide.
Solution
Attached is the PagePro 4650EN/5650EN User's Guide.
Description
Service Manuals.
Solution
1,307
PagePro 5650EN
Attached are the PagePro 4650EN/5650ENService Manuals (Theory of Operation and Field Service/Wiring).
Description
Solution
Attached is the multi-language PagePro 4650EN/5650EN Safety Information Guide.
Description
Installation Guide.
Solution
Attachedis the multi-language PagePro 4650EN/5650EN Installation Guide.
Description
Specifications Sheet.
Solution
Attached are the Specification Sheets for the PagePro 4650EN/5650EN.
Description
Solution
Supplies (Configuration) information for the PagePro 4650EN and PagePro 5650EN .
Description
MSDS information.
Solution
See attached MSDS documentationfor thePagePro 4650EN and the PagePro 5650EN.
computer to view.
1,308
PagePro 9100
Description
Solution

Answer Base

Phone: 1 877-778-2687
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Description

Solution
Description
Solution
1,309
PagePro 9100
1,310
PageScope Address Book Utility
Description
Password for the PageScope Address Book utility.
Solution
When prompted with User Name and Password for the Address Book utility, enter EKC as the User Name and 00000000 as the Password.
Description
'This device does not support scanning function' error message when retrieving address book from 7075/7085/7155/7165/7255/7272/8050.
Solution
CAUSE: The engine address book was trying to downloaded via the IP controller network port.
SOLUTION: To download or upload address book information will have connected to the engine's network port. To configure TCP/IP* address on the engine,
1. Press HELP (?) to access Key Operator mode.
2. Press (1. System Initial)
3. Set engine's TCP/IP address, subnet mask and gateway.
4. Exit key operator mode.
5. Download the address book from the engine.
Description
Unable to log into the 7255/IP511A with the PageScope Address Book utility using the default username and password provided in the documentation.
Solution
CAUSE: On Konica legacy units supported by the PageScope ABU, use the main engine NIC instead of the IP Controller NIC.
SOLUTION: Utilize the main engine NIC not the IP Controller NIC. Configure the main engine NIC with a TCP/IP* address; plug in and cycle the copier; the
ABU will work normally.
SPECIAL NOTE: Solution provided by J ohn Witter, OFFICE TECHNOLOGY, INC.
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Limited to only 100 E-mail addresses returned from the LDAP server.
Solution
CAUSE: Default setting.
SOLUTION: To increase the number of hits returned from the LDAP server from the default of 100, select 'Tools - LDAP Configuration' from the top menu,
select a created entry, then increase the maximum number of hits setting.
Description
When uploading E-mail data to the 7145, the Character to Search field is not entered.
Solution
CAUSE: If no selection is made, all the addresses are grouped under the "No Etc." field and appear under that heading on the copier.
SOLUTION: Once addresses are moved from Importable Address Field to the Address List, if an entry is double-clicked, the desired Character to Search
field can be entered there from a drop down list. The data can then be Exported to the 7145.
1,311
PageScope Address Book Utility
Description
After installing the FAXTool utility, the Address Book Utility no longer functions and an error message is displayed that refers to a file that is out of date.
Solution
CAUSE: Corrupt Address Book Utility.
SOLUTION: Re-install the Address Book Utility and both applications will function properly.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
PageScope Address Book utility information.
Solution
Konica Minolta Bulletin Number 4658
[[Managing the Address Book| URL http://konicaminolta.jp/pagescope/us/products/products/psabu/index.html]] or the [[Konica FTP site| URL
ftp://kbtdigital:kx15@ftp.konicabt.com]]
[[Importing and Exporting Address Book Information| URL http://konicaminolta.jp/pagescope/us/products/products/psabu/function.html]]
Note: To view PDFs, Acrobat* Reader must be installed. Acrobat Reader can be downloaded for free from the Adobe* Web site at:
Description
Where to get the PageScope Address Book utility.
Solution
The PageScope Address Book utility can be downloaded from the [[Konica Minolta PageScope web site| URL
https://marbt.konicaminolta.jp/crm/pssignup.nsf/NewSignupUS]].
1,312
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Why is a password required when accessing Memory RX User Box in PageScope Box Operator 3?
Solution
When accessing Memory RX User Box in PageScope Box Operator 3, a password must be input before the OK button becomes active. This box cannot be
left blank. In PageScope Box Operator 2 the OK button would be active by default.
If using PageScope Box Operator 3.0 Memory RX must be enabled. To do this go into Admin Mode => Fax Setting => Function Setting => Memory
RX=> SelectON and input a password. The password just input will now need to be input into PageScope Box Operator 3.0 when selecting Memory RX
User Box.
Description
PageScope Box Operator version 3.1 User's Guide.
Solution
The updates:

Corresponds to Box Operator version 3.1
MicrosoftWindows Vista was added to System Requirements
"6.10 Quick Printing" was added
Copyright was added to back cover
The User's Guide is attached. To viewthe PDF, Adobe Readermust be installed. Adobe Readercan be downloaded for free from the Adobeweb site at:
Description
Cannot connect to PageScope Box Operator.
Solution
CAUSE: Incorrect settings.
SOLUTION: Ensure that, in Admin Mode, Network Setting=> PageScope Web Connection (PSWC) is set to Enable and that in Admin Mode=> Security
Setting=> Mangement Function Set=> Network Function Set is set to Allow.
Notes :
1. If this selection is not present, upgradeMFP firmware version to the latest. The latest version firmware or system software is available via the Konica
1,313
Minolta Download Selector. Access the Selector from SSD Web Support (CS Expert Support) by clicking on 'Download MSDS, Drivers, Firmware and more'.
2. If unable to connect as Public User, a specified user name and password is necessary.
Description
Why, when a document is stored with PDF and Encrypt selected, is the stored file created as a thumbnail on the window of PageScope Box Operator?
Solution
This is the product specification. When the machine transmits the stored file onto a PC, an encrypted PDF file is generated. When performing Scan to HDD
etc., a document is stored in the HDD as a unique formatted file of the machine, not as anencrypted PDF file. And when PageScope Box Operator thumbnails
the file, the PageScope Box Operator and the machine do not "talk" to each other in PDF format. Therefore, the machine does not encrypt the file and the file
is thumbnailed on the window of the PageScope Box Operator.
Description
Solution

Dispatcher
Doc Builder Pro
DocuBreeze
EFI Color Profiler
Fiery Free Form
FormKaster
Linkcom
MicroPress
OmniPagePro
PageScope Cabinet
PageScope Light
PageScope Net Care
PageScope Router
PageScope Workware
Paperport
Planet Press
PrintGroove
Recollect
Scantrip
Unify
Create!Print (v2.5)

ObjectifLune
Printshop Mail

Create!Form

Captaris : 520-320-7070
RightFax

Equitrac solutions

J amex : 800-289-6550
1,314

KIP

DocForm
DocRecord
DocSystem
DocTransform

Quite Imposing Plus

RSA DTPrint
RSA IPDS Print
RSA MIS Print
RSA Qdirect
RSA RDO Print
RSA Web CRD
Description
Ifa scanned job is storedto user box and then openedwith PageScope Box Operator (Box Operator Viewer),the file is automatically deleted.
Solution
CAUSE: This is specification.The "Document Hold Setting" is set to "OFF" and the scanned jobwill be deleted automatically.

SOLUTION: Set the "Document Hold Setting" to "ON" (Administrator Settings => System Settings => User Box Settings => Document Hold Setting).
Description
Unable to connect to System User Box using PageScope Box Operator.
Solution
CAUSE:Incorrect version of PageScope Box operator installed on the workstation.

SOLUTION:To install the correct version of PageScope Box operator, perform the folowing:
1.Uninstall the current version of Box Operator on the workstation.
2. Reboot the workstation.
3. Download and install PageScope Box Operator version 2.0.11.0 (or higher) from the SSD website.
4.Confirm that the machine firmware is atversion 20 (phase 2.0) or higher.
Note :Read instructions VERY carefully before performing the firmware update.

Description
MFP and Fierysettings which may affect PageScope Web Connection, PageScope Net Care, PageScope J ob Spooler, PageScope Data Administrator,
PageScope Box Operator, PC-Fax, HD TWAIN.
Solution
1,315
PageScope Cabinet
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution

Dispatcher
Doc Builder Pro
DocuBreeze
EFI Color Profiler
Fiery Free Form
FormKaster
Linkcom
MicroPress
OmniPagePro
PageScope Cabinet
PageScope Light
PageScope Net Care
PageScope Router
PageScope Workware
Paperport
Planet Press
PrintGroove
Recollect
Scantrip
1,316
PageScope Cabinet
Unify
Create!Print (v2.5)

ObjectifLune
Printshop Mail

Create!Form

Captaris : 520-320-7070
RightFax

Equitrac solutions

J amex : 800-289-6550

KIP

DocForm
DocRecord
DocSystem
DocTransform

Quite Imposing Plus

RSA DTPrint
RSA IPDS Print
RSA MIS Print
RSA Qdirect
RSA RDO Print
RSA Web CRD
Description
Solution
Description
Solution


1,317
PageScope Cabinet
1,318
Description
PageScope Cabinet Pro does not install correctly and cannot be uninstalled or reinstalled properly.
Solution
CAUSE: User is not logged on with administrator rights.
SOLUTION: When installing PageScope Cabinet Pro , it is necessary to log on and install as the Local Administrator. After installing PageScope Cabinet
Pro, the computer needs to be rebooted. When logging onto the PC after restarting, again log in as the Local Administrator. The first time PageScope
Cabinet Pro is actually launched, it must be done by the Local Administrator account. This is not required for any subsequent logins.
However, before a new installation of PageScope Cabinet Pro is attempted, any currently installed Cabinet Pro application must be removed. To prepare for
the new installation, perform the following:
1. In Add/Remove Programs, remove PageScope Cabinet Pro, Microsoft* SQL Server Desktop Engine (if present) and the XeloPDF* driver, then reboot.
2. In Windows Explorer, go to the [drive letter]:\Program Files folder and expand it.
3. Under the Program Files folder, check to see if a Microsoft SQL Server folder is listed. If no other program is installed that would utilize that component,
delete that folder. Otherwise, expand the Microsoft SQL Server folder and delete the MSSQL$MPSC_DB subfolder under Program Files.
4. Go to the Minolta folder under Program Files and delete the PSC2 folder if it is present.
5. Delete the XeloPDFWriter folder (located off the root directory) if it is present, then reboot.
Notes:
a. There is an InstallShield string that is installed by Cabinet Pro which often prevents the successful reinstallation of the application. If running Windows
XP, in Windows Explorer, go to Program Files = Installshield Installation Information and perform the following:
-- Find the folder labeled {A8DD7529-A4EC-4D50-84B9-AEE53B37C6C1}
-- To verify that the correct folder has been selected, open the setup.ini file within that folder (use WordPad to open it if it does not open automatically).
-- Within that setup.ini file, it should indicate AppName =PageScope Cabinet Pro. After confirming this, delete the folder.
-- Complete any remaining deinstallation, reboot and reinstall.
CAUTION: This works for Windows XP only. For Windows 2000 or XP (if the previous solution is not present) a registry edit is necessary.
WARNING: Using Registry Editor incorrectly can cause serious problems that may require reinstallaton of the operating system. Konica Minolta or Microsoft
cannot guarantee that problems resulting from the incorrect use of Registry Editor can be solved. Use Registry Editor at your own risk.
b. To perform the registry edit, perform the following:
-- Type 'regedit' in the Run box and navigate to [[HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\Uninstall|
-- Locate the key HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\Uninstall\{A8DD7529-A4EC-4D50-84B9-AEE53B37C6C1}
-- In the right-hand pane, verify the value for Display Name =PageScope Cabinet Pro .
-- Delete Only the key
-- Reboot and reinstall the application as the Local Administrator.
c. For information about how to edit the registry, view the "Change Keys And Values" Help topic in Registry Editor (Regedit.exe) or the "Add and Delete
Information in the Registry" and "Edit Registry Information" Help topics in Regedt32.exe.
d. Back up the registry before editing it and update your Emergency Repair Disk (ERD).
e. To view any PDF links above, Acrobat* Reader must be installed. Acrobat Reader can be downloaded for free from the Adobe* Web site at:
Description
When using the OCR feature with Microsoft* Office 2003 Word, the process results in a garbled document.
Solution
CAUSE: The application is not registered in PageScope Cabinet Pro.
SOLUTION: When using Microsoft Office 2003 Word, the application must be registered in Cabinet Pro by browsing and selecting the executable
"Winword.exe". This is normally located in Program Files/Microsoft Office/OFFICE11. If the shortcut icon (named as "Microsoft Office Word 2003") is
selected, proper OCR will not occur due to the length of the shortcut name. Alternatively, the shortcut can be renamed with a shorter name.
Description
Unable to save multipage TIFFs as one Microsoft* Word document.
Solution
CAUSE: Requires software update.
SOLUTION: Update to [[PageScope Cabinet Pro version 2.1.5| URL http://kmbs.konicaminolta.us/eprise/main/KMBS/pagescope/pagescope_downloads]] or
higher. This update will allow for a multipage TIFF to be saved as a single Word document.
Description
1,319
When installing PageScope Cabinet Pro, the SQL component either does not load or SQL errors result. These include errors such as [DBNET] [LIB] SQL
Component is not installed or recognized, SQL Server Does Not Exist or Access Denied.
Solution
CAUSE: Incorrect installation setup.
SOLUTION: The Server service needs to be started during the installation of Cabinet Pro. Ensure File and Print Sharing for Microsoft* Networks is
installed/enabled and be sure to install the service as the Local Administrator.
Description
Why, when scanning TIFFs and trying to use OCR from a Di470/Pi4700e, does only the first page of the downloaded document show?
Solution
After installing the multipage patch, and then scanning multiple pages, the software indicates multipages but can only display one page. Thumbnail shows
multipage, but when the document is opened, only the first page displays.
PageScope Cabinet Pro version 2.14 fixes the multipage issue, however, instead of combining the pages into one job, it stacks each page as a separate
instance in the application. To view the other instances, select Window from the menu bar and in the lower part of the column will be the separate instances.
Click on the one to view.
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
How to set up PageScope Cabinet Pro FTP server to startup automatically for all users on Windows* 2000 Pro or XP Pro workstations.
Solution
To set up Cabinet Pro FTP server to startup automatically, perform the following:
1. Verify the local PageScope Cabinet Pro FTP Root Folder is setup for each user account.
Note: 'There is no FTP root folder. Please specify one' error message on the initial user login on after copying shortcut file in the default folder unless step 1
is performed.
2. Locate MPSCFTPS.exe file in the 'C:\Program Files\KONICA MINOLTA\PSC2\BinPro' folder.
3. Right click on the file.
4. Select Create ShortCut.
5. Copy the file into the 'Startup' folder. The path is 'C:\Document and Settings\All Users\Start Menu\Programs\Startup'.
Note: This folder path will depend on the network logon script.
Description
PageScope Cabinet Pro cannot be re-installed on a Microsoft* Windows XP workstation.
Solution
CAUSE: Incorrect uninstall/install data.
SOLUTION: To allow Cbinet Pro to install, perform the following:
1. Go to Program Files/Installshield Installation Information.
2. Find the folder labeled {A8DD7529-A4EC-AD50-84B9-AEE53B37C6C1}.
CAUTION: To verify that the correct folder has been selected, open the setup.ini file within that folder (use Wordpad to open if it does not open automatically).
Within that setup.ini file, it should state AppName=Pagescope Cabinet Pro.
3. After confirming this, delete the folder. DO NOT make any deletion until you confirm this.
4. Then continue with the uninstall, reboot and reinstall.
1,320
Description
Can a multi-page TIFF* be OCR'd into a single RTF file? With version 2.14 only a stacked RTF consisting of multiple RTFs can be formed.
Solution
PageScope Cabinet Pro update 2.15 now supports multi-page TIFF conversion to a single RTF file. The update is available on [[MyKonicaMinolta.com| URL
http://www.mykonicaminolta.com/konicode/Logon]].
Sales=Product Showcase=Solutions=Document Management and Distribution
Click on Pagescope Cabinet Pro=Download Pagescope Software
Select Pagescope Cabinet Pro
Download Prov215_Updater.exe
CAUTION: DO NOT attempt to dowload the PageScope application files unless using a high-speed Internet connection.
Note: This update file should not be applied to PageScope Cabinet 1.6.
Description
How to combine PDFs.
Solution
PDFs need to be combined through the PageEdit function. Once the files are dragged onto the PageEdit bar at the bottom left of the application or
right-clicked and Add to PageEdit is selected, then PDFs can be combined. The file must then be saved either to the Converted PDGF file in Cabinet Pro
favorites or another location.
1,321
Description
How can Address Book and Authentication informationbe imported/exported with PageScope Data Administrator, version 2.21.4516?
Solution
A device can saveAddress or Authentication information by saving that information to a ".txt" or "tab text" file.
To save "Address Information":
1.Connect to a device and import the existing information from that device.
2.From the left-hand pane, expand Address Settings, and select the "Address Book" icon. 3. From the top menu select File => Export=> "Save the
address book by Tab Text type". Alternatively, "Save all data to the file" could be selected, which would then save a Data Administrator *.bin file to the PC.
Notes :
a. The main difference between Data Administrator *.bin files and "Tab Text" files is that *.bin files for certain models contain password information while
the"Tab Text" files often do not. The *.bin files can also contain all Authentication and Address settings. Data Administrator "*.bin" files can only be imported to
another device from the same model family of the device that originally saved the *.bin file.
b.The bizhub 250/300/350 series does not support exporting or saving a *.bin file from that device.

To save "Authentication" Information,expand "Authentication Settings" in the left hand pane.

To save "Account Track" settings:
1.Select the "Account track Settings" icon.
2.From the top menu, select "Export"=> "Save the account by the Tab Text type".

To save User Authentication settings:
1.Select the "User Authentication Settings" icon.
2.Select "Save the user list by the Tab Text form".
3.From either of these settings,"Save all data to the file" could also be selected which will save the settings in a Data Administrator *.bin file. Additionally,
when importing a Data Administrator *.bin file, Address book, Authentication and Account Track settings could all be applied at once. This can often be
performed by selecting the device icon on the left pane when connected to a device and then selecting to import a Data Administrator *.bin file.

To "Import" Address or Authentication information to a device:
1.The device first must be connected to and current information retrieved.
2.From the left-hand side, select the Device Icon.
3. From the top menu select, Import => "Import all data from the file" in order to import a Data Administrator *bin file (from a device in the same family)
which will contain all settings. Note : Data Administrator *.bin files can also be imported when any of following icons in the left side pane => Account
Track Settings, User Authentication Settings or Address settings is selected and File => Import => "Import each data from the file" is selected from the
Top menu.
Additionally, when selecting any of these icons and selecting to "Import from a file" a *.txt or *.CSV file can be imported, which will then launch an "Import
Wizard". In the "Import Wizard" a "delimiter" must be specified and the fields being used for the data must be mapped.
The "Tab text" files which were saved from devices or any existing .CSV or .txt file (with the necessary information) could be used. If a "Tab text" file from a
device does not contain necessary information such as password information, that .txt file should be edited before being imported through Data Administrator.

Authentication and Address data can be imported from LDAP:
1.Select one the following icons from the left pane- (Account Track Settings, User Authentication Settings or Address settings).
2. From the top menu, select, File-Import => Import(LDAP). The other choice is File => Import => Import from the Previous device".
Note :Import from the previous Device will list a number of Legacy Konica and Minolta Devices from which information could be imported. It will then be
necessary to supply the TCP/IP address of that Legacy device.
Description
How can Address Data be backed up from one device in order that it can be used to configure another compatible device?
Solution
After selecting a device, then the Configure Address Data button in the Address Setting dialog box, select the addresses to be backed up. Then select from
the top menu the "Backup" selection icon. Browse to desired location and save the file as a MFP Backup File with a .bin extension. This file can then be
used to import the saved settings when configuring another device and selecting Import(File) in the Address Setting dialog box.
Description
How to import Account Track data stored in a CSV or TXT (tab delimited) file into PageScope Data Administrator 2.0.
Solution
To import Account Track data stored in a CSV or TXT (tab delimited) file into PageScope Data Administrator 2.0, perform the following:
1. In Data Administrator 2.0, once the device has been accessed, in the Device Info dialog box, expand the items on the left.
2. Select Account Track Settings.
3. From the top menu, select File-Import each data from the device. Use the drop down box to select either CSV or TXT (tab delimited) depending on the
type of file that was originally saved.
4. The Import Wizard will then appear. Specify the delimiter and parameters for the imported file.
Description
1,322
Howto Copy Biometric User Authentication Settings ornon Biometric Authentication settingsfrom one MFP to one or multiple similar MFPs.

Solution
This procedure can be used to Copy Biometric User Authentication data from one C451/C550/C650 MFP to one or multiple similar devices.
(This procedure could also befollowed to Copy non-Biometric Authentication information from one MFP, to one or multiple similar devices.

(Please see attached document for detailed instructions with screenshots)

The following isthe procedure to copy User Authentication settings from one (1) MFP to different MFPs using PageScope Data Administrator (PSDA).
Settings copied include: User name, Password, email address and user Biometric profile. Multiple similar devices could also be Copied to at the same time.
1. From the PSDA main window tool bar select "Processing/Copy"
2. From the "Copy Collectively" window click the "Authentication" radio button and select Next.
3. Select the desired "Source" machine and click "Select". This is the MFP storing the desired user information to be copied. Click "Next" to continue.
Select the desired destination MFP or multiple MFPs and click "Select". Click Next to continue.
4. PSDA will then initiate communication to selected MFPs to determine status and availability to prepare the copy process. You will see the import status
within the "Status" window.
5. Once the process is complete select "Start" to begin the "Copy" process.
6. Upon completion of writing the data to the selected MFP you will see "Normal End" displayed in the Processing Result field.
7. Select Finish to complete the Copy process.
8. T he selected MFPs now contain all User name, Password, email address and user Biometric profile.
Description
Unable to connect to the IC402 Fiery* controller using PageScope Data Administrator.
Solution
CAUSE: The PageScope Data Administrator version 2.0.3.3659 minimum must be used to support the bizhub C450/C351 with the IC402 Fiery Controller.
SOLUTION: Please download from the latest version from the [[Konica Minolta FTP site| URL ftp://kbtdigital:kx15@ftp.konicabt.com]].
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
When you "Export" or Save the Biometric User Authentication settings from the C451/C550/C650 (FW ver 58 with the AU-101 Biometric Unit
installed),
through PageScope Data Administrator ver 3.1.2
(with the PSDA Biometric plug-in installed on that PC),
as a PSDA *.bin file, the Biometric profile data is NOT saved.

As a result, that backup PSDA *bin file can not later be imported into PSDA at a later time, to thenbe written to either the same MFP or t o another
C451/C550/C650 device.

Solution

Please see attached document for detailed instructions and screenshots.

(Additionally, there is the ability to Copy an MFP's Bio Authentication data from one MFP to another or multiple MFPS in the same family which is covered in
another solution)

User Authentication settings including User name, Password, email address and biometric profile can be programmed via PageScope Data Administrator.
ALL settings for each MFP can be saved to the local PC or any location on the network to be used at a later time.
Note: If User settings are imported from a programmed MFP and a backup file is completed on a daily or weekly basis all user counter information will also
be saved and can be restored.

1. Complete User Authentication and biometric setup with PSDA and Write all data to the desired MFP. Before writing ensure all user profiles have been
registered using the AU-101.
2. Once all data has been written to the MFP select File/Export/Save all data to the file.
1,323
3. Create a folder on the local PC or anywhere on the network to store the backup data. When naming the file it is very important to identify the exact MFP
you are backing up. This data will be specific to this MFP and cannot be restored to a different MFP. Select Save when complete.
4. PSDA has the ability to apply an encryption password meaning the file cannot be opened or used unless the password is entered at the time of use. It is
not required to enter a password but if one is used dont forget to record it for future use. Select OK to continue.
5. When completed a message indicating Export to the file will be displayed, select OK t o complete the backup process.
6. If the authentication settings are lost and you wish to restore them, select the desired MFP within PDSA and import the Authenticatrion settings.
7. Once the MFP information has been imported, select Authentication Settings from the Selection Functions options
8. Select File/Restore Authentications Settings.
9. Navigate to the saved backup file and select open. Please note that each file is specific to an MFP. You cannot restore biometric settings from one MFP
to a different MFP.
10. If an encryption password was entered enter when creating the backup file enter it h ere.
11. You can choose to reset all user counters to 0 or set to the value at the time the backup occurred. Select Next to continue.
You will now see an overview of the settings to be written to the MFP including the total number of users to be added. Select Start to begin the restore
process. Upon completion of writing all data to the MFP you will receive a Restoration of Authentication Settings complete notification. All data, including
the biometric profiles,
have been restored to the MFP.
Note: If the data is imported from the MFP and a backup is completed on a daily or weekly basis all user counter information will also be saved can and
restored

Description
When connecting to a device to configure either Authentication or Address settings through Data Administrator, the message "Device of non-SSL
communication is detected, Continue?" Is this an error?
Solution
It just means that the connection is not being made over a secure SSL connection. This does not affect functionality. The rest of the message states that
SSL functionality can be activated through PageScope Web Connection if desired. The SSL setting of OpenAPI would need to be activated for a secure
connection.
Description
PageScope Box Operator, J ob Spooler, Data Administrator and Direct Print will not function with the new enhanced (Phase 2.0) firmware for the
C250/C351/C450.
Solution
CAUSE: An older version of these utilites are being used with the newer firmware.
SOLUTION: Updated versions of these utilites are available for download from the [[Konica Minolta FTP site| URL ftp://kbtdigital:kx15@ftp.konicabt.com]].
The minimum versions required for PageScope Box Operator is 2.0.3.0, J ob Spooler 1.5.0.7, Direct Print 1.1.5.26. and Data Administrator 2.0.2.3581
Description
What Engines are supported with PageScope Data Administrator?
Solution
The following Machines are supported in PageScope Data Administrator 2.0.0
- KONICA MINOLTA C450 Phase1.x, Phase2
- KONICA MINOLTA C450 (Fiery)
- KONICA MINOLTA C351 (Fiery)
- KONICA MINOLTA 350/250/200
- KONICA MINOLTA 750/600 Phase1 *1
*1 Phase 1.8 is not supported on this version.
Please use Ver.1.5.0.
1,324
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Will PageScope Direct Print support PDF version 1.6?
Solution
PDF version 1.6 is notsupported by PageScope Direct Print on the bizhub PRO 920/1050 series.Therefore, please use PDF version 1.4 or 1.5.
Note : The upcoming model releases will support PDF version 1.6.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution

Dispatcher
Doc Builder Pro
DocuBreeze
EFI Color Profiler
Fiery Free Form
FormKaster
Linkcom
MicroPress
OmniPagePro
PageScope Cabinet
PageScope Light
1,325
PageScope Net Care
PageScope Router
PageScope Workware
Paperport
Planet Press
PrintGroove
Recollect
Scantrip
Unify
Create!Print (v2.5)

ObjectifLune
Printshop Mail

Create!Form

Captaris : 520-320-7070
RightFax

Equitrac solutions

J amex : 800-289-6550

KIP

DocForm
DocRecord
DocSystem
DocTransform

Quite Imposing Plus

RSA DTPrint
RSA IPDS Print
RSA MIS Print
RSA Qdirect
RSA RDO Print
RSA Web CRD
Description
Is there a limit to the number of PageScope Direct Print Hot Folders?
Solution
The maximum number of Hot Folders that can be created with PageScope Direct Print is virtually unlimited.
Description
Solution

1,326

Description
In PageScope Direct Print version 1.1.18.9,when setting the Default Print, Hotfolder or Shortcut setting, "Scaling" is not available as an adjustable setting.
Note : The scaling setting is comparable to the "Graphic Scaling by Percentage %" setting" which can be set in the bizhub PRO 920/1050 driver.
Solution
This functionality is currently not supported by Direct Print. However if a business case can be presented, J apan will consider adding this functionality.
1,327
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution

Dispatcher
Doc Builder Pro
DocuBreeze
EFI Color Profiler
Fiery Free Form
FormKaster
Linkcom
MicroPress
OmniPagePro
PageScope Cabinet
PageScope Light
PageScope Net Care
PageScope Router
PageScope Workware
Paperport
Planet Press
PrintGroove
Recollect
Scantrip
1,328
Unify
Create!Print (v2.5)

ObjectifLune
Printshop Mail

Create!Form

Captaris : 520-320-7070
RightFax

Equitrac solutions

J amex : 800-289-6550

KIP

DocForm
DocRecord
DocSystem
DocTransform

Quite Imposing Plus

RSA DTPrint
RSA IPDS Print
RSA MIS Print
RSA Qdirect
RSA RDO Print
RSA Web CRD
1,329
PageScope Job Spooler
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
PageScope Box Operator, J ob Spooler and Direct Print will not function with the new Phase 2.0 firmware for the C250/C351/C450.
Solution
The minimum versions required for PageScope Box Operator is 2.0.3.0, J ob Spooler 1.5.0.7 and Direct Print 1.1.5.26.
Description
In PageScope J ob Spooler 1.5.0.7, can Active J obs be held and reprinted in J ob Spooler? Can completed jobs be reprinted?
Solution
Active jobs can only be changed in priority and not held. Completed jobs are only listed and can not be re-printed. Only by selecting in the driver for Output
method -Save in User Box, can documents then be retrieved through J ob Spooler. They are retrieved by accessing the User Box through J ob Spooler. At
this point, J ob Settings can be changed and the document reprinted from J ob Spooler.
Description
From PageScope J obSpooler 1.5.0.7, when reprinting a job saved to User Box on the bizhub 600/bizhub 750, the folding options either are not available or
can not be printed successfully.
Solution
CAUSE: Folding is only possible when printing from J obSpooler to the bizhub 600/bizhub 750 after a change to the default Output settings is made on the
copier.
SOLUTION: On the bizhub 600/bizhub 750, under Admin Settings = System Settings = Output Settings = Output Tray Settings, Print needs to be set to 2 in
order to utilize these settings. After changing this setting, folding options settings in J ob Spooler can be made.
Description
For the bizhub 600/750, selecting Finishing options results in a conflict error when reprinting a job through PageScope J ob Spooler. There is a drop down
selection available for options in the "Fold" selection when reprinting a job through J ob Spooler. However, when the Output Tray is listed as "Main Tray"
1,330
PageScope Job Spooler
through J ob Spooler, when reprinting a job, a folding selection would result in a conflict error and the job would not print.
Solution
CAUSE: Incorrect setting.
SOLUTION: Folding is possible when reprinting a job through J ob Spooler after changing a setting on the bizhub 600/750. Under Admin Settings = System
Settings = Output Settings = Output Tray Settings, if Print is set to 2 (changing the Default Output tray settings), then the setting for the Output tray would be
changed in J ob Spooler from the Main tray. It is then possible to select Half-fold and Tri-fold settings in J ob Spooler and have the job print correctly.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution


1,331
PageScope Light
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution

Dispatcher
Doc Builder Pro
DocuBreeze
EFI Color Profiler
Fiery Free Form
FormKaster
Linkcom
MicroPress
OmniPagePro
PageScope Cabinet
PageScope Light
PageScope Net Care
PageScope Router
PageScope Workware
Paperport
Planet Press
PrintGroove
Recollect
Scantrip
1,332
PageScope Light
Unify
Create!Print (v2.5)

ObjectifLune
Printshop Mail

Create!Form

Captaris : 520-320-7070
RightFax

Equitrac solutions

J amex : 800-289-6550

KIP

DocForm
DocRecord
DocSystem
DocTransform

Quite Imposing Plus

RSA DTPrint
RSA IPDS Print
RSA MIS Print
RSA Qdirect
RSA RDO Print
RSA Web CRD
Description
Solution
1,333
PageScope Net Care
Description
What models are supported for the Counter Reader function in PageScope Net Care 5.23.024?
Solution
PageScope Net Care 5.23.024 supports the Counter Reader Function for the C350, Di3510-Di2010 series, Di470, 8031/8020/CF3102/CF2002, Bizhub 1050
and with plug-ins installed the Bizhub C351, C450, C250, 920 and 600/750.
When a model is listed as supported for Netcare, it does not necessarily mean that it is supported for Counter Reader unless specifically stated.
Description
Why devices drop off the network and the Device Count drops to 0 with PageScope Net Care 5.53.0, build 4.
Solution
PageScope Net Care Version 5.53.1 update module has been released to address a memory leak issue in J avaService.exe. This is a beta-version of Net
Care and will only be available by request for technicians experiencing this issue at a customer site. The official version is expected to be releasedshortly.
Although devices are no longer disappearing from Net Care over time, all devices may disappear from Net Care at once and the Device list will be empty or at
zero (0).
This version of Net Care has been designed to address the issue of devices dropping off from Net Care over a period time. For the most part the issue of
devices dropping from Net Care over an extended time period has been addressed. However, if the same device is given a different TCP/IP address, without
first having its old entry deleted from Net Care through List Manager - Remove Devices, this issue could occur.
Additionally, the Default Discovery Range should NEVER be deleted from Net Care, even if Auto-Discovery is not used. Complete removal and reinstallation
of Net Care would be necessary in this case.
If a Net Care database backup had been performed, that backup can be restored through the Net Care Console Tools.
IMPORTANT : A Database Initialization has to be performed before a Database Restore is performed with the Console Tools. Net Care database backups
should be performed on a weekly basis in a Production environment. Please see the attachedDB backup documentationfor the procedure of backing up the
Net Care database.
If a backup of the actual Server, on which Net Care is installed, had been performed, restoring the following directory folder and all its subfolders from a date
previous to when all the devices disappeared from Net Care may restore the device data:
C:\Program Files\KONICA MINOLTA\PageScope Net Care
If this is successful, an immediate backup of the Net Care database should be performed. If all Devices have disappeared, and when trying to add a device
manually, the message "This IP Address already exists" is indicated, try the following procedure:
1. First try to remove the Devices from Net Care through List Manager (if the Devices are still present there).
2. Use the drop down box on the Left to Select Server Settings - List Manager.
3. If there are any devices Listed, try removing them first from List Manager Select Remove Device, from the drop down menu. Then place a checkmark
next to the devices to be removed. Select Apply.
4. If there are no devices present in List Manager, or this is unsuccessful, close out of Net Care and then Login to the Console Tools and follow the procedure
to "Initialize" the Database.
5. After performing the "Initialization", log back into Net Care and try to add the devices.
6. If this is unsuccessful, refer to attached Adding & Removing Devices documentation for instructions on deleting Net Care .state files.
Note : In certain reported cases, the symptom is as described below:

The login screen displays only the top logo and "console Tools" menu.
Admin or user login screen is not displayed.
When entering console tools, HTTP 500 is displayed.
IMPORTANT : Confirm if this is the case. Regardless if this symptom is occurring, if all devices have disappeared, have the technician collect the following
information to be included in the escalation to J apan.
J apan has reported: There seems to be a problem in J avaService.exe used by PageScope Net Care. In these cases, a memory usage by J avaService.exe
on Task Manger becomes large. To check this issue, please give us information below:

Specification of server PC: OS Version, Service Pack, Maker, model name, CPU, RAM amount, etc.
Information of CPU and memory usage by J avaService.exe on Task Manager when the problem happens. Take the same screenshots as shown in the
attached Task Manager document. To view the document, MicrosoftWordor WordViewer must be installed. WordViewer 2003 (11.7MB) can be
obtained free from Microsoftat the following URL;
Log files. Files under directory
C:\Program Files\KONICA MINOLTA\PageScope Net Care\logs
These files will be deleted after restarting the PageScope Net Care. Therefore, copy files after the problem occurred before restarting PageScope Net Care
or PC.

Any server maintenance being performed on the server such as MicrosoftWindows updates, backups etc.Obtain the schedule if possible.
Note :To view a PDF, Adobe Readermust be installed. Adobe Readercan be downloaded for free from the Adobeweb site at:
Description
The Counter Reader function of PageScope Net Care is not working.
Solution
CAUSE: The time/date setting of the Netcare Server and the engine are not synchronized.
1,334
PageScope Net Care
SOLUTION: Make sure the time/date setting of the Netcare Server and the engine are synchronized.
Description
Unable to log on to PageScope Net Care.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Incorrect password.
The Net Care default Administrator password is "admin". It is case-sensitive. It is possible to change the Administrator password in Net Care so, if unable to
login as the Administrator, reinstall Net Care.
2. The PageScope Net Care service is not running.
Ensure that the Konica Minolta PageScope Net Care service is started and running under Microsoft* Windows Services.
Description
How to start PageScope Net Care on a Microsoft* Windows 2003 Server. Questions about update of information if computer Net Care is ON/shut down.
Solution
Windows 2003 Server is not listed as a supported OS in the Release Notes of ver. 5.20.010 or earlier versions. If the compter running Net Care is shut off,
when the Net Care Server is restarted, machine information such as counter data will be updated.
Description
PageScope Net Care will display the print count not the total count in the total counter field when viewing the counter attributes of legacy Konica products.
Solution
CAUSE: An older version of the PageScope Net Care product is being used.
SOLUTION: Please download and install PageScope Net Care version 5.23.024 from [[www.kmbs.konicaminolta.us| URL
http://www.kmbs.konicaminolta.us]]. Please note that due to the MIB specifications of the legacy Konica products, only the total counter will be displayed
when viewing the counter attributes of these products. All counter attributes should be available for viewing on all products that were released from J anuary
2005 forward.
Description
How to add new plug-ins through PageScope Net Care 5.5 via Auto Version Check.
Solution
To add new plug-ins through PageScope Net Care 5.5 via Auto Version Check, perform the following:
1. In Server Setting-Auto-Version Check Setting set Check Interval, Day of Week, Day and Time settings.
2. To have the result of the Notification Check sent to the already configured Net Care Administrator account, select the Notify option. If the network where
Net Care is installed is accessing the Internet through a Proxy Server, the TCP/IP address and port number of the Proxy Server must be specified here. If it is
necessary to specify a HTTP Proxy account to access their Proxy Server, it would be specified under 'Use HTTP Proxy Account'.
3. After making these settings, to immediately check for updates, go out of Net Care and then login to the Console Tools.
4. Select Download Install.
5. Click on Check Now to check immediately for available Plug-in updates.
6 Once available plug-ins are listed, select the plug-ins to install, then select the Install button.
7. Prompted to restart the Server. Select to Restart. It may be necessary to stop and restart the Net Care service or reboot the computer for the change to
take effect.
Description
PageScope Net Care Configuration Guide.
Solution
The attached PageScope Net Care Configuration Guide addresses Counter Reader, Device Discovery, Add/Remove Devices, Exporting Information, E-mail
Notification, Console Tools, Updates, Backup and Restore, Plug-ins, SNMP settings and other necessary itemswhich can affect Net Care functionality.
Description
1,335
PageScope Net Care
Solution

identify the link.
Description
The Di7210/Di5510 is not being detected by PageScope Net Care version 5.01.020.
Solution
SOLUTION: Either add the Plugin for the Di7210/Di5510 through the Console Tool, or upgrade to version 5.10.008 which supports that model. Go to the
[[PageScope web page| URL https://marbt.konicaminolta.jp/crm/pssignup.nsf/NewSignupUS]], select the global location, and then navigate to the Downloads
page which will bring up a site of available PageScope downloads.
1,336
PageScope Router
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
"License Exception was thrown, object reference not set to an instance of an object" error message when trying to add a permanent license.
Solution
CAUSE: Incorrect procedure to add the license.
SOLUTION:
To successfully add the license, perform the following:
1. Stop all the related services.
2. Copy the permanent license to the PSRRepository Directory.
3. Restart all of the services.
Description
Unable to login to Administrator Console. Time out error.
Solution
SOLUTION: Check that all services including WWW service are stated. In Microsoft* IIS, set the TCP/IP* address of the default web site to (All Unassigned).
It was previously set to the TCP/IP address of the computer which caused problems with the Administrator Console accessing the router web site.
Description
PageScope Router temporary license information.
Solution
PageScope Router comes with a 30-day temporary license. It is fully functional during this time period. A new license must be installed before this time
period ends in order to keep PageScope Router running. After 30 days, PageScope Router will cease to function. A permanent license can be issued at this
point, which will re-activate PageScope Router. Purchases are checked against a database before a permanent license is issued.
Description
How to configure PageScope Router UNC Path.
Solution
When creating a Route for a UNC path the Computer/Domain must be specified and the user used for authentication must have Read and Write rights on the
shared folder being accessed.
Description
Receiving "Destination error" when scanning by E-mail to the PageScope Router Server.
Solution
SOLUTION: In setting up the One-Touch scan to E-mail buttons, the Route name plus the FQDN as listed in IIS under "Default Virtual SMTP Server -
Domains" needs to be used.
Description
1,337
PageScope Router
Can MFPs other than the ones listed on the drop-down menu be registered under MFP devices in the Server Console? Is it necessary to register each MFP?
Solution
Registering a MFP causes files scanned into Router by FTP to have a machine reference appended to the file. There is a Generic selection that can be used
for Konica Minolta MFPs that are not listed as well as for non-Konica Minolta MFPs. It is only necessary to register MFPs when scanning to Router by FTP.
Scan to E-mail does not require it.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Format for scanning by email to the Pagescope Router Server.
Solution
E-mail Addressing Rules:
Route to a PageScope Router OS Users Inbox UserName@PSRServerName
Route to a PageScope Router Non-OS Users Inbox PSR.UserName@PSRServerName
Route to a PageScope Router OS Users Private Document Route UserName.DocumentRouteName@PSRServerName
Route to a PageScope Router Non-OS Users Private Document Route PSR.UserName.DocumentRouteName@PSRServerName
Route to a Public Document Route DocumentRouteName@PSRServerName
Description
Unable to perform E-mail setup for the MFP device from the copier interface panel.
Solution
CAUSE: Trying to perform E-mail setup from the copier interface panel on certain MFP devices. When trying to enter the Fiery* E-mail address and the
administrator E-mail address through the copier/controller panel, there is a 15-character limit. This may not allow entry of necessary characters. For
instance, the length of the SMTP default domain name can create this issue if the PageScope Router Server computer name is psrserver1 and the domain
name is router. The SMTP default domain would be psrserver1.router.com. This name would be too long to enter at the copier/controller panel in E-mail
setup.
SOLUTION: Make these settings in WebTools.
Note: This is a not an issue in setting up routes, but in E-mail setup itself on the MFP device. This should be an important consideration when setting up and
naming the Windows 2000 server that will be used for the PageScope Router server.
1,338
PageScope Suite
Description
Where the latest PageScope Software can be downloaded.
Solution
Access [[MyKonicaMinolta.com| URL http://www.mykonicaminolta.com/konicode/Logon]]
Sales=Product Showcase=Solutions=Document Management and Distribution
Click on Pagescope Cabinet Pro=Download Pagescope Software
CAUTION: DO NOT attempt to dowload the PageScope application files unless using a high-speed Internet connection.
Description
PageScope Box Operator, J ob Spooler, Data Administrator and Direct Print will not function with the new Phase 2.0 firmware for the C250/C351/C450.
Solution
The minimum versions required for PageScope Box Operator is 2.0.3.0, J ob Spooler 1.5.0.7, Data Administrator 2.0.0.3196 and Direct Print 1.1.5.26.
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
How to detect the bizhub Pro 1050 with PageScope J ob Spooler.
Solution
Set Discovery Network Range. Select "Discovery Now" button. Enter the TCP/IP* address manually if necessary. Make sure that at least version 1.0.5.6 is
being used which is available on the [[Konica Minolta FTP site| URL ftp://kbtdigital:kx15@ftp.konicabt.com]].
Description
Unable to login through PageScope Web Connection on the 1050/920/C250/C351/C450/bizhub 600/bizhub 750. User is prompted for a user name and
password.
Solution
CAUSE: This indicates that Authentication is enabled.
SOLUTION: Either provide valid username and password (Active Directory, SMB, NDS or MFP Authentication) or turn Authentication OFF.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
1,339
PageScope Suite
one.
Description
When setting up NDPS printers using the Konica Minolta NDPS Gateway, TCP/IP* addresses are not available for selection by the Konica Minolta Gateway
setup.
Solution
CAUSE: The Enhanced Security feature is set on the 7145/IP432 or 7222/IP424 (or other models with this feature). As a result, an NDPS Printer for these
devices can not be created.
SOLUTION: Disable the Enhanced Security feature during setup of NDPS Printers for these models. Once an NDPS printer for these models is configured,
enabling the Enhanced Security feature will not affect printing.
Description
PageScope Data Administrator does not connect to a C450 or C351 that is using the IC402 controller.
Solution
CAUSE: System software update required.
SOLUTION: Version 1.02 or higher is required to connect to a C450 or C351 when using the IC402 print controller. Version 1.02 is available for download
from the [[Konica Minolta FTP site| URL ftp://kbtdigital:kx15@ftp.konicabt.com]] or from MyKonicaMinolta.com. = Service tab = NSSG = GET FILES =
Drivers / System Code / Firmware / EPROMs.
Description
Can account track settings be made remotely for the C250, C351 and C450?
Solution
Using the PageScope Data Administrator Utility. In the utility, select the desired Device from the detected Device list. Select Configure Authentication Data.
Enter Administrator Password (default 12345678). The Authentication function wizard will display. Select Setup Manually. Select either User Authentication
and Account Track or Only Account Track. If selecting Account Track, select "Input name is Account Name and Password" in order to specify an Account
Track password. On the Registering Accounts Screen, Select Add. Under Basic Account Track Information, enter Account Name and Password. Then
select Output permissions for the Account Track User.
Description
How can all faxes sent to the C250/C351/C450 (with Standard Controller) be retrieved through PageScope Box Operator?
Solution
It is necessary in Admin mode = Fax Setting = Function Setting to set rhe Memory RX function to ON and enter a password. In PageScope Box Operator,
after connecting to the printer, select Box 0, Memory RX User Box and enter the password. Then retrieve images.
1,340
Description
If User Authentication (Active Directory Authentication) and/or Account Track is enabled on the bizhub C451/C550/C650 with version 58 or 6B firmware and
PageScope Web Connection is used with MicrosoftInternet Explorer version6 or 7, the web page may be blank or tabs may be missing and/or the overall
performance of navigating the page is extremely slow. This is an intermittent issue.
Additionally, with Authentication enabled andwhen accessing PageScope Web Connection (PSWC), if immediately trying to login as an Administrator, a blank
screen results.When selecting the refresh button in the IE browser, a "Login Invalid" message occurs.
Solution
CAUSE: This issue may be caused by Web browser (IE) cache setting. Please try the following settings described in the attached documentation.
Note : To view the document, MicrosoftWordor WordViewer must be installed. WordViewer 2003 (11.7MB) can be obtained free from Microsoft

SOLUTION: As a workaround, if first logging in as an Authenticated user through PSWC, then logging out, it ispossible to log in to PSWC as an
Administrator.
Additionally, this issue does not occur with Firefox.

Description
"HTTP 400 Bad Request" error message when trying to browse to the controller via PageScope Web Connectionusing MicrosoftInternet Explorer 7with
Microsoft.Net Framework 3.0 installed on a MicrosoftWindows XP SP2 workstation.
Solution
CAUSE: Bug in controller firmware.

SOLUTION: Install minimum version 21-COS0 (IC-203) or 31-COS0 (IC-611) print controller firmware. The firmware files (IC-203 - 27.4MB) or (IC-611 -
28.6MB) and corresponding Release Notes are attached.
Notes :
1. To view the PDF, Adobe Readermust be installed. Adobe Readercan be downloaded for free from the Adobeweb site at:
2. The latest version firmware or system software is also available via the Konica Minolta Download Selector. Access the Selector from SSD Web Support
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
1,341
Description
With IE 7 asthe Web browser,the machine cannotbe accessed using PageScope Web Connection.
Solution
CAUSE: MicrosoftInternet Explorer 7does not have J avaenabled.

SOLUTION: Go to the Sun Microsystemssite, download the J avaplug-in and install it. SPECIAL NOTE : Solution contribution by Mahen Shukla,
ESS/SSD
Description
Setting SNMP v1/v2c read/write community names through PageScope Net Care.
Solution
Changing the read and/or write SNMP "community names" can be implemented as a security measure through PageScope Net Care. Please see attached
document for instructions.
Description
Can you change the SMTP port from 25?
Solution
The SMTP port can be changed between 1-65535:
1. Enter PageScope Web Connection, and login using password "sysadm".
2. Click on Network, and then select SMTP & POP3 Configuration.
3. Enter the desired port, and press apply, and exit the mode.
Description
If User Authentication (Active Directory Authentication) and/or Account Track is enabled on the bizhub C451/C550/C650 with version 58 or 6B firmware and
PageScope Web Connection is used with MicrosoftInternet Explorer version6 or 7 the web page may be blank or tabs may be missing and/or the overall
performance of navigating the page is extremely slow. This is an intermittent issue.
Additionally, with Authentication enabled andwhen accessing PageScope Web Connection (PSWC), if immediately trying to login as an Administrator, a blank
screen results.When selecting the refresh button in the IE browser, a "Login Invalid" message occurs.
Solution

KMBS/SSD is working with partners in support and R & D in J apan to obtain a resolution for this issue as quickly as possible.
If viewing this solution via the web, please establish a ticket via either the web or by calling our contact center at 1-800-825-5664. Once a ticket has been
Notes :
1.Workaround: If first logging in as an Authenticated user through PSWC, then logging out, it is then possible to log into PSWC as an Administrator.
2. This issue does not occur with Firefox.
3. This issue may be caused by Web browser (IE) cache setting. Please try the following settings described in the attached documentation. To view the
document, MicrosoftWordor WordViewer must be installed. WordViewer 2003 (11.7MB) can be obtained free from Microsoftat the following URL;

Description
Solution

1,342
Dispatcher
Doc Builder Pro
DocuBreeze
EFI Color Profiler
Fiery Free Form
FormKaster
Linkcom
MicroPress
OmniPagePro
PageScope Cabinet
PageScope Light
PageScope Net Care
PageScope Router
PageScope Workware
Paperport
Planet Press
PrintGroove
Recollect
Scantrip
Unify
Create!Print (v2.5)

ObjectifLune
Printshop Mail

Create!Form

Captaris : 520-320-7070
RightFax

Equitrac solutions

J amex : 800-289-6550

KIP

DocForm
DocRecord
DocSystem
DocTransform

Quite Imposing Plus

RSA DTPrint
RSA IPDS Print
RSA MIS Print
RSA Qdirect
RSA RDO Print
RSA Web CRD
1,343
Description
Solution
1,344
PageScope Workware
Description
Can PageScope Workware convert an image file (i.e., TIF) that has text and graphics to a Microsoft* Word document (using OCR)?
Solution
Workware can covert an image file (TIFF, J PEG, BMP) that contains graphics to an RTF file that can be opened and saved in Microsoft Word.
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
How to convert an image to RTF
Solution
If you would like to convert an image to RTF, follow steps below.
1. Open image with ImageEditor.
2. Select [File] [Save As] menu.
3. Select RTF in file type list.
4. Click save button.
Description
When importing a file, an underline may be displayed for the filename
Solution
Please perform "Update PDF". Then the underline will disappear.
Description
When using the Index Service in Windows XP, what filter should be used.
Solution
When the index service is used in WindowsXP, use Adobe PDF IFilter 6.0.
1,345
PageScope Workware
Description
What considerations need to be made if the firewall is enabled in Windows XP sp2
Solution
A warning message will be displayed when PageScope Workware starts. Then select "Unblock".
Description
Can a bound file (i.e., stacked file) be converted into a multi-page TIF file?
Solution
A group file that contains images can be converted into a multi-page TIF file.
Description
Can you add multiple keywords to a document?
Solution
PageScope Workware will support assigning multiple keywords to a document.
Description
For security, can OCR'ing of certain documents be restricted?
Solution
Restricting the OCR'ing of certain documents is not an option.
1,346
PaperPort
Description
Error 1713 when trying to uninstall PaperPort* 8.x or upgrading to PaperPort 9.x, and manual uninstall instructions for PaperPort 8.x.
Solution
CAUSE: Incomplete uninstall.
SOLUTION: Prior to uninstalling the application, ensure to
1. Back up all of the PaperPort data files by copying or moving them from their current location to another location on the system. By default, these files are
located at the following location:
%USERPROFILE%\My Documents\My PaperPort Documents
2. Follow the steps exactly.
3. Download the [[Remover Tool| URL ftp://ftp.scansoft.com/pub/updates/paperport/PP8ManualRemover.exe]]. When the download is complete, perform the
following:
a. When prompted, select "Save" and choose a location on the hard drive.
b. Once it is downloaded, double-click the file to unzip the remover files. By default these files are extracted to C:\PaperPort_Remover\.
c. Double click the file "Remover.exe" to remove PaperPort.
d. Please restart the computer when prompted.
e. After the Remover has completed, navigate to c:\Program Files\ScanSoft\ and delete the "PaperPort" folder. If this folder is not available, delete the
folder C:\Paprport.
f. Remove any PaperPort printers that are left on the system by going into "Start Settings Printers". Right-click on any PaperPort Printer and click
delete, choose "Yes" when prompted to confirm removal of the printer.
g. Empty the Microsoft* Windows Recycle Bin by right-clicking on it and choosing "Empty Recycle Bin".
h. Please restart the computer.
MANUALLY REMOVING PAPERPORT
CAUTION: These steps include removing items from the Windows Registry. If running a Windows NT 4.0 or 2000 system, log on as the Administrator for all
of these steps. Please follow each step carefully. Follow these steps to make sure that no PaperPort processes are running in the background:
1. Press "Ctrl +Alt +Delete" to bring up the Task Manager (on Windows NT 4.0, 2000, and XP click the "Task Manager" button and then click the
"Processes" tab).
2. Locate the following processes and if they exist, highlight them and click "End Task" or "End Process":
pptd40nt.exe
pplinks.exe
paprport.exe
ssindexer.exe
ppscanmg.exe
ppwebcap.exe
Follow these steps to remove all PaperPort Windows Registry keys and files from the computer:
1. Open the Registry Editor by clicking "Start Run". Type in "regedit" without the quotes and click OK.
2. Export a backup copy of your Registry in case problems occur during the following procedures by going to:
Windows 2000: Registry menu Export registry file.
Windows XP: File Export Registry File.
3. Save this file to the Windows Desktop and name the file "backup" (keep "backup" for a few days and if all is well, this file can be deleted).
4. Delete the following Registry keys (folders on the left side) by right-clicking and choosing delete. Click Yes when prompted to confirm.
Note: Some of these keys may not exist.
HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT\Installer\Products\086F24A86DD24D11A9C800046F89C202
HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT\Installer\Products\2769252AA47599A4685A1C77A0E013EF
HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT\Installer\Products\51C9ECDF54BE5D11987C0005AD61A252
HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT\Installer\Products\BA2BDFA119FD8B74A8C96A4EBBDA65B2
HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT\Installer\Products\3F1D2FEA69605D11E8A6000CF4F72A43
HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT\Installer\Features\086F24A86DD24D11A9C800046F89C202
HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT\Installer\Features\2769252AA47599A4685A1C77A0E013EF
HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT\Installer\Features\51C9ECDF54BE5D11987C0005AD61A252
HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT\Installer\Features\BA2BDFA119FD8B74A8C96A4EBBDA65B2
HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\ScanSoft\PageViewer
HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\ScanSoft\PaperPort
HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\ScanSoft\PaperPort Desktop Group
HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\ScanSoft\PaperPort Desktop View
HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\ScanSoft\PaperPort Linkbar
HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\ScanSoft\PaperPort SimpleSearch
HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\ScanSoft\PresistentData
HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\ScanSoft\PpwebCap
HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\ScanSoft\Uploader
HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Visioneer
HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\ZEON
HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Microsoft\Installer\Products \3F1D2FEA69605D11E8A6000CF4F72A43.
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\ScanSoft\PaperPort
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\ScanSoft\PaperPort SimpleSearch
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\ScanSoft\PersistentData
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\ScanSoft\PpwebCap
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\ScanSoft\Shared
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\Visioneer
1,347
PaperPort
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\Microsoft\Windows\Current Version\Uninstall\AEF2D1F3069611D58E6A00C04F7FA234\
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\Microsoft\Windows\Current Version\Uninstall\8A42F6802DD611D49A8C0040F6982C20
5. Exit out of the Windows Registry.
6. Navigate to c:\Program Files\ScanSoft\ and delete the "PaperPort" folder. If this folder is not available, delete the folder C:\Paprport.
7. Restart the computer.
8. Confirm that the PaperPort print driver has been removed:
a. Go to "Start","Settings","Control Panel","Printers".
b. Confirm that PaperPort is not listed.
c. If PaperPort is listed, right click on the PaperPort icon and select Delete.
d. Empty the Recycle Bin.
Description
When installing Unify, "Please insert the disk" message.
Solution
CAUSE: The issue occurs when installing PDF CREATER 2.0. The part number on the front of the CD is 33-F31A-10131.
SOLUTION: Select the No button and continue with the installation. Then obtain a special installer from NSSG which is an English-only version of the
software. Use the SETUP.exe file to install the software. When complete, register the software and follow those instructions. Please reboot machine after
installer is complete.
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Printing from ScanSoft* PaperPort* Deluxe 8.0 using latest PCL* driver will cause a 'PPPRINT' runtime error or reboot the Microsoft* Windows 2000
Professional and XP Professional workstations.
Solution
CAUSE: The 'PaperPort Tips' document is corrupted.
SOLUTION: The other files in 'Sample Folder' and scanned in TIF files from different Konica engines will print correctly. To print 'PaperPort Tips' document,
1. Perform search for 'My PaperPort Documents' folder.
Note: This folder is usually subfolder to the 'My Documents'.
2. Double click on 'PaperPort Tips' document to open PaperPort PageViewer window.
3. Print the document.
Description
How to get information concerning a lost or missing serial number.
Solution
[[Lost or missing serial number information| URL http://knowledgebase.scansoft.com/view.asp?tnID=1589]].
Description
After uninstalling PaperPort* 9.x from a Microsoft* Windows NT4/2000/ XP system, the computer will not boot with an error message like
Boot - can't find NTLDR.
-or-
Windows NT could not start because the following file is missing or corrupt: .
-or-
1,348
PaperPort
[[NTLDR is missing| URL http://support.microsoft.com/default.aspx?scid=kb;en-us;318728]]
Press any key to restart
Note: PaperPort was installed as part of the Unity Desktop Suite or as a standalone install.
Solution
CAUSE: All files from the root of C: have been deleted. NTLDR, NTDETECT.COM and Boot.ini have to be replaced to get the system to boot again.
SOLUTION: Scansoft has provided a patch for this issue which is available upon requrest, as there are only a few installations that may have this issue. The
patch does not update the version number of the application, but the version number of the application under "Add Remove Programs" in Control Panel will
update after installing the patch. To verify the version number, select "Support Info" under Paperport 9. The version is 9.01.0000 before installation and
9.01.0001 after installation. A new version of the Unity Desktop CD is being manufactured and will replace all disks in the field. The version of Paperport on
those installs will be 9.2.0.810.
Description
Number of folders and files supported by PaperPort*.
Solution
PaperPort 9 can only support 26 top level folders, each having a maximum of 200 folders and each one of those folders can support 200 sub-folders and
continue down the line with 200 sub-folders supported in each sub-folder. The extreme limit of documents that PaperPort 9 can handle is 15GB of
documents. This is equivalent to approximately 200,000 small files.
[[PaperPort 10| URL
http://www.digitalriver.com/dr/v2/ec_MAIN.Entry16?V1=666647&PN=1&SP=10023&xid=19198&V5=31032863&S1=&S2=&S3=&S4=&S5=&V2=&V3=&V4=&
DSP=0&CUR=840&PGRP=0&CACHE_ID=0]] is now available. The application will be able to support 16 million documents, but will have the same file
structure as version 9 with 26 top folders and 200 subfolders in each sub folder. The index engine will be changing in version 10 that will allow more flexibility
on building indexes. The indexing load can be shared amongst different workstation and have it all shared out on a server to everyone in the group. Indexing
can be scheduled and certain folders can be omitted for indexing in a particular indexing job. The indexing process is done on the workstation and not the
server. After the indexing is complete, tit is automatically stored on the server and is shared out.
The only other limitation that both versions will share is that if the data is stored on a read-only drive, therefore the indexes can only be stored locally on the
workstation and not the server, and everyone will need their own indexing.
Description
After installing PaperPort*, OmniPage* Pro fails to load with an error code of 1713.
Solution
CAUSE: Incomplete install of PaperPort or OmniPage Pro.
SOLUTION: Unistall the entire suite and reinstall the programs. For instructions on how to properly unistall the suite, refer to the [[ScanSoft Knowledge Base|
URL http://knowledgebase.scansoft.com/view.asp?tnID=1344&sQuery=1713]].
Description
PaperPort* Desktop Delivery utility will lose connection to the mapped drive on a Microsoft* Windows NT, 2000 or 2003 server after an interval of time.
Solution
CAUSE: The server will disconnect mapped drive connection after a certain period of time.
SOLUTION: To disable the auto disconnect feature, perform the following
1. Open a command prompt window.
2. Enter following command: net config server /autodisconnet:-1
Note: To increase the autodisconnect time, refer to Microsoft Knowledge Base article ID: 297684 .
Description
How to perform TWAIN Scanning in PaperPort.
Solution
Install TWAIN driver. Then, in PaperPort, select the Scan icon and under Scanner select the TWAIN device. ,Then hit the Scan button.
1,349
PAS
Description
What is PAS?
Solution
Printer Accounting Server (PAS) is an advanced network print tracking solution that enables users to monitor, measure and manage all network printing and
copying activity.
PAS simplifies the management of printers and both digital and analog copiers, and offers flexible methods to charge printing costs incurred by users. PAS
offers a complete solution for hardcopy Total Cost of Ownership (TCO) management, by tracking usage patterns, collecting copier data, and helping to
identify the costs associated with printer and copier management.
Scalable Architecture
The PAS architecture consists of a central accounting server and one or more print servers, with low-overhead authenticated connections between them.
While retaining centralized management and administration, this structure provides great scalability in network environments with thousands of users,
hundreds of network printers and multiple sites.
Simplified upgrades and useful add-on modules complete the PAS product line, providing a more scalable and flexible solution than that of any single product
offering.
Use add-on modules to expand tracking coverage to additional print servers, broaden the solution to cover NetWare or UNIX environments, and extend
functionality to include card readers, or copy tracking terminals. With the addition of Macintosh Services, all printing data originating from Macintosh
workstations can be tracked and stored in the same database and used for effective and detailed reporting.
Flexible Configuration
PAS can be configured to meet specific requirements for many different organizations. The configuration wizard helps to easily create user accounts, and
schedule automated reports and transactions. When System Manager is first initiated, the wizard starts automatically.
Description
When secure printing via the NTS device. The message 'No Documents to Release' is displayed on the NTS device after entering the passcode.
Solution
CAUSE: Both the copier and printer must be configured using System Manager.
SOLUTION: To configure the System Manager, perform the following:
1. Under NTS services, highlight devices and select modify devices.
2. Verify that there is an entry (i.e. 7045) in the Copier Controlled pull down and an entry (i.e. Konica 70xx Series) under the Copier Type pull down.
3. Review the configuration of the copier and printer in System manager and verify that the devices are registered. See pages 269 to 270 in PAS
Administrators Guide.
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Konica Announces partnership with Equitrac* Corporation.
Solution
Konica Announces partnership with Equitrac* Corporation .
Description
Unable to print from Windows* 2000 workstations. Users are prompted for billing codes that they are unable to enter.
Solution
1,350
PAS
CAUSE: The Windows 2000 workstations are not logging into the domain in that the PAS server is in.
SOLUTION: In order for the billing codes to be accessed by the workstations, the workstations must log into the domain in which PAS server is located when
using the Enterprise version of PAS.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Printer Accounting Server (PAS) has been running trouble-free, but now an error message has appeared in the messages node of System Manager or the
WinNT Event Viewer indicating "com exception caught".
Solution
CAUSE: The database has become corrupt.
SOLUTION: If using the J et database, open the database through Microsoft Access and it will indicate if it needs repairs. Oracle* and SQL* should also
indicate if the database needs to be repaired.
Description
Macintosh* documents are printing on Printer Accounting Server (PAS) configured printers, but they are not being charged.
Solution
CAUSE: This will commonly occur with a PAS Enterprise Edition that does not have a Macintosh Services keycode.
SOLUTION: Verify that the Macintosh Services Add-on key is installed with your Enterprise Edition. Without the key, the service will run but print count
information will not be submitted to the PAS database. Contact Konica Sales to purchase a keycode for the Macintosh Services. Single Server does not
support the Macintosh Services Add-on. An upgrade to the Enterprise Edition and the purchase of Macintosh Services Add-on (or the Professional Edition,
which comes with Macintosh Services) is required.
Description
The SM NTS Controller service will not initialize or communicate with the server running PAS.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. The Network Transaction Station (NTS) device requires a 10Base-T connection to an Ethernet network. In the case of a 100Base-T network, a hub or
router must have the capability to communicate with both 10Base-T and 100Base-T devices.
Note: Each subnet on the network that has an NTS device will require a WinNT server running the SM NTS controller service. The NTS device will look to the
controller service on the subnet for its IP address. TCP/IP must be an installed protocol on the network.

2. The NTS Controller service is trying to utilize the Microsoft* Loopback adapter with an address of 127.0.0.1. This problem is prevalent on Windows 2000
Server and workstations (acting as a PAS server). The reason why Windows 2000 allows adaptor values to be changed manually is to support multiple
1,351
PAS
network devices.
SOLUTION: Edit the registry key: HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Software Metrics\NTS Controller
There will be a value for this key called 'Adaptor No.' if it has a value of '0', change this to 1 (it will appear as '0x1' when changed). Stop and start the SM NTS
Controller service.
If this does not resolve the problem, set the value to 2 (or 3) if necessary. The value here will depend on the number of network devices (modems, NIC cards,
etc.) that the local Windows 2000 hardware currently supports.
WARNING: Using Registry Editor incorrectly can cause serious problems that may require you to reinstall your operating system. Konica or Microsoft cannot
guarantee that problems resulting from the incorrect use of Registry Editor can be solved. Use Registry Editor at your own risk.
Notes:
a. For information about how to edit the registry, view the "Add and Delete Information in the Registry" and "Edit Registry Information" Help topics in
Regedt32.exe.
b. Back up the registry before editing it, and update your Emergency Repair Disk (ERD).
Description
How to determine Client Access Licenses for Microsoft* Windows servers and PAS.
Solution
There are two methods of licensing Microsoft clients, Per Seat Licensing or Per Server Licensing. The most cost-effective way depends on the network
environment that your company utilizes.
If your network environment utilizes multiple Windows servers, please review Per Seat Licensing. The client machines would be allowed access to any
Windows NT server or Windows NT server (Enterprise Edition). You would only need to purchase a copy of Windows NT server and use PAS on that
Member Server, with the users being authenticated by one of the domain controllers.
If your network environment will utilize only one Windows server, please review Per Server Licensing. Your client machines would then have a license that is
associated with a particular Windows server. They must have at least as many Client Access Licenses (CAL) dedicated to that server to accommodate the
maximum number of clients that will connect to that server at any one point in time.
Some examples to consider:
a. Install PAS on a single server environment that is licensed by server - no additional CALs required
b. Add a PAS server to a single server environment licensed by server, assuming the print server stays on the original server - 1 CAL for the accounting
server.
c. One CAL for each remote management station running AS, SM, RS, DS, or Cashier. You cannot use the Client Tool (use SM Web Interface instead).
Note: If the new server is also a print server, there must be a CAL for every user.
1,352
Peer to Peer Printing Tool
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
1,353
Pi1501
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Description
How to get PageScope accessories and Page Scope Cabinet.
Solution
The part number for PageScope Cabinet only is 7650-049. For information on scanning to FTP with PageScope Cabinet, please see section 9.2 of the
PageScope Cabinet Operation Manual, which is linked below.
For the entire PageScope Suite (PageScope Cabinet, Net Care, EMF Plug-Ins, NDPS Gateway) the part number is 7650-0001-10.
For more information on PageScope, visit: [[http://www.pagescope.com| URL http://www.pagescope.com/]]
The PageScope Cabinet Operation Manual is also available.
Description
Publisher.
Solution
1,354
Pi1501
Notes:
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
WINDOWS 2000

new printers.
WINDOWS XP
1,355
Pi1501
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution
1,356
Pi1601e
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Description
Publisher.
Solution
Notes:
Description
Solution

1,357
Pi1601e
identify the link.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
WINDOWS 2000

new printers.
WINDOWS XP
Description
Solution
Description
1,358
Pi1601e
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

2.Select File.
3. SelectPrint.
6. Select OK.
8. Select File.
9. Select Print.
11. Select OK.
1,359
Pi1800
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Description
Publisher.
Solution
Notes:
Description
Solution

1,360
Pi1800
identify the link.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
WINDOWS 2000

new printers.
WINDOWS XP
Description
Solution
Description
1,361
Pi1800
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

2.Select File.
3. SelectPrint.
6. Select OK.
8. Select File.
9. Select Print.
11. Select OK.
1,362
Pi1802e
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Description
Publisher.
Solution
Notes:
Description
Solution

1,363
Pi1802e
identify the link.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
WINDOWS 2000

new printers.
WINDOWS XP
Description
Solution
1,364
Pi1802e
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
PostScript printer driver for MicrosoftWindows Vista.
Solution
The latest printer drivers are available via the Konica Minolta Download Selector. Access the Selector from the the KMBS public site (
http://www.kmbs.konicaminolta.us ), Support & Drivers tab, or from SSD Web Support (CS Expert Support) by clicking on 'Download MSDS, Drivers,
Firmware and more'.
The Windows Vista Compatibility Legend can be viewed at: http://kmbs.konicaminolta.us/content/support/vistasupport.html
Note : Refer to the attached document for a list of Konica Minolta printer drivers that come bundled with MicrosoftWindows Vista. To viewthe PDF,
1,365
Pi1803e
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Description
"User Name Not Vaild" message when updating NIC using FTP.
Solution
CAUSE: User password is invalid.
SOLUTION: The user name should be typed as: (none) then press enter.
Description
Publisher.
Solution
Notes:
1,366
Pi1803e
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
WINDOWS 2000

new printers.
WINDOWS XP
Description
1,367
Pi1803e
Solution
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution
1,368
Pi3500
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Description
Publisher.
Solution
Notes:
Description
Solution

1,369
Pi3500
identify the link.
Description
Solution
Description
Will the Pi3500 work with an HP J et Direct print server?
Solution
No, the Pi3500 is not supported on the HP J et Direct.
Description
Solution
WINDOWS 2000

new printers.
WINDOWS XP
Description
1,370
Pi3500
Solution
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
PostScript printer driver for MicrosoftWindows Vista.
Solution
The latest printer drivers are available via the Konica Minolta Download Selector. Access the Selector from the the KMBS public site (
http://www.kmbs.konicaminolta.us ), Support & Drivers tab, or from SSD Web Support (CS Expert Support) by clicking on 'Download MSDS, Drivers,
Firmware and more'.
The Windows Vista Compatibility Legend can be viewed at: http://kmbs.konicaminolta.us/content/support/vistasupport.html
Note : Refer to the attached document for a list of Konica Minolta printer drivers that come bundled with MicrosoftWindows Vista. To viewthe PDF,
1,371
Pi3502
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
How to initialize the controller and return it to the factory settings.
Solution
Set DIPSW3 on switch S1 to ON.
Description
Solution
Description
Publisher.
Solution
Notes:
1,372
Pi3502
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Description
Is the PageScope Cabinet application software compatible with Macintosh?
Solution
PageScope Cabinet application is not compatible with Macintosh computers.
Notes:
1. PageScope Cabinet System Requirements .
Description
Is the NIC included with the Pi3502?
Solution
The NIC (NC-1) must be purchased separately (item #4625161). The NIC is necessary for printing and scanning functions.
Description
Solution
WINDOWS 2000

1,373
Pi3502
new printers.
WINDOWS XP
Description
How to print from a Token Ring environment.
Solution
In order to print from a Token ring environment the end user needs to purchase an Axis* (Token Ring) print server device 640 or an HP J et Direct* (Token
Ring) print server device. These devices would attach to the parallel connection of the Pi3502 controller and would allow the Di200, Di251, Di351, Di200f,
Di251f and Di351f models with a Pi3502 controller installed to print in a Token ring environment.
1,374
Pi3505e
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Description
Publisher.
Solution
Notes:
Description
Solution

1,375
Pi3505e
identify the link.
Description
Solution
Description
How to enable AppleTalk*.
Solution
To enable AppleTalk, perform the following:
1. Log in to PageScope Light as the administrator.
2. Select the network tab.
3. Select AppleTalk and set to enable.
Description
Solution
WINDOWS 2000

new printers.
WINDOWS XP
1,376
Pi3505e
Description
Current printer driver(s) for the Pi3505.
Solution
public web site:
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
1,377
Pi4700e
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
The Pi4700e with system version 3 is unable to print a configuration page and can not be installed on the network when connected to the Di450 or Di550.
PageScope Light on the Pi4700e controller is unavailable when trying to access the controller via the network.
Solution
CAUSE: Incorrect firmware on the Pi4700e.
SOLUTION: The Pi4700e print controller should be downgraded to version 1.02 firmware to allow connection with the Di450/550. Please flash it with the
following firmware file: [[md2sv102nfm.exe| URL ftp://techweb:HelpMe@ftp.konicabt.com/md2sv102nfm.exe]].
Notes:
1. This must be done while connected to a Di470. The instructions for flashing the controller are on page T-8 of the Pi4700e Service Manual.
2. Use controller type 0 and peripheral mode 5 (the same controller and peripheral mode settings that would be used for the Pi5501).
3. The Pi4700e Phase 2 enhancements will not be available to the Di450 or Di550.
Description
When scanning with the controller, can the default setting for TIFF/PDF be set to PDF? Can the default resolution be changed?
Solution
It is not possible to change the scanning default for the Pi4700e, Pi5501, or Pi5500. PDF must be selected manually to scan in PDF format. The default
scanning resolution cannot be changed.
Note: To change the resolution for an individual job, press the clear button and then entering the desired resolution.
Description
Default password for the Pi4700e.
Solution
The default password in PageScope light is sysadm.
Note: If the password has been lost, re-set the NIC to factory defaults. Perform the following:
1. Disconnect the power from the machine.
2. Move the jumper provided at pins "OP2" on the NIC to short the two pins closest to the "FACT" label (to the left of the jumpers), as shown on page M-10 of
the service manual .
3. Turn on the power and keep the jumper on the pins for a minimum of 1 minute.
4. Disconnect the power and move the jumper back to its original position.
Notes:
1. The power should be unplugged whenever the jumper position is changed.
2. To reset the Pi5501 main board, please refer to page M-8 of the service manual .
Description
1,378
Pi4700e
NIC part number for the Pi4700e.
Solution
The part number for the replacement NIC is 4962-6010-06.
Description
C-18CF is displayed on the Di470 with a Pi4700e controller.
Solution
CAUSE: This code is displayed with the Pi4700e when the NTP (Network Time Protocol) option in Pagescope Light is turned ON and either the IP address is
not set correctly or the the NTP server is not available.
SOLUTION: Set the IP address (including gateway/subnet mask) correctly and make sure the network connection to the NTP server is live.
Description
Solution
Description
How to initialize (re-set) the Pi4700e or Pi5501.
Solution
2. Change DIPSW 1, bit 4 to the ON position.
3. Turn on the power for several minutes, or until a configuration page is printed.
4. Disconnect the power and move the switch back to its original position.
Note: The print controller should be unplugged whenever the switch is changed. Please see page M-8 of the service manual for details.
Description
C-18CE when attempting to scan.
Solution
CAUSE: Incorrect peripheral mode setting.
SOLUTION: With controller system 3 or higher, the peripheral mode must be set to 2 if the hard disk is installed or to 3 if the hard disk is not installed. With
controller system 1 on the Pi4700e, the peripheral mode must be set to 1.
Notes:
1. On the Di470 the controller type must be set to 6 for the Pi4700e.
2. For details on Pi4700e version 4 please see [bulletin 4796].
[http://www.adobe.com/products/acrobat/readstep2.html]
*[Trademark ownership information]
Description
Publisher.
Solution
1,379
Pi4700e
Notes:
1,380
Pi5500
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Patches for version 2 system software.
Solution
There are fourteen patches for the Pi5500 with system software version 2. All fourteen patches are included in the following file: Pi5500v2patches14.zip .
Notes:
1. They must be loaded in the correct order, as listed below.
2. When each one is un-zipped, it should include release notes describing its function. Please check the release notes for special instructions; for example,
the server must be re-booted twice after certain patches.
Here is a summary of the patches included (and the order in which they must be loaded):
1-2I0RP_1.exe
PageScope Light MIB.
1-4KLNC_2.exe
LCD does not refresh.
1-4CB77_3.exe
Freeform problem.
1-5D2YH_4.exe
Large jobs
1-5TQS1_5.exe
Handling of temporary soft fonts.
1-6NTAA_6.exe
Security--closes unused ports.
1-632RA_7.exe
PageScope Remote Care rebooting.
1-7UP1B_8.exe
Apache* security.
1-647FB_9.exe
Quark Xpress* issue.
1-95715_10.exe
SEAC program overlay.
1-9O0A7_11.exe
Samba* print port security.
1-AK2SD_12.exe
LPR port can not print.
1-D1A0F_13.exe
SMB printing.
1,381
Pi5500
1-HIKL7_14.exe
Upgrades the Samba on the Fiery* to v. 2.2.11.
Description
Files that have been scanned to HDD are not visible in WebTools/WebScan.
Solution
Please make sure that the Sun Microsystems version of J ava for Internet Explorer is not being used. Click on the Tools menu and select Internet Options.
Click the Advanced tab. Scroll down and, under J ava (Sun), make sure that the box for "Use J ava..." is not checked. Under Microsoft VM, check the box for
"J IT compiler for virtual machine enabled." Click OK, then close Internet Explorer and re-start it.
Please refer to this screen shot .
If that does not work, in Windows Control Panel go to Add/Remove Programs. Find the J ava program and uninstall it. Install the Microsoft Virtual J ava
Machine (MVJ M), which is available at the link below:
http://java-virtual-machine.net/download.html
Description
Solution
Description
Peripheral Mode and Controller Type settings for the Pi5500.
Solution
Set the Peripheral Mode to 5 and the Controller Type to 0. For more information please see bulletin 3646 .
Description
Solution
Description
WebScan is missing from the WebTools screen.
Solution
CAUSE: WebScan is not enabled for users.
SOLUTION: Click on the "Configure" button and enable WebScan.
Note: It may be necessary to log in as Administrator to see the "Configure" button.
Description
Problem:
"System booting please wait" is displayed when booting the controller. Re-installation of the system software fails to resolve issue.
Solution
CAUSE:
The formatting of the print controller's HDD has become corrupted.
1,382
Pi5500
SOLUTION:
1. Remove the HDD from the print controller and install it into an open drive bay of a PC (or use a USB external drive enclosure to attach the drive to a USB
port on a PC). Use FDISK or the Disk Management Utilities included with Windows 2000/XP (recommended) to remove all of the partitioning from the HDD.
(There should be one contiguous drive space if partitions have been completely removed.)
2. Re-partition and format in full using FAT32. When the format process is complete watch for any error messages or disk recovery indications. If any errors or
recovery was indicated the HDD should be replaced. If the drive format was completed successfully without error or recovery the drive can be reinstalled into
the controller and the system software re-installed. Please refer to the service documentation for the system software installation procedure.
Description
Publisher.
Solution
Notes:
Description
Solution

identify the link.
1,383
Pi5501
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Description
How to upgrade the NIC firmware on a Pi5501 print controller.
Solution
The upgrade for the NIC is done using a special utility. The utility is and instructions are attached as a link to bulletin 4672 .
Notes:
2. Click on the blue-highlighted links within the PDF(s) to view additional details.
Description
How to re-set the NIC on the Pi4700e or Pi5501 to its defaults.
Solution
2. Move the jumper provided at pins "OP2" on the NIC to short the two pins closest to the "FACT" label (to the left of the jumpers), as shown on page M-10 of
the service manual .
3. Turn on the power and keep the jumper on the pins for a minimum of 1 minute.
4. Disconnect the power and move the jumper back to its original position.
Notes:
1. The power should be unplugged whenever the jumper position is changed.
2. To reset the Pi5501 main board, please refer to page M-8 of the service manual .
Description
Publisher.
Solution
1,384
Pi5501
Notes:
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Description
What is required to scan to file and/or scan to E-mail using the Pi5501?
Solution
First, make sure the current firmware is installed in the copier/printer and the current system software is installed in the print controller. Please refer to
bulletin 3103L for the current firmware for the Di450/550.
The Scanner Mode requires that 64MB of memory be installed in the copier/printer. Memory requirements are detailed in bulletin 3159 . Please refer to the
following for the correct peripheral mode setting in the copier/printer. The information is from bulletin 3646 .
Pi5500 with system software 2.0 or greater Peripheral Mode 4
Pi5500 with system software less than 2.0 Peripheral Mode 3
Pi5501 Peripheral Mode 5

The above settings are accessible through tech rep service mode, tech rep choice, controller set, and peripheral mode.
After making sure the copier/printer is configured properly, select the scan key, select the direct button, enter a number from 0001 to 9999 and hit the start key
to scan. To retrieve the scan from the Pi5501, open PageScope Light by entering the TCP/IP* address of the controller in the web browser. Click on the
Fiery* WebTools button at the bottom of the PageScope Light window and select Fiery WebScan. Enter the four-digit number entered at the copier/printer
when the original was scanned and click the refresh button. The scanned image should be listed. Click the Save As button to save the scanned image as a
TIF or PDF file. Also refer to the Setup instruction for the Pi5500 controller using the Scan to Email option document
Notes:
1. The Pi5501 is not supported on the Di470; the Di470 supports the Pi5500 and the Pi4700e. The Pi5501 is compatible only with the Di450 and Di550.
2. The controller type should always be set to 0.
3. Please also see the Pi5500 Getting Started manual .
1,385
Pi5501
Description
ERROR LOGGING IN UPDATE USER message when trying to update the NIC.
Solution
CAUSE: Incorrect update procedure.
SOLUTION: NIC Firmware can be updated by using download utilities. FTPDL150A is used for TCP/IP* protocol.
1. Set up FTPDL150A (TCP/IP).
2. Launch the program FTP Download.
3. Click File, Download, then select the F/W file (dls633a.upd) from file menu.
4. Enter the TCP/IP Address of the NIC (if it is not possible to PING the NIC from your local machine, configure its TCP/IP addresses so that the controller
NIC and the PC are on the same local network).
5. Enter the password 'sysadm'.
Note: If the password has been changed and is not available, the NVRAM settings will need to be reset to factory defaults.
6. After successfully updated, power OFF/ON the printer and check the firmware version in PageScope Lite.
Note: Downloading usually takes several minutes to finish. Do NOT power OFF the printer until the utility prompts.
Description
How to set up scan to FTP with the Pi5501.
Solution
Refer to Service Bulletin 3453 for instructions on setting up scanning to FTP or E-mail.
Service Bulletin 3646 shows the correct Peripheral Mode settings on the copier.
Notes:
1. The controller type should always be set to 0 for the Pi5501.
1,386
Pi6000
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Description
Publisher.
Solution
Notes:
Description
Solution

1,387
Pi6000
identify the link.
Description
Solution
Description
How to determine the TCP/IP* address of the Pi6000 print controller.
Solution
To determine the TCP/IP address of the Pi6000 print controller, perform the following:
1. Make sure the Pi6000 is properly attached to the copier/printer, then unplug the network cable.
2. Power OFF/ON the controller and a configuration page containing the TCP/IP address will be printed.
Notes:
a. The TCP/IP controller utility ( utiltcp.zip ) can also be used.
b. The Network User's Manual describes the use of the TCP/IP utility beginning on page 4-20.
c. To view the above PDF(s), Acrobat* Reader must be installed. Acrobat Reader can be downloaded for free from the Adobe* Web site at:
d. To open the ZIP file(s), WinZip* must be installed. WinZip can be downloaded from the [[WinZip website| URL http://www.winzip.com/ddchomea.htm]].
Description
Solution
WINDOWS 2000

new printers.
WINDOWS XP
1,388
Pi6000
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution
1,389
Pi6200
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
Description
Publisher.
Solution
Notes:
1,390
Pi6200
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Description
Parts manual for the Fiery Pi6200.
Solution
Note:
Description
Solution
WINDOWS 2000

new printers.
1,391
Pi6200
WINDOWS XP
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
1,392
Pi6500e
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Pi6500e system software.
Solution
The correct system softwares depend on the Pi6500e configuration, as follows:
Pi6500e PCL (basic configuration, no hard disk/scan kit), v. 1.1i -- 7660-4699-51 plus the patches attached to service bulletin 4675.
Pi6500e PS (with PostScript 3, but no hard disk/scan kit) , v. 1.1i -- 7660-4699-51 plus the patches attached to service bulletin 4675.
Pi6500e HDD/PS with PS3 +Scan Kit, v. 1.1e -- 7660-4699-50 plus the patches attached to service bulletin 4403C.
System software can be ordered on CD or [[downloaded| URL http://techweb.konicabt.com/DownloadSelector/SearchResults.aspx?CNAME=pi6500e]] from
the NSSG web site.
Notes:
1. The chip with the CG marking is for the PS 3 configuration with no scan kit; the one marked with CD is for the PS3 +scan kit.
2. System Software installation instructions can be found on page 17 of the Pi6500e Service Guide .
3. The Pi6500e User Software (which includes printer drivers) is also available on CD. The PostScript version is item #7660-4699-41 and the PCL version is
item #7660-4699-14.
4. Patches must be loaded in the correct order and the controller must be re-booted after each one is loaded.
Description
SC49-01, SC49-02, or SC49-03 codes.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
Notes :
1,393
Pi6500e
Description
Correct procedure for downloading patches to a Pi6500e with the HDD/Scan Kit +PS3 option.
Solution
Patch files must be loaded in the order shown in bulletin 4403c by using Fiery Downloader or Command Workstation. (Always download patches to the
direct queue of the controller.) Be sure to print a configuration page before beginning because network and controller settings may be lost during the upgrade
procedure. Also make sure that the copier's firmware has been updated. The controller must be rebooted after each patch is installed.
Notes:
1. A different set of patches is used with the Pi6500e if it is not configured with the HDD/Scan Kit option.
2. To view the above PDF, Acrobat* Reader must be installed. Acrobat Reader can be downloaded for free from the Adobe* web site at:
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
Description
A Pi6500e with no hard disk (PCL* only) keeps restarting or rebooting.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
1. Poor connections.
Reseat and check all connections to the controller.
2. Incorrect soft switch settings.
If there is no HDD/scan kit installed, make sure soft switch 28-1 is set to "ON" and soft switch 28-4 is set to "OFF."
3. Corrupted system software.
If the booting problem persists, reinstall the PCL firmware (Item #7660-4699-51). Please see bulletin 4394 and the [[Pi6500e Installation Procedure |URL
http://techweb.konicabt.com/tpm/media/Pi6500einstallsb4394.pdf]] for additional detail.
Description
When printing 20 to 30 sets in booklet, the copier/printer will lock up when switching between paper trays. If the job is printed from queue, it works correctly
the second time. Problem is only visible when there are multiple jobs in the copier side.
Solution
CAUSE: Customer was using a custom-made PostScript* application to print.
SOLUTION: Switch from using the PostScript driver to the PCL* driver. Something in the data stream from the application was conflicting with the PostScript
driver.
Description
How to install system software.
1,394
Pi6500e
Solution
Please refer to pages 17-23 of the Pi6500e Service Guide. Be sure to install all current patches after the system software has been loaded.
Note:

1,395
Pi6500Pro
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
SC49-01, SC49-02, or SC49-03 codes.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
Notes :
Description
Solution
Description
What I/F Kit is required for installation on the Di650?
Solution
I/F Kit M (p/n 4584-612).
Description
Solution
1,396
Pi6500Pro
Description
Is the Microsoft* Windows x64 operating system supported?
Solution
The Pi6500Pro does not support the Windows x64 operating system. Furthermore, Konica Minolta World Headquarters in J apan has informed Konica Minolta
Business Solutions that there is no plan to support the 64-bit operating system in the foreseeable future.
Description
Publisher.
Solution
Notes:
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
1,397
Pi7200e
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
How to set up scan to E-mail, scan to file, and scan to FTP on the Pi7200e.
Solution
To set up scan to E-mail, scan to file, and scan to FTP on the Pi7200e:
1. Make sure the PS3+Scan Kit has been installed with the correct key chip and the correct system software and patches have been loaded.
2. Please refer to the Pi7200e Scanner Mode User Manual for details on setting up the scanning functions.
Description
SC49-01, SC49-02, or SC49-03 codes.
Solution
PROBABLE CAUSES:
Notes :
Description
FTP and HDD scanning are "grayed out" on the MFP control panel.
Solution
CAUSE: Incorrect memory switch setting.

SOLUTION: Change memory switches 45, 46, and 47 in the Key Operator Mode to "No Mask."
Description
1,398
Pi7200e
Printer driver support for Microsoft* Windows 64-bit operating system.
Solution
The Pi7200e does not support the Windows x64 operating system. Furthermore, Konica Minolta World Headquarters in J apan has informed Konica Minolta
Business Solutions that there is no plan to support the 64-bit operating system in the foreseeable future.
Description
Part number of HDD (part of PS/scan kit).
Solution
PS/scan kit HDD (p/n 4502-7525R).
Note : This does not include the PostScript chip.
Description
'Now uploading data' message when attempting to scan.
Solution
CAUSE: Software problem.
SOLUTION: Load the patches below, which are referred to in Service Bulletin 4897A .
1. 1-703nu_1.exe
This patch file adds the Konica Minolta Logo in PageScope Light and allows the Pi7200e controller to function properly with other PageScope applications.
2. 1-EY9DB_2.exe
This patch prevents 'Now Uploading Data' message from being displayed when a print job is sent while the Scan to E-mail or the Scan to FTP function is
being used.
3. 1-EP7SX_3.exe
This patch corrects the following issues:
a. The Scanned data was lost and the controller automatically restarted.
b. In Web Scan the data that was scanned to the HDD is displayed as Not Available.
c. When using the save button in Web Scan, an error may have been encountered, and then the controller would automatically restart.
Notes:
3. The WinZip file(s), once downloaded, should have the extension changed from ZIP to EXE. When renamed, the files are self-extracting.

Description
Solution
Description
Solution
1,399
Pi7500
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
Description
Publisher.
Solution
Notes:
1,400
Pi7500
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
WINDOWS 2000

new printers.
WINDOWS XP
1,401
Pi7500
Description
Problem:
After upgrading the copier's flash ROM (firmware), print jobs being sent to the copier are not being output. Print jobs appear to be sent to the copier, but never
print.
Solution
CAUSE:
Outdated system software in the controller. Version 1.0 in not compatable with the latest copier flash ROM.
SOLUTION:
Upgrade the print controller system software to version 2.0 . The part number for the system software is part number 7660-4685-42.
Description
When printing a document using Free Form, the edge of the master image is cut off. When using portrait-sized paper about 11mm from the right edge of the
master image is cut off. When using landscape-sized paper about 11mm. from the bottom edge of the master image is cut off.
Solution
CAUSE: This issue is caused by a bug in the system software version 2.0 and is found when using the PostScript* emulation and the following operating
systems: Macintosh*, Microsoft* Windows 2000, 95/98, and NT 4.0.
SOLUTION: Install PostScript patch file 1-4Q76U.PS to the print queue of the Pi7500 using Fiery* Downloader or Fiery Web Downloader. Wait 60 seconds
after successfully downloading the patch file to allow sufficient time for the file to be RIPed and installed. The print controller should then be restarted. Print a
controller configuration page and confirm that the patch file has been successfully installed. The patch will appear under a heading labeled "Update
Information." Please see bulletin 4402 for details.
Description
Solution
1,402
Pi8500Pro
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
'Now uploading data' message and the system appears to have locked up.
Solution
CAUSE: Software conflict between scan jobs and print jobs.
SOLUTION: This can be corrected with patch files for the Pi8500Pro. These files must be loaded in the following order:
1. 1-2I0RP.ps
2. 1-9L4TG.ps
3. 1-9W4VP.ps
4. 1-D9I5K.ps
5. 1-EK8V9.ps
Notes:
a. Before loading the patches, please upgrade the system software of the controller to version 1.01w or higher.
b. Patches can be downloaded using Fiery* Downloader or Command WorkStation. The can also be found on the [[Konica Minolta FTP site| URL
c. The Pi8500Pro must be re-booted twice between the install of each patch. Print a configuration page to verify successful patch install and order.
d. The item number of the Pi8500Pro system software is 7660-4027-42.
e. Please refer to bulletins 4385 and 4393 as well as the Patch File Install Guide for details.
f. To view the above PDF(s), Acrobat* Reader must be installed. Acrobat Reader can be downloaded for free from the Adobe* Web site at:
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
Description
How to print on 12x18 paper from the controller.
1,403
Pi8500Pro
Solution
To print on 12x18 paper from the controller, perform the following:
1. Set the manual bypass for 11x17W on the printer front panel.
2. In printing preferences select Manual Feed as the paper source.
3. Under the Fiery* Printing tab expand paper source and select "Tabloid" as the paper size.
4. Under the Fiery Printing tab expand paper source and check "Wide Paper."
Description
'Now uploading data' message and the system appears to have locked up.
Solution
CAUSE: Software conflict between scan jobs and print jobs.
SOLUTION: This can be corrected with patch files for the Pi8500. These files must be loaded in the following order:
1. 1-2I0RP.ps
2. 1-9L4TG.ps
3. 1-9W4VP.ps
4. 1-D9I5K.ps
5. 1-EK8V9.ps
Notes:
a. Before loading the patches, please upgrade the system software of the controller to version 1.01w or higher.
b. Patches can be downloaded using Fiery* Downloader or Command WorkStation. The can also be found on the [[Konica Minolta FTP site| URL
c. The Pi8500 must be re-booted twice between the install of each patch. Print a configuration page to verify successful patch install and order.
d. The item number of the Pi8500 system software is 7660-4027-42.
e. Please refer to bulletins 4385 and 4393 as well as the Patch File Install Guide for details.
f. To view the above PDF(s), Acrobat* Reader must be installed. Acrobat Reader can be downloaded for free from the Adobe* Web site at:
Description
Printer spool file errors when printing to the Konica Minolta print controllers using Corel* Draw 12.
Solution
CAUSE: This error is commonly caused by the \WINDOWS\SPOOL folder or \WINDOWS\SYSTEM32\SPOOL becoming too full or unable to accept new
data.
SOLUTION: If this occurs, ensure that the SPOOL folder in the WINDOWS folder is purged of old print jobs. The spooler can also be disabled in the printer
driver properties. For most printer drivers, click Start, Settings, Printers. Click the printer icon and click File, Properties. Click Details, Spool Settings. Enable
the Print Directly To Printer check box.
Note: To easily find the SPOOL folder select "Start"=="Search" and enter "Spool" as the key word for the search.
Description
Publisher.
Solution
1,404
Pi8500Pro
Notes:
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
1,405
Pi8501Pro
Description
Solution
minor issues."
Notes :
Firmware and more'.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
Description
Publisher.
Solution
Notes:
1,406
Pi8501Pro
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
WINDOWS 2000

new printers.
WINDOWS XP
1,407
Pi8501Pro
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution
1,408
Printgroove POD
Description
Printgroove-supported Konica Minolta MFPs.
Solution
Printgroove supports the following Konica Minolta MFPs:
bizhub PRO 1050
bizhub PRO 920
bizhub PRO C6500
bizhub PRO C500
8050
7085
Notes :
1. The IC-408 and the IC-304 print controllers for the bizhub PRO C6500are not supported at this time.

Support for the IC-408 will be available withsystem code version 1.1.

Release of system code for both controllers is currently set for the end of the 1st quarter 2008 although the releaseschedulemay be subject to change.
2.Please see attached document for complete list of supported peripherals as well as the required firmware levels needed to support Printgroove.
Description
Unable to manually enable printer with possible error message of "The selected printer is not PDF supported".
Solution
CAUSE: SNMP communication between Queue and printersis not established.

SOLUTION:To manually enable printer in Queue,wait approximately 3 minutes for the SNMP communication to be properly established between Queue and
the printer. Please refer to the attacheddocumentation for detail instructions on this process.

Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
How to verifyPrintgroove version.
Solution
To verify the version of all the modules of the Printgroove POD Server, perform the following:
1. From a Web browser, log intoPrintgroove Admin.
2. On the left-hand side, click on Control.
3. From the Control screen click onthe Printgroove module to view the version information.

To verify version of the Queue client software, perform the following;
1. Open Queue client software and login into Queue module.
2. Select Help -> About Printgroove POD Queue
3. The version and the build number will be listed for the Queue Client software.
Note : Please refer tothe attached screen shots for additional aid in locating theversion information
1,409
Printgroove POD
Description
How to collect log files from the Printgroove Server.
Solution
To collect log files from the Printgroove Server, perform the following:
1. From a Web browser, log into Printgroove Admin.
Note : The default username is sysadmin and the password is password .
2. Select "Logs" from the selections on the left side.
3. Select "Files" from the three Log selections.
4.Select the desired module.
5. Click on the log file to download and save.
Notes :
a. It is not necessary to save all log files from a particular module, just save the log files that pertain to date of problem occurrence.
b. Please see attacheddocumentation for additional information onPrintgroove log files. To view a PDF, Adobe Readermust be installed. Adobe Reader
c. Thefollowing isadditionaldetail on the function of the Modules listed in the log files.

PdfServer - Usedby Queue to inspect PDF files

Apache2 (Error & Access) - Web server used to manage incoming web requests

Postgresql - Used to store data for Admin/Serve/SG/Queue

Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Unable to "Enable" the printer; printer status icon will not change to "green" when "Enable" is selected.
Solution
CAUSE: Username and password has not been provided or is incorrect.

SOLUTION: A valid username and password is required to allow the Printgroove "Queue" to enablethe printer.
The following Printgroove supported printers require a username and password;
bizhub PRO C6500 (IC-303 and IC-408)
bizhub PRO C500 (IP-901, IC-302, IC-405)
8050 (IP-901)
The username and passwordis the one that is used when logging into Command WorkStation of the Fierycontroller.
The default username and password forCommand WorkStation loginis "admin" and the password is "Fiery.1".
Notes :
1. Please be sure that a password has been applied to the Fierycontroller login. No password (blank) is not acceptable for Printgroove "Queue".
2. Please refer to the attached file for more detail on enabling a printer that requires a username and password.
Description
1,410
Printgroove POD
Unknown jobs are listed in the "Printer J ob panel" view and cannot be removed.
Solution

KMBS/SSD/ESS is working with partners in support and R & D in J apan to obtain a resolution for this issue as quickly as possible.
Testing in KMBS/SSD/ESS has not shown any ill affects of the operationof Queue as print jobs are still available to be sent to Queue and printed.
Note :If viewing this solution via the web, please establish a ticket via either the web or by calling our contact center at 1-800-825-5664. Once a ticket has
Description
Solution

Dispatcher
Doc Builder Pro
DocuBreeze
EFI Color Profiler
Fiery Free Form
FormKaster
Linkcom
MicroPress
OmniPagePro
PageScope Cabinet
PageScope Light
PageScope Net Care
PageScope Router
PageScope Workware
Paperport
Planet Press
PrintGroove
Recollect
Scantrip
Unify
Create!Print (v2.5)

ObjectifLune
Printshop Mail

Create!Form

Captaris : 520-320-7070
RightFax

Equitrac solutions

J amex : 800-289-6550

1,411
Printgroove POD
KIP

DocForm
DocRecord
DocSystem
DocTransform

Quite Imposing Plus

RSA DTPrint
RSA IPDS Print
RSA MIS Print
RSA Qdirect
RSA RDO Print
RSA Web CRD
Description
Number of supported print devices.
Solution
The entry level version of Printgroove Queue supports up to 5 devices. Additional licenses may be purchased to support up to 10 devices.
1,412
Printgroove POD ADMIN
Description
Solution
bizhub PRO 1050
bizhub PRO 920
bizhub PRO C6500
bizhub PRO C500
8050
7085
Notes :


Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution

Description
Solution
Notes :
1,413




Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution

Dispatcher
Doc Builder Pro
DocuBreeze
EFI Color Profiler
Fiery Free Form
FormKaster
Linkcom
MicroPress
OmniPagePro
PageScope Cabinet
PageScope Light
PageScope Net Care
PageScope Router
PageScope Workware
Paperport
Planet Press
PrintGroove
Recollect
Scantrip
Unify
1,414
Create!Print (v2.5)

ObjectifLune
Printshop Mail

Create!Form

Captaris : 520-320-7070
RightFax

Equitrac solutions

J amex : 800-289-6550

KIP

DocForm
DocRecord
DocSystem
DocTransform

Quite Imposing Plus

RSA DTPrint
RSA IPDS Print
RSA MIS Print
RSA Qdirect
RSA RDO Print
RSA Web CRD
Description
Is customer account input via LDAP supported?
Solution
Customer accounts are either input by the Applications Administrator or input by the customer and then approved by either the Application Adminstrator or the
supervisor of customer.
Description
Default usernames and passwords.
Solution
The default user name andpassword are:
username- sysadmin
password- password

Printgroove POD SERVE
username- joeuser
password- password
username- sueboss
password- password
Note : sueboss is the default administrator and joeuser is the default user.

Printgroove POD GUIDE
username- psc
password- password
1,415
username- appadmin
password- password

Printgroove POD QUEUE
username- wtell
password- sysadm
Description
1,416
Description
Solution
bizhub PRO 1050
bizhub PRO 920
bizhub PRO C6500
bizhub PRO C500
8050
7085
Notes :


Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution

Description
Solution
Notes :
1,417




Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution

Dispatcher
Doc Builder Pro
DocuBreeze
EFI Color Profiler
Fiery Free Form
FormKaster
Linkcom
MicroPress
OmniPagePro
PageScope Cabinet
PageScope Light
PageScope Net Care
PageScope Router
PageScope Workware
Paperport
Planet Press
PrintGroove
Recollect
Scantrip
Unify
1,418
Create!Print (v2.5)

ObjectifLune
Printshop Mail

Create!Form

Captaris : 520-320-7070
RightFax

Equitrac solutions

J amex : 800-289-6550

KIP

DocForm
DocRecord
DocSystem
DocTransform

Quite Imposing Plus

RSA DTPrint
RSA IPDS Print
RSA MIS Print
RSA Qdirect
RSA RDO Print
RSA Web CRD
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
username- sysadmin
password- password

username- joeuser
password- password
username- sueboss
password- password

username- psc
password- password
1,419
username- appadmin
password- password

username- wtell
password- sysadm
Description
1,420
Description
Solution
bizhub PRO 1050
bizhub PRO 920
bizhub PRO C6500
bizhub PRO C500
8050
7085
Notes :


Description
Unable to manually enable printer with possible error message of "The selected printer is not PDF supported".
Solution
CAUSE: SNMP communication between Queue and printersis not established.

SOLUTION:To manually enable printer in Queue,wait approximately 3 minutes for the SNMP communication to be properly established between Queue and
the printer. Please refer to the attacheddocumentation for detail instructions on this process.

Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution

1,421
Description
Solution
Notes :




Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Unable to "Enable" the printer; printer status icon will not change to "green" when "Enable" is selected.
Solution
CAUSE: Username and password has not been provided or is incorrect.

SOLUTION: A valid username and password is required to allow the Printgroove "Queue" to enablethe printer.
The following Printgroove supported printers require a username and password;
bizhub PRO C6500 (IC-303 and IC-408)
bizhub PRO C500 (IP-901, IC-302, IC-405)
8050 (IP-901)
The username and passwordis the one that is used when logging into Command WorkStation of the Fierycontroller.
The default username and password forCommand WorkStation loginis "admin" and the password is "Fiery.1".
Notes :
1. Please be sure that a password has been applied to the Fierycontroller login. No password (blank) is not acceptable for Printgroove "Queue".
2. Please refer to the attached file for more detail on enabling a printer that requires a username and password.
Description
1,422
Unknown jobs are listed in the "Printer J ob panel" view and cannot be removed.
Solution

KMBS/SSD/ESS is working with partners in support and R & D in J apan to obtain a resolution for this issue as quickly as possible.
Testing in KMBS/SSD/ESS has not shown any ill affects of the operationof Queue as print jobs are still available to be sent to Queue and printed.
Note :If viewing this solution via the web, please establish a ticket via either the web or by calling our contact center at 1-800-825-5664. Once a ticket has
Description
After moving Printgroove to a different network segment, when attempting to add printers in Queue,they cannot be enabledon the new LAN.
Solution

SOLUTION: Please do the following when attaching Printgroove to a different network segment.
Before detaching from the current network:
1. Sign into Queue.
2. Send all jobs back to Guide or delete them from Queue.
3. Delete all printers from Queue.
4. From the configuration menu => server setup => SNMP.
5. Reset discovery range to 127.0.0.1 - 127.0.0.1 6.
Note :Discovery Rate is set to "off".
6.After attaching to the new network segment, reset the discovery range to include allTCP/IP addresses of the printers needed for Queue. This must be done
even if notusing the Auto Discovery rate.
7.After setting the discovery range, reboot the server.
Description
Solution

Dispatcher
Doc Builder Pro
DocuBreeze
EFI Color Profiler
Fiery Free Form
FormKaster
Linkcom
MicroPress
OmniPagePro
PageScope Cabinet
PageScope Light
PageScope Net Care
PageScope Router
PageScope Workware
Paperport
Planet Press
PrintGroove
Recollect
Scantrip
Unify
1,423
Create!Print (v2.5)

ObjectifLune
Printshop Mail

Create!Form

Captaris : 520-320-7070
RightFax

Equitrac solutions

J amex : 800-289-6550

KIP

DocForm
DocRecord
DocSystem
DocTransform

Quite Imposing Plus

RSA DTPrint
RSA IPDS Print
RSA MIS Print
RSA Qdirect
RSA RDO Print
RSA Web CRD
1,424
Description
Solution
bizhub PRO 1050
bizhub PRO 920
bizhub PRO C6500
bizhub PRO C500
8050
7085
Notes :


Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution

Description
Solution
Notes :
1,425




Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution

Dispatcher
Doc Builder Pro
DocuBreeze
EFI Color Profiler
Fiery Free Form
FormKaster
Linkcom
MicroPress
OmniPagePro
PageScope Cabinet
PageScope Light
PageScope Net Care
PageScope Router
PageScope Workware
Paperport
Planet Press
PrintGroove
Recollect
Scantrip
Unify
1,426
Create!Print (v2.5)

ObjectifLune
Printshop Mail

Create!Form

Captaris : 520-320-7070
RightFax

Equitrac solutions

J amex : 800-289-6550

KIP

DocForm
DocRecord
DocSystem
DocTransform

Quite Imposing Plus

RSA DTPrint
RSA IPDS Print
RSA MIS Print
RSA Qdirect
RSA RDO Print
RSA Web CRD
Description
Solution
Description
Solution
username- sysadmin
password- password

username- joeuser
password- password
username- sueboss
password- password

username- psc
password- password
1,427
username- appadmin
password- password

username- wtell
password- sysadm
Description
Default end user usernames and passwords.
Solution
The Printgroove Serve component comes withtwo default usernames and passwords, both belonging to the HR group. The usernames are "sueboss" and
"joeuser" and both use the password of "password".
Description
1,428
PrintShop Mail
Description
Does PrintShop Mail* 4.0 support subset stapling?
Solution
True subset stapling is not supported by Konica's Printers. Printshop Mail 4.0 has a work around for printers that do not support this. To print with subset
stapling, go to the File menu, select Print. In the Print box under the "Record Range" area, check the box for "Split J ob Every ______ Pages", and fill in the
page amount for each set.
WARNING: If the variable data is different lengths and the amount of data that is placed on each page can vary, changing the amount of pages, this option
will not work the amount of pages per set can not change.
This work around is not true subset stapling; a large document is split into many individual jobs depending on the amount of pages selected. Because of this,
the more pages per set, the longer wait time will be incurred between jobs on the printer. For example, if the sets are set to eight pages the time between
when the first job finishes printing and the next job starting to print is 15 seconds.
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Test Synopsis evaluating PrintShop Mail* and providing printing speed results for the IP601, IP304, IP431, and IP421.
Solution
PrintShop Mail product information
PrintShop Mail Release Notes
PrintShop Mail User's Manual
Note: To view the above links, Acrobat* Reader must be installed. Acrobat Reader can be downloaded for free from the Adobe* Web site at:
Description
Current version of Printshop Mail.
Solution
When testing and supporting Printshop Mail 4.0 make sure you are using the latest build downloaded from [[www.printshopmail.com| URL
http://www.printshopmail.com]]. As of 11/20/02 the current build is 21. The printshop mail 4.0 versions on the disks that are being sent out are build 10.
There are several issues with this build that are fixed by downloading the current version off of the website.
Description
When using Printshop Mail subset feature, if there are more than 12 jobs in the queue, printing will pause for over a minute at the 12th job, then resume and
print the next 12 jobs and then pause again every 12 jobs.
Solution
CAUSE: This is caused by the way Microsoft* uses LPR ports to print.
SOLUTION: Set up the printer port to be RAW using port 9100.
Description
1,429
PrintShop Mail
How to make booklets with Printshop Mail and the C500.
Solution
To make booklets with Printshop Mail 5.0 and the C500, use an IP901 with system 6 loaded. Once the job has been created, go to file print and select the
system 6 printer. Under Record Range, put a check next to Split job every and then put in how many pages are in the booklet. Select the Properties button,
go to paper source and make sure that paper size is set to letter and print size is set to 11x17. Proceed to the finishing area and select Folding: Center Fold,
Duplex: Top to Top, Staple Mode: Center and then Booklet Maker: Saddle. Print the job. The number of records that are in the database will be how many
jobs are sent to the printer.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
How to print to Fierywith FreeForm from PrintShop Mail.
Solution
Use FreeForm to set up this job:
1. In PrintShop Mailselect Edit and Preferences.
2.Select the Print J ob Icon and under the technology there is the setting forFreeForm.
3.Then select a number that is not used; the default is 15.
4.Click OK.This sets of the Master form document.
5. Select File and Print.
6.Next, at the Send option, select Master data.
7.Set the number of records to 1.
8.Select Properties of the Driver.For this form select:
a. Layout
b.Duplex right to left
c.Finishing
d.Half fold
e.VDP
f.Create Form
9.Use'15' for the numberset when selectingFreeForm above.
10.Click OK.
11.Print the form.This sends the variable data using the form.
12.Select File and Print.
13.Then, at the send option, select Variable Data.
14.Select the number of records to print.
15.Select the properties button.
16.Set the parameters EXACTLY as when setting up the Masterform.If the variable data form does not match the master, thejob will not print with the options.
17.For this form select:
a.Layout
b.Duplex right to left
c.Finishing
d.Half fold
e.VDP
f.Use Form
18.Use '15' for the number set when selectingFreeForm above.
19.Click OK.
20.Click Print.
Description
1,430
PrintShop Mail
Solution
Description
PrintShop Mail* workstation and printer requirements.
Solution
PrintShop Mail minimum requirements in Microsoft* Windows environment:
1. Intel* Pentium processor.
2. Microsoft Windows 9x, 2000, NT or XP.
3. 16MB of RAM.
4. 50MB of free hard disk space.
5. Monitor with at least 8-bit color at 800x600 resolution or higher.
6. Full version of Adobe* Acrobat 3.x or later.
PrintShop Mail minimum requirements in Macintosh* environment:
1. Power Macintosh or newer.
2. Macintosh OS version 7.6 or higher.
3. 16MB of RAM.
4. 10MB of free hard disk space.
Print Controller requirements:
The print controller must have PostScript* interpreter installed. PrintShop Mail does not support PCL* printing.
1,431
Prism
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
How to exclude an asterisk that is displayed at the end of a barcode when mapped to a form.
Solution
Use is the following piece of script to do a search and replace on the text in the barcode (this is a single line of code even though it may appear wrapped):
CurrentForm["Barcode1"].Text =System.Text.RegularExpressions.Regex.Replace(CurrentForm["Barcode1"].Text,"\\\\*","");
Description
Solution

Dispatcher
Doc Builder Pro
DocuBreeze
EFI Color Profiler
Fiery Free Form
FormKaster
Linkcom
MicroPress
OmniPagePro
PageScope Cabinet
PageScope Light
1,432
Prism
PageScope Net Care
PageScope Router
PageScope Workware
Paperport
Planet Press
PrintGroove
Recollect
Scantrip
Unify
Create!Print (v2.5)

ObjectifLune
Printshop Mail

Create!Form

Captaris : 520-320-7070
RightFax

Equitrac solutions

J amex : 800-289-6550

KIP

DocForm
DocRecord
DocSystem
DocTransform

Quite Imposing Plus

RSA DTPrint
RSA IPDS Print
RSA MIS Print
RSA Qdirect
RSA RDO Print
RSA Web CRD
1,433
PRISM DocForm V3
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution

Dispatcher
Doc Builder Pro
DocuBreeze
EFI Color Profiler
Fiery Free Form
FormKaster
Linkcom
MicroPress
OmniPagePro
PageScope Cabinet
PageScope Light
PageScope Net Care
PageScope Router
PageScope Workware
Paperport
Planet Press
PrintGroove
Recollect
Scantrip
1,434
PRISM DocForm V3
Unify
Create!Print (v2.5)

ObjectifLune
Printshop Mail

Create!Form

Captaris : 520-320-7070
RightFax

Equitrac solutions

J amex : 800-289-6550

KIP

DocForm
DocRecord
DocSystem
DocTransform

Quite Imposing Plus

RSA DTPrint
RSA IPDS Print
RSA MIS Print
RSA Qdirect
RSA RDO Print
RSA Web CRD
Description
Installation error: A required DLL file, MSVCP60.dll was not found.
Solution
CAUSE: Attempting to install PRISMDocForm on a MicrosoftWindows 98 platform, which is not supported.

SOLUTION:DocForm needs to be installed either on MicrosoftWindows 2000, XP or Windows 2003. Try to reinstallon one of these supported operating
systems.
Description
Installation error: 1920 - Service DocFormSvc Failed to start. Verify that you have sufficient privileges to start system services.
Solution
CAUSE: The latest updates toMicrosoft.NET Framework are not installed.

SOLUTION: Make sure the latest updates toMicrosoft.NET Framework are loaded by using the MicrosoftUpdate service or MSDN Download
Center . Once the updates are installed, reboot and try the PRISMDocForm installation again.
Description
PRISMDocForm version 3 is available.
Solution
1,435
PRISM DocForm V3
See attached Marketing Bulletin#04-GB-108 for details.
1,436
PRISM DocForm V4
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution

Dispatcher
Doc Builder Pro
DocuBreeze
EFI Color Profiler
Fiery Free Form
FormKaster
Linkcom
MicroPress
OmniPagePro
PageScope Cabinet
PageScope Light
PageScope Net Care
PageScope Router
PageScope Workware
Paperport
Planet Press
PrintGroove
Recollect
Scantrip
1,437
PRISM DocForm V4
Unify
Create!Print (v2.5)

ObjectifLune
Printshop Mail

Create!Form

Captaris : 520-320-7070
RightFax

Equitrac solutions

J amex : 800-289-6550

KIP

DocForm
DocRecord
DocSystem
DocTransform

Quite Imposing Plus

RSA DTPrint
RSA IPDS Print
RSA MIS Print
RSA Qdirect
RSA RDO Print
RSA Web CRD
Description
Installation error: A required DLL file, MSVCP60.dll was not found.
Solution
CAUSE: Attempting to install PRISMDocForm on a MicrosoftWindows 98 platform, which is not supported.

SOLUTION:DocForm needs to be installed either on MicrosoftWindows 2000, XP or Windows 2003. Try to reinstallon one of these supported operating
systems.
Description
Installation error: 1920 - Service DocFormSvc Failed to start. Verify that you have sufficient privileges to start system services.
Solution
CAUSE: The latest updates toMicrosoft.NET Framework are not installed.

SOLUTION: Make sure the latest updates toMicrosoft.NET Framework are loaded by using the MicrosoftUpdate service or MSDN Download
Center . Once the updates are installed, reboot and try the PRISMDocForm installation again.
Description
How to change the printer in PrismDocForm.
Solution
1,438
PRISM DocForm V4
To change the printer in PrismDocForm, perform the following:
1. Make a backup of the existing projects.
2.Select Locally installed printer only. When installing the printer driver, 'Locally attached' was selected, not 'Network'.
3. Select Outputs from the menu.
a. Select Edit output.A list of output definitions will be displayed. Select the one to bechanged.
b. A screen will pop up; click the Select Printer button.A drop down list will be displayed on the side that contains installed windows printer drivers.
c. Select the desired printer and click OK.
4.Save the setting by choosing File => Save, and save it in C:\Program Files\Docform\Server\Projects.
Description
When printing a form with a PDF background, the output comes out pixelated and low-quality.
Solution
CAUSE: This is a known issue with PrismDocForm version 4.0, and has been resolvedin version 4.2 of DocForm.
SOLUTION: Open the output properties within DocForm and enable the "Use Print Optimization" option. This option allows DocForm to gather
information about the selected printer driver. Once this has been done, disable the "Use Print Optimization" option. Now that DocForm has the printer driver
information, it will maintain the quality of the original PDF file and it should print out fine.
Note :A printer that has been added directly over a shared network will not be able to use the "Use Print Optimization" option within DocForm. Instead,
add the printer over a TCP/IP port andthe "Use Print Optimization" option will be able to be used.
Description
PrismDocForm version 4 system requirements.
Solution
PrismDocForm version 4 runs in a MicrosoftWindows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows 2003 Serverenvironment.
DocForm v4 supports a TCP/IP network, such as MicrosoftWindows networking.
Minimum Requirements are:
1. CPU -Intel Pentium IV,2GHz
2. Total RAM - 1GB
3. Disk Space -100MB free disk space (for Program files) andstorage space of 200MB (for archiving input files and generating temporary files)
4. AdobeAcrobatDistiller (6.0 or higher) for PDF output
5. Printer - any LAN-attached printer with a MicrosoftWindows-compatible driver
Description
Troubleshooting the PrismDocForm version 4 service.
Solution
Please refer to the attached document for troubleshooting details.
Description
Printer Port Checklist.
Solution
Please refer to the attached document forthechecklistdetails.
1,439
PRISM DocRecord
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution

Dispatcher
Doc Builder Pro
DocuBreeze
EFI Color Profiler
Fiery Free Form
FormKaster
Linkcom
MicroPress
OmniPagePro
PageScope Cabinet
PageScope Light
PageScope Net Care
PageScope Router
PageScope Workware
Paperport
Planet Press
PrintGroove
Recollect
Scantrip
1,440
PRISM DocRecord
Unify
Create!Print (v2.5)

ObjectifLune
Printshop Mail

Create!Form

Captaris : 520-320-7070
RightFax

Equitrac solutions

J amex : 800-289-6550

KIP

DocForm
DocRecord
DocSystem
DocTransform

Quite Imposing Plus

RSA DTPrint
RSA IPDS Print
RSA MIS Print
RSA Qdirect
RSA RDO Print
RSA Web CRD
1,441
PRISM DocSystem
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution

Dispatcher
Doc Builder Pro
DocuBreeze
EFI Color Profiler
Fiery Free Form
FormKaster
Linkcom
MicroPress
OmniPagePro
PageScope Cabinet
PageScope Light
PageScope Net Care
PageScope Router
PageScope Workware
Paperport
Planet Press
PrintGroove
Recollect
Scantrip
1,442
PRISM DocSystem
Unify
Create!Print (v2.5)

ObjectifLune
Printshop Mail

Create!Form

Captaris : 520-320-7070
RightFax

Equitrac solutions

J amex : 800-289-6550

KIP

DocForm
DocRecord
DocSystem
DocTransform

Quite Imposing Plus

RSA DTPrint
RSA IPDS Print
RSA MIS Print
RSA Qdirect
RSA RDO Print
RSA Web CRD
1,443
PS3000
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
1,444
PS5000C
Description
Does Infotrieve Ariel4.1 or 4.1.1 works with MicrosoftWindows 2003?
Solution
Ariel4.1 or 4.1.1 is supported by MicrosoftWindows 2000 and XP, but is not officially supported by MicrosoftWindows 2003.
Notes :
1. Batch scanning does not work with Ariel4.1 or 4.1.1.
2. Refer to the attached document for specifications. To view the document(s), MicrosoftWordor WordViewer must be installed. WordViewer 2003
(11.7MB) can be obtained free from Microsoftat the following URL;
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Release of PS5000C face up color book scanner.
Solution
See Marketing Bulletin 04-GB-089 for details.
Description
What versions of SCSI does MicrosoftWindows Vista support?
Solution
Windows Vista does not support any SCSI interface device.
Description
Is MicrosoftWindows Vista supported?
Solution
MicrosoftWindows Vista is supported on this unit.
Note : The scanner interface must be USB, as the SCSI interface is not supported for MicrosoftWindows Vista.
Description
ISIS driver availability.
Solution
An ISIS driver for the PS5000C is not available. Furthermore,there are no plans for the development of this type of driver in the future.
The software interface for the PS5000C is a TWAIN driver.
Please refere to attached PS5000C brochure for additional information.To viewthe PDF, Adobe Readermust be installed. Adobe Readercan be
1,445
PS5000C
Description
What is the part number for the lamp modification kit?
Solution
Lamp modificatioin kit (p/n 7119-0176-01).
Description
Solution
Notes :
1,446
PS7000
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution
Description
Is the gain adjustment jig the same for both planetary scanners (PS3000 and PS7000)?
Solution
Both Planetary Scanners use the same gain adjustment jig (p/n 0814-7901-01).
Description
What is the BTU rating for the PS7000?
Solution
The BTU rating for the PS7000 and its different versions are listed below:
1) PS7000 PC Version
Standby 130 BTU
Scanning 2700 BTU
2) PS7000 PR Version (Scanner & MSP3000 Printer)
1,447
PS7000
1) Scanner
Standby 130 BTU
Scanning 2350 BTU
2) Printer
Standby 550 BTU
Scanning 1600 BTU
3) Total
Standby 680 BTU
Scanning 3950 BTU
Description
Does the PS7000 support printer sharing in the direct print mode?
Solution
SOLUTION:The PS7000 does not support printer sharing in the direct print mode.
Description
Does the TWAIN driver 2.0 support "Batch Scanning"?
Solution
We recommend using any TWAIN-compliant software for the scanners, but the basic TWAIN driver itself does NOTsupport "Batch scanning". For batch
scanning we recommend using PageScope Cabinet software.
Description
How to enable grayscale scanning on a PS7000 with a serial number lower than 2196.
Solution
To enable grayscale scanning install the SCSI Memory Kit, part number 7660-8180-1, and Grayscale Memory Board, part number 4614-331.
Description
"Invalid Field in Parameter List" error message is displayed on the PC after the TWAIN Driver 2.0 was installed.
Solution
The error "Invalid Field in Parameter List" can be corrected by installing firmware version 14 or higher.
1,448
Recollect
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
'Scanner problem encountered. Check the scanner cables and connections' message when using a SCSI scanner, but unable to scan.
Solution
CAUSE: SCSI connections can be very temperamental at times.
SOLUTION: The following recommendations may resolve this error:
1. Use the best SCSI cables and connectors.
2. The shorter the cable the better.
3. Eliminate unnecessary cable gender ad adapter connectors.
4. The SCSI scanner must be powered-on before connecting PC is powered ON.
5. ISIS* drivers require system level drivers.
6. Add the Aspi drivers for the SCSI card to the config.sys file if required.
Description
Whenever scanning (or importing) into a particular drawer the following error occurs 'Could not created document. Could be due to insufficient memory.'
There is plenty of drive space and RAM on the PC.
Solution
CAUSE: This could be caused due to drive failure, cross-linked files, fragmented drive or drawer index problem.
SOLUTION: Perform the following steps.
1. Run SCANDISK on drive where drawer is located.
2. Run DEFRAG against the drive where drawer is located.
3. Run recondition against the drawer being scanned/imported.
4. The above steps will usually correct any problem. If problem persists, create a new drawer.
5. Create a new folder for the new drawer.
6. Scan (or import) to verify it is working without a problem
7. Drag and drop the folder(s) from the problem drawer to the new drawer.
8. The older drawer can then be deleted.
Description
'Cannot scan/delete into this document. Some other user may be using this document. (Lock Error)' message. Cannot scan, move or delete documents.
There are no other Recollect* users on the system at the time of the error message. NetWare* 4.11 is in use.
Solution
CAUSE: This error is caused by Novell* Client32 V2.11.
SOLUTION: Upgrade to the latest Novell Client32. If the latest Novell Client32 is being used and the error still occurs, ensure a Preferred Tree and Context
name are specified in the Novell NetWare Client32 properties (located in Control Panel =Network). Exit and re-start the PC.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
1,449
Recollect
one.
Description
Administrator or users are not seen during installation when prompted to add users in a Recollect* LAN (NetWare*) environment.
Solution
CAUSE: The bindery context is not set correctly on the server.
SOLUTION: Ensure the bindery context is set correctly on the server.
Description
Cannot add users to Recollect* in a Recollect LAN (NetWare*) environment.
Solution
CAUSE: Do not have the proper rights.
SOLUTION: Logg in as Administrator for Novell* NetWare 4.1x or supervisor or supervisor equivalent for Novell NetWare 3.12.
Note: [[Discontinuance of Technical Support for NetWare 3.12 by Novell.| FILE V:\text\novell.txt NEW]]
Description
In a Recollect LAN (NetWare*) environment, do the drive mappings have to be in the login scripts?
Solution
The drive mappings have to be in the login scripts, otherwise environmental variables are not set properly.
Description
Only the Recollect* Help icon is created in a Recollect LAN (NetWare*) environment.
Solution
CAUSE: Workstation or server needs to be re-booted.
SOLUTION: Reboot the workstation, then try running rec_desk.exe again. If this does not work, reboot the server.
Description
Not all Recollect* modules load in a Recollect LAN (NetWare*) environment.
Solution
CAUSE: The rec_load statement in the autoexec.ncf is not being properly loaded.
SOLUTION: Move the rec_load statement in the autoexec.ncf to the bottom of the file.
1,450
RFC11
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
How can the Print Counter be displayed?
Solution
ThePrint Counterof the RFC11 can be displayed using the following steps:
1) Press the Exposure Mode Selection (Auto)Key, Multi-Print Key and the Clear/Stop Key at the same time and hold them down until the S is displayed.
2) Press the Multi-Print Key until the F is displayed.
3) Press the Lighter Exposure Adjustment Key until the3 is displayed.
4) With F3 being shown on the display press the Start Key to display thePrint Counter.
SPECIAL NOTE : Solution contribution by Dave Bruni, Workgroup/SSD
1,451
RFC12
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
1,452
RFC15A
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
1,453
RFC15M
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
1,454
RFC16
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
1,455
RFC20A/M
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Part number for the potentiometer on the control box.
Solution
Potentiometer on the control box (p/n 1354-6018-01).
1,456
RFC21
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Part number for the potentiometer on the control box.
Solution
The part number for the potentiometer on the control box is 1354-6018-01.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Part number for the main control board (PWB-A).
Solution
Main CB (p/n 1371-0766-11).
Description
Service and Parts Manuals.
Solution
There are no service or parts manuals for the RFC21. Use the RFC20 Service Manual, and see bulletin REF.NO. 003 for the difference in parts for the
RFC20 vs the RFC21.
Note : The major difference is the PWB-A (p/n 1371-0766-11).
1,457
RFC22
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
1,458
RFC9B
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
1,459
RP600Z
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Part number for the projection lamp (LA1).
Solution
Projection lamp (p/n 0870-6511-01).
1,460
RP603Z
Description
Solution
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Part number for the PWB-A.
Solution
PWB-A (p/n 0876-0751-09).
Description
Where to find the total meter count?
Solution
To find the total meter count, perform the following:
1. Press Clear/Stop Key and the Screen Brightness Select Key together at the same time.
2. Press the Multi-print Kkey till Ad is displayed on the display screen.
3. Press the Auto Key.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
What is a C7 error?
Solution
The C7 error is an ATDC failure.
1,461
RP603Z
Description
Installation of the J amex Model 4300 Coin-Op box.
Solution
See Bulletin 5127 for details.
Description
How to enable Auto Skew Rotation.
Solution
To enable Auto Skew Rotation, enter the Option installation setting 05 and change from d0 to d1.
Description
Does the developer come standard in the Imaging Unit?
Solution
The developer/starter (p/n 8910-412) must be ordered separately.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
1,462
Scan Direct
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
1,463
Scantrip
Description
When using Scantrip for Macintosh* OSX (version 10.2.x) , 'Error detected in CMDSocket Got Server Error 425/Can't open data connection' message is
indicated.
Solution
CAUSE: The Macintosh personal firewall was enabled on the workstation.
SOLUTION: To disable the personal firewall, perform the following:
1. Click on the Apple.
2. Click on the System Preferences.
3. Click on Sharing icon in the 'Internet +Network' row.
4. Click on Firewall tab.
5. Click on the Start button to disable the firewall.
Description
Scantrip utility information.
Solution
Konica has developed an FTP download utility called Scantrip. This utility allows downloading of files from the hard drive to the workstation.
Note: Scanning utilities (Scantrip and Scantrip Admin) are now posted on the [[Konica SEC website| URL http://www.sec.konicabt.com/main.html]].
Description
Scantrip Admin utility information.
Solution
Scantrip Admin is an enterprise-level administration tool for Konica's Scan-to-Disk feature. Groups of images from multiple scanner/print engines can be
retrieved and deleted with Scantrip Admin. The Scan-to-Disk activity can be checked and the information saved to file for audit purposes. Scantrip Admin
can even be used to perform a back up of the Scan-to-Disk file system.
Konica's Scan-to-Disk technology allows scanning of documents from the print engine's platen glass or the document feeder directly to file where it is stored in
a mailbox on the print engine's internal hard disk. For details on Konica's Scan-to-Disk technology, please refer to the Konica print engine's documentation.
Scantrip Admin functions as a general user tool as well as an administration tool. It allows retrieval and deletion of image files (created with the print engine's
Scan-to-Disk feature) from a personal mailbox. These user-level operations can be performed manually or automatically (with the Auto-Polling feature).
Note: Scanning utilities (Scantrip and Scantrip Admin) are now posted on the [[Konica SEC website| URL http://www.sec.konicabt.com/main.html]].
Description
How to obtain the verification key for the demo version of Scantrip for the Macintosh* version 2.0.
Solution
The Scantrip for the Macintosh application will not run without an unlock code. Start Scantrip for the Macintosh for the first time and the program registration
screen is displayed. Write down the lock code and go to the SEC web site at http://www.sec.konicabt.com. Click on the REGISTER button and provide the
requested information and the lock code. The unlock code will be E-mailed. Enter the unlock code and Scantrip for the Macintosh will start.
Note: The license is per machine and not transferable.
Description
The Auto-Polling function in Scantrip is not saved, even though 'Save Current Settings' is checked.
Solution
CAUSE: When Scantrip is closed, it checks to see if the 'Save Current Settings' is enabled. If it is enabled, Scantrip will save all settings except the
Auto-Polling checkbox setting.
SOLUTION: This is correct operation for Scantrip. Due to the numerous requests, the SEC is now looking into adding this feature into the next version of
Scantrip. Please continue to monitor [[Konica SEC website| URL http://www.sec.konicabt.com/main.html]] for the availability of the new Scantrip version.
Description
Solution
1,464
Scantrip

identify the link.
Description
Is Scantrip or Scantrip Admin compatible with CitrixMetaframe or MicrosoftWindows Terminal Server?
Solution
Scantrip and Scantrip Admin v1.5 are not currently compatible with CitrixMetaframe or MicrosoftTerminal Server based on the licensing method being
used. The program can only be licensed for one user on the server. As the Adminstrator is the only individual that can install programs on the server, the
Administrator is the only user that will be able to use Scantrip. The SEC department is working on a solution for this issue.
Description
Unable to use the admin tools in Scantrip Admin 1.0 utility.
Solution
CAUSE: Scantrip Admin version 1.0 is no longer supported.
SOLUTION: The current version 1.73 can be downloaded from [[Konica SEC website| URL http://www.sec.konicabt.com/main.html]] and registered on a
single PC or on multiple PCs.
Scantrip Admin is an enterprise-level administration tool for Konica's Scan-to-Disk feature. Groups of images from multiple scanner/print engines can be
retrieved and deleted with Scantrip Admin. The Scan-to-Disk activity can be checked and the information saved to file for audit purposes. Scantrip Admin
can even be used to perform a back up of the Scan-to-Disk file system.
Konica's Scan-to-Disk technology allows scanning of documents from the print engine's platen glass or the document feeder directly to file where it is stored in
a mailbox on the print engine's internal hard disk. For details on Konica's Scan-to-Disk technology, please refer to the Konica print engine's documentation.
Scantrip Admin functions as a general user tool as well as an administration tool. It allows retrieval and deletion of image files (created with the print engine's
Scan-to-Disk feature) from a personal mailbox. These user-level operations can be performed manually or automatically (with the Auto-Polling feature).
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
1,465
Setup Utility for Metaframe
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
1,466
Unify
Description
Unify* is unable to communicate with the KN302 or KN302A on an IP601 or IP601M.
Solution
CAUSE: The firmware version on the KN302A is at an incompatible level and unable to communicate properly with the AHT Unify server.
SOLUTION: Verify that the KN302A is at firmware level 5.72a.
Description
How to install PPD and printer driver files onto Macintosh*.
Solution
To install PPD and printer driver files onto Macintosh, perform the following:
1. Insert the Unify software CD into the CD ROM drive of the Macintosh client.
2. From the hard drive, open the directory System Folder/Extensions/Printer Descriptions.
3. From the CD ROM, open Drivers/Mac.
4. Copy all the PPD files in the Drivers/Mac directory to the Macintosh Printer Descriptions folder.
Description
How to print LPR on mainframe to Unify*.
Solution
Turn on TCP/IP* print services on the Unify machine. Add a print driver - any will do. Share it out (this name will be the LPR port name on the mainframe).
Note: Make sure the print driver is pointing to the queue2: port on the Unify machine.
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Does every 7075 or FORCE 75 in a Unify* printing cluster need to have an IP601 connected?
Solution
Each 7075 or FORCE 75 main body in a Unify cluster must be attached to an IP601.
Description
How to generate Book Files with AHT Unify* Server from the Submit J ob window?
Solution
To generate Book Files with AHT Unify Server from the Submit J ob window, perform the following:
1. Launch and access the system interface using your Web browser.
2. Click on the Submit J ob Hyperlink. The Submit J ob window appears
3. Click on Browse to select your job. The choose file window appears.
4. Locate the document you wish to generate into a book and click Open. The file will appear in the Submit J ob window File Name field.
5. Click on Finishing. Click in the Generate Book menu and select Yes.
6. Modify job options for the file if desired.
7. Click on Print.
1,467
Unify
8. The document will print. At the same time, it is saved as a book file in the server under the directory C:\Program Files\DOD Server\Books.
Description
J obs leave the Microsoft* Windows queue but do not hit Unify*.
Solution
CAUSE: The AHT service process was disabled.
SOLUTION: Enable the service process.
Description
What equipment is supported by AHT Unify*?
Solution
AHT Unify supports the following equipment:
Machines: 7075 and FORCE 75
IP Units: 601 and 601M
KN Cards: KN 301, KN 302 and KN 302A
NT 4.0 Server
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
What is Unify* Konica Cluster printing and how does it operate?
Solution
Unify is a browser-based printing system that runs on a specially equipped Microsoft* Windows NT 4.0 server. Clients attach to the server via a "Unify" print
queue, which opens a browser to the server. Print job features and variations of job splitting can be selected through this medium. The features on the AHT
server are based on the IP601 PostScript* driver allowing users to group from two to ten Konica 7075 or FORCE 75 printers in a cluster for higher print
production output.
Large print jobs can be split and sent to multiple printers simultaneously in order to reduce printing time.
There are two basic ways to print using AHT:
1. Open a browser to the AHT server. Set the print parameters and browse to the file to be printed. This is the method that must be used when printing from
a Macintosh* environment. This method cannot be used to print Microsoft Office documents (PostScript* errors occur).
2. Print from the native application (Word, Acrobat*) to the "Unify" printer in the printers folder. This will automatically open a browser to the AHT server
where print job parameters can be selected. This method must be used when printing Microsoft Office documents.
Unify Konica Cluster printing is recommended for use with the FORCE 75 and 7075 (IP601 using the PostScript driver version 1.22a) on the following
platforms:
MS Windows 98 workstation
MS Windows NT4 workstation
MS Windows 2000 workstation (Internet Explorer 6 must be installed or the browser will not open when the Unify printer is selected)
Macintosh environment printing was successful. However, printing is accomplished via browser (not a Unify port) using the file dump method (point
to/select the file to be printed).
1,468
Unify
AS/400 (via TCP/IP* printing services) is also supported.
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
1,469
UniMessage Pro Single User version
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
1,470
Web JetAdmin Plugin
Description
Solution

identify the link.
Description
Solution
Download Selector.
one.
Description
Solution


1,471

Top 10 Solutions

Transféré par

Informations du document

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Top 10 Solutions

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

TOP 10 SOLUTIONS

Copyright 2008, Konica Minolta Business Solutions U.S.A., Inc.

Vous aimerez peut-être aussi